20-F

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20549

FORM 20-F

(Mark One)

¨	REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

þ	ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2025

OR

¨	TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from _______________ to _______________

OR

¨	SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report _______________

Commission file number	Barclays Bank PLC	1-10257

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)

England

(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)

1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, England

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

KATHRYN ROBERTS , +44 (0)20 7116 3170, [email protected]

1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, England

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

As a wholly-owned subsidiary of Barclays PLC, which is a reporting company under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, Barclays Bank

PLC meets the conditions set forth in General Instruction I(1)(a) and (b) of Form 10-K, as applied to annual reports on Form 20-F, and

is therefore filing this Form 20-F with a reduced disclosure format.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Title of Each Class	Trading Symbol(s)	Name of Each Exchange<br><br>On Which Registered
iPath® Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM ETN	DJP	NYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Carbon ETN	GRN	NYSE Arca
iPath® Series B S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETNs	VXX	CBOE BZX Exchange
iPath® Series B S&P 500 VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM ETNs	VXZ	CBOE BZX Exchange
iPath® Select MLP ETN	ATMP	CBOE BZX Exchange

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period

covered by the annual report.

£1 ordinary shares	2,342,558,515
€100 preference shares	Nil
$100 preference shares	58,133

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

Yes þ    No ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to

Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.

Yes ¨    No þ

Note – Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities

Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities

Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports),

and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

Yes þ    No ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted

pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the

registrant was required to submit such files).

Yes þ   No ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or an emerging

growth company. See definition of “large accelerated filer”, “accelerated filer” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the

Exchange Act:

Large Accelerated Filer	¨	Accelerated Filer	¨	Non-Accelerated Filer	þ	Emerging growth company	¨

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the

registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards†

provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act. ¨

† The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to

its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed a report on and attestation to its management’s assessment of the

effectiveness of its internal control over financial reporting under Section 404(b) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act (15 U.S.C. 7262(b)) by the

registered public accounting firm that prepared or issued its audit report. ¨

If securities are registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act, indicate by check mark whether the financial statements of the

registrant included in the filing reflect the correction of an error to previously issued financial statements. ¨

Indicate by check mark whether any of those error corrections are restatements that required a recovery analysis of incentive- based

compensation received by any of the registrant's executive officers during the relevant recovery period pursuant to §240.10D-1(b). ¨

*Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

U.S. GAAP ¨

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board þ

Other ¨

*If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the

registrant has elected to follow:

Item 17 ¨

Item 18 ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange

Act).

Yes ¨    No þ

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the

Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.

Yes ¨    No ¨

SEC Form 20-F Cross reference information

Form 20-F item number	Page and caption references<br><br>in this document*
1Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers	Not applicable
2Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable	Not applicable
3Key Information
A.Reserved
B.Capitalization and indebtedness	Not applicable
C.Reason for the offer and use of proceeds	Not applicable
D.Risk factors	50-70
4.Information on the Company
A.History and development of the company	Omitted
B.Business overview	ii (Market and other data), 53-55, 154-170, 190-192 (Note<br><br>2), 312-315
C.Organizational structure	263-268 (Notes 31 and 32), 278-282, 310-311
D.Property, plants and equipment	230-233 (Notes 18 and 19)
4AUnresolved staff comments	Not applicable
5Operating and Financial Review and Prospects
A.Operating results	50-70, 61, 71-83, 142, 154-170, 208-215 (Note 13), 295
B.Liquidity and capital resources	Omitted
C.Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.	Omitted
D.Trend information	50-70, 295-296
E.Critical Accounting Estimates	Not applicable
6Directors, Senior Management and Employees
A.Directors and senior management	Omitted
B.Compensation	Omitted
C.Board practice	2, 7-10, 12-13
D.Employees	Omitted
E.Share ownership	Omitted
F.Erroneously awarded compensation	Not applicable
7Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions
A.Major shareholders	Omitted
B.Related party transactions	Omitted
C.Interests of experts and counsel	Not applicable
8Financial Information
A.Consolidated statements and other financial information	172-284 (Notes 1-41), 286
B.Significant changes	Not applicable
9The Offer and Listing
A.Offer and listing details	Not applicable
B.Plan of distribution	Not applicable
C.Market	Not applicable
D.Selling shareholders	Not applicable
E.Dilution	Not applicable
F.Expenses of the issue	Not applicable
10Additional Information
A.Share capital	Not applicable
B.Memorandum and Articles of Association	285-287
C.Material contracts	Not applicable
D.Exchange controls	292
E.Taxation	288-291
F.Dividends and paying assets	Not applicable
G.Statement by experts	Not applicable
H.Documents on display	292
I.Subsidiary information	263-264 (Note 31), 278-282 (Note 40)
J.        Annual Report to Security Holders	Not applicable
11Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk	47-170, 207-228 (Notes 12-16)
---	---
12Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities
A.Debt Securities	Not applicable
B.Warrants and Right	Not applicable
C.Other Securities	Not applicable
D.American Depositary Share	Not applicable
13Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and Delinquencies	Not applicable
14Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds	Not applicable
15Controls and Procedures
A.Disclosure controls and procedures	292
B.Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting	11-12
C.Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm	Not applicable
D.Changes in internal control over financial reporting	12
16AAudit Committee Financial Expert	Omitted
16BCode of Ethics	Omitted
16CPrincipal Accountant Fees and Services	18-19, 276 (Note 38)
16DExemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees	Not applicable
16EPurchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers	17
16FChange in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant	Not applicable
16GCorporate Governance	2-15
16HMine safety disclosure	Not applicable
16IDisclosure regarding foreign jurisdictions that prevent inspections	Not applicable
16JInsider Trading Policies	294
16KCybersecurity	40-42, 62-63, 147-149
17Financial Statements	(See Item 8)
18Financial Statements	Not applicable
19Exhibits	Exhibit Index

*Certain items are indicated as omitted as Barclays Bank PLC is a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays PLC, which is a reporting

company under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, and meets the conditions set forth in General Instruction I(1)(a) and (b) of

Form 10-K, as applied to annual reports on Form 20-F, and is therefore filing this Form 20-F with a reduced disclosure format.

Notes

The term Barclays Bank Group refers to Barclays Bank PLC together with its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, the

income statement analysis compares the year ended 31 December 2025 to the corresponding twelve months of 2024 and

balance sheet analysis as at 31 December 2025 with comparatives relating to 31 December 2024. The abbreviations ‘£m’

and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Pounds Sterling respectively; the abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’

represent millions and thousands of millions of US Dollars respectively; and the abbreviations ‘€m’ and ‘€bn’ represent

millions and thousands of millions of Euros respectively.

Forward-looking statements

This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities

Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the

Barclays Bank Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and

that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the

forward-looking statements. Forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to

historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as ‘may’, ‘will’, ‘seek’, ‘continue’, ‘aim’,

‘anticipate’, ‘target’, ‘projected’, ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘goal’, ‘believe’, ‘achieve’ or other words of similar

meaning. Forward-looking statements can be made in writing but also may be made verbally by directors, officers and

employees of the Barclays Bank Group (including during management presentations) in connection with this document.

Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements or guidance regarding or relating to the

Barclays Bank Group’s future financial position, business strategy, income levels, costs, assets and liabilities, impairment

charges, provisions, capital leverage and other regulatory ratios, capital distributions (including policy on dividends and

share buybacks), return on tangible equity, projected levels of growth in banking and financial markets, industry trends, any

commitments and targets (including sustainability-related commitments and targets), plans and objectives for future

operations, International Financial Reporting Standards ('IFRS') and other statements that are not historical or current facts.

By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and

circumstances. Forward-looking statements speak only as at the date on which they are made. Forward-looking statements

may be affected by a number of factors, including, without limitation: changes in legislation, regulations, governmental and

regulatory policies, expectations and actions, voluntary codes of practices and the interpretation thereof, changes in IFRS

and other accounting standards, including practices with regard to the interpretation and application thereof and emerging

and developing sustainability reporting standards (including emissions accounting methodologies); changes in tax laws and

practice; the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations; the Barclays Bank Group’s

ability along with governments and other stakeholders to measure, manage and mitigate the impacts of climate change

effectively or navigate inconsistencies and conflicts in the manner in which climate policy is implemented in the regions

where the Barclays Bank Group operates, including as a result of the adoption of rules and regulations taking a different or

opposing position on sustainability matters, or other forms of governmental and regulatory action against sustainability

policies; environmental, social and geopolitical risks and incidents and similar events beyond the Barclays Bank Group’s

control; financial crime; the impact of competition in the banking and financial services industry; capital, liquidity, leverage

and other regulatory rules and requirements applicable to past, current and future periods; UK, US, Eurozone and global

macroeconomic and business conditions, including inflation; volatility in credit and capital markets; market related risks

such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; reforms to benchmark interest rates and indices; higher or

lower asset valuations; changes in credit ratings of any entity within the Barclays Bank Group or any securities issued by it;

changes in counterparty risk; changes in consumer behaviour; changes in trade policy, including the imposition of tariffs or

other protectionist measures; the direct and indirect consequences of the conflicts in Ukraine and the Middle East on

European and global macroeconomic conditions, political stability and financial markets; changes in US legislation and

policy; developments in the UK’s relationship with the European Union; the risk of cyber attacks, information or security

breaches, technology failures or operational disruptions and any subsequent impact on the Barclays Bank Group’s

reputation, business or operations; the use of new technology, including artificial intelligence; the Barclays Bank Group’s

ability to access funding; and the success of acquisitions, disposals, joint ventures and other strategic transactions. A

number of these factors are beyond the Barclays Bank Group’s control. As a result, the Barclays Bank Group’s actual financial

position, results, financial and non-financial metrics or performance measures or its ability to meet commitments and

targets may differ materially from the statements or guidance set forth in the Barclays Bank Group’s forward-looking

statements.  Additional risks and factors which may impact the Barclays Bank Group’s future financial condition and

performance are identified in Barclays Bank PLC’s filings with the US Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC")

(including, without limitation, Barclays Bank PLC’s Annual Report on Form 20-F for the financial year ended 31 December

2025), which are available on the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov.

Subject to the Barclays Bank Group's obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of any relevant jurisdiction,

including, without limitation, the UK and the US, in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no

obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements, whether as a result of new information, future events

or otherwise.

References to Strategic Report

This document contains references throughout to the Barclays Bank PLC Strategic Report and Pillar 3 Report. References to

the aforementioned reports are made for information purposes only, and information found in said reports is not

incorporated by reference into this document.

Market and other data

This document contains information, including statistical data, about certain Barclays markets and its competitive position.

Except as otherwise indicated, this information is taken or derived from Datastream and other external sources. Barclays

cannot guarantee the accuracy of information taken from external sources, or that, in respect of internal estimates, a third

party using different methods would obtain the same estimates as Barclays.

Uses of Internet addresses

This document contains inactive textual addresses to internet websites operated by us and third parties. Reference to such

websites is made for information purposes only, and information found at such websites is not incorporated by reference

into this document.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	1

Governance

Contents

Our corporate governance processes and the role they play in supporting the delivery of our strategy.

Governance		Page
	•Governance contents	2
	•Directors’ report	16
	•Other governance	40
	•Colleagues	43
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	2
---	---

Governance

Corporate governance statement

The Board

Details of the Directors who served during the financial year ended 31 December 2025 are set out in the table below,

together with the composition of each of the Board’s Committees.

We welcomed Mary Mack to the Board as a Non-Executive Director with effect from 1 June 2025. Diane Schueneman

stepped down from the Board with effect from 31 January 2025 and Mary Francis is to retire from the Board with effect from

6 May 2026. The Board is grateful to both Diane and Mary for their invaluable contribution to the Board during their

respective tenures.

	Board	Nominations<br><br>Committee	Audit<br><br>Committee	Risk Committee	Remuneration<br><br>Committee	Sustainability<br><br>Committee
Nigel Higgins1<br><br>Chairman of the Board	C	C			M	C
Robert Berry<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M		M	C		M
Anna Cross<br><br>Executive Director	M
Dawn Fitzpatrick<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M			M	M	M
Mary Francis4<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M				C	M
Mary Mack2<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M
Marc Moses<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M		M	M
Brian Shea<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M
C.S. Venkatakrishnan<br><br>Executive Director	M					M
Julia Wilson<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M	M	C	M	M	M
Former Directors
Diane Schueneman3<br><br>Independent Non-Executive Director	M	M	M

C Chair of Board or Board Committee.

M Member of Board or Board Committee.

1 Nigel Higgins was appointed as a member of the Board Remuneration Committee with effect from 31 January 2025.

2 Mary Mack was appointed to the Board with effect from 1 June 2025.

3 Diane Schueneman stepped down from the Board and as a member of the Board Nominations and Audit Committees with effect from 31 January

2025.

4 Mary Francis is to step down from the Board, as Chair of the Board Remuneration Committee and as a member of the Board Remuneration and

Sustainability Committees with effect from 6 May 2026.

Attendance

Directors are expected to attend every Board meeting. During 2025, there were three ad hoc Board meetings held in addition

to seven scheduled meetings. Attendance at meetings in 2025 is set out in the table below. Owing to other commitments,

some Directors were unable to attend certain ad hoc Board meetings, however they received papers in advance and had the

opportunity to share their views with the Chair ahead of the meetings.

Director	Meetings<br><br>attended / eligible to<br><br>attend	Ad hoc meetings<br><br>attended / eligible to<br><br>attend	Effective date
Nigel Higgins	7/7	3/3	Appointed 1 March 2019
Robert Berry	7/7	3/3	Appointed 8 February 2022
Anna Cross	7/7	3/3	Appointed 23 April 2022
Dawn Fitzpatrick	7/7	2/3	Appointed 25 September 2019
Mary Francis	7/7	3/3	Appointed 25 September 2019
Mary Mack	5/5	1/1	Appointed 1 June 2025
Marc Moses	7/7	2/3	Appointed 23 January 2023
Brian Shea	7/7	3/3	Appointed 19 July 2024
C.S. Venkatakrishnan	7/7	3/3	Appointed 1 November 2021
Julia Wilson	7/7	3/3	Appointed 1 April 2023
Former Directors
Diane Schueneman	0/0	0/1	Stepped down 31 January 2025
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	3
---	---

Governance

Corporate governance statement

Overview of governance framework

Membership of the BPLC and BBPLC Boards is partially consolidated to drive efficiency and co-ordination, whilst also

reducing complexity and unnecessary duplication. Consequently, the BBPLC Board is composed of a subset of the BPLC

Board, with all members of the BPLC Board (except for the Senior Independent Director, the Chair of Barclays Bank UK PLC

(BBUKPLC) and at least one other Non-Executive Director) also serving on the BBPLC Board. This structure facilitates

oversight of the activities of BBPLC, in addition to which Board members have direct accountability to BPLC’s shareholders

through their separate responsibilities as members of the BPLC Board.

The Board is committed to high standards of corporate governance and, in accordance with the Companies (Miscellaneous

Reporting) Regulations 2018 (the 2018 Regulations), has adopted its own corporate governance arrangements, which it

considers are appropriate to apply and are designed to facilitate effective decision-making to promote BBPLC’s long-term

success.

The Board has chosen not to adopt and report against the UK Corporate Governance Code (Code), which is intended for

companies with listed equity securities. Furthermore, whilst fully supportive of the Wates Corporate Governance Principles

for Large Private Companies (in particular the focus on purpose, culture and colleague and stakeholder engagement), the

Board considers that the Wates Principles are less appropriate for a wholly-owned subsidiary of a listed company, which is

also a complex financial institution subject to a comprehensive regulatory regime. This is consistent with the approach of

other significant subsidiaries within the Barclays Group which are subject to the 2018 Regulations.

Our governance framework is designed to:

•ensure we have an effective and entrepreneurial Board which makes decisions and provides oversight to promote

BBPLC's success, creating long-term sustainable value for its shareholder and the ultimate shareholders of BPLC, having

regard to the interests of all our other stakeholders

•ensure that our decision-making is aligned to our Purpose, Values and Mindset

•be effective in providing constructive challenge, advice and support to management

•provide checks and balances and drive informed, collaborative and accountable decision-making.

Set out below are the principles which underpin our corporate governance arrangements and how these principles have

been applied during 2025.

The Barclays Group-wide governance framework, which is set by BPLC, is designed to enable the effective management of

the Barclays Group. This includes the setting of Barclays Group policies and approach in relation to matters such as Barclays’

Purpose, Values and Mindset, Barclays' Remuneration Policy and Barclays' Charter of Expectations. Where appropriate, this

corporate governance statement makes reference to those Barclays Group-wide policies, which are relevant to the way in

which the Company is governed.

The Company’s corporate governance principles and how the Company has applied them during 2025 and to the date of

this report

Principle One: Board leadership and company purpose

A successful company is led by an effective and entrepreneurial board, whose role is to establish the company’s purpose,

values and strategy, satisfying itself that these and its culture are aligned, and make decisions to promote its success for the

long-term benefit of its shareholder, having regard to the interests of other relevant stakeholders and factors.

▪Through the leadership of the Board, a clear vision of Barclays' Purpose, Values and Mindset is articulated, underpinning

and defining BBPLC's strategy and culture, with a drive to embed this at every level of the organisation.

▪Given its fundamental importance, the Board regularly considered strategy matters throughout the year, including

delivery against the Barclays Bank Group's elements of Barclays' three-year strategy and consideration of the new

financial and operational targets through to 2028 to be announced on 10 February 2026.

▪The Board supports The Barclays Way, which provides the path for achieving a dynamic and positive culture. The Board

believes that a positive culture, supported by effective leadership and a consistent ‘tone from the top’, is crucial to our

success.

What the Board did in 2025

The key areas of focus for the Board in 2025 are set out below.

Strategy and operational matters

▪Considered strategy matters regularly throughout the year. In addition, regular reviews of the Private Bank and Wealth

Management (PBWM), Global Markets, Investment Banking, US Consumer Bank (USCB) and UK Corporate Bank (UKCB)

businesses enabled the Board to consider the key risks and opportunities for each of the businesses and monitor their

progress against the targets set out in the Barclays Group's three-year plan.

▪In Q3 2025, approved the acquisition of Best Egg, Inc. by Barclays Bank Delaware.

▪Received focused updates on matters of Barclays Group-wide relevance, including financial crime risk, cybersecurity,

operational resilience and transformation initiatives to support the delivery of the strategy.

▪Reviewed and approved the BBPLC 2025 Medium Term Plan (MTP).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	4

Governance

Corporate governance statement

▪Considered updates on climate and sustainability strategy through reports from the Board Sustainability Committee. A

key focus during the year was the Barclays Transition Update and the Board confirmed its support for the parts of the

Transition Update that relate to BBPLC's businesses. Other matters reported by the Board Sustainability Committee

included updates on the Barclays Group's approach to nature and identifying and managing human rights risk. The

Board also received an update on the Barclays Group's sustainable finance strategy which covered the Barclays Bank

Group's businesses.

▪In early 2025, approved the 2024 Barclays Group Modern Slavery Statement, which covered BBPLC.

▪Considered culture and colleague engagement through regular updates on the Barclays Group-wide 'consistently

excellent' (CE) cultural change programme and progress on embedment through reporting on CE metrics and Your View

colleague survey results. Board members also engaged directly with colleagues during the year, including through town

halls. Refer to the Colleagues section from page 43 for more information on colleague matters.

▪Reviewed progress on the Barclays Group-wide talent excellence programme aimed at enhancing practices to identify,

assess and develop high potential talent across the organisation. This included consideration of the success measures

and proposed outcomes for the programme.

▪Confirmed that BBPLC's method of workforce engagement has been effective in 2025.

▪Received updates on Barclays' inclusion and opportunity strategy which seeks to create a workplace where everyone

feels valued and respected, within a culture of belonging and equal opportunity, insofar as it relates to the Barclays Bank

Group.

Finance

▪Received regular updates from the Barclays Group Finance Director which included reporting on the financial

performance of the Barclays Bank Group and its businesses.

▪Reviewed and approved BBPLC’s financial results prior to publication.

▪Reviewed and approved the payment by BBPLC in February 2025 of an interim dividend in respect of the year ended 31

December 2024 to its ordinary shareholder, and approved the payment in July 2025 of an interim dividend in respect of

the first half of the year ending 31 December 2025. Details of dividends paid by BBPLC in 2025 are set out in Note 10 of

the financial statements.

▪Recommended to its shareholder for approval the reappointment of KPMG as BBPLC statutory auditor at its 2025 AGM.

▪Confirmed the re-appointment of KPMG as the BBPLC statutory auditor with effect from the 2027 financial year

following the conclusion of a formal audit tender process. Refer to page 18 for detail of the audit tender process.

Governance, risk and regulatory matters

▪Received regular updates on risk issues and emerging risks in the context of the macroeconomic, regulatory and

geopolitical environment.

▪Received regular updates on financial crime risk.

▪Approved the BBPLC Risk Appetite Statement.

▪Adopted the Barclays Group Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF).

▪Considered and approved the BBPLC elements of the Barclays Group Recovery Plan.

▪Considered the Barclays Group's annual operational resilience self-assessment in respect of Important Business Services

(IBS) and subsequent changes to the impact tolerance thresholds for certain IBS, insofar as they related to BBPLC.

▪Received a Consumer Duty Dashboard for BBPLC and subsequently approved the BBPLC Consumer Duty Annual Board

Report.

▪Upon the recommendation of the Board Nominations Committee, considered succession planning for, and approved

changes to, Board and Board Committee membership.

▪Received and considered feedback from the Barclays Group’s key regulators insofar as it related to BBPLC.

▪Received regular reports from the Chair of each Board Committee.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	5

Governance

Corporate governance statement

Principle Two: Division of responsibilities

An effective board requires a clear division of responsibilities with the Chair leading the board and being responsible for its

overall effectiveness, and the executive leadership of the company’s business being delegated to the Chief Executive. The

board should consist of an appropriate combination of Executive and independent Non-Executive Directors, each with a

clear understanding of their accountability and responsibilities. The board’s policies and procedures should support effective

decision-making and independent challenge.

▪A clear division of responsibilities has been established between the Executive and Non-Executive Directors. Page 2 sets

out the details of the Board members, the majority of whom are independent Non-Executive Directors.

▪Policies and protocols are in place to support effective decision-making and independent challenge, including the

Barclays' Charter of Expectations which sets out the individual role profiles and required behaviours and competencies of

the Chair, Non-Executive Directors, Executive Directors and Committee Chairs. In accordance with the Charter of

Expectations, the Non-Executive Directors are responsible for providing effective oversight, strategic guidance and

constructive challenge while holding the Executive Directors to account against agreed performance objectives. The

Chairman meets privately with the Non-Executive Directors where appropriate.

▪The Board's responsibilities are executed in part through the Board Committees, each of which has its own Terms of

Reference which set out its remit and decision-making powers. The Chairs of each of the Board Committees provide a

report on the work of the Committee at every scheduled Board meeting. Details of the principal Board Committees and

their core responsibilities and activities in 2025 are set out later in this report.

▪Appropriate information and support is provided to the Board, to enable it to undertake its work with due care and

discharge its responsibilities.

▪The Barclays Group Corporate Governance Operating Manual sets out guidelines as to how the Barclays Group's

significant subsidiaries (and their respective Boards and Board Committees) should interact with each other, while

providing guidance and clarity for management and Directors as to how these relationships and processes should work

in practice. It is a dynamic document that evolves with the changing nature of the Barclays Group.

The Board

Executive and Non-Executive Directors share the same duties and are subject to the same constraints. However, a clear

division of responsibilities has been established. The Chairman is responsible for leading the Board and its overall

effectiveness in directing the Company, demonstrating objective judgement and supporting a culture of inclusion and

diversity of thought, and facilitating and encouraging constructive challenge and debate between all Directors, and which

challenges executives where appropriate. The Chairman facilitates constructive Board relations and the effective

contribution of all Non-Executive Directors, and ensures Directors receive information in an accurate, timely and clear form

that is relevant to the discharge of their obligations. It is the Board’s responsibility to ensure that management delivers on

short-term objectives, whilst promoting the long-term success of the Company and the Barclays Bank Group.

The BBPLC Matters Reserved to the Board ensures that appropriate coordination with the governance of the partially

consolidated BPLC and BBPLC Boards is in place. The Matters Reserved to the Board specifies those decisions reserved solely

to the decision-making power of the Board. Those matters include material decisions relating to strategy, risk appetite,

medium term plans, capital and liquidity plans, risk management and controls frameworks, approval of financial statements,

approval of large transactions and the approval of share allotments, dividends, share buy-backs and reputation risk with

strategic implications relating to the Barclays Bank Group. The Board has delegated the responsibility for making and

implementing operational decisions and running the Company’s business on a day-to-day basis to the Chief Executive

Officer, supported by the BBPLC Executive Committee.

The current Board comprises a Chairman, who was independent on appointment, two Executive Directors and seven

independent Non-Executive Directors. The Board comprises a majority of independent Non-Executive Directors, bringing

significant expertise and independent challenge. The independence of the Non-Executive Directors is considered by the

Board Nominations Committee annually. The percentage of independent Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman,

on the Board is 80%. In respect of its Committees, except for the Board Sustainability Committee whose membership

comprises 83% independent Non-Executive Directors, the percentage of independent Non-Executive Directors on each of

the Board Nominations Committee, Board Audit Committee, Board Risk Committee and Board Remuneration Committee is

100%.

There is no workforce representative on the Board or its Committees.

Non-Executive Directors' time commitment and conflicts of interest

Non-Executive Directors, including the Chairman, are informed of the minimum time commitment prior to their

appointment and they are required to devote sufficient time to the Company to discharge their responsibilities effectively.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	6

Governance

Corporate governance statement

The time commitments of Directors are considered prior to appointment and are monitored by the Board Nominations

Committee. All Directors must seek approval (providing an indication of expected time commitment) before accepting any

significant new commitments outside of Barclays. The Board is satisfied that there are no Directors whose time commitment

is considered to be a matter for concern. A record of each Director's external time commitments is maintained by the

Company.

In accordance with the Act and the Company's Articles of Association (Articles), the Board has authority to authorise

conflicts of interest, and this ensures that the influence of third parties does not compromise or override the independent

judgement of the Board. A conflicts register is maintained by the Company, which is a record of actual and potential

conflicts, together with any Board authorisation of the conflict.

Executive Committee

During 2025, the BBPLC Executive Committee membership included the Chief Executive Officer, the President of BBPLC and

Head of Investment Bank Management, the heads of the four operating divisions within the Barclays Bank Group: UKCB,

PBWM, the Investment Bank (IB) and USCB, the BBPLC Chief Financial Officer, BBPLC Chief Risk Officer, and other BBPLC

functional partners.

We welcomed the following new members of the BBPLC Executive Committee in 2025:

•Olivier Vigneron, Chief Risk Officer

•Georges Lauchard, Chief Operating Officer

•Kate Vetch, Chief Compliance Officer

Anna Cross joined the BBPLC Executive Committee in 2025 as Interim BBPLC Chief Financial Officer, following the

resignation of Aunoy Banerjee as BBPLC Chief Financial Officer, who stepped down on 23 October 2025.

The BBPLC Executive Committee meets quarterly and is chaired by the President of BBPLC and Head of Investment Bank

Management. In addition to the day-to-day management of the Company, the Executive Committee supports the Chief

Executive Officer in ensuring that the Barclays values, strategy and culture align, are implemented and are communicated

consistently to colleagues.

Principle Three: Composition, succession and evaluation

A board with the right balance of skills, experience, independence and knowledge is critical to the sustainable delivery of

value to the company’s shareholder and broader stakeholders. The size of the board should be guided by the scale and

complexity of the company and appointments should be based on merit against objective criteria, and having regard to the

Board's Inclusion and Opportunity Policy, and subject to a formal, rigorous and transparent procedure, which is underpinned

by an effective succession plan for the board and senior management. A successful board is a cohesive board that provides

informed and constructive challenge to the management team and measures its effectiveness.

▪The membership of the Board is drawn exclusively from the BPLC Board. The size and composition of the Board is

considered appropriate for the Barclays Bank Group. There is a good balance between Executive and independent Non-

Executive Directors, with the Non-Executive Directors able to provide essential independent challenge. Board members

have a strong combination of technical, financial (including significant financial services experience) and commercial

skills along with broader experience in culture and colleague engagement. Further detail on industry and leadership

experience and international experience, on the basis of Board composition as at 31 December 2025, is set out in the

tables below.

▪All appointments to the Board are based on merit against objective criteria, and having regard to the Board Inclusion and

Opportunity Policy. Board appointments are made following a formal, rigorous and transparent process, facilitated by

the Board Nominations Committee, with the aid of external search consultancy firms. The Board Nominations

Committee oversees succession to both Board and senior management positions.

▪The Company continues to strive to build an inclusive workplace, making the most of the different backgrounds,

perspectives, and experiences of our colleagues to better serve the Barclays Bank Group's customers and clients. You can

read more about Barclays' approach to inclusion within the Colleagues section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025

and in the Inclusion and Opportunity section below.

▪There is regular review of the leadership and succession needs of the business to maintain depth and diversity of

thought in the talent and succession pipeline at the Board, executive and key management level. This remains a key

focus to maintain the quality of leadership that is in place to lead the business in the delivery of the Barclays Bank

Group's strategy.

▪Ongoing training and professional development is key in providing Board members with a deeper and more granular

understanding of the business, contributing to informed and sound decision-making. Further information on training

and induction for Directors in 2025 can be found in the Training and induction section later in this report.

▪Effectiveness is supported through annual reviews of the Board, Board Committees and individual Directors. In 2025, the

Board, Board Committee and individual Director effectiveness reviews were conducted internally.

▪Feedback from the 2025 Board effectiveness review indicated that the Board continues to operate effectively, with a

collegiate and respectful culture. The review noted that meetings are well-chaired and that the Board provides an

appropriate balance of support and constructive challenge. The interaction between the Board and the Board

Committees was commented on favourably, providing appropriate visibility of key matters and emerging themes.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	7

Governance

Corporate governance statement

Feedback indicates that concurrent meetings of the BPLC and BBPLC Boards remain effective and continue to work well

in practice.

Industry and leadership experience1 (number of Directors)		International experience2 (number of Directors)
Financial services	10	UK	10
Political/Regulatory Experience	10	US	5
Current/recent Chair/CEO	8	Rest of the World	5
Accountancy/Auditing	4
Operations/Technology	2

1 Individual Directors may fall into one or more categories.

2 International experience is based on the location of the headquarters/registered office of a company. Individual Directors may fall into one or more

categories.

Board Nominations Committee

The Board Nominations Committee is comprised solely of independent Non-Executive Directors. The Board Nominations

Committee is chaired by Nigel Higgins, as Chair of the BBPLC Board. Julia Wilson is the other member of the Committee.

Diane Schueneman stepped down with effect from 31 January 2025.

The Board Nominations Committee held two scheduled and no ad hoc meetings in 2025. Board Nominations Committee

meetings were attended during the year by the Chief Executive Officer and the Barclays Group Human Resources Director.

Attendance at Board Nominations Committee meetings during 2025 was as follows:

Member	Meetings attended / eligible to attend	Effective date
Nigel Higgins (Chair)	2/2	Appointed 1 March 2019
Julia Wilson	2/2	Appointed 1 April 2023

The principal role and responsibilities of the Board Nominations Committee, pursuant to its Terms of Reference, are:

▪considering appointments to the Board, its Committees and boards of BBPLC's significant subsidiaries

▪considering the composition of the Board and its Committees

▪considering succession planning and talent management

▪evaluating Board effectiveness

▪assessing the length of Directors’ tenure

▪considering Board induction and training

▪considering governance matters.

During 2025, the principal activities of the Board Nominations Committee included:

▪Reviewing and approving Board and Board Committee size, composition and succession planning, taking into account

tenure, time commitment, skills, knowledge, experience and independence of the Directors, and identifying any desirable

skills to aid the Company in operating and competing effectively (and leading the search and recruitment process).

▪Receiving updates on the Company’s executive governance framework, executive talent and succession management,

including Executive Committee succession planning and reviewing and approving proposed changes to Executive

Committee composition.

▪Continuing to support, alongside the Board, the Barclays Group’s inclusion and opportunity strategy. You can read more

about Barclays' approach to inclusion within the Colleagues section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025.

▪Recommending to the Board for adoption an updated version of the Board Inclusion and Opportunity Policy in February

2026, to ensure the policy continues to reflect the Group's inclusion and opportunity strategy. The Policy confirms that

the Board aims to meet the recommendations of the FTSE Women Leaders Review regarding gender balance on boards

and the Parker Review on ethnic representation on boards.

▪Receiving updates on succession planning for the Company's main subsidiary company boards.

▪Considering an interim review of the 2024 Board effectiveness recommendations, and approving that an internally

conducted Board, Board Committee and individual Director effectiveness review be undertaken in respect of 2025.

The Board Nominations Committee effectiveness review was internally conducted for 2025, with the results confirming that

the Committee is operating effectively.

Appointment and retirement of Directors

The appointment and retirement of Directors is governed by the Articles, the Act and related legislation.

The Articles may be amended only by a special resolution of the shareholders. The Board has the power to appoint

additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongst the Directors and any Director so appointed holds office only until

the next AGM where they may offer themselves for re-election.

The Board Nominations Committee regularly reviews the composition of the Board, Board Committees and Executive

Committee and the core skills, experience, knowledge and diversity of thought required. For the Board, it is standard practice

to appoint any new Non-Executive Director or Chair for an initial three-year term, which may be extended for up to a further

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	8

Governance

Corporate governance statement

three-year term. As such, Non-Executive Directors typically serve up to a minimum of six years, although this period may be

extended where considered appropriate by the Board Nominations Committee.

Inclusion and opportunity

On the recommendation of the Committee, the Board adopted an updated version of the Board Inclusion and Opportunity

Policy in February 2026, as described above. The policy confirms the Board's support for the Barclays Group's culture in

which Barclays is committed to continuing to build an inclusive workplace.

Training and induction

The Committee, together with the Group Company Secretary, supports the Group Chairman in facilitating continuous

training and development for Directors. Directors are encouraged to participate in regular training and development sessions

integrated within the Board and Board Committee schedules, and may additionally request tailored training as required. In

2025, Directors enhanced their business knowledge through Board deep dives into the Company's operating divisions and

key Group functions, including Legal, Risk, Compliance, and Internal Audit. The Board also received regular updates on

corporate governance matters and certain Barclays’ Compliance Risk policies, including financial crime, as well as an annual

briefing on the Senior Managers Regime.

A tailored induction programme is delivered for all new Directors appointed to the Board. This provides them with an

understanding of the Barclays Bank Group, its purpose, strategy, business areas and key issues it currently faces. When a

Director joins a Board Committee, the schedule also includes an induction to the operation of that Board Committee.

Principle Four: Audit, risk and internal control

A board should establish formal and transparent policies and procedures to (i) identify the nature and extent of principal

risks the company is willing to take in order to achieve its long-term strategic objectives; (ii) manage such risks effectively;

(iii) oversee the internal control framework; (iv) promote the independence and effectiveness of internal and external audit

functions; and (v) satisfy itself on the integrity of financial reporting.

▪The Company is committed to operating within a strong system of internal controls that enables business to be

transacted and risks taken without exposure to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage. The principal risks

facing the Barclays Bank Group have been identified and robust processes are in place to evaluate and manage such risks

including regular reporting to, and oversight by, the Board Risk Committee and the Board. A key component of the risk

management framework is the ERMF, which supports the business in its aim to embed effective risk management and a

strong risk management culture. The ERMF is designed to identify and set minimum requirements, in respect of the main

risks, to achieve the Company’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are

effective.

▪The Board approves the Barclays Bank Group's risk appetite (the amount of risk the Barclays Bank Group is prepared to

take to earn an appropriate return while meeting minimum internal and regulatory capital requirements in a severe but

plausible stress environment), including testing whether the Barclays Bank Group’s financial position and risk profile

provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe but plausible economic scenarios within the parameters

set by the BPLC Board Risk Committee.

▪The effectiveness of risk management and internal controls is reviewed regularly by the Board Risk Committee

(responsible for overseeing the ERMF and current and potential future risk exposures) and the Board Audit Committee

(responsible for evaluating the effectiveness of internal controls).

▪The Board Audit Committee also has oversight of the financial reporting processes and the work of the external and

internal auditors (including independence and effectiveness).

Board Audit Committee

The Board Audit Committee is comprised solely of independent Non-Executive Directors, with membership of the Board

Audit Committee aligned with the BPLC Board Audit Committee and designed to provide the breadth of financial expertise

and commercial acumen it needs to fulfil its responsibilities. Its members as a whole have recent and relevant experience of

the banking and financial services sector, in addition to general management and commercial experience, and are financially

literate. The Board Audit Committee is chaired by Julia Wilson, who has significant corporate finance, tax and accounting

experience. Robert Berry and Marc Moses are the other members of the Committee. Diane Schueneman stepped down from

the Board Audit Committee with effect from 31 January 2025.

The Board Audit Committee held 13 scheduled meetings and three ad hoc meetings in 2025. Board Audit Committee

meetings were attended by representatives from the Barclays Group and BBPLC management in respect of matters relevant

to their business or function area, including (as appropriate) the Chief Executive Officer, Barclays Group Finance Director,

the Group Controller, the BBPLC Chief Financial Officer, the Barclays Group and BBPLC Chief Internal Auditor, the Barclays

Group Chief Compliance Officer, the Barclays Group Chief Operating Officer, the Head of Group Control, and Barclays Group

General Counsel. The Company’s statutory auditor, KPMG, also attended Committee meetings.

Attendance at Board Audit Committee meetings during 2025 was as follows:

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	9

Governance

Corporate governance statement

Member	Meetings attended / eligible to<br><br>attend	Ad hoc meetings attended /<br><br>eligible to attend	Effective date
Julia Wilson (Chair)	13/13	3/3	Appointed 1 April 2023
Robert Berry	13/13	3/3	Appointed 1 March 2022
Marc Moses	13/13	3/3	Appointed 23 January 2023
Diane Schueneman	2/2	N/A	Stepped down 31 January 2025

Additionally, as part of the Company’s commitment to effective oversight and allocation of responsibilities between the

BPLC Board Audit Committee, BBPLC Board Audit Committee and the BBUKPLC Board Audit Committee, Julia Wilson held

regular meetings during 2025 with the BBUKPLC Board Audit Committee Chair to share relevant information and to ensure

embedment of information flows and governance practice. In addition, discussions were held with the board audit

committee chairs of the Company’s other major subsidiaries, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC (Barclays Europe) and Barclays US

LLC (IHC).

The principal role and responsibilities of the Board Audit Committee, pursuant to its Terms of Reference, are to review and

monitor:

▪the integrity of the Barclays Bank Group’s financial statements

▪the effectiveness of the Barclays Bank Group’s internal controls

▪the independence and effectiveness of the internal and external audit processes

▪the relationship with the Barclays Bank Group’s statutory auditor

▪the effectiveness of the Barclays Bank Group’s whistleblowing procedures.

During 2025, the principal activities of the Board Audit Committee included:

•Financial reporting: assessing the appropriateness of BBPLC's financial disclosures, including considering feedback from

KPMG and management's review of controls relating to financial reporting. The Committee reviewed and recommended

to the BBPLC Board for approval the BBPLC Annual Report 2024 and the BBPLC Results Announcement for the period

ended 30 June 2025. The Committee recommended to the Board that the financial statements should be prepared on a

going concern basis. The Committee also received an update on the reporting requirements under Corporate

Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD) for BBPLC and approach to the 2025 double materiality assessment.

▪Impairment: assessing management's approach to impairment coverage levels, including the impact of delinquency

levels in certain areas of the portfolio, the use of post-model adjustments and in respect of material exposures across the

Barclays Bank Group.

▪Conduct provisions: analysing management's judgements and estimates made with regard to the Barclays Bank Group’s

material conduct provisions.

▪Legal, competition and regulatory provisions: evaluating advice on the status of current legal, competition and regulatory

matters and considering management’s judgements on the level of provisions, including challenging management on

the timeliness of raising provisions as well as understanding areas of KPMG challenge. The Committee reviewed and

challenged management's approach to the provision raised for motor finance. Seeking KPMG's views on the

reasonableness of management's position, the Committee focused in particular on the methodology to determine the

level of provision for motor finance claims and the reasonableness of assumptions made by management in developing

the proposed methodology.

▪Valuations: monitoring the valuation methods applied by management to significant valuation items and areas of

judgement in relation to matters impacting the Barclays Bank Group.

▪Tax: considering tax matters relating to the Barclays Bank Group, including the tax strategy, compliance with the Group's

Tax Principles and judgements related to tax risk and the recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets. The

Committee monitored interactions with tax authorities, development in tax litigation matters and material tax risks

(including the adequacy of tax provisions and KPMG's views). The Committee also monitored the potential impact of US

legislative changes in relation to tax on the Barclays Bank Group.

▪Internal controls and business control environment: monitoring and evaluating the status of the more significant control

matters and remediation programmes across the Barclays Bank Group. The Committee also discussed reports from the

heads of UKCB, PBWM, IB and USCB on their control environment, together with views from the second and third lines of

defence.

▪Internal audit: receiving reports from Barclays Internal Audit (BIA) in relation to specific audits, key areas of focus and

emerging themes with respect to businesses in the Barclays Bank Group; considering remediation plans arising from

adverse audit reports and monitoring related remediation programmes; discussing BIA's assessment of the control

environment in the Barclays Bank Group and key themes in Barclays Bank Group entities; and approving the annual BIA

audit plan for the Barclays Bank Group. Committee members, along with the Barclays Europe and IHC board audit

committee chairs, attended a 'BIA Teach In' which covered matters relating to People, BIA Strategy and Audit

Methodology.

▪External audit: reviewing and approving the annual external audit plan for the Barclays Bank Group (including the key

areas of focus) and assessing the progress of the 2025 audit. The Committee also considered KPMG audit quality and

discussed KPMG’s feedback and challenge of management on areas such as critical accounting estimates and

judgements and internal controls. The Committee received an update on lessons learned following the first year of

implementation of CSRD disclosures by BBPLC and Barclays Europe. The Committee recommended to the Board for

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	10

Governance

Corporate governance statement

approval by shareholders of BBPLC at its 2025 AGM the reappointment of KPMG as the BBPLC external auditor. In

addition, following the conclusion of a formal audit tender process the Committee recommended to the Board the re-

appointment of KPMG as BBPLC's statutory auditor with effect from the 2027 financial year. Refer to page 18 for further

details about the audit tender process.

▪Speaking up: reviewing management's reports on whistleblowing matters, monitoring key whistleblowing metrics and

considering potential whistleblowing trends.

The Board Audit Committee effectiveness review was internally conducted for 2025, with the results confirming that the

Committee is operating effectively.

Board Risk Committee

The Board Risk Committee is comprised solely of independent Non-Executive Directors with membership of the Committee

broadly aligned with the BPLC Board Risk Committee. The Board Risk Committee is chaired by Robert Berry. Dawn

Fitzpatrick, Marc Moses and Julia Wilson are the other members of the Committee.

Board Risk Committee meetings are attended by management as appropriate, including the Chief Executive Officer, Barclays

Group Finance Director, Barclays Group Chief Risk Officer, BBPLC Chief Risk Officer, Barclays Group Chief Compliance

Officer, BBPLC Chief Compliance Officer, Barclays Group Treasurer, Barclays Group Chief Internal Auditor, Barclays Group

General Counsel and BBPLC General Counsel. The Company’s statutory auditor, KPMG, also attended meetings.

The Board Risk Committee held 10 scheduled meetings and three ad hoc meetings in 2025. Owing to other commitments or

religious observance, some Directors were unable to attend certain meetings, however they received papers in advance and

had the opportunity to share their views with the Chair ahead of the meetings.

Attendance at Board Risk Committee meetings during 2025 was as follows:

Member	Meetings attended / eligible to<br><br>attend	Ad hoc meetings attended /<br><br>eligible to attend	Effective date
Robert Berry (Chair)	10/10	3/3	Appointed 1 March 2022
Dawn Fitzpatrick	10/10	3/3	Appointed 1 January 2020
Marc Moses	8/10	3/3	Appointed 23 January 2023
Julia Wilson	10/10	2/3	Appointed 1 April 2023

The principal role and responsibilities of the Board Risk Committee, pursuant to its Terms of Reference, are to:

▪review, on behalf of the Board, the management of the principal risks as set out in the ERMF (with the exception of any

matter with reputation risk which may have strategic implications relating to the Barclays Bank Group, which is a matter

reserved to the Board)

▪consider and recommend to the Board, within the risk parameters set by the BPLC Board Risk Committee, the Company’s

risk appetite and tolerance for those principal risks

▪review, on behalf of the Board, the Barclays Bank Group’s risk profile for those principal risks

▪commission, receive and consider reports on key risk issues and emerging risks.

The Board Risk Committee continually considers the impact of issues on the Barclays Bank Group and the risk environment

in which it operates. It reviews steps taken by the business to manage exposures in this context.

During 2025, the key activities of the Board Risk Committee included:

▪Recommending to the Board the adoption of the ERMF following the approval of the ERMF by the BPLC Board.

▪Further to reports presented by management on guidance and feedback received from key Barclays Group regulators,

the Committee considered management's response to the matters raised by regulators, including updates on key

remediation programmes, insofar as these related to the Barclays Bank Group.

▪Receiving an update from the Barclays Group Chief Risk Officer and Chief Compliance Officer on their observations on

the Barclays Group's risk and compliance culture, which included reflecting on the Committee's role to support the

embedment of the desired culture.

▪Advising the Board on the risk appetite and tolerance for the Barclays Bank Group in respect of the principal risks in the

ERMF when determining strategy, including recommending the BBPLC Risk Appetite Statement to the Board for

approval. The Committee adopted the aggregate stress loss limit allocation and stress loss limits for BBPLC.

▪Considering and approving the 2025 internal stress test (IST) scenario theme and severity and 2025 IST results, and

recommending that the Board approve the MTP on the basis that risk appetite was met under the IST. The Committee

also approved the results of the 2025 internal reverse stress test.

▪Considering updates on the results of Barclays US LLC's 2025 supervisory stress test conducted by the Federal Reserve

Board.

▪The Barclays Group Chief Risk Officer reported regularly on the Barclays Group's risk profile which included assessments

of macroeconomic developments and geopolitical risks, in addition to reporting on key risks and portfolio metrics which

included consideration of matters relevant to the Barclays Bank Group.

▪Receiving briefings on key risk themes in the context of the evolving risk environment in which the Barclays Bank Group

operates.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	11

Governance

Corporate governance statement

▪Receiving focused business risk updates on Investment Banking, Global Markets, USCB, PBWM and UKCB, which

included assessments of principal risks.

▪An ongoing focus on credit risk, including reporting on management actions being taken to mitigate risk in key

portfolios.

▪Monitoring the capital, liquidity and financial resources of BBPLC to ensure it meets its regulatory requirements and

obligations.

▪Following preliminary assessments of the BBPLC Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and Internal

Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP) submissions in early 2025, subsequently approving the BBPLC ICAAP

and ILAAP prior to their submission to the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA).

▪Recommending to the Board for approval the BBPLC elements of the Barclays Group Recovery Plan.

▪Reviewing and considering the operational risks for Barclays Bank Group business as part of Barclays Group-wide

reporting which included updates on key metrics and key operational risks, including those relating to transactions

operations and the risks associated with new business activities.

▪The Committee maintained oversight of cybersecurity risk through updates on the Barclays Group-wide programme of

work to enhance Barclays' cybersecurity capabilities insofar as matters related to the Barclays Bank Group.

▪Receiving regular reports on climate risk which covered matters including external regulatory trends, the global policy

environment, progress against financed emissions reduction targets and actions to address increasing physical risks

which considered matters relevant to the Barclays Bank Group's businesses.

▪Overseeing the management of compliance risk within BBPLC, including through regular reports from the Barclays

Group Chief Compliance Officer on the Barclays Group's compliance risk profile which included consideration of matters

relevant to BBPLC. The Committee also received quarterly BBPLC compliance risk dashboards.

▪Monitoring financial crime risk in the Barclays Bank Group through quarterly updates on the Barclays Group-wide

programme to enhance financial crime capabilities, Compliance opinions on the Barclays Group financial crime risk

profile and BBPLC financial crime risk dashboards.

▪Considering the key conclusions from the due diligence conducted on the acquisition of Best Egg, Inc.

▪Considering the methodology for setting the ex-ante adjustments to the 2025 incentives pool.

The Board Risk Committee effectiveness review was internally conducted for 2025, with the results confirming that the

Committee is operating effectively.

Audit, risk and internal control

The Board, together with the Board Audit Committee, is responsible for ensuring the independence and effectiveness of the

internal and external audit functions. For this reason, the Board Audit Committee held regular private sessions with each of

the BBPLC Chief Internal Auditor and the lead audit engagement partner of the statutory auditor without management

present.

The Board is also responsible for ensuring that management maintains an effective system of risk management and internal

control and assessing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to identify, evaluate and manage, rather than eliminate,

the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against

material misstatement or loss.

The Board Audit Committee oversees the control environment (and remediation of related issues) and also reviews annually

the risk management and internal control system. Key controls are assessed on a regular basis for both design and operating

effectiveness. Issues arising out of these assessments, where appropriate, are reported to the Board Audit Committee.

Controls over financial reporting

A framework of disclosure controls and procedures is in place to support the approval of the financial statements of the

Barclays Bank Group.

Specific governance committees are responsible for examining the financial reports and disclosures to help ensure that they

have been subject to adequate verification and comply with applicable standards and legislation.

Where appropriate, these committees report their conclusions to the Board Audit Committee, which debates such

conclusions and provides further challenge. Finally, the Board scrutinises and approves results announcements and the

Annual Report to ensure that appropriate disclosures have been made. This governance process is designed to ensure that

both management and the Board are given sufficient opportunity to debate and challenge the financial statements of the

Barclays Bank Group and other significant disclosures before they are made public.

Management's report on internal control over financial reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal controls over financial reporting under the

supervision of the principal executive and financial officers, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of

financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements, in accordance with (a) UK-adopted international accounting

standards; (b) International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	12

Governance

Corporate governance statement

(IASB), including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee; and (c) IFRS adopted pursuant to Regulation

(EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union.

Internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that pertain to the maintenance of records that, in

reasonable detail:

▪accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets

▪provide reasonable assurances that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements

in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards and IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are

being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and the respective Directors

▪provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of

assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect

misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal

control over financial reporting may become inadequate because of changes in conditions or that the degree of compliance

with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Management has assessed internal control over financial reporting as at 31 December 2025. In making its assessment,

management utilised the criteria set out in the 2013 COSO framework. Management has concluded that, based on its

assessment, internal control over financial reporting was effective as at 31 December 2025.

The system of internal financial and operational controls is also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas.

Further information on supervision by financial services regulators is provided under Supervision and Regulation in the Risk

review section on pages 154 to 170.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There have been no changes that occurred during the period covered by this report, which have materially affected or are

reasonably likely to materially affect the Barclays Bank Group’s internal control over financial reporting.

Principle Five: Remuneration

The remuneration policies and practices should support strategy and promote long-term sustainable success and be

developed in accordance with formal and transparent procedures, ensuring no Director is involved in deciding their own

remuneration outcome. Executive remuneration should be aligned to the company’s purpose and values and the successful

delivery of the strategy with outcomes taking account of company and individual performance, and wider circumstances

such as pay across the company’s workforce and  Barclays' Fair Pay Agenda.

▪The Barclays Group Remuneration Policy is set by the BPLC Board Remuneration Committee and reviewed and adopted

by the BBPLC Board Remuneration Committee. The policy is designed to promote the long-term success of the Company

and ensure that remuneration is aligned to the Barclays Bank Group's strategy and risk management approach.

▪Remuneration for executives and senior management is considered in the context of the wider workforce remuneration

and alignment of incentives and rewards with performance and culture. Their remuneration is reviewed annually by the

BBPLC Board Remuneration Committee and the BPLC Board Remuneration Committee, as appropriate. No individual is

involved in deciding their own remuneration.

▪Barclays Bank Group is committed to paying people fairly, with regards to their specific role, seniority, responsibilities,

skills and experience and other factors that properly affect pay, in a way that balances the needs of the Barclays Bank

Group's stakeholders. You can find more information on the Barclays Fair Pay Agenda which underpins all remuneration

decisions in the Remuneration report section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025. The Barclays Bank Group also

remains focused on strengthening our inclusive culture with a focus on empowering our colleagues and leaders,

engaging our communities and driving company success. You can find more information on our approach to Inclusion &

Opportunity in the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025. Our UK gender and ethnicity pay gaps are published in the Barclays

UK Pay Gaps 2025 disclosure.

Board Remuneration Committee

The Board Remuneration Committee is comprised solely of independent Non-Executive Directors. The Committee is chaired

by Mary Francis. Dawn Fitzpatrick, Nigel Higgins and Julia Wilson are the other Committee members. As noted above, Mary

Francis is to step down from the Board and her role as Board Remuneration Committee Chair with effect from 6 May 2026.

Her successor as Chair of the Board Remuneration Committee will be announced in due course.

The Board Remuneration Committee held 5 scheduled and 1 ad hoc meetings in 2025. Meetings were attended by the

Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Group Chief Risk Officer, Group Human Resources Director, and the Group

Reward and Performance Director/Co-Heads of Reward and Performance as required. Attendance at Board Remuneration

Committee meetings during 2025 was as follows:

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	13

Governance

Corporate governance statement

Member	Meetings attended / eligible to attend	Effective date
Mary Francis	6/6	Appointed 25 September 2019
Dawn Fitzpatrick	6/6	Appointed 1 July 2021
Nigel Higgins	5/5	Appointed 31 January 2025
Julia Wilson	6/6	Appointed 1 July 2023

The principal role and responsibilities of the Committee, pursuant to its Terms of Reference, are to:

▪set the overarching principles and parameters of remuneration policy for the Barclays Bank Group within the parameters

set by the BPLC Board Remuneration Committee;

▪consider and endorse the incentive pool for the Barclays Bank Group and the remuneration of key Barclays Bank Group

executives and other specified individuals as determined by the Board Remuneration Committee from time to time; and

▪exercise oversight over remuneration issues within the Barclays Bank Group.

During 2025, the principal activities of the Committee included:

▪Reviewing the Barclays Group Reward Policy and confirming its continued adoption;

▪Reviewing the Board Remuneration Committee's Control Framework, Terms of Reference, annual activity and

effectiveness;

▪Reviewing and adopting the methodology and framework for 2025 incentive funding, and reviewing and endorsing the

resulting incentive pool, including considering financial performance and risk updates (and the appropriateness of risk

adjustments to incentives);

▪Considering the remuneration structures for Material Risk Takers (MRTs) in the context of the new PRA/ FCA UK bank

pay regulations;

▪Considering updates on the review of wider workforce remuneration, and UK gender and ethnicity pay gaps;

▪Considering regular updates on stakeholders matters, regulatory and legal considerations and pay round considerations;

▪Reviewing and approving, as appropriate, specific remuneration proposals for individuals within the Committee’s remit;

and

▪Considering and approving recommendations of the Remuneration Review Panel, which supports the Committee in

overseeing the alignment of remuneration with the conduct expectations of Barclays, its regulators and its stakeholders.

The Board Remuneration Committee effectiveness review was internally conducted for 2025, with the results confirming

that the Committee is operating effectively.

Principle Six: Stakeholder relationships and engagement

Directors should foster effective stakeholder relationships aligned to the company’s purpose. The board should recognise

the importance of listening to, and understanding, the views of its stakeholders, including the workforce, and specifically the

impact of the company’s behaviour and business on customers and clients, colleagues, suppliers, communities and society

more broadly; having regard to these views and impact when taking decisions.

▪As described under Principle One, the Company has a defined Purpose and strategy; through this the Board has

identified key stakeholders on whom the success of the Company depends.

▪The Board and management engage throughout the year with the Company's stakeholders. The Board seeks to

understand the views of key stakeholders and the impact of the Company’s behaviour and business on customers and

clients, colleagues, suppliers, communities and society more broadly. See the Directors' report for information about how

we engage with suppliers.

▪The Company’s long-standing commitment to the importance and value of colleague engagement continues; the

Company’s people are its most valuable asset. While there is no designated workforce engagement Director on the

BBPLC Board, the Board receives feedback on culture and colleague engagement during the year through, for example,

updates on colleague and workforce matters presented to Board meetings. Board members also have the opportunity to

engage with colleagues during the year at colleague events. Further detail on the Company’s workforce commitment

and engagement model can be found in the Colleagues section on page 43.

▪The Board Sustainability Committee supports the Board's oversight of climate and sustainability matters, in accordance

with its Terms of Reference.

Board Sustainability Committee

The Board Sustainability Committee comprises a majority of independent Non-Executive Directors, with membership of the

Committee broadly aligned with the BPLC Board Sustainability Committee. The Board Sustainability Committee is chaired by

Nigel Higgins. Robert Berry, Dawn Fitzpatrick, Mary Francis, C.S. Venkatakrishnan and Julia Wilson are also members of the

Committee. As noted above, Mary Francis is to step down from the Board and her role as a member of the Board

Sustainability Committee with effect from 6 May 2026.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	14

Governance

Corporate governance statement

The Board Sustainability Committee held three scheduled meetings and one ad hoc meeting in 2025. Owing to other

commitments or illness, some Directors were unable to attend certain meetings, however they received papers in advance

and had the opportunity to share their views with the Chair ahead of the meetings. Board Sustainability Committee meetings

are attended by management including the Head of Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility, Group Head of Sustainable

and Transition Finance, and the Head of Legal, Public Policy and Corporate Responsibility. Attendance at Board Sustainability

Committee meetings during 2025 was as follows:

Member	Scheduled meetings attended /<br><br>eligible to attend	Ad hoc meetings attended /<br><br>eligible to attend	Effective date
Nigel Higgins (Chair)	3/3	1/1	Appointed 23 March 2023
Robert Berry	2/3	1/1	Appointed 23 March 2023
Dawn Fitzpatrick	1/3	1/1	Appointed 23 March 2023
Mary Francis	3/3	1/1	Appointed 23 March 2023
CS Venkatakrishnan	3/3	1/1	Appointed 23 March 2023
Julia Wilson	3/3	1/1	Appointed 1 April 2023

The principal role and responsibilities of the Board Sustainability Committee, pursuant to its Terms of Reference, are:

▪supporting and advising the Board in its oversight of climate and sustainability matters relating to (i) the services and

products provided to the Company's clients and customers, (ii) particular sectors, and (iii) its own corporate activities

▪supporting the Board in monitoring the implementation of the Company’s climate and sustainability strategy and

reviewing and making recommendations to the Board on the suitability of material changes to its strategy.

▪reporting to the Board on the climate and sustainability matters for which it is responsible, escalating issues and making

recommendations to the Board where appropriate.

During 2025, the principal activities of the Committee included:

▪Detailed discussion and review of the Barclays Transition Update ahead of publication. The Committee considered the

risks and opportunities presented by the transition.

▪Discussions were informed by external perspectives, including external legal and policy experts, and underpinned by

management's active engagement with external stakeholders. The Committee also received regular updates on external

developments, market practice and regulatory changes.

▪The Committee discussed the continuing work to advance Barclays position on nature and human rights, recognising

the growing importance of these issues to stakeholders and to the long-term sustainability of the business.

The Board Sustainability Committee effectiveness review was internally conducted for 2025, with the results confirming that

the Committee is operating effectively.

Additional information relating to sustainability matters

Board and Board Committee oversight of sustainability matters

The Board sets the strategic direction for BBPLC. Further details on the role and responsibilities of the Board are set out in

Principle One: Board Leadership and company purpose. Further to this, the Board and, as appropriate, its Committees

oversee sustainability matters which may, where appropriate, include material impacts, risks and opportunities (IROs) as

relevant.

The Matters Reserved to the Board sets out those matters reserved to the Board, which include material decisions relating to

strategy, risk appetite, risk management and controls frameworks and the approval of large transactions among other

matters. The Board considers a range of matters in its decision-making process, which may include, where appropriate,

consideration of any material IROs, as relevant.

Each Committee has its own Terms of Reference setting out its principal role and responsibilities and incorporating oversight

of our IROs where appropriate. In particular:

•Recognising the importance of climate and sustainability matters and the growing importance of other sustainability

areas including nature, the Board Sustainability Committee supports and advises the Board in its oversight of climate and

sustainability matters, including related risks and opportunities. The Chief Executive Officer is an Executive member of

the Board Sustainability Committee and in that role brings invaluable climate and sustainability insights to the

Committee’s discussions, including external perspectives from his outside engagements.

•The Board Risk Committee oversees risk appetite and the management of principal risks, including climate risk. In

evaluating BBPLC’s risk profile, the Committee’s considerations include the risk of financial losses arising from climate

change through physical risks and risks associated with transitioning to a lower carbon economy and progress against

the Barclays Group’s financed emissions reduction targets (insofar as BBPLC contributes to these targets).

•The role of the Board Remuneration Committee includes exercising oversight over remuneration issues within the BBPLC

Group, including the Fair Pay Agenda and gender and ethnicity pay gaps.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	15

Governance

Corporate governance statement

The Matters Reserved to the Board and Committee Terms of Reference are reviewed on a regular basis and updated as

required, including if appropriate, to reflect changes in the nature of BBPLC's business and any relevant material IROs.

Skills and expertise related to sustainability matters

Board members and members of relevant Board Committees (for example, the Board Sustainability Committee) are able to

reflect on and deepen their skills and expertise on sustainability matters, including in relation to our IROs as relevant,

through periodic briefings on key business developments and external developments provided by management. Further

information regarding briefings related to our material sustainability matters (including where appropriate updates

regarding their management) provided to the Board during 2025 can be found in Principle One: Board leadership and

company purpose (see the 'What the Board did in 2025' section). Information regarding the key sustainability-related

activities of relevant Committees in 2025 can be found in Principle Three: Composition, succession and evaluation, Principle

Four: Audit, risk and internal control, Principle Five: Remuneration and Principle Six: Stakeholder relationships and

engagement.

Where the Board or a Board Committee identifies that additional expertise and insight would be helpful to support informed

decision-making, they are able to call on internal subject matter experts to provide additional briefings and training on

particular material sustainability matters. Where appropriate, training may be requested from relevant external experts.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	16

Governance report

Directors’ report

The Directors present their report together with the audited accounts for the Company for the year ended 31 December

2025.

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be

located at:

	Pages
Corporate governance statement	2 to 15
Risk management	47 to 70
Principal risks	47, 71 to 83
Disclosures required pursuant to the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups<br><br>(Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 as updated by the 2018 Regulations can be found on<br><br>the following pages:
Engagement with employees (Sch.7 Para 11 and 11A Regs 2008/2018)	43
Financial Instruments (Sch.7 Para 6 Regs 2008)	208
Hedge accounting policy (Sch.7 Para 6 Regs 2008)	211

Profits and dividends

The results of the Barclays Bank Group show statutory profit after tax of £4,658m (2024: £3,748m). The Barclays Bank

Group had net assets of £62,313m as at 31 December 2025 (2024: £59,220m).

The Company declared a £1,175m dividend to its parent, Barclays PLC, in respect of 2025, which is expected to be paid on

or around 10 February 2026.

Dividends paid on preference shares for the year ended 31 December 2025 amounted to £32m (2024: £41m).

Further details on dividends on ordinary shares and preference shares paid in 2025 are set out in Note 10 to the financial

statements.

Share capital

There was no increase in ordinary share capital during the year. BPLC owns 100% of the issued ordinary shares. There are

no restrictions on the transfer of ordinary shares or agreements between holders of ordinary shares known to the Company

which may result in restrictions on the transfer of securities or voting rights. Further information on the Company’s share

capital, including preference shares, can be found in Note 26 of the financial statements.

Shareholder rights in relation to shareholder meetings

The Company is required to hold an annual general meeting each year in addition to such other general meetings as the

directors think fit. 21 clear days' notice must be given for an annual general meeting and 14 clear days'  notice must be given

for any other general meeting.  The Company is also required to hold a general meeting if so requested by a shareholder or

shareholders representing at least 5% of such of the paid-up capital of the Company as carries the right of voting at general

meetings of the Company. Such a meeting must be called within 21 days of the Company being required to hold such a

meeting and must be held not more than 28 days after the notice convening such a meeting.

Notice of a general meeting must be in writing and must specify the place, the day and time of meeting, and the general

nature of the business to be transacted. If a special resolution is proposed, the notice must also specify the intention to

propose the resolution as such.

Subject as noted below, all shareholders are entitled to attend and vote at general meetings.

The quorum for a general meeting is two qualifying persons present and entitled to vote. Voting is done on a show of hands

unless a poll is properly demanded by the chair of the meeting or any shareholder entitled to vote on the resolution.

Shareholders may vote at a general meeting in person or by proxy or, in the case of a corporation, by a duly appointed

corporate representative. At a general meeting, shareholders vote on matters which are required to be approved by

shareholders, by ordinary resolution or special resolution, as a matter of law or in accordance with the articles of association.

An ordinary resolution is passed, on a show of hands, by a simple majority of votes cast or, on a poll, by shareholders

representing a simple majority of total voting rights of the voting shareholders. A special resolution is passed, on a show of

hands, by a majority of not less than 75% of the votes cast or, on a poll, by shareholders representing not less than 75% of

the total voting rights of the voting shareholders.

Holders of preference shares have no right to receive notice of, attend or vote at, any general meetings of the Company.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	17

Governance report

Directors’ report

Powers of Directors to issue and allot or buy back the Company’s shares

The powers of the Directors are determined by the Act and the Articles. No shares were issued or bought back in 2025

except as set out in 'Repurchase of shares' below. The Directors are authorised to issue and allot shares and to buy back

shares subject to annual shareholder approval at the AGM. Such authorities were granted by shareholders at the 2025 AGM.

It will be proposed at the 2026 AGM that the Directors be granted new authorities to allot and buy back shares.

Repurchase of shares

The Company did not repurchase any of its ordinary shares in 2025. 31,856 Euro non-cumulative callable preference shares

of €100 each were redeemed and cancelled by the Company on 16 June 2025.

Directors

The list of current Directors of the Company can be found in the Corporate Governance Statement on page 2. Changes to

Directors during 2025 and up to the date of this report are set out below. As noted elsewhere in this report, Mary Francis will

step down from the Board with effect from 6 May 2026.

Name	Role	Effective date
Diane Schueneman	Non-Executive Director	Stepped down 31 January 2025
Mary Mack	Non-Executive Director	Appointed 1 June 2025

Directors’ indemnities

Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as defined by section 234 of the Act) were in force during the course of the

financial year ended 31 December 2025 for the benefit of the then Directors of the Company and the then directors of

certain of the Company's subsidiaries and, at the date of this report, are in force for the benefit of the Directors of the

Company and the directors of certain of the Company's subsidiaries in relation to certain losses and liabilities which they

may incur (or have incurred) in connection with their duties, powers or office. The Barclays Group also maintains Directors’

& Officers’ Liability Insurance which gives appropriate cover for legal action brought against its Directors.

Qualifying pension scheme indemnity provisions (as defined by section 235 of the Act) were in force during the course of

the financial year ended 31 December 2025 for the benefit of the then directors and, at the date of this report are in force for

the benefit of directors of Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited as trustee of the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund, and

Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited as Trustee of Barclays Capital International Pension Scheme (No.1) and

Barclays PLC Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme. The directors of the trustees are indemnified against liability

incurred in connection with the trustee’s activities in relation to the aforementioned schemes.

Political donations

The Barclays Bank Group did not give any money for political purposes in the UK or outside the UK, nor did it make any

political donations to political parties or other political organisations or to any independent election candidates, or incur any

political expenditure during the year. Details of any political contributions made by the wider Barclays Group can be found in

the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025.

Support for candidates and colleagues with disabilities and long-term conditions

Barclays' commitment to inclusion includes ensuring that candidates with disabilities and long-term health conditions

receive support and adjustments in the application process and beyond. Barclays welcomes applications from all candidates

and is committed to ensuring reasonable adjustments (accommodations) are put in place to ensure a fair and inclusive

candidate experience. Barclays is committed to providing all colleagues with the support and tools they need to have a

productive and fulfilling career. We can consider making adjustments to remove or reduce barriers colleagues might face if

they have a disability, health concern or mental health condition. We also ensure opportunities for training, career

development and promotion are available to all.

Engagement with customers, suppliers and others in a business relationship with the Company

The Barclays Group asks its TPSPs to (i) make responsible decisions that, where relevant, take our stakeholders' needs into

account in both the short and long term and (ii) to comply with all applicable laws, rules and regulations within the

geographies in which they operate.

The Barclays Group’s standard approach1 to TPSP onboarding and contract renewal begins by assessing the inherent risk

associated with the goods and/or services being provided in-line with Barclays’ TPSP risk assessment process. TPSPs that

are assessed as being above a low risk of exposure from a business risk perspective are subject to the Barclays Group’s

Supplier Control Obligations (SCOs). Prior to contractual agreement and service go-live, these TPSPs are required to confirm

adherence to the SCOs (subject to negotiation) and the TPSP CoC.

Note

1Where financial institutions and market counterparties provide services to the Barclays Group, the nature of the services leveraged, may require

an alternate onboarding approach and as such some control expectations may not be applicable. This is assessed at the point of onboarding.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	18

Governance report

Directors’ report

TPSPs to whom the SCOs apply will be actively managed and subject to controls assurance on an annual basis to assess

whether the control requirements and expectations outlined within the TPSP CoC are being met. Where TPSPs are unable to

meet our expectations defined within the SCOs and the TPSP CoC, the issue will be managed, as appropriate, in-line with the

Barclays Group’s Issue Management Standard. The TPSP CoC and SCOs are published on the Barclays Group public website

for all new and existing TPSPs to view and are refreshed at least annually to help ensure the Barclays Group expectations

continue to be met.

Branches and Country-by-Country reporting

The Barclays Bank Group operates through branches, offices and subsidiaries in the UK and overseas. Those branches are in

a number of different jurisdictions including in Hong Kong, Singapore and New York. The Company is exempt from

publishing information required by the Capital Requirements (Country-by-Country Reporting) Regulations 2013 as this

information is published by its parent, BPLC. This information is available on the Barclays website: home.barclays/

annualreport.

Research and development

In the ordinary course of business, the Barclays Bank Group develops new products and services in each of its business

divisions.

Key intangible resources

Our key intangible resources are those resources without physical substance on which our business model fundamentally

depends. We deploy them to serve the financial needs of our diversified customer base, delivering value through synergies,

providing clear outcomes for our stakeholders. They include our:

•People, purpose, values and mindset - Our people are our organisation. We deliver success through a purpose-

driven and inclusive culture;

•Brand - Our brand equity instils trust, lowers the cost of acquiring customers and clients and helps retain them for

longer; and

•Technology and infrastructure - Our deep technology and infrastructure capabilities drive customer experiences

and support strong resiliency.

Change of control

There are no significant agreements to which the Company is a party that take effect, alter or terminate on a change of

control of the Company following a takeover bid.

There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office

or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid.

Statutory auditor

The BPLC Board Audit Committee reviews the appointment of the Barclays Group statutory auditor, as well as their

relationship with the Barclays Group, including monitoring the Barclays Group’s use of the statutory auditors for non-audit

services and the balance of audit and non-audit fees paid to them. The BBPLC Board Audit Committee also monitors the use

of the statutory auditor for non-audit services within the Barclays Bank Group.

In our 2024 Annual Report, we disclosed Barclays PLC's intention to conduct a formal audit tender process for the role of the

Barclays Group statutory auditor (including BBPLC). The audit tender process was conducted in early 2025 and overseen by

the BPLC Board Audit Committee (with support from the BBPLC Board Audit Committee). Following conclusion of the audit

tender process in May 2025, upon recommendation from the BBPLC Board Audit Committee, the BBPLC Board confirmed

the re-appointment of KPMG as BBPLC's statutory auditor with effect from the financial year ending 31 December 2027.

For further information about the audit tender process, please refer to the report of the Board Audit Committee in the

Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025.

Non-audit services

In order to safeguard the statutory auditor’s independence and objectivity, the Barclays Group has in place a policy on the

Provision of Services by the Barclays Group Statutory Auditor (the Policy) setting out the circumstances in which the

statutory auditor may be engaged to provide services other than those covered by the Barclays Group audit. The Policy

applies to all Barclays subsidiaries and other material entities over which Barclays has significant influence. The core

principle of the Policy is that non-audit services (other than those legally required to be carried out by the Barclays Group’s

auditor) should be performed by the statutory auditor only in certain controlled circumstances. The Policy sets out those

types of services that are permitted.

Under the Policy, except for specific categories of ‘permitted’ services that require explicit Board Audit Committee approval,

the BPLC Board Audit Committee has pre-approved all permitted services for which fees are less than £100,000 and certain

other annual recurring non-audit services. All requests to engage the statutory auditor are assessed by independent

management before work can commence. Requests for permitted service types in respect of which the fees are expected to

meet or exceed the above threshold, but expected to be less than £250,000, must be approved by the Chair of the BPLC

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	19

Governance report

Directors’ report

Board Audit Committee before work is permitted to begin. Services where the fees are expected to be £250,000 or higher

must be approved by the BPLC Board Audit Committee as a whole. All expenses and disbursements must be included in the

fees calculation. More information on the Policy can be found in the Barclays PLC Annual Report 2025.

The fees payable to KPMG for the year ended 31 December 2025 amounted to £57m (2024: £57m), of which £16m (2024:

£15m) was payable in respect of non-audit services. A breakdown of the fees payable to the auditor for statutory audit and

non-audit work can be found in Note 38 to the financial statements.

Disclosure of information to the Auditor

Each Director confirms that, so far as they are aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditor

is unaware and that each of the Directors has taken all the steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to make

themself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company's auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given pursuant to section 418 of the Act and should be interpreted in accordance with and subject to

those provisions.

Directors’ responsibilities

The following statements, which should be read in conjunction with the auditor’s report set out on pages 172 to 174, are

made with a view to distinguishing for shareholders the respective responsibilities of the Directors and of the auditor in

relation to the accounts.

Going concern

In preparing each of the Barclays Bank Group and Company financial statements, the Directors are required to:

•assess the Barclays Bank Group's and Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable,

matters related to going concern; and

•use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Barclays Bank Group and the

Company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The Barclays Bank Group’s business activities, financial position, capital, factors likely to affect its future development and

performance, and its objectives and policies in managing the financial risks to which it is exposed are discussed in the Risk

review section of this report.

The Directors have evaluated these risks in the preparation of the financial statements and consider it appropriate to prepare

the financial statements on a going concern basis.

Preparation of accounts

The Directors are required by the Act to prepare the Company and the Barclays Bank Group accounts for each financial year

and, with regard to Barclays Bank Group accounts, in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards. The

Directors have prepared these accounts in accordance with (a) UK-adopted international accounting standards; (b) IFRS as

issued by the IASB, including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee; and (c) IFRS adopted pursuant to

Regulation (EC) No 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union. Pursuant to the Act, the Directors must not approve the

accounts unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Barclays Bank Group and the

Company and of their profit or loss for that period.

The Directors consider that, in preparing the financial statements, the Barclays Bank Group and the Company have used

appropriate accounting policies, supported by reasonable judgements and estimates, and that all accounting standards

which they consider to be applicable have been followed.

The Directors are satisfied that the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and

understandable, and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Company’s position and performance,

business model and strategy.

Directors are responsible for such internal controls as they determine are necessary to enable the preparation of financial

statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

By order of the Board

Hannah Ellwood

Company Secretary

9 February 2026

Barclays Bank PLC

Registered in England. Company No. 1026167

Registered office, 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	20

Schedule to the Directors' Report: Sustainability Statement

General information

Sustainability Governance

Board and Board Committee oversight of sustainability matters

Specific information relating to our Board and its Committees can be found in the Corporate governance statement from

page 2. In particular:

•Information on the composition and diversity of our Board and its Committees is set out on page 2 (the table in

‘The Board’ section), page 5 (Principle Two: Division of responsibilities, ‘The Board’ section), page 7 (Principle

Three: Composition, succession and evaluation, the tables setting out industry and leadership experience and

international experience) and page 8 (Principle Three: Composition, succession and evaluation, the ‘Inclusion and

opportunity’ section);

•Information on the roles and responsibilities of our Board and its Committees in relation to sustainability matters

and how these are reflected in governance documentation is set out on page 14 (Additional information relating to

sustainability matters, the ‘Board and Board Committee oversight of sustainability matters’ section);

•Information relating to the skills and expertise of Board and Committee members in relation to sustainability

matters is set out on page 15 (Additional information relating to sustainability matters, the ‘Skills and expertise

related to sustainability matters’ section);

•For further information on how the Board and its Committees are informed about our material impacts, risks and

opportunities, see page 15 (Additional information relating to sustainability matters, the ‘Skills and expertise related

to sustainability matters’ section);

•For further information on how the Board and its Committees consider our material impacts, risks and

opportunities when overseeing our strategy, risk management and any decisions on major transactions, see page

14 (Additional information relating to sustainability matters, the ‘Board and Board Committee oversight of

sustainability matters’ section); and

•Information about the material risks, impacts and opportunities considered by the Board and its Committees during

2025 is set out on page 15 (Additional information relating to sustainability matters section).

Management’s role in the governance processes

Oversight and management of Barclays' climate and sustainability strategy, of which Barclays Bank Group is a key

contributor, continues to be embedded in business-as-usual management structures, including executive committees.

These committees are mandated and form part of Barclays’ formal governance architecture. Each committee is itself

governed by Terms of Reference that lay out the duties, decision-making authority and escalation route of any material

issues. The executive management committees receive periodic briefings on matters including climate change and consider

both risks and opportunities. Climate and sustainability-related risks are assessed and escalated where relevant through the

various risk forums.

The GSC is a sub-committee of Group ExCo and is chaired by the Group Head of PPCR. GSC members include senior

sustainability representatives from across the businesses, including the Group Head of Sustainable and Transition Finance,

as well as members representing key functions across the Group.

The GSC is responsible for approving and recommending sustainability matters on behalf of Group ExCo to the Board

Sustainability Committee as appropriate. The GSC is also responsible for determining, agreeing or recommending

sustainability position statements, frameworks, targets, relevant disclosures and advocacy areas necessary to support

strategy delivery and agreeing the strategic change priorities to support overall sustainability strategy.

The Group Risk Committee (GRC) is the designated forum to review risk profile, risk practices and recommend, where

necessary, updates to the Board Risk Committee. In relation to climate, the GRC reviews and recommends proposed risk

appetite and relevant limits to the BRC. To support the oversight of Barclays' climate risk profile, the Climate Risk Committee

('CRC') was established  as a sub-committee of GRC. The CRC is responsible for reviewing and approved a range of updates

including the climate risk exposures, risk appetite, limits and plans for embedding climate risk into business activities.

Additionally, climate-related risk metrics, risk trends, climate scenario analysis and stress test exercises, and progress against

targets are reviewed and discussed at the CRC.

The Disclosure Committee (DisCom), which is chaired by the Group Finance Director, has been set up as a sub-committee

of the Group ExCo. DisCom is convened to review and monitor the integrity of the Group’s financial and narrative

statements and other information provided to stakeholders, whether by means of announcement or otherwise. In addition

to reporting to the Group ExCo, DisCom also reports to the Board Audit Committee (BAC). DisCom is convened to undertake

a number of specific duties, including:

•Financial reporting: to review and monitor the integrity of the Group’s financial statements, interim management

statements, preliminary announcements (if prepared), and any other formal announcements relating to the

Group’s financial performance

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	21

Schedule to the Directors' Report: Sustainability Statement

General information

•Narrative reporting: to review and monitor the integrity of the Group’s narrative statements, including but not

limited to the BPLC, BBPLC and BBUKPLC Annual Reports, the BPLC Country Snapshot and the BPLC Modern

Slavery Statement

The Group Reputation Risk Committee (GRRC) is a sub-committee of the Group ExCo which reviews and challenges, and

directs as appropriate, the management and mitigation of Reputation Risk matters in Barclays Group as they are brought to

the attention of the GRRC via relevant Reputation Risk assessment and escalation processes. This includes Reputation Risk

associated with sustainability related matters. The GRRC is co-chaired by the Head of Public Policy and Corporate

Responsibility and Group Chief Compliance Officer, and members include the Group Chief Risk Officer and Group General

Counsel.

BBPLC Business-Level Committees

Business-level committees are convened for senior management to review transactions with potential material Reputation

Risk to Barclays, These may include transactions involving climate and sustainability-related risks. Where particularly

heightened risks are identified, these transactions may be escalated to the Group Reputation Risk Committee.  Matters

reviewed by these committees include transactions, relationships, agreements, strategies and other business activities.

ERMF Oversight

The ERMF governs the way in which the Barclays Bank Group identifies and manages its risks. It outlines the highest level

arrangements for risk management by setting out standards, objectives and key responsibilities of different groups of

employees of the Barclays Bank Group. The ERMF is complemented by frameworks, policies and standards which are mainly

aligned to individual principal risks:

•frameworks cover high-level principles guiding the management of principal risks, and set out details of which

policies are needed, and high-level governance arrangements;

•policies set out the control objectives and high-level requirements to address the key principles articulated in their

associated frameworks. Policies state ‘what’ those within scope are required to do; and

•standards set out details of the control requirements to ensure the control objectives set by the policies are met.

In relation to the management of material impacts and opportunities, our standard business controls and operating

procedures apply.

Sustainability-Related Performance in Incentive Schemes

Barclays’ Reward Policy, and the remuneration philosophy within, applies to all colleagues globally. It is set by the BPLC

Board Remuneration Committee and adopted by the BBPLC Board Remuneration Committee and is designed to promote the

long-term success of Barclays and ensure that remuneration is aligned to the Barclays strategy and risk management

approach. The remuneration philosophy includes our objectives to:

•Reward sustainable performance. Sustainable performance means making a positive and enduring difference to

investors, customers and communities, delivering good customer outcomes, taking pride in leaving things better

than we found them, and playing a valuable role in society.

•Support Barclays’ Values and culture, meaning that results must be achieved in a manner consistent with our

Values, and emphasising that our Values, culture and Mindset should drive the way that business is conducted.

•Align pay with risk appetite, risk exposure and conduct expectations, including sustainability-related risks. Barclays’

remuneration approach is designed to reward colleagues for achieving results in line with the Barclays' risk appetite

and conduct expectations.

Incentives are delivered in the form of annual bonus awards for all employees (subject to eligibility criteria) and Long Term

Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards for the Executive Directors of BBPLC. Non-Executive Directors of BBPLC are not eligible for

annual bonus awards or other incentives.

Annual bonuses incentivise and reward the achievement of the Barclays Group, business and individual objectives, and

reward colleagues for demonstrating behaviours in line with Barclays’ Values and Mindset. Climate and sustainability-related

performance is factored into annual bonus outcomes in two ways – via its impact on incentive pools and through individual

performance assessments.

In determining the Group and BB PLC incentive pools, Barclays’ performance against non-financial measures, including

climate and sustainability-related measures, is considered, impacting annual bonus awards of all employees. Since the

assessment is holistic, there is no predetermined weighting for sustainability-related measures. For 2025, climate and

sustainability-related measures considered as part of this assessment included:

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	22

Schedule to the Directors' Report: Sustainability Statement

General information

•climate-related measures focused on progress towards Barclays’ Sustainable and Transition Finance target,

reductions in its financed emissions and progress against targets relating to achieving net zero operations;

•consideration of how Barclays is investing in communities through programmes such as LifeSkills (including

number of people upskilled and placed into work);

•colleague-related measures including engagement, culture and inclusion.

The incentive pools are also adjusted to take account of risks, both crystalised and potential future risks, and consideration is

given to vulnerabilities across all of Barclays’ principal risks, which include climate risk.

Performance for all colleagues is assessed against individual performance objectives aligned to the consistently excellent

standard. Where relevant, these objectives include sustainability-related considerations, which are tailored to the individual’s

role. Individual bonus outcomes are determined based on Barclays Group, business and individual performance, and are

discretionary, so there is no predetermined weighting for sustainability-related measures (except for the Executive Directors

of BB PLC as described below). For employees earning higher bonuses and other employees identified as ‘Material Risk

Takers’, a significant portion of their annual bonus is deferred.

The Group Executive Committee members responsible for Barclays’ five business divisions, including those who are also BB

PLC Executive Committee members, have specific climate and sustainability-related objectives relevant to the businesses

they manage included in their performance objectives and assessment. Their remuneration approach is aligned with the

approach for all other colleagues and is reviewed annually by the BB PLC Board Remuneration Committee and, where

appropriate, the B PLC Board Remuneration Committee. No individual is involved in deciding their own remuneration.

For the Executive Directors of BB PLC, who are also Executive Directors of B PLC, incentive outcomes are more structured

than for other employees. The B PLC Board Remuneration Committee sets financial and non-financial measures aligned with

the Barclays strategic priorities at the start of the performance period for each award. At the end of the performance period,

performance against the measures is assessed and a detailed retrospective narrative is provided in the Annual Report. The

measures include:

•In the 2025 annual bonus, 10% is based on a combination of measures relating to customers, clients and

colleagues, which include engagement, culture and inclusion. A further 5% is based on an assessment of

performance against risk awareness and operational excellence measures. The same will apply for the 2026 annual

bonus.

•In the 2025-2027 LTIP, and the 2026-2028 LTIP, climate and sustainability-related measures are included as part of

a broader category of measures relating to sustainability, customers and clients, weighted at 25%. The

sustainability-related measures will likely include financing clients’ transition, reducing our financed emissions and

achieving net zero operations, as well as supporting our communities.

Strategy, business model and value chain

Business model

Barclays Bank Group's business model is aligned with the business model of Barclays Group. Barclays deploys its tangible

and intangible assets, including people, technology, infrastructure and brand, to serve the financial needs of its diversified

customer base, create synergies across the organisation, generate a well-diversified income stream and provide positive

outcomes for its stakeholders.

Significant products, services, significant markets and customer groups

Barclays Bank Group's products and services and significant markets and clients served, including the UK, US and Europe,

are outlined in the Investment Bank, UK Corporate Bank, US Consumer Bank and Barclays Private Bank and Wealth

Management content within our Performance review section set out on page 310.

Headcount

Barclays Bank Group had a workforce of 23,088 employees globally at the end of FY25 (FY24: 23,788).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	23

Schedule to the Directors' Report: Sustainability Statement

General information

Main features of our upstream and downstream value chain

Direct relationships in value chain

Upstream

•Investors: Barclays Bank Group is a wholly owned subsidiary of the Barclays Group, focused on creating long-term

sustainable value for Barclays and ultimately its shareholders. Barclays Bank Group is also a frequent issuer in the

debt capital markets and have wholesale and retail debt investors.

•Third-Party Service Providers (TPSPs)1: A TPSP is any entity that has entered into an arrangement with Barclays'

entities, including those in the Barclays Bank Group, to provide business functions, activities, goods and/or

services. For example, through TPSPs, Barclays Bank Group obtains a wide range of goods and services including

technology and facilities management, client-focused payment solutions, customer service, and clearing services,

supporting colleagues through recruitment services, learning partnerships and other TPSPs that support multiple

functions through data services.

Downstream

•Clients and Customers: Investment banking clients include corporates, money managers, financial institutions,

governments and global organisations. Corporate clients are also served through the UK Corporate Bank. Private

Bank and Wealth Management primarily cater to high net-worth individuals. US Consumer Bank caters to retail and

non-retail clients through the provision of cards. Barclays Bank Group also partners with distributors to provide co-

branded cards.

Indirect relationships in value chain

•Affected communities: Individuals or groups who may be affected by the actions, operations and/or value chains

of those parties in Barclays Bank Group's upstream (TPSPs) or downstream (Clients and Customers) value chain.

•Workers in our value chain: Individuals who work in Barclays Bank Group's upstream or downstream value chains

but may not have a direct contractual relationship with the Barclays Bank Group.

Note:

1  Third-Party Service Providers are equivalent to suppliers as defined in Annex II- Acronyms and Glossary of Terms in ESRS, published by Council of

European Union

Sustainability strategy and goals

Barclays Bank Group contributes to Barclays' sustainability strategy and goals. These are primarily focused on impacts, risks

and opportunities arising from financing activities. Barclays Bank Group supports Barclays’ climate strategy, which focuses

on working with clients on their transition, financing clients’ transition, and scaling climate technology, while integrating

nature and social considerations. This is reflected in Barclays' target to facilitate $1trn of Sustainable and Transition Finance

between 2023 and the end of 2030. The products and services offered as a part of this strategy are financing activities

including debt and equity capital markets, corporate lending, trade finance and consumer lending. It applies to all Barclays

businesses globally. These products and services help to generate positive social and environmental outcomes through

financing of activities such as, but not limited to, energy efficiency, renewable energy, affordable housing, basic

infrastructure and services.

Barclays Bank Group products and services that support the Barclays climate strategy are as follows:

UKCB: Delivered through proactive engagement, thought leadership, and continuous development of new sustainable

solutions, we work with clients to understand their transition ambitions and challenges to provide an enhanced offering.

PBWM: Responsible investing and sustainable investing solutions focus on ESG integration and dedicated sustainable

investment strategies, as appropriate per the relevant mandates.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	24

Schedule to the Directors' Report: Sustainability Statement

General information

IB: Blending the existing expertise and relationships in our coverage groups with specialised teams focused on sustainable

finance growth areas – providing enhanced and integrated solutions for our clients.

Barclays has set 2030 financed emissions reduction targets for eight high-emitting sectors set out on page 31. More

generally, our broader sustainability goals include developing ways to effectively mitigate our material potential

sustainability impacts and risks which could impact our customers and services, for example through the effective

management of potential data privacy and cyber security impacts globally.

The Third Party Service Provider Code of Conduct (TPSP CoC) encourages our TPSPs to adopt our approach to doing

business and details our expectations for matters including environmental management, human rights and also for living the

Barclays Values. The TPSP CoC is published on the Barclays public website for all new and existing TPSPs to view and are

refreshed at least annually.

Our sustainability goals in relation to other stakeholders (such as investors and regulators) are focused on maintaining and

strengthening these relationships, and continuing to develop understanding of their individual sustainability related views,

goals, expectations and challenges.

Main challenges ahead relevant to sustainability reporting

We recognise that, as part of Barclays, we have an important role to play in the transition, we cannot tackle this challenge on

our own and that Barclays' ability to implement its climate strategy and deliver against its targets depends heavily on client

progress and a wide range of external factors. We will consider and adapt our approach as needed to reflect the evolving

landscape.

The development of sustainability related metrics, targets and disclosures are also dependent on data availability. Barclays

relies on disclosures made by its clients and customers, which at this time are complex and still evolving, to be reliable and

consistent. Further information is set out in the Important Information section on page 37.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	25

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

Strategy

Barclays recognises that climate change has widespread impacts on the group and its legal entities, its clients and the

broader economy. Barclays integrates climate risk considerations into its strategy, scenario analysis, policies and actions, risk

management frameworks, and performance metrics and targets to ensure a resilient and sustainable response to climate

change. Barclays ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050, approved by shareholders in 2020, was driven by a recognition of

the risks and opportunities associated with climate change. Since then, Barclays  has continued to deliver against its strategy

whilst at the same time, evolving its approach in recognition of the realities of the transition. The Barclays Transition Update

(BTU): Clients, Capital and Innovation, published in July 2025, sets out how the Group plans to continue delivering on its net

zero ambition.

Transition plan for climate change

Barclays Bank Group does not have its own transition plan for climate change mitigation, nor does it plan to adopt its own

transition plan. However, Barclays Bank Group forms part of Barclays and, as such, alongside other Barclays Group

companies, will contribute to achieving Barclays ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. The actions taken by Barclays Bank

Group are grouped under decarbonisation levers and captured on page 29.

The BTU outlines the role that Barclays can play in supporting its clients as they navigate the opportunities and challenges

from transitioning to a low-carbon economy and how overall it is managing the risks presented by the transition. The update

is structured around three themes that Barclays as a whole is focusing on: working with clients on their transition, financing

clients’ transition and scaling climate technology. The update is published on the Barclays website.

Climate related risks and scenario analysis

Barclays Bank Group is exposed to climate-related risks indirectly through its downstream financing and investment

activities. The feedback effects of climate risk drivers through macro and micro transmission channels when materialised are

likely to be observed in Barclays Banks Group's portfolios in its traditional risk categories such as credit risk, market risk,

treasury and capital risk, and operational risk. Climate risk is recognised as a driver of other existing financial risks (credit

risk, market risk, treasury and capital risk) and non-financial risks (including operational risk and reputation risk).

Climate risk is designated as a principal risk under Barclays' Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), with the

purpose of capturing the impact of climate change on the Barclays Bank Group's financial and operational risk categories.

For climate risk as a principal risk, Barclays has developed and implemented a dedicated risk framework, the Climate Risk

Framework, which integrates within the broader ERMF aiming to guide effective management of climate risk and support

the delivery of the Barclays' Climate Strategy. This framework is applicable to all legal entities in the Barclay's Group

(including Barclays Bank Group) and business lines. Climate change can also drive non-financial risk categories such as

reputational risks mainly in connection with the negative impacts on climate, which continue to be managed under their

respective frameworks. Barclays Bank Group continuously updates and refines its risk management practices and internal

frameworks.

Identifying and assessing climate risk in downstream financing and investment activities

The Climate Risk Framework supports in establishing a systematic and enterprise-wide approach to managing financial and

operational risks from climate change. The approach to identifying, measuring and managing climate-related risks is

consistent with other key risks, focusing on those climate risk drivers that are relevant and could amplify financial and

operational risk types. The potential impacts of transition risk drivers will vary across Barclays Bank Group's portfolios

depending on composition, industry, geographic location, business operations and other contextual factors. Transition risk

is defined by Barclays as the risk of financial losses caused by the changes driven by the economy shifting to a lower carbon

basis, including for example changes in policy, technology and consumer and investor sentiment. Transition risks could

occur in all timeframes. There remains significant uncertainty around the speed and scale of the transition. Assessments

across short (0-1 yr), medium (1-5 yrs) and long-term (>5yrs) timeframes are conducted to understand and quantify the

impact of climate transition risks on its financed portfolios and risk types. The approach is customised to reflect portfolio

characteristics, size and exposure to specific climate risk drivers (including transition risk drivers) within various portfolios.

Barclays has leveraged and enhanced its risk taxonomy and existing risk identification processes, such as horizon scanning,

sector and geographical assessments to connect and understand the impact of various transition risk drivers on its existing

risk categories. Please refer to the Climate Risk Management section (page 71) for further details.

Barclays Bank Group uses its risk register process to assess the potential effects of climate risk drivers on its existing

financial and operational risk categories and portfolios across various time horizons. The materiality of financial impact from

climate risks is derived either quantitatively (typically based on stress testing) or through qualitative estimations. The

outcome of this process feeds into the double materiality assessment to identify and flag material sustainability topics for

the firm.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	26

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

Climate Scenario Analysis

Climate Scenario Analysis forms a key part of the Barclays Bank Group's approach to assessing and quantifying the impact

of both physical and transition risks in our portfolios. Through climate scenario analysis, the climate-related risks and

uncertainties can be translated into financial impacts to Barclays, allowing Barclays (including Barclays Bank Group) to

identify risks and better understand the resilience of its business strategy and the impact on the Bank's business.

Barclays uses climate scenario analysis primarily for (1) understanding Barclays’ resilience to climate scenarios, (2) as a

consideration within its financial planning process, (3) as a consideration within its assessment of Expected Credit Losses

reported under IFRS 9. Barclays continues to build its use of scenario analysis to explore and further understand the evolving

landscape – identifying areas of risks and opportunities – to challenge existing assumptions of future climate pathways and

measure the risks that climate change poses to us.

Two stress tests incorporating climate risk were conducted during 2025, each with its own scenario aligned to a less than

2°C pathway. Whilst we only assessed transition risk to be material, the scenarios explored Barclays’ financial resilience to

both transition and physical risks. Firstly, the 2025 annual Internal Stress Test (IST25) featured a scenario with climate risk

drivers over a five-year period. Secondly, a climate-based Reverse Stress Test (RST) was run with a shorter-term focus,

designed to test resilience to extreme, near-term climate events.

Based on the results of the scenario analyses performed to date, our view is that Barclays Bank Groups' strategy remains

resilient to climate scenarios. Given the evolving climate landscape, we seek to further enhance our capabilities and

modelling to refine our understanding of Barclays Bank Groups' resilience to various climate scenarios, particularly given

high uncertainty in this area.

The IST25 was conducted as a Group-wide exercise across all portfolios, with the scenario specifically designed to evaluate

Barclays Bank Groups’ ability to withstand both climate-related and traditional macroeconomic risks. This year’s scenario

placed greater emphasis on physical climate risks than in previous years. Variable paths were benchmarked against NGFS

(Network for Greening the Financial System) short‑term scenarios wherever narratives aligned, ensuring stronger

consistency with industry‑standard methodologies.

Scenario analysis - scope and process

The IST25 climate scenario consists of three chronological stages. These stages include initial policy announcements that

trigger immediate asset repricing, while more stringent policy requirements unfold over a longer time horizon - dampening

recovery in years 3 to 5. Against this backdrop, the scenario stages also incorporate physical risk considerations:  In the first

two years, severe ‘stormy and wet’ weather occurs, characterised through floods and hurricanes. This is followed by three

years of ‘hot and dry’ weather, resulting in water stress and wildfires.  The insurance market tightens in the face of increased

claims, with restricted risk appetite in high-risk zones and to key perils. Events create greater societal awareness of physical

risks and their damages, shifting preferences towards lower risk assets.

The scenario's three stages include the following key events over five years, which is aligned to our short and medium-term

horizons for climate risk generally:

Stage 1:

•Consumer preferences shift toward greener products and practices, particularly in the UK and EU, while

consumption is cut to cope with the recessionary environment. Behavioural shifts are pronounced at sector level as

consumers turn away from firms who finance carbon-heavy industries.

•Investors reassess their participation with certain firms. Those with heavy exposure to brown income and/or

assets, combined with poor transition plans, are negatively impacted in equity markets – with capital reallocated to

greener firms.

Stage 2:

•Regional climate policy divergence grows as UK, EU and China forge ahead as leaders on the transition, with India

pivoting because of increased energy security concerns, and the US continuing to focus on domestic fossil fuel

energy production, putting downward pressure on oil and gas prices. Low carbon investments surge due to

accelerated investment in the Power grid and Electric Vehicles (EV) infrastructure, supported by declining costs and

efficiency increases.

•In 2028, the UK and EU accelerate or announce additional climate policies. Governments rapidly scale up

investment in EV charging infrastructure to speed up the automotive sector’s transition. Existing emissions trading

schemes are strengthened to align with a 1.5°C pathway, triggering a significant carbon price shock in 2028. This

slows economic recovery and leads to heightened inflation as production costs rise due to increased energy costs,

although some of these impacts are partially offset by substantial public and private investment aimed at enabling

a faster transition. Carbon Border Adjustment Mechanisms (CBAMs) are introduced, causing supply-side shocks

and increased trade frictions. Proposals to tighten EPC minimum standards are accelerated, bringing forward

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	27

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

compliance deadlines for Buy-to-Let, Social Housing, and UK Commercial Real Estate properties to achieve EPC

rating C or above.

•In the US, no additional climate policy is assumed at this stage. Nevertheless, some indirect effects are felt from the

transition in Europe, primarily through reduced demand for carbon-intensive US exports as CBAMs decrease their

competitiveness, and global fossil fuel price shocks.

Stage 3:

•By 2029, carbon price growth in the UK and EU slows but remains high. Technological progress, coupled with

global capital shifting towards low-carbon solutions, drives the creation of new green jobs.

•In 2029, the US makes a rapid pivot back to transition policy, aiming to catch up domestically in low-carbon

technologies. Policies similar to those introduced in Stage 2 in Europe are implemented, with similar inflationary

impacts.

The scenario will have significant impacts on Barclays, including:

1.Amplified market shocks: additional to existing macroeconomic shocks, there will be further equity and credit

shocks for brown industries and financiers, as a result of immediate repricing.

2.Amplified credit deterioration: additional credit risk on brown industries as a result of lower earnings expectations

and refinancing risks.

3.Increase in frequency of physical risk events: throughout the time horizon, there is an increase in the occurrence of

physical hazards such as flood, hurricanes and droughts.

Results and insights

Results of the exercise indicate that losses are again highest within the Investment Bank, primarily driven by exposures to

carbon-intensive sectors that are most vulnerable to the combined effects of transition and physical climate risks. In

particular, the scenario featured a sharp rise in carbon prices in the EU and UK, with the EU Emissions Trading System (ETS)

price rising to $309/tCO2e. This was driven by a decline in global oil and gas demand, accelerated transition policies and the

increasing cost burden from carbon pricing, all of which placed pressure on profitability in these industries.

The impacts of the IST25 scenario remain manageable within the Bank’s established risk profile. The IST25 results are fully

integrated into the Group’s Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP), informing the setting of risk appetite

and supporting the Board’s approval of the medium-term capital plan. The scenario confirms that the Group’s capital and

liquidity positions remain robust, with headroom above regulatory and internal thresholds. Management actions, both

business-as-usual and strategic, provide additional capacity to absorb stress impacts if required.

Challenges and limitations

Barclays is continuing to better its understanding of the interlinking relationships between climate, particularly transition

risk, and macro variables. A lack of adequate historical data is a key limitation to progress modelling capabilities. Inherent

challenges exist in climate modelling due to limitations in data quality and availability, given the short history of climate

assessments within the financial services industry.

There exist inherent uncertainties with scenario design largely attributed to limited history of the interactions between

climate risks and the economy. There is a level of uncertainty with climate stress-testing projections in (i) how the scenario

will manifest; (ii) how customers and clients will react; and (iii) the final loss quantification. Over longer time horizons, it

becomes increasingly difficult to capture the range of second-order effects as physical and transition risks evolve, assess the

rate in which risks manifest or subside, or identify inflection points. During 2025, Barclays conducted an exploratory exercise

to extend climate scenario analysis from a 5‑year period to a 10‑year period. We continue to reflect on the outcomes of this

exercise to deepen our understanding and support the further development of long‑term assessment capabilities.

It is recognised, however, that further advances in modelling capability and data availability are required to fully capture the

potential extent of climate-related losses. Given the evolving climate landscape, we seek to further enhance our capabilities

and modelling to refine our understanding of the Barclays Bank Group's resilience to various climate scenarios, particularly

given high uncertainty in this area.

Policies

Policies relating to Climate Change Mitigation Impacts

Climate Change Statement

Barclays Bank Group applies the Barclays position statement titled ‘Climate Change Statement’ to manage our downstream

negative impact in certain high-emitting sectors. The statement addresses climate change mitigation and relates to the

negative downstream impact that Barclays Bank Group can have by continuing to finance activities and/or companies active

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	28

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

in high-emitting sectors which significantly contribute to global emissions. The statement does not address climate change

adaptation, energy efficiency or renewable energy deployment. With regard to climate change adaptation, energy efficiency

and renewable energy deployment, we address this by including the financing of the above activities as eligible under our

Sustainable and Transition Finance Frameworks, to be counted towards Barclays Group target to facilitate $1 trillion of

Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030.

The Climate Change Statement sets out Barclays' position and approach to certain high-emitting sectors. The statement has

been developed in addition to Barclays sector-specific emission reduction targets consistent with the Barclays Purpose. The

statement considers risk and market factors for energy and power sectors.

The key contents of the Climate Change Statement are:

•Conditions or restrictions on the financing of certain activities, such as project finance for expansion projects in

upstream oil and gas, or financing provided to certain clients or groups active in sectors including but not limited to

upstream oil and gas, thermal coal mining and thermal coal power.

•The applicability of stated financing restrictions and the governance approach of the statement.

•A brief overview of the following:

–The Client Transition Framework (CTF) evaluates our in-scope clients’ progress towards business models

aligned to a low-carbon economy.

–The Client Transition Review Forum (CTRF) which carries out targeted reviews of groups (any entity, the

relevant parent company and its consolidated subsidiaries, as a whole) subject to a CTF assessment. These

reviews are informed by the CTF assessment and take into account consideration of relevant risks and other

business factors.

–The approach to Sustainability Enhanced Due Diligence (SEDD) which evaluates groups that are in scope of

the statement, their performance on a range of environmental and social issues in addition to adherence to

restrictions detailed in our external position statements (taking into account regional and jurisdictional

considerations)

Clients in-scope of our Climate Change Statement are subject to SEDD and assessed against the Equator Principles (if a

project finance or credit transaction is deemed to be in scope) including, where appropriate, any relevant International

Finance Corporation (IFC) performance standards. The Performance Standards are directed towards clients, providing

guidance on how to identify risks and impacts, and are designed to help avoid, mitigate and manage risks and impacts as a

way of doing business in a sustainable way, including stakeholder engagement and disclosure obligations of the client in

relation to project-level activities.

Additional SEDD questions will vary by sector, for instance, for Biomass, this process will also consider the sustainable

sourcing of feedstock. External technical input may be obtained to assist the business in reviewing and assessing whether

certain Group activities meet our internal SEDD criteria, or where there is uncertainty as to whether a certain activity is within

scope of our SEDD criteria.

The Climate Change Statement is periodically reviewed and updates are considered in light of the rapidly changing external

environment. The statement is informed by engagement with Barclays stakeholders, including shareholders, clients, subject

specialists and civil society. Barclays also use these engagements to share the statement with affected stakeholders and

clients. Any review of this Statement will be undertaken by the Barclays Group Sustainability Committee with escalation to

the Barclays Board Sustainability Committee or the Barclays Board (as appropriate).

Group-wide frameworks, policies and standards will be adopted throughout Barclays and applied unless local laws or

regulations require otherwise. As such, the BB PLC CEO is the most senior individual in the organisation that is accountable

for the implementation of the statement.

The scope of the statement is outlined in the table below and covers our approach to financing sectors such as Upstream Oil

and Gas, Unconventional Oil and Gas, Thermal Coal Mining, Thermal Coal Power, Mountain Top Removal Coal Mining and

SEDD requirements for Biomass.

Applicability of financing restrictions in Barclays Climate Change Statement

•Any existing commitments or financing entered into prior to any of the restrictions coming into effect under the

Upstream Oil & Gas and Unconventional Oil & Gas sections of this statement may remain in place (but refinancings

of any such commitments or financing shall be subject to the restrictions described above).

•In certain cases, we may enter into Sustainable Finance or Transition Finance transactions with an entity in a Group

that would otherwise be restricted as a result of the application of the Upstream Oil & Gas section of this statement

where Barclays is satisfied that any Sustainable Finance or Transition Finance transactions provided to it will not be

used directly to support oil & gas activity.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	29

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

•In cases where clients are identified as not meeting the non-mandatory expectations and Barclays has an active

relationship with those clients, we encourage them to adhere to these expectations. Where clients are unable or

unwilling to do so over time, we will review the relationship and may reduce our support.

Policies relating to Climate Change Transition in downstream financing

Barclays Bank Group has adopted and implemented the Climate Risk Framework for Climate - Principal risk, focusing on

managing impacts on financial and operational risk categories from climate change within the broader ERMF aiming to

guide effective management of climate risk and support the delivery of its Climate Strategy. The Climate Risk Framework is

underpinned by the Climate Risk Policy and Climate Risk Standard which collectively aim to embed climate-related

considerations into Barclays’ risk management practices. The Group Head of Climate Risk is the owner of climate risk as a

principal risk, accountable for the management and oversight of this framework and associated policies and standards.

The Climate Risk Policy and Climate Risk Standard set out the control objectives and minimum control requirements for

managing climate risk across different stages of the risk management cycle (across risk identification and assessment,

management and mitigation, monitoring and reporting). Further, these components guide Barclays Bank Group in managing

transition risks in its financed portfolios, maintaining financial resilience and aligning with its broader climate strategy. These

documents articulate the approach for risk appetite by specifying guiding principles, quantitative limits and escalation

protocols to maintain exposures within acceptable boundaries. These documents also outline the roles and responsibilities

across governance structures and the three lines of defence for managing and overseeing climate risk.

The key principle underpinning the Climate Risk Framework is that climate risk is considered as a driver of traditional risk

categories (e.g. credit risk, market risk, operational risk etc), and as such the frameworks and standards of other principal

risk categories have also been enhanced to support the integration and embedding of climate risk within existing risk

practices. The oversight and management of climate-related risks occur at a number of levels including through various

governance committees and forums across business lines and legal entities. The frameworks, policies and standards are

reviewed annually and updated to reflect internal and external developments including changing regulatory expectations.

Actions

Actions to manage Climate Change Mitigation Impacts

We have taken and will continue to take the following key actions, grouped under decarbonisation levers:

Measuring and monitoring emissions

Sustainability Enhanced Due Diligence (SEDD) to achieve Climate Change Statement objectives

We conduct SEDD on clients in-scope of our public position statements, via detailed Sustainability Enhanced Due Diligence

(SEDD) questionnaires, which are used to evaluate their performance on a range of environmental and social issues in

addition to adherence to restrictions detailed in our public position statements (application of the provisions is subject to

compliance with applicable laws and regulations, which may change from time to time) and may be supplemented by a

review of client policies/procedures, further client engagement and adverse media checks as appropriate. SEDD

questionnaires generate an outcome based on alignment with position statements and identified environmental and social

issues, which in turn determines whether further review by the Environmental and Social Risk Management (ESRM) team

within Group Sustainability, client engagement may be required and the periodic review cycle (either annual or biennial). We

follow a risk-based approach where certain clients would require further risk assessment prior to execution of transactions.

The outcome of this action is the evaluation of a clients performance on a range of environmental and social issues and

adherence to restrictions detailed in our external position statements,  which in turn determines whether further review and

client engagement may be required throughout the year and can be used to inform our financing decisions. SEDD for clients

in scope of our external position statements is undertaken by Barclays client coverage teams, supported by control teams, as

well as the Environmental and Social Risk Management (ESRM) Team, within the Group Sustainability function, who may

advise on the application of the statements.

Clients in-scope of our Climate Change Statement continue to be subject to SEDD.

Financed emissions tracking and benchmarking

Barclays measures certain financed emissions and tracks them at a portfolio level against the goals and timelines of the Paris

Agreement – this methodology is called BlueTrack™. Currently, Barclays has set 2030 financed  emissions reduction targets

for Upstream Energy, Power, Steel, Cement, Automotive manufacturing, Aviation, UK Commercial Real Estate, UK Agriculture

portfolios and a convergence point for UK Housing. The BlueTrack™ methodology was developed to measure and track

Barclays progress against targets integrating 1.5°C aligned scenarios. The BlueTrackTM methodology uses an external

climate scenario to construct a Paris-aligned portfolio benchmark that defines how a given financing portfolio will need to

reduce emissions over time. These scenarios have been selected because they have been developed by reputable external

providers, are aligned with the Paris Agreement goals and are sufficiently granular. The financed emissions for Barclays Bank

Group are reported within the metrics section of this disclosure.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	30

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

Working with clients on their transition

We listen to our clients and build a nuanced understanding of the commercial realities shaping their transition pathways.

This is informed by regular client dialogue led by our coverage teams and dedicated sustainable finance specialists,

supported by specialised analytical tools such as our Client Transition Framework (CTF).

The CTF evaluates our in-scope clients’ progress towards business models aligned to a low-carbon economy, primarily

focused on clients' public disclosures. It provides a detailed understanding of clients’ current and future transition activities.

Clients who are assessed receive a CTF score of T1 (most developed) to T5. It helps us monitor and measure the

decarbonisation progress of our in-scope clients, which in turn informs our engagement efforts. Engaging with our clients to

assist with understanding their businesses, the challenges they face and the risks and opportunities they are seeking to

address is critical to our ability to support them as they navigate the transition to a low-carbon economy.

In 2025, the CTF Methodology was extended to increase the scope of clients covered by assessments to include in-scope

publicly listed corporate clients in all sectors across the Investment Bank and UK Corporate Bank, as well as in-scope clients

within the UK Commercial Real Estate portfolio. This is in addition to continuing annual CTF assessments for in-scope clients

in the previously assessed sectors (Upstream Energy, Power, Steel, Cement, Automotive manufacturing, & Aviation). The

continued use of AI for data collection of clients’ public disclosures has enabled this expanded scope and has approximately

quintupled the total limits covered by our assessments versus 2024. The aggregate 2025 CTF results reflects the impacts of

the expanded scope, methodology updates, and lending activity.

In the sectors where we have set financed emissions reduction targets, these scores inform our engagement, origination

decisions, and portfolio management, and help ensure that our approach is both commercially disciplined and forward-

looking, enabling us to support clients credibly whilst managing transition-related exposures across the bank. We intend to

implement this approach for UK Commercial Real Estate during 2026. For sectors where we have not set financed emissions

reduction targets, we will continue to consider how we embed the outputs from these CTF assessments during 2026. In all

cases, financing decisions continue to remain transaction-specific and subject to standard committee reviews including for

credit risk, reputational risk, and capital impact.

The expected and achieved reduction in emissions from these above actions have not been calculated for Barclays Bank

Group. Measuring the result of our actions on achieved and expected GHG reductions is both non-linear and complex, and

therefore we have not isolated the specific impact of our actions. Further, with respect to expected GHG reductions, it is very

difficult to accurately quantify the likely specific impact of our actions due to our dependence on our clients’ ability to

commercially decarbonise their business models, which is influenced by a wide range of external factors, including market

developments, technological progress and its financial viability, a stable and supportive policy environment, regulatory

alignment, changes to societal behaviour, geopolitical developments and regional variations. Therefore, we do not report our

achieved or expected GHG reductions specifically as a result of our actions.

Sustainable and transition finance

We continue to expand the breadth of sustainable and transition finance banking products we offer to support the transition

to a low-carbon economy, including those aimed at mitigating climate change. For details on this please refer to actions on

page 35 of the Sustainable Products and Services section.

Actions to manage Climate Change Transition risk in downstream financing activities

Barclays, including Barclays Bank Group has adopted an integrated approach to managing and mitigating climate risk in its

downstream financing activities, combining continuous monitoring with both portfolio-level and bottom-up transaction-

level assessments. These activities are tailored to the underlying portfolio’s composition and characteristics, ensuring that

risk management efforts are focused on areas with material exposure to climate risks.

Barclays, including Barclays Bank Group's approach to setting risk appetite for climate risk is aligned with its ambition to be a

net zero bank by 2050 and reducing financed emissions in line with its 2030 targets. Climate risk considerations have been

included in the risk appetite qualitative statements and quantitative constraints. The risk appetite for climate risk is managed

through various risk limits, triggers and indicators set across different principal risk types. Regular monitoring, reporting and

governance provide oversight of climate risk profile and exposures and ensure they remain within the thresholds of risk

appetite. When breaches occur, investigation is conducted to understand the rationale for the breach. Corrective actions,

such as decreasing exposure or considerations for other risk mitigating measures are reviewed and discussed to address the

breach. Client and portfolio-level assessments are performed to identify and assess portfolios that are more vulnerable to

climate risks. These actions are completed on a continuous basis through the year. For further information on actions, refer

to the Climate Risk Management section of the Risk Review on page 71.

At a transaction level, Barclays Bank Group integrates climate considerations into its credit decisioning and underwriting

processes. Barclays Bank Group has implemented enhanced oversight and additional scrutiny for new deals originated in

elevated sectors, particularly those with sector targets and subjected to external position statements. The scores from the

Client Transition Framework (CTF) and emissions data from BlueTrack™ support identification of clients and portfolio

segments with elevated transition risk. These insights further inform key risk management practices—including risk

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	31

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

monitoring, limit setting, concentration management, credit decisioning, across both portfolio level and transaction level.

Please refer to the Climate Risk Management section for additional details (page 71).

Stress testing, ICAAP (Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process) and ILAAP (Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment

Process) are essential tools used by Barclays Bank Group to manage and mitigate financial risks. These exercises help assess

the Bank's resilience under adverse scenarios, ensuring it maintains sufficient capital and liquidity buffers to withstand

shocks.

Barclays continues to enhance its risk management capabilities with increased knowledge and ability to identify, quantify

and manage climate related risks, including transition risk, in line with external developments and regulatory expectations.

Future Actions planned in relation to Climate Change Mitigation Impacts and Climate Change Transition risk

Barclays Bank Group will continue to contribute to Barclays efforts to manage portfolios, maintain balance between

commercial objectives, prudent risk management practices and other non-financial objectives in support of Barclays

ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050. Barclays periodically reviews its policies and the actions in relation to its objectives

and targets and updates them in consideration of the rapidly changing environment and as informed by engagement with

stakeholders, shareholders, clients, subject specialists and civil society groups. Barclays will continue to periodically review

its risk appetite and risk management approach for climate risk to maintain alignment with their strategic objectives as well

as regulatory developments on financial risks from climate change. As such, we will continue to support and contribute to

these key Barclays actions, which we expect to contribute to the achievement of policy objectives and Barclays’ targets

across Barclays on an ongoing basis.

Targets

Considering Climate Change Mitigation Impacts and Climate Change Transition risk

Barclays Bank Group does not have any entity specific targets relating to the impact and risk referred to above because

Barclays Group views sustainability as a global issue which is best tackled from a top down approach, with targets set at the

Barclays Group level. Further, given the global footprint of many Barclays clients, who often engage with multiple Barclays

entities, setting targets at the Barclays Group level ensures a more cohesive and aligned approach to achieve our

sustainability objectives.

However, Barclays Bank Group as a part of the wider reporting group contributes towards achieving the emissions targets

set at the Barclays Group level to manage climate change impacts or transition risk. Therefore, we track the effectiveness of

the policies and actions referred to above through monitoring of the progression against the targets set at Barclays level.

Barclays has set 2030 emission reduction targets using  BlueTrack™ for eight high-emitting sectors: Upstream Energy,

Power, Cement, Steel, Automotive manufacturing, UK Commercial Real Estate, UK Agriculture and Aviation; and a

convergence point for UK Housing. These emission reduction targets established at the Barclays level for high-emitting

sectors also include legal entities’ portfolios. Emission reduction targets and CTF scores help us engage with clients, inform

decision making and risk management practices. In addition, in relation to tracking the effectiveness of our policies and

actions in relation to transition risk, the approach and practices for managing climate risk are reviewed on a regular basis for

alignment with regulatory developments and industry leading practices. Barclays has implemented controls to manage

climate-related risks. A governance forum oversees these controls including climate-related risk events, policy and issue

management. Additionally, the assurance teams are responsible for performing climate risk specific reviews to ensure

effectiveness of the Climate Risk Framework and risk practices.

The 2030 financed emissions reduction targets set at Barclays level are outlined in the below table.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	32

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

Financed emissions metrics - Barclays
Sector				Setting our targets
Sector	Sector boundaries	Emissions<br><br>Scope	GHG included	Reference<br><br>scenario	Target<br><br>metric	Unit of<br><br>measure<br><br>ment	Baseline<br><br>year	Target vs baseline
Upstream<br><br>Energy	Upstream Energy	1,2 & 3	Carbon dioxide<br><br>and Methane	IEA SDS<br><br>IEA<br><br>NZE2050	Absolute<br><br>emissions	MtCO2e	2020	-15% by end of 2025<br><br>-40% by end of 2030
Power	Power generators	1	Carbon dioxide	IEA SDS<br><br>IEA<br><br>NZE2050	Physical<br><br>Intensity	kgCO2e/<br><br>MWh	2020	-30% by end of 2025<br><br>-50% to -69% by end<br><br>of 2030
Cement	Cement manufacturers	1 & 2	All GHGs	IEA<br><br>NZE2050	Physical<br><br>Intensity	tCO2e/t	2021	-20% to -26% by end<br><br>of 2030
Steel	Steel manufacturers	1 & 2	All GHGs	IEA<br><br>NZE2050	Physical<br><br>Intensity	tCO2e/t	2021	-20% to -40% by end<br><br>of 2030
Automotive<br><br>manufacturing	Light Duty Vehicles<br><br>manufacturers	1,2 & 3	All GHG for<br><br>scope 1 and 2;<br><br>Carbon dioxide<br><br>for scope 3	IEA<br><br>NZE2050	Physical<br><br>Intensity	gCO2e/<br><br>km	2022	-40% to -64% by end<br><br>of 2030
Aviation	Commercial Aviation<br><br>(Air Travel) – Passenger<br><br>(including belly cargo)<br><br>and Dedicated cargo	1 & 3	Carbon dioxide<br><br>for scope 1; All<br><br>GHGs for scope<br><br>3	MPP<br><br>Prudent	Physical<br><br>Intensity	gCO2e/<br><br>RTK	2023	-11% to -16% by end<br><br>of 2030
UK Commercial<br><br>Real Estate	UK Corporate Bank	1 & 2	CO2, methane<br><br>and nitrous<br><br>oxide	CRREM II	Physical<br><br>Intensity	kgCO2e/<br><br>m2	2023	-51% by end of 2030
UK Agriculture	UK Livestock & Dairy<br><br>Farming	1,2 & 3	Carbon dioxide,<br><br>methane and<br><br>nitrous oxide	CCC BNZ	Absolute<br><br>emissions	MtCO2e	2023	-21% by end of 2030
UK Housing1	UK buy-to-let and<br><br>owner-occupied<br><br>mortgages, Social<br><br>Housing and Business<br><br>Banking	1 & 2	Carbon dioxide,<br><br>methane and<br><br>nitrous oxide	CCC BNZ	Physical<br><br>intensity	kgCO2e/<br><br>m2	2023	Portfolio convergence<br><br>point vs. baseline<br><br>-40% by end of 2030

Note

1 Barclays has identified a 2030 emission intensity convergence point for UK Housing but has not set a formal target.

The key drivers behind changes to the portfolio metrics for 2025, as well as cumulatively against the relevant baseline,

within the ‘Update on Progress Against Targets’ section of Barclays’ Annual Report.

Metrics

Metrics relating to Climate Change Mitigation Impact and Climate Change Transition risk

Emissions

We have disclosed Scope 3 Category 15 emissions in line with the results of our DMA and obligations under the ESRS.

We have determined it appropriate to report absolute emissions only from activities where Barclays have set targets due to

the below reasons:

1.Emissions from sectors where Barclays has set targets represent the only relevant data points in relation evaluating

the performance and effectiveness of the E1 IROs.

2.Within financed emissions, the activities where Barclays has set targets are those that drive the group business

strategy and client action.

3.Upstream Energy and Power measures are also embedded within the strategic non-financial measures for

Executive Directors of BPLC. Further details on the performance assessment against these measures can be found

in the Remuneration report section of the Barclays’ PLC Annual Report 2025.

4.Barclays has taken into account stakeholder engagement, including engagement with affected stakeholders in

reaching the conclusions set out above as to material impact and related risk and the relevance and materiality of

the information proposed to be disclosed.

The Scope 3 Category 15 emissions metrics, in the table below, have been calculated through our BlueTrackTM methodology,

outlined in the Financed emissions tracking and benchmarking section above.

For other business activities where Barclays have not set targets, the Barclays Bank Group has not disclosed metrics.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	33

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

Scope 3 categories 1-14 have been considered not significant for reporting. No baseline figures have been included because

targets have not been set at the Barclays Bank Group’s level.

Scope 3 financed emissions where Barclays has set targets
Activities1	Sector boundaries	Unit of measurement	December 2025	December 2024
Upstream Energy	Upstream Energy<br><br>(producers of coal, oil, gas<br><br>and NGLs)	MtCO2e	43.7	41.1
Power	Power generators	MtCO2e	13.6	14.0
Cement	Cement manufacturers	MtCO2e	1.5	0.8
Steel	Steel manufacturers	MtCO2e	0.8	0.9
Automotive manufacturing	Light Duty Vehicles<br><br>manufacturers	MtCO2e	3.6	3.8
Aviation	Commercial Aviation (Air<br><br>Travel) – Passenger<br><br>(including belly cargo) and<br><br>Dedicated cargo	MtCO2e	4.6	4.9
UK Commercial Real Estate	UK Corporate Bank	MtCO2e	0.1	0.1
UK Housing2	UK buy-to-let and owner-<br><br>occupied mortgages, Social<br><br>Housing and Business<br><br>Banking	MtCO2e	0.2	0.1
Total		MtCO2e	68.1	65.7

Notes

1 Barclays Bank plc does not have UK agriculture activities that contribute to the Barclays plc target.

2 Barclays has identified a 2030 emission intensity convergence point for UK Housing but has not set a formal target.

Our methodology and assumptions in calculating financed emissions

Financed emissions are calculated by applying an attribution factor to client emissions. Client emissions are calculated using

a range of data quality options, ranging from reported emissions to sector-average emission factors. Based on the PCAF

Standard, we use a range of external and internal data feeds to estimate client emissions. We rely on external vendors to

source production activity and reported emissions data. In certain cases, the data, fall-back inputs or modelled outputs are

overridden using expert judgement. To facilitate this, we run a series of validation tests on both emissions and financial data.

For cases where there is a significant divergence identified with supporting evidence – for example where a company has

divested a material asset which is not yet reflected in the underlying data – we apply an override to the data.

Within each sector, we have defined an appropriate value chain activity and emissions boundary on which our Group targets

are defined. We identify in-scope clients based on the internal Barclays Industry Classification (BIC) codes.

Approach for estimating emissions mapped to PCAF DQ scores
Activity	Data Quality option employed	PCAF Data Quality score1
		Scope 1,2	Scope 3
Upstream Energy	Estimated based on production data<br><br>Estimated based on average portfolio economic intensity if<br><br>production data is not available	3.1	3.1
Power		3.1	NA
Automotive manufacturing		2.2	3.2
Aviation	Estimated based on production data	3.0	3.0
Cement	Reported emissions	2.1	NA
Steel		2.0	NA
UK CRE	Estimated based on data available in EPC certificates<br><br>Estimated based on average sub-portfolio economic intensity<br><br>if EPC is not available	4.0	NA
UK Housing		4.3	NA

Notes

1 We have scored the quality of the data we have used to estimate our financed emissions using PCAF's Global GHG Accounting and

Reporting Standard. In the Standard, data quality score DQ1 and 2 relates to high quality data from company disclosures, DQ3 to

emissions estimated using physical activity data and DQ4 and DQ5 to deriving emissions estimated using revenue or asset-based

emission factors.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	34

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Environmental Information

Climate data, models and methodologies are evolving and are not yet at the same standard as more traditional financial

metrics – nor are they yet subject to the same or equivalent disclosure standards, historical reference points, benchmarks or

globally accepted accounting principles. Most of our data is collected from external sources, and the quality and

methodologies relating to the underlying data can be hard to assess. External sources then require mapping to Barclays’

internal data. While we have set a framework that facilitates a robust matching process, it is likely residual issues will remain

for reasons such as mergers and acquisitions within corporate sectors. There are also issues with time lags as most of our

data is not available as at the reporting date. Further details on our BlueTrackTM methodology can be found within our

Financed Emissions Methodology paper (published in 2026) accessible at: https://home.barclays/sustainability/esg-

resource-hub/reporting-and-disclosures/

Internal Carbon Pricing

Barclays Bank does not apply an internal carbon pricing scheme, however financed emission and carbon intensity are

considered as part of the decision making process in our financing portfolio.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	35

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Sustainable and Transition Products and Services

Strategy

Barclays Bank Group recognises the opportunities arising from the global transition to a low-carbon economy and the

positive impact this can have on economies, our customers and clients. Barclays has developed reporting frameworks for

the following types of finance.

•Sustainable Finance consists of finance for dedicated use of proceeds, financing for clients with an eligible business

mix in relevant environmental and social categories, and sustainability-linked financing which refers to general

purpose funding.

•Transition Finance consists of financing provided to clients for activities that support greenhouse gas emission

reduction, directly or indirectly, towards a 1.5°C pathway

Barclays Bank Group uses the Sustainable Finance Framework ("SFF") and Transition Finance Framework ("TFF") to enable

us to track our financing which contributes to our positive impacts as we capitalise on identified opportunities. The SFF and

TFF were developed by Barclays and outline the approach to the classification of our finance as sustainable finance and

transition finance respectively. We published version 5.0 of SFF and 2.0 of TFF in February 2026,  with changes to product

scope, eligibility criteria and transaction screening processes. Both frameworks are published on the Barclays website.

Policies

We do not have a relevant policy in place, as the positive impact and opportunity are underpinned by our overall strategy

that focuses on working with clients on their transition, financing our clients’ transition and scaling climate technology, and

our role in contributing to the Barclays target of facilitating $1 trillion of Sustainable and Transition Finance between 2023

and the end of 2030. This financing approach is guided by our SFF and TFF, as referenced above.

Actions

Sustainable and Transition Products

We continue to broaden our sustainable and transition finance offering, particularly developing our sustainability notes and

deposits products in 2025 as well as launching the Carbon and Environmental Products trading desk within the Global

Markets business. Sustainable and transition finance products also help us achieve our focus on working with clients on

their transition. In 2026, we will continue to consider and evaluate additional sustainable and transition products.

Strategic Review

Our sustainable finance strategy was also refreshed during 2025 across key businesses. The review built upon both new and

previously identified commercial opportunities. The output was considered in the financial planning process, including

incremental revenue, cost and capital. Key opportunities continue to reside within Debt Capital Markets, Equity Capital

Markets, Transaction Banking and lending.

We continue to embed key teams whilst hiring to grow our existing talent with a focus on expanding our product

capabilities as we continue to drive performance against our selected Barclays targets. In particular, the Energy Transition

Group within Barclays continues to provide holistic and cohesive strategic advice and financing solutions through the energy

value chain, with a particular emphasis on decarbonisation. These teams continue to enable further implementation of our

climate strategy and increase co-ordination, with a focus on how they can help our customers and clients on the transition

to a low-carbon economy.

We will continue to endeavour to further enhance how our sustainability strategy is embedded into the way we think about

financial planning over the coming years – reflecting on the progress made during 2025.

Tracking of our Sustainable and Transition Finance:

Barclays Bank Group tracks the amount of sustainable and transition finance we facilitate using the methodology outlined in

both the SFF and TFF. Tracking finance enables us to measure progress towards financing the transition. These volumes are

reported externally semi-annually, see the Metrics section below for 2025 volume.

Targets

Barclays Group views sustainability as a global issue, which is best tackled with a top-down approach, with targets set by

Barclays covering the whole of Barclays Group considered to be the most appropriate way to meet sustainability ambitions.

As we are part of Barclays and contribute towards Barclays Group targets, we do not have our own specific targets relating

to our sustainable products and services. Further, given the global footprint of many of our clients, who often engage with

multiple Barclays entities, setting targets at the Barclays Group level ensures a more cohesive and aligned approach to

achieve sustainability objectives.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	36

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Sustainable and Transition Products and Services

Following analysis of the market opportunity for sustainable finance, together with a review of its capabilities, in 2022,

Barclays announced a new target to facilitate $1trn of Sustainable and Transition Financing2 between 2023 and the end of

20302. Barclays Bank Group is expected to be a key contributor towards achieving this target. By tracking the amount of

sustainable and transition finance we facilitate using the methodology outlined in both the SFF and TFF, we track the

effectiveness of our actions and monitor progress against the target set at Barclays level of facilitating $1trn of Sustainable

and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030.

Metrics

In 2025, Barclays Bank Group facilitated $95.3bn (2024: $92.9bn) of Sustainable and Transition Financing1,2, which

contributed to the overall Barclays $1trn target. This contribution was calculated using the SFF and TFF methodologies

outlined above.

For further details please see Barclays’ ESG Reporting Framework.

It should be noted that the methodology is reliant on a range of data sources including Dealogic and Bloomberg transaction

listings and league tables, as well as other third-party data and verification sources including company disclosures to aid the

classification of financing into eligible green and social categories. Legal entities for capital markets financing are identified

using Dealogic ‘Issuer Nation/Deal Nationality’, while internal lending entities are mapped by the Financial Control team.

Barclays Bank Group recognises that the quality, consistency and comparability of the data relied upon is not yet of the same

standard as more traditional financial metrics and presents an inherent limitation to the performance reported. We will

continue to review available data sources and enhance our methodology and processes to improve the robustness of the

performance disclosed.

Notes:

1Key assumptions for Sustainable and Transition Financing:

Accounting basis:

•Financing volumes for the FY25 reported on a proportional bookrunner share basis;

•Share of capital markets transactions calculated as deal size divided by total number of bookrunners or league table credit Barclays role in the

deal is further confirmed by the desk where unclear from underlying documents;

•Syndicated lending reflects Barclays’ share or hold of the overall transaction value; and

•Lending is calculated as total value of limits at issuance and any subsequent increases

Reporting Process:

•Financing eligible as sustainable financing, under the SFF, for the purpose of our targets, if Barclays determines that the core business of the

recipient falls under the eligible green and social criteria.

•Wherein a pro-rated part of the transaction is counted against the target, the pro-rata calculation is based on an equally weighted allocation to

each of the use of proceeds categories that Barclays identify within the issuer framework.

•When reviewing whether financing will be eligible as transition finance for the purpose of the TFF, Barclays will consider, amongst other

factors:

◦the transition plans or decarbonisation strategies the client produces, including any just transition elements; and

◦the management of any identified environmental and social risks associated with the relevant purpose of the financing or, where the client

is a pure play client, its activities as a whole.

2 In the 2026 update to the Barclays Sustainable Finance Framework the reference to the target has been updated to reference $1 trillion Sustainable

and Transition Finance between 2023 and the end of 2030 (the "Target") and accordingly references to the Target in this Annual Report on Form

20-F have been reflected as such other than in this reference.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	37

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Important Information / Disclaimers

Information provided in climate and sustainability disclosures

What is important to our investors and stakeholders evolves over time, and we aim to anticipate and respond to these

changes. Disclosure expectations in relation to climate change and sustainability matters are particularly fast moving, and

differ from more traditional areas of reporting including in relation to the level of detail and forward-looking nature of the

information involved and the consideration of impacts on the environment and other persons. We have adapted our

approach in relation to the disclosure of such matters. Our climate and sustainability disclosures take into account the wider

context relevant to these topics, which may include evolving stakeholder views, the development of our climate strategy,

longer timeframes for assessing potential risks and impacts, international long-term climate- and nature-based policy goals,

evolving sustainability-related policy frameworks (and the harmonisation or interoperability of relevant regulation) and

geopolitical developments and regional variations. Our climate and sustainability disclosures are subject to more uncertainty

than disclosures relating to other subjects, given market challenges in relation to data reliability, consistency and timeliness –

the use of estimates, judgements and assumptions which are likely to change over time, the application and development of

data, models, scenarios and methodologies, the change in regulatory landscape, and variations in reporting standards. Our

approach to materiality may continue to evolve as our, and the industry's, understanding of climate and sustainability-

related risks and opportunities continues to develop.

These factors mean disclosures may be amended, updated, and recalculated in future as market practice and data quality

and availability develops, and could cause actual achievements, results, performance or other future events or conditions to

differ, in some cases materially, from those stated, implied and/or reflected in any forward-looking statements or metrics

included in our climate and sustainability disclosures. We give no assurance as to the likelihood of the achievement or

reasonableness of any projections, estimates, forecasts, targets, commitments, ambitions, prospects or returns contained in

our climate and sustainability disclosures and make no commitment to revise or update any such disclosures to reflect

events or circumstances occurring or existing after the date of such statements.

Disclaimers

In preparing the climate and sustainability content within the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F wherever it

appears, we have:

•Made certain key judgements, estimations and assumptions. This is, for example, the case in relation to financed

emissions, portfolio alignment, classification of sustainable and transition finance, operational emissions and

sustainability metrics, measurement of climate risk and scenario analysis.

•Used climate and sustainability data, models, scenarios and methodologies that we considered appropriate for

these purposes at the time of deployment. Some of these were provided by third parties, over whom we have no

control, and may have been based on differing or unknown methodologies. The underlying assumptions,

interpretations or methodologies may not be independently verifiable and could be inaccurate. Climate and

sustainability data, models, scenarios and methodologies are subject to future risks and uncertainties and may

change over time. Climate and sustainability disclosures in this document, including climate and sustainability-

related data, models and methodologies, are not of the same standard as those available in the context of other

financial information and use a greater number and level of judgements, assumptions and estimates, including with

respect to the classification of sustainable and transition financing activities. Climate and sustainability disclosures

are also not subject to the same or equivalent disclosure standards, historical reference points, benchmarks or

globally accepted accounting principles. Historical data cannot be relied on as a strong indicator of future

trajectories in the case of climate change and its evolution. Outputs of models, processed data, scenario analysis

and the application of methodologies will also be affected by underlying data quality, which can be hard to assess,

or challenges in accessing data on a timely basis.

•Continued (and will continue) to review and develop our approach to data, models, scenarios and methodologies

in line with market principles and standards as this subject area matures. The data, models, scenarios and

methodologies used (including those made available by third parties) and the judgements, estimates and/or

assumptions made in them or by us are rapidly evolving, including scientific evidence relating to climate change

and scenarios outlining pathways to net zero, and this may directly or indirectly affect the metrics, data points,

targets, convergence points and milestones contained in the climate and sustainability content within the Barclays

Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F. Further, changes in external factors which are outside of our control such

as accounting and/or reporting standards, improvements in data quality, data availability, or updates to

methodologies and models and/or updates or restatements of data by third parties, could impact – potentially

materially – the performance metrics, data points, targets, convergence points and milestones contained in the

climate and sustainability content within the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F. In future reports we

may present some or all of the information for this reporting period (including information made available by third

parties) using updated or more granular data or improved models, scenarios methodologies, market practices or

standards. Equally, we may need to re-baseline, restate, revise, recalculate or recalibrate performance against

targets, convergence points or milestones on the basis of such updated data. Such updated information may result

in different outcomes than those included in the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F. It is important for

readers and users of the Annual Report on Form 20-F to be aware that direct, like-for-like comparisons of each

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	38

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Important Information / Disclaimers

piece of information disclosed may not always be possible from one reporting period to another. The 'Reducing our

financed emissions' section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report highlights where information in respect of a

previous reporting period has been updated. Page 86 of the Barclays PLC Annual Report sets out the data sourcing

and data quality considerations and our approach to reporting financed emissions data. For operational emissions,

this is covered on page 94 of the 2025 Barclays PLC Annual Report.

•Included in the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F are a number of graphics, infographics, text boxes

and illustrative case studies and credentials which aim to give a high-level overview of certain elements of the

climate and sustainability content within the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F and improve

accessibility for readers. These graphics, infographics, text boxes and illustrative case studies and credentials are

designed to be read within the context of the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F as a whole.

•There are a variety of internal and external factors which may impact Barclays' reported metrics and progress

against targets, convergence points and milestones. We expect to continue to see this impact our metrics in the

future as data availability and quality, methodologies, guidance, and best practices for calculating our financed and

operational emissions metrics – all of which include differing levels of estimation – continue to evolve and be

refined.

•Any information contained or referred to in the Barclays Bank PLC Annual Report on Form 20-F, in relation to any

actual or potential climate and sustainability objective, issue or consideration is not intended to be relied upon for

EU Sustainable Finance Disclosure Regulation classification purposes, EU Taxonomy Regulation classification

purposes, or any other classification regimes (unless expressly stated otherwise).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	39

Schedule to the Directors' report: Sustainability statement

Important Information / Disclaimers

List of Key Definitions as captured in the Barclays Climate Change Statement:

Term	Definition
Finance or financing	Refers to all primary financing activity through lending (including reserve-based lending agreements),<br><br>underwriting, arranging and/or distribution of debt or equity, as well as trade and working capital finance and<br><br>excludes, without limitation, any debt or securities traded or placed through secondary market activity.<br><br>Barclays may occasionally continue to be involved in primary financing activity for distressed entities such as<br><br>(without limitation) debt for equity swaps and other recapitalisation activities. When undertaking such activity,<br><br>Barclays has a responsibility to minimise losses and will look to deploy possible financing options to manage<br><br>distressed positions and/or maximise recoveries where it is a liability holder. Such financing arrangements are<br><br>not typically for the purposes of funding the ongoing operational activity of the distressed entity. Accordingly,<br><br>any such activity is excluded from the definition of financing.
Sustainable Finance or<br><br>Transition<br><br>Finance Transactions	Refers to transactions that qualify under Barclays’ Sustainable Finance Framework or Transition Finance<br><br>Framework as amended from time to time.
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	40
---	---

Governance

Other governance

Managing data privacy, security and resilience

We have strict policies to protect privacy and keep data secure.

Data privacy

Many of the jurisdictions in which the Barclays Bank Group operates have privacy and data protection laws in effect. While

these may vary in detail, generally they reflect internationally recognised privacy principles found in the UN’s Universal

Declaration of Human Rights, the European Convention on Human Rights and the European Union’s Charter of Fundamental

Rights.

We strive to operate in accordance with these standards and recognise that respect for privacy rights is a key element of

good corporate governance and social responsibility. We strive to be transparent about our use of personal information

when delivering our products and services and acknowledge the responsibility we have for safeguarding privacy.

As the Barclays Bank Group increasingly adopts digital solutions to deliver next-generation consumer financial services, we

appreciate our clients, customers and others may wish to understand how this may impact the use of their personal

information. A globally applicable Barclays Data Privacy Policy and associated Standards set out what is expected of all

Barclays Bank Group businesses and functions when collecting, using and sharing personal information.

To promote clear accountability, the Data Privacy Policy and associated Standards include responsibilities for the Business

Senior Manager who has ultimate responsibility for the processing of personal data within that business. An agreed

assurance programme measures compliance with the Data Privacy Policy and associated Standards. Barclays Bank Group

colleagues must complete annual data privacy training which is reviewed and refreshed each year, with additional tailored

training provided as necessary. The Group Data Protection Officer (GDPO) reports on data privacy issues to the highest level

of management.

Through client, customer and employee privacy notices, we endeavour to explain clearly and openly how and why we use

personal information and the legal grounds we rely upon. When we receive complaints, we seek to address these fairly.

Several jurisdictions also provide individuals with specific rights, such as the right to have access to or request deletion of

their personal information.

Barclays Bank PLC provides a publicly accessible mailbox and secure channels via its website to enable individuals to make

their privacy requests and receive responses from a dedicated team.

Barclays Bank PLC requires its suppliers to comply with data protection and privacy laws, regulations and standards relevant

to the jurisdictions in which they operate and relevant to any transferred personal data. Our requirements are set out and

principally managed through our supplier contracts, which require that suppliers commit to ensuring personal data shared

with them is safeguarded and respected throughout the supply chain.

Data security

As detailed below, Barclays' Chief Information Security Office operates controls aimed at mitigating cybersecurity-related

risks and understanding internal and external threats.

Barclays deploys controls designed to protect its sensitive information and the data that has been entrusted to us by

customers and clients, in line with our Standards, taking into account findings from internal and external reviews of our

controls.

Barclays seeks to protect the security of data we share with third parties, including by conducting remote and on-site

inspections of certain suppliers to review their controls against contractual obligations and industry standards. A Third Party

Service Provider Framework is in place which sets out control requirements for business units to manage the operational,

reputational, conduct and legal risks to Barclays through its supply chain. The nature of such controls is described in further

detail below.

In operating under a hybrid working model, we have continued to educate colleagues on cybersecurity risks in order to help

minimise risks related to remote working, such as data exploitation or leakage.

Barclays works with industry bodies and cybersecurity vendors to learn and evolve from risk events in other organisations.

Our teams use such intelligence to simulate plausible cybersecurity and data compromise scenarios that allow us to

exercise, review and improve our response and recovery plans in preparation for evolving threats.

Operational resilience

The stability and resilience of our systems, workforce and premises, and the continued provision of third-party services, all

have a direct impact on the quality of our service.

Resilience and security are key priorities for the Board. Barclays continues to strengthen its resilience posture and is focused

on its ability to recover from a range of ‘severe but plausible’ scenarios which could cause detriment to its customers and

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	41

Governance

Other governance

clients and the broader financial market. To enable this, we define Group-wide business services and their interdependencies

across the Group, including technology, third-party services and our people and premises. Recovery plans and business

response plans have been developed for a range of different disruption events, such as cyber or data integrity disruptions,

technology failures, or the unavailability of our colleagues. These recovery plans are reviewed and validated through regular

testing which supports our aim to reduce the volume and impact of operational incidents year-on-year. We also conduct

regular assurance on third parties to assess their capability.

Operational resilience is delivered through an established and robust Operational Resilience Framework which is

underpinned by a Policy, Standards, methodologies and procedures, and is aligned to the requirements and expectations

defined by our regulators. Our Operational Resilience Framework is integrated with Barclays’ Enterprise Risk Management

Framework (ERMF) and sets the tone from the top. The Standards are embedded within the Barclays Controls Framework

and provide a consistent approach across the Group.

The Operational Recovery Planning Policy and Standards drive the identification of the business services that are most

important to Barclays, its customers, clients and the markets in which Barclays operates. The Standards also define

requirements for setting recovery targets, mapping of dependencies, planning and testing.

Resilience and security are the responsibility of everyone within the Group. All permanent employees are required to

complete annual mandatory training on these topics.

Chief Information Security Office

Barclays' Chief Information Security Office exists to keep the bank, its customers, clients, and colleagues safe and secure,

and to support the resilience of our operations. It supports Barclays' ability to operate in a protected and secure

environment, and actively promotes a culture of security as everyone's responsibility.

The Group Chief Information Security Officer (CISO) heads Barclays' Chief Information Security Office. Barclays’ Group CISO

reports directly to the Group Co-Chief Operating Officers (members of the Group Executive Committee). Barclays’ Group

CISO is responsible for assessing and managing Barclays’ risks from cybersecurity threats, and overseeing key areas that

include cybersecurity operations (including cyber threat intelligence), proactive defence (which includes penetration testing

and vulnerability management), security architecture and engineering, cyber posture and assurance (which includes third-

party security management), data security, and identity and access management. The Group CISO is also supported by a

team of CISOs and BISOs (Business Information Security Officers) for business units, regions and jurisdictions.

Chief Information Security Office leaders manage Barclays’ cybersecurity activities and are accountable for the day-to-day

monitoring of residual risk, identification of gaps, oversight of remedial actions and implementation of strategy. The Group

CISO has more than 25 years of experience managing cybersecurity for global financial institutions, leading large-scale

initiatives across all cybersecurity domains, including cyber defence, application security, vulnerability assessment, data

protection, third party risk, cyber resilience, and security engineering. The Group CISO and supporting leadership team

collectively have advanced degrees and senior level experience managing cybersecurity risks in a variety of sectors, including

those that represent critical national infrastructure, such as health care, telecommunications and financial institutions. They

are supported by teams of subject matter experts and analysts in a variety of specialisations.

Supporting the delivery of Barclays’ cyber and information security strategy are multiple management committees, forums,

and councils, including Cyber Control Councils for each of the 12 Standards supporting the Group Information and

Cybersecurity Policy (as more fully described below). These Cyber Control Standards Councils feed into the Cybersecurity

Risk Category Controls Forum, the Group Controls Committee, the Group Risk Committee, and ultimately the Board Risk

Committee. In addition, the Group Co-Chief Operating Officers hold business reviews that include management updates on

the status of cybersecurity across the Group, and a standalone Chief Operating Office Controls Forum that also escalates to

the Group Controls Committee. Barclays’ Operational Risk and Internal Audit functions provide independent views of cyber

risk management from second and third line of defence perspectives.

Barclays assesses its cybersecurity activities against the industry-recognised National Institute of Standards and Technology

(NIST) Cybersecurity Framework. Under Barclays' ERMF, there is an Information and Cyber Security Policy supported by 12

Standards which define the minimum requirements for cybersecurity matters across the Barclays Group.

The Policy is embedded into the Group's ERMF with Standards to implement cybersecurity risk management. The Standards

cover the following topics: Cryptography, Network Security, Security Configuration, Data Loss Prevention, Vulnerability

Management, Data Security, Incident Response & Threat Intelligence, Threat Management, Governance, Identity & Access

Management, Third Party Information and Cyber Security, and Application Security.  The Group CISO approves and is

accountable for the Information and Cyber Security Policy and associated Standards. As part of our programme, we

periodically assess our performance against these Standards and identify areas for improvement and remediation.

The Barclays Group Board Risk Committee, within its oversight of Operational Risk as a principal risk, is responsible for

overseeing risks arising from cybersecurity threats. In 2025, the Group CISO provided updates to the Barclays Group Board

Risk Committee about cybersecurity risks facing the Group. Such updates addressed topics that included the cybersecurity

threat environment and ransomware attack preparedness, measurement of Barclays' risk and control posture, cybersecurity

incident trends and Barclays' response, plans to improve Barclays' ability to recover from a material cyber attack scenario,

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	42

Governance

Other governance

Barclays’ vulnerability management, privileged access to Barclays' systems, and regulatory developments.  In addition, the

Group Co-Chief Operating Officers provided updates to the Board detailing the progress being made to strengthen

cybersecurity capabilities and reduce risk across the organisation as the threat environment continues to evolve.

Engaging external security consultants to conduct penetration tests, attack simulations and other reviews to independently

benchmark Barclays’ cybersecurity capabilities is an important part of our cybersecurity programme that allows us to

identify and remediate cybersecurity weaknesses. In 2025, individual testing activities were undertaken as part of the Chief

Information Security Office’s threat led assurance model to assess Barclays’ cyber defence capabilities.

Barclays also engages and partners with third-party security providers on certain activities such as cyber recovery, software

vulnerability scanning, penetration testing, distributed denial of service (DDoS) attack prevention, phishing simulations,

third-party risk management, incident response, threat intelligence, fraud prevention, and industry benchmarking.

An important part of Barclays’ security and cybersecurity environment is its Joint Operations Centres (JOCs), which operate

24/7 from three globally strategic locations, linking Barclays’ security professionals and incident response managers with

control functions and business unit representatives. The JOCs deliver security responsiveness by uniting core security

functions and providing a central information and coordination point for security incident management and escalation,

based on defined severity levels. During escalating, significant incidents, the Barclays Crisis Management Team monitors the

response by Incident Management Teams, Resilience Leads, and others, and will invoke the relevant Barclays Crisis

Leadership Teams (CLTs) if the severity of the incident so requires. CLTs are business-led teams at entity, business unit, and

regional levels that provide strategic leadership in a crisis, maintain incident management oversight, and coordinate key

decision making.

To manage security risk from Barclays’ third-party suppliers, many of which perform critical services for Barclays' businesses

and handle sensitive Barclays data, we have a set of contractual Information and Cyber Security Supplier Control Obligations

that are based on requirements in our internal Standards. Using our dedicated Third Party Security Management team’s

capabilities, as well as third-party tooling, we conduct assurance over our third parties and their respective suppliers and

partners against those obligations. Activity is structured on a risk-based approach that prioritises suppliers that underpin our

most important business services. Identified issues are managed formally, but we also engage proactively with third-party

suppliers to help them strengthen their security and resilience posture. To recognise the risk presented by third-party

suppliers, which are increasingly targeted by threat actors, we regularly alert third-party suppliers where we anticipate that

they may be more vulnerable and should take preventative action.

Notwithstanding such third-party risk management efforts, Barclays does not have direct control over the cybersecurity of

the systems of its third parties and their respective suppliers and partners, limiting the Group’s ability to effectively protect

and defend against certain threats.

Certifications

Barclays holds four ISO27001 certifications (i.e., the international standard on how to manage information security), the

Cyber Essentials/Cyber Essentials Plus Certification, and a UK certification for Digital Banking.

Training

Barclays requires colleagues to complete mandatory information security training at least annually. Topics covered include

incident reporting procedures, protecting sensitive data, device security, data leakage prevention, social engineering

awareness, and password management. Consequences of non-completion may include disciplinary action and impact to

compensation.

Barclays performs a number of key activities related to identifying, investigating, responding to and containing phishing,

including an operational process that provides education and awareness through phishing simulation exercises, and

management interventions for employees who demonstrate susceptibility to phishing lures. To report suspected phishing to

Barclays' JOCs for further investigation, colleagues have a reporting tool integrated into their email account and receive

feedback on whether the reported email was suspect or genuine. Barclays uses metrics to continually refine its phishing

education and training.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	43

Governance

Colleagues

The following sub-sections include a summary of the Barclays Bank PLC specific items from the Barclays PLC 2025 Annual

Report. For full details, refer to the Colleagues section of the Barclays PLC 2025 Annual Report. Figures mentioned are for the

Barclays Group, other than where specifically mentioned.

At the heart of achieving our plan to make Barclays simpler, better and more balanced are our colleagues. We are united by a

shared Purpose, Values and Mindset, delivering to a consistently excellent standard in all we do - and we are making

Barclays Bank PLC a great place to work, where every colleague can reach their potential.

For more information on our commitment to our colleagues, see home.barclays/sustainability/esg-resource-hub/reporting

and disclosures/

Engaging with colleagues

Sharing our strategy with colleagues - and explaining how they can contribute towards its delivery - has been a key part of

our 2025 engagement. Regular, two-way dialogue helps us understand what is working well across the organisation and

where we can improve.

Engagement with colleagues is delivered through townhalls, skip-level meetings, site visits, leader-led events, focus groups

and surveys. Through our bi-annual Your View survey, our people can share their feedback on working at Barclays. We are

committed to a respectful and inclusive environment where everyone feels safe to speak up. Our processes for raising

concerns and whistleblowing provide channels for anonymous colleague feedback.

Our longstanding partnership with Unite in the UK offers further insight into the views of our people. We continue to consult

with Unite on major change programmes to minimise job losses and prioritise reskilling and redeployment.

Embedding a consistently excellent standard

A consistently excellent standard is what we expect of ourselves - and what our customers, clients and all our stakeholders

trust us to deliver. This continues to be an integral part of our culture and a key enabler of our three-year plan.

Our consistently excellent culture-change programme continued to embed these standards across the organisation.

Throughout 2025, local initiatives across divisions and functions supported Group-wide efforts to simplify processes,

strengthen risk and control, and drive efficiency.

A consistently excellent standard is now embedded in HR tools, processes and products from hiring and induction, to

performance management, promotions and development programmes.

By 2025, workshops were delivered to our colleagues globally, creating strong understanding across the organisation of

what it means to deliver to a consistently excellent standard. We also launched the Risk and Control Digital Credential

(RCDC) – our first Group-wide, externally accredited online learning programme, certified by the Institute of Risk

Management. The RCDC equips colleagues with the knowledge and skills to proactively manage risk and strengthen

controls. This initiative marked a significant step in our ongoing commitment to strong risk management and delivering to a

consistently excellent standard.

Investing in our talent

Our talent ambition is to help our colleagues grow, develop and thrive at every level of our organisation, building a strong

talent pipeline for the future. In 2025, we strengthened how we identify, assess and develop high-potential talent,

introducing greater rigour and consistency, through implementing our Talent Management Standards including a consistent

definition of potential, approach to talent reviews and calibration. We delivered accelerator programmes and sponsorship

initiatives and continued our Evolution leadership development programme. We also offered senior leaders a suite of

practical tools, targeted workshops, and resources to develop their skills.

In 2025, we continued hiring interns, graduates and apprentices, and continued building on our relationships with key

partners to support inclusive access to all our opportunities. Barclays won the National Graduate Recruitment Award for

Most Popular Graduate Recruiter in Banking, Insurance and Financial services and was ranked in the top 20 in The Times

Top 100 Graduate Employers list – recognising our focus on our Early Careers population as a key talent pipeline for the

future.

We simplified and personalised learning for colleagues and invested in technology to support our People Leaders'

development. For example, by piloting virtual coaching for our People Leaders and newly promoted Managing Directors

(MDs) and expanding the deployment of our 360-feedback tool.

In 2025 we focused on enhancing our alumni proposition – including by launching a differentiated experience for our

Executive Alumni. Our Group CEO hosted our first-ever MD alumni networking event in London, attended by members of

the Executive Committee and Board.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	44

Governance

Colleagues

Our inclusive culture

We are evolving our approach to Inclusion and Opportunity with a focus on empowering our colleagues and leaders and

driving company success - cultivating high-performing teams and providing rich opportunities for colleagues to progress,

while aspiring to hire from the broadest global talent pools. We are committed to creating a workplace where everyone feels

valued and respected, within a culture of belonging and equal opportunity for all.

Supporting our workforce

Helping our people perform at their best remains a priority. Barclays provides a range of support for colleagues through its

policies covering annual leave, life events, health issues, family and caring and flexible working.

We support colleague wellbeing with data-driven campaigns that encourage healthy habits and a positive culture, supported

by our mental health awareness eLearning and our 'Be Well' online wellbeing portal. We also continued to enhance our

provision for colleagues in the UK with an updated Employee Assistance Programme providing additional mental health

support to their family members.

Rewarding our colleagues

We offer eligible colleagues the opportunity to acquire Barclays shares on beneficial terms. In recognition of colleagues'

collective effort towards delivering our three-year plan and the effort that is still required, in February 2025 we granted

colleagues a share award and in 2026 we will grant a similar colleague share award, for a second successive year.

In July 2025, all UK colleagues were given access to Barclays Premier Banking, which offers a suite of exclusive products,

services, and benefits.

Enhancements to policy provisions

In 2025, we focused on aligning to our global policies to better support our colleagues and People Leaders in managing their

work life at Barclays.

In November, we announced that our paternity leave policy in the UK will increase from two weeks to 16 weeks, and that the

non-primary caregiver leave policy in Asia Pacific will increase from six weeks to ten weeks. Effective from 1 January 2026,

these updates aim to help new parents spend more time with their families and support colleagues in balancing work and

personal life.

Our people policies

Our people policies1 help us recruit the best people, provide equal opportunities and create an inclusive culture - in line with

our Purpose, Values and Mindset, and in support of our long-term success. They are reviewed and updated regularly to

ensure they remain aligned with our broader people strategy.

As part of our Fair Pay Agenda, we are committed to paying our colleagues fairly and appropriately relative to their role,

seniority, skills, experience and performance. We pay at least a living wage in all our locations and provide colleagues with

resources to ensure everyone has equal opportunity to progress.

Note

1 Our policies reflect relevant employment law, including the provisions of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and the International Labour

Organisation (ILO) Declaration on Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	45

Risk review

Contents

The management of risk is a critical underpinning to the execution of the Barclays Bank Group’s strategy. The material risks

and uncertainties the Barclays Bank Group faces across its business and portfolios are key areas of management focus.

Risk management strategy		Page
Overview of the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to risk<br><br>management.	▪Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)	47
	▪Segregation of duties – the “Three Lines of Defence” model	47
	▪Principal risks	47
	▪Risk appetite	48
	▪Risk Committees	48
	▪Barclays’ risk culture	49
Material existing and emerging risks
Insight into the level of risk across our business and<br><br>portfolios, the material existing and emerging risks and<br><br>uncertainties we face and the key areas of management<br><br>focus.	▪Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more<br><br>than one principal risk	50
	▪Climate risk	58
	▪Credit risk	58
	▪Market risk	60
	▪Treasury and capital risk	60
	▪Operational risk	61
	▪Model risk	66
	▪Compliance risk	67
	▪Financial crimerisk	68
	▪Reputation risk	68
	▪Legal risk and legal, competition and regulatory matters	69
Principal risk management
The Barclays Bank Group’s approach to risk management<br><br>for each principal risk with focus on organisation and<br><br>structure and roles and responsibilities.	▪Climate risk management	71
	▪Credit risk management	74
	▪Market risk management	76
	▪Treasury and capital risk management	77
	▪Operational risk management	79
	▪Model risk management	79
	▪Compliance risk management	81
	▪Financial crime risk management	81
	▪Reputation risk management	82
	▪Legal risk management	82
Risk performance
Climate risk: The risk of financial losses arising from<br><br>climate change, through physical risks and risks associated<br><br>with transitioning to a lower carbon economy.	▪Climate risk performance	85
Credit risk: The risk of loss to the Barclays Bank Group<br><br>from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties<br><br>(including sovereigns), to fully honour their obligations to<br><br>the Barclays Bank Group, including the whole and timely<br><br>payment of principal, interest, collateral and other<br><br>receivables.	▪Credit risk overview and summary of performance	89
	▪Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk<br><br>transfer	91
	▪Expected credit losses	93
	▪Management adjustments to models for impairment	103
	▪Climate risk ECL assessment	104
	▪Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis	105
	▪Analysis of the concentration of credit risk	115
	▪Approach to management and representation of credit quality	117
	▪Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types	125
	▪Assets held for sale	126
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	46
---	---

Risk review

Contents

Risk performance continued
Market risk: The risk of loss arising from potential adverse<br><br>changes in the value of the Barclays Bank Group’s assets<br><br>and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including,<br><br>but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity<br><br>prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities<br><br>and asset correlations.	▪Market risk overview and summary of performance	131
	▪Review of management measures	131
Treasury and capital risk – Liquidity:<br><br>The risk that the Barclays Bank Group is unable to meet its<br><br>contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not<br><br>have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of<br><br>funding and liquidity to support its assets.	▪Liquidity risk overview	134
	▪Liquidity risk stress testing	134
	▪Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities	136
Treasury and capital risk – Capital:<br><br>The risk that the Barclays Bank Group has an insufficient<br><br>level or composition of capital to support its normal<br><br>business activities and to meet its regulatory capital<br><br>requirements under normal operating environments and<br><br>stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal<br><br>planning or regulatory testing purposes). This also includes<br><br>the risk from the Barclays Bank Group’s pension plans.	▪Capital risk overview	141
	▪Foreign exchange risk	142
	▪Pension risk review	143
Treasury and capital risk – Interest rate risk in the<br><br>banking book: The risk that the Barclays Bank Group is<br><br>exposed to capital or income volatility because of a<br><br>mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-<br><br>traded) assets and liabilities.	▪Interest rate risk in the banking book overview and summary of<br><br>performance	145
	▪Net interest income sensitivity	145
	▪Analysis of equity sensitivity	145
	▪Volatility of the fair value through other comprehensive income<br><br>(FVOCI) portfolio in the liquidity pool	146
Operational risk: The risk of loss to the Barclays Bank<br><br>Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems,<br><br>human factors or due to external events (for example<br><br>fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market<br><br>risks.	▪Operational risk overview and summary of performance	147
	▪Operational risk profile	148
Model risk: The potential for adverse consequences from<br><br>decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and<br><br>reports.	▪Model risk overview and summary of performance	150
Compliance risk: The risk of poor outcomes for, or harm<br><br>to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery<br><br>of the Barclays Bank Group's products and services.	▪Compliance risk overview and summary of performance	151
Financial Crime risk: The risk that the Barclays Bank Group<br><br>and its associated persons (employees or third parties)<br><br>commit or facilitate financial crime, and/or Barclays<br><br>products and services are used to facilitate financial crime.	▪Financial Crime risk overview and summary of performance	152
Reputation risk: The risk that an action, transaction,<br><br>investment, event, decision, or business relationship will<br><br>reduce trust in the Barclays Bank Group’s integrity and/or<br><br>competence.	▪Reputation risk overview and summary of performance	153
Legal risk: The risk of loss or imposition of penalties,<br><br>damages or fines from the failure of the Barclays Bank<br><br>Group to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or<br><br>contractual requirements.	▪Legal risk overview and summary of performance	153
Supervision and regulation
The Barclays Bank Group’s operations, including its<br><br>overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to<br><br>a significant body of rules and regulations.	▪Supervision of the Barclays Bank Group	154
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	47
---	---

Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

The Barclays Bank Group’s risk management strategy

This section introduces the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to managing and identifying risks, and for fostering a sound risk

culture.

Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)

The ERMF governs the way in which the Barclays Bank Group identifies and manages its risks. It outlines the highest level

arrangements for risk management by setting out standards, objectives and key responsibilities of different groups of

employees of the Barclays Bank Group. It is approved by the Barclays PLC Board on recommendation of the Barclays Group

Board Risk Committee and the Barclays Bank Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO); it is then adopted by the Barclays Bank Group.

The ERMF sets out:

▪risk management and segregation of duties: the ERMF defines a Three Lines of Defence model

▪principal risks faced by the Barclays Bank Group which guide the organisation of risk management processes

▪risk appetite requirements: this helps define the level of risk we are willing to undertake in our business

▪roles and responsibilities for key risk management and governance.

The ERMF is complemented by frameworks, policies and standards which are mainly aligned to individual principal risks:

▪frameworks cover high level principles guiding the management of principal risks, and set out details of which policies

are needed, and high level governance arrangements

▪policies set out the control objectives and high level requirements to address the key principles articulated in their

associated frameworks. Policies state ‘what’ those within scope are required to do

▪standards set out detail of the control requirements to ensure the control objectives set by the policies are met.

Segregation of duties - the "Three Lines of Defence" model

The ERMF sets out a clear lines of defence model. All colleagues are responsible for understanding and managing risks

within the context of their individual roles and responsibilities, as set out below.

▪The first line consists of all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client facing areas of the Barclays Bank

Group and all associated support functions, including Finance, Operations, Treasury and Human Resources. The first line

is responsible for identifying and managing the risks in which they are engaged, operating within applicable limits and

developing a control framework, and escalating risk events or issues as appropriate. Employees in the first line have

primary responsibility for their risks and their activities are subject to oversight from the relevant parts of the second and

third lines.

▪The second line comprises of the Risk and Compliance functions. The role of the second line is to establish the limits,

rules and constraints, and the frameworks, policies and standards under which all activities shall be performed,

consistent with the risk appetite of the Barclays Bank Group, and to oversee the performance of the Barclays Bank Group

against these limits, rules and constraints. Controls for first line activities will ordinarily be established by the control

officers operating within the control framework of the Barclays Bank Group. These controls will remain subject to

oversight by the second line.

▪The third line of defence is Internal Audit, and is responsible for providing independent assurance over the effectiveness

of governance, risk management and controls over current, systemic and evolving risks.

▪The legal function provides support to all areas of the Barclays Bank Group and is not formally part of any of the three

lines of defence. The Legal function is responsible for proactively identifying, communicating and providing legal advice

on applicable laws, rules and regulations. Except in relation to the legal advice it provides or procures, it is subject to

second line oversight with respect to its own operational and compliance risks, as well as with respect to the legal risk to

which the Barclays Bank Group is exposed.

Principal risks

The ERMF identifies ten principal risks namely: climate risk, credit risk, market risk, treasury and capital risk, operational risk,

model risk, compliance risk, financial crime risk, reputation risk and legal risk. Financial crime risk was elevated to a principal

risk in the ERMF, effective from 1 January 2025.  Previously, financial crime risk was managed as part of compliance risk.

Recognising the increased external threat of financial crime, this change will enhance transparency and visibility of financial

crime risk within the Barclays Bank Group and reinforce independent assessment, management and oversight of financial

crime risk.

Each of the principal risks is overseen by an accountable executive at the Barclays Group level who is responsible for

overseeing and/or assigning responsibilities for the framework, policies and standards that set out associated

responsibilities and expectations, and detail the related requirements around risk management. In addition, certain risks

span across more than one principal risk.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	48

Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

Risk Appetite

Risk Appetite is defined as the level of risk which the Barclays Bank Group is prepared to accept in carrying out its activities.

It provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Barclays Bank Group’s current

and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

Risk appetite is approved by the Barclays PLC Board in aggregate and disseminated across legal entities and businesses,

including the Barclays Bank Group. The Barclays Bank PLC Board cannot approve a higher risk appetite than that determined

by the Barclays PLC Board without the approval of the Barclays PLC Board but may choose to operate at a lower level of risk

appetite than that approved by the Barclays PLC Board.

The Barclays Group total risk appetite and its allocation to the Barclays Bank Group are supported by limits to enable and

control specific exposures and activities that have material concentration risk implications.

Risk Committees

The Barclays Bank Group's various risk committees consider risk matters relevant to their business, and escalate as required

to the Barclays Group Risk Committee (GRC), whose Chair, in turn, escalates to the Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk

Committees and the Barclays Bank PLC Board.

Board<br><br>Committees	Barclays Bank PLC Board			Barclays Bank<br><br>PLC ExCo
	Barclays Bank PLC Board<br><br>Risk Committee	Barclays Bank PLC Board<br><br>Audit Committee	Barclays Bank PLC Board<br><br>Remuneration Committee
Management<br><br>Level<br><br>Committees/<br><br>Forums	Group Risk Committee		Barclays PLC<br><br>Remuneration Review<br><br>Panel
Business Level<br><br>Committees/<br><br>Forums	Risk Committees<br><br>(aligned to product/risk type or business)

The Barclays Bank PLC Board receives regular information on the risk profile of the Barclays Bank Group, and has ultimate

responsibility for approval of risk appetite and capital plans, within the parameters set by the Barclays PLC Board. The

Barclays Bank PLC Board is also responsible for the adoption of the ERMF.

Further, there are two Board-level committees which oversee the application of the ERMF and review and monitor risk

across the Barclays Bank Group. These are: the Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee and the Barclays Bank PLC Board

Audit Committee. Additionally, the Barclays Bank PLC Board Remuneration Committee oversees pay practices focusing on

aligning pay to sustainable performance:

▪The Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee (BRC): The BRC monitors Barclays Bank Group’s risk profile against the

agreed appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions taken by management are reviewed to

ascertain that the BRC is comfortable with them. The Barclays Bank Group CRO regularly presents a report to the BRC

summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The BRC also reviews

certain key risk methodologies, the effectiveness of risk management, and the Barclays Bank Group risk profile, including

the material issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The committee also commissions regular

updates and in-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by business heads, the Group CRO or senior

risk managers.

▪The Barclays Bank PLC Board Audit Committee (BAC): The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal

control systems, on material control issues of significance, and on accounting judgements, including a review of the

adequacy of impairment allowances.

▪The Barclays Bank PLC Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo): The RemCo receives proposals on ex-ante and ex-

post risk adjustments to variable remuneration based on risk management performance including events, issues and the

wider risk profile. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	49

Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

The GRC is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the risk profile of the Barclays Bank

Group. This includes coverage of all principal risks (with the exception of certain  decisions on matters impacting reputation

risk), and any other material risks, and any other material risks, to which the Barclays Bank Group is exposed. The GRC

reviews and recommends the proposed risk appetite and associated limits to the BRC. The committee covers all business

units and legal entities of the Barclays Bank Group.

Risk themes and horizon scanning reports, highlighting emerging and forward looking risks, are regularly presented to the

BRC for discussion and analysis. The themes are derived and quantified from principal risk horizon scanning and risk

registers, complemented by senior management and BRC input. Watching brief items are collated and informed along the

risk themes as a list of risks which may have a more limited impact and likelihood in the near-term but have the potential to

develop and meet the risk theme definition in the future. The inventory of risk themes is updated regularly with key changes

presented to the BRC. Key risk themes are a subset of the risk themes considered most topical at that moment and material

to the Barclays Bank Group considering the external environment. The BRC semi-annually reviews and discusses a report

entitled ‘Key Risk Themes and Management Actions’.

Barclays’ risk culture

Risk culture can be defined as the norms, attitudes and behaviours related to risk awareness, risk taking and risk

management. This is reflected in how the Barclays Bank Group identifies, escalates and manages risk matters.

The Barclays Bank Group is committed to maintaining a robust risk culture in which:

▪management expect, model and reward the right behaviours from a risk and control perspective; and

▪colleagues identify, manage and escalate risk and control matters, and meet their responsibilities around risk

management.

The Barclays Group CEO works with the Executive Management to embed a strong risk culture within the Barclays Group,

with particular regard to the identification, escalation and management of risk matters, in accordance with the ERMF. This is

supported by our Purpose, Values and Mindset, as well by as by setting a standard of consistent excellence. Specifically, all

employees regardless of their positions, functions or locations must play their part in the Barclays Bank Group’s risk

management. Employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies which are relevant to their

responsibilities, know how to escalate actual or potential risk issues, and have a role-appropriate level of awareness of the

risk management process as defined by the ERMF.

Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way

Globally, all colleagues must attest to the “Barclays Way”, our Code of Conduct, and comply with all frameworks, policies

and standards applicable to their roles. The Code of Conduct outlines the Purpose, Values and Mindset which govern our

‘Barclays Way’ of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues’

working relationships, and provides guidance on working with other Barclays employees, customers and clients,

governments and regulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community. See home.barclays/

sustainability/esg-resource-hub/statements-and-policy-positions/ for more details.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	50

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Barclays Bank Group’s future performance

The Barclays Bank Group has identified a broad range of risks to which its businesses are exposed. Material risks are those to

which senior management pay particular attention and which could cause the delivery of the Barclays Bank Group’s

strategy, results of operations, financial condition and/or prospects to differ materially from expectations. Emerging risks are

those which have unknown components, the impact of which could crystallise over a longer time period. The factors set out

below should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all the potential risks and uncertainties which

the Barclays Bank Group faces. For example, certain other factors beyond the Barclays Bank Group’s control, including

escalation of global conflicts, acts of terrorism, natural disasters, pandemics and similar events, although not detailed below,

could have a similar impact on the Barclays Bank Group.

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one principal risk

i)Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues

The Barclays Bank Group’s operations are subject to changes in global and local economic and market conditions, as well as

geopolitical developments, which may have a material impact on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations,

financial condition and prospects.

A deterioration in global or local economic and market conditions may result in (among other things): (i) deteriorating

business, consumer or investor confidence and lower levels of investment and productivity, which in turn may lead to lower

customer and client activity, including lower demand for borrowing; (ii) higher default rates, delinquencies, write-offs and

impairment charges as borrowers struggle with their debt commitments; (iii) subdued asset prices, which may impact the

value of collateral held by the Barclays Bank Group and require the Barclays Bank Group and its clients to post additional

collateral in order to satisfy margin calls; (iv) mark-to-market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in factors

such as creditworthiness, securities prices and solvency of counterparties; and (v) revisions to calculated expected credit

losses (ECLs) leading to increases in impairment allowances.

In addition, the Barclays Bank Group’s ability to borrow from other financial institutions or raise funding from external

investors may be affected by deteriorating economic conditions and market disruption. Geopolitical events can also cause

financial instability and affect economic growth.

During 2025, global economic conditions have been marked by uncertainty, driven by a rapidly developing geopolitical

environment, the impact of US trade policies, diverging monetary policies, continued economic slowdown in China and

structural economic issues in the UK and the EU. Without limitation, the Barclays Bank Group has observed the following

macroeconomic risk themes/trends:

•Limitations on economic output growth, mostly driven by: (i) tight labour markets and low productivity growth in the

main western economies; (ii) large fiscal deficits; and (iii) uncertainty about the impact of trade policies, export

controls and tariff implementation across the globe dampening business and customer sentiment and economic

activity through constrained consumer spending and business investment outside of sectors such as artificial

intelligence (AI) and defence. These factors could lead to economic stagnation or even recessionary dynamics across

Europe, the UK and the US which could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group's results of

operations and profitability.

•In the US, executive and legislative initiatives in areas such as trade, foreign policy, energy, immigration, federal

government spending, regulatory and institutional change, among others, has led to uncertainty about the long-term

net impact of these factors on the wider economy and the overall effects on prices, labour markets, consumer

spending, business sentiment and fiscal balance. A significant proportion of the Barclays Bank Group’s portfolio is

located in the US, including a major credit card portfolio and a range of corporate and investment banking exposures.

If the aforementioned factors have a long-term negative impact on interest rates, inflation, business performance,

employment, competitiveness and economic output, this could lead to higher levels of impairment and/or lower

revenues, which could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group's results of operations and

profitability.

•The US administration's approach to foreign policy and regulatory and institutional frameworks has departed from

that of previous administrations. The challenges to the status quo could have long-term impacts on the US and its

trading partners, and there is a risk that this will result in disruption to the long-term standing of the US. A potential

deterioration of the perceived US exceptionalism that drives demand for US assets and sustains the USD’s role as a

reserve currency could materialise in episodes of uncertainty and volatility in global financial markets that could

negatively impact the business environments the Barclays Bank Group and its clients operate in.

•The adoption of tariffs and other protectionist measures and countermeasures could further complicate the

economic outlook for the EU, China and other export-driven emerging markets given their trade surpluses. A

worsening economic outlook for these markets could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s

business in the affected regions.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	51

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

•The EU faces a number of structural challenges and is vulnerable to adverse geopolitical developments. Key

difficulties for the EU include heavily indebted governments, a lack of productivity growth, tight labour markets and

deteriorating demographics. In addition, some of the EU's key economic sectors, including automobiles, chemicals

and renewables among others, are under pressure from competitive imports and changing trade patterns.

Uncertainty surrounding NATO's future and pressure to increase spending add to the vulnerability. A deterioration in

these difficulties could adversely impact the Barclays Bank Group's business in the EU.

•In China, while headline GDP growth in 2025 has been broadly in line with its target of around 5%, recently released

economic data has shown a weakening with a continued property market slump and a more challenging

environment for its export-driven sectors while concerns remain over the longer term risks of deflation, weak

domestic demand and an ageing demographic, which will have all led to a more uncertain outlook. The combination

of these risks pressuring the financial sector and precipitating wider systemic concerns could affect the exposures of

the Barclays Bank Group across global markets which are subject to contagion effects.

•The UK, which is a relevant corporate banking market for Barclays Bank Group, faces a number of structural

challenges. While the Labour government has identified economic growth as a priority, growth has so far remained

subdued, falling short of market expectations. Furthermore, the fiscal position of the UK has remained challenging

and there are risks of further economic headwinds, such as supply chain disruptions and trade fragmentation leading

to higher inflation, which could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group's results of operations and

profitability. The long-term impact of the Labour government’s fiscal policy could be detrimental for growth as well

as for business and consumer sentiment, with risks to the Barclays Bank Group's corporate businesses.

•Weak economic sentiment is also reflected in the market’s view of UK assets, widening spreads for UK government

and UK corporate debt, softening of the housing market and lowering valuations of UK equities compared with non-

UK peers. This may have a material adverse impact on the collateral held by the Barclays Bank Group in relation to its

secured lending portfolios and may result in higher impairments and capital requirements. The UK stock market in

particular continues to face structural headwinds, ranging from economic uncertainty and sectoral concentration to

limited domestic capital deployment and regulatory constraints, potentially undermining its competitiveness and

investor appeal, leaving the Barclays Bank Group, and its large UK corporate clients, indirectly exposed to potential

risks relating to capital access and strategic positioning.

•The loss of ‘the presumption of conformity’ is widely reported to have raised costs for UK customers and clients

exporting to the EU as it results in their products no longer being presumed to be in line with corresponding EU rules.

This, together with the risk of regulatory divergence between the UK and the EU, has had, and may continue to have,

an adverse impact on both the Barclays Bank Group's EU and UK operations. Efforts to recalibrate the relationship

between both parties are ongoing, with the first review of the EU–UK Trade and Cooperation Agreement (TCA)

expected in 2026. The trend for the EU–UK relationship is shifting from a minimalist post-Brexit stance toward

structured cooperation on trade, climate, security, mobility and regulatory alignment, but risks to materialisation

remain.

A deterioration in the aforementioned economic and business environment could result in (among other things):

•A prolonged slowdown in the markets where the Barclays Bank Group operates, with lower economic output, higher

unemployment, and depressed property prices, which could lead to increased impairments in relation to a number of

Barclays Bank Group’s portfolios including the unsecured lending portfolio (credit cards) and real estate exposures;

•Increased market volatility (in particular in currencies and interest rates), which could impact the trading book

positions and affect the underlying value of assets held in the banking book, including securities held by the Barclays

Bank Group for liquidity purposes. In addition, market confidence and depositor perceptions of banking fragility as

seen in certain institutions in 2023 could increase the severity and velocity of deposit outflows, impacting the

Barclays Bank Group’s liquidity position;

•A credit rating downgrade for one or more members of Barclays Bank Group’s parent entity, BPLC (either directly or

indirectly as a result of a downgrade in the UK sovereign credit ratings), which could significantly increase Barclays

Bank Group’s cost of funding and/or reduce its access to funding, widen credit spreads and have a material adverse

impact on Barclays Bank Group’s interest margins and liquidity position; and/or

•A market-wide widening of credit spreads or reduced investor appetite could negatively impact Barclays Bank

Group’s cost of and/or access to funding.

In addition to weak/unfavourable economic conditions, other risk factors could adversely affect the business environment in

which Barclays Bank Group operates:

•During 2025, financial market volatility and risk of disorderly markets have been driven by developments in the

technological sector, where the deployment of AI and high expectations of returns have led to historic levels of

capital expenditure and equity valuations on a select few, mostly US, corporations. Concentration risk and a potential

valuation bubble if reality fails to meet expectations could lead to strong market corrections and negative wealth

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	52

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

effects, which, in turn, may impact the wider economy and cause a deterioration in the business and economic

environment.

•Economic activity is largely dependent on data, technology, networks, infrastructure and cybersecurity, heightening

the risk and potential impact of service disruptions, either accidental or driven by bad actors such as cybercriminals

or state sponsored actors using asymmetric tactics.

•Financial institutions are often perceived to have a role in global developments or events like geopolitical conflicts,

climate change, digitalisation, fraud, money laundering, and sanctions, which give rise to reputational risks which are

complicated to navigate.

•Disruptions to global supply chains have underlined the potential for further adverse impacts on the markets in

which the Group operates. Further geopolitical deterioration, particularly in Ukraine, the Middle East and/or South

China Sea, and trade protectionism related de-coupling of production chains could also have a negative impact on

the markets in which the Group operates.

•Diverging financial, conduct and prudential regulations between the jurisdictions where the Group operates increase

the complexity and costs of compliance. In particular, increasing uncertainty and regulatory divergence between

different jurisdictions relating to climate risk will add complexity and increase costs for compliance against varying

regulatory expectations whilst also making it difficult for the Group to effectively and consistently manage

stakeholder expectations and climate risks across its portfolios.

The circumstances mentioned above could have a material adverse effect on the  Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of

operations, financial condition, prospects, liquidity, capital position and credit ratings (including potential credit rating

agency changes of outlooks or ratings), as well as on the  Barclays Bank Group’s customers, clients, employees and

suppliers.

ii)The impact of interest rate changes on the Barclays Bank Group’s profitability

The impact from changes to interest rates are potentially significant for the Barclays Bank Group, especially given the

uncertainty as to the size and frequency of such changes, particularly in the Barclays Bank Group’s main markets of the UK,

the US and the EU.

Interest rate cuts could put pressure on the Barclays Bank Group’s net interest margins (the difference between lending

income and borrowing costs) due to either a delay in passthrough or a smaller passthrough of the interest rate cuts to client

deposits. In that scenario the maturing structural hedges (portion maturing as part of the amortising structure) will be

replenished at lower rates and this could adversely affect the profitability and prospects of the Barclays Bank Group.

Higher interest rates could result in higher funding costs either due to higher refinancing costs or due to deposit balance mix

changes as counterparties prefer switching into deposits that pay a higher rate. In addition, interest rates remaining higher

for longer (due to either smaller or less frequent than expected interest rate cuts, or larger or more frequent than expected

interest rate increases), could lead to generally weaker than expected growth, reduced business confidence and higher

unemployment. This, combined with the impact that higher interest rates may have on the affordability of loan

arrangements for borrowers (especially when combined with inflationary pressures), could cause stress in the lending

portfolio and underwriting activity of the Barclays Bank Group. This could result in higher credit losses, driving increased

impairment charges which would most notably impact retail unsecured portfolios and wholesale non-investment grade

lending. This could have a material effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition

and prospects.

In addition, changes in interest rates could have an adverse impact on the value of the securities held in the Barclays Bank

Group’s liquid asset portfolio. Consequently, this could create more volatility than expected through the Barclays Bank

Group’s fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) reserve and could adversely affect the profitability and

prospects of the Barclays Bank Group.

iii)Competition in the banking and financial services industry

The Barclays Bank Group operates in a highly competitive environment in which it must evolve and adapt to significant

changes as a result of regulatory reform, technological advances, increased public scrutiny and changes to market and

economic conditions. The Barclays Bank Group expects that competition in the financial services industry will remain intense

and may have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s future business, results of operations, financial

condition and prospects.

New competitors in the financial services industry continue to emerge. For example, technological advances and the growth

of e-commerce have made it possible for non-banks to offer products and services that traditionally were banking products

such as electronic securities trading, payments processing and online automated algorithmic-based investment advice.

Furthermore, payments processing and other services could be significantly disrupted by technologies, such as blockchain

(used in deposit tokenisations and stablecoins) and 'buy now pay later' lending, both of which have been the subject of

significant FCA initiatives in recent years, with the FCA starting to regulate ‘buy now pay later’ lending from 15 July 2026.

Furthermore, the introduction of central bank digital currencies could have a significant impact on the banking system and

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	53

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

the role of commercial banks by disrupting the current provision of banking products and services. This disruption could

allow new competitors, some previously hindered by banking regulation (such as certain FinTechs), to provide customers

with access to banking facilities and increase the disintermediation of banking services.

New technologies and changing consumer behaviour have previously required, and could continue to require, the Barclays

Bank Group to incur additional costs to modify or adapt its products or make additional capital investments in its businesses

to attract and retain clients and customers or to match products and services offered by its competitors, including

technology companies. For example, the Barclays Bank Group has continued to take steps to expand its investment in and to

integrate AI technologies. Such AI technologies and services are rapidly evolving, and require significant investment,

including development and operational costs, to meet the changing needs and expectations of the Barclays Bank Group’s

customers and clients. For related competition risks refer to c) "New and emergent technology" in v) "Operational Risk"

below.

Ongoing or increased competition and/or disintermediation of banking services may put pressure on the pricing of the

Barclays Bank Group’s products and services, which could reduce the Barclays Bank Group's revenues and profitability, or

may cause the Barclays Bank Group to lose market share, particularly with respect to traditional banking products such as

deposits, bank accounts and mortgage lending. This competition may be on the basis of the quality and variety of products

and services offered, transaction execution, innovation, reputation and/or price. These factors may be exacerbated by

further regulatory change. The failure of any of the Barclays Bank Group’s businesses to meet the expectations of clients and

customers, whether due to general market conditions, underperformance, a decision not to offer a particular product or

service, branch closures, changes in client and customer expectations or other factors, could affect the Barclays Bank

Group’s ability to attract or retain clients and customers. Any such impact could, in turn, reduce the Barclays Bank Group’s

revenues.

iv)Regulatory change agenda and impact on business model

The Barclays Bank Group’s business is subject to ongoing regulation and associated regulatory risks, including the effects of

changes in the laws, regulations, policies, voluntary codes of practice and interpretations of the foregoing in the UK, the US,

the EU, and the other markets in which it operates. Many legislative and regulatory changes that are relevant to the Barclays

Bank Group’s business may have an effect beyond the country in which they are enacted, either because the Barclays Bank

Group’s regulators, which include sectoral regulators within the banking and finance industries and legislators in national

and supranational governments deliberately enact laws and/or regulations with extra-territorial effect or its global

operations mean that the Barclays Bank Group gives effect to local laws and regulations on a wider basis.

In recent years, regulators and governments have focused on reforming both the prudential regulation of the financial

services industry and the ways in which the business of financial services is conducted. Measures taken include enhanced

capital, liquidity and funding requirements, the structural separation or prohibition of certain activities by banks, changes in

the operation of capital markets activities, the introduction of tax levies and transaction taxes, changes in compensation

practices, and more detailed requirements on how business is conducted and clients and customers are treated.

Governments and regulators in the UK, the US, the EU or elsewhere may intervene further in relation to areas of industry risk

and/or regulatory risk already identified, or in new areas, which could adversely affect the Barclays Bank Group.

Current and anticipated areas of particular focus for the Barclays Bank Group’s regulators, where regulatory changes could

have a material effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, financial condition, results of operations, prospects, capital,

liquidity or funding position, and reputation include, but are not limited to:

•the continued focus by regulators, international bodies, organisations and unions on how institutions conduct

business, particularly with regard to the delivery of fair outcomes for customers, promoting effective competition in

the interests of consumers and ensuring the orderly and transparent operation of global financial markets, including

the FCA’s ongoing consultation regarding the imposition of a motor finance customer compensation scheme, the

consumer duty in the UK, and the FCA’s review of the provision of financial advice to consumers;

•the implementation of any conduct measures as a result of regulators’ focus on and review of organisational culture,

employee behaviour and whistleblowing, and the UK regulators’ focus on firms’ management of non-financial

misconduct matters;

•the UK regulators’ strategy for and promotion of competitive markets and growth, both domestically and

internationally, including an increasing focus on streamlining and simplifying regulation;

•following the introduction of a new regime for public offers and admission to trading of securities in the UK in

January 2026, the reforms to the regulatory frameworks supporting the wholesale financial markets, including recent

(and expected) changes to the UK regime for asset management, changes to the bond and derivative transparency

regime and potential reforms regarding the quality and accessibility of bond market data through the establishment

of a consolidated tape;

•the increasing regulatory expectations and requirements relating to various aspects of operational resilience,

including an increasing focus on minimising the impact of operational disruptions (including digital operational

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	54

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

disruptions and IT systems failures) on the UK and EU financial sector, the role of critical third-party service providers

to financial institutions, and operational incident and third party reporting requirements;

•the focus globally on technology adoption and digital delivery, including the use of AI, digital assets and digital

money (including central bank digital currencies), payments and related infrastructure, and cybersecurity. This also

includes the introduction of new and/or enhanced laws and / or regulatory standards in these areas, underpinned by

customer protection principles, and actions by regulators that are designed to support the use of AI in the financial

sector;

•the continued evolution of the UK’s regulatory framework following the UK's withdrawal from the EU, particularly

following the implementation of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (FSMA 2023) which provides for the

ongoing revocation and repeal of assimilated law relating to financial services and, where relevant, its replacement

with rules enacted (or to be enacted) by UK regulators, as well as any areas of divergence between the UK and EU

regulatory regimes;

•the harmonisation of EU market access for non-EU banks, which will limit the Barclays Bank Group’s ability to service

EU customers from the UK going forward;

•the implementation of the reforms to the finalisation of the Basel III package, which includes changes to the RWA

approaches to credit risk, market risk, counterparty risk, operational risk and credit valuation adjustments risk,

implementation of the fundamental review of the trading book (FRTB) proposals, the application of input and output

floors and the leverage ratio, as well as reforms to other aspects of prudential regulation, including the large

exposures framework, and amendments to the Bank of England’s approach to setting a minimum requirement for

own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL);

•the review of regulation of the US banking sector under the current US administration, including easing capital

requirements or other prudential requirements;

•the review of regulation of the EU financial sector with a view to enhancing competitiveness of EU banks in particular,

which will likely include the easing of regulatory burdens and capital requirements, simplification of regulations and

an enhanced supervisory role for the European Supervisory Authorities;

•greater monitoring of, and implementation of policies to address capital requirements, liquidity risk, and credit risk

management and continuing focus on review and assurance activities, reporting methodology and data quality in

relation to these prudential requirements;

•increasing regulatory expectations of firms around governance and risk management frameworks, particularly for

the management of climate change and other sustainability-related risks, enhanced sustainability disclosure and

reporting obligations, corporate sustainability due diligence obligations, anti-greenwashing rules and requirements to

develop and disclose a climate transition plan, as well as reactions to such initiatives, including taking a different or

opposing stance in relation to legislation and rules related to sustainability, and jurisdictional divergence, potentially

leading to conflict between initiatives;

•the incorporation of climate change considerations, including transition risks in particular, within the global

prudential framework;

•regulatory expectations in the UK relating to access to payment accounts;

•changes in national or supra-national requirements regarding the ability to offshore or outsource the provision of

services and resources or transfer material risk or data to companies located in other countries, which could impact

the Barclays Bank Group’s ability to implement globally consistent and efficient operating models;

•financial crime, fraud and market abuse standards and increasing expectations for related control frameworks, to

ensure firms are adapting to new threats and are protecting customers from cyber-enabled crime, and in the UK,

reforms relating to authorised push payment fraud reimbursements and the ability of payment service providers to

delay the processing of transactions in certain circumstances;

•the reform to corporate criminal liability in the Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023 in the UK,

which also introduced a failure to prevent fraud offence from September 2025, and prospective amendments to

further expand the scope of corporate criminal liability;

•the application and enforcement of economic sanctions, including those with extra-territorial effect and those arising

from geopolitical tensions;

•individual operating entities within the Barclays Group (including entities within the Barclays Bank Group) may be

required to comply with additional regulatory requirements in order to facilitate the Barclays Group's resolution

planning;

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	55

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

•continuing regulatory focus on data privacy, including the processing of personal data, safeguards against

unauthorised or improper access or disclosure, adherence to cookie and cookie banner compliance, and the use of

personal data in AI systems;

•continuing regulatory focus on policies and procedures for identifying and managing cybersecurity risks,

cybersecurity governance and the corresponding disclosure and reporting obligations;

•ongoing requirements to allocate and monitor management accountability within the Barclays Bank Group (for

example, the requirements of the Senior Managers and Certification Regime in the UK and similar regimes elsewhere

that are either in effect, are due to come into effect in the future or are under consideration, including new rules in

the EU applicable to appointing senior managers), as well as requirements relating to executive remuneration and,

separately, potential reforms to the UK’s SMCR; and

•continuing regulatory focus on the effectiveness of internal systems and controls and risk management frameworks.

For further details on the regulatory supervision of, and regulations applicable to, the Barclays Bank Group, refer to the

Supervision and regulation section.

v) Change delivery and execution risks

The Barclays Bank Group constantly adapts and transforms the way it conducts business in response to changing customer

behaviour and needs, technological developments, regulatory expectations, increased competition and cost management

initiatives. The Barclays Group’s strategy is focused on a plan to become simpler, better and more balanced. This strategy is

intended to enable the Barclays Group to improve its customer service, provide more support to consumers and businesses,

deliver higher quality income growth and build returns. Accordingly, effective management of transformation projects is

required to successfully deliver the Barclays Bank Group's strategic priorities, involving delivering on both  externally driven

programmes and key business initiatives to deliver revenue growth, product enhancement and operational efficiency

outcomes. The magnitude, complexity and, at times, concurrent demands of the projects required to meet these priorities

can result in heightened execution risk.

The ability to execute the Barclays Bank Group’s strategy may be limited by operational capacity and the increasing

complexity of the regulatory environment in which the Barclays Bank Group operates. In addition, whilst the Barclays Bank

Group continues to pursue cost management initiatives, they may not be as effective as expected and cost saving targets

may not be met.

The failure to successfully deliver or achieve any of the expected benefits of these strategic initiatives and/or the failure to

meet customer and stakeholder expectations could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business,

results of operations, financial condition, customer outcomes, prospects and reputation.

The Barclays Bank Group also needs to ensure that its strategy and business model adapt to changing national and

international standards, industry and scientific practices, regulatory requirements and market expectations regarding

climate change, which remain under continuous development. The Barclays Bank Group may face challenges from changing

circumstances and external factors which are beyond the Barclays Bank Group’s control, including the rapid growth of

energy demand, lingering geopolitical uncertainty, and the lack of policy consistency between, and within, jurisdictions.

Achieving the Barclays Bank Group's climate-related ambitions and targets will also depend on a number of factors outside

the Barclays Bank Group's control, including reliable forecasts of hazards from physical climate models and availability of

data / models to measure / assess climate impact on clients. The pathway to net zero is uncertain, complex and dependent

on progress in various areas such as advances in low-carbon technologies, progress by clients towards their own net zero

goals, and supportive public policies in markets where the Barclays Bank Group operates. If there is a lack of progress in the

aforementioned areas, the Barclays Bank Group may fail to achieve its climate related ambitions and targets, and this could

have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, operations, financial condition, prospects and

reputation.

vi) M&A and strategic initiatives

The Barclays Bank Group may, from time to time, pursue acquisitions, disposals or other strategic initiatives which could

subject it to a variety of risks and uncertainties.

In connection with acquisitions, actual results associated with acquired businesses may differ from the anticipated results,

including with respect to: (i) overall future performance of the assets and liabilities acquired and the ability to capitalise on

anticipated growth opportunities; (ii) level of integration achieved, and the cost and timing of any integration and the

resulting ability to realise expected synergies; (iii) failure to retain key employees, customers and suppliers of the acquired

business (iv) cost and timing to achieve separation from any legacy businesses; and (v) the extent to which contingent risks

arise in the acquired business.

In connection with disposals, the Barclays Bank Group may be required to continue to provide transitional services to the

transferred business for a period of time.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	56

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

In respect of transactions announced but not yet completed, it may be necessary to obtain regulatory and other approvals,

or satisfy other conditions, before completion can occur, and there can be no assurance that such approvals will be obtained

or such conditions satisfied (either at all or on terms which are acceptable to the Barclays Bank Group). Transactions that

are announced may be subject to lengthy delays or may not proceed to completion.

Strategic activity of this nature is time-consuming and could produce unforeseen regulatory or operating difficulties, cause

the Barclays Bank Group to incur incremental expenses or require incremental financial, capital, management and other

resources. The Barclays Bank Group may also be exposed to post-transactional contractual claims in connection with

acquisitions, disposals or other strategic activity.

Any of these risks could result in a failure to realise the anticipated benefits of any such strategic activity, or otherwise have a

material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s results of operations, financial conditions and prospects.

vii) Card Partnerships

The Barclays Bank Group maintains several co-branded credit cards and credit card partnership agreements in the US. Such

arrangements are a means of reaching new customers and expanding brand reach, but there is significant competition

among card issuers for these relationships. A deterioration in or failure to maintain these credit card relationships with co-

brand partners, including non-renewal of contracts with existing partners, early termination of partnership arrangements

due to a contractual breach and changes in consumer behaviour regarding spending patterns, could have a negative impact

on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects.

viii) Evolving landscape with respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial intelligence)(AI)

and machine learning technologies

The use of rapidly evolving technologies such as AI, by the Barclays Bank Group and its third-party service providers, while

presenting significant benefits, can also present risks and challenges to the Barclays Bank Group’s business. Use of AI (and

particularly the growing use of agentic AI) may expose the Barclays Bank Group to liability, reputational harm, regulatory

actions and threats of litigation, particularly if such technology produces errors or hallucinations, or results in output that is

biased, harmful, discriminatory or that infringes the intellectual property or data privacy rights of third parties, or otherwise if

such technology does not function as intended.

The use of AI by the Barclays Bank Group’s third-party service providers in their business activities, whether or not disclosed

or known to the Barclays Bank Group, could also expose the Barclays Bank Group to risks. While the Barclays Bank Group

believes it conducts appropriate diligence prior to onboarding third-party service providers, the failure of one or more such

service provider to meet the Barclays Bank Group’s expectations may have an adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s

operations or financial condition, result in legal or regulatory violations, jeopardise the Barclays Bank Group’s intellectual

property rights, cause the Barclays Bank Group to be in breach of its contracts or give rise to issues pertaining to data

privacy and data protection. This may arise as a result of a service provider, including by use of AI tools in contravention of

agreements with the Barclays Bank Group, inputting the Barclays Bank Group’s confidential or proprietary information into

AI tools, sourcing data for development, training or fine-tuning of the tool from unlawful sources or in an otherwise unlawful

manner or implementing the roll-out of new AI tools or functionalities without the Barclays Bank Group’s approval. See

“supplier exposure” for more information regarding risks arising with respect to suppliers.

In addition, laws and regulations focused on the use and provision of AI technologies may impose certain obligations on the

Barclays Bank Group. For example, emerging AI regulations may require the Barclays Bank Group to conduct complex

impact assessments, risk evaluations or other compliance reviews prior to deploying AI tools for certain high-risk

applications, including automated decision-making that affects individuals. Such assessments can be resource-intensive,

time-consuming and may require input from third party specialist advisers. Any failure to conduct these assessments

properly, or at all, could result in regulatory enforcement action, monetary penalties, mandatory cessation of AI system

usage, litigation and potential liability, as well as other adverse consequences. Furthermore, the regulatory framework for AI

continues to evolve and is largely unsettled and fast-moving to varying extents in the jurisdictions in which the Barclays

Bank Group operates. Uncertainty in the legal regulatory regime relating to AI may require significant resources to modify

and maintain business practices to comply with laws, the nature of which cannot be determined at this time.

Several jurisdictions around the globe, including Europe and certain U.S. states, have already proposed or enacted laws

governing AI. For example, the EU Artificial Intelligence Act (the “EU AI Act”), which came into force on 1 August 2024, will

generally become fully applicable after a two-year transitional period, with certain obligations taking effect at an earlier or

later time. The EU AI Act introduces various requirements for AI systems and models placed on the market or put into

service in the EU, including specific transparency and other requirements for general purpose AI systems and the models on

which they are based. In the US, while the White House signed an Executive Order Removing Barriers to American

Leadership in Artificial Intelligence which prioritises deregulation, several states are considering enacting or have already

enacted regulations concerning the use of artificial intelligence technologies. These include the California Transparency in

Frontier Artificial Intelligence Act, the Utah Artificial Intelligence Consumer Protection Amendments, the updated California

Consumer Privacy Act regulations (which came into effect 1 January 2026) and the Colorado Consumer Protections for

Artificial Intelligence Act (effective 30 June 2026). While the UK does not currently have in place any general statutory

regulation of AI, some form of regulation is anticipated, although its content and timing is currently uncertain.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	57

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Other jurisdictions may decide to adopt similar or more restrictive legislation that may render the use of such technologies

challenging or risky. Divergence in legislation and regulatory approach across jurisdictions may make it harder for the

Barclays Bank Group to conduct its business using AI, lead to regulatory fines or penalties, require the Barclays Bank Group

to change its product offerings or business practices, or limit the Barclays Bank Group’s use of AI. If the Barclays Bank

Group's use of AI is restricted, it could lead to business disruption and the Barclays Bank Group’s business may be less

efficient or may be at a competitive disadvantage. Replacement of these technologies with compliant alternatives could

require substantial capital expenditures or lead to a loss of proprietary data or historical optimisation. Additionally, if new

regulations substantially restrict the Barclays Bank Group's usage of AI to drive business efficiencies, the Barclays Bank

Group could face significantly higher operating costs to re-hire personnel or obtain third-party support to perform tasks

previously handled by automated systems, requiring costly and time-intensive recruitment, training or outsourcing

arrangements. Moreover, the Barclays Bank Group’s failure, or perceived failure, to comply fully with developing laws and

regulations relating to AI or machine learning technologies, or meet evolving and varied stakeholder expectations and

industry standards, could harm the Barclays Bank Group’s business, reputation, financial condition, and operating results.

See “Processing errors” and “Model risk” for more information regarding the potential consequences of integrating AI into

the Barclays Bank Group’s product or service offerings, “Data management, information protection and AI” for more

information relating to risks relating to data protection and compliance with existing and future laws and regulations, and

“cyber attacks” for more information on the cybersecurity risks relating to AI technologies.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	58

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks impacting individual principal risks

i)Climate risk

Climate risk is the risk of financial losses arising from climate change, through physical risks and risks associated with

transitioning to a lower carbon economy. Climate risk is a Principal Risk under Barclays’ ERMF. The Climate Risk Policy

focuses on managing the impacts of climate change across the Group's financial and operational risk categories as defined

in the Climate Risk Framework. Climate risk may also drive non-financial risks such as reputational and legal risk, which

continue to be managed under their respective risk frameworks.

Physical risks, such as acute weather events (e.g. cyclones, hurricanes and floods) and long-term climate pattern shifts (e.g.

droughts, temperature and precipitation levels), can lead to damage to fixed assets, operational disruptions, changes in

production outputs and increased costs (among other things).

A transition to a low-carbon economy requires policy and regulatory changes, technological innovations, and reshaped

consumer behaviour and market sentiment. This can lead to transition risks from increased costs and reduced revenues.

The potential impacts of both physical and transition risks on the economy may include lower GDP growth, higher

unemployment, shortage of raw materials and products, supply chain disruptions, significant fluctuations in prices of assets

(such as in the real estate sector), and shifting demands for goods and services. These impacts could subsequently affect

the business model and profitability of both the Barclays Bank Group and its clients. There is significant uncertainty

surrounding the timeframes in which both these physical and transition risks may manifest, adding further challenges to the

Barclays Bank Group in assessing, quantifying and managing the risks associated with climate change within its

downstream financed portfolios. Additionally, divergence in climate policies and regulatory standards across different

jurisdictions may lead to inconsistencies in reporting, risk assessment methodologies and compliance requirements, making

it challenging for Barclays Bank Group to adopt a unified approach to managing climate risk and meeting regulatory

obligations. This fragmentation increases operational complexity and the cost of compliance, and undermines the Barclays

Bank Group’s ability to effectively manage climate risks, including transition risks associated with high-emitting clients.

In 2025, mounting evidence pointed to a rise in physical risks, with acute events such as wildfires, droughts, and flash floods

affecting multiple geographies globally. The UK experienced its hottest summer on record, with temperatures exceeding the

long-term average by 1.5°C. In the US, the number of wildfires reported by the National Interagency Fire Centre surpassed

the 10-year average, while proposed reforms to the Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) raised concerns about

future disaster recovery capacity. There is also evidence of chronic physical risks materialising, with the Met Office’s annual

State of the UK Climate Report confirming that temperature and rainfall extremes are becoming more prevalent. The

intensification of physical risks could increase risks in the Barclays Bank Group's portfolios and also damage the Barclays

Bank Group’s facilities and infrastructure, leading to a potential adverse impact on its financial position.

The Barclays Bank Group recognises climate risk as an amplifier of existing risk categories, exerting influence across multiple

principal risk types and heightening their severity. The Barclays Bank Group's wholesale credit corporates that are most

exposed to climate-related risks— particularly those operating in high-emitting sectors with limited transition preparedness

— are likely to experience operational and financial challenges. Such vulnerabilities can lead to a deterioration in

creditworthiness, thereby increasing credit risk within the Barclays Bank Group’s portfolios. The Barclays Bank Group’s Risk

Register process reflects the potential effects of climate risk drivers on the Barclays Bank Group’s principal risks and its

portfolios. Based on the 2025 assessment, climate risk is assessed as having a higher materiality rating within the Barclays

Bank Group's Risk Register for Credit Risk than across other principal risk categories.

The Barclays Bank Group may face difficulties from changing circumstances and external factors which are beyond the

Barclays Bank Group’s control, which can provide challenges to the Barclays Bank Group in contributing to the Group's

climate-related ambitions and targets. These difficulties include geopolitical issues, energy security and other considerations

such as policy environment, technological advancements and market dynamics  for a low-carbon economy. The pathway to

net-zero is uncertain, complex and dependent on progress in various areas such as advances in low-carbon technologies,

collective action by clients to meet their own climate goals and supportive government policies in markets where the

Barclays Bank Group operates. Furthermore, the Barclays Bank Group’s business and operations have been, and may

continue to be, adversely impacted by the perception that its response to climate change is ineffective, insufficient, or

otherwise inappropriate, which could result in potential adverse impacts on its financial position.

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to climate change, refer to the climate risk management section.

ii)Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of loss to the Barclays Bank Group from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including

sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the Group, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest,

collateral, and other receivables. Credit risk is impacted by a number of factors outside the Group’s control, including wider

economic conditions.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	59

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

a)Impairment

Impairment is calculated in line with the requirements of IFRS9. Loss allowances, based on ECLs, are measured on a

forward-looking basis using a broad range of financial metrics and application of complex judgements. Accordingly,

impairment charges are potentially volatile and may not successfully predict actual credit losses, particularly under stressed

conditions. Failure by the Barclays Bank Group to accurately estimate credit losses through ECLs could have a material

adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group's business, results of operations, financial condition, and prospects.

For further details, refer to Note 8 of the financial statements on page 197.

b)Specific portfolios, sectors and concentrations

The Barclays Bank Group is subject to risks arising from changes in credit quality and recovery rates for loans and advances

due from borrowers and counterparties. Additionally, the Barclays Bank Group is subject to a concentration of those risks

where it has significant exposures to borrowers and counterparties in specific sectors, or to particular types of borrowers

and counterparties. Any deterioration in the credit quality of such borrowers and counterparties could lead to lower

recoverability from loans and advances, and higher impairment charges. Accordingly, any of the following areas of

uncertainty could have a material adverse impact on the Barclays Bank Group's business, results of operations, financial

condition, and prospects:

▪Consumer affordability: higher inflation and higher interest rates could increase the cost of living and negatively impact

a customer's ability to service debt payments, leading to increased arrears in both unsecured and secured products. The

risk is further heightened with uncertainty around global fiscal policy including tariffs and sovereign debt which could

increase inflation and weaken economic growth. Additionally, there is potential US consumer credit weakness from all

time high consumer debt and student loan debt which could strain consumer affordability, leading to higher arrears and

ECLs.

▪UK Retail, Hospitality and Leisure: the continuing cost of living pressures, falling consumer confidence, or

macroeconomic factors adversely affecting consumers could trigger a contraction in demand which, together with rising

business costs, including from taxes, would add pressure to sectors heavily reliant on consumer discretionary spending.

This represents a potential risk in the Barclays Bank Group’s UK corporate portfolio as a higher probability of default

exists for retailers, hospitality and leisure providers and their landlords while these pressures remain.

▪Leveraged Finance Underwriting: the Barclays Bank Group takes on non-investment grade underwriting exposures,

including single name risk, particularly in the US and the UK. The market environment has remained constructive and

highly competitive in 2025, despite geopolitical tensions and concern around the impact of tariffs.

▪Oil & Gas sector: In the short term, the sector is vulnerable to geopolitical shifts impacting supply and demand. In the

longer term, costs associated with the transition towards renewable sources of energy may place greater financial

demands on oil and gas companies.

▪Information Technology: companies may struggle to monetise their technology offerings, including use of AI or

alternatively may find their offerings disrupted by other emerging new technology. Barclays Bank Group’s clients face

heightened risk from data security breaches and ransomware and/or cyber attacks as well as from the malicious use of

AI, all of which could negatively impact their ability to service debt obligations.

▪Resilient US economy with tight labour market: whilst the US economy proved to be resilient in 2025, there have been

signs of weakness. The Barclays Bank Group continues to monitor closely consumer trends as it relates to personal

saving rate, category spend - discretionary versus essential, high consumer debt levels, and the overall household net

worth.

▪Sovereign wholesale exposure: the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to sovereigns with sovereign debt to GDP ratios

above 100% with low economic growth. Failure to reduce public spending could cause debt levels to become

unmanageable and damage investor confidence, potentially delaying economic recovery which, in turn, could materially

adversely affect the Barclays Bank Group's results of operations including, but not limited to, increased credit losses.

▪Private Credit: the private credit industry operates largely outside of the traditional banking system and public markets,

and is characterised by risks associated with the use of leverage, illiquid investments, structural complexity and limited

disclosure. As a result, certain other risks to which the Barclays Bank Group is exposed may be amplified by its activities

in the private credit sector. In addition, due to the interconnectedness between private credit and other areas of

economic activity and second order losses resulting from private credit exposure, private credit presents a risk to

financial system stability.

The Barclays Bank Group also has large individual exposures to single name counterparties (such as brokers, central clearing

houses, dealers, banks, mutual and hedge funds, and other institutional clients) in both its lending and trading activities,

including derivative trades. The default of one such counterparty could cause contagion across clients involved in similar

activities and/or adversely impact asset values should margin calls necessitate rapid asset disposals by that counterparty to

raise liquidity. In addition, where such counterparty risk has been mitigated by taking collateral, credit risk may remain high

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	60

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

if the collateral held cannot be monetised or has to be liquidated at prices which are insufficient to recover the full amount of

the loan or derivative exposure. Any such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s results

due to, for example, increased credit losses and higher impairment charges.

Impact to the creditworthiness of the Barclays Bank Group's clients, customers and counterparties (particularly in high

carbon sectors), can also arise out of climate-related legal actions or investigations commenced against the Barclays Bank

Group's clients, customers and counterparties (particularly in high carbon sectors), where outcomes of such actions have

material financial impacts, which can in turn increase credit risk within Barclays Bank Group portfolios.

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to credit risk, refer to the credit risk management and credit risk

performance sections.

iii)Market risk

Market risk is the risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the Barclays Bank Group’s assets and

liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity

prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations.

Economic and financial market uncertainties remain elevated, amid ongoing geopolitical conflicts, shifting trade policies, and

persistent inflationary pressures. A disruptive transition to lower interest rate levels, deteriorating trade, and intensifying

geopolitical tensions could heighten market risks for the Barclays Bank Group’s portfolios.

In addition, the Barclays Bank Group’s trading business could be vulnerable were there to be a prolonged period of elevated

asset price volatility, particularly if it adversely affects market liquidity. Such a scenario could impact the Barclays Bank

Group’s ability to execute client trades and may also result in lower client flow-driven income and/or market-based losses

on its existing portfolio of assets. These can include higher hedging costs from rebalancing risks that need to be managed

dynamically as market levels and their associated volatilities change.

Changes in market conditions could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of

operations, financial condition and prospects.

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to market risk, refer to the market risk management and market

risk performance sections.

iv)Treasury and capital risk

There are three primary types of treasury and capital risk faced by the Barclays Bank Group:

a.Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Barclays Bank Group is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it

does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets. This could

cause the Barclays Bank Group to fail to meet regulatory and/or internal liquidity requirements, make repayments of

principal or interest as they fall due or to support day-to-day business activities. Key liquidity risks that the Barclays Bank

Group faces include:

▪Stability of the Barclays Bank Group’s deposit funding profile: deposits which are payable on demand or at short notice

could be adversely affected by the Barclays Bank Group failing to preserve the current level of customer and investor

confidence or as a result of competition in the banking industry.

▪Ongoing access to wholesale funding: the Barclays Bank Group regularly accesses the money and capital markets to

provide short-term and long-term unsecured and secured funding to support its operations. A loss of counterparty

confidence, or adverse market conditions, could lead to a reduction in the tenor, or an increase in the costs, of the

Barclays Bank Group's unsecured and secured wholesale funding or affect the Barclays Bank Group’s access to such

funding.

▪Impacts of market volatility: adverse market conditions, with increased volatility in asset prices, could: (i) negatively

impact the Barclays Bank Group’s liquidity position through increased derivative margin requirements and/or wider

haircuts when monetising liquidity pool securities; (ii) make it more difficult for the Barclays Bank Group to execute

secured financing transactions; and (iii) expose the Barclays Bank Group to currency risk leading to increased cash flow

currency mismatch.

▪Intraday liquidity usage: increased cash and collateral requirements for payments and securities settlement systems

could negatively impact the Barclays Bank Group’s liquidity position, as cash and liquid assets required for intraday

purposes are unavailable to meet other outflows.

▪Off-balance sheet commitments: deterioration in economic and market conditions could cause customers to draw on

off-balance sheet commitments provided to them, for example, revolving credit facilities, negatively affecting the

Barclays Bank Group's liquidity position.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	61

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

▪Credit rating changes and impact on funding costs: any reductions in a credit rating (in particular, any downgrade

below investment grade) may affect the Barclays Bank Group’s access to money or capital markets and/or the terms on

which the Barclays Bank Group is able to obtain market funding. For example, this could lead to increased costs of

funding and wider credit spreads, the triggering of additional collateral or other requirements in derivative contracts and

other secured funding arrangements, or limits on the range of counterparties who are willing to enter into transactions

with the Barclays Bank Group.

b.Capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Barclays Bank Group has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal

business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments and stressed

conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory stress testing purposes). This also includes the risk

from the Barclays Bank Group’s pension plans. Key capital risks that the Barclays Bank Group faces include:

▪Failure to meet prudential capital requirements: this could lead to the Barclays Bank Group being unable to support

some or all of its business activities, a failure to pass regulatory stress tests, increased cost of funding due to

deterioration in investor appetite and/or credit ratings, restrictions on distributions and/or the need to take additional

measures to strengthen the Barclays Bank Group's capital or leverage position.

▪Adverse changes in FX rates impacting capital ratios: the Barclays Bank Group has capital resources, risk weighted

assets and leverage exposures denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign currency exchange rates may

adversely impact the sterling equivalent value of these items. As a result, the Barclays Bank Group’s regulatory capital

ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements. Failure to appropriately manage the Barclays Bank Group’s balance

sheet to take account of foreign currency movements could result in an adverse impact on the Barclays Bank Group’s

regulatory capital and leverage ratios.

▪Adverse movements in the pension fund: adverse movements in pension assets and liabilities for defined benefit

pension schemes could result in deficits on a technical provision and/or IAS 19 accounting basis. This could lead to the

Barclays Bank Group making substantial additional contributions to its pension plans and/or a deterioration in its capital

position. The market value of pension fund assets might decline; or investment returns might reduce. Under IAS 19, the

liabilities discount rate is derived from the yields of high quality corporate bonds. Therefore, the valuation of the Barclays

Bank Group’s defined benefits schemes would be adversely affected by a prolonged fall in the discount rate due to a

persistent low interest rate and/or credit spread environment. Inflation is another significant risk driver to the pension

fund as the liabilities are adversely impacted by an increase in long-term inflation expectations.

c.Interest rate risk in the banking book

Interest rate risk in the banking book is the risk that the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to capital or income volatility

because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. This also includes credit

spread risk in the banking book, the risk that the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of

changes in credit spreads on its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. The Barclays Bank Group’s hedging programmes for

interest rate risk in the banking book rely on behavioural assumptions and, as a result, the effectiveness of the hedging

strategy cannot be guaranteed. A potential mismatch in the balance or duration of the hedging assumptions could lead to

earnings deterioration if there are interest rate movements which are not adequately hedged. A decline in interest rates may

also compress net interest margins on retail and corporate portfolios. In addition, the Barclays Bank Group’s liquid asset

portfolio is exposed to potential capital and/or income volatility due to movements in market rates and prices which may

have a material adverse effect on the capital position of the Barclays Bank Group.

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to treasury and capital risk, refer to the treasury and capital risk

management and treasury and capital risk performance sections.

v)Operational risk

Operational risk is the risk of loss to the Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to

external events where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks. Examples include:

a)Operational resilience

The Barclays Bank Group functions in a highly competitive market, with customers and clients that expect consistent and

smooth business processes. The loss of or disruption to business processing is a material inherent risk within the Barclays

Bank Group and across the financial services industry, which has impacted the Barclays Bank Group in the past and may

continue to impact the Barclays Bank Group in the future, whether arising through failures in the Barclays Bank Group’s

technology systems, cyber and/or data integrity disruptions, unavailability of services supplied by third parties, or

unavailability of personnel and premises.

A challenge for the Barclays Bank Group, as for all companies, is the ability to recover from and remain within impact

tolerance for a pervasive cyber attack which impacts a number of applications, data and infrastructure services, or a third

party. Failure to build resilience and recovery capabilities into business processes, or into the services on which the Barclays

Bank Group’s business processes depend, may result in significant customer harm, costs to reimburse losses incurred by the

Barclays Bank Group’s customers and clients, and reputational damage. There are also risks associated with increasing

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	62

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

regulatory focus and new developments on operational resilience, which are considered in risk factor (iv) ‘Regulatory change

agenda and impact on business model’ above.

b)Cyber attacks

Cyber attacks continue to be a global threat inherent across all industries, with the number and severity of attacks

continuing to rise. The financial sector remains a primary target for cybercriminals, hostile nation states (including nation-

state-sponsored groups), opportunists and hacktivists. The Barclays Bank Group experiences numerous attempts to

compromise its cybersecurity protections. In 2025, cybersecurity incidents experienced by the Barclays Bank Group included

phishing and cyber incidents within our supply chain.

The Barclays Bank Group cannot provide absolute security against cyber attacks. Malicious actors, who are increasingly

sophisticated in their methods, tactics, techniques and procedures, seek to steal money, gain unauthorised access to,

destroy or manipulate data, and disrupt operations. Further, some attacks may not be recognised or discovered until

launched or after initial entry into the environment, such as novel or zero-day attacks that are launched before patches are

available and defences can be readied. Other attacks may take advantage of the window during which patching or the

deployment of other defences is underway, but not yet complete. Malicious actors are also increasingly developing methods

to avoid detection and alerting capabilities, including by employing counter-forensic tactics, making response activities more

difficult. Additionally, the Barclays Bank Group's deployment of agentic AI with access to systems, data and third-party tools

creates an expanded attack surface for cyber attacks, as threat actors may exploit inadequate permissioning controls to

manipulate agents into executing unauthorised actions, accessing sensitive information or initiating malicious transactions

beyond their intended scope, and the autonomous nature of these systems may enable attackers to conduct multi-step

attacks that evade traditional security controls before detection occurs.

Cyber attacks can originate from a wide variety of sources and target the Barclays Bank Group in numerous ways, including

via the Barclays Bank Group's networks, systems, applications, devices, or parties such as service providers and other

suppliers, counterparties, employees, contractors, customers or clients, presenting the Barclays Bank Group with a vast and

complex defence perimeter. Moreover, the Barclays Bank Group does not have direct control over the cybersecurity of the

systems of its clients, customers, counterparties and third-party service providers and suppliers, limiting the Barclays Bank

Group’s ability to effectively protect and defend against certain threats. Some of the Barclays Bank Group’s third-party

service providers and suppliers have experienced successful attempts to compromise their cybersecurity. These have

included incidents resulting in the compromise of the Barclays Bank Group's data and ransomware attacks that disrupted

service providers’ or suppliers’ operations and, in some cases, have had impacts on the Barclays Bank Group's operations.

Such cyber attacks are likely to continue. Many of the Barclays Bank Group's agreements with third parties include liability or

indemnification provisions, but the Barclays Bank Group may not be able to recover sufficiently, or at all, under these

provisions to adequately offset any losses or other adverse impacts the Barclays Bank Group may incur from third party

incidents.

Inadequacies in, or failures in the adherence to, the Barclays Bank Group's cybersecurity policies, procedures or controls;

failure to keep pace with evolving technology; instances of employee negligence, recklessness, malfeasance, poor password

management, or susceptibility to social engineering; misconfigurations in technology and security infrastructure;

authentication and access management lapses; imperfect control frameworks or operational effectiveness; and human,

governance or technological error could also compromise the Barclays Bank Group’s ability to successfully prevent and

defend against cyber attacks. Furthermore, certain legacy technologies that are at or approaching end-of-life may not be

able to maintain acceptable levels of security.

The Barclays Bank Group's assessment of its cybersecurity risk reflects an elevated cybersecurity risk profile due to factors

such as the onset of AI, which may be used to facilitate increasingly sophisticated attacks including AI-enabled social

engineering; ongoing work to address areas in need of enhancement identified through cybersecurity testing; bad actors’

increasing ability to elude our defences and take advantage of customer and employee behaviours in novel ways; and

geopolitical events that could impact the Barclays Bank Group directly, or indirectly through its critical suppliers or national

infrastructure.

Certain cybersecurity risks to the Barclays Bank Group may be unknown to management and therefore not fully accounted

for in the Barclays Bank Group's cybersecurity assessments, strategy and programme priorities.

The Barclays Bank Group uses targeted external independent reviews to help ensure that its assessment of cybersecurity risk

is comprehensive and dynamic, and the Barclays Bank Group continues to implement enhancements identified through

previous cybersecurity testing and reviews.

Common types of cyber attacks include deployment of malware to obtain covert access to systems and data; ransomware

attacks that render systems and data unavailable through encryption and attempts to leverage business interruption or

stolen data for extortion; novel or zero-day exploits; denial of service and distributed denial of service attacks; infiltration via

business email compromise; social engineering, including phishing, vishing and smishing; automated attacks using botnets;

third-party customer, vendor, service provider and supplier account takeover; malicious activity facilitated by an insider; and

credential validation or stuffing attacks using login and password pairs from unrelated breaches. A successful cyber attack

of any type has the potential to cause serious harm to the Barclays Bank Group or its clients and customers, including

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	63

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

exposure to potential contractual liability, claims, litigation, regulatory or other government action, loss of existing or

potential customers, damage to the Barclays Bank Group’s brand and reputation, and other financial loss. The impact of a

successful cyber attack is also likely to include operational consequences (such as unavailability of services, networks,

systems, devices or data), remediation of which could come at significant cost.

While the Barclays Bank Group maintains insurance coverage that may, subject to relevant retentions, cover certain types of

losses related to cybersecurity incidents, such insurance coverage may be insufficient to cover all losses and may not take

into account potential loss of business or other financial harm.

A successful cyber attack may result in significant fines and penalties to the Barclays Bank Group. In addition, any new

regulatory measures introduced to mitigate these risks are likely to result in increased technology and compliance costs for

the Barclays Bank Group.

For further details on the Bank’s approach to cyber attacks, see the Operational risk performance section on page 147. For

further details on cybersecurity regulation applicable to the Bank, refer to the supervision and regulation section on page

154.

c)New and emergent technology

Technology is fundamental to the Barclays Bank Group’s business and the financial services industry. Technological

advancements present opportunities to develop new and innovative ways of doing business across the Barclays Bank Group,

with new solutions being developed both in-house and in association with third party companies.

The rapid development in AI is an area of technological advancement that the Barclays Bank Group is monitoring closely.

This includes the identification of potential use cases for responsible adoption of AI in the Barclays Bank Group’s own

operations as well as managing the salient risks and other threats third party usage of AI may pose, including with respect to

intellectual property ownership and infringement, cybersecurity, antitrust and fraud. For example, the Barclays Bank Group

may be unable to protect certain materials created using AI technologies with copyrights or patents given the position of

courts and intellectual property offices in the US and in some other jurisdictions on the need for a certain level of human

inventorship. Additionally, inventions or works of authorship created using AI technologies may be based on, rely on, or

contain materials that were used in the training of such technologies and which are subject to third-party intellectual

property rights. This could expose the Barclays Bank Group to claims of intellectual property infringement or

misappropriation. Other related risks include exposure to open-source software risks when using AI-based coding tools

(that have been developed using vast amounts of open-source software) to write software. The use of copyrighted materials

in AI and machine learning technology has not been fully interpreted by courts, creating additional uncertainty regarding

potential intellectual property risks.

In addition, while AI can present significant benefits, it also presents significant and evolving risks and challenges to the

Barclays Bank Group's business, such as those related to algorithmic fairness, data life-cycle management, data ethics, data

privacy and security and records management (e.g. the risks arising from any failure to appropriately identify and retain

prompts, logs, outputs and intermediate artefacts from an AI process in accordance with business needs, as set out in the

applicable retention schedule, and data protection laws). AI also poses data sourcing, technology integration and process

issues and programme bias in decision-making algorithms. Any of these risks could impair the adoption and acceptance of

AI and result in regulatory investigations or actions, litigation, client dissatisfaction, reputational harm and adverse effects on

its business and financial condition. These risks may be more significant for certain AI tools (for example, agentic AI has the

potential to exacerbate certain risks, such as those relating to data privacy and security, due to its autonomous nature) or if

AI is deployed in an uncoordinated but widespread way within the Barclays Bank Group (particularly relating to the use of AI

agents).

If the output from AI in the Barclays Bank Group's products, systems or solutions is deemed to be inaccurate or

questionable, or if the use of AI does not operate as anticipated or perform as promised (including in relation to confidential

information and personal data), the Barclays Bank Group may be exposed to additional liability, reputational harm, potential

regulatory enforcement and threats of litigation, as further described at “Evolving landscape with respect to artificial

intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial intelligence) (AI) and machine learning technologies,” “Model risk”

and “Data management, information protection and AI”.

Alongside those risks associated with the deployment of AI, risks could also arise from decisions not to deploy the

technology. As the adoption of AI quickens, risks arising from competition with the Barclays Bank Group's peers are

intensified. Any failures to adequately leverage AI technologies, or the adoption of an overly conservative approach to AI

implementation, could cause the Barclays Bank Group to miss significant business opportunities, fall behind competitors,

and adversely affect its growth prospects and financial performance. Pressure to recruit personnel with specific AI-based

skill sets and to upskill existing employees in this context may give rise to significant costs and/or may be difficult to sustain,

and such steps do not necessarily mitigate these risks from competitors.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	64

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

d)Fraud

The nature of fraud is wide-ranging and continues to evolve, as criminals seek opportunities to target the Barclays Bank

Group’s business activities and exploit changes in customer behaviour and product and channel use (such as the increased

use of digital products and enhanced online services). Fraud attacks vary, can be highly sophisticated (e.g. leveraging

deepfake and automation capabilities), and can be orchestrated by organised crime groups or individuals. Fraudsters use

various techniques to target customers and colleagues directly (i.e. third party fraud) or Barclays Bank Group directly (i.e.

first party fraud such as, for example, intentionally providing false information to Barclays for personal gain). In the UK, APP

(Authorised Push Payment) scams are a growing fraud type where customers are deceived to transfer funds from their

accounts to bad actors. Fraud can also be committed by one or more employees and workers of an entity (i.e. internal fraud)

or may manifest as unauthorised trading fraud. The impact from fraud can lead to customer harm, financial losses to both

the Barclays Bank Group and its customers, loss of business, missed business opportunities and reputational damage, all of

which could have a material adverse impact on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition

and prospects.

e)Data management, information protection and AI

The Barclays Bank Group holds and processes large volumes of data, including personal information, financial data and

other confidential information, and the Barclays Bank Group’s businesses are subject to complex and evolving laws and

regulations governing the privacy and protection of data, including Regulation (EU) 2016/679 (the General Data Protection

Regulation as it applies in the EU and the UK). This data could relate to: (i) the Barclays Bank Group’s clients, customers,

prospective clients and customers, and their employees; (ii) clients and customers of the Barclays Bank Group’s clients and

customers, and their employees; (iii) the Barclays Bank Group’s suppliers, counterparties and other external parties, and their

employees; and (iv) the Barclays Bank Group’s employees and prospective employees. This data may also be held and

processed for the Barclays Bank Group by third-party vendors, partners, or suppliers which therefore exposes the Barclays

Bank Group to risks from vulnerabilities and non-compliance in its supply chain.

The international nature of both the Barclays Bank Group’s business and its IT infrastructure also means that data and

personal information may be available in countries other than those from where the information originated. Accordingly, the

Barclays Bank Group must ensure that its collection, use, transfer and storage of data, including personal information

complies with all applicable laws and regulations in all relevant jurisdictions, which could: (i) increase the Barclays Bank

Group’s compliance and operating costs; (ii) impact the development of new products or services, or the offering of existing

products or services; (iii) affect how products and services are offered to clients and customers; (iv) demand significant

oversight by the Barclays Bank Group’s management; and (v) require the Barclays Bank Group to review some elements of

the structure of its businesses, operations and systems in less efficient ways.

Data, including personal information, is subject to external as well as internal (whether intentional or accidental) security

risks. Concerns regarding the effectiveness of the Barclays Bank Group’s measures to safeguard data, including personal

information, or even the perception that those measures are inadequate, could expose the Barclays Bank Group to the risk of

loss or unavailability of data or data integrity issues and/or cause the Barclays Bank Group to lose existing or potential

clients and customers, and thereby reduce the Barclays Bank Group’s revenues. Furthermore, any failure or perceived failure

by the Barclays Bank Group to comply with applicable privacy or data protection laws and regulations may subject it to

potential contractual liability, claims, litigation, regulatory or other government action (including significant regulatory fines)

and require changes to certain operations or practices which could also inhibit the Barclays Bank Group’s development or

marketing of certain products or services, or increase the costs of offering them to customers. Any of these events could

damage the Barclays Bank Group’s reputation, subject the Barclays Bank Group to material fines or other monetary

penalties, make the Barclays Bank Group liable for the payment of compensatory damages, divert management's time and

attention, lead to enhanced regulatory oversight and otherwise materially adversely affect its business, results of operations,

financial condition and prospects.

Further, there is increased risk of inadvertent disclosure of confidential information or personal information in connection

with the utilisation of AI technologies, whether through AI model errors, data breaches, or other vulnerabilities, which may

also result in stronger regulatory scrutiny, leading to legal and regulatory investigations and enforcement actions that could

negatively impact the Barclays Bank Group’s business, even if unfounded. AI technologies are highly reliant on the collection

and analysis of large amounts of data, which may be overbroad, insufficient, or contain biased, inaccurate or incomplete

information. There often exists a lack of transparency regarding the sources of data (including personal data) used to train

or develop AI technologies or how inputs are converted to outputs and the Barclays Bank Group may not be able to fully

validate this process and its accuracy (particularly where it is part of a complex, multi-step process and inaccurate or

incomplete information may be compounded across many steps, such as in agentic AI systems). This could result in outputs

that include or are derived from inaccurate, incomplete or erroneous information, or that include AI bias, AI hallucinations,

harmful content, discrimination, violation of privacy law or intellectual property infringement or misappropriation.

Additionally, if the AI model in a tool used by the Barclays Bank Group has been trained by a third party in a manner that is

not compliant with data protection laws, there is a risk that the Barclays Bank Group will be held liable in certain jurisdictions

(e.g. the EU).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	65

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

For further details on data protection regulation applicable to the Barclays Bank Group, refer to the supervision and

regulation section and for further detail on the associated risks, refer to the sections entitled “Evolving landscape with

respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial intelligence) (AI) and machine learning

technologies” and “New and emergent technology”.

f)Algorithmic trading

In some areas of the investment banking business, trading algorithms are used to price, trade and risk manage client and

principal transactions. An algorithmic error could result in erroneous or duplicated transactions, a system outage, or impact

the Barclays Bank Group’s pricing abilities, which could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s

business, results of operations, financial condition, prospects and reputation.

g)Processing errors

The Barclays Bank Group’s businesses are highly dependent on its ability to process and monitor, on a daily basis, a very

large number of transactions, many of which are highly complex and occur at high volumes and frequencies, across

numerous and diverse markets in many currencies. Given Barclays Bank Group’s diverse customer base and geographical

reach and the increase in volume, speed, frequency and complexity of transactions, especially electronic transactions (as

well as the requirements to report such transactions on a real-time basis to clients, regulators and exchanges), developing,

maintaining and upgrading operational systems and infrastructure becomes more challenging. The risk of systems or

human error, including errors produced through the integration of AI technologies, in connection with such transactions

increases with these developments, as well as the potential consequences of such errors due to the speed and volume of

transactions involved and the potential difficulty associated with discovering errors quickly enough to limit the resulting

consequences. As the Barclays Bank Group works to implement AI technologies into the Barclays Bank Group’s product and

service offerings, these challenges may become more significant, as AI technologies give rise to risk of bias, errors and

hallucinations which may impact the Barclays Bank Group’s ability to accurately execute, track or report transactions. There

can be no assurances that AI usage will enhance the Barclays Bank Group’s product or services offerings, and any such

errors or inaccuracies resulting from AI usage could result in competitive or reputational harm or increased legal liability as

further described in c) New and emergent technology and vi) Model risk.  Furthermore, events that are wholly or partially

beyond the Barclays Bank Group’s control, such as a spike in transaction volume, could adversely affect the Barclays Bank

Group’s ability to process transactions or provide banking and payment services.

Processing errors could result in the Barclays Bank Group, among other things: (i) failing to provide information, services and

liquidity to clients and counterparties in a timely manner; (ii) failing to settle and/or confirm transactions; (iii) causing funds

transfers, capital markets trades and/or other transactions to be executed erroneously, illegally or with unintended

consequences; and (iv) adversely affecting financial, trading or currency markets. Any of these events could materially

disadvantage the Barclays Bank Group’s customers, clients and counterparties (including them suffering financial loss) and/

or result in a loss of confidence in the Barclays Bank Group which, in turn, could have a material adverse effect on the

Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects. Any of these events could also lead

to breaches of laws, rules or regulations and, hence, regulatory enforcement actions, which could result in significant

financial loss, imposition of additional capital requirements, enhanced regulatory supervision and reputational damage.

h)Supplier exposure

The Barclays Bank Group depends on suppliers for the provision of many of its services and the development of technology,

including AI technology. Whilst the Barclays Bank Group depends on suppliers, it remains fully accountable to its customers

and clients for risks arising from the actions of suppliers and may not be able to recover from its suppliers any amounts paid

to customers and clients for losses suffered by them. The dependency on suppliers and sub-contracting of outsourced

services introduces concentration risk where the failure of specific suppliers could have an impact on the Barclays Bank

Group’s ability to continue to provide material services to its customers. In addition, the use of third party AI technologies

may also expose the Barclays Bank Group to third party infringement or misappropriation claims, as well as privacy and data

protection related claims, as it can be very difficult, if not impossible, to validate the processes used by third-party AI

technology providers in their collection and use of data in developing and training AI technologies or the conversion of

inputs to outputs. Over-reliance on a small number of suppliers of AI services may create operational resilience and

concentration risk, heightening the potential for macro‑level disruption if any one provider experiences outage, compromise,

or model instability. For further information on AI-related risks, including in connection with suppliers, please see the

sections entitled “Evolving landscape with respect to artificial intelligence (including generative and agentic artificial

intelligence) (AI) and machine learning technologies”, “New and emergent technology”, “Data management, information

protection and AI,” and “Model risk”. Failure to adequately manage supplier risk could have a material adverse effect on the

Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects.

i)Estimates and judgements relating to critical accounting policies and regulatory disclosures

The preparation of financial statements requires the application of accounting policies and judgements to be made in

accordance with IFRS. Regulatory returns and capital disclosures are prepared in accordance with the relevant capital

reporting and liquidity requirements and also require assumptions and estimates to be made. The key areas involving a

higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual

financial statements and regulatory returns and disclosures, include credit impairment provisions, taxes, fair value of

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	66

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

financial instruments, pensions and post-retirement benefits, the calculation of RWAs, capital and liquidity metrics, and

provisions including conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters (please refer to the notes to the audited financial

statements for further details). There is a risk that if the judgement exercised, or the estimates or assumptions used,

subsequently turn out to be incorrect or are altered as a result of assurance work or subsequent feedback from the Barclays

Bank Group's regulators, this could result in material losses to the Barclays Bank Group, beyond what was anticipated or

provided for, including as a result of changes to treatments or stated capital or liquidity in regulatory returns and capital and

liquidity disclosures. If capital and liquidity requirements are not met as a result of changes in interpretation, compliance

with the Barclays Bank Group's distribution policy could be impacted and/or additional measures may be required to

strengthen the Barclays Bank Group's capital or leverage position, which may also lead to the Barclays Bank Group's inability

to achieve stated targets. Further development of accounting standards and regulatory interpretations could also materially

impact the Barclays Bank Group’s results of operations, financial condition and prospects.

j)Tax risk

The Barclays Bank Group is required to comply with the domestic and international tax laws and practice of all countries in

which it has business operations. There is a risk that the Barclays Bank Group could suffer losses due to additional tax

charges, other financial costs or reputational damage as a result of failing to comply with such laws and practice (including

where the Barclays Bank Group’s interpretation of such laws differs from the interpretation of tax authorities), or by failing to

manage its tax affairs in an appropriate manner, with much of this risk attributable to the international structure of the

Barclays Bank Group. In addition, the introduction of new international tax regimes, increasing tax authority focus on

reporting and disclosure requirements around the world as well as the digitalisation of the administration of tax have the

potential to increase the Barclays Bank Group’s tax compliance obligations further. In 2023, the UK Government enacted

legislation on the OECD Inclusive Framework on Base Erosion and Profit Shifting Pillar Two Framework introducing a global

minimum tax rate of 15%. The UK’s Pillar Two rules applied from 1 January 2024 and increased the Barclays Bank Group's

tax compliance obligations. In the US, the corporate alternative minimum tax on adjusted financial statements income

introduced by the Inflation Reduction Act became effective on 1 January 2023. These tax regimes have required system and

process changes that introduce additional operational risks.

k)Ability to hire and retain appropriately qualified employees

As a regulated financial institution, the Barclays Bank Group requires diversified and specialist skilled colleagues. The

Barclays Bank Group’s ability to attract, develop and retain a diverse mix of talent is key to the delivery of its core business

activity and strategy. This is impacted by a range of external and internal factors, such as macroeconomic factors, labour,

immigration and related policies in the jurisdictions in which the Barclays Bank Group operates, regulatory limits on

compensation for senior executives and operational factors. Failure to attract or prevent the departure of appropriately

qualified and skilled employees could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of

operations, financial condition and prospects. Additionally, this may result in disruption to service which could in turn lead to

customer harm and reputational damage.

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to operational risk, refer to the operational risk management and

operational risk performance sections.

vi)Model risk

Model risk is the potential for adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and

reports. The Barclays Bank Group relies on models to support a broad range of business and risk management activities,

including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures (including the

calculation of impairment), conducting stress testing, calculating RWAs and assessing capital adequacy, supporting new

business acceptance, risk and reward evaluation, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements.

Models are imperfect representations of reality as they rely on simplifying assumptions; as such they are subject to intrinsic

uncertainty as well as errors and inappropriate use. This may be exacerbated when dealing with unprecedented scenarios, as

was the case during the COVID-19 pandemic, when simplifying assumptions were required due to the lack of reliable

historical reference points and data. Model uncertainty, errors and inappropriate use may result in (among other things) the

Barclays Bank Group making inappropriate business decisions and/or inaccuracies or errors in the Barclays Bank Group's

risk management and regulatory reporting processes.  In addition, the rapid development of AI, especially agentic AI creates

further challenges due to the unique and heightened risks presented by these model types.  This includes risks arising from

AI hallucinating and providing false information, the exacerbation of bias and fairness risk due to the automation of

outcomes and the absence or insufficiency of human oversight (particularly relating to agentic AI). This could result in a

significant financial loss, imposition of additional capital requirements, enhanced regulatory supervision and reputational

damage, all of which could have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations,

financial condition and prospects.

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to model risk, refer to the model risk management and model risk

performance sections and the section on “New and emergent technology".

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	67

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

vii)Compliance risk

Compliance risk is the risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of the

Bank’s products and services (conduct risk) and the risk to the Barclays Bank Group, its clients, customers or markets from a

failure to comply with the laws, rules and regulations (LRR) applicable to the Bank.

Previously, financial crime risk was managed as part of compliance risk, but was elevated to a principal risk in the ERMF,

effective from 1 January 2025. Consequently, the compliance risk taxonomy was revised to better reflect material and

emerging risks. Compliance risks have been categorised into six core areas, including:

a) Wholesale conduct risk

The Barclays Bank Group's businesses are exposed to risk of detriment to colleagues, customers or market participants as a

result of failures to adhere to proper standards of wholesale conduct when carrying out the Barclays Bank Group's business

activities.

Examples of wholesale conduct which could have a material adverse effect on our business include: (i) undertaking business

communications via unauthorised channels and / or inappropriate conduct or behaviour; (ii) business conflicts of interest

that lead to the detriment of customers or market participants; (iii) trade lifecycle processes that do not meet regulatory

requirements or harm market participants; (iv) the risk of engaging in insider dealing behaviours or breaching of information

barriers; and (v) the risk of engaging or attempting to engage in market manipulation.

b) Customer protection risk

The Barclays Bank Group must ensure that its customers, particularly those that are vulnerable, are able to make well-

informed decisions on how best to use our financial services and understand the protections available to them if something

goes wrong. Poor customer outcomes can result from the failure to: (i) design and distribute products and services that

deliver good customer outcomes; (ii) remediate, provide redress, or appropriately respond to complaints; (iii) identify and

safeguard client money and assets, including deposits; (iv) manage investment products and services in line with customer

expectation; and (v) provide customer services that deliver good customer outcomes.

c) Product design and review risk

Products and services must meet the needs of clients, customers, markets and the Barclays Bank Group throughout their life

cycle. However, there is a risk that the design and review of the Group’s products and services fail to reasonably consider

and address potential or actual negative outcomes for customers, which may result in customer harm, enforcement action

(including regulatory fines and/or sanctions), redress and remediation and reputational damage. Both the design and review

of products and services are a key area of focus for regulators and the Barclays Bank Group.

d) Regulatory compliance risk

The Barclays Bank Group must ensure that business activities, and those carrying them out, observe relevant laws, codes,

rules and regulations that are applicable to them. We must also ensure our employees are adequately supervised, manage

personal conflicts of interest, and disclose activities which may harm customers, the Group and the markets in which the

Barclays Bank Group operates.

Regulators around the world continue to emphasise the importance of culture and personal accountability and enforce the

adoption of adequate internal reporting and whistleblowing procedures to help to promote appropriate conduct and drive

positive outcomes for customers, colleagues, clients and markets. The requirements and expectations of the UK Senior

Managers Regime, Certification Regime and Conduct Rules reinforce additional accountabilities for individuals across the

Barclays Bank Group, with an increased focus on governance and rigor, with similar requirements also introduced in other

jurisdictions globally. Failure to meet these requirements and expectations may lead to regulatory sanctions, both for the

individuals and the Group.

e) Data privacy risk

Barclays must ensure that personal data is handled in a way that meets data privacy laws, rules and regulations and the

rights and expectations of individuals. We do this by establishing mechanisms to govern and oversee the use of personal

data and managing personal data in line with individuals’ rights and expectations. Any failure complying with applicable

rules, laws and regulations may subject the Barclays Bank Group to potential contractual liability, claims, litigation, fines;

reputational damage; and cause enhanced regulatory oversight.

f) Laws, rules and regulations risk

Barclays is subject to a range of laws, rules and regulations. A failure to comply with these may have an adverse effect on the

Barclays Bank Group’s business, customers and the markets within which it operates and could result in reputational

damage, penalties, damages or fines.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	68

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

viii)Financial crime risk

Financial crime risk is the risk that the Barclays Bank Group and its associated persons (employees or third parties) commit

or facilitate financial crime, and/or the Barclays Bank Group’s products and services are used to facilitate financial crime.

Financial crime risk management incorporates anti-bribery & corruption, anti-money laundering (including terrorist

financing), tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks (including proliferation financing). The Barclays Bank Group is subject

to laws and regulations governing these areas, including “failure to prevent” offences whereby the Barclays Bank Group may

be liable for failure to prevent crimes carried out by persons acting on its behalf.

Bribery and corruption occur where a person improperly obtains or retains business, improperly secures a business or

personal advantage and induces another person to perform their role in breach of an expectation of good faith, impartiality,

or trust. Risks related to bribery and corruption may arise for the Barclays Bank Group in connection with (i) employees/

prospective employees who have connections to external stakeholders, Politically Exposed Persons, or public officials; (ii)

different types of payments and expenses such as facilitation payment requests, gifts and entertainment, charitable

donations, commercial sponsorships and political donations; (iii) certain types of funding provided to customers with

increased exposure to public officials; (iv) third parties who are engaged by the Bank to win or retain business; (v) the

Barclays Bank Group’s proprietary investments, joint ventures and mergers and acquisition or (vi) suppliers who act for and

on behalf of the Barclays Bank Group.

Money laundering, the processing of assets derived from criminal activity, and terrorist financing have been identified as

major threats to the international financial services community and therefore to the Barclays Bank Group. The UK has

legislation designed to manage the risk of money laundering and to combat terrorism (together ‘AML’) and outlines the

offences and penalties for failing to comply. This legislation, together with regulations, rules and industry guidance, forms

the cornerstone of AML obligations for UK firms. The requirements of UK legislation apply to the Barclays Bank Group

globally and as a transatlantic bank, Barclays AML standards take account of US AML requirements, in addition to the EU

and other jurisdictions in which we operate. Barclays also takes account of guidance issued by bodies such as the Wolfsberg

Group.

Sanctions are restrictions on activity with targeted countries, regions, governments, entities, individuals, and industries that

are imposed by bodies such as the European Union (EU), the United Nations (UN), (including but not limited to the

proliferation of nuclear, chemical, or biological weapons). As a global financial institution, Barclays must comply with

applicable sanctions laws, rules and regulations in every jurisdiction in which it operates, or which apply to it because of the

place of incorporation of its Group members. In order to protect its reputation and other legitimate business interests, in

certain circumstances, Barclays’ sanctions risk appetite may be more conservative than its legal obligations.

Tax evasion is a financial crime and a predicate offence to money laundering in the UK and in many other countries in which

we operate. Barclays Bank PLC may be exposed to facilitation risks associated with tax evasion by virtue of its interactions

with customers and clients or in connection with employees or third parties acting on our behalf.

Failure to appropriately manage these financial crime risks may undermine market integrity and may result in harm to the

Barclays Bank Group’s clients, customers, counterparties or employees, diminished confidence in financial products and

services, damage to the Barclays Bank Group's reputation, regulatory breaches and/or financial penalties.

ix)Reputation risk

Reputation risk is the risk that an action, transaction, investment, event, decision or business relationship will reduce trust in

the Barclays Bank Group’s integrity and/or competence.

Any material lapse in standards of integrity, compliance, customer service or operating efficiency may represent a potential

reputation risk. Stakeholder expectations constantly evolve, and so reputation risk is dynamic and varies between

geographical regions, groups and individuals. A risk arising in one business area can have an adverse effect upon the

Barclays Bank Group’s overall reputation and any one transaction, investment or event (in the perception of key

stakeholders) can reduce trust in the Barclays Bank Group’s integrity and competence. The Barclays Bank Group’s

association with sensitive topics and sectors has been, and in some instances continues to be, an area of concern for

stakeholders, including: (i) the financing of, and investments in, businesses which operate in sectors that are sensitive

because of their relative carbon intensity or local environmental impact; (ii) potential association with human rights

violations (including combating modern slavery) in the Barclays Bank Group’s operations or supply chain and by clients and

customers; and (iii) the financing of businesses which manufacture and export military and riot control goods and services.

Reputation risk could also arise from negative public opinion about the actual, or perceived, manner in which the Barclays

Bank Group (including its employees, clients and other associations) conducts its business activities, or the Barclays Bank

Group’s financial performance, as well as actual or perceived practices in banking and the financial services industry

generally.

Modern technologies, in particular online social media channels and other broadcast tools that facilitate communication

with large audiences in short time frames and with minimal costs, may significantly enhance and accelerate the distribution

and effect of damaging information and allegations. Negative public opinion may adversely affect the Barclays Bank Group’s

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	69

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

ability to retain and attract customers, in particular, corporate and retail depositors, and to retain and motivate staff. It could

also have a material adverse effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and

prospects. Claims of potential greenwashing arising from sustainability-related statements made by the Barclays Group may

also give rise to reputation risk.

In addition to the above, reputation risk has the potential to arise from operational issues or conduct matters which cause

harm to customers, clients, market integrity, effective competition or the Barclays Bank Group (refer to ‘v) Operational risk’

above).

For further details on the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to reputation risk, refer to the reputation risk management and

reputation risk performance sections.

x)Legal risk and legal, competition and regulatory matters

The Barclays Bank Group conducts diverse activities in a highly regulated global market which exposes it and its employees

to legal risk arising from: (i) the multitude of laws, rules and regulations that apply to the activities it undertakes, which are

highly dynamic, may vary between jurisdictions and/or conflict (particularly in relation to issues perceived as politically

sensitive, such as policies and initiatives around diversity, equity and inclusion or sustainability), and may be unclear in their

application to particular circumstances especially in new and emerging areas; and (ii) the diversified and evolving nature of

the Barclays Bank Group’s businesses and business practices. In each case, this exposes the Barclays Bank Group and its

employees to the risk of investigation or enforcement action, loss or the imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the

failure of members of the Barclays Bank Group to meet applicable laws, rules, regulations or contractual requirements or to

assert or defend their intellectual property rights. Legal risk may arise in relation to any number of the material existing and

emerging risks identified above.

The risk of non-compliance with the relevant rules and regulations may manifest itself where regulatory rules take the form

of principles or outcome-based regulation. Uncertainty in regulatory expectations (including as a result of interpretation of

principles-based regulation) may also lead to the risk that a regulator or another public body may look back at the Barclays

Bank Group’s historical conduct and find that there has been a mismatch between the prevailing market practices at the

relevant time and the regulatory expectations, guidance or interpretations that have since developed.

A breach of applicable laws, rules and/or regulations by the Barclays Bank Group or its employees could result in criminal

prosecution, regulatory censure, withdrawal or restriction of regulatory authorisations, licences and permissions, potentially

significant fines, remedial orders and other sanctions in the jurisdictions in which the Barclays Bank Group operates. Where

clients, customers or other third parties are harmed by the Barclays Bank Group’s conduct, this may also give rise to civil

legal proceedings, including class actions. In this regard, the growing claimant law firm market and the globalisation of class

actions have enabled mass tort litigation and multi-claimant litigation on matters relating to competition, data breaches and

sustainability. Any such litigation could lead to unmeritorious or speculative claims, inconsistent outcomes and the potential

for disproportionate costs and burdens for the Barclays Bank Group.

Clients and customers of the Barclays Bank Group who qualify as eligible complainants under the Financial Services and

Markets Act (as amended) may also bring complaints against the Barclays Bank Group before the Financial Ombudsman

Service (FOS). As the Ombudsman has a relatively high degree of discretion when adjudicating complaints, dispute

resolution through the FOS is inherently more uncertain than adjudication through the courts in traditional civil legal

proceedings. FOS decisions have knock-on impacts on the Barclays Bank Group, as the Barclays Bank Group is required

under the relevant regulatory rules to consider and take appropriate measures to provide redress to customers who may

have suffered similar detriments but have not complained.

Other legal disputes may also arise between the Barclays Bank Group and third parties relating to matters such as breaches

or enforcement of legal rights or obligations arising under contracts, statutes or common law. Adverse findings in any such

matters may result in the Barclays Bank Group being liable to third parties or may result in the Barclays Bank Group’s rights

not being enforced or not being enforced in the manner intended or desired by the Barclays Bank Group.

Following the landmark Supreme Court judgment in Johnson v FirstRand Bank Ltd (London Branch) (t/a MotoNovo Finance)

[2025] UKSC 33, which found that an unfair relationship under the Consumer Credit Act 1974 existed between a motor

finance lender and its customer based on the particular facts of that case, the FCA is consulting on an industry-wide

compensation scheme for affected motor finance customers. The FCA has stated that, if it introduces a redress scheme, it

expects to publish a policy statement and final rules in February or March 2026, with compensation to consumers beginning

later in 2026. The nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if required under the FCA compensation scheme,

remain uncertain.

Further details of legal, competition and regulatory matters to which the Barclays Bank Group is currently exposed are set

out in Note 24. In addition to matters specifically described in Note 24, the Barclays Bank Group is engaged in various other

legal proceedings which arise in the ordinary course of business.

The Barclays Bank Group is also subject to requests for information, investigations and other reviews (including skilled

person reviews) by regulators and other public bodies. These may be in connection with business activities in which the

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	70

Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Barclays Bank Group is, or has been, engaged, or areas of particular regulatory focus, such as financial crime, money

laundering or terrorist financing. In addition, regulatory authorities’ approaches and expectations, including their policies

and priorities for enforcement investigations or actions, may change from time to time. The Barclays Bank Group may also

(from time to time) be subject to claims and/or legal proceedings and other investigations relating to financial and non-

financial disclosures made by members of the Barclays Bank Group (including, but not limited to, regulatory capital and

liquidity reporting and sustainability disclosures).

Financial institutions, including the Barclays Bank Group, may face increasing litigation, conduct, enforcement and contract

liability risks related to climate change, environmental degradation and other social, governance and sustainability-related

issues as a result of their business activities. There are an increasing number of new climate and sustainability-related laws

and regulations, many of which are beginning to diverge between jurisdictions. Divergence has also been notable in respect

of diversity, equity and inclusion, where the enforcement landscape and legal obligations in certain jurisdictions are

increasingly at odds with agendas in others. In particular, in the US, changing federal enforcement priorities and legal

interpretations regarding diversity and inclusion programmes present unknown and evolving risks. Broader climate and

sustainability-related legislation is also at risk of imposing requirements on international companies which do not align with

regulatory frameworks in other jurisdictions in which those companies operate in some cases meaning that multiple sets of

diverging jurisdictional requirements are being applied to the same company.

There is growing demand from investors and customers for sustainable products and services as well as greater

transparency in respect of business operations. This has been accompanied by increased regulatory and NGO scrutiny which

can create litigation or enforcement risk, either for not disclosing relevant information or due to the information disclosed. In

particular, there has been an increasing focus on greenwashing, with greater consumer protection powers afforded to the

Competition and Markets Authority under the Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Act 2024 which can be used to

tackle greenwashing.

Certain stakeholders have taken legal action (including under "soft law" mechanisms) against the Barclays Group and others

(including regulators, campaign groups and customers) may decide to take action against the Barclays Bank Group in the

future for allegedly financing or contributing to climate change, environmental degradation and other social, governance

and sustainability-related issues, or because the Barclays Bank Group's response to climate change or other sustainability

factors is perceived to be ineffective, insufficient or inappropriate.

On the other hand, laws, regulatory processes and policies seeking to restrict or prohibit doing certain business with entities

are often identified as "boycotting" or "discriminating" against particular industries. In certain jurisdictions there has been a

push towards policies and regulation which restrict consideration of sustainability factors in investment processes or

otherwise, in order to protect the energy and other high carbon sectors from any risks of divestment or challenges in

accessing finance.

The outcome of legal, competition and regulatory matters, both those to which the Barclays Bank Group is currently

exposed and any others which may arise in the future, is difficult to predict (and any provision made in the Barclays Bank

Group’s financial statements relating to those matters may not be sufficient to cover actual losses).

In connection with such matters, the Barclays Bank Group may incur significant expense, regardless of the ultimate

outcome, and any such matters could expose the Barclays Bank Group to any of the following outcomes: substantial

monetary damages or settlements (including with respect to third-party litigation funding) and/or fines; remediation of

affected customers and clients; other penalties and injunctive relief; additional litigation; criminal prosecution; the loss of any

existing agreed protection from prosecution; regulatory restrictions on the Barclays Bank Group’s business operations

including the withdrawal or restriction of authorisations, licences or permissions; increased regulatory compliance

requirements or changes to laws or regulations; suspension of operations; public reprimands or censure; loss of significant

assets or business; a negative effect on the Barclays Bank Group’s reputation; loss of confidence by investors, counterparties,

clients and/or customers; risk of credit rating agency downgrades; potential negative impact on the availability and/or cost

of funding and liquidity; and/or dismissal or resignation of key individuals. In light of the uncertainties involved in legal,

competition and regulatory matters, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters (including

formerly active matters or those arising after the date of this Annual Report) will not have a material adverse effect on the

Barclays Bank Group’s business, results of operations, financial condition and prospects.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	71

Risk review

Principal risk management

Climate risk management<br><br>In Barclays' Climate Risk Framework (CRF), Climate Risk is defined as the risk of financial losses arising from climate<br><br>change, through physical risks and risks associated with transitioning to a lower carbon economy.<br><br>The two main categories of climate risk are physical and transition risk as defined below:<br><br>•Physical risk is defined by Barclays as the risk of financial losses related to physical impacts of a changing climate.<br><br>Physical risks can be event-driven (acute risks), including increased frequency and/or severity of extreme weather<br><br>events such as cyclones, hurricanes and floods. Longer-term shifts in climate patterns (chronic hazards) arise<br><br>from sustained higher temperatures that may cause rises in sea levels, changing precipitation patterns or heat<br><br>stress.<br><br>•Transition risk is defined by Barclays as the risk of financial losses caused by the changes driven by the economy<br><br>shifting to a lower-carbon basis, including for example changes in policy, technology and consumer and investor<br><br>sentiment.

Overview

The Barclays Group has developed the CRF for managing financial and operational risks stemming from climate change. It is

underpinned by the Climate Risk Policy and Climate Risk Standard. The CRF, Climate Risk Policy and Climate Risk Standard

are applicable for Barclays Bank Group's business activities, with a focus on lending, capital markets and investments.

The Barclays Bank Group's approach to managing climate risk is proportionate to the level of risk it faces, with a focus on

prioritising and monitoring of material physical and transition risks within the Barclays Bank Group's portfolios. The

approach is customised to reflect portfolio characteristics, size and exposure to specific climate risk drivers.

Climate risk is recognised as a driver of other existing financial risks (credit, market, treasury and capital) and operational

risks, and is not treated as a standalone risk type. The non-financial risks (e.g. reputation risks) associated with climate

change continue to be managed under their respective frameworks.

To operationalise its CRF, the Barclays Bank Group has and continues to implement new processes, tools, models and data

repository as applicable, whilst also enhancing its existing ones. The Barclays Bank Group regularly reviews its approach and

practices for alignment with regulatory developments and industry-standard practices for climate risk. The Barclays Bank

Group has designed and implemented targeted controls to manage climate-related risks.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The Group Head of Climate Risk is the accountable executive for the management and oversight of climate risk.

On behalf of the Board, the BRC plays an important role in overseeing and challenging the Barclays Bank Group's progress

towards achieving the Group's climate targets and assessing the impact of climate risks on the Group's overall risk profile

and financial position. The Barclays Group and its legal entities have various governance structures, including committees

and forums, to oversee and manage climate risk effectively.

The Barclays Bank Group has implemented controls to manage climate-related risks. The Climate Risk Control Forum

provides oversight of  climate related controls, including reviewing risk events, policy and issues management.

Risk appetite

The Barclays Group (including the Barclays Bank Group) approach to setting risk appetite for climate risk is aligned with the

Group's ambition to be a net zero bank by 2050 and the Group's commitment to align its financing with the goals and

timelines of the Paris Agreement, including working towards its 2030 financed emissions reduction targets. Climate risk

considerations have been included in the risk appetite qualitative statements and quantitative constraints.

The risk appetite for climate risk is managed through risk limits, triggers and indicators set across different Principal Risks

(including credit risk, market risk and treasury and capital risk), portfolios, sectors, asset classes and products. Regular

monitoring, reporting and governance provide oversight so that exposures remain within the appetite and corrective actions

are taken to address any breaches or excesses.

The Barclays Bank Group continues to regularly review its risk appetite and makes enhancements to maintain alignment

with the Barclays Bank Group's strategic objectives as a part of its business planning process. The risk appetite is formally

reviewed and approved by the Board annually.

Please see page 64 of the Barclays Transition Update for further details on Barclays (including the Barclays Bank Group)

climate risk appetite.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	72

Risk review

Principal risk management

Risk identification

The Barclays Bank Group employs a multi-layered risk identification approach, beginning with the analysis of transmission

channels through which climate risk can drive risks in the Barclays Bank Group's traditional risk categories.

Horizon scanning is conducted to identify emerging risk themes, potential risk drivers, and key regulatory updates.

Assessments are performed to identify and analyse the vulnerability of different geographies and industry sectors to various

physical and transition risk drivers. Countries and sectors judged to be at elevated risk are subject to heightened risk

management. Refer to page 157 for details on sector exposures.

To identify property level physical hazards for Barclays' asset-backed lending and financing portfolios such as Private Bank

and Wealth Management, Mortgages and Structured Lending and Financing portfolios, the Barclays Bank Group uses third

party data providers in addition to the internal data sources.

Climate risks identified through these processes guide the Barclays Bank Group in defining priorities and focus areas for

granular assessment within principal risk categories, such as credit, market, and operational risk. The below table provides

examples of how Barclays' CRF considers potential key effects  of climate risk drivers on the Barclays Bank Group's financial

and operational Principal Risk types.

Principal Risk	Example effects of climate risk drivers
Credit risk	A changing climate (i.e. more frequent and more intense physical hazards) and society’s response (i.e. increased transition<br><br>factors such as new policies or technologies to reduce carbon emissions) impacts credit risk. The impact on credit risk<br><br>relates to the failure of clients, customers or counterparties to meet their obligations as a result of physical and transition<br><br>risks, which may lead to potential losses and/or exposures outside the Barclays Bank Group's risk appetite in retail and<br><br>wholesale credit portfolios. Climate change can drive direct impacts such as damage to fixed assets from physical hazards,<br><br>leading to changes in output and increased costs. Indirect impacts may include material disruptions to supply chains and<br><br>shifting demand for goods and services. Transition risk factors such as low-carbon policies or technologies could also<br><br>change the value and creditworthiness of counterparties, clients and customers.
Market risk	The impact on market risk relates to potential adverse changes in the value of the Barclays Bank Group's assets and<br><br>liabilities from fluctuations in market variables as a result of physical and transition risks, which may lead to potential losses<br><br>due to changes in equity and commodity prices and credit spreads. Either physical hazards or transition risk factors have<br><br>the potential to trigger large, sudden and negative price adjustments where climate risk has not yet been incorporated into<br><br>prices, driving additional market risk. Fluctuations in markets and prices in susceptible sectors or countries could drive<br><br>losses to the value of the Barclays Bank Group's assets and liabilities.
Treasury & capital risk	The impact on treasury & capital risk relates to the impact on the capital requirements and liquidity funding requirements<br><br>as a result of physical and transition risks, which may lead to changes in capital plans, funding plan requirements, asset<br><br>and liabilities management (ALM) and exposures to changes in interest rates. Climate events can drive treasury & capital<br><br>risk as counterparties draw down deposits and credit lines. Physical hazards or transition factors could lead to increased<br><br>volatility, which could in turn change the value of investments and drive changes to funding requirements and accessibility,<br><br>capital planning, capital requirements, or hedging methodologies.
Operational risk	Physical hazards and transition risk factors can lead to impacts on the firm’s own operations including damage or<br><br>unsuitability of premises, disruption to business operations and supply chain and ability to recover from outages (e.g.<br><br>caused by workforce, technology and third-party service providers). For example, extreme weather events can impact the<br><br>operation of bank offices, branches, and support facilities such as data centres. The transition to a low-carbon economy<br><br>can lead to changes in operational processes, for example to mitigate climate impacts we need to decarbonise our<br><br>buildings or requirements to achieve more carbon efficient buildings. Transition risks can also drive secondary impacts on<br><br>operational risks such as the risk of misreporting as a result of enhanced regulatory disclosures requirements, or physical<br><br>security breaches and branch closures as a result of protests related to Barclays Group's (including the Barclays Bank<br><br>Group's) lending activities.

Risk Register and Materiality Assessment

The Barclays Bank Group uses its Risk Register process to assess the potential effects of climate risk drivers on principal risks

and its portfolios. The Risk Register contains risks that may impact forward-looking business plans of the Barclays Bank

Group and it's business units. The materiality of climate risks is derived either quantitatively (typically based on stress

testing) or through qualitative estimations. The potential impact is evaluated based on an adverse but plausible stress

scenario. The Risk Register process has been extended to cover materiality assessment over the short, medium and long

term for climate risk. Climate risk is assessed as having a higher materiality rating within the Barclays Bank Group Risk

Register for credit risk than across other principal risk categories. The Barclays Bank Group Risk Register is refreshed on at

least an annual basis and is subsequently used to support strategic planning and risk management activities.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	73

Risk review

Principal risk management

Risk assessment

The Barclays Bank Group has developed a suite of tools and practices to assess climate risk, leveraging both qualitative

insights and quantitative techniques. These tools and practices enable evaluation of potential exposures and vulnerabilities

across portfolios of other principal risk types.

For credit risk, the Barclays Bank Group has integrated climate risk considerations into key processes of the credit lifecycle,

including credit assessment, annual review and transaction approval processes. The Climate and Environmental Lens

questionnaire is used to evaluate climate physical risks, climate transition risks and environmental risks (as relevant) for

corporate clients operating in elevated risk sectors. The outputs from Climate & Environmental lens assessments are used to

inform various credit processes. Climate risk factors are included in the downside cashflow modelling within the credit

analysis process, and influence internal credit ratings when there is demonstrable evidence that such factors can have

material adverse impact on the counterparty’s financial position.

For Market Risk, the impact of climate risk is measured by applying a multi-asset combined stress scenario, which stresses

the core risks susceptible to climate risks over long and short-term horizons (short‑term is anything less than 10 days, while

long‑term is anything longer than 10 days). The estimated impact is calculated and reported internally on a weekly basis.

The pattern of stress losses arising from the stress scenario is used to estimate and set ongoing limits, under which the

Barclays Bank Group monitors and controls market risk arising from climate change.

For treasury and capital risk (TCR), climate risk considerations have also been incorporated into the Internal Capital

Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP). The climate-related risk

variables and stress scenarios have been integrated in the Group-wide internal stress testing framework to understand and

quantify potential impact on the Barclays Bank Group's capital position. Further, TCR considerations also include the

assessment of liquidity and pension risk.

For liquidity risk, assessments are informed by the application of industry and country classifications and evaluated using

internal stress testing and portfolio-specific analysis to determine material areas of climate risk (e.g. by asset class or

product type) that could impact funding and liquidity ratios.

For pension risk, key risk indicators based on the impact of physical and transition risk drivers on the pension fund have

been defined. These are reviewed and monitored on a quarterly basis.

For operational risk, the primary objective is to ensure resilience against physical climate-related events. Climate risks are

assessed within existing business-as-usual operational risk processes, with climate considerations embedded into premises

management and operational recovery planning to strengthen business continuity and response capabilities. Climate risk

factors have been integrated into Structured Scenario Assessments, which capture extreme but plausible operational tail

risks. In addition to this, the Barclays Bank Group's material third party suppliers’ vulnerabilities to physical risk events are

assessed, and where appropriate, control requirements are set to manage these risks.

The Barclays Bank Group's work on assessing climate-related risks has focused on the short (0-1 year) and medium term

(1-5 years) horizons, in line with our financial planning cycle. However, the longer-term climate (> 5years) risks have been

considered using both quantitative approaches, such as reverse stress testing, and qualitative analysis.

Risk monitoring and reporting

The Barclays Bank Group has adopted an integrated approach to managing and mitigating climate risks, combining

continuous monitoring at a portfolio level, and bottom-up transaction-level assessments.

At the portfolio level, the Barclays Bank Group translates its climate risk appetite into a series of limits, triggers, and

indicators to control risk-taking across different Principal Risks (including credit risk, market risk and treasury & capital Risk),

portfolios, material sectors, asset classes and products. These limits are subject to regular monitoring and reporting to the

relevant governance forums and committees.

At a transaction level, the Barclays Bank Group integrates climate considerations into credit decisioning and underwriting

processes. Enhanced oversight and additional scrutiny have been introduced for new deals originated in elevated climate risk

sectors, particularly those with sector targets and/or external position statements. Within the Global Markets business

activities (Lending/Underwriting Structured Finance), new guidelines have been implemented to support new transactions

and annual reviews across portfolios (including Commercial / Residential Real Estate, ABS, CLOs, Structured Credits and

Equities, etc.). The guidelines and criteria for additional scrutiny are reviewed  and updated regularly.

The Barclays Group's bespoke tool BlueTrack™ is used for measuring emissions and setting emission reduction sector

targets for its financed portfolio. Currently, BlueTrack™ covers nine sectors as mentioned in pages 85-95 of the Barclays

Group's Annual Report. Barclays Group has developed the Client Transition Framework (CTF) to evaluate corporate clients'

progress towards low-carbon business models. Details on the scope of clients under CTF framework and its methodology

are on page 74 of the Barclays Group Annual Report. The client CTF scores and emissions data from BlueTrack™ are further

used to inform key risk management practices, including risk monitoring, setting limits, managing concentrations, credit

decisions and  stress testing exercises.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	74

Risk review

Principal risk management

Stress testing, Scenario Analysis, ICAAP, and ILAAP are also used by the Barclays Bank Group to manage and mitigate

financial risks. These exercises help the assessment of the Barclays Bank Group's resilience under adverse scenarios, with the

aim of ensuring the bank maintains sufficient capital and liquidity buffers to withstand shocks.

Climate risk-related management information packs, including exposure and risk metrics for climate risk, are produced and

reported to various committees and governance forums, including Barclays Group's CRC. The oversight by committees

within Barclays Group and its legal entities seek to ensure proper oversight and monitoring of climate-sensitive exposures.

The Barclays Bank Group seeks to continuously monitor regulatory developments, including emerging disclosure standards

on climate and wider sustainability areas, and build internal capabilities to meet these new requirements. This also includes

strengthening our scenario analysis capabilities and evaluating the feasibility of conducting scenario analysis for longer time

horizons. During 2025, Barclays conducted an exploratory exercise to extend climate scenario analysis from a 5‑year period

to a 10‑year period. We continue to reflect on the outcomes of this exercise to deepen our understanding and support the

further development of long‑term assessment capabilities.

Key enhancements

The Barclays Bank Group remains committed to maintaining a robust risk management framework for climate risk, with a

continued focus on achieving greater maturity and integration across its operational processes. In 2025, notable

enhancements  were made in the following areas:

•The climate risk models within the Barclays Bank Group's capital assessment framework have been further refined

and updated in line with the strategic plan to advance modelling capabilities. These models undergo independent

model validation to ensure robustness and regulatory alignment.

•The physical risk assessment capabilities have been strengthened to ensure greater consistency in scenario design

across diverse hazards and geographies. These enhancements also enable the integration of secondary

transmission channels including insurance market dynamics, changes in consumer preferences and additional

macroeconomic variables.

•The Barclays Bank Group has continued to enhance its control environment for climate risk by implementing new

controls, reinforcing existing ones and developing a comprehensive control library to support consistent

monitoring and adherence.

•In response to regulatory requirements, progress has been made within Barclays Europe to embed nature risk into

its stress testing framework and ICAAP assessments, compared with last year's exploratory exercise. This includes

enhancements to stress testing models, and the adoption of a joint climate- and nature-informed scenario

narrative. The focus was on key nature-related risk drivers, including pollution, water stress, land use change, soil

degradation, decline in pollinators and waste management (including recycling acceleration).

Credit risk management (audited)<br><br>The risk of loss to the Barclays Bank Group from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to<br><br>fully honour their obligations to the Barclays Bank Group, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest,<br><br>collateral and other receivables.

Overview

The credit risk that the Barclays Bank Group faces arises from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the

counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients' trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement

balances with market counterparties, FVOCI (fair value through other comprehensive income) assets and reverse repurchase

loans.

Credit risk management objectives are to:

▪maintain a framework of controls to oversee credit risk

▪identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Barclays Bank Group and within each separate

business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolio

▪control and plan credit risk taking in line with external stakeholder expectations, including risk return objectives, and

avoiding undesirable concentrations

▪monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controls.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The first line of defence has primary responsibility for managing credit risk within the risk appetite and limits set by the Risk

function, supported by a defined set of policies, standards and controls. In the Barclays Bank Group, business risk

committees (attended by the first line) monitor and review the credit risk profile of each business unit where the most

material issues are escalated to the Retail Credit Risk Management Committee, Wholesale Credit Risk Management

Committee and the Barclays Group Risk Committee.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	75

Risk review

Principal risk management

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend

to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are greater in number but lesser in value and are,

therefore, managed in aggregated segments.

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services

include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting strategies for approval of transactions

(principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; setting recession readiness

frameworks to protect portfolios in the event of economic stress, maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality,

storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout

scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and

recovery processes/units for retail portfolios. The credit risk management teams in the Barclays Bank Group are accountable

to the Barclays Bank Group CRO, who reports to the Barclays Group CRO.

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product. In

wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly

defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers assigned the higher levels of delegated

authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority,

require the support of the Senior Credit Officers. For exposures in excess of the Senior Credit Officers’ authority, approval by

the Barclays Group Senior Credit Officer/Barclays PLC Board Risk Committee is also required. The Barclays Group Credit Risk

Committee, attended by the Senior Credit Officers, provides a formal mechanism for the Barclays Group Senior Credit Officer

to exercise the highest level of credit authority over the most material Barclays Group single name exposures.

Credit risk mitigation

The Barclays Bank Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate credit risks. These can broadly be

divided into three types:

▪netting and set-off

▪collateral

▪risk transfer.

Netting and set-off

Credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting and set-off. For derivative transactions, the Barclays Bank Group’s

normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements

typically allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from derivative transactions against the

obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may

also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same

currency to be set-off against one another.

Collateral

The Barclays Bank Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

▪home loans: a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings.

▪wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various forms.

▪other retail lending: includes charges over other physical assets; second lien charges over residential property and finance

lease receivables.

▪derivatives: the Barclays Bank Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex) with

counterparties with which the Barclays Bank Group has master netting agreements in place. These annexes to master

agreements provide a mechanism for further reducing credit risk, whereby collateral (margin) is posted on a regular basis

(typically daily) to collateralise the mark to market exposure of a derivative portfolio measured on a net basis.

▪reverse repurchase agreements: collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred

to the Barclays Bank Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed price.

▪financial guarantees and similar off-balance sheet commitments: cash collateral may be held against these

arrangements.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer

credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in three main ways:

▪if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more creditworthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk

is reduced.

▪where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less

likely than the default of either counterparty individually, so credit risk is reduced.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	76

Risk review

Principal risk management

▪first loss exposures across pools of credit risk can be hedged via synthetic securitisation structures, typically via CLN

issuance. As these are fully funded upfront, they provide for a direct reduction in credit risk exposure on referenced pools.

In addition, referenced pools of assets can be securitised with specific tranches of risk sold to investors to provide direct

reduction in credit risk exposures.

Market risk management (audited)<br><br>The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the Barclays Bank Group’s assets and liabilities from<br><br>fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity<br><br>prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations.

Overview

Market risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk

management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Barclays Bank Group will

look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and

hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices, volatility or correlations.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

Market risk in the businesses resides primarily in IB and Treasury. These businesses have the mandate to assume market

risk. The front office and Treasury trading desks are responsible for managing market risk on a day-to-day basis, where they

are required to understand and adhere to all limits applicable to their businesses. The Market Risk team supports the trading

desks with the day-to-day limit management of market risk exposures through governance processes which are outlined in

supporting market risk policies and standards.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees and Barclays Group committees, including the

Market Risk Committee (MRC).

The objectives of market risk management are to:

▪identify, understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

▪facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

▪control market risk in the businesses according to the allocated appetite.

To meet the above objectives, a governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF.

The Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee recommends market risk appetite to the Barclays Bank PLC Board for their

approval, within the parameters set by the Barclays PLC Board.

The Market Risk Committee (MRC) reviews and makes recommendations concerning the Barclays Group-wide market risk

profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Risk Framework and associated policies and standards,

monitoring market and regulatory changes, and reviewing limit utilisation levels. The committee is chaired by the Market

Risk Principal Risk Lead and attendees include the business heads of market risk and business aligned market risk managers.

In addition to MRC, the Investment Bank Risk Committee (IBRC) is the main forum in which market risk exposures are

discussed and reviewed with senior business heads. The Committee is chaired by the BBPLC CRO and meets weekly,

covering current market events, notable market risk exposures, and key risk topics. New business initiatives are generally

socialised at IBRC before any changes to risk appetite or associated limits are considered in other governance committees.

Management value at risk (VaR)

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements if the current positions were to be held

unchanged for one business day. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology with a

one-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level is used for all trading books and some banking

books.

Limits are applied at the total level as well as by risk factor type, which are then cascaded down to particular trading desks

and businesses by the market risk management function.

See pages 131 to 132 for a review of management VaR.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	77

Risk review

Principal risk management

Treasury and capital risk management<br><br>This comprises:<br><br>Liquidity risk: The risk that the Barclays Bank Group is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it<br><br>does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets.<br><br>Capital risk: The risk that the Barclays Bank Group has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal<br><br>business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments and stressed<br><br>conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This also includes the risk from<br><br>the Barclays Bank Group’s pension plans.<br><br>Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to capital or income volatility<br><br>because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities. This also includes<br><br>credit spread risk in the banking book, the risk that the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to capital or income volatility<br><br>because of changes in credit spreads on its (non-traded) assets and liabilities

The Barclays Bank PLC Treasury function manages treasury and capital risk exposure on a day-to-day basis, with the

Barclays Bank PLC Treasury Committee together with the Barclays Group Treasury Committee acting as the principal

management bodies for the Barclays Bank Group. The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight and

provides insight into key capital, liquidity, interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB) and pension risk management

activities. The assessment and management of the Barclays Bank Group's capital and liquidity position and IRRBB and

pension risk requires the use of judgement, assumptions and estimates. Please see the description of material existing and

emerging risks beginning on page 50 of this Annual Report for further details on such judgements, assumptions and

estimates, including the potential risks involved.

Liquidity risk management (audited)

Overview

The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Barclays Bank Group in order to retain the confidence of the

financial markets and maintain the sustainability of the business. Treasury and Capital Risk have created a framework to

manage all liquidity risk exposures under both normal and stressed conditions. The framework is designed to maintain

liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount, quality and funding tenor profile to remain within the liquidity limits set by

the Barclays Bank PLC Board. The Board sets liquidity limits on both internal and regulatory liquidity metrics.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing liquidity risk within the set risk appetite. Both Risk and Treasury

contribute to the production of the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP). The Treasury and Capital Risk

function is responsible for the management and governance of the liquidity risk mandate, as defined by the Barclays Bank

PLC Board.

The liquidity risk management framework established by Treasury and Capital Risk is designed to deliver the appropriate

term and structure of funding, consistent with the risk appetite set by the Barclays Bank PLC Board. The framework

incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor and stress test Barclays Bank PLC's balance sheet

and recovery plan, including limit setting. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of

liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds. Adherence to limits reduces the likelihood that a liquidity stress

event could lead to an inability to meet the Barclays Bank Group’s obligations as they fall due.

The Barclays Bank PLC Board approves the Barclays Bank PLC funding plan, internal stress tests, regulatory stress tests,

recovery plan and liquidity risk qualitative statement that supports risk appetite. Barclays Bank PLC’s Treasury Committee is

responsible for monitoring and managing liquidity risk in line with Barclays Bank PLC’s funding management objectives,

funding plan and risk appetite. The Barclays Group Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the liquidity

risk profile and control environment, providing second line oversight of the management of liquidity risk. The Barclays Bank

PLC Board Risk Committee reviews the risk profile, liquidity risk qualitative statement, and the impact of stress scenarios on

Barclays Bank PLC’s funding plan/forecast in order to agree Barclays Bank PLC’s projected funding abilities. The Barclays

Bank PLC Board Risk Committee also approves liquidity limits to define Barclays Bank PLC's risk appetite liquidity constraint.

Capital risk management (audited)

Overview

Capital risk is managed through ongoing monitoring and management of the capital and leverage position, regular stress

testing and a robust capital governance framework. The objectives of the framework are to maintain adequate capital for the

Barclays Bank Group and its legal entities to withstand the impact of the risks that may arise under normal and stressed

conditions, and maintain adequate capital to cover current and forecast business needs and associated risks to provide a

viable and sustainable business offering. The Barclays Bank Group aims to prudently manage its overall leverage position

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	78

Risk review

Principal risk management

(including risk of excessive leverage) by utilising plausible stress scenarios, reviewing and deploying management actions in

response to deteriorating economic and commercial positions. In order to manage contingent leverage risk, the Barclays

Bank Group considers the context from which the business consumption arises, the impact of client utilisation on leverage

and the available actions to manage.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing and monitoring capital adequacy. The Barclays Bank Group Treasury

and Capital Risk function provides oversight of capital risk. Production of the Barclays Bank PLC Internal Capital Adequacy

Assessment Process (ICAAP) is the responsibility of Treasury.

Capital risk management is underpinned by a control framework and policy. The capital management strategy, outlined in

the relevant legal entity capital plans, is developed in alignment with the control framework and policy for capital risk, and is

implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Barclays Bank Group’s objectives, which are aligned to those of the

Barclays Group.

The Barclays Bank PLC Board approves the Barclays Bank PLC capital plan, internal stress tests and results of regulatory

stress tests and those of the relevant Barclays Bank Group entities. The Barclays PLC Board also approves the Barclays Group

recovery plan which takes into account management actions identified at the Barclays Bank Group level. The Barclays Bank

PLC Treasury Committee and the Barclays Group Treasury Committee are responsible for monitoring and managing capital

risk in line with Barclays Bank Group’s capital management objectives, capital plan and risk frameworks. The Treasury and

Capital Risk Committee (TCRC) monitors and reviews the capital risk profile and control environment, providing second line

oversight of the management of capital risk.

For the relevant Barclays Bank Group subsidiaries, local management assures compliance with an entity’s minimum

regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees (or equivalents) with oversight by the

Barclays Bank PLC Treasury Committee and the Barclays Group Treasury Committee, as required. In 2025, Barclays complied

with all regulatory minimum capital requirements. Contingent leverage risk is managed by; i) setting comprehensive

leverage (and RWA) targets for each business as part of the Treasury capital management process, taking into account

adherence to early warning indicators and maintain a healthy leverage ratio, and; ii) Monitoring execution of actions taken to

course-correct as necessary.

The Barclays Bank Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The

ability of schemes to meet pension payments is achieved with investments and contributions.

Pension risk arises because the market value of pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the

estimated value of pension liabilities might increase. The Barclays Bank Group monitors the pension risks arising from its

defined benefit pension schemes and works with the relevant pension fund’s trustees to address shortfalls. In these

circumstances the Barclays Bank Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund.

The Barclays Bank Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Interest rate risk in the banking book management (IRRBB)

Overview

Interest rate risk in the banking book is driven by counterparties deposit taking and lending activities, investments in the

liquid asset portfolio and funding activities. As per the Barclays Bank Group’s policy to remain within the defined risk

appetite, hedging strategies are executed to mitigate the various IRRBB risks that result from these activities. However, the

Barclays Bank Group remains susceptible to interest rate risk and other non-traded market risks from the following key

sources:

▪Interest rate and repricing risk: the risk that net interest income could be adversely impacted by a change in interest rates,

differences in the timing of interest rate changes between assets and liabilities, and other constraints on interest rate

changes as per product terms and conditions.

▪Counterparty behavioural risk: the risk that net interest income could be adversely impacted by the discretion that

counterparties may have in respect of being able to vary from their contractual obligations with the Barclays Bank Group.

This risk is often referred to by industry regulators as ‘embedded option risk’.

▪Investment risks in the liquid asset portfolio: the risk that the fair value of assets held in the liquid asset portfolio and

associated risk management portfolios could be adversely impacted by market volatility, creating volatility in capital

directly.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The Barclays Bank PLC Treasury Committee and the Barclays Group Treasury Committee are responsible for monitoring and

managing IRRBB risk in line with the Barclays Bank Group’s management objectives and risk frameworks. The BRC and

Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the IRRBB risk profile and control environment, providing second

line oversight of the management of IRRBB. The BRC reviews the interest rate risk profile, including review of the risk

appetite at least annually and the impact of stress scenarios on the interest rate risk of the Barclays Bank PLC’s banking

books.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	79

Risk review

Principal risk management

In addition, the Barclays Bank Group’s IRRBB policy sets out the processes and key controls required to identify all IRRBB

risks arising from banking book operations, to monitor the risk exposures via a set of metrics with a frequency in line with

the risk management horizon, and to manage these risks within agreed risk appetite and limits.

Operational risk management<br><br>The risk of loss to the Barclays Bank Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to<br><br>external events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

Overview

The management of operational risk has three key objectives:

•deliver and oversee an operational risk capability owned and used by business leaders to enable sound risk decisions over

the long term.

•provide the frameworks, policies and standards to enable management to meet their risk management responsibilities

while the second line of defence provides robust, independent, and effective oversight and challenge.

•deliver a consistent and aggregated measurement of operational risk that will provide clear and relevant insights, so that

the right management actions can be taken to keep the operational risk profile consistent with the Barclays Bank Group’s

strategy, the stated risk appetite and stakeholder needs.

The Barclays Bank Group operates within a system of internal controls that enables business to be transacted and risk taken

without exposing it to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damages.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests within

the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by

management through business risk committees and control committees. Operational risk issues escalated from these

meetings are considered through the second line of defence review meetings. Depending on their nature, the outputs of

these meetings are presented to the Group Controls and Risk Committee, the Barclays Bank Risk Forum, the Barclays Bank

PLC Board Risk Committee or the Barclays Bank PLC Board Audit Committee. In addition, specific reports are prepared by

Operational Risk on a regular basis for the Barclays Bank Risk Forum, GRC and the BRC.

Businesses and functions are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event-driven basis. The

reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of

key controls, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

The Barclays Group Head of Operational Risk and Risk Oversight is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an

appropriate Barclays Group-wide Operational Risk Management Framework, meanwhile the Barclays Bank PLC Head of

Operational Risk is responsible for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across all Barclays Bank Group businesses.

The Operational Risk function acts in a second line of defence capacity and is responsible for defining and overseeing the

implementation of the framework and monitoring Barclays Bank Group’s operational risk profile, including risk-based review

and challenge. The Operational Risk function alerts management when risk levels exceed acceptable tolerance in order to

drive timely decision-making and actions by the first line of defence.

Operational risk categories

Operational risks are grouped into risk categories to support effective risk management, measurement and reporting. These

comprise: Change Delivery Management Risk; Data & Records Management Risk; Financial Reporting Risk; Fraud Risk; Cyber

& Information Security Risk; Operational Recovery Planning Risk; People Risk; Premises Risk; Physical Security Risk; Risk

Reporting; Supplier Risk; Tax Risk; Technology Risk; and Transaction Processing Risk.

For definitions of the Barclays Bank Group’s Operational Risk Categories and Connected Risks, refer to the Barclays PLC Pillar

3 Report 2025.

Model risk management<br><br>The potential for adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.

Overview

The Barclays Bank Group uses models to support a broad range of activities, including formulating business strategies,

informing business decisions, identifying and measuring risks, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing

adequacy of capital, managing client assets, measuring compliance with internal risk limits, maintaining the formal control

apparatus of the bank, meeting financial and regulatory reporting and disclosure requirements.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	80

Risk review

Principal risk management

Since models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, they may be subject to uncertainty, errors and

inappropriate use affecting the accuracy of their output. Model risk can lead to financial loss, poor business and strategic

decision making, or damage to a bank’s reputation.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

Model Risk is a principal risk within the ERMF and is centrally governed by the Barclays Group's Model Risk Management

("MRM") function. MRM is an independent function responsible for establishing and maintaining the framework and the

model inventory needed to assess, manage, and report model risk. The Global Head of MRM reports directly to the Group

Chief Risk Officer. The Head of AI/ML Risk reports into the Global Head of MRM.

MRM establishes model risk policies and standards, sets out and monitors model risk appetite, validates and approves

models, reports on model risk, operates the controls that govern models and maintains the inventory of all models used by

the Group globally.

The Model Risk Framework, which is owned by the Head of MRM, provides the overview for management and governance

of Model risk in Barclays, including key components such as the Model Risk Policy, the AI Policy and supporting standards,

reporting and escalation paths for breaches of policy.

The Model Risk Policy prescribes the end-to-end requirements for the identification, measurement and management of

model risk covering model documentation, development, monitoring, annual assessment and review, independent

validation, approval, and change and reporting processes, and assigns clear roles and responsibilities for the end-to-end

management of model risk.

The Artificial Intelligence (AI) Policy lays out the requirements for management and oversight of risks associated with use of

AI and is supported by the AI standard. The primary objectives of this Policy are to:

•Define Ethical AI Principles to enable ethical, lawful, and appropriate use of AI.

•Establish an enterprise-wide definition of AI, define risks stemming from use of AI and define prohibited, high,

medium and low risk uses of AI to enable consistent identification of AI Systems, and the risks associated with their

use.

•Define governance and escalation pathways to provide transparency on AI use and associated risks to Senior

Management.

•Define control objective for AI training and literacy

MRM operates the Barclays Group Model Risk Committee (GMRC), the purpose of which is to review and monitor the Model

Risk profile and control environment across the Model Risk portfolio and assess the exposure against the approved appetite

and associated tolerances. The GMRC escalates to the Barclays Group Risk Committee (GRC).

MRM also operates the Model Risk Control Forum (MR CF) that oversees the consistent and effective implementation of the

Operational Risk Framework (ORF) as relating to Model Risk. The MR CF escalates to the Group Controls Committee. MRM

reports on the model risk profile to the Group Board Risk Committee, the Group Risk Committee, key Barclays Legal Entity

risk and control committees and forums. These committees consider Model Risk matters relevant to them and escalate as

required in compliance with the Operation of Committees Policy and  internal applicable governance policies.

Cross functional oversight of AI Risk in the bank, is provided by the Group AI Governance Council, under the mandate of

Head of AI/ML Risk.

The Head of AI/ML Risk is also responsible for establishing the AI Risk Appetite, and enabling reporting of compliance with

the AI Policy and AI Standard to the Group and local entity Board Risk Committee(s).

In addition, the Model Strategy and Oversight (MSO) Team, which is a first line independent team, provides oversight of

strategic modelling decisions of material models, in particular ensuring compliance with regulations and relevant technical

standards, following a risk-based approach focusing on material modelling issues, including:

•Ensures a comprehensive / consistent approach taken across the Barclays Bank Group to deliver material models

requirements;

•Provides challenge to modelling decisions taken by Model Owners and Developers;

•Participates in the requisite forum (i.e. Group Model Management Steering Committee) to facilitate Senior

Management oversight of the strategic approach taken for the development/re-development of material models

and of key model aspects of associated rating systems within Barclays.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	81

Risk review

Principal risk management

As per the ERMF, the first line of defence (1LOD) is comprised of all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client

facing areas of the firm as well as all associated support functions, including Finance, Treasury, Technology and Operations,

Human Resources, and Administration. Employees of risk and compliance are the second line of defence (2LOD).

The 1LOD for Model Risk is represented by 1LOD areas developing, using and owning models. 2LOD areas develop, use or

employ models as well. In such cases, these 2LOD areas will be subject to independent oversight from MRM and within the

MRM framework are considered as 1LOD. MRM is the 2LOD for Model Risk.

Compliance risk management<br><br>The risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of the Barclays Bank<br><br>Group's products and services, (Conduct Risk), and the risk to Barclays, its clients, customers or markets from a failure to<br><br>comply with the Laws, Rules and Regulations (LRR) applicable to the firm.

Overview

Compliance Risk incorporates wholesale conduct, customer protection, data privacy, regulatory compliance, product design

and review, and laws, rules and regulation risks. The Bank has no appetite for material breaches of LRR, or Compliance Risk

issues and events that are material, systemic, not promptly remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where

required, and/or are likely to result in regulatory enforcement.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The Compliance Risk Management Framework (CRMF) outlines how the Barclays Bank Group manages and measures its

Compliance Risk Profile. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing, maintaining and overseeing a

group-wide CRMF. The Barclays Bank PLC Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for providing effective oversight of

Compliance Risk in line with the CRMF at the Entity and Subsidiary level. This includes overseeing the development and

maintenance of the relevant Compliance Risk policies and associated standards, the monitoring of and reporting on the

consistent application and the effectiveness of the implementation of the controls by management, to manage Compliance

Risk. It is the responsibility of the first line of defence to establish controls to mitigate and monitor its compliance risk

exposure. The responsibility for LRR risk management sits across various functions and business units, including Legal, Chief

Controls Office, Risk and Compliance.

Senior managers are accountable within their areas of responsibility for owning and managing Compliance Risk in

accordance with the CRMF, as defined within their regulatory Statement of Responsibilities, and a dedicated team has been

established in Compliance to oversee and support senior managers in LRR risk management.

Compliance as an independent second line function oversees that Compliance Risks are effectively identified, managed,

monitored and escalated, and has a key role in helping Barclays achieve the right conduct outcomes and evolve a

compliance-focused culture.

The Barclays Bank PLC Chief Compliance Officer provides independent check and challenge to Business Senior Management

to ensure their Compliance Risk management accountabilities are carried out effectively, including, but not limited to risk

assessments, mitigation plans and reporting.

The governance of Compliance Risk within the Barclays Bank Group is fulfilled through management committees and

forums operated by the first and second lines of defence, with clear escalation and reporting lines into Board level

committees. The Barclays Bank PLC Risk Committee is the primary second line governance committee for the oversight of

the Compliance Risk profile and responsibilities include the identification and discussion of any emerging Compliance Risk

exposures in the Barclays Bank Group.

Financial crime risk management<br><br>The risk that the Barclays Bank Group and its associated persons (employees or third parties) commit or facilitate financial<br><br>crime, and/or Barclays Bank Group's products and services are used to facilitate financial crime. Financial Crime<br><br>undermines market integrity and may result in: Harm to clients, customers, counterparties or employees; diminished<br><br>confidence in financial products and services; damage to Barclays reputation; regulatory breaches; and/or financial<br><br>penalties.

Overview

Financial Crime risk management incorporates anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering (including terrorist

financing), tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks (including proliferation financing).

The Barclays Bank Group has no appetite for Financial Crime risk issues and events that are material, systemic, not promptly

remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where required, and/or are likely to result in regulatory

enforcement.  The Barclays Bank Group will enable and support clients and customers to safely pursue their financial

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	82

Risk review

Principal risk management

objectives and avoid causing negative impacts to the same through regulatory or legislative breaches, including potential or

foreseeable harm, caused by financial crime.

Barclays Bank Group strives to prevent detect and report financial crime through the execution of its end-to-end control

framework.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The Financial Crime Risk Management Framework (FCRMF) outlines how the Barclays Bank Group manages and measures

its Financial Crime risk profile. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing and overseeing the

implementation of the FCRMF and the Financial Crime Policy. This includes defining the relevant control objectives,

principles and other core requirements for the activities of the Barclays Bank Group. It is the responsibility of the first line of

defence to maintain and embed the necessary risk and control environment for effective risk management and to ensure

accurate, transparent and timely reporting on Financial Crime risk to the relevant governance fora.

Senior managers are accountable within their areas of responsibility for the identification and management of financial

crime risk in accordance with the FCRMF, as defined within their regulatory Statement of Responsibilities.

Financial Crime Compliance, as an independent second line function, oversees that financial crime risks are effectively

identified, managed, monitored and escalated, providing check and challenge to the business and ensuring that

accountabilities are carried out effectively.

The governance of Financial Crime Risk within Barclays Bank Group is fulfilled through management committees and

forums operated by the first and second lines of defence, with clear escalation and reporting lines into Board level

committees. The Barclays Bank PLC Risk Committee is the primary second line governance committee for the oversight of

the Financial Crime Risk profile and responsibilities include the identification and discussion of any emerging Financial Crime

Risk exposures in the Barclays Bank Group.

In addition, Legal Entity and Regional Chief Compliance Officers and entity Money Laundering Reporting Officers (MLROs)

will provide reporting as required by their entity Executive and Corporate (Board-level) Governance arrangements to support

the oversight of the entity Financial Crime Risk profile.

Reputation risk management<br><br>The risk that an action, transaction, investment, event, decision, or business relationship will reduce trust in the Barclays<br><br>Bank Group’s integrity and/or competence.

Overview

A reduction of trust in the Barclays Bank Group’s integrity and competence may reduce the attractiveness of the Barclays

Bank Group to stakeholders and could lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of

existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy

shareholder value.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The Barclays Bank PLC Board is responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of the Barclays Bank Group

management of reputation risk.

The Barclays Bank PLC Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for overseeing the management of Reputation Risk for

Barclays Bank PLC. The Reputation Risk Management Framework sets out what is required to manage reputation risk across

the Barclays Bank Group, including escalations to the Barclays Bank Group Reputation Risk Committee, as required.

Each colleague is responsible for identifying, assessing and escalating reputation risk.

The Barclays Bank Group is required to operate within established reputation risk appetite, and its component businesses

prepare reports for its respective Risk and Board Risk Committees highlighting their most significant current and potential

reputation risks and issues and how they are being managed. These reports are a key internal source of information for the

quarterly reputation risk reports which are prepared for the Barclays Bank PLC Risk Committee and the Barclays Bank PLC’s

Board.

Legal risk management<br><br>The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the Barclays Bank Group to meet applicable<br><br>laws, rules, regulations or contractual requirements or to assert or defend its intellectual property rights.
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	83
---	---

Risk review

Principal risk management

Overview

In conjunction with Barclays' Operational Risk Framework, the Group wide Legal Risk Management Framework (LRMF),

which applies to Barclays Bank PLC, comprises a number of integrated components that details how the Group identifies,

manages and measures its legal risk profile.

The multitude of laws and regulations across the globe are highly dynamic and their application to particular circumstances

is often unclear resulting in a high level of inherent legal risk. The LRMF seeks to mitigate legal risk through the

implementation of Group wide legal risk policies requiring the engagement of legal professionals to provide legal advice in

situations that have the potential for legal risk, identification and management of legal risks by those legal professionals, and

escalation of legal risk as necessary. Legal risk is also mitigated by the requirements of the Compliance Risk Management

Framework (CRMF), including the responsibility of legal professionals to proactively identify, communicate and provide legal

advice on applicable laws, rules and regulations. Notwithstanding these mitigating actions, Barclays Bank Group operates

with a level of residual legal risk, for which the Barclays Bank Group has limited tolerance.

Organisation, roles and responsibilities

The Barclays Bank Group’s businesses and functions have responsibility for identifying and escalating legal risk to the Legal

Function, as well as responsibility for adherence to control requirements.

The Legal Function organisation and coverage model aligns legal expertise to businesses, functions, products, activities and

geographic locations so that the Barclays Bank Group receives legal advice and support from appropriate legal professionals,

working in partnership proactively to identify, manage and escalate legal risks as necessary.

The senior management of the Legal Function oversees, challenges and monitors the legal risk profile and effectiveness of

the legal risk control environment across the Barclays Group. The Legal Function provides support to all areas of the bank

and is not formally part of any of the three lines of defence. Except in relation to the legal advice it provides or procures, the

Legal Function is subject to oversight from the second line of defence with respect to its own operational and compliance

risks, as well as with respect to the legal risk to which the bank is exposed.

The Barclays Group General Counsel is responsible for developing and maintaining the Barclays Group wide LRMF. This

includes defining the relevant legal risk policies, and producing the Barclays Group wide qualitative statement for legal risk

as part of the Barclays' risk appetite statement. The legal entity General Counsels are responsible for the adoption and

implementation of the legal risk policies in the respective legal entity.

The legal risk profile and control environment is reviewed by management through business risk committees and control

committees. The Barclays Bank Group Risk Committee is incorporated in the Barclays Group Risk Committee and is the most

senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of risk management across the Barclays

Bank Group. Escalation paths from this committee exist to the Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	84

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit Risk

Summary of Contents		Page
This section provides an analysis of carbon<br><br>related assets to assess climate risk performance.	•Carbon-related assets	85
	•Elevated risk sectors	85
	•Carbon-related assets (Incl. sub-sector breakdown)	86
	•Carbon-related sectors in wholesale credit (Dealogic<br><br>Industry Classification)	88
Credit risk represents a significant risk to the<br><br>Barclays Bank Group and mainly arises from<br><br>exposure to loans and advances together with<br><br>the counterparty credit risk arising from<br><br>derivative contracts entered into with clients.	•Credit risk overview and summary of performance	89
	•Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and<br><br>risk transfer	91
This section outlines the expected credit loss<br><br>allowances, the movements in allowances during<br><br>the period, material management adjustments to<br><br>model output and measurement uncertainty and<br><br>sensitivity analysis.	•Expected credit losses	93
	•Loans and advances at amortised cost by product	93
	•Movement in gross exposures and impairment allowance<br><br>including provisions for loan commitments and financial<br><br>guarantees	95
	•Stage 2 decomposition	102
	•Management adjustments to models for impairment	103
	•Climate risk ECL assessment	104
	•Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis	105
The Barclays Bank Group reviews and monitors<br><br>risk concentrations in a variety of ways. This<br><br>section outlines performance against key<br><br>concentration risks.	•Analysis of the concentration of credit risk	115
	•Credit risk concentration by Industry and Geography	116
	•Approach to management and representation of credit<br><br>quality	117
	•Asset credit quality	117
	•Debt securities	117
	•Balance sheet credit quality	118
	•Credit exposures by internal PD (probability of default)<br><br>grade	120
Credit risk monitors exposure performance<br><br>across a range of significant portfolios.	•Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types	125
	•Retail Credit Cards and Retail Other	125
This section provides an analysis of credit risk on<br><br>assets held for sale	•Assets held for sale	126
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	85
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Climate risk performance

Carbon-related assets

According to TCFD, certain industry segments are more likely to be financially impacted than others due to their exposure to

certain transition and physical risk factors for example, greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions, weather events like storms and

hurricanes and dependencies on stable weather conditions for their operations and products. These non-financial industries

are grouped into four key areas: Energy; Transportation; Materials and Buildings; and Agriculture, Food, and Forest Products.

Barclays’ exposures to the industries within these groups are reported as carbon-related assets and can be found in the table

on the following page.

Elevated risk sectors

Barclays has assessed the physical and transition risks associated with Corporate and Financials sectors to identify and

categorise industry segments/activities with heightened climate risks as elevated sectors. In each sector there are a range of

vulnerabilities; whilst Barclays distinguish elevated activities within high-level sectors, not all our clients in sectors classified

as elevated will have high carbon intensity or physical risk vulnerability.

Residential Real Estate exposures are included in this table as they are also susceptible to climate-related risks, even though

Residential Real Estate is not classified as an economic sector.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	86

Risk review

Risk performance

Climate risk performance

Carbon-related assets (Incl. sub-sector breakdown)1						Year on<br><br>Year<br><br>Change<br><br>(%)
	2025
	m
	Physical risk2	Loans &<br><br>advances3	Loan<br><br>commitments4	Total	of which:<br><br>Elevated
Agriculture, food and forest products<br><br>(including logging)		135	36	171	145	(24%)
Agriculture	ü	135	36	171	145
Energy & water		3,923	16,961	20,884	20,729	5%
Power utilities5	ü	3,497	15,277	18,774	18,774
Metals (waste & recycling)		70	84	154	—
Water utilities	ü	356	1,600	1,956	1,955
Manufacturing		5,534	30,949	36,483	11,796	3%
Automotive		681	4,208	4,889	4,662
Cements		62	213	275	275
Chemicals		375	3,637	4,012	3,756
Food, beverage and tobacco		876	5,627	6,503	637
Manufacturing - others6		2,607	14,874	17,481	509
Metals		272	247	519	228
Oil and gas (refining)	ü	300	1,262	1,562	1,562
Packaging manufacturers: metal, glass and<br><br>plastics		104	187	291	—
Paper and forest products (excluding logging)		244	540	784	—
Steel		13	154	167	167
Materials and building		16,752	12,774	29,526	1,149	6%
Construction and materials	ü	1,259	1,334	2,593	1,149
Real estate management and development		15,493	11,440	26,933	—
Mining and quarrying		1,230	7,904	9,134	9,134	2%
Mining (incl diversified miners)7	ü	119	1,521	1,640	1,640
Oil and gas (extraction)	ü	1,111	6,383	7,494	7,494
Transport & storage		1,695	7,538	9,233	6,679	3%
Aviation	ü	364	2,411	2,775	2,682
Oil and gas (midstream)	ü	105	2,502	2,607	2,607
Other transport services		649	1,426	2,075	—
Ports	ü	100	25	125	125
Road haulage		260	488	748	362
Shipping		217	686	903	903
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure		2,036	6,098	8,134	4,434	7%
Oil and gas (wholesale)		760	1,668	2,428	2,012
Others		1,276	4,430	5,706	2,422
Other financial institutions		534	542	1,076	—	27%
Real estate management and development<br><br>(REITs)		534	542	1,076	—
Home loans		4,951	9	4,960	—	—%
Residential real estate	ü	4,951	9	4,960	—
Carbon-related assets/ Elevated risk sector<br><br>Grand total		36,790	82,811	119,601	54,066	4%
Total Loans & advances and Loan<br><br>commitments		205,939	334,096	540,035	540,035	1%
Carbon-related assets / Total Loans &<br><br>advances and Loan commitments (%)		18%	25%	22%	10%	1%
Sub-total of sectors spanning in multiple<br><br>industries
Oil & gas		2,276	11,815	14,091	13,675	4%

All values are in British Pounds.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	87

Risk review

Risk performance

Climate risk performance

	2024
	m
	Physical risk2	Loans &<br><br>advances3	Loan<br><br>commitments4	Total	Of which:<br><br>Elevated
Agriculture, food and forest products (including logging)		112	113	225	191
Agriculture	ü	112	113	225	191
Energy & water		2,821	17,006	19,827	19,661
Power utilities5	ü	2,264	15,399	17,663	17,663
Metals (waste & recycling)		62	104	166	—
Water utilities	ü	495	1,503	1,998	1,998
Manufacturing		5,119	30,398	35,517	12,198
Automotive		660	4,456	5,116	4,772
Cements		29	302	331	332
Chemicals		364	3,724	4,088	3,730
Food, beverage and tobacco		881	5,897	6,778	800
Manufacturing - others6		2,488	13,284	15,772	637
Metals		266	381	647	262
Oil and gas (refining)	ü	79	1,447	1,526	1,525
Packaging manufacturers: metal, glass and plastics		133	242	375	—
Paper and forest products (excluding logging)		205	539	744	—
Steel		14	126	140	140
Materials and building		15,733	12,117	27,850	937
Construction and materials	ü	1,313	1,130	2,443	937
Real estate management and development		14,420	10,987	25,407	—
Mining and quarrying		1,436	7,543	8,979	8,918
Mining (incl diversified miners)7	ü	259	1,610	1,869	1,809
Oil and gas (extraction)	ü	1,138	5,926	7,064	7,064
Transport & storage		1,493	7,451	8,944	6,584
Aviation	ü	230	2,345	2,575	2,472
Oil and gas (midstream)	ü	163	2,566	2,729	2,729
Other transport services		575	1,301	1,876	—
Ports	ü	87	87	174	174
Road haulage		312	451	763	382
Shipping		126	701	827	827
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure		2,134	5,473	7,607	4,123
Oil and gas (wholesale)		882	1,337	2,219	1,880
Others		1,252	4,136	5,388	2,243
Other financial institutions		380	469	849	—
Real estate management and development (REITs)		380	469	849	—
Home loans		4,956	18	4,974	—
Residential real estate		4,956	18	4,974	—
Carbon-related assets/ Elevated risk sector: Grand total		34,184	80,588	114,772	52,612
Total Loans & advances and Loan commitments		195,054	338,427	533,481	533,481
Carbon-related assets / Total Loans & advances and Loan<br><br>commitments (%)		18%	24%	22%	10%
Sub-total of sectors spanning in multiple industries
Oil & gas		2,262	11,276	13,538	13,198

All values are in British Pounds.

Notes

1As industries decarbonise, sectors will increasingly include both carbon and non-carbon related activities e.g. Power utilities will also include, in

part, their generation capacity from renewable energy sources.

2Physical risk and Transition risk indicators are added for elevated risk sectors to indicate the primary drivers of risk. See page 58 for further

details.

3Loans and advances includes debt securities at amortised cost amounting to £55,153m (2024: £50,227m) of which carbon related assets are

£1,233m (2024: £1,929m). These carbon related assets comprise £414m (2024: £1,388m) in Material & buildings, £281m (2024: £241m) in

Other financial corporations, £391m (2024: £228m) in Transport and storage, £131m (2024: £63m) in Energy and water and £15m (2024: £9m)

in Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure.

4Loan commitments excludes the fair value exposures of £21,292m (2024: £15,350m).

5Power utilities includes exposure towards renewable energy of £4,968m (2024: £3,565m).

6Manufacturing - others includes areas such as Medical & surgical equipment, Mining, quarrying & construction machinery, Special purpose

machinery, Aerospace, Soaps & detergents, Cleaning & polishing preparations, Brushes, Stationery goods, Valves & compressors, Agricultural

machinery & tractors, etc.

7Diversified miners with minority interests in thermal coal mining are included in this category.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	88

Risk review

Risk performance

Climate risk performance

Financing

To facilitate greater understanding and transparency of our capital markets financing, we disclose the total capital raised for

clients across all sectors using data sourced from Dealogic. We have provided the breakdown of our 2025 and 2024

financing below. We have constructed this table based on the mapping of issuers’ industry assignment in Dealogic data and

Barclays’ internal industry taxonomy called Barclays Industry Classification (BIC). Financing volumes are reported on a

manager-proceeds basis including bonds, equities, loans and securitised bonds and no modifications have been made by

Barclays. This data represents a third party view of our financing and is subject to Dealogic’s league table methodology,

which pro-rates volume across lead-managers. We are presenting the data in this format to support transparency and

comparability but it should be noted that this data is subject to further analysis and methodological enhancements, before it

is included in BlueTrack™.

Carbon-related sectors in wholesale credit (Dealogic Industry Classification) 1
	31.12.2025	31.12.2024	% Change of<br><br>Total
	(m)	(m)
Agriculture, food and forest products	44	95	(54%)
Agriculture	44	95
Energy & water	24,702	28,979	(15%)
Power utilities2	22,569	27,868
Water utilities	2,133	1,111
Manufacturing	38,765	31,901	22%
Automotive	5,888	5,347
Cements	140	344
Chemicals	2,674	4,146
Food, beverage and tobacco	7,133	7,591
Manufacturing - others	19,950	10,618
Metals	554	1,280
Oil and gas (refining)	614	601
Packaging manufacturers: metal, glass and plastics	502	1,056
Paper and forest products (excluding logging)	705	918
Steel	605	—
Materials and building	7,218	6,190	17%
Construction and materials	1,133	810
Real Estate management and development	6,085	5,380
Mining and quarrying	7,683	6,290	22%
Mining (Incl. diversified miners)3	843	585
Oil and gas (extraction)	6,840	5,705
Transport & storage	16,156	17,190	(6%)
Aviation	3,822	4,292
Oil and gas (midstream)	7,979	10,076
Other transport services	1,763	1,620
Ports	—	64
Road haulage	954	633
Shipping	1,638	505
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure	4,722	4,160	14%
Oil and gas (wholesale)	776	235
Others	3,946	3,925
Other financial institutions	1,919	1,774	8%
Real estate management and development (REITs)	1,919	1,774
Carbon-related assets/Elevated risk sector: Grand total	101,209	96,579	5%
Capital market financing Total	425,697	415,433	2%
Financing to Carbon-related sector over Total Capital market<br><br>financing (%)	24%	23%	1%
Sub-total of sectors spanning in multiple industries
Oil and gas	16,209	16,617	(2%)

All values are in British Pounds.

Notes

1As industries decarbonise, sectors will increasingly include both carbon and non-carbon related activities e.g. the clients present within the sector

exposure reported under Power utilities will also have part of their generation capacity from renewable energy sources, which represents a non-

carbon related activity.

2      Power utilities includes exposures towards renewable energy of £6,277m (2024: £4,423m).

3      Diversified miners with minority interests in thermal coal mining are included in this category.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	89

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

All disclosures in this section pages, 89 to 129 are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Barclays Bank Group, arising primarily from loans and advances and

counterparty credit risk from derivative contracts with clients.

The credit risk disclosures exclude financial assets not subject to credit risk, such as equity securities, and certain contingent

liabilities including performance guarantees.

These disclosures are materially aligned with the recommendations of the Taskforce on Disclosures about Expected Credit

Losses (DECL).

Summary of performance in the year

Gross exposure: Gross loans and advances, including debt securities at amortised cost, increased by £11.1bn to £209.6bn

(2024: £198.5bn) principally driven by growth in UK Corporate Banking (£4.4bn), IB (£1.1bn) and a £0.9bn increase in USCB

from the partnership with GM. Further, Treasury investments contributed £4.9bn through the higher holdings in debt

securities. The overall increase was partially offset by the impact of a stronger sterling against the US dollar (c.7%).

Partnership with General Motors (GM): Barclays USCB entered into an exclusive co-branded credit card partnership with

GM on 22 August 2025. As at 31 December 2025, gross loans and advances at amortised cost include £1.3bn of balances

arising from this arrangement, comprising £1.2bn of consumer and £0.1bn of the business card receivables, together with

an associated impairment allowance of £0.1bn.

Exposure net of risk mitigation: The Barclays Bank Group’s net exposure to credit risk increased by 4% to £950bn (2024:

£909bn), primarily reflecting higher cash and balances at central banks (£28.2bn), cash collateral and settlement balances

(£10.5bn) and the increased holding of trading portfolio assets (£11bn). This was partially offset by a decrease in financial

assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (£9.4bn) and a decrease in assets held for sale driven by the

disposal of the German Consumer finance business (£3.7bn). Overall, the credit risk mitigation held against total exposure

decreased to 38% (2024: 40%).

Credit quality: Delinquencies remained broadly stable across the Barclays Bank Group, supported by a range of ongoing risk

management actions designed to maintain the Group's defensive position amid macroeconomic headwinds. The Corporate

loan portfolio continued to benefit from high-quality exposures and credit protection, and single-name charges remained

idiosyncratic in nature. Further analysis of the credit quality of assets is presented in the approach to management and

representation of credit quality section.

Stage movements: Stage 2 gross exposures decreased by £(0.6)bn, primarily reflecting a stronger sterling against the US

dollar and re-calibration of US impairment models, which now better capture consumer behaviour. Stage 3 balances

increased to £4.4bn (2024: £3.9bn) due to single name charges in IB. Refer to page 93 for further details.

Scenario: Global growth slows modestly as rising US tariffs and retaliatory measures disrupt trade flows, though domestic

demand in advanced economies remains resilient. For Q425, macroeconomic scenarios have been refreshed and are

designed around a wide range of economic outcomes, with the Downside 2 (DS2) scenario broadly aligned to Barclays'

2025 Internal Stress Test (IST25), incorporating climate-related drivers. Refer to the Barclays' resilience to climate scenarios

on page 26 for further details.

ECL: Impairment allowances on loans and advances at amortised cost, including off-balance sheet exposures, increased to

£4.0bn (2024: £3.9bn) largely attributable to a single name charge in IB, elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty and the

GM portfolio acquisition. This was partially offset by the impact of a stronger sterling against the US dollar. On-balance sheet

coverage remained stable at 1.7% (2024: 1.7%).

Credit impairment charges/(releases): Credit impairment charges increased to £1,866m (2024: £1,617m) reflecting

acquisition of the GM portfolio, a single name charge in IB and elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty.

Management adjustments: Economic uncertainty adjustments increased to £81m (2024: £nil), reflecting an additional

provision for elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty following tariff developments. Refer to the Management adjustment

to models for impairment section on page 103 for further details.

Climate: The Barclays Bank Group assesses climate-related physical and transition risks through scenario analysis and

targeted reviews of climate-sensitive portfolios. The DS2 scenario is broadly aligned with the climate-aware IST25, and

selected portfolios incorporate enhanced customer-level climate-risk modelling.

Assets held for sale: The sale of the German consumer finance business, previously classified as held for sale, has been

completed. The ‘Held for Sale’ section continues to include credit risk disclosures for a co-branded card portfolio in the

USCB.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	90

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

Further detail can be found in the Financial statements section in Note 8 Credit impairment charges/(releases). Description

of terminology can be found in the glossary, available at home.barclays/annualreport. Refer to the credit risk management

section for details of governance, policies and procedures.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	91

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer

The following tables present a reconciliation between the Barclays Bank Group’s maximum exposure and its net exposure to

credit risk, reflecting the financial effects of risk mitigation reducing the Barclays Bank Group’s exposure.

The Barclays Bank Group mitigates the credit risk to which it is exposed through netting and set-off, collateral and risk

transfer. Further detail on the Barclays Bank Group's policies to each of these forms of credit enhancement is presented on

pages 75 to 76 of the credit risk management section.

Collateral obtained

Where collateral has been obtained in the event of default, the Barclays Bank Group does not, ordinarily, use such assets for

its own operations and they are usually sold on a timely basis. The carrying value of assets held by the Barclays Bank Group

as at 31 December 2025, as a result of the enforcement of collateral, was £47m (2024: £12m).

Maximum exposure and effect of netting, collateral and risk transfer (audited)
	Maximum<br><br>exposure	Netting<br><br>and set-<br><br>off	Cash<br><br>collateral	Non-cash<br><br>collateral	Risk<br><br>transfer	Exposure<br><br>net of risk<br><br>mitigation
Barclays Bank Group
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
On-balance sheet:
Cash and balances at central banks	208,544	—	—	—	—	208,544
Cash collateral and settlement balances	124,519	—	—	—	—	124,519
Loans and advances at amortised cost:
Retail mortgages	4,952	—	(11)	(4,921)	(6)	14
Retail credit cards	20,527	—	—	—	—	20,527
Retail other	4,128	—	(1,064)	(2,617)	(43)	404
Corporate loans	121,179	(2,977)	(1,424)	(64,584)	(4,844)	47,350
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	150,786	(2,977)	(2,499)	(72,122)	(4,893)	68,295
Of which credit-impaired (Stage 3):
Retail mortgages	151	—	—	(151)	—	—
Retail credit cards	381	—	—	—	—	381
Retail other	87	—	—	(84)	—	3
Corporate loans	1,770	—	(22)	(1,003)	(247)	498
Total credit-impaired loans and advances at amortised cost	2,389	—	(22)	(1,238)	(247)	882
Debt securities at amortised cost	55,153	—	—	(136)	—	55,017
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending	17,662	—	—	(17,662)	—	—
Trading portfolio assets:
Debt securities	94,040	—	—	(639)	—	93,401
Traded loans	12,249	—	—	(4,907)	—	7,342
Total trading portfolio assets	106,289	—	—	(5,546)	—	100,743
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement:
Loans and advances	46,885	—	(17)	(42,290)	—	4,578
Debt securities	3,121	—	—	(359)	—	2,762
Reverse repurchase agreements	132,600	—	(1,433)	(130,807)	—	360
Other financial assets	60	—	—	—	—	60
Total financial assets at fair value through the income statement	182,666	—	(1,450)	(173,456)	—	7,760
Derivative financial instruments	252,192	(194,772)	(29,930)	(12,646)	(4,121)	10,723
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	42,818	—	—	(2,390)	—	40,428
Other assets	624	—	(1)	—	—	623
Assets held for sale	5,801	—	—	—	—	5,801
Total on-balance sheet	1,147,054	(197,749)	(33,880)	(283,958)	(9,014)	622,453
Off-balance sheet:
Contingent liabilities	26,633	—	(1,768)	(768)	(194)	23,903
Loan commitments	355,388	—	(491)	(49,265)	(2,376)	303,256
Total off-balance sheet	382,021	—	(2,259)	(50,033)	(2,570)	327,159
Total	1,529,075	(197,749)	(36,139)	(333,991)	(11,584)	949,612
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	92
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

The above table excludes any credit risk mitigation that does not impact the expected credit loss for financial assets

measured at amortised cost. Off-balance sheet exposures are shown gross of provisions of £398m (2024: £420m), see Note

23 for further details. In addition to the above, Barclays Bank Group holds forward starting reverse repos amounting to

£81.5bn (2024: £108.6bn) which are fully collateralised. Corporate loans at amortised cost include £0.1bn (2024: £0.2bn) of

CBILs and CLBILs supported by UK government guarantees of £0.1bn (2024: £0.1bn) which are included within the Risk

transfer column in the table. Reported off-balance sheet loan commitments also include exposures relating to financial

assets classified as assets held for sale.

Maximum exposure and effects of netting, collateral and risk transfer (audited)
	Maximum<br><br>exposure	Netting<br><br>and set-<br><br>off	Cash<br><br>collateral	Non-cash<br><br>collateral	Risk<br><br>transfer	Exposure<br><br>net of risk<br><br>mitigation
Barclays Bank Group
As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
On-balance sheet:
Cash and balances at central banks	180,365	—	—	—	—	180,365
Cash collateral and settlement balances	113,987	—	—	—	—	113,987
Loans and advances at amortised cost:
Retail mortgages	4,956	—	(22)	(4,922)	—	12
Retail credit cards	19,749	—	—	—	—	19,749
Retail other	3,918	—	(1,106)	(2,441)	(33)	338
Corporate loans	116,204	(3,006)	(1,104)	(57,458)	(4,536)	50,100
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	144,827	(3,006)	(2,232)	(64,821)	(4,569)	70,199
Of which credit-impaired (Stage 3):
Retail mortgages	278	—	—	(277)	—	1
Retail credit cards	308	—	—	—	—	308
Retail other	191	—	(21)	(162)	—	8
Corporate loans	1,261	—	(32)	(383)	(87)	759
Total credit-impaired loans and advances at amortised cost	2,038	—	(53)	(822)	(87)	1,076
Debt securities at amortised cost	50,227	—	—	(583)	(40)	49,604
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending	3,393	—	—	(3,393)	—	—
Trading portfolio assets:
Debt securities	77,805	—	—	(657)	—	77,148
Traded loans	13,470	—	—	(878)	—	12,592
Total trading portfolio assets	91,275	—	—	(1,535)	—	89,740
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement:
Loans and advances	44,182	—	(17)	(40,401)	—	3,764
Debt securities	2,931	—	—	(182)	—	2,749
Reverse repurchase agreements	141,791	—	(2,429)	(138,924)	—	438
Other financial assets	85	—	—	—	—	85
Total financial assets at fair value through the income statement	188,989	—	(2,446)	(179,507)	—	7,036
Derivative financial instruments	292,356	(230,260)	(28,953)	(12,633)	(5,284)	15,226
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	51,010	—	—	(1,104)	(102)	49,804
Other assets	665	—	(1)	—	—	664
Assets held for sale	9,544	—	—	—	—	9,544
Total on-balance sheet	1,126,638	(233,266)	(33,632)	(263,576)	(9,995)	586,169
Off-balance sheet:
Contingent liabilities	26,565	—	(2,664)	(441)	(248)	23,212
Loan commitments	353,777	—	(550)	(51,812)	(1,840)	299,575
Total off-balance sheet	380,342	—	(3,214)	(52,253)	(2,088)	322,787
	—	—	—	—	—	—
Total	1,506,980	(233,266)	(36,846)	(315,829)	(12,083)	908,956
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	93
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

Expected credit losses

Loans and advances at amortised cost by product

Total loans and advances at amortised cost in the credit risk performance section includes loans and advances at amortised

cost to banks and loans and advances at amortised cost to customers.

The table below presents a product breakdown of loans and advances at amortised cost and the impairment allowance by

stage. The table also presents stage allocation of debt securities.

The impairment allowance under IFRS 9 considers both the drawn and the undrawn counterparty exposure. For retail

portfolios, the total impairment allowance is allocated to gross loans and advances to the extent allowance does not exceed

the drawn exposure and any excess is reported on the liabilities side of the balance sheet as a provision. For wholesale

portfolios, impairment allowance on undrawn exposure is reported on the liability side of the balance sheet as a provision.

Barclays Bank Group (audited)		Stage 2
As at 31 December 2025	Stage 1	Not past<br><br>due	<=30 days<br><br>past due	>30 days<br><br>past due	Total	Stage 3	Total1
Gross exposure	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	4,674	34	1	101	136	175	4,985
Retail credit cards	18,801	2,022	238	276	2,536	1,776	23,113
Retail other	3,788	80	123	62	265	107	4,160
Corporate loans	111,629	7,941	60	155	8,156	2,360	122,145
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	138,892	10,077	422	594	11,093	4,418	154,403
Debt securities at amortised cost	54,801	371	—	—	371	—	55,172
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	193,693	10,448	422	594	11,464	4,418	209,575
Impairment allowance
Retail mortgages	9	—	—	—	—	24	33
Retail credit cards	395	508	105	183	796	1,395	2,586
Retail other	7	3	1	1	5	20	32
Corporate loans	141	219	6	10	235	590	966
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	552	730	112	194	1,036	2,029	3,617
Debt securities at amortised cost	10	9	—	—	9	—	19
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	562	739	112	194	1,045	2,029	3,636
Net exposure
Retail mortgages	4,665	34	1	101	136	151	4,952
Retail credit cards	18,406	1,514	133	93	1,740	381	20,527
Retail other	3,781	77	122	61	260	87	4,128
Corporate loans	111,488	7,722	54	145	7,921	1,770	121,179
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	138,340	9,347	310	400	10,057	2,389	150,786
Debt securities at amortised cost	54,791	362	—	—	362	—	55,153
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	193,131	9,709	310	400	10,419	2,389	205,939
Coverage ratio	%	%	%	%	%	%	%
Retail mortgages	0.2	—	—	—	—	13.7	0.7
Retail credit cards	2.1	25.1	44.1	66.3	31.4	78.5	11.2
Retail other	0.2	3.8	0.8	1.6	1.9	18.7	0.8
Corporate loans	0.1	2.8	10.0	6.5	2.9	25.0	0.8
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	0.4	7.2	26.5	32.7	9.3	45.9	2.3
Debt securities at amortised cost	—	2.4	—	—	2.4	—	—
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	0.3	7.1	26.5	32.7	9.1	45.9	1.7

Note

1Other financial assets subject to impairment excluded in the table above include cash collateral and settlement balances, reverse repurchase

agreements and other similar secured lending, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income and other assets. These have a

total gross exposure of £186.1bn and an impairment allowance of £145m. This comprises £17m impairment allowance on £184.4bn Stage 1

exposure, £8m on £1.6bn Stage 2 exposure and £120m on £123m Stage 3 exposure. Loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts have

total impairment allowance of £398m.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	94

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

Barclays Bank Group (audited)		Stage 2
As at 31 December 2024	Stage 1	Not past<br><br>due	<=30 days<br><br>past due	>30 days<br><br>past due	Total	Stage 3	Total1
Gross exposure	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	4,537	9	—	141	150	310	4,997
Retail credit cards	17,629	2,449	256	248	2,953	1,724	22,306
Retail other	3,329	177	157	70	404	216	3,949
Corporate loans	107,194	7,944	137	66	8,147	1,654	116,995
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	132,689	10,579	550	525	11,654	3,904	148,247
Debt securities at amortised cost	47,077	3,170	—	—	3,170	—	50,247
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	179,766	13,749	550	525	14,824	3,904	198,494
Impairment allowance
Retail mortgages	8	1	—	—	1	32	41
Retail credit cards	334	552	105	150	807	1,416	2,557
Retail other	5	1	—	—	1	25	31
Corporate loans	144	240	6	8	254	393	791
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	491	794	111	158	1,063	1,866	3,420
Debt securities at amortised cost	9	11	—	—	11	—	20
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	500	805	111	158	1,074	1,866	3,440
Net exposure
Retail mortgages	4,529	8	—	141	149	278	4,956
Retail credit cards	17,295	1,897	151	98	2,146	308	19,749
Retail other	3,324	176	157	70	403	191	3,918
Corporate loans	107,050	7,704	131	58	7,893	1,261	116,204
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	132,198	9,785	439	367	10,591	2,038	144,827
Debt securities at amortised cost	47,068	3,159	—	—	3,159	—	50,227
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	179,266	12,944	439	367	13,750	2,038	195,054
Coverage ratio	%	%	%	%	%	%	%
Retail mortgages	0.2	11.1	—	—	0.7	10.3	0.8
Retail credit cards	1.9	22.5	41.0	60.5	27.3	82.1	11.5
Retail other	0.2	0.6	—	—	0.2	11.6	0.8
Corporate loans	0.1	3.0	4.4	12.1	3.1	23.8	0.7
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	0.4	7.5	20.2	30.1	9.1	47.8	2.3
Debt securities at amortised cost	—	0.3	—	—	0.3	—	—
Total loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>including debt securities	0.3	5.9	20.2	30.1	7.2	47.8	1.7

Note

1Other financial assets subject to impairment excluded in the table above include cash collateral and settlement balances, reverse repurchase

agreements and other similar secured lending, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income and other assets. These have a

total gross exposure of £169.6bn and an impairment allowance of £150m. This comprises £17m impairment allowance on £168.3bn Stage 1

exposure, £7m on £1.1bn Stage 2 exposure and £126m on £130m Stage 3 exposure. Loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts have

total impairment allowance of £420m.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	95

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk performance

Movement in gross exposures and impairment allowance including provisions for loan commitments and financial

guarantees (audited)

The following tables present a reconciliation of the opening to the closing balance of the gross exposure and impairment

allowance.

Transfers between stages in the tables have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year. 'Net

drawdowns, repayments, net re-measurement and movements due to exposure and risk parameter changes' includes

additional drawdowns and partial repayments from existing facilities. Additionally, the below tables do not include other

financial assets subject to impairment such as debt securities at amortised cost, reverse repurchase agreements and other

similar secured lending, cash collateral and settlement balances, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive

income and other assets.

The movements are measured over a 12-month period.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	96

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>(audited)	Stage 1		Stage 2		Stage 3		Total
Barclays Bank Group	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages
As at 1 January 2025	4,537	8	150	1	310	32	4,997	41
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(92)	—	92	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	80	—	(80)	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(27)	—	(15)	—	42	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	59	2	2	—	(61)	(2)	—	—
Business activity in the year	635	1	—	—	—	—	635	1
Refinements to models used for calculation	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	135	(1)	2	—	(19)	8	118	7
Final repayments	(653)	(1)	(14)	—	(80)	(1)	(747)	(2)
Disposals1	—	—	(1)	(1)	(9)	(5)	(10)	(6)
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(8)	(8)	(8)	(8)
As at 31 December 2025	4,674	9	136	—	175	24	4,985	33
Retail credit cards
As at 1 January 2025	17,629	334	2,953	807	1,724	1,416	22,306	2,557
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(1,047)	(35)	1,047	35	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	1,208	268	(1,208)	(268)	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(515)	(20)	(731)	(286)	1,246	306	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	12	9	5	4	(17)	(13)	—	—
Business activity in the year2	2,575	75	237	87	60	40	2,872	202
Refinements to models used for calculation3	—	68	—	(81)	—	1	—	(12)
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	(980)	(299)	262	508	(45)	793	(763)	1,002
Final repayments	(81)	(5)	(29)	(10)	(32)	(26)	(142)	(41)
Disposals1	—	—	—	—	(308)	(270)	(308)	(270)
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(852)	(852)	(852)	(852)
As at 31 December 2025	18,801	395	2,536	796	1,776	1,395	23,113	2,586
Retail other
As at 1 January 2025	3,329	5	404	1	216	25	3,949	31
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(107)	—	107	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	80	—	(80)	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(75)	—	(35)	—	110	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	56	1	—	—	(56)	(1)	—	—
Business activity in the year	1,155	—	24	—	—	—	1,179	—
Refinements to models used for calculation	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to exposure<br><br>and risk parameter changes	1,176	4	158	4	23	8	1,357	16
Final repayments	(1,826)	(3)	(313)	—	(179)	(5)	(2,318)	(8)
Disposals	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(7)	(7)	(7)	(7)
As at 31 December 2025	3,788	7	265	5	107	20	4,160	32

Notes

1The £10m of gross disposals reported within Retail mortgages relate to sale of the Italian mortgage portfolio. The £308m of gross disposals

reported within Retail credit cards relate to debt sales undertaken during the year.

2Business activity in the year reported within Retail credit cards includes £1.2bn related to acquisition of the GM co-branded card portfolio within

USCB.

3Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Retail credit cards include a £(12)m movement in the calculated ECL for the US Cards

portfolio. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays Bank Group continually reviews the output of models to determine

accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over an

extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent in the businesses.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	97

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>(audited)	Stage 1		Stage 2		Stage 3		Total
Barclays Bank Group	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Corporate loans
As at 1 January 2025	107,194	144	8,147	254	1,654	393	116,995	791
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(2,685)	(11)	2,685	11	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	2,417	46	(2,417)	(46)	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(692)	(4)	(505)	(28)	1,197	32	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	146	2	125	1	(271)	(3)	—	—
Business activity in the year1	28,266	40	976	37	225	19	29,467	96
Refinements to models used for calculation2	—	(65)	—	(24)	—	—	—	(89)
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	4,088	14	842	81	(50)	405	4,880	500
Final repayments	(27,104)	(24)	(1,695)	(49)	(40)	(1)	(28,839)	(74)
Disposals3	(1)	(1)	(2)	(2)	(121)	(21)	(124)	(24)
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(234)	(234)	(234)	(234)
As at 31 December 2025	111,629	141	8,156	235	2,360	590	122,145	966
Reconciliation of ECL movement to credit impairment charge/(release) for the period	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
---	---	---	---	---
	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	1	—	5	6
Retail credit cards	61	(11)	1,101	1,151
Retail other	2	4	2	8
Corporate loans	(2)	(17)	452	433
ECL movement excluding disposals and write-offs4	62	(24)	1,560	1,598
ECL movement on loan commitments and financial guarantees	(23)	(6)	7	(22)
ECL movement on other financial assets	—	1	(6)	(5)
ECL movement on debt securities at amortised cost	1	(2)	—	(1)
Recoveries and reimbursements5	10	(26)	(102)	(118)
ECL charge on assets held for sale6				181
Total exchange and other adjustments				233
Total credit impairment charge for the year				1,866

Notes

1Business activity in the year reported within Corporate loans include £0.1bn related to acquisition of the GM co-branded card portfolio within

USCB.

2Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Corporate loans include a £(89)m movement in the calculated ECL for the UKCB and

IB portfolio. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays Bank Group continually reviews the output of models to

determine accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over

an extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent in the businesses.

3The £124m of gross disposals reported within Corporate loans relate to debt sales undertaken during the year.

4In 2025, gross write-offs amounted to £1,101m and post write-off recoveries amounted to £38m. Net write-offs represent gross write-offs less

post write-off recoveries and amounted to £1,063m.

5Recoveries and reimbursements include £80m for reimbursements where the Barclays Bank Group has entered into financial guarantee

contracts which provide credit protection over certain assets with third parties and cash recoveries of previously written-off amounts of £38m.

6ECL charge on assets held for sale relate to the charges on a co-branded card portfolio in USCB and the German consumer finance business.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	98

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Loan commitments and financial guarantees<br><br>(audited)1	Stage 1		Stage 2		Stage 3		Total
Barclays Bank Group	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages
As at 1 January 2025	18	—	—	—	1	—	19	—
Net transfers between stages	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	(5)	—	—	—	(1)	—	(6)	—
Limit management and final repayments	(3)	—	—	—	—	—	(3)	—
As at 31 December 2025	10	—	—	—	—	—	10	—
Retail credit cards
As at 1 January 2025	112,645	34	1,648	15	10	1	114,303	50
Net transfers between stages	(1,083)	7	1,083	(7)	—	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	24,319	11	120	2	—	—	24,439	13
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	(6,434)	(19)	(1,528)	5	—	(1)	(7,962)	(15)
Limit management and final repayments	(11,277)	(7)	(196)	(4)	—	—	(11,473)	(11)
Disposals2	(5,291)	—	(221)	—	(10)	—	(5,522)	—
As at 31 December 2025	112,879	26	906	11	—	—	113,785	37
Retail other
As at 1 January 2025	3,970	5	103	—	11	—	4,084	5
Net transfers between stages	(28)	—	29	—	(1)	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	624	—	1	—	—	—	625	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	291	(4)	46	—	23	—	360	(4)
Limit management and final repayments	(784)	—	(33)	—	(20)	—	(837)	—
Disposals2	(756)	—	(30)	—	(1)	—	(787)	—
As at 31 December 2025	3,317	1	116	—	12	—	3,445	1		Corporate loans
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 1 January 2025	229,565	116	15,079	225	954	24	245,598	365
Net transfers between stages	(201)	40	269	(40)	(68)	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	50,364	28	2,699	61	405	—	53,468	89
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	9,810	(54)	(492)	33	(282)	13	9,036	(8)
Limit management and final repayments	(60,919)	(26)	(4,259)	(56)	(340)	(4)	(65,518)	(86)
As at 31 December 2025	228,619	104	13,296	223	669	33	242,584	360

Notes

1Loan commitments reported also include exposure relating to financial assets classified as held for sale.

2The gross disposals reported within Retail credit cards and Retail other relate to the German consumer finance business; sale of which was

completed in Q125.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	99

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>(audited)	Stage 1		Stage 2		Stage 3		Total
Barclays Bank Group	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages
As at 1 January 2024	7,257	11	389	28	716	321	8,362	360
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(231)	—	231	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	91	3	(91)	(3)	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(82)	—	(30)	(3)	112	3	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	19	1	11	0	(30)	(1)	—	—
Business activity in the year	632	1	—	—	2	—	634	1
Refinements to models used for calculation	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	197	(2)	(2)	9	69	40	264	47
Final repayments	(893)	(1)	(45)	(1)	(86)	(3)	(1,024)	(5)
Disposals1	(2,453)	(5)	(313)	(29)	(461)	(316)	(3,227)	(350)
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(12)	(12)	(12)	(12)
As at 31 December 2024	4,537	8	150	1	310	32	4,997	41
Retail credit cards
As at 1 January 2024	22,315	412	3,450	1,138	1,522	1,226	27,287	2,776
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(1,503)	(51)	1,503	51	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	1,170	321	(1,170)	(321)	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(616)	(24)	(876)	(390)	1,492	414	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	10	9	8	5	(18)	(14)	—	—
Business activity in the year	1,508	33	206	59	20	18	1,734	110
Refinements to models used for calculation2	—	5	—	2	—	4	—	11
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	1,039	(280)	728	506	(45)	973	1,722	1,199
Final repayments	(108)	(7)	(32)	(13)	(1)	—	(141)	(20)
Transfers to assets held for Sale3	(5,495)	(64)	(689)	(161)	(57)	(46)	(6,241)	(271)
Disposals1	(691)	(20)	(175)	(69)	(249)	(219)	(1,115)	(308)
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(940)	(940)	(940)	(940)
As at 31 December 2024	17,629	334	2,953	807	1,724	1,416	22,306	2,557
Retail other
As at 1 January 2024	2,734	8	369	2	308	35	3,411	45
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(221)	—	221	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	86	—	(86)	—	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(148)	—	(53)	—	201	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	82	—	47	—	(129)	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	1,159	1	—	—	—	—	1,159	1
Refinements to models used for calculation	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	1,640	—	36	—	74	13	1,750	13
Final repayments	(2,003)	(4)	(130)	(1)	(224)	(9)	(2,357)	(14)
Disposals	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(14)	(14)	(14)	(14)
As at 31 December 2024	3,329	5	404	1	216	25	3,949	31

Notes

1The £3.2bn of gross disposals reported within Retail mortgages relate to sale of the Italian mortgage loans. The £1.1bn of  gross disposals

reported within Retail credit cards include £0.9bn sale of outstanding US Cards receivables to Blackstone and £0.2bn of other debt sale

undertaken during the year.

2Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Retail credit cards include a £11m movement in the calculated ECL for the US

Cards portfolio. These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays Bank Group continually reviews the output of models to

determine accuracy of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation

over an extended period of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent across the businesses.

3Transfers to assets held for sale reported within Retail credit cards relate to a co-branded card portfolio within USCB.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	100

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Loans and advances at amortised cost<br><br>(audited)	Stage 1		Stage 2		Stage 3		Total
Barclays Bank Group	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Corporate loans
As at 1 January 2024	100,956	179	8,967	309	1,235	348	111,158	836
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2	(2,586)	(15)	2,586	15	—	—	—	—
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1	2,098	42	(2,098)	(42)	—	—	—	—
Transfers to Stage 3	(404)	(2)	(392)	(21)	796	23	—	—
Transfers from Stage 3	143	1	23	5	(166)	(6)	—	—
Business activity in the year	28,497	39	811	34	183	19	29,491	92
Refinements to models used for calculation1	—	18	—	51	—	—	—	69
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movements due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	3,957	(76)	198	—	6	270	4,161	194
Final repayments	(25,406)	(40)	(1,937)	(92)	(142)	(3)	(27,485)	(135)
Transfers to assets held for sale2	(49)	(1)	(9)	(3)	(1)	(1)	(59)	(5)
Disposals3	(12)	(1)	(2)	(2)	(2)	(2)	(16)	(5)
Write-offs	—	—	—	—	(255)	(255)	(255)	(255)
As at 31 December 2024	107,194	144	8,147	254	1,654	393	116,995	791		Reconciliation of ECL movement to credit impairment (release)/charge for the period	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
---	---	---	---	---
	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	2	2	39	43
Retail credit cards	6	(101)	1,395	1,300
Retail other	(3)	(1)	4	—
Corporate loans	(33)	(50)	303	220
ECL movement excluding assets held for sale, disposals and write-offs4	(28)	(150)	1,741	1,563
ECL movement on loan commitments and financial guarantees	(12)	(23)	(18)	(53)
ECL movement on other financial assets	3	6	(4)	5
ECL movement on debt securities at amortised cost	2	(6)	—	(4)
Recoveries and reimbursements5	(20)	23	(42)	(39)
ECL charge on Assets held for sale6				74
Total exchange and other adjustments				71
Total credit impairment charge for the year				1,617

Notes

1Refinements to models used for calculation reported within Corporate loans include a £69m movement in the calculated ECL for the IB portfolio.

These reflect model enhancements made during the year. Barclays Bank Group continually reviews the output of models to determine accuracy

of the ECL calculation including review of model monitoring, external benchmarking and experience of model operation over an extended period

of time. This helps to ensure that the models used continue to reflect the risks inherent across the businesses.

2Transfers to assets held for sale reported within Corporate loans relate to a co-branded card portfolio within USCB.

3The £16m of gross disposals reported within Corporate loans relate to debt sales undertaken during the year.

4In 2024, gross write-offs amounted to £1,221m and post write-off recoveries amounted to £28m. Net write-offs represent gross write-offs less

post write-off recoveries and amounted to £1,193m.

5Recoveries and reimbursements include £11m for reimbursements where the Barclays Bank Group has entered into financial guarantee

contracts which provide credit protection over certain assets with third parties and cash recoveries of previously written off amounts of £28m.

6ECL charge on assets held for sale relate to the German consumer finance business.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	101

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Loan commitments and financial guarantees<br><br>(audited)1	Stage 1		Stage 2		Stage 3		Total
Barclays Bank Group	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL	Gross<br><br>exposure	ECL
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages
As at 1 January 2024	41	—	—	—	1	—	42	—
Net transfers between stages	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	(16)	—	—	—	—	—	(16)	—
Limit management and final repayments	(7)	—	—	—	—	—	(7)	—
As at 31 December 2024	18	—	—	—	1	—	19	—
Retail credit cards
As at 1 January 2024	109,634	48	1,767	36	10	1	111,411	85
Net transfers between stages	(1,682)	20	1,675	(20)	7	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	15,489	11	160	3	1	—	15,650	14
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	2,467	(34)	(1,576)	11	(8)	—	883	(23)
Limit management and final repayments	(13,263)	(11)	(378)	(15)	—	—	(13,641)	(26)
As at 31 December 2024	112,645	34	1,648	15	10	1	114,303	50
Retail other
As at 1 January 2024	3,446	5	116	2	29	—	3,591	7
Net transfers between stages	(35)	—	23	—	12	—	—	—
Business activity in the year	741	2	1	—	—	—	742	2
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	621	(2)	(26)	(2)	(7)	—	588	(4)
Limit management and final repayments	(803)	—	(11)	—	(23)	—	(837)	—
As at 31 December 2024	3,970	5	103	—	11	—	4,084	5
Corporate loans
As at 1 January 2024	212,414	114	20,035	225	802	42	233,251	381
Net transfers between stages	1,240	29	(1,519)	(32)	279	3	—	—
Business activity in the year	50,350	33	1,650	30	192	—	52,192	63
Net drawdowns, repayments, net re-<br><br>measurement and movement due to<br><br>exposure and risk parameter changes	10,133	(34)	(1,391)	65	(31)	(13)	8,711	18
Limit management and final repayments	(44,572)	(26)	(3,696)	(63)	(288)	(8)	(48,556)	(97)
As at 31 December 2024	229,565	116	15,079	225	954	24	245,598	365

Note

1Loan commitments reported also include exposure relating to financial assets classified as held for sale.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	102

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Stage 2 decomposition

Stage 2 exposures are predominantly identified using quantitative tests where the lifetime probability of default (PD) has

deteriorated more than a pre-determined amount since origination during the year. This is augmented by inclusion of accounts

meeting the designated high risk criteria (including watchlist) for the portfolio under the qualitative test.

A small number of accounts (2.9% of impairment allowance and 2.1% of gross exposure) included in Stage 2 are not otherwise

identified by the quantitative or qualitative tests but are more than 30 days past due. The percentage triggered by these

backstop criteria is a measure of the effectiveness of the Stage 2 criteria in identifying deterioration prior to delinquency. These

balances include items in the UK Corporate Bank and Investment Bank for reasons such as outstanding interest and fees rather

than principal balances.

Loans and advances at amortised cost1
	Gross Exposure				Impairment Allowance
Barclays Bank Group	Quantitative<br><br>test	Qualitative<br><br>test	30 days<br><br>past due<br><br>backstop	Total<br><br>Stage 2	Quantitative<br><br>test	Qualitative<br><br>test	30 days<br><br>past due<br><br>backstop	Total<br><br>Stage 2
As at 31 December 20252	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	3	46	87	136	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	1,830	661	45	2,536	597	172	27	796
Retail other	36	182	47	265	5	—	—	5
Corporate loans	5,817	2,285	54	8,156	147	85	3	235
Total Stage 2	7,686	3,174	233	11,093	749	257	30	1,036		Loans and advances at amortised cost1
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
	Gross Exposure				Impairment Allowance
Barclays Bank Group	Quantitative<br><br>test	Qualitative<br><br>test	30 days<br><br>past due<br><br>backstop	Total<br><br>Stage 2	Quantitative<br><br>test	Qualitative<br><br>test	30 days<br><br>past due<br><br>backstop	Total<br><br>Stage 2
As at 31 December 20242	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	3	22	125	150	1	—	—	1
Retail credit cards	2,200	744	9	2,953	620	183	4	807
Retail other	14	321	69	404	—	1	—	1
Corporate loans	6,194	1,931	22	8,147	185	68	1	254
Total Stage 2	8,411	3,018	225	11,654	806	252	5	1,063

Notes

1Where balances satisfy more than one of the above three criteria for determining a significant increase in credit risk, the corresponding gross

exposure and impairment allowance have been assigned in order of categories presented.

2Exposure exclude the portfolios which have been classified as assets held for sale.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	103

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Management adjustments to models for impairment (audited)

Management adjustments to impairment models are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that

are not fully incorporated into the impairment models, or to reflect additional facts and circumstances at the period end.

Management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development where applicable.

Management adjustments are captured through “Economic uncertainty” and “Other” adjustments, and are presented by

product below:

Management adjustments to models for impairment allowance presented by product (audited)
Barclays Bank Group	Impairment<br><br>allowance pre<br><br>management<br><br>adjustments1	Economic<br><br>uncertainty<br><br>adjustments<br><br>(a)	Other<br><br>adjustments<br><br>(b)	Management<br><br>adjustments2<br><br>(a+b)	Total<br><br>impairment<br><br>allowance3	Proportion of<br><br>Management<br><br>adjustments<br><br>to total<br><br>impairment<br><br>allowance
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Retail mortgages	25	—	8	8	33	24.2
Retail credit cards	2,505	31	87	118	2,623	4.5
Retail other	34	—	(1)	(1)	33	(3.0)
Corporate loans	1,253	49	24	73	1,326	5.5
Total	3,817	80	118	198	4,015	4.9
Debt securities at amortised cost	18	1	—	1	19	5.3
Total including debt securities at amortised cost	3,835	81	118	199	4,034	4.9		As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
---	---	---	---	---	---	---
Retail mortgages	38	—	3	3	41	7.3
Retail credit cards	2,630	—	(23)	(23)	2,607	(0.9)
Retail other	32	—	4	4	36	11.1
Corporate loans	1,162	—	(6)	(6)	1,156	(0.5)
Total	3,862	—	(22)	(22)	3,840	(0.6)
Debt securities at amortised cost	27	—	(7)	(7)	20	(35.0)
Total including debt securities at amortised cost	3,889	—	(29)	(29)	3,860	(0.8)

Notes

1      Includes £3.4bn (2024: £3.7bn) of modelled ECL, £0.5bn (2024: £0.3bn) of individually assessed impairments, £(0.2)bn (2024: £(0.3)bn) of

ECL from assets held for sale (co-branded card portfolio) and £0.1bn (2024: £0.1bn) of ECL from benchmarked exposures and debt securities.

2      Management adjustments related to other financial assets subject to impairment not included in the table above include cash collateral and

settlement balances £1m (2024: £(1)m), reverse repurchase agreements £1m (2024: £(2)m) and financial assets at fair value through other

comprehensive income £nil (2024: £(2)m) within the IB portfolio.

3      Total impairment allowance consists of ECL stock on drawn and undrawn exposures.

Economic uncertainty adjustments presented by stage (audited)
	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	—	31	—	31
Retail other	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	16	33	—	49
Total	16	64	—	80
Debt Securities at amortised cost	1	—	—	1
Total including debt securities at amortised cost	17	64	—	81

Economic uncertainty adjustments

Economic uncertainty adjustments are captured in two ways. First, customer uncertainty: the identification of customers

and clients who may be more vulnerable to economic instability; and second, model uncertainty: to capture the impact of

model limitations and sensitivities to specific macroeconomic parameters, which are applied at a portfolio level.

The Barclays Bank Group continues to monitor the elevated tariffs, trade tensions, and geopolitical risks, especially in the US.

In response, an adjustment of £81m introduced during Q125 within customer and client uncertainty provisions has been

retained, with any resulting effects on customer behaviour yet to materialise.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	104

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Other adjustments

Other adjustments are operational and remain in place until incorporated into the underlying models. These adjustments

result from data limitations and model performance related issues identified through model monitoring and other

established governance processes.

Total other adjustments as at 31 December 2025 are £118m (2024: £(29)m) and include:

•Retail mortgages £8m (2024: £3m): Reflects operational adjustments in the Mortgage product of the Private Banking

portfolio

•Retail credit cards £87m (2024: £(23)m): This adjustment reflects provisioning for the GM consumer cards portfolio

acquired during the year, while the previously held high-risk account management (HRAM) adjustment was retired

following model remediation in USCB

•Corporate loans £24m (2024: £(6)m): This adjustment reflects provisioning for the GM business cards portfolio

acquired during the year

•Debt securities £nil (2024: £(7)m): The movement is driven by the retirement of the Exposure at Default recalibration

adjustment following model remediation in the IB portfolio

Climate Risk ECL assessment

Barclays Bank Group performed a credit risk assessment of physical and transition risks due to climate change. This was

delivered through a combination of a scenario approach and targeted reviews of specific portfolios identified as more

susceptible to climate risk.

Scenario Approach: The IFRS 9 Downside 2 scenario has been updated and aligned to the 2025 Internal Stress Test scenario

which is climate aware, ensuring that climate is being considered within the modelled ECL output via existing

macroeconomic variables.

Specific Approach: The approach reviewed portfolios previously identified from both internal and external stress tests as

more susceptible to climate risks. In particular, climate modelling techniques were utilised to inform customer level PD

spreads of physical and transition risk due to climate change for certain Wholesale elevated risk sectors. The output of this

review did not provide variances in ECL deemed sufficiently certain to warrant raising an additional climate-related charge in

2025.

Whilst there have been no separately identifiable charges relating to climate risk in the 2025 reported ECL, it is

acknowledged that impairment could increase over time as risks become more tangible and impact consumers and clients

through physical risks or via impacts from the transition to a low carbon economy. Therefore, Barclays Bank Group

continues to review credit risk outputs to determine if any additional physical or transition climate risks are identified that

are not sufficiently captured via model output.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	105

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis

The measurement of modelled ECL involves complexity and judgement, including estimation of probabilities of default (PD),

loss given default (LGD), a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of

exposures at default (EAD) and assessing significant increases in credit risk. The Barclays Bank Group uses a five-scenario

model to calculate ECL. An external consensus forecast is assembled from key sources, including HM Treasury (short and

medium term forecasts), and Bloomberg (based on median of economic forecasts) which forms the Baseline scenario. In

addition, two adverse scenarios (Downside 1 and Downside 2) and two favourable scenarios (Upside 1 and Upside 2) are

derived, with associated weightings. The adverse scenarios are calibrated to a broadly similar severity to the Barclays Bank

Group's internal stress tests and stress scenarios provided by regulators whilst also considering IFRS 9 specific sensitivities

and non-linearity. The favourable scenarios are designed to reflect plausible upside risks to the Baseline scenario which are

broadly consistent with the economic narrative approved by the Senior Scenario Review Committee. All scenarios are

regenerated at a minimum semi-annually. The scenarios include key economic variables (including GDP, unemployment,

House Price Index (HPI) and base rates in both the UK and US markets), and expanded variables using statistical models

based on historical correlations. The upside and downside shocks are designed to evolve over a five-year stress horizon,

with all five scenarios converging to a steady state after approximately seven years. The same scenarios used in the

estimation of expected credit losses are also used to inform the Barclays Bank Group's internal planning.

Scenarios used to calculate the Barclays Bank Group’s ECL charge were refreshed in Q425, with the Baseline scenario

reflecting the latest consensus macroeconomic forecasts available at the time of the scenario refresh. The Baseline scenario

continues to reflect the rapidly changing trade policies and uncertainty around potential tariffs to be imposed by the US

administration and responses by other governments. Global growth slows modestly as rising US tariffs and retaliatory

measures disrupt trade flows, dampen business confidence, and weigh on investment, though domestic demand in

advanced economies remains resilient. UK and US GDP growth in 2026 is expected to be 1.1% and 2.0%, respectively.

Labour markets in major economies soften slightly amid increased uncertainty and slower export-orientated activity.

However, the weakening is contained and does not rise significantly from current levels. UK and US quarterly

unemployment rates peak at 4.9% and 4.5%, respectively. Central Banks continue to loosen monetary policy with both the

Bank of England and the Federal Reserve finishing 2026 with an interest rate of 3.25%.

The Downside scenarios have been calibrated to capture an escalation of trade tensions, where tariffs imposed by the US

prompt retaliation from its trading partners with adverse implications for consumer prices and investment sentiment. A

sharp slowdown in immigration coupled with mass deportations disrupts the US labour market, compounding downside

risks to growth. In addition, global supply chains are severely disrupted as firms delay investment, reassess production

locations and hoard production inputs. Imports into the US contract sharply due to higher prices and exports fall due to

retaliation. The combination of trade impact and consumer uncertainty triggers a sharp recession, not only in the US but

also in the UK and Europe driven by a severe decline in exports, business sentiment and with investment and consumption

plans being put on hold. The rapid fall in external demand and a retrenchment in business investment push up

unemployment rates, where job losses are concentrated in trade-exposed sectors (machinery, autos, consumer durables)

but also spill into services. The Federal Reserve initially holds rates steady, weighing the inflation shock against the

deteriorating real economy. However, as the slowdown deepens and the labour market loosens, the Federal Reserve cuts

rates swiftly to stimulate aggregate demand. The Bank of England eases monetary policy amid a disinflationary

environment and looser labour markets.

In the Upside scenarios, a rise in labour force participation and higher productivity contribute to accelerated economic

growth, without creating new inflationary pressures. Central banks lower interest rates stimulating private consumption

and investment growth. Demand for labour increases and unemployment rates stabilise and start falling again. As

geopolitical tensions ease, low inflation supports consumer purchasing power and contributes further to healthy GDP

growth. The strong economic outlook and lower interest rates provide a boost to house prices growth and support bullish

financial markets.

The methodology for estimating scenario weights involves simulating a range of future paths for UK and US GDP using

historical data with the five scenarios mapped against the distribution of these future paths. The median is centred around

the Baseline with scenarios further from the Baseline attracting a lower weighting before the five weights are normalised to

total 100%. The movement in weights is driven by the combined impact of two factors: (i) improvement in GDP growth in

the Baseline scenario, bringing the Baseline scenario closer to the Upside scenarios; and (ii) model improvements, which

increase the Baseline weight and reduce the weights of the tail scenarios. For further details see page

108

.

The Barclays Bank Group has retained the £81m uncertainty adjustment introduced in Q125 across the US Consumer Bank

and Investment Bank businesses, reflecting elevated tariffs, trade tensions, and geopolitical risks, with any resulting effects

on customer behaviour yet to materialise. For further details see pages 103 to 104.

The following tables show the key macroeconomic variables used in the five scenarios (five year annual paths), the weights

applied to each scenario and the macroeconomic variables by scenario using ‘specific bases’ i.e. the most extreme position

of each variable in the context of the scenario, for example, the highest unemployment for downside scenarios and the

lowest unemployment for upside scenarios. Five year average tables and movement over time graphs provide additional

transparency. Annual paths show quarterly averages for the year (unemployment and base rate) or change in the year (GDP

and HPI).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	106

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Baseline	2025	2026	2027	2028	2029
As at 31 December 2025	%	%	%	%	%
UK GDP1	1.5	1.1	1.4	1.4	1.4
UK unemployment2	4.7	4.9	4.8	4.8	4.7
UK HPI3	1.5	2.9	2.5	4.3	3.8
UK bank rate	4.2	3.4	3.4	3.5	3.6
US GDP1	2.1	2.0	2.0	2.0	2.0
US unemployment4	4.2	4.5	4.4	4.4	4.4
US HPI5	3.2	1.7	1.9	2.6	2.6
US federal funds rate	4.2	3.4	3.3	3.3	3.5
Downside 2
UK GDP1	1.5	(2.5)	(1.2)	2.8	1.1
UK unemployment2	4.7	5.8	7.7	6.9	5.7
UK HPI3	1.5	(24.9)	(5.1)	9.6	14.2
UK bank rate	4.2	2.3	0.5	0.4	1.1
US GDP1	2.1	(2.7)	(2.8)	1.6	2.4
US unemployment4	4.2	5.7	8.0	7.9	5.9
US HPI5	3.2	(8.2)	(1.7)	7.2	7.7
US federal funds rate	4.2	3.6	2.4	1.4	1.2
Downside 1
UK GDP1	1.5	(0.7)	0.1	2.1	1.3
UK unemployment2	4.7	5.3	6.3	5.8	5.2
UK HPI3	1.5	(11.8)	(1.3)	6.9	8.9
UK bank rate	4.2	2.9	2.0	1.9	2.4
US GDP1	2.1	(0.3)	(0.4)	1.8	2.2
US unemployment4	4.2	5.1	6.2	6.1	5.1
US HPI5	3.2	(3.3)	0.1	4.9	5.1
US federal funds rate	4.2	3.6	2.8	2.4	2.4
Upside 2
UK GDP1	1.5	2.7	3.7	2.9	2.4
UK unemployment2	4.7	4.3	4.0	3.9	3.8
UK HPI3	1.5	11.9	8.4	5.1	4.1
UK bank rate	4.2	3.1	2.3	2.3	2.6
US GDP1	2.1	2.8	3.1	2.8	2.8
US unemployment4	4.2	3.9	3.7	3.7	3.7
US HPI5	3.2	6.2	4.7	4.8	4.9
US federal funds rate	4.2	3.0	2.5	2.5	2.5
Upside 1
UK GDP1	1.5	1.9	2.6	2.2	1.9
UK unemployment2	4.7	4.6	4.4	4.4	4.3
UK HPI3	1.5	7.4	5.4	4.7	3.9
UK bank rate	4.2	3.2	2.8	2.8	3.1
US GDP1	2.1	2.4	2.6	2.4	2.4
US unemployment4	4.2	4.2	4.1	4.1	4.1
US HPI5	3.2	4.0	3.3	3.7	3.7
US federal funds rate	4.2	3.3	2.8	2.8	3.0

Notes

1Average Real GDP seasonally adjusted change in year.

2Average UK unemployment rate 16-year+.

3Change in year end UK HPI = Halifax HPI Meth2 All Houses, All Buyers index.

4Average US civilian unemployment rate 16-year+.

5Change in year end US HPI = FHFA house price index, relative to prior year end.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	107

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Baseline	2024	2025	2026	2027	2028
As at 31 December 2024	%	%	%	%	%
UK GDP1	1.0	1.4	1.5	1.6	1.5
UK unemployment2	4.3	4.4	4.5	4.4	4.4
UK HPI3	2.8	3.3	1.6	4.5	3.0
UK bank rate	5.1	4.3	4.0	4.0	3.8
US GDP1	2.7	2.0	2.0	2.0	2.0
US unemployment4	4.1	4.3	4.2	4.2	4.2
US HPI5	6.5	2.6	2.7	3.0	3.0
US federal funds rate	5.1	4.1	4.0	3.8	3.8
	2024	2025	2026	2027	2028
Downside 2	%	%	%	%	%
UK GDP1	1.0	(2.3)	(1.3)	2.6	2.3
UK unemployment2	4.3	6.2	8.1	6.6	5.5
UK HPI3	2.8	(24.8)	(5.2)	10.0	14.6
UK bank rate	5.1	3.5	1.7	0.6	1.1
US GDP1	2.7	(1.3)	(1.3)	3.3	2.9
US unemployment4	4.1	5.8	7.2	6.2	5.5
US HPI5	6.5	(8.0)	(0.7)	5.2	4.0
US federal funds rate	5.1	2.5	0.6	0.8	1.5
	2024	2025	2026	2027	2028
Downside 1	%	%	%	%	%
UK GDP1	1.0	(0.5)	0.1	2.1	1.9
UK unemployment2	4.3	5.3	6.3	5.5	5.0
UK HPI3	2.8	(11.6)	(1.8)	7.2	8.7
UK bank rate	5.1	3.9	2.9	2.3	2.4
US GDP1	2.7	0.3	0.4	2.7	2.4
US unemployment4	4.1	5.1	5.7	5.2	4.9
US HPI5	6.5	(2.7)	1.0	4.1	3.5
US federal funds rate	5.1	3.4	2.3	2.3	2.7
	2024	2025	2026	2027	2028
Upside 2	%	%	%	%	%
UK GDP1	1.0	3.0	3.7	2.9	2.4
UK unemployment2	4.3	3.8	3.4	3.5	3.5
UK HPI3	2.8	11.9	8.4	5.1	4.1
UK bank rate	5.1	3.9	2.9	2.8	2.8
US GDP1	2.7	2.8	3.1	2.8	2.8
US unemployment4	4.1	3.8	3.5	3.5	3.5
US HPI5	6.5	6.2	4.7	4.8	4.9
US federal funds rate	5.1	3.7	3.3	3.1	2.8
	2024	2025	2026	2027	2028
Upside 1	%	%	%	%	%
UK GDP1	1.0	2.2	2.6	2.2	2.0
UK unemployment2	4.3	4.1	4.0	4.0	4.0
UK HPI3	2.8	7.6	4.9	4.8	3.5
UK bank rate	5.1	4.1	3.5	3.4	3.3
US GDP1	2.7	2.4	2.6	2.4	2.4
US unemployment4	4.1	4.0	3.9	3.9	3.9
US HPI5	6.5	4.4	3.7	3.9	3.9
US federal funds rate	5.1	4.0	3.8	3.6	3.3

Notes

1Average Real GDP seasonally adjusted change in year.

2Average UK unemployment rate 16-year+.

3Change in year end UK HPI = Halifax All Houses, All Buyers index, relative to prior year end.

4Average US civilian unemployment rate 16-year+.

5Change in year end US HPI = FHFA house price index, relative to prior year end.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	108

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Scenario weighting (audited)1
	Upside 2	Upside 1	Baseline	Downside 1	Downside 2
	%	%	%	%	%
As at 31 December 2025
Scenario weighting	14.4	27.4	38.5	12.7	7.0
As at 31 December 2024
Scenario weighting	17.4	26.8	32.5	14.7	8.6

Note

1For further details on changes to scenario weights see page 105.

Specific bases show the most extreme position of each variable in the context of the downside/upside scenarios, for

example, the highest unemployment for downside scenarios, average unemployment for baseline scenarios and lowest

unemployment for upside scenarios. GDP and HPI downside and upside scenario data represents the lowest and highest

points relative to the start point in the 20 quarter period.

Macroeconomic variables used in the calculation of ECL (specific bases) (audited)1
	Upside 2	Upside 1	Baseline	Downside 1	Downside 2
	%	%	%	%	%
As at 31 December 2025
UK GDP2	14.5	10.8	1.4	(0.3)	(3.5)
UK unemployment3	3.8	4.3	4.8	6.5	8.1
UK HPI4	34.6	24.9	3.0	(12.6)	(28.0)
UK bank rate3	2.3	2.8	3.6	4.6	4.6
US GDP2	14.6	12.4	2.0	(0.2)	(4.6)
US unemployment3	3.7	4.1	4.4	6.6	8.8
US HPI4	26.2	19.3	2.4	(1.5)	(8.1)
US federal funds rate3	2.5	2.8	3.5	4.3	4.3
As at 31 December 2024
UK GDP2	15.0	11.6	1.4	0.2	(2.9)
UK unemployment3	3.4	3.9	4.4	6.5	8.4
UK HPI4	36.3	25.9	3.0	(11.3)	(26.8)
UK bank rate3	2.8	3.3	4.2	5.3	5.3
US GDP2	14.9	12.8	2.2	0.4	(2.1)
US unemployment3	3.5	3.8	4.2	5.9	7.5
US HPI4	30.1	24.4	3.5	1.1	(4.0)
US federal funds rate3	2.8	3.3	4.2	5.3	5.3
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	109
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Average basis represents the average quarterly value of variables in the 20 quarter period with GDP and HPI based on yearly

average and quarterly CAGRs respectively.

Macroeconomic variables used in the calculation of ECL (5 year averages) (audited)1
	Upside 2	Upside 1	Baseline	Downside 1	Downside 2
	%	%	%	%	%
As at 31 December 2025
UK GDP5	2.7	2.0	1.4	0.9	0.3
UK unemployment6	4.1	4.5	4.8	5.5	6.2
UK HPI7	6.1	4.5	3.0	0.6	(2.0)
UK bank rate6	2.9	3.2	3.6	2.7	1.7
US GDP5	2.7	2.4	2.0	1.1	0.1
US unemployment6	3.9	4.1	4.4	5.4	6.3
US HPI7	4.8	3.6	2.4	1.9	1.5
US federal funds rate6	2.9	3.2	3.5	3.1	2.5
As at 31 December 2024
UK GDP5	2.6	2.0	1.4	0.9	0.5
UK unemployment6	3.7	4.0	4.4	5.3	6.1
UK HPI7	6.4	4.7	3.0	0.8	(1.6)
UK bank rate6	3.5	3.9	4.2	3.3	2.4
US GDP5	2.9	2.5	2.2	1.7	1.2
US unemployment6	3.7	3.9	4.2	5.0	5.8
US HPI7	5.4	4.5	3.5	2.4	1.2
US federal funds rate6	3.6	4.0	4.2	3.2	2.1

Notes

1    UK GDP = Real GDP growth seasonally adjusted; UK unemployment = UK unemployment rate 16-year+; UK HPI (31.12.24) = Halifax All Houses,

All Buyers Index; UK HPI (31.12.25) = Halifax HPI Meth2 All Houses, All Buyers index; US GDP = Real GDP growth seasonally adjusted; US

unemployment = US civilian unemployment rate 16-year+; US HPI = FHFA house price index. 20 quarter period starts from Q125 (2024: Q124).

2  Maximum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Upside scenarios; 5-year yearly average CAGR in Baseline;

minimum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Downside scenarios.

3    Lowest quarter in Upside scenarios; 5-year average in Baseline; highest quarter in Downside scenarios. Period based on 20 quarters from Q125

(2024: Q124).

4    Maximum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Upside scenarios; 5-year quarter end CAGR in Baseline;

minimum growth relative to Q424 (2024: Q423), based on 20 quarter period in Downside scenarios.

5    5-year yearly average CAGR, starting 2024 (2024: 2023).

6    5-year average. Period based on 20 quarters from Q125 (2024: Q124).

7    5-year quarter end CAGR, starting Q424 (2024: Q423).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	110

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

The graphs below plot the historical data for the quarterly, year on year GDP growth rate (Q v Q-4) and the quarterly

unemployment rate in the UK and US as well as the forecasted data under each of the five scenarios.

UK GDP (%)

US GDP (%)

UK unemployment (%)

US unemployment (%)

GDP growth based on year on year growth each quarter

(Q/(Q-4))

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	111

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

ECL sensitivity analysis (audited)

The table below shows the modelled ECL assuming each of the five modelled scenarios are 100% weighted with the

dispersion of results around the Baseline, highlighting the impact on exposure and ECL across the scenarios.

Model exposure uses exposure at default (EAD) values and is not directly comparable to gross exposure used in other

disclosures.

Barclays Bank Group (audited)
As at 31 December 2025	Upside 2	Upside 1	Baseline	Downside 1	Downside 2
Stage 1 Model exposure (m)
Retail mortgages	13	13	13	13	13
Retail credit cards2	40,997	41,089	41,197	41,419	41,583
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2	202,562	202,203	201,950	200,869	197,068
Stage 1 Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards2	420	434	450	475	500
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2	172	180	188	233	280
Stage 1 Coverage (%)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	1.0	1.1	1.1	1.1	1.2
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	0.1	0.1	0.1	0.1	0.1
Stage 2 Model exposure (m)
Retail mortgages	1	1	1	1	1
Retail credit cards2	3,392	3,455	3,504	3,634	3,837
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2	14,097	14,510	14,869	16,082	20,024
Stage 2 Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards2	809	840	868	936	1,029
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2	331	356	387	521	771
Stage 2 Coverage (%)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	23.9	24.3	24.8	25.8	26.8
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	2.3	2.5	2.6	3.2	3.9
Stage 3 Model exposure (m)3
Retail mortgages	15	15	15	15	15
Retail credit cards2	1,975	1,975	1,975	1,975	1,975
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2	35	35	35	35	35
Stage 3 Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	1	1	2	2	2
Retail credit cards2	1,455	1,479	1,503	1,534	1,563
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2,4	25	25	25	25	25
Stage 3 Coverage (%)
Retail mortgages	6.7	6.7	13.3	13.3	13.3
Retail credit cards	73.7	74.9	76.1	77.7	79.1
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans4	71.4	71.4	71.4	71.4	71.4
Total Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	1	1	2	2	2
Retail credit cards2	2,684	2,753	2,821	2,945	3,092
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans2,4	528	561	600	779	1,076
Total Model ECL	3,213	3,315	3,423	3,726	4,170

All values are in British Pounds.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	112

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Reconciliation to total ECL	£m
Total weighted model ECL	3,451
ECL from individually assessed exposures4	538
ECL from benchmarked exposures and others	63
ECL from debt securities at amortised cost	19
ECL from held for sale assets (co-branded card portfolio)	(235)
ECL from post model management adjustments	198
Of which: ECL from economic uncertainty adjustments	80
Total ECL	4,034

Notes

1.Model exposures are allocated to a stage based on an individual scenario rather than a probability-weighted approach, as required for Barclays

reported impairment allowance. As a result, it is not possible to back solve the final reported weighted ECL from individual scenarios given

balances may be assigned to a different stage dependent on the scenario.

2.Model exposure and ECL reported within Retail credit cards and Corporate loans continue to include a co-branded card portfolio in USCB,

classified as assets held for sale.

3.Model exposures allocated to Stage 3 do not change in any of the scenarios as the transition criteria relies only on observable evidence of

default as at 31 December 2025 and not on the macroeconomic scenario.

4.Material corporate loan defaults are individually assessed across different recovery strategies. As a result, ECL of £538m is reported as an

individually assessed impairment in the reconciliation table.

The use of five scenarios with associated weightings results in a total weighted ECL uplift from the Baseline ECL of 0.8%.

Retail mortgages: Total weighted ECL of £2m is aligned to the Baseline ECL (£2m).

Retail credit cards: Total weighted ECL of £2,817m is broadly aligned to the Baseline ECL (£2,821m). Total ECL increases to

£3,092m under the Downside 2 scenario, driven by an increase in US unemployment rate.

Corporate loans: Total weighted ECL of £632m represents a 5.3% increase over the Baseline ECL (£600m). Total ECL

increases to £1,076m under the Downside 2 scenario, primarily driven by a decrease in US GDP.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	113

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Barclays Bank Group (audited)
As at 31 December 2024	Upside 2	Upside 1	Baseline	Downside 1	Downside 2
Stage 1 Model exposure (m)
Retail mortgages	9	9	9	9	9
Retail credit cards	45,328	45,352	45,377	45,429	45,462
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	194,752	194,413	194,151	193,208	189,985
Stage 1 Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	410	417	423	431	438
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	206	215	226	272	318
Stage 1 Coverage (%)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	0.9	0.9	0.9	0.9	1.0
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	0.1	0.1	0.1	0.1	0.2
Stage 2 Model exposure (m)
Retail mortgages	3	3	3	3	3
Retail credit cards	4,516	4,554	4,590	4,660	4,752
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	16,740	17,134	17,508	18,576	21,956
Stage 2 Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	976	999	1,023	1,070	1,127
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	373	404	439	569	813
Stage 2 Coverage (%)
Retail mortgages	—	—	—	—	—
Retail credit cards	21.6	21.9	22.3	23.0	23.7
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	2.2	2.4	2.5	3.1	3.7
Stage 3 Model exposure (m)3
Retail mortgages	25	25	25	25	25
Retail credit cards	2,005	2,005	2,005	2,005	2,005
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans	34	34	34	34	34
Stage 3 Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	4	5	5	5	5
Retail credit cards	1,496	1,517	1,537	1,570	1,598
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans4	25	25	25	25	25
Stage 3 Coverage (%)
Retail mortgages	16.0	20.0	20.0	20.0	20.0
Retail credit cards	74.6	75.7	76.7	78.3	79.7
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans4	73.5	73.5	73.5	73.5	73.5
Total Model ECL (m)
Retail mortgages	4	5	5	5	5
Retail credit cards	2,882	2,933	2,983	3,071	3,163
Retail other	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans4	604	644	690	866	1,156
Total Model ECL	3,490	3,582	3,678	3,942	4,324

All values are in British Pounds.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	114

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Reconciliation to total ECL	£m
Total weighted model ECL	3,712
ECL from individually assessed exposures4	329
ECL from benchmarked exposures and others	103
ECL from debt securities at amortised cost	20
ECL from held for sale assets (co-branded card portfolio)	(282)
ECL from post model management adjustments5	(22)
Of which: ECL from economic uncertainty adjustments	—
Total ECL	3,860

Notes

1.Model exposure and ECL reported within Retail credit cards and Retail Other excludes the German consumer finance business, sale of

which completed after the balance sheet date. Model exposure and ECL reported within Retail credit cards and Corporate loans continue

to include a co-branded card portfolio, as the sale is expected to close in 2026.

2.Model exposures are allocated to a stage based on an individual scenario rather than a probability-weighted approach, as required for

Barclays reported impairment allowance. As a result, it is not possible to back solve the final reported weighted ECL from individual

scenarios given balances may be assigned to a different stage dependent on the scenario.

3.Model exposures allocated to Stage 3 do not change in any of the scenarios as the transition criteria relies only on observable evidence of

default as at 31 December 2024 and not on the macroeconomic scenario.

4.Material corporate loan defaults are individually assessed across different recovery strategies. As a result, ECL of £329m is reported as an

individually assessed impairment in the reconciliation table.

5.Includes negative operational management adjustments.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	115

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties are located in a common geographical region or are

engaged in similar activities and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual

obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other conditions. The Barclays Bank Group implements limits

on concentrations in order to mitigate the risk.

The following table presents an industry credit risk concentration analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost net of

impairment allowance including breakdown by geographical location of the counterparty or customers. Further includes

debt securities at amortised cost, off-balance sheet commitments and financial guarantees and contingent liabilities at

amortised cost by geography.

Further detail on the Barclays Bank Group's policies with regard to managing concentration risk is presented in the Barclays

Bank PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025 (unaudited).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	116

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk concentration by Industry and Geography (audited)

Loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment allowance
Industry	Geography
	United<br><br>Kingdom	Americas	Europe	Others	Total
Barclays Bank Group
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Agriculture, Food and Forest Products	61	—	74	—	135
Mining and Quarrying	679	357	221	8	1,265
Manufacturing	3,500	1,150	760	361	5,771
Government and central bank	156	—	118	478	752
Banks	1,151	3,435	1,719	2,731	9,036
Energy and water	2,176	1,068	294	324	3,862
Materials and Building	13,376	2,414	397	365	16,552
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure	6,085	675	251	509	7,520
Transport and storage	693	344	205	125	1,367
Home Loans	2,948	116	832	1,056	4,952
Business and other services	12,163	5,610	4,024	1,405	23,202
Other Financial Institutions	9,482	30,760	8,630	2,845	51,717
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending	1,404	20,942	1,409	900	24,655
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	53,874	66,871	18,934	11,107	150,786
Debt securities at amortised cost	18,176	18,854	17,250	873	55,153
Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt	72,050	85,725	36,184	11,980	205,939
Contingent liabilities	6,780	12,320	5,084	1,544	25,728
Loan commitments	49,003	239,882	35,550	9,661	334,096
Total off-balance sheet1	55,783	252,202	40,634	11,205	359,824
As at 31 December 2024
Agriculture, Food and Forest Products	112	—	—	—	112
Mining and Quarrying	506	709	189	—	1,404
Manufacturing	3,168	1,418	828	349	5,763
Government and central bank	220	—	2	342	564
Banks	1,212	3,573	1,286	2,707	8,778
Energy and water	2,067	401	203	287	2,958
Materials and Building	11,255	2,815	399	218	14,687
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure	5,931	831	294	616	7,672
Transport and storage	519	421	300	96	1,336
Home Loans	3,079	110	899	868	4,956
Business and other services	11,846	5,196	3,646	1,031	21,719
Other Financial Institutions	10,655	30,788	7,226	2,542	51,211
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending	1,826	20,081	993	767	23,667
Total loans and advances at amortised cost	52,396	66,343	16,265	9,823	144,827
Debt securities at amortised cost	15,822	18,062	15,123	1,220	50,227
Total loans and advances at amortised cost including debt	68,218	84,405	31,388	11,043	195,054
Contingent liabilities	6,442	10,742	5,514	2,879	25,577
Loan commitments	46,590	243,612	39,864	8,361	338,427
Total off-balance sheet1	53,032	254,354	45,378	11,240	364,004

Note

1The Off-balance sheet contingent liabilities and loan commitments excludes the fair value balance of £22,197m in 2025 (2024: £16,338m) and

includes exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	117

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Approach to management and representation of credit quality

Asset credit quality

The credit quality distribution is based on the IFRS 9 12 month probability of default (PD) at the reporting date to ensure

comparability with other ECL disclosures in Expected Credit Losses section on pages 93 to 114. The Barclays Bank Group

uses the following internal measures to determine credit quality for loans:

PD Range %	Internal<br><br>DG Band	Default Probability			Credit Quality<br><br>description	Moody’s	Standard and Poor’s
		>Min	Mid	<=Max
0.00 to < 0.15	1	0.00%	0.01%	0.02%	Strong	Aaa, Aa1, Aa2	AAA, AA+, AA, AA-
	2	0.02%	0.03%	0.03%		Aa3	AA-
	3	0.03%	0.04%	0.05%		A1, A2, A3	A+, A
	4	0.05%	0.08%	0.10%		A1, A2, A3	A-
	5	0.10%	0.13%	0.15%		Baa1	BBB+
0.15 to < 0.25	6	0.15%	0.18%	0.20%	Strong	Baa2	BBB
	7	0.20%	0.23%	0.25%		Baa2	BBB-
0.25 to < 0.50	8	0.25%	0.28%	0.30%	Strong	Baa3	BBB-
	9	0.30%	0.35%	0.40%		Baa3	BB+
	10	0.40%	0.45%	0.50%		Ba1	BB+
0.50 to < 0.75	11	0.50%	0.55%	0.60%	Strong	Ba1	BB
	12	0.60%	0.68%	0.75%	Satisfactory	Ba2	BB
0.75 to < 2.50	12	0.75%	0.98%	1.20%	Satisfactory	Ba2, Ba3	BB, BB-
	13	1.20%	1.38%	1.55%		Ba3	BB-
	14	1.55%	1.85%	2.15%		B1	B+
	15	2.15%	2.33%	2.50%		B1, B2	B+
2.50 to < 10.00	15	2.50%	2.78%	3.05%	Satisfactory	B1, B2	B+
	16	3.05%	3.75%	4.45%		B2	B
	17	4.45%	5.40%	6.35%		B3	B
	18	6.35%	7.50%	8.65%		B3, Caa1	B-
	19	8.65%	9.33%	10.00%		Caa2	B-
10.00 to < 100.00	19	10.00%	10.68%	11.35%	Satisfactory	Caa2	B-
	20	11.35%	15.00%	18.65%	Higher Risk	Caa2	CCC+
	21	18.65%	30.00%	99.99%	Higher Risk	Caa3, Ca, C	CCC, CCC- , CC, C
100.00 (Default)	22	100%	100%	100%	Credit<br><br>Impaired	D	D

For retail clients, a range of analytical tools are used to derive the probability of default of clients at inception and on an

ongoing basis. These credit quality descriptions can be summarised as follows:

Strong: there is a very high likelihood of the asset being recovered in full.

Satisfactory: while there is a high likelihood that the asset will be recovered and therefore, of no cause for concern to the

Barclays Bank Group, the asset may not be collateralised, or may relate to unsecured retail facilities. At the lower end of this

grade there are customers that are being more carefully monitored, for example, corporate customers which are indicating

some evidence of deterioration, mortgages with a high loan to value, and unsecured retail loans operating outside normal

product guidelines.

Higher risk: there is concern over the obligor’s ability to make payments when due. However, these have not yet converted

to actual delinquency. There may also be doubts over the value of collateral or security provided. However, the borrower or

counterparty is continuing to make payments when due and is expected to settle all outstanding amounts of principal and

interest. Loans that are past due are monitored closely, with impairment allowances raised as appropriate and in line with

the Barclays Bank Group’s impairment policies. These loans are all considered higher risk for the purpose of this analysis of

credit quality.

Debt securities

For assets held at fair value, the carrying value on the balance sheet will include, among other things, the credit risk of the

issuer. Most listed and some unlisted securities are rated by external rating agencies. The Barclays Bank Group mainly uses

external credit ratings provided by Standard & Poor’s, Fitch or Moody’s. Where such ratings are not available or are not

current, the Barclays Bank Group will use its own internal ratings for the securities.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	118

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Balance sheet credit quality

The following tables present the credit quality of Barclays Bank Group assets exposed to credit risk.

Overview

As at 31 December 2025, the ratio of the Barclays Bank Group’s on-balance sheet assets classified as strong (0.0 < 0.60%) at

87% (2024: 85%) of total assets exposed to credit risk.

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)
	PD Range				PD Range
Barclays Bank Group	0.0 to<br><br><0.60%	0.60 to<br><br><11.35%	11.35% to<br><br>100%	Total	0.0 to<br><br><0.60%	0.60 to<br><br><11.35%	11.35% to<br><br>100%	Total
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	%	%	%	%
Cash and balances at central banks	208,544	—	—	208,544	100	—	—	100
Cash collateral and settlement balances	111,541	12,970	8	124,519	90	10	—	100
Loans and advances at amortised cost
Retail mortgages	4,662	138	152	4,952	94	3	3	100
Retail credit cards	5,933	13,141	1,453	20,527	29	64	7	100
Retail other	3,605	424	99	4,128	88	10	2	100
Corporate loans	98,665	19,129	3,385	121,179	81	16	3	100
Total loans and advances at amortised<br><br>cost	112,865	32,832	5,089	150,786	75	22	3	100
Debt securities at amortised cost	54,760	333	60	55,153	99	1	—	100
Reverse repurchase agreements and<br><br>other similar secured lending	15,712	1,950	—	17,662	89	11	—	100
Trading portfolio assets:
Debt securities	79,405	14,144	491	94,040	84	15	1	100
Traded loans	5,339	5,241	1,669	12,249	43	43	14	100
Total trading portfolio assets	84,744	19,385	2,160	106,289	80	18	2	100
Financial assets at fair value through the<br><br>income statement:
Loans and advances	26,317	20,026	542	46,885	56	43	1	100
Debt securities	1,937	930	254	3,121	62	30	8	100
Reverse repurchase agreements	96,968	35,131	501	132,600	73	27	—	100
Other financial assets	41	19	—	60	68	32	—	100
Total financial assets at fair value<br><br>through the income statement	125,263	56,106	1,297	182,666	68	31	1	100
Derivative financial instruments	237,139	14,617	436	252,192	94	6	—	100
Financial assets at fair value through<br><br>other comprehensive income	42,756	62	—	42,818	100	—	—	100
Other assets	566	56	2	624	91	9	—	100
Assets held for sale	2,461	3,130	210	5,801	42	54	4	100
Total on-balance sheet	996,351	141,441	9,262	1,147,054	87	12	1	100
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	119
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)
	PD Range				PD Range
Barclays Bank Group	0.0 to<br><br><0.60%	0.60 to<br><br><11.35%	11.35% to<br><br>100%	Total	0.0 to<br><br><0.60%	0.60 to<br><br><11.35%	11.35% to<br><br>100%	Total
As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	%	%	%	%
Cash and balances at central banks	180,365	—	—	180,365	100	—	—	100
Cash collateral and settlement balances	98,590	15,371	26	113,987	87	13	—	100
Loans and advances at amortised cost
Retail mortgages	4,524	153	279	4,956	91	3	6	100
Retail credit cards	7,488	11,063	1,198	19,749	38	56	6	100
Retail other	3,217	503	198	3,918	82	13	5	100
Corporate loans	93,324	19,893	2,987	116,204	80	17	3	100
Total loans and advances at amortised<br><br>cost	108,553	31,612	4,662	144,827	75	22	3	100
Debt securities at amortised cost	49,888	339	—	50,227	99	1	—	100
Reverse repurchase agreements and<br><br>other similar secured lending	1,625	1,768	—	3,393	48	52	—	100
Trading portfolio assets:
Debt securities	65,785	11,478	542	77,805	84	15	1	100
Traded loans	2,543	7,442	3,485	13,470	19	55	26	100
Total trading portfolio assets	68,328	18,920	4,027	91,275	75	21	4	100
Financial assets at fair value through the<br><br>income statement:
Loans and advances	24,252	19,357	573	44,182	55	44	1	100
Debt securities	1,722	1,156	53	2,931	59	39	2	100
Reverse repurchase agreements	103,589	37,565	637	141,791	73	27	—	100
Other financial assets	63	22	—	85	74	26	—	100
Total financial assets at fair value<br><br>through the income statement	129,626	58,100	1,263	188,989	68	31	1	100
Derivative financial instruments	274,058	18,104	194	292,356	94	6	—	100
Financial assets at fair value through<br><br>other comprehensive income	50,960	50	—	51,010	100	—	—	100
Other assets	594	68	3	665	90	10	—	100
Assets held for sale	1,178	8,235	131	9,544	12	87	1	100
Total on-balance sheet	963,765	152,567	10,306	1,126,638	85	14	1	100
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	120
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit exposures by internal PD grade

The below tables represent credit risk profiles by PD grade for loans and advances at amortised cost, contingent liabilities

and loan commitments.

Stage 1 higher risk assets, presented gross of associated collateral held, are of weaker credit quality but have not

significantly deteriorated since origination.

IFRS 9 Stage 1 and Stage 2 classification is not dependent solely on the absolute probability of default but on elements that

determine a significant increase in credit risk, including relative movement in probability of default since initial recognition.

There is therefore no direct relationship between credit quality and IFRS 9 stage classification.

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail mortgages (audited)
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	7	—	—	7	—	—	—	—	7	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	4,664	—	—	4,664	9	—	—	9	4,655	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	2	1	—	3	—	—	—	—	3	—
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	1	134	—	135	—	—	—	—	135	—
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	1	—	1	—	—	—	—	1	—
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	175	175	—	—	24	24	151	13.7
Total			4,674	136	175	4,985	9	—	24	33	4,952	0.7		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail credit cards3 (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	1,216	37	—	1,253	40	23	—	63	1,190	5.0
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	580	—	—	580	1	—	—	1	579	0.2
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	1,468	—	—	1,468	3	—	—	3	1,465	0.2
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	2,710	1	—	2,711	12	—	—	12	2,699	0.4
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	6,091	42	—	6,133	74	4	—	78	6,055	1.3
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	6,414	1,099	—	7,513	231	196	—	427	7,086	5.7
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	322	1,357	—	1,679	34	573	—	607	1,072	36.2
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	1,776	1,776	—	—	1,395	1,395	381	78.5
Total			18,801	2,536	1,776	23,113	395	796	1,395	2,586	20,527	11.2		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail other (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	12	—	—	12	—	—	—	—	12	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	33	—	—	33	—	—	—	—	33	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	3,564	—	—	3,564	4	—	—	4	3,560	0.1
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	109	2	—	111	2	—	—	2	109	1.8
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	69	249	—	318	1	2	—	3	315	0.9
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	1	14	—	15	—	3	—	3	12	20.0
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	107	107	—	—	20	20	87	18.7
Total			3,788	265	107	4,160	7	5	20	32	4,128	0.8
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	121
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for corporate loans3 (audited)
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	43,832	403	—	44,235	4	5	—	9	44,226	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	23,738	40	—	23,778	6	—	—	6	23,772	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	13,854	394	—	14,248	12	4	—	16	14,232	0.1
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	15,915	551	—	16,466	27	1	—	28	16,438	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	12,160	2,725	—	14,885	47	30	—	77	14,808	0.5
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	2,020	2,411	—	4,431	40	70	—	110	4,321	2.5
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	110	1,632	—	1,742	5	125	—	130	1,612	7.5
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	2,360	2,360	—	—	590	590	1,770	25.0
Total			111,629	8,156	2,360	122,145	141	235	590	966	121,179	0.8		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loans and advances at amortised cost3 (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	45,048	440	—	45,488	44	28	—	72	45,416	0.2
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	24,330	40	—	24,370	7	—	—	7	24,363	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	15,362	394	—	15,756	15	4	—	19	15,737	0.1
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	26,853	552	—	27,405	52	1	—	53	27,352	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	18,362	2,770	—	21,132	123	34	—	157	20,975	0.7
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	8,504	3,893	—	12,397	272	268	—	540	11,857	4.4
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	433	3,004	—	3,437	39	701	—	740	2,697	21.5
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	4,418	4,418	—	—	2,029	2,029	2,389	45.9
Total			138,892	11,093	4,418	154,403	552	1,036	2,029	3,617	150,786	2.3		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail mortgages (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	4	—	—	4	—	—	—	—	4	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	2	—	—	2	—	—	—	—	2	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	4,526	—	—	4,526	8	—	—	8	4,518	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	4	1	—	5	—	—	—	—	5	—
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	1	148	—	149	—	1	—	1	148	0.7
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	1	—	1	—	—	—	—	1	—
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	310	310	—	—	32	32	278	10.3
Total			4,537	150	310	4,997	8	1	32	41	4,956	0.8
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	122
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail credit cards3 (audited)
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	1	—	—	1	—	—	—	—	1	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	565	—	—	565	1	—	—	1	564	0.2
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	2,562	2	—	2,564	7	—	—	7	2,557	0.3
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	4,384	4	—	4,388	22	—	—	22	4,366	0.5
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	2,905	117	—	3,022	37	9	—	46	2,976	1.5
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	7,018	1,578	—	8,596	242	267	—	509	8,087	5.9
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	194	1,252	—	1,446	25	531	—	556	890	38.5
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	1,724	1,724	—	—	1,416	1,416	308	82.1
Total			17,629	2,953	1,724	22,306	334	807	1,416	2,557	19,749	11.5		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for retail other (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	6	—	—	6	—	—	—	—	6	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	17	—	—	17	—	—	—	—	17	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	3,199	—	—	3,199	5	—	—	5	3,194	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	65	1	—	66	—	—	—	—	66	—
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	41	396	—	437	—	—	—	—	437	—
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	1	7	—	8	—	1	—	1	7	12.5
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	216	216	—	—	25	25	191	11.6
Total			3,329	404	216	3,949	5	1	25	31	3,918	0.8		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for corporate loans3 (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
Grade	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	43,318	122	3	43,443	4	—	2	6	43,437	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	21,947	145	—	22,092	8	—	—	8	22,084	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	11,392	566	—	11,958	8	2	—	10	11,948	0.1
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	15,549	326	—	15,875	18	2	—	20	15,855	0.1
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	12,017	2,988	—	15,005	49	20	—	69	14,936	0.5
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	2,854	2,243	—	5,097	50	90	—	140	4,957	2.7
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	117	1,757	—	1,874	7	140	—	147	1,727	7.8
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	1,651	1,651	—	—	391	391	1,260	23.7
Total			107,194	8,147	1,654	116,995	144	254	393	791	116,204	0.7
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	123
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loans and advances at amortised cost3 (audited)
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
Grade	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	43,319	122	3	43,444	4	—	2	6	43,438	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	22,522	145	—	22,667	9	—	—	9	22,658	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	13,973	568	—	14,541	15	2	—	17	14,524	0.1
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	27,658	330	—	27,988	53	2	—	55	27,933	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	14,991	3,107	—	18,098	86	29	—	115	17,983	0.6
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	9,914	4,365	—	14,279	292	358	—	650	13,629	4.6
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	312	3,017	—	3,329	32	672	—	704	2,625	21.1
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	3,901	3,901	—	—	1,864	1,864	2,037	47.8
Total			132,689	11,654	3,904	148,247	491	1,063	1,866	3,420	144,827	2.3		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for contingent liabilities1 (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
Grade	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	10,096	—	—	10,096	1	—	—	1	10,095	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	3,920	178	—	4,098	2	—	—	2	4,096	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	3,645	5	—	3,650	2	—	—	2	3,648	0.1
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	2,025	92	—	2,117	3	—	—	3	2,114	0.1
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	2,773	230	—	3,003	12	3	—	15	2,988	0.5
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	1,163	690	—	1,853	15	16	—	31	1,822	1.7
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	85	710	—	795	1	83	—	84	711	10.6
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	116	116	—	—	23	23	93	19.8
Total			23,707	1,905	116	25,728	36	102	23	161	25,567	0.6		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for contingent liabilities1 (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	9,351	310	—	9,661	1	1	—	2	9,659	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	4,934	—	—	4,934	2	—	—	2	4,932	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	2,717	391	—	3,108	2	—	—	2	3,106	0.1
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	2,177	119	—	2,296	4	—	—	4	2,292	0.2
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	2,309	563	—	2,872	12	7	—	19	2,853	0.7
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	730	937	—	1,667	21	36	—	57	1,610	3.4
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	29	515	—	544	—	82	—	82	462	15.1
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	495	495	—	—	16	16	479	3.2
Total			22,247	2,835	495	25,577	42	126	16	184	25,393	0.7
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	124
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loan commitments1,2 (audited)
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to < 0.05%	Strong	90,723	204	—	90,927	4	—	—	4	90,923	—
4-5	0.05 to < 0.15%	Strong	75,414	776	—	76,190	6	—	—	6	76,184	—
6-8	0.15 to < 0.30%	Strong	50,189	656	—	50,845	6	—	—	6	50,839	—
9-11	0.30 to < 0.60%	Strong	49,560	494	—	50,054	7	—	—	7	50,047	—
12-14	0.60 to < 2.15%	Satisfactory	41,798	2,402	—	44,200	34	27	—	61	44,139	0.1
15-19	2.15 to < 11.35%	Satisfactory	12,874	4,418	—	17,292	35	40	—	75	17,217	0.4
20-21	11.35 to < 100%	Higher Risk	560	3,463	—	4,023	3	65	—	68	3,955	1.7
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	565	565	—	—	10	10	555	1.8
Total			321,118	12,413	565	334,096	95	132	10	237	333,859	0.1		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade for loan commitments1,2 (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to < 0.05%	Strong	86,137	320	—	86,457	3	—	—	3	86,454	—
4-5	0.05 to < 0.15%	Strong	68,407	93	—	68,500	8	—	—	8	68,492	—
6-8	0.15 to < 0.30%	Strong	56,893	951	—	57,844	12	1	—	13	57,831	—
9-11	0.30 to < 0.60%	Strong	54,576	736	—	55,312	19	1	—	20	55,292	—
12-14	0.60 to < 2.15%	Satisfactory	45,417	2,710	—	48,127	31	11	—	42	48,085	0.1
15-19	2.15 to < 11.35%	Satisfactory	11,878	5,779	—	17,657	39	45	—	84	17,573	0.5
20-21	11.35 to < 100%	Higher Risk	643	3,406	—	4,049	1	56	—	57	3,992	1.4
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	481	481	—	—	9	9	472	1.9
Total			323,951	13,995	481	338,427	113	114	9	236	338,191	0.1

Notes

1Excludes loan commitments and financial guarantees carried at fair value of £22.2bn (2024: £16.3bn) for Barclays Bank Group.

2Reported loan commitments also include exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale.

3Exposures reported within Retail credit card and Corporate loans does not include a co-branded card portfolio which is classified as assets held

for sale.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	125

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

Retail Credit Cards and Retail Other

The principal portfolios listed below accounted for 85% (2024: 85%) of Barclays Bank Group’s total retail credit cards and

retail other.

Principal portfolios
	Gross Exposure	30 Day Arrears,<br><br>excluding<br><br>recoveries book	90 Day Arrears,<br><br>excluding<br><br>recoveries book	Annualised<br><br>Gross Write-off<br><br>Rates	Annualised Net<br><br>Write-off Rates
	£m	%	%	%	%
As at 31 December 2025
US cards1	29,100	3.0	1.6	3.4	3.2
As at 31 December 2024
US cards1	28,548	3.0	1.6	3.8	3.7

Note

1  Includes a co-branded card portfolio in USCB, classified as held for sale (see table below).

Portfolios - held for sale
	Gross Exposure	30 Day Arrears,<br><br>excluding<br><br>recoveries book	90 Day Arrears,<br><br>excluding<br><br>recoveries book	Annualised<br><br>Gross Write-off<br><br>Rates	Annualised Net<br><br>Write-off Rates
	£m	%	%	%	%
As at 31 December 2025
Barclays US Consumer Bank	5,988	1.8	0.9	2.1	1.9
As at 31 December 2024
Barclays US Consumer Bank	6,241	1.3	0.5	2.0	2.0
Head Office - German consumer finance business	3,733	1.8	0.9	1.3	1.2

US cards: 30 day and 90 day arrears rates remained flat at 3.0% (2024: 3.0%) and 1.6% (2024: 1.6%) respectively. Gross

and net write off rates reduced to  3.4% (2024: 3.8%) and 3.2% (2024: 3.7%) respectively reflecting lower default volumes

and stable recovery performance.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	126

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Assets held for sale

This section presents a co-branded card portfolio in USCB classified as assets held for sale. Further, the sale of the German

consumer finance business was completed in Q125.

For further details on assets held for sale, see Note 39 to the financial statements.

Loans and advances by product

Loans and advances to customers classified as assets held for sale (audited)
	Stage 1			Stage 2			Stage 3			Total
	Gross	ECL	Coverage	Gross	ECL	Coverage	Gross	ECL	Coverage	Gross	ECL	Coverage
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	%	£m	£m	%	£m	£m	%	£m	£m	%
Retail credit cards - US	5,468	65	1.2	466	124	26.6	54	44	81.5	5,988	233	3.9
Retail credit cards -<br><br>Germany	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Retail other - Germany	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans - US	43	1	2.3	6	2	33.3	—	—	—	49	3	6.1
Total	5,511	66	1.2	472	126	26.7	54	44	81.5	6,037	236	3.9
As at 31 December 2024
Retail credit cards - US	5,495	64	1.2	689	161	23.4	57	46	80.7	6,241	271	4.3
Retail credit cards -<br><br>Germany	1,908	18	0.9	307	29	9.4	93	69	74.2	2,308	116	5.0
Retail other - Germany	1,134	16	1.4	220	33	15.0	71	48	67.6	1,425	97	6.8
Corporate loans - US	49	1	2.0	9	3	33.3	1	1	100.0	59	5	8.5
Total	8,586	99	1.2	1,225	226	18.4	222	164	73.9	10,033	489	4.9

Stage 2 decomposition

Loans and advances at amortised cost classified as held for sale
	Gross Exposure				Impairment Allowance
Barclays Bank Group	Quantitative<br><br>test	Qualitative<br><br>test	30 days past<br><br>due<br><br>backstop	Total<br><br>Stage 2	Quantitative<br><br>test	Qualitative<br><br>test	30 days past<br><br>due<br><br>backstop	Total<br><br>Stage 2
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Retail credit cards - US	365	100	1	466	98	25	1	124
Retail credit cards -<br><br>Germany	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Retail other - Germany	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans - US	6	—	—	6	2	—	—	2
Total Stage 2	371	100	1	472	100	25	1	126		As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
Retail credit cards - US	564	123	2	689	130	30	1	161
Retail credit cards -<br><br>Germany	209	96	2	307	19	9	1	29
Retail other - Germany	207	11	2	220	31	1	1	33
Corporate loans - US	7	2	—	9	2	1	—	3
Total Stage 2	987	232	6	1,225	182	41	3	226
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	127
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Management adjustments to models for impairment (audited)

Management adjustments to models for impairment allowance presented by product (audited)
Barclays Bank Group	Impairment<br><br>allowance pre<br><br>management<br><br>adjustments	Economic<br><br>uncertainty<br><br>adjustments1<br><br>(a)	Other<br><br>adjustments<br><br>(b)	Management<br><br>adjustments<br><br>(a+b)	Total<br><br>impairment<br><br>allowance	Proportion of<br><br>Management<br><br>adjustments to<br><br>total<br><br>impairment<br><br>allowance
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Retail credit cards - US	232	5	—	5	237	2.1
Retail credit cards - Germany	—	—	—	—	—	—
Retail other - Germany	—	—	—	—	—	—
Corporate loans - US	3	—	—	—	3	—
Total	235	5	—	5	240	2.1
As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Retail credit cards - US	277	—	—	—	277	—
Retail credit cards - Germany	101	—	16	16	117	13.7
Retail other - Germany	80	—	17	17	97	17.5
Corporate loans - US	5	—	—	—	5	—
Total	463	—	33	33	496	6.7

Note

1 Reflects a Stage 2 adjustment for elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty; with impacts yet to materialise in consumer behaviour.

Credit exposures by internal PD grade

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - US (audited)
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	165	—	—	165	—	—	—	—	165	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	953	—	—	953	3	—	—	3	950	0.3
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	1,351	1	—	1,352	6	—	—	6	1,346	0.4
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	1,795	5	—	1,800	18	—	—	18	1,782	1.0
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	1,149	226	—	1,375	34	35	—	69	1,306	5.0
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	55	234	—	289	4	89	—	93	196	32.2
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	54	54	—	—	44	44	10	81.5
Total			5,468	466	54	5,988	65	124	44	233	5,755	3.9		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - Germany (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Total			—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	128
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail other - Germany (audited)
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Total			—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Corporate loans - US (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2025			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	2	—	—	2	—	—	—	—	2	—
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	41	—	—	41	1	—	—	1	40	2.4
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	6	—	6	—	2	—	2	4	33.3
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Total			43	6	—	49	1	2	—	3	46	6.1		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - US (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	5,495	—	—	5,495	64	—	—	64	5,431	1.2
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	—	689	—	689	—	161	—	161	528	23.4
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	57	57	—	—	46	46	11	80.7
Total			5,495	689	57	6,241	64	161	46	271	5,970	4.3
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	129
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail credit cards - Germany (audited)
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	62	—	—	62	—	—	—	—	62	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	289	—	—	289	1	—	—	1	288	0.3
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	152	—	—	152	1	—	—	1	151	0.7
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	250	—	—	250	1	—	—	1	249	0.4
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	928	5	—	933	9	—	—	9	924	1.0
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	227	229	—	456	6	15	—	21	435	4.6
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	73	—	73	—	14	—	14	59	19.2
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	93	93	—	—	69	69	24	74.2
Total			1,908	307	93	2,308	18	29	69	116	2,192	5.0		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Retail other - Germany (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	1	—	—	1	—	—	—	—	1	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	25	—	—	25	—	—	—	—	25	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	110	—	—	110	—	—	—	—	110	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	294	—	—	294	1	—	—	1	293	0.3
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	534	17	—	551	6	4	—	10	541	1.8
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	170	182	—	352	9	22	—	31	321	8.8
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	21	—	21	—	7	—	7	14	33.3
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	71	71	—	—	48	48	23	67.6
Total			1,134	220	71	1,425	16	33	48	97	1,328	6.8		Credit risk profile by internal PD grade classified as assets held for sale for Corporate loans - US (audited)
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
As at 31 December 2024			Gross carrying amount				Allowance for ECL				Net<br><br>exposure	Coverage<br><br>ratio
	PD range	Credit quality<br><br>description	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total	Stage 1	Stage 2	Stage 3	Total
Grade	%		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	%
Barclays Bank Group
1-3	0.0 to <0.05%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
4-5	0.05 to <0.15%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
6-8	0.15 to <0.30%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
9-11	0.30 to <0.60%	Strong	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
12-14	0.60 to <2.15%	Satisfactory	49	—	—	49	1	—	—	1	48	2.0
15-19	2.15 to <11.35%	Satisfactory	—	9	—	9	—	3	—	3	6	33.3
20-21	11.35 to <100%	Higher Risk	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
22	100%	Credit Impaired	—	—	1	1	—	—	1	1	—	100.0
Total			49	9	1	59	1	3	1	5	54	8.5
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	130
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Summary of Contents		Page
Outlines key measures used to summarise the market risk profile of<br><br>the Barclays Bank Group such as VaR.	▪Market risk overview	131
	▪Measures of market risk in the Barclays Bank Group and<br><br>accounting measures	131
	▪Summary of performance in the period	131
The Barclays Bank Group discloses details on management<br><br>measures of market risk. Total management VaR includes all trading<br><br>positions and is presented on a diversified basis by risk factor.	▪Traded market risk review	131
	▪Review of management measures	131
	▪The daily average, maximum and minimum values of<br><br>management VaR	131
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	131
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

All disclosures in this section, pages 131 to 132 are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

This section contains key statistics describing the market risk profile of the Barclays Bank Group:

•The market risk management section on page 76 provides a description of management VaR. Management measures are

shown below.

Measures of market risk in the Barclays Bank Group and accounting measures

Traded market risk measures such as VaR and balance sheet exposure measures have fundamental differences:

•Balance sheet measures show accruals-based balances or marked to market values as at the reporting date

•VaR measures also take account of current marked to market values but, in addition, hedging effects between positions

are considered

•Market risk measures are expressed in terms of changes in value or volatilities as opposed to static values.

For these reasons, it is not possible to present direct reconciliations of traded market risk and accounting measures.

Summary of performance in the period

Average Management VaR decreased 31% to £18m (2024: £26m). The decrease is mainly due to a combination of a

reduction in the size of the funded, fair value leverage loan exposure in 2025 as well as an overall prudent risk positioning.

Traded market risk review

Review of management measures

The following disclosures provide details of management measures of market risk.

The table below shows the total management VaR on a diversified basis by risk factor. Total management VaR includes all

trading positions in IB and the supporting Barclays Bank Group Treasury desks, measured to a confidence level of 95%.

Limits are applied against each risk factor VaR as well as total management VaR, which are then cascaded further by risk

managers to each business.

The daily average, high and low values of management VaR

Management VaR (95%, one day) (audited)
	2025			2024
For the year ended 31 December<br><br>2025	Average	High	Low	Average	High	Low
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Credit risk	15	21	11	21	27	17
Interest rate risk	15	25	5	15	25	6
Equity risk	7	14	4	6	12	2
Basis risk	6	9	4	5	8	4
Spread risk	5	7	3	5	7	3
Foreign exchange risk	4	7	2	4	9	2
Commodity risk	—	1	—	—	1	—
Inflation risk	5	8	3	4	5	2
Diversification effect1	(39)	n/a	n/a	(34)	n/a	n/a
Total management VaR	18	31	9	26	36	15

Note

1Diversification effects recognise that forecast losses from different assets or businesses are unlikely to occur concurrently, hence the expected

aggregate loss is lower than the sum of the expected losses from each area. Historical correlations between losses are taken into account in

making these assessments. The high and low VaR figures reported for each category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the high and

low VaR reported as a whole. Consequently, a diversification effect balance for the high and low VaR figures would not be meaningful and is

therefore omitted from the above table.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	132

Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Barclays Bank Group Management VaR (£m)

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	133

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Summary of Contents		Page
Liquidity risk performance
The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or<br><br>contingent obligations or that it does not have the<br><br>appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and<br><br>liquidity to support its assets.<br><br>This section provides an overview of the Barclays Bank<br><br>Group’s liquidity risk.	•Liquidity risk overview	134
	•Liquidity regulation	134
	•Liquidity risk stress testing	134
	•Net stable funding ratio (NSFR)	135
Provides details on the contractual maturity of all financial<br><br>instruments and other assets and liabilities.	•Contractual maturity of financial assets and<br><br>liabilities	136
Capital risk performance
Capital risk is the risk that the firm has an insufficient level<br><br>or composition of capital to support its normal business<br><br>activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements<br><br>under normal operating environments or stressed<br><br>conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning<br><br>or regulatory testing purposes). This also includes the risk<br><br>from the firm’s pension plans.<br><br>This section details Barclays Bank Group’s capital and<br><br>leverage position.	•Capital risk overview	141
	•Capital ratios	141
	•Capital resources	141
	•Leverage ratio	141
Barclays Bank Group discloses the two sources of<br><br>foreign exchange risk that it is exposed to.	•Foreign Exchange Risk	142
	•Transactional foreign currency exposure	142
	•Translational foreign exchange exposure	142
	•Functional currency of operations	142
A review focusing on the UK retirement fund, which<br><br>represents the majority of Barclays Bank Group’s total<br><br>retirement benefit obligation.	•Pension risk review	143
	•Assets	143
	•Liabilities	143
	•Proportion of liquidity cash flows	143
	•IAS 19 position	143
	•Risk measurement	144
Interest rate risk in the banking book performance
A description of the non-traded market risk framework is<br><br>provided.<br><br>Barclays Bank Group discloses a sensitivity analysis on pre-<br><br>tax net interest income for non-trading financial assets and<br><br>liabilities. The analysis is carried out by currency.<br><br>Barclays Bank Group discloses the overall impact of a<br><br>parallel shift in interest rates on other comprehensive<br><br>income and cash flow hedges.<br><br>Barclays Bank Group measures the volatility of the value of<br><br>the FVOCI instruments in the liquidity pool through non-<br><br>traded market risk VaR.	•Interest rate risk in the banking book overview and<br><br>summary of performance	145
	•Net interest income sensitivity	145
	•Analysis of equity sensitivity	145
	•Volatility of the FVOCI portfolio in the liquidity	146
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	134
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Liquidity risk

All disclosures in this section, pages 134 to 135, are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Barclays Bank Group in order to retain the confidence of markets

and maintain the sustainability of the business. The liquidity risk framework is used to manage all liquidity risk exposures

under both business-as-usual and stressed conditions. The framework is designed to maintain liquidity resources that are

sufficient in amount, quality and funding tenor profile to support the risk appetite as expressed by the Barclays Bank PLC

Board. The risk appetite liquidity constraint is monitored against both internal and regulatory liquidity metrics.

For the purpose of liquidity management, Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiary Barclays Capital Securities Limited, a UK

broker dealer entity, are monitored on a combined basis by the PRA under a Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group (Barclays Bank

PLC DoLSub) arrangement.

Liquidity regulation

The bank monitors its position against both the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) and Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)

according to the PRA regulatory requirements which include certain Basel III standards that were retained in the UK

regulatory framework from 1 January 2022 as part of the UK's withdrawal from the EU. The LCR requirement takes into

account the relative stability of different sources of funding and potential incremental funding requirements in a stress. The

LCR is designed to promote short-term resilience of a bank’s liquidity risk profile by holding sufficient High Quality Liquid

Assets (HQLA) to survive an acute stress scenario lasting for 30 days. The NSFR has been developed to promote a

sustainable and stable structure of assets and liabilities.

Liquidity risk stress testing

The Internal Liquidity Stress Test (ILST) measures the potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of

internally defined stress scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately

available to meet anticipated outflows if a stress occurs. The scenarios include a 30 day Barclays-specific stress event, a 90

day market-wide stress event, a 30 day combined scenario consisting of both a Barclays specific and a market-wide stress

event, and a 12 month market-wide stress scenario.

As at 31 December 2025, Barclays Bank PLC DoLSub held eligible liquid assets well above 100% of net stressed outflows as

measured according to its internal and regulatory requirements (ILST and LCR, respectively). The split of the liquidity pool

between cash and deposits with central banks, government bonds and other eligible securities is broadly similar to the

Barclays Group.

The Liquidity Pool increased to £229.9bn (December 2024: £179.3bn), primarily driven by deposit growth across the

businesses and wholesale funding. The Barclays Bank PLC Domestic Liquidity Subgroup (‘DoLSub’) liquidity coverage ratio

(LCR) remained well above the 100% regulatory requirement at 149.7% (December 2024: 147.9%).

Barclays Bank PLC prospectively implemented a new methodology for calculating net stress outflows related to secured

financing transactions in the LCR. This change materialised from June 2025, with the Barclays Bank PLC headline ratio

expected to contract over time from recent elevated levels whilst remaining broadly within ranges reported over recent

years. The revised methodology models a more asymmetric unwind of client activity, resulting in a higher net outflow

calculation. Prior period comparators have been re-presented to reflect a separate change to the calculation of outflows

from certain secured financing transactions that was adopted from Q1 2025. Barclays Bank PLC has always maintained, and

intends to continue to maintain, a significant liquidity buffer which allows for this impact to be readily absorbed within its

liquidity surplus.

	2025	2024
As at 31 December	£bn	£bn
Barclays Bank PLC DoLSub Liquidity Pool	229.9	179.3
	%	%
Barclays Bank PLC DoLSub Liquidity Coverage Ratio1,2	149.7	147.9

Note

1.Represents the average of the last 12 spot month end ratios.

2.Prior period comparators have been re-presented to reflect a change to the calculation of outflows from certain secured financing transactions

that was adopted from Q1 2025.

The Barclays Bank Group has direct access to US, European and Asian capital markets through its global investment banking

operations and to long-term investors through its clients worldwide. Key sources of wholesale funding include money

markets, certificates of deposit, commercial paper, medium term issuances (including structured notes) and securitisations.

This funding capacity enables the Barclays Bank Group to maintain a stable and diversified funding base.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	135

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

The Barclays Bank PLC also supports various central bank monetary initiatives, such as the Bank of England’s Term Funding

Scheme with additional incentives for SMEs (TFSME), and the European Central Bank’s Targeted Long-Term Refinancing

Operations (TLTRO). These are reported under ‘repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing’ on the balance

sheet. Barclays Bank PLC fully repaid its entire outstanding TFSME balance of £3.35bn.

Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)

The external NSFR metric requires banks to maintain a stable funding profile taking into account both on and certain off

balance sheet exposures over a medium to long term period. The ratio is defined as the Available Stable Funding (capital and

certain liabilities which are defined as stable sources of funding) relative to the Required Stable Funding (a measure of assets

on balance sheet and certain off balance sheet exposures which may require longer term funding). The NSFR (average of

last four quarter end ratios) was 113% at December 2025, equivalent to a surplus of £44bn above the regulatory

requirement and demonstrates Barclays Bank PLC’s stable balance sheet funding profile.

	2025	2024
Net Stable Funding Ratio1	£bn	£bn
Total Available Stable Funding	381	372
Total Required Stable Funding	337	333
Surplus	44	39
Net Stable Funding Ratio	113%	112%

Note

1Represents an average of the last four spot quarter end ratios.

To define the risk appetite liquidity constraint, Barclays Bank PLC DoLSub establishes minimum LCR, NSFR and ILST limits.

Risks to market funding conditions, the Barclays Bank Group’s liquidity position and funding profile are assessed continually,

and actions are taken to manage the size of the liquidity pool and the funding profile as appropriate.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	136

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

The table below provides detail on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities.

Derivatives (other than those designated in a hedging relationship) and trading portfolio assets and liabilities are included in

the ‘not more than one month’ column at their fair value. Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of

contractual maturity since these items are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled

before contractual maturity at fair value. Derivatives designated in a hedging relationship are included according to their

contractual maturity.

Open-dated financial assets and liabilities are included within 'not more than one month' due to the availability of

withdrawals or redemptions at any time, without notice.

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)
Barclays Bank Group	Not more<br><br>than one<br><br>month	Over one<br><br>month but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>months	Over three<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>six<br><br>months	Over six<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>one year	Over one<br><br>year but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>years	Over three<br><br>years but<br><br>not more<br><br>than five<br><br>years	Over five<br><br>years	Total
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks	208,544	—	—	—	—	—	—	208,544
Cash collateral and settlement balances	81,419	43,100	—	—	—	—	—	124,519
Debt Securities at amortised cost	390	5,136	1,776	2,845	15,124	13,303	16,579	55,153
Loans and advances at amortised cost to<br><br>banks and customers	21,922	5,264	6,166	17,893	47,981	26,901	24,659	150,786
Reverse repurchase agreements and other<br><br>similar secured lending	10,866	338	520	406	1,971	2,816	745	17,662
Trading portfolio assets	189,743	—	—	—	—	—	—	189,743
Financial assets at fair value through the<br><br>income statement	145,326	13,635	4,503	4,130	10,756	3,639	3,013	185,002
Derivative financial instruments	250,286	144	201	227	959	302	73	252,192
Financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income	1,357	1,303	133	277	3,527	11,748	24,473	42,818
Assets included in disposal groups classified<br><br>as held for sale	—	—	5,932	—	—	—	—	5,932
Other financial assets	379	41	198	1	5	—	—	624
Total financial assets	910,232	68,961	19,429	25,779	80,323	58,709	69,542	1,232,975
Other assets								12,498
Total assets								1,245,473
Liabilities
Deposits at amortised cost from bank and<br><br>customers	255,232	35,395	31,417	18,639	3,204	543	321	344,751
Cash collateral and settlement balances	84,062	32,749	—	—	—	—	—	116,811
Repurchase agreements and other similar<br><br>secured borrowing	8,790	4,507	321	626	4,407	—	—	18,651
Debt securities in issue	2,387	10,732	22,206	13,052	2,063	2,263	4,526	57,229
Subordinated liabilities	1,356	—	1,015	400	12,266	8,265	21,937	45,239
Trading portfolio liabilities	56,829	—	—	—	—	—	—	56,829
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	161,887	30,221	16,489	14,172	31,398	19,691	19,669	293,527
Derivative financial instruments	240,179	22	53	13	206	83	201	240,757
Liabilities included in disposal groups<br><br>classified as held for sale	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Other financial liabilities	4,283	3	9	19	76	55	453	4,898
Total financial liabilities	815,005	113,629	71,510	46,921	53,620	30,900	47,107	1,178,692
Other liabilities								4,468
Total liabilities								1,183,160
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	137
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)
Barclays Bank Group	Not more<br><br>than one<br><br>month	Over one<br><br>month but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>months	Over three<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>six<br><br>months	Over six<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>one year	Over one<br><br>year but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>years	Over three<br><br>years but<br><br>not more<br><br>than five<br><br>years	Over five<br><br>years	Total
As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks	180,365	—	—	—	—	—	—	180,365
Cash collateral and settlement balances	76,805	37,182	—	—	—	—	—	113,987
Debt securities at amortised cost	233	352	1,710	1,194	15,393	11,921	19,424	50,227
Loans and advances at amortised cost to<br><br>banks and customers	22,523	5,207	7,067	16,544	45,701	22,641	25,144	144,827
Reverse repurchase agreements and other<br><br>similar secured lending	299	37	292	110	1,675	980	—	3,393
Trading portfolio assets	166,244	—	—	—	—	—	—	166,244
Financial assets at fair value through the<br><br>income statement	152,022	11,628	4,467	4,471	10,082	6,099	3,076	191,845
Derivative financial instruments	291,580	19	333	—	268	23	133	292,356
Financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income	1,421	1,002	110	233	5,747	12,147	30,350	51,010
Assets included in disposal groups classified<br><br>as held for sale	—	3,710	—	—	6,144	—	—	9,854
Other financial assets	499	22	126	17	1	—	—	665
Total financial assets	891,991	59,159	14,105	22,569	85,011	53,811	78,127	1,204,773
Other assets								13,751
Total assets								1,218,524
Liabilities
Deposits at amortised cost from banks and<br><br>customers	240,546	33,576	27,124	12,752	3,481	1,296	601	319,376
Cash collateral and settlement balances	75,019	29,608	—	—	—	—	—	104,627
Repurchase agreements and other similar<br><br>secured borrowing	18,522	1,823	84	3,931	3,702	1,335	—	29,397
Debt securities in issue	2,912	15,264	5,859	3,469	713	2,164	5,422	35,803
Subordinated liabilities	—	818	75	80	11,431	6,444	23,027	41,875
Trading portfolio liabilities	56,182	—	—	—	—	—	—	56,182
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	156,917	23,502	16,742	15,331	28,332	19,087	19,866	279,777
Derivative financial instruments	278,657	27	18	—	185	255	189	279,331
Liabilities included in disposal groups<br><br>classified as held for sale	—	3,726	—	—	—	—	—	3,726
Other financial liabilities	4,333	4	9	19	71	40	392	4,868
Total financial liabilities	833,088	108,348	49,911	35,582	47,915	30,621	49,497	1,154,962
Other liabilities								4,342
Total liabilities								1,159,304
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	138
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Expected maturity date may differ from the contractual date, to account for:

▪Trading portfolio assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments which may not be held to maturity as part of

the Barclays Bank Group’s trading strategies.

▪Corporate and retail deposits, reported under deposits at amortised cost, are repayable on demand or at short notice on a

contractual basis. In practice, their behavioural maturity is typically longer than their contractual maturity, and therefore

provide stable funding for the Barclays Bank Group’s operations and liquidity needs.

▪Loans to corporate and retail customers, which are included within loans and advances at amortised cost and financial

assets at fair value, may be repaid earlier in line with terms and conditions of the contract.

▪Debt securities in issue, subordinated liabilities, and financial liabilities designated at fair value may include early

redemption features.

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis

The following table presents the cash flows payable by the Barclays Bank Group under financial liabilities by remaining

contractual maturities at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash

flows of all financial liabilities (i.e. nominal values).

The balances in the below table do not agree directly to the balances in the consolidated balance sheet as the table

incorporates all cash flows, on an undiscounted basis, related to both principal as well as those associated with all future

coupon payments.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	139

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Derivative financial instruments held for trading and trading portfolio liabilities are included in the 'not more than one month'

column at their fair value. Open-dated financial liabilities are also included within 'not more than one month'.

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities - undiscounted (audited)
	Not  more<br><br>than one<br><br>month	Over one<br><br>month but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>months	Over three<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>six<br><br>months	Over six<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>one year	Over one<br><br>year but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>years	Over three<br><br>years but<br><br>not more<br><br>than five<br><br>years	Over five<br><br>years	Total
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Deposits at amortised cost from banks and<br><br>customers	255,034	35,765	31,757	19,049	3,422	614	579	346,220
Cash collateral and settlement balances	84,076	32,910	—	—	—	—	295	117,281
Repurchase agreements and other similar<br><br>secured borrowing	8,801	4,520	322	637	4,562	—	—	18,842
Debt securities in issue	2,393	10,789	22,489	13,366	2,243	2,573	7,618	61,471
Subordinated liabilities	1,358	—	1,025	418	12,727	9,210	33,626	58,364
Trading portfolio liabilities	56,829	—	—	—	—	—	—	56,829
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	161,975	30,387	16,677	14,449	32,838	21,670	32,683	310,679
Derivative financial instruments	240,179	23	54	13	223	94	398	240,984
Liabilities included in disposal groups<br><br>classified as held for sale	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Other financial liabilities	4,284	8	16	35	134	108	3,513	8,098
Total financial liabilities	814,929	114,402	72,340	47,967	56,149	34,269	78,712	1,218,768
As at 31 December 2024
Deposits at amortised cost from banks and<br><br>customers	240,695	33,769	27,410	13,059	3,687	1,531	762	320,913
Cash collateral and settlement balances	75,021	29,780	—	—	—	—	—	104,801
Repurchase agreements and other similar<br><br>secured borrowing	18,542	1,832	84	4,065	3,892	1,508	—	29,923
Debt securities in issue	2,920	15,360	5,930	3,579	745	2,558	8,714	39,806
Subordinated liabilities	—	824	75	80	11,955	7,036	34,922	54,892
Trading portfolio liabilities	56,182	—	—	—	—	—	—	56,182
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	157,090	23,676	16,971	15,713	30,014	21,471	34,087	299,022
Derivative financial instruments	278,662	27	18	—	197	298	402	279,604
Liabilities included in disposal groups<br><br>classified as held for sale	—	3,726	—	—	—	—	—	3,726
Other financial liabilities	4,335	10	18	35	127	86	3,680	8,291
Total financial liabilities	833,447	109,004	50,506	36,531	50,617	34,488	82,567	1,197,160
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	140
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Maturity of off-balance sheet commitments given

The table below presents the maturity split of the Barclays Bank Group’s off-balance sheet commitments given at the

balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the undiscounted cash flows (i.e. nominal values) on the basis of

earliest opportunity at which they are available.

Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments given (audited)
	Not more<br><br>than one<br><br>month	Over one<br><br>month but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>months	Over three<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>six months	Over six<br><br>months<br><br>but not<br><br>more than<br><br>one year	Over one<br><br>year but<br><br>not more<br><br>than three<br><br>years	Over three<br><br>years but<br><br>not more<br><br>than five<br><br>years	Over five<br><br>years	Total
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Contingent liabilities and financial<br><br>guarantees	26,631	—	1	1	—	—	—	26,633
Documentary credits and other short-term<br><br>trade related transactions	1,103	—	—	—	—	—	—	1,103
Standby facilities, credit lines and other<br><br>commitments1	354,202	—	—	—	63	17	3	354,285
Total off-balance sheet commitments<br><br>given	381,936	—	1	1	63	17	3	382,021
As at 31 December 2024
Contingent liabilities and financial<br><br>guarantees	26,541	22	1	1	—	—	—	26,565
Documentary credits and other short-term<br><br>trade related transactions	1,432	1	—	—	—	—	—	1,433
Standby facilities, credit lines and other<br><br>commitments1	352,276	—	—	—	68	—	—	352,344
Total off-balance sheet commitments<br><br>given	380,249	23	1	1	68	—	—	380,342

Note

1. Includes exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	141

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Capital risk

All disclosures in this section, page 141 are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Barclays Bank PLC capital requirements are set by the PRA at a solo-consolidated level. Barclays Bank PLC solo-consolidated

comprises Barclays Bank PLC plus certain additional subsidiaries, whose inclusion within the consolidation is subject to PRA

approval.

Further information on the risk profile will be included in the Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Pillar 3 Report which is available at

home.barclays/investor-relations/reports-and-events/annual-reports.

As at 31 December 2025 Barclays Bank PLC solo-consolidated CET1 ratio was 12.7% which is above its minimum regulatory

requirement of 10.4%.

Capital ratios1,2
As at 31 December	2025	2024
CET1	12.7%	12.1%
Tier 1 (T1)	16.1%	15.1%
Total regulatory capital	19.0%	18.1%
Capital resources
---	---	---
	2025	2024
As at 31 December	£m	£m
CET1 capital	28,177	26,995
T1 capital	35,848	33,787
Total regulatory capital	42,129	40,444
Total risk weighted assets (RWAs) (unaudited)	222,247	223,648

Leverage minimum requirements are set at the sub-consolidated level for Barclays Bank PLC. The sub-consolidated group

represents the Barclays Bank Group on a regulatory scope of consolidation, as approved by the PRA. As a result, the Barclays

Bank PLC leverage disclosures contained within this document are presented at Barclays Bank PLC sub-consolidated level,

based on capital and exposure on the last day of the quarter. Additionally, it is also required to disclose an average UK

leverage ratio based on capital on the last day of each month in the quarter and an exposure measure for each day in the

quarter.

As at 31 December 2025, the Barclays Bank PLC sub-consolidated leverage ratio was 5.8% which is above the minimum

leverage ratio requirement of 3.5%.

Leverage ratio BBPLC sub-consolidated1
	2025	2024
As at 31 December	£m	£m
UK leverage ratio3	5.8%	5.8%
T1 capital	56,465	54,713
UK leverage exposure	980,935	946,809
Average UK leverage ratio	5.2%	5.2%
Average T1 capital	56,406	54,645
Average UK leverage exposure	1,093,000	1,050,090

Notes

12024 comparatives for Capital, RWAs and leverage have been calculated applying the transitional arrangement in accordance with the CRR. This

included IFRS 9 transitional arrangements and the grandfathering of certain capital instruments. Effective from 1 January 2025, these IFRS 9

transitional arrangements no longer applied. Effective from 29 June 2025, the grandfathered instruments no longer qualified as Tier 2 Capital.

2The Barclays Bank PLC Solo-consolidated and Barclays Bank PLC sub-consolidated CET1 ratios, as are relevant for assessing against the

conversion triggers in Barclays Bank PLC AT1 securities (all of which are held by Barclays PLC), were 12.7% and 17.0% respectively, calculated

without applying the transitional arrangements under UK CRR.

3Although the leverage ratio is expressed in terms of T1 capital, the countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB) and 75% of the minimum

requirement must be covered solely with CET1 capital. The CET1 capital held against the 0.2% countercyclical leverage ratio buffer was £2.0bn.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	142

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Foreign exchange risk (audited)

The Barclays Bank Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk.

a)Transactional foreign currency exposure

Transactional foreign currency exposures represent exposures on banking assets and liabilities, denominated in currencies

other than the functional currency of the transacting entity.

The Barclays Bank Group’s risk management policies are designed to prevent the holding of significant open positions in

foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio which is monitored through VaR.

Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk function and minimised by

the businesses.

b)Translational foreign exchange exposure

The Barclays Bank Group's investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in

foreign currencies, principally USD and EUR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency

movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in shareholders’ equity.

Functional currency of operations (audited)
	Foreign<br><br>currency net<br><br>investments	Borrowings<br><br>which hedge<br><br>the net<br><br>investments	Derivatives<br><br>which hedge<br><br>the net<br><br>investments	Structural<br><br>currency<br><br>exposures<br><br>pre- economic<br><br>hedges	Other Equity<br><br>instruments	Remaining<br><br>structural<br><br>currency<br><br>exposures
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
USD	25,531	(2,914)	(2,141)	20,476	(5,450)	15,026
EUR	10,195	(3,018)	—	7,177	(1,310)	5,867
INR	1,486	—	(1,260)	226	—	226
JPY	544	(177)	—	367	—	367
Other	2,007	—	(918)	1,089	(1,127)	(38)
Total	39,763	(6,109)	(4,319)	29,335	(7,887)	21,448
As at 31 December 2024
USD	27,742	(4,644)	(2,229)	20,868	(5,846)	15,023
EUR	9,559	(2,729)	—	6,830	(265)	6,565
INR	1,400	—	(992)	408	—	408
JPY	628	(215)	—	413	—	413
Other	2,037	—	(792)	1,245	(849)	396
Total	41,366	(7,588)	(4,013)	29,764	(6,960)	22,805

Other equity instruments relate to exposures arising on foreign currency denominated preference share and AT1

instruments. These instruments are accounted for at historical cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting

purposes. The gain or loss arising from changes in the GBP value of these instruments is recognised on redemption in

retained earnings.

During 2025, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased by £1.4bn to £21.4bn (2024:

£22.8bn). Foreign currency net investments decreased by £1.6bn to £39.8bn (2024: £41.4bn) driven predominantly by a

£2.2bn decrease in US dollars offset by £0.6bn increase in Euro. The hedges associated with these foreign currency

investments decreased by £1.2bn to £10.4bn (2024: £11.6bn).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	143

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Pension risk review

From 1 July 2025, the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) was amended to become a sectionalised scheme to meet

the requirements of the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015, creating

two separate sections - the Barclays Bank Section and the Barclays UK Section.

At the time of sectionalisation, the Barclays Bank Section represented approximately 91.5% of the Barclays Group’s total

retirement benefit obligations globally and is Barclays Bank Plc's principal defined benefit pension arrangement. Accordingly,

this risk review focuses exclusively on the UKRF Barclays Bank Section.

The scheme is closed to new entrants and there is no new final salary benefit being accrued. Existing active members accrue

a combination of a contributory cash balance benefit and a voluntary defined contribution element. Pension risk arises as

the market value of the pension fund assets may decline, investment returns may reduce or the estimated value of the

pension liabilities may increase.

Assets

The Trustee Board of the UKRF defines its overall long-term investment strategy with investments across a broad range of

asset classes. This results in a diversified portfolio comprising both return seeking assets and liability matching assets,

designed to better align with future pension obligations. The two most significant risks within the asset portfolio are

exposure to credit spreads and growth assets. The split of scheme assets is shown within Note 30 to the financial

statements. The fair value of the Barclays Bank Section assets was £20.9bn as at 31 December 2025 (20241: £21.9bn).

Liabilities

The Barclays Bank Section retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an

IAS 19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long-term price inflation rate (RPI) and the discount

rate (GBP AA corporate bond yield):

•An increase in long-term expected inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities;

•A decrease in the discount rate corresponds to an increase in liabilities.

Pension risk is expected to reduce over time, reflecting the closure of the main defined benefit scheme to new entrants. The

chart below illustrates the Barclays Bank Section's liability cash flow profile as at 31 December 2025, taking into account the

future inflation-linked indexation of benefits payable to members. The majority of the liability cash flows (approximately

97%) fall within the next 40 years, with payments peaking between 0 and 10 years and declining thereafter. The precise

shape of the cash flow profile is sensitive to changes in inflation and longevity expectations, as well as member behaviour,

including transfers out of the scheme. Transfers out accelerate the timing of benefit payments and therefore bring forward

the associated liability cash flows.

For more detail on the Barclays Bank Section’s financial and demographic valuation assumptions see Note 30 to the financial

statements.

Proportion of liability cash flows (%)

n	0-10 years	34.4
n	11-20 years	33.5
n	21-30 years	20.1
n	31-40 years	9.5
n	41-50 years	2.4
n	51+ years	0.2
IAS 19 pension position from 2022 to 2025 (£bn)1
---
6
---
5
4
3
2
1
0

The graph above illustrates the movement in the UKRF Barclays Bank Section’s net IAS 19 position over the past four years.

In 2025, favourable market movements largely offset the proportional transfer out of the surplus resulting from

sectionalisation. From 1 July 2025 onward, the figures shown relate solely to the Barclays Bank Section.

Note

1 Figures prior to 1 July 2025 refer to the UKRF before sectionalisation

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	144

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Refer to Note 30 to the financial statements for the sensitivity of the UKRF liabilities to changes in key assumptions.

Risk measurement

In line with Barclays' risk management framework, the assets and liabilities of the UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) Barclays Bank

Section are modelled within a VaR framework to assess the volatility of the pension position at a total portfolio level. This

approach enables the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the Barclays Bank Section obligations and

investments to be adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a quarterly basis. Risks are reviewed and

reported regularly at forums including the Barclays Bank Board Risk Committee, the Barclays Bank Risk Committee  and the

Pensions Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities on an IAS 19 basis (see Note 30

to the financial statements). The Trustee receives quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis.

The UKRF Barclays Bank Section pension liability is sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions, which are reviewed

regularly (See Note 30 to the financial statements). To mitigate part of this risk the Barclays Bank Section has entered into

longevity reinsurance contracts approximately 70% of current pensioner liabilities.

In addition, the impact of pension risk to the Barclays Bank PLC is taken into account as part of the stress testing process.

Stress testing is performed internally at least on an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of regulatory

stress tests.

The Barclays Bank PLC's defined benefit pension schemes affect capital in two ways:

•An IAS 19 deficit is treated as a liability on the Barclays Bank Group’s balance sheet. Movement in a deficit due to

remeasurements, including actuarial losses, are recognised immediately through Other Comprehensive Income and as

such reduce shareholders’ equity and CET1 capital. An IAS 19 surplus is treated as an asset on the balance sheet and

increases shareholders’ equity; however, it is deducted for the purposes of determining CET1 capital.

•In the Barclays Bank Group’s statutory balance sheet an IAS 19 surplus or deficit is partially offset by a deferred tax

liability or asset respectively. These may or may not be recognised for calculating CET1 capital depending on the overall

deferred tax position of the Barclays Bank Group at the particular time.

Pension risk is taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment undertaken by the PRA at least annually. The Pillar 2A

requirement forms part of the overall capital requirement for Barclays Bank PLC.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	145

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Interest rate risk in the banking book

All disclosures in this section, pages 145 to 146, are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The treasury and capital risk framework covers interest rate sensitive exposures held in the banking book, mostly relating to

accrual accounted and fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) instruments. The potential volatility of net

interest income (NII) is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric which is monitored regularly and reported to

senior management and the Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee as part of the limit monitoring framework.

Summary of performance in the period

Barclays Bank PLC’s strategy remains to stabilise income over time. The change in NII sensitivity during the year to a 25 basis

points interest rate shock is due to changes in the composition of the banking book balance sheet and increased structural

hedge duration reflecting the observed stability in deposit balances during the year.

Key metrics

-£33m<br><br>AEaR across the Barclays Bank Group from a +25bps shock to forward interest rate curves.

Net interest income sensitivity

The table below shows a sensitivity analysis on pre-tax net interest income for non-traded financial assets and liabilities,

including the effect of any hedging. This analysis is not a forward guidance on NII and is intended as a quantification of risk

exposure utilising the Net Interest Income (NII) metric as described on page 178 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025

(unaudited), which includes documentation of the main model assumptions.

Net Interest Income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency (audited)	2025		2024
	+25 basis<br><br>points	-25 basis<br><br>points	+25 basis<br><br>points	-25 basis<br><br>points
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m
GBP	4	(6)	27	(28)
USD	(41)	41	(29)	29
EUR	(5)	4	(6)	6
Other currencies	9	(8)	(3)	3
Total	(33)	31	(11)	10

Analysis of equity sensitivity

The analysis of equity sensitivity table measures the overall impact of a +/- 25bps movement in interest rates on retained

earnings, FVOCI, cash flow hedge reserves and pensions. For non-NII items a DV01 metric is used, which is an indicator of

the shift in value for a 1bp movement in the yield curve.

Analysis of equity sensitivity (audited)	31 December 2025		31 December 2024
	+25 basis<br><br>points	-25 basis<br><br>points	+25 basis<br><br>points	-25 basis<br><br>points
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m
Net interest income	(33)	31	(11)	10
Taxation effects on the above	8	(8)	2	(2)
Effect on profit for the year	(25)	23	(9)	8
As percentage of net profit after tax	(0.5%)	0.5%	(0.2%)	0.2%
Effect on profit for the year (per above)	(25)	23	(9)	8
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	(186)	193	(193)	200
Cash flow hedge reserve	(823)	823	(588)	588
Taxation effects on the above	283	(284)	219	(221)
Effect on equity	(751)	755	(571)	575
As percentage of equity	(1.2%)	1.2%	(1.0%)	1.0%
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	146
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk

Volatility of the FVOCI portfolio in the liquidity pool

Changes in value of FVOCI exposures flow directly through capital via the FVOCI reserve. The volatility in the value of the

FVOCI investments in the liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure,

i.e. non-traded market risk VaR. Daily VaR is calculated using a historical simulation methodology with a one-year equally

weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level.

Although the underlying methodology to calculate the non-traded VaR is identical to the one used in traded management

VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. The non-traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the

FVOCI exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment.

Analysis of volatility of the FVOCI portfolio in the liquidity pool
	2025			2024
	Average	High	Low	Average	High	Low
For the year ended 31 December	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Non-traded market value at risk (daily, 95%)	42	55	26	56	66	45

Daily Value at Risk has been lower on an average in 2025 relative to 2024 driven by a combination of position changes and

market volatility reduction.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	147

Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

All disclosures in this section, pages 147 to 149, are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Operational risks are inherent in the Barclays Bank Group’s business activities and it is not cost effective or possible to

attempt to eliminate all operational risks. The Operational Risk Framework is therefore focused on identifying operational

risks, assessing them and managing them within the Barclays Bank Group’s approved risk appetite.

The Operational Risk principal risk comprises the following Risk Categories: Change Delivery Management Risk, Data and

Records Management Risk; Financial Reporting Risk; Fraud Risk; Cyber & Information Security Risk; Operational Recovery

Planning Risk; People Risk; Physical Security Risk; Premises Risk; Risk Reporting Risk; Supplier Risk; Tax Risk; Technology Risk

and Transaction Processing Risk. The operational risk profile is also informed by a number of Connected Risks: Resilience,

Third Party Service Provider and Model Connected Risk. These Connected Risks represent material threats to the Barclays

Bank, which extend across multiple risk categories and therefore require a co-ordinated approach to overseeing the risk

exposure and/or consolidated reporting.

For definitions of these risks refer to the Management of operational risk section of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2025. To

provide complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Barclays Bank Group arising from operational risk, the

operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the risks listed above to cover operational risks associated with other principal

risks too.

This section provides an analysis of the Barclays Bank Group’s operational risk profile, including events above the Barclays

Bank Group’s reportable threshold, which have had a financial impact in 2025. The Barclays Bank Group’s operational risk

profile is informed by bottom-up risk assessments undertaken by each business unit and top-down qualitative review for

each risk type. Fraud, Transaction Processing, Cyber and Information Security continue to be highlighted as key operational

risk exposures.

For information on compliance risk events, see the compliance risk section.

Summary of performance in the period

During 2025, total operational risk losses increased to £66m (2024: £53m) and the number of recorded events for 2025

increased to 1,011 (2024: 923). The total operational risk losses for the year were mainly driven by events falling within the

Execution, Delivery & Process Management and External Fraud categories, which tend to be high volume but low impact

events.

Key metrics

78%
of the Barclays Bank Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50,000 or less		33%
---
of events by number are due to Execution, Delivery and Process Management		67%
---
of events by number are due to External Fraud		77%
---
of losses are from events aligned to Execution, Delivery and Process Management
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	148
---	---

Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

Operational risk profile

Within operational risk, there are a large number of small value risk events. In 2025, 78% (2024: 84%) of the Barclays Bank

Group’s reportable operational risk events by volume had a value of less than £50,000 each. Cumulatively, events under this

£50,000 threshold accounted for only 20% (2024: 26%) of Barclays Bank Group’s total net operational risk losses. A small

proportion of operational risk events have a material impact on the financial results of the Barclays Bank Group.

The analysis below presents the Barclays Bank Group’s operational risk events by Basel event category:

Operational risk events by Basel event category

% of total risk events by count
Internal Fraud
2025
---
2024

External Fraud
2025
---
2024

Execution, Delivery and Process Management
2025
---
2024

Employment Practices and Workplace Safety
2025
---
2024

Damage to Physical Assets
2025
---
2024

Clients Products and Business Practices
2025
---
2024

Business Disruption and System Failures
2025
---
2024

% of total risk events by value
Internal Fraud
2025
---
2024

External Fraud
2025
---
2024

Execution, Delivery and Process Management
2025
---
2024

Employment Practices and Workplace Safety
2025
---
2024

Damage to Physical Assets
2025
---
2024

Clients Products and Business Practices
2025
---
2024

Business Disruption and System Failures
2025
---
2024

Note

1The data disclosed includes operational risk losses for reportable events impacting the Barclays Bank Group's business areas, having impact of

>£10,000 and excludes Gain or Insurance Recovery impacts, events that are compliance or legal risk, aggregate and boundary events. A

boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact. Due to the nature of risk events that keep evolving, data for prior

year losses are updated.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	149

Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

▪Execution, Delivery and Process Management impacts during 2025 increased to £51m (2024: £40m) and accounted for

77% of total operational risk losses (2024: 76%). The events in this category are typical of the banking industry as a whole

where high volumes of transactions are processed on a daily basis, mapping mainly to Barclays Transaction Processing

risk type. The overall frequency of events in this category in 2025 slightly increased to 33% of total events by volume

(2024: 30%).

▪External Fraud impacts during 2025 increased to £15m (2024: £13m) and accounted for 23% of total events by value

(2024: 24%). Volume of events increased to 674 accounting for 67% of total event volume (2024: 648 / 70%). In this

category, high volume, low impact events are driven by transactional fraud often related to debit and credit card usage.

Note: Total External Fraud losses in 2025 including those from events with impact <£10,000 amounted to £60m (2024:

£63m).

Fraud remains an industry-wide threat with criminals using varied techniques to target customers and colleagues directly

(i.e., Third Party Fraud), or the Barclays Bank Group directly (i.e., First Party Fraud). In the UK and Europe, Authorised Push

Payment (APP) Scams particularly continue to be a growing fraud type where customers are deceived to transfer funds from

their account to a bad actor. The Barclays Bank Group continues to work closely with external partners on various fraud

prevention initiatives and continues to improve the fraud control environment through focused investment in enhancing

fraud prevention systems and tools to combat the increasing level of fraud attempts whilst minimising disruption to genuine

transactions. Fraud can also be committed by one or more employees across the Barclays Bank Group (i.e. Internal Fraud or

Unauthorised Trading Fraud) and the Barclays Bank Group maintains a robust control environment to limit exposure.

Operational resilience has remained a key area of focus for the Barclays Bank Group over the past year, with global events

demonstrating that severe but plausible disruption is no longer theoretical. The evolving threat landscape, characterised by

increasing cyber sophistication, geopolitical tension, supplier disruption and interconnected financial market infrastructures,

highlights the need for resilience to be designed, embedded, tested and sustained across our important business services, if

we are to avoid intolerable harm.  The Barclays Bank Group remains committed to sustained and disciplined investment in

end-to-end resilience capabilities, as expectations evolve and the external operating environment becomes increasingly

complex.

Operational risk associated with cybersecurity remains a top focus for the Barclays Bank Group. The sophistication of threat

actors continues to grow as noted by multiple external risk events observed throughout the year. Ransomware attacks

across the global Barclays supplier base were observed and the bank worked closely with the affected suppliers to manage

potential impacts to the Barclays Bank Group and its clients and customers. The Barclays Bank Group’s cybersecurity

incidents did not materially impact the Group's business strategy, results of operations, or financial condition and there were

no material loss events associated with cybersecurity recorded within the event categories above.

The Barclays Bank Group businesses are highly dependent on its ability to process and monitor, on a daily basis, a very large

number of transactions, many of which are highly complex and occur at high volumes and frequencies, across numerous

and diverse markets in many currencies. Given the Barclays Bank Group’s diverse customer base and geographical reach and

the increase in volume, speed, frequency and complexity of transactions, especially electronic transactions (as well as the

requirements to report such transactions on a real-time basis to clients, regulators and exchanges), developing, maintaining

and upgrading operational systems and infrastructure becomes more challenging. The Barclays Bank Group continues to

focus on automation and simplification programs to improve the overall control environment and manage the risk of

processing errors as well as ensuring scalability of operations.

For further information, refer to the operational risk management section.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	150

Risk review

Risk performance

Model risk

All disclosures in these model risk, compliance risk, reputation risk and legal risk sections on pages 150 to 153 are unaudited

unless otherwise stated.

Model risk

The Barclays Bank Group is committed to continually improving model risk management and made a number of

enhancements in 2025, including:

•Progressed with the established regulatory remediation programme to meet PRA’s Supervisory Statement 1/23 Model

risk management principles for banks. Key updates include enhancements to model development, validation and

monitoring practices, establishment of additional roles and responsibilities with regards to model use, introduction of

quantitative processes framework and defined monitoring framework principles and design.

•Introduced Artificial Intelligence(AI) Standard in support of the AI Policy, further developed of approach to AI validation,

including Generative AI, and design of associated governance framework.

•Expanded model risk framework to provide transparency around risk themes (Data and Technology) outside the Model

Risk Framework that may impact model outputs.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	151

Risk review

Risk performance

Compliance risk

Compliance risk

Barclays Bank Group is committed to continuing to drive the right culture throughout all levels of the organisation. Barclays

Bank Group will continue to enhance effective management of Compliance Risk and appropriately consider the relevant

tools, governance and management information in decision-making processes. Focus on the management of Compliance

Risk is ongoing and, alongside other relevant business and control management information, the Compliance Risk

Dashboard is a key component of this.

Barclays Bank Group continues to review the role and impact of Compliance Risk events and issues in the remuneration

process at both the individual and business level.

The Compliance Risk Taxonomy was refreshed and re-categorised into six core risks, namely wholesale conduct, customer

protection, data privacy, regulatory compliance, product design and review and laws, rules and regulation risks. Financial

Crime Risk was also separated into a standalone principal risk category, to reinforce the visibility and focus on this key area

of risk to the business.

Businesses have continued to assess and prioritise the consideration of driving good customer outcomes as we deliver the

Group’s strategic change agenda. As part of the 2025 Medium-Term Planning Process material Compliance Risks associated

with strategic and financial plans were assessed and businesses ensured that driving good outcomes for customers is at the

heart of these plans.

Throughout 2025, Compliance Risks, including outcomes for our customers, were raised by each business area for

consideration by the Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee. The Committee reviewed the risks raised and whether

management’s proposed actions were appropriate to mitigate the risks effectively.

The Barclays Bank Group continued to incur costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 24 Legal,

competition and regulatory matters and Note 22 Provisions, for further details. Costs include customer redress and

remediation. Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering Barclays Bank Group’s

strategy and an ongoing commitment to improve oversight of culture and conduct.

The control environment and compliance risk profile, informed by the Compliance Risk Dashboards, are presented to the

Barclays Bank PLC Board Risk Committee and senior management. The Compliance Risk Dashboards set out key indicators

in relation to Compliance risk and continue to allow effective oversight and decision-making and ensure the Barclays Bank

Group operates within Risk Appetite. Adherence to tolerances is assessed by the business through the key indicators as part

of the Compliance Risk Dashboard governance process.

Barclays Bank Group remains focused on the continuous improvements being made to manage risk effectively with an

emphasis on enhancing governance and management information to identify risk at earlier stages.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	152

Risk review

Risk performance

Financial crime risk

Financial Crime Risk

Barclays Bank Group is committed to driving a strong financial crime risk management culture across all levels of the

organisation. Effective 1 January 2025, the Barclays Group elevated financial crime risk - incorporating anti-bribery and

corruption, anti-money laundering (including terrorist financing), anti-tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks (including

proliferation financing) - to a principal risk within the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), reflecting the

evolving external threat landscape and regulatory expectations. During 2025, the financial crime principal risk was

embedded, with financial crime and compliance risks being reported separately to the Barclays Bank PLC Board.

A key area of focus has been enhancing the financial crime control environment to address emerging threats and evolving

laws, rules and regulations. Throughout 2025, the Barclays Bank PLC Board and relevant committees received updates on

the Barclays Bank Group’s financial crime risk profile and emerging risks in the context of the macroeconomic, regulatory

and geopolitical outlook. These risks continue to be monitored on an ongoing basis.

Effective 1 January 2026, the combined Financial Crime Policy was replaced by four policies that set detailed requirements

for managing anti-bribery and corruption, anti-money laundering, anti-tax evasion facilitation and sanctions risks. This

approach supports differentiated reporting and oversight of risk management across the four financial crime risks.

To further embed financial crime as a principal risk, the Barclays Bank Group updated its financial crime risk appetite

statement. Recognising the risk-based approach to financial crime risk management, Barclays financial crime risk appetite,

approved by the Group Executive Committee, is that “Barclays has no appetite for Financial Crime Risk issues and events

that are material, systemic, not promptly remediated, not reported to regulators in a timely manner where required, and/or

are likely to result in regulatory enforcement”.

The Barclays Bank Group continued to incur costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, refer to Note 24 Legal,

competition and regulatory matters and Note 22 Provisions for further details. Costs include customer redress and

remediation, as well as fines and settlements. Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of

delivering the Barclays Bank Group’s strategy and an ongoing commitment to improve oversight of culture and conduct.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	153

Risk review

Risk performance

Reputation risk and legal risk

Reputation risk

Barclays Bank Group is committed to identifying reputation risks and issues as early as possible and managing them

appropriately. At a Barclays Bank Group level throughout 2025, reputation risks and issues were overseen by the Barclays

Bank PLC Board. The top live and emerging reputation risks and issues within the Barclays Bank Group are included within

an over-arching quarterly report at the respective Board level.

The Barclays Bank PLC Board reviews reputation risks escalated by businesses and considered whether management’s

proposed actions, for example attaching conditions to proposed client transactions or increased engagement with impacted

stakeholders, were appropriate to mitigate the risks effectively. The Board also received regular updates with regard to key

reputation risks and issues, including: Barclays Bank Group’s response to the cost of living crisis; Barclays Bank Group’s

association with sensitive sectors; access to banking; lending practices and the resilience of key Barclays systems and

processes.

The Barclays Bank Group continued to incur costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 24 Legal,

competition and regulatory matters and Note 22 Provisions, for further details. Costs include customer redress and

remediation, as well as fines and settlements. Resolution of these matters remains an ongoing commitment to improve

oversight of culture and conduct and management of reputation risks.

Legal risk

The Barclays Bank Group remains committed to continuous improvements in managing legal risk effectively. During 2025,

the Group wide LRMF was updated in line with other Principal Risk Frameworks to provide consistency in the bank's risk

management documentation. The Barclays Group wide LRMF continues to complement the CRMF (and described in more

detail on page 81), which includes a requirement for the Legal Function to proactively identify, communicate and provide

legal advice on applicable laws, rules and regulations.

Other improvements during 2025 included a review and update of the established supporting legal risk policies, standards

and mandatory training, reinforced by ongoing engagement with and education of the Barclays Group’s businesses and

functions by Legal Function colleagues. Legal risk tolerances and legal risk appetite have also been reviewed.

Tolerances adherence is assessed through key indicators, which are also used to evaluate the legal risk profile and are

reviewed, at least annually, through the relevant risk and control committees. Mandatory controls to manage legal risks are

set out in the legal risk standards and are subject to ongoing monitoring. The CRMF referred to above (and described in

more detail on page 81) also mitigate legal risk.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	154

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Supervision of the Barclays Bank Group

The Barclays Bank Group’s operations, including its overseas branches, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a large

number of rules and regulations applicable to the conduct of banking and other financial services business in each of the

jurisdictions in which the Barclays Bank Group operates. These apply to business operations, impact financial returns and

include capital, leverage and liquidity requirements, authorisation, registration and reporting requirements, restrictions on

certain activities, and conduct of business regulations, amongst other applicable regulatory requirements.

Regulatory developments in one or more jurisdictions may impact the Barclays Bank Group globally. We focus particularly

on UK, US and EU regulation in this Report due to the location of the Barclays Bank Group’s principal areas of business.

Regulations elsewhere may also have a significant impact on the Barclays Bank Group due to the location of its branches,

subsidiaries and, in some cases, clients. For more information on the risks related to the supervision and regulation of the

Barclays Bank Group, including regulatory change, see the material existing and emerging risk titled ‘Regulatory Change

agenda and impact on Business Model’ in the Material existing and emerging risks section.

Supervision in the UK

In the UK, day-to-day regulation and supervision of the Barclays Bank Group is divided between the Prudential Regulation

Authority (PRA) (a division of the Bank of England (BoE)) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA). In addition, the

Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE has influence on the prudential requirements that may be imposed on the

banking system through its powers of direction and recommendation. Certain members of the Barclays Bank Group are also

subject to regulatory initiatives undertaken by the UK Payment Systems Regulator (PSR), as a participant in payment

systems regulated by the PSR.

The Government is proposing that the FCA take on all of the PSR’s responsibilities and relevant members of the Group will

continue to be subject to payment supervision by the FCA when this transfer of powers comes into effect. Members of the

Group may also be subject to claims managed by the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) which, whilst not a regulator,

provides a means of redress in customer disputes without the involvement of the UK courts. In July 2025, the FCA consulted

on modernising the redress system administered by the FOS with the aim of identifying areas of duplication and/or

complexity and improving the role that the FOS plays in customer disputes. Barclays Bank PLC is an authorised person, with

permission to accept deposits, amongst other things, and is subject to prudential supervision by the PRA and to conduct

regulation and supervision by the FCA.

Barclays Bank PLC is subject to prudential supervision on a solo-consolidated basis. The Barclays Group as a whole is also

subject to prudential supervision by the PRA on a group consolidated basis. Barclays PLC has been approved by the PRA as a

financial holding company.

Barclays Capital Securities Limited (BCSL), which provides clients with access to equities and equity financing services across

European and Asian markets, is authorised and subject to prudential supervision by the PRA as a PRA-designated

investment firm and is subject to conduct regulation and supervision by the FCA.

Certain members of the Barclays Bank Group are regulated on a solo basis by the FCA, including Barclays Investment

Solutions Limited and Barclays Asset Management Limited.

Barclays Execution Services Limited and Barclays Global Service Centre Private Limited are both appointed representatives of

Barclays Bank PLC. These are arrangements under which the appointed representative is permitted to carry on certain

regulated activities in the UK which its principal takes responsibility for and oversees. Appointed representative

arrangements must comply with certain statutory and FCA rules, including on prescribed contractual terms and ongoing

monitoring and supervision of the appointed representative by the principal.

The PRA’s supervision of the Barclays Bank Group is conducted through a variety of regulatory tools, including the collection

of information by way of prudential returns or cross-firm reviews, reports obtained from skilled persons, information

gathering, stress testing, regular supervisory visits and regular continuous assessment meetings with the Barclays Bank

Group’s management and relevant stakeholders to discuss matters such as strategy, governance, controls, financial

resilience, operational resilience, risk management, and recovery and resolution.

Further, the BoE, as the UK resolution authority, informs prudential requirements and sets requirements for the Barclays

Group relating to resolution preparedness.

The FCA’s supervision of the UK firms in the Barclays Bank Group is carried out through a combination of proactive

engagement meetings, regular supervisory visits, information gathering and regular meetings with the Barclays Bank

Group’s management and relevant stakeholders to discuss matters such as business and customer strategy, fair treatment

of customers, and financial crime controls, as well as cross-sectoral reviews which analyse the different areas of the market

and the risks that may lie ahead.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	155

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

The FCA and the PRA also apply the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (the SMCR) which imposes a regulatory

approval, individual accountability and fitness and propriety framework in respect of senior individuals within relevant firms.

FCA supervision has focused on strategic transformation, financial crime controls, conduct risk and customer/client

outcomes under the consumer duty (which now applies to both open and closed products), firm culture and non-financial

misconduct, fraud controls and reimbursement, access to cash, the fair treatment of vulnerable customers, operational

resilience (including cyber risk), the controls framework and payment account access and closures.

PRA supervision has focused on strategic transformation, financial and operational resilience (including cyber risk),

governance, capital risk management, model risk management, data risk management, systems and controls, climate risk

and resolvability, where resolvability is reviewed in conjunction with the Resolution Directorate (a division of the BoE).

Both the PRA and the FCA apply standards that generally either anticipate or go beyond requirements established by global

or EU standards, whether in relation to capital, leverage and liquidity, resolvability and resolution or matters of conduct. The

UK is in the process of reviewing, repealing and, where relevant, replacing the EU legislation that was onshored into UK law

following the UK’s departure from the EU (known as “assimilated law”). The Financial Services and Markets Act 2023 (FSMA

2023) established a framework for the revocation of assimilated law relating to financial services. However, the Government

is not expected to revoke assimilated law relating to financial services unless the FCA and/or PRA have drafted and

consulted on rules in the relevant areas, where it is appropriate that the provisions are replaced.

There is a significant volume of assimilated law for the UK Government to repeal and replace, so this process remains

ongoing and the regulatory landscape continues to develop. There is potential for an increase in regulatory implementation

costs to adapt systems and controls as a result of these developments, although areas of divergence from assimilated law

have been limited to date.

FSMA 2023 also introduced the framework for the ‘designated activities regime’ (DAR). The DAR framework allows HM

Treasury to designate certain activities which do not require regulatory authorisation to carry them out, but which are

currently subject to FCA and PRA supervision under assimilated law. In January 2025, the Financial Services and Markets Act

2000 (Designated Activities) (Supervision and Enforcement) Regulations 2025 came into effect. These Regulations give the

FCA supervisory and enforcement powers in respect of short selling and consumer composite investment activities.

Supervision in the EU

The Barclays Bank Group’s operations in the EU are authorised and regulated by a combination of its home regulators and

host regulators in the EU countries where the Barclays Bank Group operates.

Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is licensed as a credit institution by the Central Bank of Ireland (CBI) and is therefore subject to

supervision by the CBI as home state or competent authority under various EU financial services directives and regulations. It

is further designated as a significant institution falling under direct supervision on a solo basis by the European Central Bank

(ECB) for prudential purposes.

Barclays Bank Ireland PLC’s EU branches are also subject to direct supervision for local conduct purposes by national

supervisory authorities in the EU jurisdictions where they are established. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is subject to the

requirements set by the Single Resolution Board (SRB) as its resolution authority.

The Barclays Group provides the majority of its cross-border banking and investment services to EEA clients via Barclays

Bank Ireland PLC (a subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC). Additionally, Barclays Bank PLC and BCSL are authorised in certain EEA

Member States to enable them to continue to conduct a limited range of activities without a physical presence, including

accessing EEA trading venues and interdealer trading. Directive (EU) 2024/1619 (CRD VI) contains a prohibition on

providing core banking services, such as lending and deposit-taking into the EU from a third country entity, subject to

certain exemptions. These CRD VI changes are currently pending Member State implementation from January 2026 and

should enter into force in the majority of jurisdictions from January 2027. As a result of CRD VI, Barclays Bank PLC and BCSL

may be limited in their ability to provide certain core banking services into the EU from January 2027. Barclays Bank PLC has

a branch in Paris (to facilitate access to TARGET 2), which is regulated by the Autorité de Contrôle Prudentiel et de

Résolution (ACPR) and will also be subject to new regulatory requirements under CRD VI.

On 21 January 2026, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC announced that it had commenced the implementation of its plan to re-

domicile its registered office from Dublin to Paris, which is to be effected by changing its corporate form to a Societas

Europaea followed by a transfer of its registered office. The change of corporate form will be effected via a court approved

merger process, which commenced in Q4 2025 and is expected to complete in Q4 2026. Following completion of the

merger, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC (then to be named, with effect from completion of the merger, Barclays Europe SE)

intends to apply for the relocation of its registered office to Paris. Following this re-domiciliation, Barclays Europe SE would

be subject to supervision by the ACPR, the Autorité de Marchés Financiers and the European Central Bank. The re-

domiciliation is subject to certain conditions, including the approval of those regulators. It is expected to be completed in H1

2027.

Supervision in the US

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	156

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and its New York branch, and Barclays Bank PLC’s US subsidiaries are subject to a

comprehensive regulatory framework involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations in the US. For example, the

Barclays Bank Group’s US activities and operations are subject to supervision and regulation by the Board of Governors of

the Federal Reserve System (FRB), as well as additional supervision, requirements and restrictions imposed by other federal

and state regulators and self-regulatory organisations (SROs). In some cases, US requirements may impose restrictions on

the Barclays Bank Group’s global activities, in addition to its activities in the US.

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays US Holdings Limited (BUSHL), Barclays US LLC (BUSL), and Barclays Group US Inc.

(BGUS) are regulated as bank holding companies (BHCs) by the FRB. BUSL is the Barclays Bank Group’s ultimate US holding

company that holds substantially all of the Barclays Bank Group’s US subsidiaries (including Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and

Barclays Bank Delaware). BUSL is subject to requirements in respect of capital adequacy, capital planning and stress testing,

risk management and governance, liquidity, leverage limits, large exposure limits, restrictions on activities and financial

regulatory reporting. Barclays Bank PLC’s New York branch is also subject to enhanced prudential standards relating to,

among other things, liquidity and risk management.

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BUSHL and BUSL have financial holding company (FHC) status under the Bank Holding

Company Act of 1956. FHC status allows these entities to engage in a variety of financial and related activities, directly or

through subsidiaries, including underwriting, dealing and market making in securities. Failure to maintain FHC status could

result in increasingly stringent penalties and, ultimately, in the closure or cessation of certain operations in the US.

In addition to oversight by the FRB, Barclays Bank PLC’s New York branch and many of the Barclays Bank Group’s

subsidiaries are regulated by additional US authorities based on the location or activities of those entities. The New York

branch of Barclays Bank PLC is subject to supervision and regulation by the New York State Department of Financial Services

(NYSDFS). Barclays Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered bank, is subject to supervision and regulation by the Delaware

Office of the State Bank Commissioner, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the FRB and the Consumer

Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB). The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the FDIC, up to applicable limits.

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BUSHL, BUSL, and BGUS are required to act as a source of strength for Barclays Bank

Delaware. This could, among other things, require these entities to provide capital support to Barclays Bank Delaware if it

fails to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements.

The Barclays Bank Group’s US securities broker/dealer and investment banking operations are conducted primarily through

BCI, and are also subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the

Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) and other government agencies and SROs under US federal and state

securities laws. BCI is also registered as a Futures Commission Merchant with the Commodity Futures Trading Commission

(CFTC), through which the Barclays Group conducts its US futures and options on futures business, including client clearing

operations, which are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the CFTC, the National Futures Association and

other SROs.

Under the US framework for regulating swaps and security-based swaps established under Title VII of the Dodd-Frank Act,

the CFTC has regulatory authority over swaps, the SEC has regulatory authority over security-based swaps, and the CFTC

and SEC jointly regulate mixed swaps (as such terms are defined in the relevant legislation). The Barclays Group’s activities

related to US swaps and security-based swaps are principally conducted by Barclays Bank PLC and are subject to ongoing

supervision and regulation by the CFTC and the SEC, respectively. Barclays Bank PLC is registered as a swap dealer with the

CFTC and conditionally registered as a security-based swap dealer with the SEC. Barclays Bank PLC is also subject to the FRB

swaps rules with respect to margin and capital requirements. In addition, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is registered as a swap

dealer with the CFTC and is subject to the FRB swaps rules with respect to margin and capital.

Supervision in Asia Pacific, Middle East and Africa

The Barclays Bank Group’s operations in Asia Pacific, Middle East and Africa are supervised and regulated by a broad range

of national banking and financial services regulators.

Prudential regulation

Prudential regulation in the UK

Certain Basel III standards were originally implemented in EU and UK law through the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR)

and the Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV), as amended by CRR II and CRD V. These standards were retained in the

UK regulatory framework via a series of onshoring instruments when the UK withdrew from the EU. Under the assimilated

law version of the CRR (the UK CRR), the Barclays Group is subject to a binding Pillar 1 minimum capital requirement to

satisfy a Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 4.5% of risk-weighted assets (RWAs), a Tier 1 capital ratio of 6.0% of RWAs

and a total capital ratio of 8.0% of RWAs. However, in practice the Barclays Group is required to and does hold capital

significantly in excess of this requirement. Additional capital requirements apply to the Barclays Group including Pillar 2A

minimum requirements and capital buffers, including the capital conservation buffer (CCB), the countercyclical capital buffer

(CCyB), the other systemically important institutions (O-SII) buffer and the global systemically important institutions (G-SII)

buffer, as well as PRA buffer requirements (the Pillar 2B), as explained further below.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	157

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Global systemically important banks (G-SIBs), such as the Barclays Group, are subject to a number of additional prudential

requirements, including the requirement to hold additional loss-absorbing capacity and additional capital buffers (including

via the G-SII buffer requirement) above the level otherwise required by Basel III standards.

The Barclays Group is subject to a ‘combined buffer requirement’ consisting of (i) a CCB of 2.5% of RWAs, (ii) systemic risk

buffers (G-SII and O-SII buffers) and (iii) a CCyB of 1% of RWAs. The level of the G-SII buffer is set by the PRA which follows

the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision G-SIB framework. The G-SII buffer ranges from 1% to 3.5% of RWAs in line

with a bank’s systemic importance and must be met with CET1 capital. On 27 November 2025, the FSB published an update

to its list of G-SIBs, maintaining the 1.5% G-SII buffer that applies to the Barclays Group. The CCyB is used to help ensure

capital levels respond to the risk environment. By increasing the CCyB when vulnerabilities are judged to be building up, the

FPC seeks to ensure banks have an additional cushion of capital with which to absorb potential losses, enhancing their

resilience and helping to ensure the stable provision of financial services. The CCyB is composed of UK and overseas

elements, set by authorities in individual jurisdictions. In the UK, the CCyB rate is set by the FPC and is calculated by

reference to banks’ relevant UK exposures. The CCyB rate applicable to the Barclays Group is currently 1%. Like the CCB, the

CCyB must be met entirely with CET1 capital.

The PRA requires UK firms to hold additional capital to cover risks which the PRA assesses are not fully captured by the Pillar

1 capital requirement. The PRA sets this additional capital requirement (Pillar 2A) at least annually, derived from each firm’s

individual capital guidance. Under current PRA rules, the Pillar 2A requirement must be met with at least 56.25% CET1

capital, no more than 43.75% additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital and no more than 25% tier 2 capital. In addition, the capital

that firms use to meet their minimum requirements (Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A) cannot be counted towards meeting the

combined buffer requirement. In February and October 2025, the PRA issued two policy statements (PS2/25 and PS18/25)

regarding changes to the Pillar 2A capital framework, including retiring the refined methodology for calculating Pillar 2A

requirements in light of incoming proposals to implement Basel III standards (discussed further below) and streamlining

firm-specific capital communications. In January 2026, the final rules retiring the refined methodology to Pillar 2A were

published as part of PS2/26.

The PRA may also impose a confidential ‘PRA buffer’ to cover risks over a forward looking planning horizon, including with

regard to firm-specific stresses or management and governance weaknesses. The PRA buffer must be met separately to the

combined buffer requirement, and must be met fully with CET1 capital.

On 2 December 2025, the FPC published its assessment of the appropriate level of capital requirements for the UK banking

system. The FPC judged that the appropriate benchmark for the system-wide level of tier 1 capital is now at around 13% of

RWAs, compared with 14% of RWAs in 2015.

Barclays Bank PLC is subject to prudential regulation by the PRA on a solo-consolidated basis and is required to meet a

minimum Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 10.4% comprising a 4.5% Pillar 1 requirement, a 2.5% capital conservation

buffer, a 0.8% countercyclical buffer and a 2.6% Pillar 2A add on.

On 22 April 2025, the PRA announced that it will introduce new rules that require firms to manage their step-in risk, that is,

the risk which a bank incurs when it provides financial support to an unconsolidated entity that is facing stress in the

absence of, or in excess of, any contractual obligations to provide such support. The PRA’s supervisory statement

concerning step-in risk takes effect from 1 January 2026 and will require firms to put in place policies and processes to

identify and evaluate their relationship with certain unconsolidated entities where they act as a sponsor, invest in their debt

or equity, or have other contractual or non-contractual exposures that lead them to be exposed to the performance of the

entity. Additionally, they must consider whether there are any indicators of significant step-in risk in relation to those entities

that have been assessed as being material and determining whether mitigating action is needed when significant step-in risk

is identified.

In December 2023, the PRA published its first collection of near-final policy proposals for implementing certain remaining

Basel III standards (Basel 3.1), including revised frameworks for market risk, operational risk and Credit Valuation

Adjustment (CVA) risk. A second policy statement was published by the PRA in September 2024, including near-final rules

on credit risk and credit risk mitigation, the implementation of an output floor (requiring reported RWAs calculated under

standardised and modelled approaches to be a minimum of 72.5% of fully standardised calculations), and disclosure and

reporting. The implementation date for these standards has been extended to 1 January 2027, with a transitional period to

ensure full implementation by 1 January 2030. In addition, with effect from 1 January 2026, the PRA has made amendments

to the Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (CRR) Part and Definition of Capital Part of the PRA Rulebook, among others, to

assimilate provisions of the onshored CRR into the PRA Rulebook, with certain changes. Further, on 28 October 2025,

through PS 19/25, the PRA issued “near final” provisions proposed to take effect on 1 January 2027. As well as transposing

certain UK CRR provisions into the PRA Rulebook, including those on securitisation, groups and consolidation, settlement

risk and counterparty credit risk, with accompanying changes to PRA guidance, the near-final provisions implement a

number of policy changes, in particular in relation to securitisation. In January 2026, through PS3/26, the PRA published the

final policy materials and confirmed that there is no substantive difference between these and the near final rules published

as part of PS19/25.  In PS1/26, the PRA announced that it is taking forward adjustments to the implementation of the

comprehensive amendments to the market risk framework under Basel 3.1, known as the Fundamental Review of the

Trading Book (FRTB), and is seeking to implement the majority of these changes from 1 January 2027 (except the

introduction of a new internal model approach (FRTB-IMA), the implementation of which will be delayed to 1 January 2028).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	158

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

PRA CP14/24 proposed certain changes to the large exposures (LE) framework. A number of the proposals took effect on 1

January 2026. The PRA has removed the option for firms to exempt exposures to the UK deposit guarantee scheme (DGS)

for large exposure limits, as well as the option for firms to use immovable property as credit risk mitigation (CRM) for large

exposure purposes and it has eliminated the stricter requirements on large exposures to certain French counterparties. The

PRA is expected to finalise the remaining proposals in CP14/24 in 2026. These proposals include (i) removing the possibility

for firms to use internal model (IM) methods to calculate exposure values to securities financing transactions (SFTs), (ii)

amending the limits to trading book exposures for third-party exposures and for intra-group exposures and (iii) introducing

a mandatory substitution approach to calculate the effect of the use of CRM techniques.

Additional minimum prudential requirements that apply to the Barclays Group to ensure that sufficient resources are

maintained to provide loss absorption in a resolution context are discussed in the sub-section titled ‘TLAC and MREL’ below.

In May 2025, the PRA published a policy statement (PS6/25), amending Supervisory Statement SS5/21, on its approach to

the supervision of international firms. Although the policy statement is primarily relevant to non-UK banks and investment

firms, parts of the policy statement are also relevant to UK banks and set out the PRA’s updated expectations regarding their

booking model arrangements.

Prudential regulation in the EU

In the EU, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is subject to CRR and CRD, each as amended, which implement the Basel III framework.

Under this framework, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is identified as an O-SII by the CBI, which has imposed an O-SII buffer on

Barclays Bank Ireland PLC of 1%.

The implementation of the final part of Basel III (Basel 3.1) is effected through CRR III which has applied since January 2025,

save for those provisions relating to the Fundamental Review of the Trading Book (or FRTB), which have been deferred until

January 2027 by the European Commission through a Delegated Regulation. The European Commission is also consulting

on the approach for implementing the FRTB. The European Banking Authority (EBA) has issued a no-action letter

recommending that competent authorities not prioritise enforcement of the new boundaries of the trading book. Given the

most recent revision to the timetable for the implementation of Basel 3.1 in the UK to January 2027 (which was triggered by

uncertainties in relation to the US implementation), this currently aligns the EU with the UK. The EU implementation

otherwise largely follows Basel 3.1 and has significant overlap with the proposed UK rules, save for important divergences,

for example on certain exposure classes, risk weights and application of models.

The European Commission has also proposed a new approach to securitisation from a prudential perspective with a view to

stimulating the market in securitised products.

Prudential regulation in the US

In the US, the Barclays Bank Group (including BUSL) is subject to prudential requirements for large domestic US banking

organisations, foreign banking organisations and their intermediate holding companies (IHCs) set by the FRB and other US

regulatory agencies. BUSL is a “Category III” IHC. BUSL (and Barclays Bank Delaware) is subject to reduced (calibrated at

85%) standardised liquidity requirements, including the liquidity coverage ratio and the net stable funding ratio (NSFR).

BUSL is also subject to the FRB’s rules regarding single counterparty credit limits (SCCL). The SCCL apply to the largest US

BHCs and foreign banks’ (including the Barclays Bank Group’s) US operations. The SCCL creates two separate limits for

foreign banks, the first on combined US operations (CUSO) and the second on the US IHC (BUSL). The SCCL for BUSL, as a

US BHC, requires that exposure to an unaffiliated counterparty of BUSL not exceed 25% of BUSL’s tier 1 capital. With respect

to the CUSO, the SCCL rule allows certification to the FRB that a foreign bank complies with comparable home country

regulation.

Barclays Bank PLC has complied with the CUSO requirement since 1 January 2022. To date, Barclays Bank PLC has not relied

on home country certification.

Stress testing

The Barclays Group and certain of its members, including Barclays Bank PLC, are subject to supervisory stress testing

exercises in a number of jurisdictions, designed to assess the resilience of banks to adverse economic or financial

developments and ensure that they have robust, forward-looking capital planning processes that account for the risks

associated with their business profile. Assessment by regulators is on both a quantitative and qualitative basis, the latter

focusing on such elements as data provision and stress testing capability, including model risk management and internal

management processes and controls.

Recovery and Resolution

Stabilisation and resolution framework

The current UK framework for recovery and resolution was established by the Banking Act 2009, as amended. The EU

framework was established by the 2014 Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD), as amended by BRRD II.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	159

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

The BoE, as the UK resolution authority, has the power to resolve a UK financial institution that is failing or likely to fail by

exercising certain stabilisation tools, including (i) bail-in: the cancellation, transfer or dilution of a relevant entity’s equity and

write-down or conversion of the claims of a relevant entity’s unsecured creditors (including holders of capital instruments)

and conversion of those claims into equity as necessary to restore solvency; (ii) the transfer of all or part of a relevant entity’s

business to a private sector purchaser; and (iii) the transfer of all or part of a relevant entity’s business to a “bridge bank”

controlled by the BoE. When exercising any of its stabilisation powers, the BoE must generally provide that shareholders bear

first losses, followed by creditors in accordance with the priority of their claims in insolvency.

In order to enable the exercise of its stabilisation powers, the BoE may impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to

terminate, accelerate or close out contracts, or override events of default or termination rights that might otherwise be

invoked as a result of a resolution action and modify contractual arrangements in certain circumstances (including a

variation of the terms of any securities). HM Treasury may also amend the law for the purpose of enabling it to use its

powers under this regime effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.

In addition and distinct from bail-in, the BoE has the power to permanently write-down, or convert into equity, tier 1 capital

instruments, tier 2 capital instruments and internal eligible liabilities at the point of non-viability of an institution pursuant to

broader resolution powers under the Banking Act.

The BoE’s preferred approach for the resolution of the Barclays Group is a bail-in strategy with a single point of entry at

Barclays PLC. Under such a strategy, Barclays PLC’s subsidiaries (including entities within Barclays Bank Group) would

remain operational while Barclays PLC’s capital instruments and eligible liabilities would be written down or converted to

equity in order to recapitalise the Barclays Group and allow for the continued provision of services and operations

throughout the resolution. The order in which the bail-in tool is applied reflects the hierarchy of capital instruments under

applicable UK legislation and rules, and otherwise respecting the hierarchy of claims in an ordinary insolvency. Accordingly,

the more subordinated the claim, the more likely losses will be suffered by owners of the claim.

The PRA has made rules that require authorised firms to draw up recovery plans and resolution packs. Recovery plans are

designed to outline credible actions that authorised firms could implement in the event of severe stress in order to restore

their business to a stable and sustainable condition. The submission of resolution packs was suspended by the PRA in 2018

until further notice and replaced by annual resolution reporting. It continues to be suspended pending PRA assessment of

areas of potential duplication between different reporting expectations. The Barclays Group, however, is required to provide

the PRA with a recovery plan periodically, although the Barclays Group maintains and refreshes this on an annual basis.

Removal of potential impediments to an orderly resolution of a banking group or one or more of its subsidiaries is

considered as part of the BoE’s resolution planning for each firm, and the BoE can require firms to make significant changes

in order to enhance their resolvability through exercising its various powers to direct to address any firm relevant issues.

Under the BoE’s Resolvability Assessment Framework (RAF), firms are required to have in place capabilities covering three

resolvability outcomes: (i) adequate financial resources; (ii) being able to continue to do business through resolution and

restructuring; and (iii) being able to communicate and co-ordinate within the firm and with authorities. Barclays Group’s

second self-assessment report on resolvability under the RAF was submitted to the PRA/BoE in 2023 and the BoE’s

assessment on the report was published in August 2024. The BoE identified that there were no shortcomings, deficiencies or

substantive impediments in the Barclays Group’s capabilities that could impede Barclays’ ability to execute the preferred

resolution strategy. The BoE did note that there were three areas for further enhancement relating to the provision of timely

valuations, in respect of operational continuity in resolution relating to the inclusion of resolution-resilient language in

service contracts, and restructuring planning. Barclays is taking steps to ensure that these enhancements are made as part

of Barclays’ broader commitment to further embed, test and refine the Group’s resolution capabilities and operational

preparedness for resolution. In January 2025, amendments to the PRA rules were introduced that require firms to make

submissions under the relevant resolution rules on a ‘periodic’ basis rather than the previous fixed two-year cycles (PS1/25).

The BoE and PRA require firms to submit their next resolution self-assessment in 2026, with a public disclosure to be made

in 2027.

While regulators in many jurisdictions have indicated a preference for single point of entry resolution for the Barclays Group,

additional resolution or bankruptcy provisions may apply to certain non-UK Barclays Bank Group entities or branches.

In the EU, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is required by the ECB to submit a standalone BRRD compliant recovery plan on an

annual basis. As a Significant Institution under direct ECB supervision, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC falls within the remit of the

Single Resolution Board (SRB). Under the provisions of the BRRD and EU Single Resolution Mechanism Regulation (SRMR),

the SRB is required to determine the optimal resolution strategy for Barclays Bank Ireland PLC and, also, to prepare a

resolution plan for the bank. The SRB undertakes this work within the context of the BoE’s preferred resolution strategy of

single point of entry with bail in at Barclays PLC. In order to carry out its mandate, the SRB collects detailed structural and

other information from Barclays Bank Ireland PLC on a regular basis, as well as engaging with the bank to identify and

address impediments to resolution. This work is done in coordination with the BoE, as the Barclays Group’s resolution

authority. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC meets the SRB’s requirements for resolution as set out in the SRB’s ‘Expectations for

Banks’.

In April 2023, the European Commission also proposed certain reforms to strengthen the EU’s bank crisis management and

deposit insurance (CMDI) framework, including extending depositor protection to public entities and client money deposited

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	160

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

in certain types of client funds. The EU legislative process remains ongoing and the future of this proposal is not yet clear in

the new legislative cycle of 2024-2029.

In the US, Title I of the Dodd-Frank Act (DFA), as amended, and the implementing regulations issued by the FRB and the

FDIC require each foreign-based bank holding company with assets of $250bn or more, including those within the Barclays

Group, to prepare and submit a plan for the orderly resolution of subsidiaries and operations that are domiciled in the US or

conducted in whole or material part in the US in the event of future material financial distress or failure. The Barclays Group

submitted a “targeted plan” in December 2021. The agencies did not identify any shortcomings or deficiencies with the

Barclays Group’s 2021 US Resolution Plan. In August 2024, the FRB and FDIC finalised new guidance for foreign triennial full

filers (such as the Barclays Group) that would affect the content required to be included in the US Resolution Plan. The final

guidance generally represents an expansion of the current 165(d) resolution planning guidance applicable to the Barclays

Group. The Barclays Group submitted its “full” US Resolution Plan in respect of its US operations on 1 October 2025.

BUSL may also be resolved under the Orderly Liquidation Authority established by Title II of the DFA, a regime for the orderly

liquidation of systemically important financial institutions by the FDIC, as an alternative to proceedings under the US

Bankruptcy Code. In addition, the licensing authorities of Barclays Bank PLC New York branch and of Barclays Bank Delaware

have the authority to take possession of the business and property of the applicable branch or entity they license and/or to

revoke or suspend such license.

TLAC and MREL

The Barclays Group is under the supervision of the BoE, as the UK resolution authority, and is subject to a Minimum

Requirement for Own Funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL), which includes a component reflecting the FSB’s standards on

total loss absorbing capacity (TLAC).

Since 1 January 2022, G-SIBs with resolution entities incorporated in the UK have been required to meet an MREL equivalent

to the higher of: (i) two times the sum of their Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements; or (ii) the higher of two times their

leverage ratio requirement or 6.75% of leverage exposures. The Barclays Group is also required to meet binding external

MRELs in 2025 on the basis of a bail-in resolution strategy comprising a binding minimum capital requirement of 12.8% of

RWAs, MREL of 25.7% of RWAs, and a loss-absorbing capacity (MREL plus buffers) of 30.5% of RWAs. Internal MREL for

material subsidiaries is subject to a scalar in the 75-90% range of the external requirement that would apply to the

subsidiary if it were a resolution entity. On 15 July 2025, the BoE published a policy statement on amendments to its

statement of policy (the MREL SoP) regarding its approach to setting MREL, which took effect on 1 January 2026. The focus

of the amendments is consolidation and simplification through the restatement (where appropriate and with modifications)

of provisions relating to TLAC in the MREL SoP. Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is subject to the SRB’s MREL policy, as issued in

May 2024, in respect of the internal MREL that it will be required to issue to the Barclays Group. The SRB’s current

calibration of internal MREL for non-resolution entities is expressed as two ratios that have to be met in parallel: (a) two

times the sum of: (i) the firm’s Pillar 1 requirement; and (ii) its Pillar 2 requirement; and (b) two times the leverage ratio

requirement. The SRB’s policy does not apply any scalar in respect of the internal MREL requirement. Under the SRB MREL

policy, a bank specific adjustment and a market confidence charge can be applied by the SRB to MREL requirements. Since 1

January 2024, a revised deduction regime applies for the indirect subscription of instruments eligible for internal MREL to

avoid the double-counting of MREL elements at the level of intermediate entities within a resolution group.

In the US, the FRB’s TLAC rule includes provisions that require BUSL to have: (i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible

long-term debt; (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital

plus eligible long-term debt); and (iii) a specified common equity buffer. In addition, the FRB’s TLAC rule prohibits BUSL, for

so long as the Barclays Group’s overall resolution plan treats BUSL as a non-resolution entity, from issuing TLAC to entities

other than those within the Barclays Group.

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)

The UK has a statutory compensation fund called the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS), which is intended to

protect customers on the failure of authorised financial services firms, and which is funded by way of annual levies on most

authorised firms. The maximum cover under the FSCS in relation to a deposit is £120,000 per eligible depositor per bank.

The Bank Resolution (Recapitalisation) Act 2025 introduced a new option for funding the continuity of banking services

through the recapitalisation of a failing firm. The funds needed for recapitalisation may now be provided by the FSCS at the

direction of the Bank of England and subsequently recouped via a levy on firms. This option may support the sale of all, or

part, of the firm to a private sector purchaser or a transfer to a bridge bank, where that is judged to be in the public interest.

This expands the functions of the FSCS in relation to the failure of deposit takers beyond enabling the making of

compensation payments to eligible depositors of failed banks to include enabling the making of recapitalisation payments

where required to do so by the Bank of England acting as resolution authority.

Structural reform

In the UK, the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 put in place a framework for ring-fencing certain operations of

large banks. Ring-fencing requires, among other things, the separation of the retail and SME deposit-taking activities of UK

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	161

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

banks from wholesale and investment banking operations into a legally distinct, operationally separate and economically

independent entity (i.e. a ‘ring-fenced bank’), which is not permitted to undertake a range of activities. Under FSMA, the PRA

is required to review its ring-fencing rules every five years following the rules coming into force, with the first report having

been published in January 2024. The PRA intends to consult in due course on targeted reforms to its ring-fencing rules as a

result of its review, although the overall conclusion was that most of those rules are performing satisfactorily. Separately,

HM Treasury has introduced legislative amendments to implement near-term reforms to the ring-fencing regime which took

effect in February 2025. These reforms have, amongst other measures, increased the core deposit threshold (which

determines whether a UK bank is subject to the ring-fencing regime) from £25bn to £35bn, exempted predominantly retail-

focused banks from the ring-fencing regime by introducing a secondary threshold (referred to as the trading assets

exemption), permitted ring-fenced banks to establish branches and subsidiaries outside of the UK or the EEA (subject to PRA

rules) and introduced a new four-year transition period for UK non-ring-fenced banks to comply with the ring-fencing

regime following mergers or acquisitions.  In the UK Chancellor’s 2025 Mansion House speech the UK Government

committed to meaningful reform of the UK's ring-fencing regime, with HM Treasury confirming it will undertake a short

review of the ring-fencing regime, working with the BoE and reporting into the Economic Secretary to HM Treasury. The

review will focus on allowing ring-fenced banks to provide more products and services to UK businesses, addressing

inefficiencies in how ring-fencing is applied to banking groups, and examining the case for allowing banks to share

resources and services more flexibly across the ring-fence. The review is expected to report by early 2026.

In the EU, structural reform is taking the form of further integration of the banking union and on the financial markets side

the Savings and Investment Union (SIU), which intends to further consolidate and integrate financial and capital markets in

the EU. This will coincide with an increasing focus on legislation by way of directly applicable regulations and the intended

transfer of further supervisory powers to the European Supervisory Authorities (ESAs), including, in particular, the European

Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA). Aside from the SIU, which consists of a number of initiatives, structural reform in

the EU will also occur through the Retail Investment Strategy (RIS), which intends to incentivise further retail investment in

the EU. Under the RIS, retail investors should receive a higher level of investor protection, the use of inducements will be

limited, information to client will focus on value for money over less tangible aspects and there will be increasing efforts to

improve financial literacy and crack down on financial influencers and other unregulated investment advisers.

US regulation places further substantive limits on the activities that may be conducted by banks and holding companies,

including foreign banking organisations such as the Barclays Group. The ‘Volcker Rule’, which was part of the DFA and

which came into effect in the US in 2015, prohibits banking entities from undertaking certain proprietary trading activities

and limits such entities’ ability to sponsor or invest in certain private equity funds and hedge funds (in each case broadly

defined). As required by the rule, the Barclays Group has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and

monitoring programme addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities (both inside and outside of the US).

Market infrastructure regulation

In recent years, regulators as well as global-standard setting bodies such as the International Organization of Securities

Commissions (IOSCO) have focused on improving transparency and reducing risk in markets, particularly risks related to

over-the-counter (OTC) derivative transactions. This focus has resulted in a variety of new regulations across the G20

countries and beyond that require or encourage on-venue trading, clearing, posting of margin and disclosure of pre-trade

and post-trade information.

The wholesale financial markets in the EU are facing reform to further harmonise supervision of financial markets and

market infrastructure and integrate the approach to the EU financial markets under the Markets in Financial Instruments

Directive and Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation (collectively referred to as MiFID II), which will affect how the

Barclays Bank Group transacts with counterparties and customers in the EU and how it packages its investment services.

Various aspects of MiFID II and related legislation have been subject to change as a result of the EU’s ongoing focus on

regulatory simplification and the development of the SIU, with a goal of increasing the involvement of investors in the EU

financial markets. As part of this, in December 2025 the European Commission announced its plan for the further

development of capital market integration and supervision within the EU, which will lead to significant central securities

depositories (CSDs), central counterparties (CCPs) and trading venues being subjected to direct supervision by the ESMA.

This follows the trend of granting ESMA supervisory powers over key market infrastructure parties, such as trade

repositories, consolidated tape providers and credit rating agencies.

In the UK, FSMA 2023 introduced reforms to remove certain requirements which were previously applicable to trading in

wholesale markets and to promote investment in line with the Wholesale Markets Review. Other changes, for example on

trade transparency requirements have been progressed by way of amendments to regulatory rules and guidance and an FCA

review of the UK transaction reporting regime is underway.

Regulation of the derivatives market

The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) imposes requirements in the EU and the UK which are designed to

improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market. EMIR has operational and financial

impacts on the Barclays Bank Group, including by imposing collateral requirements on the Barclays Bank Group, as well as a

requirement to centrally clear certain OTC derivatives contracts with certain market participants. Following the UK’s

departure from the EU, EMIR rules were onshored into English law and now form part of UK assimilated law (UK EMIR).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	162

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Access to the clearing services of certain Central Counterparties (CCPs) used by Barclays Bank Group entities is currently

permitted under temporary equivalence and recognition regimes in the UK and the EU. In the UK, the temporary recognition

regime for non-UK CCPs has now been extended until the end of December 2027. Targeted amendments to the UK EMIR

reporting framework were implemented in September 2024, which aimed to align the regime with international guidance

(where appropriate). In August 2025, the PRA published a policy statement on amendments to trade repository reporting

requirements under UK EMIR. The implementation date for these changes is 26 January 2026.

In the EU, access to the clearing services of certain non-EU CCPs used by Barclays Bank Group entities is permitted through

recognised third country CCPs. For UK CCPs, this recognition is currently envisaged to end on 30 June 2028. In April 2024,

amendments to the EU EMIR reporting requirements (relating to the details and formats of reports, for example) introduced

by regulatory and implementing technical standards under the EMIR REFIT Regulation took effect. Further proposals to

amend the EU EMIR framework (Regulation (EU) 2024/2987 and Directive (EU) 2024/2994, referred to collectively as EMIR

3) came into force on 24 December 2024. The changes introduced by EMIR 3 seek to reduce the reliance and exposure to

third-country CCPs and enhance the competitiveness of CCPs in the EU. EMIR 3 will require EU entities to clear a

representative amount of their trades through EU authorised CCPs, as part of the new “active account” regime which

requires certain financial and non-financial counterparties exceeding the clearing threshold in defined categories of

derivative contracts to hold at least one clearing account at CCPs authorised in the EU. These changes aim to reduce the

concentration of exposures to systemically important UK CCPs in particular, but other EMIR 3 changes will also apply. For

example, EMIR 3 will amend the intragroup transactions definition, removing the need for equivalence decisions to have

been issued, which may make it easier to rely on the relevant intragroup exemptions in respect of clearing and margin

requirements.

US regulators have imposed similar rules as in the EU with respect to the mandatory on-venue trading and clearing of certain

derivatives, and post-trade transparency, as well as in relation to the margining of OTC derivatives.

In December 2017, the CFTC and the European Commission recognised the trading venues of each other’s jurisdiction to

allow market participants to comply with mandatory on-venue trading requirements while trading on certain venues

recognised by the other jurisdiction. In August 2024, the CFTC extended temporary relief that would permit trading venues

and market participants located in the UK to continue to rely on this mutual recognition framework following the withdrawal

of the UK from the EU.

Certain participants in US swap markets are required to register with the CFTC as ‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’

and/or, with the SEC as ‘security-based swap dealers’ or ‘major security-based swap participants’. Such registrants are

subject to CFTC and/or SEC regulation and oversight. Barclays Bank PLC is registered with the CFTC as a swap dealer and

conditionally registered with the SEC as a security-based swap dealer. In addition, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC is registered as

a Swap Dealer with the CFTC.

Accordingly, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are both subject to CFTC rules on business conduct, record-

keeping and reporting, and Barclays Bank PLC is subject to SEC rules on business conduct, record-keeping and reporting.

However, since Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are non-US swap dealers, and Barclays Bank PLC is a non-

US security-based swap dealer, whether and the extent to which such CFTC or SEC requirements apply to any particular

swap transaction may depend on whether the counterparty to such swap transaction is a US person or guaranteed by or

affiliated with a US person, or whether the transaction is arranged, negotiated, or executed by US-based Barclays personnel.

Additionally, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC have elected to comply with certain CFTC/SEC requirements,

as applicable, through ‘substituted compliance’ with EU/UK requirements pursuant to relevant determinations and related

relief issued by the CFTC and the SEC, as applicable.

Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are subject to FRB rules on capital and margin.

In 2024, the CFTC adopted amendments to its capital and financial reporting requirements for swap dealers. The new rules

codify certain no-action relief and add specificity as to existing reporting requirements.

Other significant regulatory developments in the US

In 2024, the standard settlement cycle in the U.S. for most broker-dealer transactions in securities was shortened from two

business days after the trade (T+2) to one business day after the trade (T+1). The UK and EU markets will seek to introduce

similarly shortened settlement cycles.

On 13 October 2023, the SEC adopted new rules to establish broad reporting requirements of the terms of securities loans to

FINRA for public dissemination, and requiring FINRA to make publicly available certain information it receives regarding

those lending transactions. On the same day, the SEC also adopted new rules requiring a wide range of firms to file monthly

reports with the SEC for large short positions in equity securities on a new Form SHO and amendments to the National

Market System plan governing the Consolidated Audit Trail, which adds an additional reporting requirement for CAT-

reporting firms relying on the bona fide market maker exception to Reg SHO’s locate requirement. These reporting rules

(with respect to the securities lending and monthly large short positions reporting requirements, but not the bona fide

market maker identifier) were successfully challenged in court, and have been remanded to allow the agency to consider the

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	163

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

rules’ cumulative impact. On 3 December 2025, the SEC provided an extension of the compliance dates for large short

position reporting to 2 January 2028 and for securities lending reporting to 28 September 2028.

On 13 December 2023, the SEC adopted rule amendments under the Exchange Act that, among other things, will mandate

central clearing of certain US Treasury securities transactions and amend the broker-dealer customer protection rule as it

applies to margin posted for certain transactions in US Treasury securities. These rule amendments could impose additional

costs on the Barclays Bank Group’s Treasury securities trading activity. Although there is some discussion as to whether

deadlines for implementation might be extended, the amended rule’s compliance date has been extended to 31 December

2026 for cash transactions and 30 June 2027 for repurchase transactions.

On 18 September 2024, the SEC unanimously amended certain rules under Regulation NMS (National Market System) to

adopt variable minimum pricing increments, reduce access fee caps for protected quotations, and require that the amount

of exchange fees and rebates be determinable at the time of execution, among other changes. The rule survived a recent

challenge and the SEC has extended the compliance timelines for the amendments regarding the minimum pricing

increment and access fee caps until November 2026 and the exchange fee determinability rule until February 2026.

On 20 December 2024, the SEC adopted amendments to the broker-dealer customer protection rule to require certain

broker-dealers to perform their reserve computations for accounts of customers and proprietary accounts of broker-dealers

and make any required deposits into their reserve bank accounts daily rather than weekly. As a result of the amendments,

BCI will be required to adjust its existing processes to move from a weekly to a daily computation. The compliance date for

the rule change was initially 31 December 2025; however, the SEC has extended the compliance date until 30 June 2026.

Other regulation

Consumer protection, non-financial misconduct, SMCR reform, account closures and push payment fraud

The FCA’s consumer duty has effect in relation to new and existing products or services that are open to sale or renewal, as

well as closed products and services. The duty sets higher expectations for the standard of care that firms provide to retail

customers and impacts all aspects of Barclays’ retail businesses, including every retail customer journey, product and service

as well as Barclays Bank Group’s relationships with partners, suppliers and third parties. There are ongoing costs for the

industry as a result of extensive monitoring and evidential requirements in respect of the consumer duty. The FCA has

engaged with the industry on streamlining its rules in light of the introduction of the consumer duty, and will continue to

look for opportunities to streamline requirements and reduce complexity for businesses. The consumer duty remains a

priority for the FCA for its supervision of the retail banking industry and its expectations for firms to embed the consumer

duty into their culture and purpose continue in 2026.

Other areas of strategic priority for the FCA’s supervision include the fair treatment of customers in financial difficulty,

access for customers to payment accounts and banking services (discussed further below), compliance with operational

resilience rules, the continued management of financial crime and fraud risks, and the role of banks in developing

sustainable finance offerings and the importance of ensuring that sustainability-related claims associated with products are

clear, fair and not misleading. The FCA is consulting on an industry-wide compensation scheme for motor finance

customers who were treated unfairly, following the landmark Supreme Court judgement in Johnson v FirstRand Bank Ltd

(London Branch) (t/a MotoNovo Finance) [2025] UKSC 33. In Johnson, the Supreme Court found that an unfair relationship

under the Consumer Credit Act 1974 existed between a motor finance lender and its customer, based on the particular facts

of the case.

The final terms of the compensation scheme remain uncertain pending responses to the FCA’s consultation paper and

publication of the FCA's Policy Statement and final scheme rules, which is currently expected in early 2026. Accordingly, the

legal and regulatory outcomes and the nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if required, remain uncertain.

On 12 December 2025, following its 2 July 2025 consultation paper (CP25/18). the FCA published its policy statement in

relation to tackling non-financial misconduct in financial services (PS25/23). The policy statement provides firms with more

power to take robust action against serious misconduct and provides further clarity on situations where non-financial

misconduct amounts to a breach of the FCA’s rules. The new guidance comes into force on 1 September 2026 alongside the

new FCA rule explicitly covering bullying, harassment and violence.

In July 2025, the PRA and the FCA both released consultation papers (CP18/25 and CP25/21) regarding SMCR reform,

including allowing greater flexibility for firms where unexpected or temporary changes in management are required. The UK

government is also considering the abolition of the certification regime to replace this with a more proportionate approach.

HM Treasury previously announced plans to increase the notice period for closing accounts to 90 days and introduce a

requirement to provide reasons for the decision to exit (save in financial crime exits), which have now been enshrined

through statutory instrument (The Payment Services and Payment Accounts (Contract Termination)(Amendment)

Regulations 2025) that are to take effect from April 2026.

FSMA 2023 contains provisions mandating that the Payment Systems Regulator (PSR) and any successor regulator

(including, as described above, the potential transfer of the PSRs functions to the FCA) require the reimbursement of

authorised push payment scams by payment service providers, including Barclays. This new reimbursement requirement

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	164

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

took effect in October 2024. It has imposed a maximum reimbursement limit of £85,000 with costs split 50:50 between the

sending and receiving firms. Similar but less stringent rules will apply in the EU with the expected adoption in 2026 of the

proposed amendment to the Payment Services Directive and the new Payment Services Regulation (together known as

PSD3).

In the EU, new initiatives such as the proposed Regulation on Financial Data Access (FIDA) establish a framework on data

sharing between financial institutions at the initiative of customers, allowing financial institutions to better tailor products

and services.

In the US, changing federal enforcement priorities and legal interpretations regarding diversity and inclusion programmes

present unknown and evolving risks.

Data protection

Most jurisdictions where the Barclays Bank Group operates have adopted or are considering comprehensive laws

concerning data protection and privacy. Regulations regarding data protection are increasing in number, as well as levels of

enforcement, as manifested in increased amounts of fines and the severity of other penalties. We expect that personal

privacy and data protection will continue to receive attention and focus from regulators, as well as public scrutiny and

attention. As the global data protection regulatory landscape continues to evolve, non-compliance with applicable

requirements may result in regulatory fines and other penalties. In response to ongoing legal and regulatory developments,

the Barclays Bank Group will continue to assess potential regulatory nexus arising from its operational and geographic

footprint.

The EU’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) and the UK’s General Data Protection Regulation (UK GDPR) provide a

framework of rights and duties designed to safeguard personal data and apply to the activities conducted from an

establishment in the EU or the UK, respectively. The extraterritorial effect of the GDPR and the UK GDPR means entities

established outside the EU or the UK may fall respectively within the GDPR or the UK GDPR’s ambit when offering goods or

services to EU/UK based customers or clients or conducting behavioural monitoring of individuals in the EU/UK. The UK’s

Data (Use and Access) Act 2025 (DUAA) became law on 19 June 2025, with the first provisions coming into force on 19

August. One of the effects on the DUAA is a divergence between the EU GDPR and UK GDPR, including the threshold

approach to international data transfers, and more flexible rules for automated decision-making. Most provisions of the EU’s

Data Act (Regulation (2023/2854) came into effect on 12 September 2025. The Act aims to enhance the availability and

reuse of data generated by consumers and businesses, particularly from connected products and related services, by

granting users easier access to their data and enabling share between service providers.

The data regime in China is likely to continue to evolve, governing the collection, processing and cross-border transfers of

China-based individuals' personal data and restricted data as defined in national and sectoral rules (e.g., macro/derived

characteristics data which, if tampered with, divulged or destroyed, may endanger China's economic operation, social

stability, national security - among other things - having regard to the volume and granularity of the data). In India, the

implementation rules of the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023 (namely Digital Personal Data Protection Rules,

2025) has been published on 13 November 2025 to fully implement the Act in 2027 in a phased manner for a robust

mechanism of privacy protection and rights. Except under certain exemptions, its scope would include the processing of

personal data in India and would extend to the processing of, and offering goods and services to, India-based individuals

outside of India.

In the US, Barclays Bank Delaware is subject to the US Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act (GLBA) and the California Consumer Privacy

Act of 2018, as amended by the California Privacy Rights Act of 2020 (CPRA). The GLBA limits the use and disclosure of

non-public personal information to non-affiliated third parties, and requires financial institutions to provide written notice of

their privacy policies and practices and implement certain information security policies and practices. Any violations of the

GLBA could subject Barclays Bank Delaware to additional reporting requirements or regulatory investigation or audits by the

financial regulators. More broadly, the Barclays Bank Group’s US operations are subject to the CPRA which applies to

personal information that is not collected, processed, sold or disclosed subject to the GLBA. The CPRA requires applicable

members of the Barclays Bank Group to both provide California residents with additional disclosures regarding the

collection, use and sharing of personal information and grant California residents access, deletion, correction and other

rights, including the right to opt-out of certain sales or transfers of personal information and the right to limit the processing

of sensitive personal information to certain purposes. Additionally, in September 2025, the California Privacy Protection

Agency amended the CPRA regulations, with various implementation deadlines through 2028. The amended CPRA

regulations contain significant updates, including compliance obligations for use of automated decision making

technologies to make a signification decision (including financial, lending and employment-related decisions) about a

consumer, risk assessment obligations and requirements to conduct cybersecurity audits. Any violations of the CPRA may

be subject to enforcement by the California Privacy Protection Agency and the California Attorney General and the

imposition of monetary penalties, as well as potential lawsuits arising from the private right of action provided to California

residents in the case of certain data breaches. Bills proposed in the United States Congress and in the legislatures of various

US states from time to time, if enacted, may have further impact on the data privacy practices of Barclays’ US operations. In

addition, all 50 states have laws including obligations to provide notification of security breaches of computer databases that

contain personal information to affected individuals, state officers and others.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	165

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

In May 2024, the SEC adopted amendments to expand the scope of and introduce new requirements under Regulation S-P,

a set of privacy rules adopted pursuant to the GLBA and the Fair and Accurate Credit Transactions Act of 2003 that govern

the treatment of non-public personal information about consumers by certain financial institutions, including BCI. In

addition to expanding the scope of customer information protected under Regulation S-P’s safeguards and disposal rules,

the amendments will require covered financial institutions to (i) develop, implement and maintain written policies and

procedures for an incident response programme reasonably designed to detect, respond to and recover from unauthorised

access to or use of customer information, (ii) notify individuals whose sensitive customer information was, or is reasonably

likely to have been, accessed or used without authorisation as soon as practicable, but not later than 30 days, after

becoming aware that an incident has or is reasonably likely to have occurred and (iii) establish, maintain and enforce written

policies and procedures reasonably designed to require oversight and monitoring of service providers, including by requiring

relevant service providers to provide notification to the covered institution as soon as possible, but no later than 72 hours,

after becoming aware of a breach in security has occurred resulting in unauthorised access to a customer information

system maintained by the service provider.

In October 2024, the CFPB released its final rule titled “Required Rulemaking on Personal Financial Data Rights” as required

to implement Section 1033 of the Consumer Financial Protection Act of 2010. The final rule requires banks, credit unions

and other financial service providers that meet the definition of covered data providers to make covered data regarding

covered products and services available in an electronic form to consumers and authorised third parties, subject to a

number of requirements. The final rule also sets out criteria a third party must satisfy in order to be an authorised third party

and therefore access consumers’ data, including certifying to the relevant consumer it will satisfy certain obligations

regarding the collection, use and retention of covered data and obtaining express and informed consumer consent.

Compliance with this rule will be phased in over several years, with the first set of requirements taking effect from 1 April

2026, and with Barclays Bank Delaware becoming subject to the rule on 1 April 2027. However, in August 2025, the CFPB

released an Advanced Notice of Proposed Rulemaking, titled “Personal Financial Data Rights Reconsideration”, to seek

comments related to implementation of Section 1033, and, in October 2025, the US District Court for the Eastern District of

Kentucky issued a preliminary injunction preventing the CFPB from enforcing the Required Rulemaking on Personal Financial

Data Rights while the rule is reconsidered.

Finally, jurisdictions are increasingly enacting data localisation laws that require certain categories of data to be stored within

specific geographic boundaries or not be accessible in certain specified foreign jurisdictions or by certain foreign actors. For

example, the Department of Justice's final rule implementing Executive Order 14117 prohibits or restricts certain

transactions that may enable access by countries of concern or covered persons to US Government-related data or

Americans' bulk sensitive personal data. In a review of its cross-border data transfer process, Barclays Bank Group found no

transactions implicated by the rule and is implementing measures to ensure continued compliance with the rule.

Cybersecurity, cryptoassets and operational resilience

Regulators globally continue to focus on cybersecurity risk management, organisational operational resilience and overall

soundness across all financial services firms, with customer and market expectations of uninterrupted access to financial

services remaining at an all-time high.

The regulatory focus has been further heightened by the increasing number of high-profile ransomware and other supply

chain attacks seen across the industry in recent years and the growing reliance of financial services on Cloud and other third

party service providers. This is evidenced by the continuing introduction of new laws and regulatory frameworks directed at

enhancing resilience of both firms and their critical third party providers. The UK operational resilience framework

introduced in March 2021 requires in-scope firms to identify their important business services, set impact tolerances metrics

for the maximum tolerable level of disruption for each important business service, and carry out an annual self-assessment

of the firm’s operational resilience, which is approved by the board and informed by the firm’s scenario testing regime. In

December 2024, the FCA and the PRA each published a consultation paper (CP24/28 and CP17/24 respectively) on

proposals for firms to report operational incidents and their material third party arrangements to enhance the operational

resilience framework. The FCA’s consultation period ended in March 2025 and we are still expecting publication of its

finalised rules. The PRA has stated that the proposed implementation date for its proposals will be no earlier than the second

half of 2026.

The UK Government’s response to its consultation on proposed legislative measures on ransomware was published in July

2025, considering proposals for the introduction of a ransomware payment prevention regime and mandatory incident

reporting. It is unclear at this stage whether or how these proposals will be reflected in legislation and/or regulation, but if

progressed they would constitute the first specific measures in UK law to counter ransomware payment.

On 17 July 2024, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) finalised revisions to the prudential framework for

banks’ exposures to cryptoassets. The standards set out minimum requirements, which means implementation by BCBS

members may result in stricter standards that may include outright prohibition in bank dealings in certain cryptoassets.

Implementation of the standards by member jurisdictions, including the PRA and BoE, was expected by 1 January 2026,

although the BCBS announced in November 2025 that it intends to conduct a further, targeted review of the standards.

Furthermore, on 6 November 2023, the PRA published a ‘Dear CEO’ letter setting out its expectations for deposit-takers

which plan to introduce innovations in the use of deposits, e-money and regulated stablecoins. In this letter, the PRA

provided that deposit-taking entities must only provide innovations in digital money to retail customers in the form of

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	166

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

deposits, and any issuance of e-money or regulated stablecoins to retail customers must be done from separate non-deposit

taking entities within the banking group. Separately, amendments to the Money Laundering, Terrorist Financing and

Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer) Regulations 2017 (MLRs) have brought cryptoassets within the scope of AML

restrictions, including customer due diligence requirements and the FATF travel rule. Banks must therefore comply with

these requirements when facilitating transactions in cryptoassets. The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000

(Cryptoassets) Regulations 2026 will introduce new regulated activities in relation to certain categories of cryptoassets from

25 October 2027, and enable the FCA to issue directions, guidance and rules in advance of full commencement on 25

October 2027.

FSMA 2023 introduced a new regime for designated critical third party providers (CTPs). In November 2024, the FCA, PRA,

and BoE jointly released the final rules and expectations for designated CTPs with the final rules having taken effect from 1

January 2025. Whilst the new rules apply to designated CTPs themselves, there may be additional impact and costs for the

Barclays Bank Group incurred in connection with updating existing supplier arrangements to reflect the new CTP

requirements where suppliers are designated as critical CTPs.

The EU’s Digital Operational Resilience Act (DORA) entered into force in January 2023 and has applied from 17 January

2025, introducing comprehensive and sector specific regulation on Information Communication Technologies (ICT) incident

reporting, testing and third party risk management, and provides for direct oversight of critical third party providers servicing

the EU financial services sector. Firms which do not meet the regulations under DORA can face significant fines and other

regulatory measures. Particularly for systemic banks, (digital) operational resilience and cybersecurity are at the forefront of

the ECB’s and other supervisory authorities’ priorities.

The EU’s Network and Information Security (NIS) Directive, which aimed to improve the resilience of network and

information systems in the EU against cybersecurity risks, has been updated. The revised version, NIS2, applies from 18

October 2024 and imposes stricter security, governance and incident reporting requirements. Failure to comply can lead to

significant fines and senior manager liability among other things. By 17 April 2025, EU member states were required to

identify and list the specific entities that fall within the scope of NIS2. The extraterritorial effect of NIS2 means entities

established outside the EU may fall within its ambit if providing certain services in the EU. The UK’s original NIS Directive was

transposed into UK law under the NIS Regulations 2018. These regulations are set to be strengthened under the new Cyber

Security and Resilience Bill, which was introduced to Parliament on 12 November 2025. The Bill aims to enhance national

resilience by expanding the scope of the regulations to cover more digital services and supply chains, increase incident

reporting, and grant regulators greater powers to collect information and investigate potential vulnerabilities.

In 2023, the SEC adopted disclosure rules regarding cybersecurity risk management, governance and incident reporting by

US-listed companies, including foreign private issuers such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC. Pursuant to those rules,

if Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC are required or determine to disclose material cybersecurity incidents under home

country or stock exchange rules, they are required to also furnish this information with the SEC on the SEC's website, in

accordance with their obligations as foreign private issuers.

In late 2023, the New York Department of Financial Services (NYDFS) amended its cybersecurity regulation applying to the

New York Branch of Barclays Bank PLC, with various implementation deadlines through November 2025. The NYDFS’s

amended cybersecurity regulation contains significant updates, including enhanced notification requirements, cybersecurity

governance obligations, and requirements applicable to cybersecurity policies and procedures. In May 2025, requirements to

conduct automated scans or manual reviews of information systems for vulnerability management, to implement policies

governing access privileges and to implement certain controls for monitoring and responding to threats (such as controls

designed to protect against malicious code) went into effect, and in November 2025, requirements to expand multi-factor

authentication and to implement policies and procedures for the creation and maintenance of an asset inventory became

effective.

The existing and anticipated requirements specified in the UK, EU, and US for increased controls will serve to improve

industry standardisation and resilience capabilities, enhancing Barclays Bank Group’s ability to deliver services during

periods of potential disruption. Such measures are resulting in increased technology and compliance costs for the Barclays

Bank Group.

Artificial intelligence

A number of jurisdictions where the Barclays Bank Group operates have adopted or are considering adopting new laws

regulating artificial intelligence (AI).

The EU’s Artificial Intelligence Act (EU AI Act), which entered into force on 1 August 2024, provides rights and duties

designed to ensure the safe and ethical deployment of AI. The EU AI Act requires organisations to ensure suitable levels of AI

literacy within their workforce (albeit this obligation may be removed as a result of the EU’s Digital Omnibus proposals put

forward in November 2025) and categorises AI systems based on their level of risk. It has a phased approach to compliance,

with the literacy obligations and the first set of requirements prohibiting certain uses of AI having applied from 2 February

2025, and rules on general purpose AI models having applied from 2 August 2025. It also establishes a rigorous compliance

regime for high-risk AI applications (which provisions apply from 2 August 2027, subject to possible delay under the EU’s

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	167

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Digital Omnibus proposals). The extraterritorial effect of the EU AI Act means entities established outside the EU fall with the

EU AI Act’s ambit if they provide or deploy AI in the EU or the output of their AI is used in the EU.

In the U.S. on the other hand, some states are considering enacting or have already enacted comprehensive laws that adopt

risk-based frameworks and principles (such as Colorado’s An Act Concerning Consumer Protections In Interactions with AI

Systems and the Texas Responsible AI Governance Act), while other states are focusing on applications perceived as higher-

risk (such as laws regulating the use of automated decision tools and AI in recruitment, hiring, promotion, and other

employment decisions). Comprehensive state laws impose heightened obligations on developers and deployers of high-risk

AI systems (which include tools that make financial, lending and employment-related decisions), such as by requiring

impact assessments, transparency disclosures and risk-management controls. Laws regulating higher risk applications, such

as New York City Local Law 144 and amendments to civil rights laws in California and Illinois, require employers to conduct

bias audits, provide transparency through notice to candidates and employees, ensure such systems do not discriminate

against applicants or employees on the basis of protected classes, and maintain records of automated-decision system data

and audit results.

Notably, however, in December 2025, President Trump signed an executive order outlining various plans to attempt to

restrict certain U.S. states from enforcing their own AI laws, in favour of a “single national framework”. The Barclays Bank

Group is continuing to monitor these developments and the applicability of state laws regulating AI.

Regulatory initiatives on sustainability

Regulatory initiatives on sustainability in the UK

In the UK, the FCA published final rules on the UK Sustainability Disclosure Requirements regime in November 2023 which

set out new requirements to prepare sustainability-related product and entity level disclosures for certain firms, as well as a

new sustainable investment labelling regime and anti-greenwashing rule applicable to all authorised firms. The new anti-

greenwashing rule (and associated guidance) came into force on 31 May 2024 and the labelling regime was made available

from 31 July 2024, whilst the disclosure regime continues to be implemented on a phased basis from late 2024 until the end

of 2026. In April 2025, the FCA confirmed that it had paused plans to extend the SDR and investment labels regime to

portfolio management.

The Digital Markets, Competition and Consumers Act 2024 (DMCCA) received Royal Assent in May 2024, introducing major

updates to UK competition and consumer protection laws. These reforms included the expansion of the powers held by the

Competition and Markets Authority (CMA), in relation to digital markets, merger control and antitrust rules, as well as

consumer law. As a result of those reforms, the CMA is able to directly impose significant fines of up to 10% of global

turnover for breaches of consumer protection law. As one of the regulators entrusted with consumer protection in the UK,

the CMA has been actively focusing on misleading environmental claims. The CMA has the ability to investigate potential

breaches of consumer protection laws by financial services firms also, and the FCA will be able to make recommendations to

the CMA to exercise its powers under the DMCCA. The DMCCA also simplifies and enhances the process by which the

regulators may obtain enforcement orders and undertakings for breaches of consumer law. The Advertising Standards

Authority is responsible for regulating the content of advertisements, sales promotions and direct marketing in the UK, and

has also been focusing on greenwashing, including investigating and making rulings against advertisements from financial

services firms due to greenwashing.

In its election manifesto, the Government stated that it would mandate UK regulated financial institutions and FTSE 100

companies to develop and implement credible transition plans that align with the 1.5°C goal of the Paris Agreement.

Consequently, it consulted on how best to take that commitment forward in June to September 2025 but has yet to publish

the outcome. The UK’s Transition Plan Taskforce (TPT) concluded its work on a disclosure framework for transition plans in

October 2024, with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) Foundation now assuming responsibility for the

TPT’s disclosure materials. In June 2025, the IFRS Foundation published a guidance document about transition plans,

building on the material developed by the TPT. If the Government and UK regulators do mandate transition plan disclosures,

it is widely expected that the work of the TPT will likely form the basis of these requirements.

In September 2024, the Government published information on its framework to create UK Sustainability Reporting

Standards (UK SRS). Subject to an affirmative endorsement decision, and following a consultation process, the Government

would create the first two UK Sustainability Reporting Standards, based on those of the International Sustainability

Standards Board (ISSB) (IFRS S1 on general requirements for disclosure of sustainability related financial information and

IFRS S2 on climate-related disclosures) and these standards will form part of a wider Sustainability Disclosure Reporting

(SDR) framework led by HM Treasury. The Government carried out its consultation on the UK SRS in June to September

2025 and is expected to publish the first two UK Sustainability Reporting Standards (SRS) in early 2026. As there is some

overlap between IFRS S2 and the TPT Disclosure Framework, the FCA reviewed, through its consultation on implementing

UK-endorsed ISSB standards, the possibility of strengthening its expectations for transition plan disclosures with reference to

the TPT Disclosure Framework, as noted above. In addition, TCFD-aligned reporting requirements apply to UK publicly

quoted companies, large private companies and LLPs (in addition to existing TCFD-related reporting requirements under the

UK Listing Rules).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	168

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

On 3 December 2025, the PRA published a policy statement (PS25/25) providing feedback to responses the PRA received in

relation to consultation paper 10/25 (Updates to SS3/19 (Enhancing banks’ and insurers’ approaches to managing the

financial risks from climate change)). The PRA also published a supervisory statement (SS5/25) which replaces SS3/19 and

sets out updated PRA expectations for firms’ approaches to managing climate-related risks, reflecting new international

standards and embedding improved understanding of climate-related risks. It aims to ensure that firms build the capabilities

and resilience needed to effectively manage these risks. SS5/25 took effect on 3 December 2025. The PRA confirmed in

PS25/25 that firms will be expected to carry out an internal review of their current status in meeting the expectations set out

in SS5/25 within six months of commencement and the PRA does not expect firms to close identified gaps within the six-

month review period.

Regulatory initiatives on sustainability in the EU

The EU Regulation on Sustainable Finance Disclosures Regulation (SFDR) and related Delegated Regulations require financial

market participants (FMPs) to disclose how they integrate environmental, social and governance factors in their investment

decisions for certain financial products and to publish principal adverse impact statements. The SFDR applies to entities

established in the EU and in-scope products marketed in the EU, regardless of the location of the entity. The SFDR is

currently under review by the Commission, which has published a draft amending regulation. ESMA has also published

guidelines for funds in-scope of SFDR regarding the use of sustainability-related terms in their names.

In addition, the EU Taxonomy Regulation provides for a general framework for the development of an EU-wide classification

system for environmentally sustainable economic activities. It sets mandatory entity-level disclosure requirements for

companies which fall under the scope of the EU Accounting Directive, in relation to eligibility and alignment of their business

activities with the EU Taxonomy Regulation. The EU Taxonomy Regulation also imposes product level disclosure obligations

for FMPs on the extent to which their financial products are Taxonomy aligned or not.

In February 2025, the European Commission published the Omnibus I Package which aims to simplify certain EU

sustainability-related regulations, the main changes being those to the Corporate Sustainability Reporting Directive (CSRD)

and the Directive on Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence (CSDDD). The CSRD introduced significant sustainability related

reporting obligations covering a wide range of topics beyond climate change for various entities, including EU banks and

certain non-EU companies and banks (by virtue of having EU listings or significant business in the EU), with reporting to

commence on a phased basis from the financial year 2024. One of the component parts of the Omnibus I Package is the

“Stop-the-Clock” Directive, which came into force in April 2025 and delays the reporting start date for unlisted large

companies and listed SMEs by two years. Another component of the Omnibus I Package is a “Quick Fix” Delegated Act,

which came into force in November 2025 and extends a number of phase-in provisions and reliefs for companies that

started reporting for financial year 2024. The last major component of the Omnibus I Package is the “Requirements”

Proposal, which amends substantive provisions of the CSRD and CSDDD including the scope of application, reporting in

relation to the value chain, and transition plan requirements under the CSDDD. The EU Parliament and Council of the

European Union reached a provisional political agreement on the “Requirements” Proposal in December 2025.

Related technical sustainability reporting standards (i.e. the European Sustainability Reporting Standards, or the ‘ESRS’) were

published in 2023 but are currently being revised in order to reduce the amount of data collection. Disclosure requirements

apply to companies in respect of their global operations, and not just their operations within the EU. The European

Commission was also expected to develop assurance standards to support the requirements introduced by the CSRD to put

sustainability reporting on a similar footing to financial reporting audit requirements. However, the European Commission

has announced that it will deprioritise work on the assurance standards until 1 October 2027. Until adopted, Member States

are free to apply national standards for assurance.

CRR II established, for certain large financial institutions, a Pillar 3 disclosure framework for information on environmental,

social and governance risks, including physical risks and transition risks. Amendments included in the CRR III and CRD VI

banking package will extend the scope of these disclosures and the emphasis on sustainability, with a number of new

sustainability-related requirements, including the development of mandatory prudential transition plans and new

supervisory powers for competent authorities specifically relating to sustainability risk, including assessment of prudential

transition plans and sustainability risk governance and risk management processes now being part of the Supervisory

Review and Evaluation Process. The ECB has made, and continues to regard, the supervision of the approach of institutions

to sustainability risk a priority.

In July 2024, the Directive on Corporate Sustainability Due Diligence (CSDDD) entered into force, and will require certain EU

and non-EU entities to carry out due diligence in relation to their own operations and ‘chain of activities’, in order to identify

and prevent, bring to an end or mitigate the actual and potential adverse impact of their own operations, the operations of

their subsidiaries or of their business partners on human rights and the environment. For regulated financial undertakings,

CSDDD currently covers own operations and the upstream value chain but not the activities of their downstream business

partners that receive their financial services and products. These obligations will apply after transposition into national laws

in each EU Member State on a phased basis from July 2029. The CSDDD previously required in-scope companies to adopt

and put into effect a climate transition plan. However, this requirement will be removed under the “Requirements” Proposal

of the Omnibus I Package. The CSDDD has the potential to be a particularly significant measure, with failure to comply with

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	169

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

obligations under the CSDDD potentially giving rise to the imposition of administrative fines based on net worldwide

turnover.

Regulatory initiatives on sustainability in the US

The Barclays Bank Group may be impacted by various sustainability-related regulatory and legislative developments in the

US at both the federal and state level. The rules adopted by the SEC in March 2024 that would have required US-listed

companies (including foreign private issuers such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC) to disclose extensive climate-

related information have been stayed by the SEC pending the outcome of ongoing litigation, which the SEC has declined to

defend. However, bills proposed or adopted by the legislatures of certain US states may still impose climate-related

disclosure or other sustainability-related requirements. In California, the Climate Corporate Data Accountability Act (SB-253)

and the Greenhouse Gases: Climate-Related Financial Risk Act (SB-261) adopted in 2023, require both public and private

U.S.-based companies (including U.S. subsidiaries of non-U.S. companies) that do business in California to publish and

submit climate-related financial risk reports with the California Air Resources Board (CARB) and report greenhouse gas

emissions data in 2026. However, in response to an injunction granted by the Ninth Circuit Court of Appeals in the ongoing

litigation against SB-261 and SB-253, CARB confirmed on 1 December 2025 that it would not take enforcement action

against any entity that does not post and submit a climate-related financial risk report pursuant to SB-261 by the 1 January

2026 statutory deadline. In New York, proposed legislation – the Climate Corporate Data Accountability Act (S 3456 / A.

4282) – was introduced in 2025, and is a refreshed version of prior proposed legislation. As an example of legislation and

initiatives taking a different or opposing position on sustainability matters, in 2021, Texas adopted anti-boycott legislation

prohibiting Texas state entities from entering into contracts with companies that boycott energy companies. Barclays is

monitoring such legislative developments and their impact on Barclays’ US operations and reporting obligations.

Sanctions and financial crime

The UK Bribery Act 2010 introduced a new form of corporate criminal liability focused broadly on a company’s failure to

prevent bribery on its behalf. The Criminal Finances Act 2017 introduced new corporate criminal offences of failing to

prevent the facilitation of UK and overseas tax evasion. The Economic Crime and Corporate Transparency Act 2023 (ECCTA)

extends the concept of corporate criminal liability such that certain economic crimes (such as fraud and false accounting)

committed by “senior managers” acting within the scope of their actual or apparent authority, can be attributed to the

company, for the purposes of holding the company criminally liable. The ECCTA has also created a new offence, in force

from 1 September 2025, of failing to prevent a person associated with the Barclays Bank Group from committing fraud for

the benefit of the Barclays Bank Group. These offences have broad application and in certain circumstances may have

extraterritorial impact on entities, persons or activities located outside the UK, including Barclays Bank PLC’s subsidiaries

outside the UK. If enacted, reforms proposed under the draft Crime and Policing Bill 2025 would expand corporate criminal

liability to all criminal offences (and not just certain economic crimes, as is currently the case under ECCTA), if any such

offence is committed by a senior manager acting within the scope of their authority.

The UK Bribery Act requires the Barclays Bank Group to have adequate procedures to prevent bribery which, due to the

extraterritorial nature of the Act, makes this both complex and costly. Additionally, the Criminal Finances Act requires the

Barclays Bank Group to have reasonable procedures in place to prevent the criminal facilitation of tax evasion by persons

acting for, or on behalf of, the Barclays Bank Group. The ECCTA similarly requires the Barclays Bank Group to have

reasonable procedures in place to prevent a person associated with the Barclays Bank Group from committing fraud.

The Sanctions and Anti-Money Laundering Act 2018 (the Sanctions Act) became law in the UK in 2018. Following the UK’s

withdrawal from the EU, the Sanctions Act allowed for the adoption of an autonomous UK sanctions regime which came

into force in 2021, as well as a more flexible licensing regime post-Brexit. This regime applies within the UK and in relation to

the conduct of all UK persons wherever they are in the world; it also applies to overseas branches of UK companies

(including the Barclays Bank PLC New York branch).

Within the EU, there is a system of autonomous sanctions by which the European Council adopts a decision made by the

EU’s Common Foreign and Security Policy. The measures stated in the Council decision are either implemented at the EU

level, by way of Regulation, or at a national level in Member States. Regulations are binding and directly effective throughout

the EU. Each measure will specify the territorial scope of the relevant sanctions but these can apply broadly within the

territory of any EU Member States and to EU nationals wherever they are located as well as to third country branches of EU

companies. The EU’s anti-money laundering regime has been implemented through a series of the Fourth to Sixth Anti-

Money Laundering Directives, which Member States are then required to transpose into their local law – the Fourth and Fifth

Anti-Money Laundering Directives (2015/849 and 2018/843) set out the current requirements for Member States to

transpose in respect of AML. In order to harmonise its approach to anti-money laundering, the EU has introduced a new

Sixth Anti-Money Laundering Directive (EU) 2024/1640, which will repeal and replace the previous Directives and which

Member States will be required to implement by 2027, and the Anti-Money Laundering Regulation (EU) 2024/1624, which

will have direct effect in Member States, with most provisions in force from 2027. Furthermore, the Anti-Money Laundering

Agency Regulation (EU) 2024/1620 establishes the Authority for Anti-Money Laundering and Countering the Financing of

Terrorism (AMLA) which will have direct supervisory powers over the 40 most systemic financial institutions in the EU and

will indirectly impact other market parties.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	170

Risk review

Supervision and regulation

In the US, the Bank Secrecy Act, the USA PATRIOT Act 2001, the Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2020 and regulations

thereunder contain numerous anti-money laundering and anti-terrorist financing requirements for financial institutions. In

addition, the Barclays Bank Group is subject to the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, which prohibits, among other things,

corrupt payments to foreign government officials. It is also subject to various economic sanctions and similar laws,

regulations and executive orders administered by the US government, which prohibit or restrict some or all business

activities and other dealings with or involving certain individuals, entities, groups, countries and territories.

In some cases, US state and federal regulations addressing sanctions, money laundering and other financial crimes may

impact entities, persons or activities located or undertaken outside the US, including Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries.

US government authorities have aggressively enforced these laws, and expanded authorities threatening the imposition of

sanctions, against financial institutions in recent years.

As a result of the conflict in Ukraine, there has been an increased regulatory focus on sanctions compliance in various

jurisdictions, including the US, UK and EU. Government authorities have significant discretion in the administration of such

restrictions, which may rapidly change or diverge across jurisdictions and, in some cases, conflict with local laws of other

jurisdictions. Failure of a financial institution to ensure compliance with such laws could have serious legal, financial and

reputational consequences for the institution.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	171

Financial statements

Contents

Detailed analysis of our consolidated financial statements, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosure on the

financial performance of Barclays Bank Group.

Consolidated financial statements		Page	Note
	▪Report of independent registered public accounting firm PCAOB ID:1118	172
	▪Consolidated income statement	175
	▪Consolidated statement of comprehensive income	176
	▪Consolidated balance sheet	177
	▪Consolidated statement of changes in equity	178
	▪Consolidated cash flow statement	180
Parent financial statements
	▪Parent balance sheet	182
	▪Parent statement of changes in equity	183
	▪Parent cash flow statement	185
Notes to the financial statements
Performance/return	▪Material accounting policies	186	1
	▪Segmental reporting	190	2
	▪Net interest income	192	3
	▪Net fee and commission income	193	4
	▪Net trading income	195	5
	▪Net investment expense	196	6
	▪Infrastructure, administration and general expenses	196	7
	▪Credit impairment charges	197	8
	▪Tax	202	9
	▪Dividends on ordinary shares and preference shares	206	10
Assets and liabilities held at fair value	▪Trading portfolio	207	11
	▪Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	207	12
	▪Derivative financial instruments	208	13
	▪Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	216	14
	▪Financial liabilities designated at fair value	216	15
	▪Fair value of financial instruments	217	16
	▪Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities	229	17
Assets at amortised cost and other<br><br>investments	▪Property, plant and equipment	230	18
	▪Leases	231	19
	▪Goodwill and intangible assets	234	20
Accruals, provisions, contingent<br><br>liabilities and legal proceedings	▪Other liabilities	238	21
	▪Provisions	238	22
	▪Contingent liabilities and commitments	240	23
	▪Legal, competition and regulatory matters	240	24
Capital instruments, equity and<br><br>reserves	▪Subordinated liabilities	246	25
	▪Ordinary shares, preference shares and other equity	250	26
	▪Reserves	253	27
Employee benefits	▪Staff costs	254	28
	▪Share-based payments	254	29
	▪Pensions and post-retirement benefits	256	30
Scope of consolidation	▪Principal subsidiaries	263	31
	▪Structured entities	264	32
	▪Investments in associates and joint ventures	268	33
	▪Securitisations	269	34
	▪Assets pledged, collateral received and assets transferred	270	35
Other disclosure matters	▪Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration	273	36
	▪Acquisition and disposals of subsidiaries	276	37
	▪Auditor’s remuneration	276	38
	▪Assets and liabilities included in disposal group classified as held for sale	276	39
	▪Related undertakings	278	40
	▪Barclays Bank PLC (the Parent Company) - income statement	283	41
	▪Parent statement of comprehensive income	284	41
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	172
---	---

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Shareholders and Board of Directors

Barclays Bank PLC:

Opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheets of Barclays Bank PLC and subsidiaries (the Company) as of December

31, 2025 and 2024, the related consolidated income statements, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, consolidated

statements of changes in equity, and consolidated cash flow statements for each of the years in the three-year period ended December

31, 2025, and the related notes and specific disclosures described in Note 1 of the consolidated financial statements as being part of

the consolidated financial statements (collectively, the consolidated financial statements).

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of

the Company as of December 31, 2025 and 2024, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the years in the three-

year period ended December 31, 2025, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards, as issued by the International

Accounting Standards Board.

Basis for Opinion

These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an

opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public

Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in

accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission

and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit

to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to

error or fraud. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial

reporting. As part of our audits, we are required to obtain an understanding of internal control over financial reporting but not for the

purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we

express no such opinion.

Our audit included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements,

whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test

basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the

accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the

consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audit provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

Critical Audit Matters

The critical audit matters communicated below are matters arising from the current period audit of the consolidated financial

statements that were communicated or required to be communicated to the audit committee and that: (1) relate to accounts or

disclosures that are material to the consolidated financial statements and (2) involved our especially challenging, subjective, or

complex judgements. The communication of critical audit matters does not alter in any way our opinion on the consolidated financial

statements, taken as a whole, and we are not, by communicating the critical audit matters below, providing separate opinions on the

critical audit matters or on the accounts or disclosures to which they relate.

Impairment allowance for loans and advances at amortised cost, including off-balance sheet elements of the allowance

As discussed in note 8 to the consolidated financial statements, and in the Credit risk performance (audited) disclosures on pages 89 to

129, the Company’s impairment allowance for loans and advances, including off-balance sheet elements at amortised cost was £4bn

as at December 31, 2025.

We identified the assessment of impairment allowance for loans and advances at amortised cost, including off balance sheet elements

as a critical audit matter. A high degree of audit effort, including specialised skills and knowledge was required because it involved

significant measurement uncertainty. Complex and subjective auditor judgement was required to assess the following:

•Model estimations – Complex and subjective auditor judgement was applied in assessing the Company’s modelled estimations of

Expected Credit Losses (“ECL”) due to the inherently judgemental nature of the underlying modelling techniques and

assumptions, including the use of either the IFRS 9 Probability of Default (“PD”) models, the Loss Given Default (“LGD”) models

and the Exposure at Default (“EAD”) models or an appropriate proxy. Certain IFRS 9 methods and assumptions are the key drivers

of complexity and uncertainty, and minor changes to these could have a significant effect on the Company’s calculation of the

ECL estimate.

•Economic scenarios – Complex and subjective auditor judgement was applied in assessing the forward-looking economic

scenarios used by the Company as an input to calculate ECL, the probability weightings applied to them and the complexity of

models used to derive the probability weightings.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	173

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

•Qualitative adjustments – Complex and subjective auditor judgement was applied in assessing certain qualitative adjustments to

the model-driven impairment allowance due to the inherent estimation uncertainty associated with these adjustments.

The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter.

•We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over the Company’s process for

estimating the impairment allowance for loans and advances at amortised cost, including off-balance sheet elements. This

included controls relating to (1) model validation, implementation and monitoring, (2) the authorisation and calculation of

qualitative adjustments and management overlays, (3) the selection and implementation of economic variables and the controls

over the economic scenario selection and probabilities, and (4) credit reviews that determine customer risk ratings used in the

models for a population of wholesale customers.

•We involved credit risk modelling professionals with specialised skills and knowledge, who assisted in the following:

◦Evaluating the Company’s impairment methodologies for compliance with IFRS 9;

◦Inspecting model code for the calculation of certain components of the ECL model to assess its consistency with the

Company’s modelling methodology;

◦Evaluating model changes (including the updated model code) for a selection of models which were changed or updated

during the year as to whether they were appropriate by assessing the updated model methodology against the applicable

accounting standard;

◦Reperforming the calculation of certain adjustments to assess consistency with the qualitative adjustment methodologies;

◦Evaluating the model output for a selection of models by inspecting the corresponding model functionality and independently

implementing the model by rebuilding the model code and comparing our independent output with management’s output;

◦Assessing the appropriateness of certain assumptions by inspecting and evaluating management’s documented methodology

for how the assumption is determined; and

◦Reperforming and assessing, for a selection of models, the reasonableness of the model predictions by comparing them

against actual results and evaluating the resulting differences.

•In addition, we involved economic professionals with specialised skills and knowledge, who assisted in:

◦Assessing the reasonableness of the Company’s methodology and models used for determining the economic scenarios used

and the probability weightings applied to them;

◦Assessing key economic variables which included comparing a selection of economic variables to external sources; and

◦Assessing the overall reasonableness of the economic forecasts by comparing the Company’s forecasts to our own modelled

forecasts.

Valuation of certain Level 3 and Level 2 financial instruments recorded at fair value

As discussed in Note 16 to the Company’s consolidated financial statements, the balances of financial assets and liabilities recorded at

fair value as at December 31, 2025 were £670bn and £591bn, respectively. This includes Level 3 assets (£21bn) and liabilities (£8bn)

respectively. The Company has Level 2 financial assets at fair value of £501bn and financial liabilities at fair value of £539bn. The

Company is required to apply valuation techniques which often involve the exercise of significant judgement and the use of

assumptions and valuation models over Level 3 and certain Level 2 financial assets and liabilities.

We identified the valuation of Level 3 and certain Level 2 financial instruments recorded at fair value as a critical audit matter. This is

because there was significant measurement uncertainty associated with the fair value estimates of these instruments and subjective

auditor judgement, including specialised skills and knowledge was required to evaluate pricing data inputs, valuation models and fair

value adjustments ("FVA"), including portfolio-level FVAs related to credit, collateralisation and funding (commonly referred to as

"XVAs").

The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter.

•We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over the Company’s process to

measure fair value of these portfolios. This included controls related to (1) the independent price verification (IPV) of certain

pricing data inputs, (2) the determination or calculation of FVAs, including exit price adjustments (to mark the portfolio to bid or

offer prices), model shortcoming reserves to address model limitations and XVAs and (3) the validation, completeness,

implementation and usage of valuation models including assessment of the impact of model limitations and assumptions.

•For a selection of collateral disputes identified by management, we challenged management’s valuation where significant fair

value differences were observable through comparison with the market participant’s valuation on the other side of the trade. We

also utilised collateral dispute data to identify fair value financial instruments with significant fair value differences against market

counterparties and selected these to independently reprice.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	174

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

•We performed a retrospective review by inspecting significant gains and losses on a selection of new fair value financial

instruments, historical exit prices on similar instruments and restructurings throughout the audit period and evaluated whether

these data points indicated elements of fair value not incorporated into the current valuation methodologies. We also inspected

movements in unobservable inputs throughout the period to challenge whether any gain or loss generated was appropriate.

•We involved valuation professionals with specialised skills and knowledge, who assisted in the following:

◦Independently re-pricing a selection of fair value financial instruments and challenging management on the valuations where

they were outside our tolerance; and

◦Challenging the appropriateness of significant models and methodologies used in calculating fair values, risk exposures and in

calculating FVAs and XVAs, including comparison to industry practice.

•We inspected trading revenue arising on level 3 positions to assess whether material gains or losses generated were in line with

the accounting standards.

UK Pension Scheme – Defined Benefit Obligation (DBO) assumptions

As discussed in Note 30 to the consolidated financial statements, the total fair value of the Company’s defined benefit obligation as of

December 31, 2025 was £18.5bn, of which £17.7bn was related to the UK Retirement Fund (UKRF). The determination of the

Company’s defined benefit obligation with respect to these plans is dependent on certain actuarial assumptions, including the discount

rate, inflation rate (or retail price index) and mortality assumptions.

We identified the valuation of the defined benefit obligation in respect of UKRF as a critical audit matter. Subjective and complex

auditor judgement, including specialized skills and knowledge, was required in evaluating the discount rates, retail price index ('RPI')

and mortality assumptions used, as small changes would have a significant impact on the measurement of the defined benefit

obligation.

The following are the primary procedures we performed to address this critical audit matter:

•We evaluated the design and tested the operating effectiveness of certain internal controls over the Company’s defined benefit

obligation process; this included controls related to management’s review of IAS 19 assumptions including discount rate, RPI and

mortality assumptions, and

•We involved actuarial professionals with specialized skills and knowledge who assisted in assessing the Company’s discount rate,

RPI and mortality assumptions by evaluating those assumptions against expectations derived from external sources.

/s/ KPMG LLP

We have served as the Company’s auditor since 2017.

London, United Kingdom

9 February 2026

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	175

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated income statement

		2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	Notes	£m	£m	£m
Continuing operations
Interest and similar income	3	23,409	25,780	24,261
Interest and similar expense	3	(16,115)	(19,035)	(17,608)
Net interest income		7,294	6,745	6,653
Fee and commission income	4	9,879	9,486	8,708
Fee and commission expense	4	(3,326)	(3,215)	(3,247)
Net fee and commission income		6,553	6,271	5,461
Net trading income	5	7,104	5,900	5,980
Net investment (expense)/income	6	(72)	69	112
Other income		48	52	62
Total income		20,927	19,037	18,268
Staff costs	28	(5,585)	(5,556)	(5,591)
Infrastructure costs	7	(816)	(795)	(1,073)
Administration and general expenses	7	(6,192)	(5,894)	(5,606)
UK regulatory levies		(228)	(242)	(149)
Litigation and conduct		(284)	(186)	(44)
Operating expenses		(13,105)	(12,673)	(12,463)
Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures		—	—	(4)
Loss on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures		(13)	—	—
Profit before Impairment		7,809	6,364	5,801
Credit impairment charges	8	(1,866)	(1,617)	(1,578)
Profit before tax		5,943	4,747	4,223
Taxation	9	(1,285)	(999)	(662)
Profit after tax		4,658	3,748	3,561
Attributable to:
Equity holders of the parent		3,875	2,956	2,753
Other equity instrument holders		783	792	808
Total equity holders of the parent		4,658	3,748	3,561
Profit after tax		4,658	3,748	3,561
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	176
---	---

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

	2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	£m	£m	£m
Profit after tax	4,658	3,748	3,561
Other comprehensive income/(loss) that may be recycled to profit or loss:
Currency translation reserve
Currency translation differences1	(1,107)	(143)	(1,242)
Tax	(49)	50	33
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve movement relating to<br><br>debt securities
Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value	695	(840)	1,142
Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit on disposal	201	(134)	(102)
Net (gains)/losses related to (releases of) impairment	(3)	1	(2)
Net gains/(losses) due to fair value hedging	30	318	(849)
Tax	(256)	181	(54)
Cash flow hedging reserve
Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value	2,654	(1,349)	2,506
Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit	(506)	1,950	1,158
Tax	(607)	(154)	(1,002)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) that may be recycled to profit or loss	1,052	(120)	1,588
Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss:
Retirement benefit remeasurements	(13)	(419)	(1,182)
Own credit	89	(1,131)	(983)
Tax	(29)	430	609
Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss	47	(1,120)	(1,556)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year	1,099	(1,240)	32
Total comprehensive income for the year	5,757	2,508	3,593
Attributable to:
Equity holders of the parent	5,757	2,508	3,593
Total comprehensive income for the year	5,757	2,508	3,593

Note

1Includes £34m loss (2024: £1m loss; 2023: £0m gain) on recycling of currency translation differences.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	177

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated balance sheet

		2025	2024
As at 31 December	Notes	£m	£m
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks		208,544	180,365
Cash collateral and settlement balances		124,519	113,987
Debt securities at amortised cost		55,153	50,227
Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks		9,036	8,780
Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers		141,750	136,047
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost		17,662	3,393
Trading portfolio assets	11	189,743	166,244
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	12	185,002	191,845
Derivative financial instruments	13	252,192	292,356
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	14	42,818	51,010
Investments in associates and joint ventures	33	14	14
Goodwill and intangible assets	20	1,303	1,425
Property, plant and equipment	18	1,603	1,546
Current tax assets		376	785
Deferred tax assets	9	2,936	4,133
Retirement benefit assets	30	3,240	3,263
Assets included in disposal group classified as held for sale	39	5,932	9,854
Other assets		3,650	3,250
Total assets		1,245,473	1,218,524
Liabilities
Deposits at amortised cost from banks		20,393	13,252
Deposits at amortised cost from customers		324,358	306,124
Cash collateral and settlement balances		116,811	104,627
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing at amortised cost		18,651	29,397
Debt securities in issue		57,229	35,803
Subordinated liabilities	25	45,239	41,875
Trading portfolio liabilities	11	56,829	56,182
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	15	293,527	279,777
Derivative financial instruments	13	240,757	279,331
Current tax liabilities		611	404
Deferred tax liabilities	9	1	2
Retirement benefit liabilities	30	157	164
Provisions	22	766	736
Liabilities included in disposal group classified as held for sale	39	—	3,726
Other liabilities	21	7,831	7,904
Total liabilities		1,183,160	1,159,304
Equity
Called up share capital and share premium	26	2,346	2,348
Other equity instruments	26	10,446	9,604
Other reserves	27	(179)	(1,302)
Retained earnings		49,700	48,570
Total equity		62,313	59,220
Total liabilities and equity		1,245,473	1,218,524

The Board of Directors approved the financial statements on pages 175 to 284 on 9 February 2026.

CS Venkatakrishnan

Barclays Bank Group – Chief Executive Officer

Anna Cross

Barclays Bank Group – Interim Chief Financial Officer

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	178

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Statement of changes in equity
	Called up<br><br>share<br><br>capital<br><br>and share<br><br>premium1	Other<br><br>equity<br><br>instruments1	Other<br><br>reserves2	Retained<br><br>earnings	Total<br><br>equity
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance as at 1 January 2025	2,348	9,604	(1,302)	48,570	59,220
Profit after tax	—	783	—	3,875	4,658
Currency translation movements	—	—	(1,156)	—	(1,156)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	—	—	667	—	667
Cash flow hedges	—	—	1,541	—	1,541
Retirement benefit remeasurement	—	—	—	(16)	(16)
Own credit reserve	—	—	63	—	63
Total comprehensive income for the year	—	783	1,115	3,859	5,757
Issue and redemption of other equity instruments	—	842	—	(5)	837
Other equity instruments coupons paid	—	(783)	—	—	(783)
Redemption of preference shares	(2)	—	2	(270)	(270)
Employee settled Barclays PLC share schemes	—	—	—	667	667
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes	—	—	—	(530)	(530)
Dividends on ordinary shares	—	—	—	(2,570)	(2,570)
Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders equity	—	—	—	(32)	(32)
Other reserve movements	—	—	6	11	17
Balance as at 31 December 2025	2,346	10,446	(179)	49,700	62,313

Notes

1For further details refer to Note 26.

2For further details refer to Note 27.

Statement of changes in equity
	Called up<br><br>share<br><br>capital<br><br>and share<br><br>premium1	Other<br><br>equity<br><br>instruments<br><br>1	Other<br><br>reserves2	Retained<br><br>earnings	Total<br><br>equity
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance as at 1 January 2024	2,348	10,765	(363)	47,754	60,504
Profit after tax	—	792	—	2,956	3,748
Currency translation movements	—	—	(93)	—	(93)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	—	—	(474)	—	(474)
Cash flow hedges	—	—	447	—	447
Retirement benefit remeasurement	—	—	—	(298)	(298)
Own credit reserve	—	—	(822)	—	(822)
Total comprehensive income for the year	—	792	(942)	2,658	2,508
Issue and redemption of other equity instruments	—	(1,161)	—	(92)	(1,253)
Other equity instruments coupons paid	—	(792)	—	—	(792)
Employee settled Barclays PLC share schemes	—	—	—	531	531
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes	—	—	—	(448)	(448)
Dividends on ordinary shares	—	—	—	(1,782)	(1,782)
Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders equity	—	—	—	(41)	(41)
Other reserve movements	—	—	3	(10)	(7)
Balance as at 31 December 2024	2,348	9,604	(1,302)	48,570	59,220

Notes

1For further details refer to Note 26.

2For further details refer to Note 27.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	179

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

Statement of changes in equity
	Called up<br><br>share<br><br>capital<br><br>and share<br><br>premium	Other<br><br>equity<br><br>instruments	Other<br><br>reserves	Retained<br><br>earnings	Total<br><br>equity
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance as at 1 January 2023	2,348	10,691	(1,464)	47,378	58,953
Profit after tax	—	808	—	2,753	3,561
Currency translation movements	—	—	(1,209)	—	(1,209)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	—	—	135	—	135
Cash flow hedges	—	—	2,662	—	2,662
Retirement benefit remeasurement	—	—	—	(846)	(846)
Own credit reserve	—	—	(710)	—	(710)
Total comprehensive income for the year	—	808	878	1,907	3,593
Issue and redemption of other equity instruments	—	74	—	(12)	62
Other equity instruments coupons paid	—	(808)	—	—	(808)
Employee settled Barclays PLC share schemes	—	—	—	409	409
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes	—	—	—	(442)	(442)
Dividends on ordinary shares	—	—	—	(1,348)	(1,348)
Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders equity	—	—	—	(40)	(40)
Net equity impact on inter Barclays PLC Group transfers	—	—	220	(96)	124
Other reserve movements	—	—	3	(2)	1
Balance as at 31 December 2023	2,348	10,765	(363)	47,754	60,504
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	180
---	---

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated cash flow statement

		2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	Notes	£m	£m	£m
Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:
Profit before tax		5,943	4,747	4,223
Adjustment for non-cash items:
Credit impairment charges		1,866	1,617	1,578
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and<br><br>intangibles		362	356	489
Provisions and pension charges		268	195	63
Net loss on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment		13	9	7
Other non-cash movements including exchange rate movements		4,863	1,835	7,567
Changes in operating assets and liabilities
Net decrease in cash collateral and settlement balances		2,252	2,060	31
Net (increase)/decrease in loans and advances at amortised cost		(7,782)	(2,556)	8,313
Net increase in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending		(14,269)	(2,290)	(378)
Net increase in deposits at amortised cost		25,375	17,578	10,219
Net increase/(decrease) in debt securities in issue		21,426	(9,850)	(14,359)
Net (decrease)/increase in repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing		(10,746)	843	16,589
Net decrease/(increase) in derivative financial instruments		1,590	(6,794)	7,539
Net (increase)/decrease in trading portfolio assets		(23,499)	8,322	(40,795)
Net increase/(decrease) in trading portfolio liabilities		647	(1,579)	(14,699)
Net increase/(decrease) in financial assets and liabilities at fair value through the<br><br>income statement		20,593	(6,415)	33,410
Net increase in other assets		(167)	(3,962)	(1,301)
Net decrease in other liabilities		(384)	(1,440)	(1,864)
Corporate income tax paid		(248)	(685)	(265)
Net cash from operating activities		28,103	1,991	16,367
Purchase of debt securities at amortised cost		(15,658)	(27,617)	(14,901)
Proceeds from redemption or sale of debt securities at amortised cost		9,828	16,922	2,681
Purchase of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income		(29,747)	(52,347)	(50,254)
Proceeds from sale or redemption of financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income		38,246	51,803	44,126
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and investment in intangibles		(574)	(512)	(439)
Acquisition of business		—	(232)	—
Other cash flows associated with investing activities1		—	2,749	—
Net cash from investing activities		2,095	(9,234)	(18,787)
Dividends paid and other coupon payments on equity instruments		(3,385)	(2,615)	(2,196)
Issuance of subordinated liabilities	25	9,808	11,222	5,986
Redemption of subordinated liabilities	25	(5,665)	(5,067)	(7,431)
Issue of shares and other equity instruments	26	2,770	970	2,499
Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments	26	(2,198)	(2,131)	(2,425)
Vesting of employee share schemes		(530)	(448)	(442)
Net cash from financing activities		800	1,931	(4,009)
Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents		(1,740)	(2,405)	(5,013)
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		29,258	(7,717)	(11,442)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year		200,695	208,412	219,854
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year		229,953	200,695	208,412
Cash and cash equivalents comprise:
Cash and balances at central banks		208,544	180,365	189,686
Loans and advances to banks with original maturity of three months or less		7,802	7,758	7,117
Cash collateral balances with central banks with original maturity of three months or less		11,625	11,025	10,325
Treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity of three months or less		1,982	1,547	1,284
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year		229,953	200,695	208,412

Note

1  This relates to the net proceeds from the sale of the Italian retail mortgage portfolio.

Interest received was £23,184m (2024: £25,965m; 2023: £24,347m) and interest paid was £15,736m (2024: £18,952m;

2023: £15,944m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	181

Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated cash flow statement

The Barclays Bank Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these

amounted to £2,775m (2024: £2,317m; 2023: £2,973m). For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash

on hand and demand deposits and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with

an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase

agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	182

Financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC

Parent company accounts

Balance sheet
		2025	2024
As at 31 December	Notes	£m	£m
Assets
Cash and balances at central banks		178,321	151,288
Cash collateral and settlement balances		79,212	75,284
Debt securities at amortised cost		38,790	35,519
Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks		12,795	14,834
Loans and advances at amortised cost to customers		234,757	210,218
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost		24,974	5,546
Trading portfolio assets	11	110,625	102,030
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	12	262,349	253,812
Derivative financial instruments	13	224,937	260,487
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	14	41,289	49,499
Investments in associates and joint ventures	33	12	12
Investment in subsidiaries	31	20,659	20,747
Goodwill and intangible assets	20	107	104
Property, plant and equipment	18	199	125
Current tax assets		376	757
Deferred tax assets	9	1,712	2,638
Retirement benefit assets	30	3,184	3,202
Other assets		2,151	1,915
Total assets		1,236,449	1,188,017
Liabilities
Deposits at amortised cost from banks		18,954	12,039
Deposits at amortised cost from customers		366,532	336,054
Cash collateral and settlement balances		67,691	62,386
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing at amortised cost		33,236	46,196
Debt securities in issue		35,480	12,991
Subordinated liabilities	25	44,735	41,240
Trading portfolio liabilities	11	32,505	41,015
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	15	365,986	329,522
Derivative financial instruments	13	210,461	248,417
Current tax liabilities		425	298
Deferred tax liabilities	9	1	2
Retirement benefit liabilities	30	65	66
Provisions	22	428	435
Other liabilities	21	4,310	4,456
Total liabilities		1,180,809	1,135,117
Equity
Called up share capital and share premium	26	2,346	2,348
Other equity instruments	26	15,153	14,311
Other reserves	27	(2,479)	(3,928)
Retained earnings		40,620	40,169
Total equity		55,640	52,900
Total liabilities and equity		1,236,449	1,188,017

The Board of Directors approved the financial statements on pages 182 to 185 on 9 February 2026.

CS Venkatakrishnan

Barclays Bank Group – Chief Executive Officer

Anna Cross

Barclays Bank Group – Interim Chief Financial Officer

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	183

Financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC

Parent company accounts

Statement of changes in equity
	Called up<br><br>share<br><br>capital<br><br>and share<br><br>premium1	Other<br><br>equity<br><br>instruments1,2	Other<br><br>reserves3	Retained<br><br>earnings	Total equity
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance as at 1 January 2025	2,348	14,311	(3,928)	40,169	52,900
Profit after tax	—	1,169	—	3,321	4,490
Currency translation movements	—	—	(794)	—	(794)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	—	—	657	—	657
Cash flow hedges	—	—	1,509	—	1,509
Retirement benefit remeasurement	—	—	—	(21)	(21)
Own credit reserve	—	—	70	—	70
Total comprehensive income for the year	—	1,169	1,442	3,300	5,911
Issue and redemption of other equity instruments	—	842	—	(5)	837
Other equity instruments coupons paid	—	(1,169)	—	—	(1,169)
Redemption of preference shares	(2)	—	2	(270)	(270)
Employee settled Barclays PLC share schemes	—	—	—	561	561
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment<br><br>schemes	—	—	—	(530)	(530)
Dividends paid on ordinary shares	—	—	—	(2,570)	(2,570)
Dividends paid on preference shares and other<br><br>shareholders' equity	—	—	—	(32)	(32)
Other reserve movements	—	—	5	(3)	2
Balance as at 31 December 2025	2,346	15,153	(2,479)	40,620	55,640		Statement of changes in equity
---	---	---	---	---	---
	Called up<br><br>share<br><br>capital<br><br>and share<br><br>premium1	Other<br><br>equity<br><br>instruments1,2	Other<br><br>reserves3	Retained<br><br>earnings	Total equity
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance as at 1 January 2024	2,348	15,472	(3,209)	38,617	53,228
Profit after tax	—	1,225	—	3,740	4,965
Currency translation movements	—	—	148	—	148
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	—		(463)	—	(463)
Cash flow hedges	—		376	—	376
Retirement benefit remeasurement	—		—	(295)	(295)
Own credit reserve	—		(781)	—	(781)
Total comprehensive income for the year		1,225	(720)	3,445	3,950
Issue and redemption of other equity instruments	—	(1,161)	—	(92)	(1,253)
Other equity instruments coupons paid	—	(1,225)	—	—	(1,225)
Employee settled Barclays PLC share schemes	—	—	—	475	475
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment<br><br>schemes	—	—	—	(448)	(448)
Dividends paid on ordinary shares	—	—	—	(1,782)	(1,782)
Dividends paid on preference shares and other<br><br>shareholders' equity	—	—	—	(41)	(41)
Other reserve movements	—	—	1	(5)	(4)
Balance as at 31 December 2024	2,348	14,311	(3,928)	40,169	52,900

Notes

1For further details refer to Note 26.

2Other equity instruments includes AT1 securities issued by Barclays Bank PLC and borrowings of $6bn (2024: $6bn) from a wholly-owned,

indirect subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The borrowings have been recorded as equity since, under their terms, interest payments are non

cumulative and discretionary whilst repayment of principal is perpetually deferrable by Barclays Bank PLC. Should Barclays Bank PLC make a

discretionary dividend payment on its ordinary shares in the six months preceding the date of an interest payment, it will be obliged to make that

interest payment. In 2025, interest paid on these borrowings was £386m (2024: £433m).

3For further details refer to Note 27.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	184

Financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC

Parent company accounts

Statement of changes in equity
	Called up<br><br>share<br><br>capital<br><br>and share<br><br>premium	Other<br><br>equity<br><br>instruments<br><br>1	Other<br><br>reserves	Retained<br><br>earnings	Total equity
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance as at 1 January 2023	2,348	15,398	(4,552)	39,273	52,467
Profit after tax	—	1,247	—	1,619	2,866
Currency translation movements	—	—	(572)	—	(572)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	—	—	132	—	132
Cash flow hedges	—	—	2,483	—	2,483
Retirement benefit remeasurement	—	—	—	(839)	(839)
Own credit reserve	—	—	(703)	—	(703)
Total comprehensive income for the year	—	1,247	1,340	780	3,367
Issue and redemption of other equity instruments	—	74	—	(12)	62
Other equity instruments coupons paid	—	(1,247)	—	—	(1,247)
Employee settled Barclays PLC share schemes	—	—	—	406	406
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes	—	—	—	(442)	(442)
Dividends paid on ordinary shares	—	—	—	(1,348)	(1,348)
Dividends paid on preference shares and other shareholders' equity	—	—	—	(40)	(40)
Other reserve movements	—	—	3	—	3
Balance as at 31 December 2023	2,348	15,472	(3,209)	38,617	53,228

Note

1  Other equity instruments includes AT1 securities issued by Barclays Bank PLC and borrowings of $6bn from a wholly-owned, indirect subsidiary of

Barclays Bank PLC. The borrowings have been recorded as equity since, under their terms, interest payments are non cumulative and discretionary

whilst repayment of principal is perpetually deferrable by Barclays Bank PLC. Should Barclays Bank PLC make a discretionary dividend payment on its

ordinary shares in the six months preceding the date of an interest payment, it will be obliged to make that interest payment. In 2023, interest paid on

these borrowings was £439m.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	185

Financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC

Parent company accounts

Cash flow statement
		2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	Notes	£m	£m	£m
Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:
Profit before tax		4,882	5,165	2,977
Adjustment for non-cash items:
Credit impairment charges		330	216	98
Impairment of Investments in subsidiaries		90	(811)	166
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles		31	30	33
Provisions and pensions charges/(credits)		105	95	(95)
Net (profit)/loss on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment		(6)	(48)	2
Other non-cash movements including exchange rate movements		4,398	1,721	5,991
Changes in operating assets and liabilities
Net decrease in cash collateral and settlement balances		1,977	4,781	137
Net (increase)/decrease in loans and advances at amortised cost		(18,449)	14,178	(40,968)
Net (increase)/decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending		(19,428)	1,330	(968)
Net increase in deposits at amortised cost		37,393	790	33,408
Net increase/(decrease) in debt securities in issue		22,489	(11,842)	(15,333)
Net (decrease)/increase in repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing		(12,960)	2,245	17,644
Net (increase)/decrease in derivative financial instruments		(2,406)	(8,134)	4,205
Net (increase)/decrease in trading portfolio assets		(8,595)	10,624	(29,611)
Net decrease in trading portfolio liabilities		(8,510)	(9,980)	(1,098)
Net increase/(decrease) in financial assets and liabilities at fair value through the income<br><br>statement		27,927	(12,275)	34,459
Net (increase)/decrease in other assets		(214)	1,451	(244)
Net decrease in other liabilities		(251)	(1,406)	(2,378)
Corporate income tax		287	135	249
Net cash from operating activities		29,090	(1,735)	8,674
Purchase of debt securities at amortised cost		(11,378)	(17,113)	(11,984)
Proceeds from redemption or sale of debt securities at amortised cost		8,113	15,120	2,023
Purchase of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income		(27,258)	(49,318)	(46,808)
Proceeds from sale or redemption of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive<br><br>income		35,767	49,258	39,852
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and investment in intangibles		(69)	(21)	(22)
Disposal/(Acquisition) of subsidiaries and associates, net of cash disposed		—	48	(1)
Net increase in investment in subsidiaries		(1)	(824)	(7)
Net cash from investing activities		5,174	(2,850)	(16,947)
Dividends paid and other coupon payments on equity instruments		(3,771)	(3,048)	(2,635)
Issuance of subordinated liabilities	25	9,808	11,143	5,643
Redemption of subordinated liabilities	25	(5,553)	(4,963)	(7,209)
Issue of shares and other equity instruments	26	2,777	970	2,499
Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments	26	(2,198)	(2,131)	(2,425)
Vesting of shares under employee share schemes		(530)	(448)	(442)
Net cash from financing activities		533	1,523	(4,569)
Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents		(2,376)	(1,380)	(3,938)
Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents		32,421	(4,442)	(16,780)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year		163,821	168,263	185,043
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year		196,242	163,821	168,263
Cash and cash equivalents comprise:
Cash and balances at central banks		178,321	151,288	153,701
Loans and advances to banks with original maturity of three months or less		4,516	136	3,130
Cash collateral balances with central banks with original maturity of three months or less		11,625	11,025	10,325
Treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity of three months or less		1,780	1,372	1,107
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year		196,242	163,821	168,263

Interest received was £23,086m (2024: £25,935m; 2023: £24,134m) and interest paid was £20,178m (2024: £23,199m;

2023: £20,609m). Dividends received were £1,667m (2024: £1,803m; 2023: £529m).

Barclays Bank PLC was required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities of £858m (2024:

£589m; 2023: £767m). For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits

and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes

in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered

to be part of cash equivalents.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	186

Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025

This section describes the Barclays Bank Group’s material accounting policies and critical accounting judgements and<br><br>estimates that relate to the financial statements and notes as a whole. If an accounting policy or a critical accounting<br><br>judgement or estimate relates to a particular note, disclosure is contained within the relevant note.

1Material accounting policies

1.Reporting entity

Barclays Bank PLC is a public company limited by shares registered in England under company number 1026167, having its

registered office at 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP.

These financial statements are prepared for Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries (the Barclays Bank Group) under Section

399 of the Companies Act 2006. The Barclays Bank Group is a major global financial services provider engaged in credit

cards, wholesale banking, investment banking, wealth management and investment management services. In addition,

separate financial statements have been presented for the holding company.

2.Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards

The consolidated financial statements of the Barclays Bank Group, and the separate financial statements of Barclays Bank

PLC, have been prepared in accordance with UK-adopted international accounting standards.

The consolidated financial statements of the Barclays Bank Group, and the separate financial statements of Barclays Bank

PLC, have also been prepared in accordance with (1) International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the

International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee, as

there are no applicable differences from IFRS as issued by the IASB for the periods presented; and (2) IFRS adopted pursuant

to Regulation (EC) No. 1606/2002 as it applies in the European Union (“IFRS as adopted by the EU”).

There are currently no differences between UK-adopted international accounting standards and IFRS as adopted by the EU

and therefore no reconciliation of variances is provided.

The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated and separate financial statements are set out

below, and in the relevant notes to the financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied.

3.Basis of preparation

The consolidated and separate financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention modified to the

extent required or permitted under IFRS as set out in the relevant accounting policies. The financial statements are stated in

millions of Pounds Sterling (£m), the functional currency of Barclays Bank PLC.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 as

applicable to companies using IFRS. The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis as the Board is satisfied

that the Barclays Bank Group and parent company have the resources to continue in business for a period of at least 12

months from approval of the financial statements.

In making this assessment, the Board has considered a wide range of information relating to present and future conditions

and has reviewed a working capital report (WCR). The WCR is used by the Board to assess the future performance of the

Barclays Bank Group and whether it has the resources in place that are required to meet its ongoing regulatory

requirements. The WCR assessment is based upon business plans which contain future forecasts of profitability taken from

the Barclays Bank Group’s medium term plan as well as projections of regulatory capital requirements and business funding

needs. The WCR also includes an assessment of the impact of internally generated stress testing scenarios on the liquidity

and capital requirement forecasts. The stress tests used were based upon an assessment of reasonably possible downside

economic scenarios that the Barclays Bank Group could experience.

The WCR showed that the Barclays Bank Group had sufficient capital and liquidity in place to support its future business

requirements and remained above its regulatory minimum requirements in the stress scenarios. Accordingly, the Board

concluded that there was a reasonable expectation that the Barclays Bank Group has adequate resources to continue as a

going concern for a period of at least 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements.

4.Accounting policies

The Barclays Bank Group prepares financial statements in accordance with IFRS. The Barclays Bank Group’s material

accounting policies relating to specific financial statement items, together with a description of the accounting estimates

and judgements that were critical to preparing those items, are set out under the relevant notes. Accounting policies that

affect the financial statements as a whole are set out below.

(i)Consolidation

The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC and all its subsidiaries.

Subsidiaries are entities over which Barclays Bank PLC has control. The Barclays Bank Group has control over another entity

when the Barclays Bank Group has all of the following:

1)power over the relevant activities of the investee, for example through voting or other rights;

2)exposure to, or rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee; and

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	187

Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025

3)the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

As the consolidated financial statements include partnerships where the Barclays Bank Group member is a partner,

advantage has been taken of the exemption under Regulation 7 of the Partnership (Accounts) Regulations 2008 with regard

to preparing and filing of individual partnership financial statements.

Details of the principal subsidiaries are given in Note 31.

(ii)Foreign currency translation

Transactions in foreign currencies are translated into Sterling at the rate ruling on the date of the transaction. Foreign

currency monetary balances are translated into Sterling at the period end exchange rates. Exchange gains and losses on

such balances are taken to the income statement.

The Barclays Bank Group’s foreign operations (including subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and branches) based mainly

outside the UK may have different functional currencies. The functional currency of an operation is the currency of the main

economy to which it is exposed.

Prior to consolidation (or equity accounting) the assets and liabilities of non-Sterling operations are translated at the period

end exchange rate and items of income, expense and other comprehensive income are translated into Sterling at the rate on

the date of the transactions. Exchange differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are included in currency

translation reserves within equity. These are transferred to the income statement when the Barclays Bank Group disposes of

the entire interest in a foreign operation, when partial disposal results in the loss of control of an interest in a subsidiary,

when an investment previously accounted for using the equity method is accounted for as a financial asset, or on the

disposal of a foreign operation within a branch.

(iii)Financial assets and liabilities

Recognition

The Barclays Bank Group recognises financial assets and liabilities when it becomes a party to the terms of the contract.

Trade date or settlement date accounting is applied depending on the classification of the financial asset.

Classification and measurement

Financial assets are classified on the basis of two criteria:

i)the business model within which financial assets are managed; and

ii)their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and

interest’ (SPPI)).

The Barclays Bank Group assesses the business model criteria at a portfolio level. Information that is considered in

determining the applicable business model includes (i) policies and objectives for the relevant portfolio, (ii) how the

performance and risks of the portfolio are managed, evaluated and reported to management, and (iii) the frequency, volume

and timing of sales in prior periods, sales expectation for future periods, and the reasons for such sales.

The contractual cash flow characteristics of financial assets are assessed with reference to whether the cash flows represent

SPPI. Terms that could change the contractual cash flows so that it would not meet the condition for SPPI are considered,

including: (i) contingent and leverage features, (ii) non-recourse arrangements, (iii) features that could modify the time

value of money, and (iv) Social, Environmental and Sustainability-linked features. Terms with de-minimis impact do not

preclude cash flows from representing SPPI.

The accounting policy for each type of financial asset or liability is included within the relevant note for the item. The

Barclays Bank Group’s policies for determining the fair values of the assets and liabilities are set out in Note 16.

Derecognition

The Barclays Bank Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a financial asset, from its balance sheet where (i) the

contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or (ii) the contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset

have been transferred (usually by sale) and with them either (a) substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset have been

transferred, or (b) where neither substantially all the risks and rewards have been transferred or retained, where control over

the asset has been lost.

It may not be obvious whether substantially all of the risks and rewards of a transferred asset, or portion of an asset, have

been transferred. It is often necessary to perform a quantitative analysis that compares the Barclays Bank Group's exposure

to variability in asset cash flows before the transfer with its retained exposure after the transfer. A cash flow analysis of this

nature may require judgement. In particular, it is necessary to estimate the asset’s expected future cash flows as well as

potential variability around this expectation. The method of estimating expected future cash flows depends on the nature of

the asset, with market and market-implied data used to the greatest extent possible. The potential variability around this

expectation is typically determined by stressing underlying parameters to create reasonable alternative upside and downside

scenarios. Probabilities are then assigned to each scenario. Stressed parameters may include default rates, loss severity, or

prepayment rates.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	188

Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025

Financial liabilities are de-recognised when the liability has been settled, has expired or has been extinguished. An exchange

of an existing financial liability for a new liability with the same lender on substantially different terms – generally a difference

of

10%

or more in the present value of the cash flows or a substantive qualitative amendment – is accounted for as an

extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.

Accounting for reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

Reverse repurchase agreements (and stock borrowing or similar transactions) are a form of secured lending whereby the

Barclays Bank Group provides a loan or cash collateral in exchange for the transfer of collateral, generally in the form of

marketable securities subject to an agreement to transfer the securities back at a fixed price in the future. Repurchase

agreements are where the Barclays Bank Group obtains such loans or cash collateral, in exchange for the transfer of

collateral.

The Barclays Bank Group purchases (a reverse repurchase agreement) or borrows securities subject to a commitment to

resell or return them. The securities are not included in the balance sheet as the Barclays Bank Group does not acquire the

risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration paid (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a loan asset at

amortised cost, unless it is designated or mandatorily at fair value through profit and loss.

The Barclays Bank Group may also sell (a repurchase agreement) or lend securities subject to a commitment to repurchase

or redeem them. The securities are retained on the balance sheet as the Barclays Bank Group retains substantially all the

risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration received (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a financial liability at

amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

(iv)Issued debt and equity instruments

Issued financial instruments or their components are classified as liabilities if the contractual arrangement results in the

Barclays Bank Group having an obligation to either deliver cash or another financial asset, or a variable number of equity

shares, to the holder of the instrument. If this is not the case, the instrument is generally an equity instrument and the

proceeds included in equity, net of transaction costs. Dividends and other returns to equity holders are recognised when

paid or declared by the members at the Annual General Meeting and treated as a deduction from equity.

Where issued financial instruments contain both liability and equity components, these are accounted for separately. The

fair value of the debt is estimated first and the balance of the proceeds is included within equity.

(v) Cash flow statement

Cash comprises cash on hand and balances at central banks. Cash equivalents comprise loans and advances to banks, cash collateral

balances with central banks related to payment schemes and treasury and other eligible bills, all with original maturities of three months or

less.

Investments in debt securities at amortised cost are deemed to be investing activities for the purposes of the cash flow

statement, except those instruments considered to be cash equivalents.

5.New and amended standards and interpretations

Future accounting developments

The following accounting standards have been issued by the IASB but are not yet effective:

Amendment to IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 - Classification and Measurement of Financial Instruments

In May 2024, the IASB issued targeted amendments to IFRS 9 to address feedback received from stakeholders following a

post-implementation review.  The amendments include:

•Additional guidance to clarify when certain financial assets may be compliant with SPPI requirements, including

instruments with contingent features (e.g. ESG-linked financing), as well as contractually-linked instruments and

non-recourse financing.

•Clarifying the derecognition requirements for financial assets and financial liabilities, including establishing a new

accounting policy choice for derecognition of a financial liability when a payment is initiated by the reporting entity

using an electronic payment system provided specified criteria is met.

The amendments are effective from 1 January 2026. The adoption of the derecognition amendments is expected to result in

a change of policy for derecognising certain types of financial liabilities. As a result of these amendments, it is expected that

the impacted liabilities will be reclassified from Cash collateral and settlement balances to Trading portfolio liabilities. No

other material impacts are anticipated from the adoption of these derecognition amendments or from the other changes

introduced to IFRS 9. The quantitative impact of IFRS 9 and IFRS 7 amendments will continue to be assessed in 2026.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	189

Notes to the financial statements

For the year ended 31 December 2025

IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements

In April 2024, the IASB issued IFRS 18 Presentation and Disclosure in Financial Statements, which replaces IAS 1. IFRS 18

introduces new requirements for presentation within the statement of profit or loss, including specified totals and subtotals,

it requires entities to classify all income and expenses into five categories: operating, investing, financing, income tax and

discontinued operations, and introduces defined subtotals, including operating profit.

IFRS 18 requires entities to assess whether they have a IFRS 18 defined specified main business activity. For those entities

with a specified main business activity, certain income and expenses will be recorded in the operating category, which may

have been recorded in another category if the entity did not have a specified main business activity.

The standard introduces new aggregation and disaggregation principles for financial information and narrow scope

amendments to IAS 7 Statement of Cash Flows by using operating profit as the starting point for the indirect method and

removing optionality in the classification of interest and dividends. The standard requires disclosure of management-defined

performance measures (MPMs).

The Barclays Bank Group has commenced its IFRS 18 impact assessment. The Barclays Bank Group expects to have an IFRS

18 specified main business activity, allowing significant items from the Barclays Bank Group’s operations to be reported

within the operating category.

The Barclays Bank Group is also assessing the impact on management‑defined performance measures (MPMs) and the

enhanced disaggregation requirements introduced by IFRS 18. In 2026, the Barclays Bank Group will continue to assess the

impact of IFRS 18.

The new standard is effective from 1 January 2027.

6.Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management

to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or

complexity or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are

highlighted under the relevant note. Information about estimates, and other sources of estimation uncertainty at the end of

the reporting period, that are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in material adjustment to the carrying

amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are disclosed within the relevant note.

▪Credit impairment charges on page 199

▪Tax on page 202

▪Fair value of financial instruments on page 217

▪Pensions and post-retirement benefit obligations on page 259

▪Provisions including conduct and legal, competition, and regulatory matters on page 238

7.Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, certain disclosures

required under IFRS have been included within the Risk review section as follows:

▪Credit risk on pages 74 to 76 and on pages 89 to 129

▪Market risk on page 76 and on pages 131 to 132

▪Treasury and capital risk – capital on page 77 to 79 and on page 141

▪Treasury and capital risk – liquidity on pages 77 to 79 and on pages 134 to 140

These disclosures are covered by the Audit opinion (included on pages 172 to 174) where referenced as audited.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	190

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

The notes included in this section focus on the results and performance of the Barclays Bank Group. Information on the

segmental performance, income generated, expenditure incurred, tax, and dividends are included here.

2Segmental reporting

Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive Committee,

which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, and has been identified

as the chief operating decision maker. All transactions between business segments are conducted on an arm’s-length basis.

Income and expenses directly associated with each segment are included in determining business segment performance.

The Group presents its financial disclosures through the following segments:

•Barclays UK Corporate Bank: this division brings together lending, trade and working capital, liquidity, payments

and FX solutions for UK corporate clients with an annual turnover from £6.5 million and higher, excluding those

clients that form part of the FTSE 350, which are included within the IB.

•Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management: this division serves UK and international private banking clients

providing a range of investment, banking and lending products alongside expert advice. It also serves UK wealth

management and UK digital investing clients offering a range of financial services.

•Barclays Investment Bank: this segment incorporates the Global Markets, Investment Banking and International

Corporate Banking businesses, serving FTSE 350, multinationals and financial institution clients that are regular

users of Investment Bank services.

•Barclays US Consumer Bank: is a co-branded credit card issuer and financial services partner in the United States

for travel, entertainment, retail and affinity institutions. It offers co-branded, small business and private label credit

cards, instalment loans, online savings accounts and certificates of deposits.

The below tables also includes Head Office, which comprises central support, central treasury operations and legacy

businesses. In addition to these elements, Head Office  also includes the Payment Acceptance business.

Analysis of results by business
For the year ended 31 December 2025	Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate<br><br>Bank	Barclays<br><br>Private Bank<br><br>and  Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment<br><br>Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer<br><br>Bank	Head Office	Barclays<br><br>Bank Group
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Net interest income	1,532	834	1,653	2,849	426	7,294
Non-interest income	593	584	11,677	859	(80)	13,633
Total income	2,125	1,418	13,330	3,708	346	20,927
Of which inter-segmental income/(expense)	1,903	1,864	(3,483)	(6)	(278)	—
Operating costs	(1,071)	(1,040)	(8,187)	(1,666)	(629)	(12,593)
UK regulatory levies	(29)	(10)	(181)	—	(8)	(228)
Litigation and conduct	(39)	(9)	(28)	(8)	(200)	(284)
Total operating expenses	(1,139)	(1,059)	(8,396)	(1,674)	(837)	(13,105)
Other net expenses1	—	—	—	—	(13)	(13)
Profit/(loss) before impairment	986	359	4,934	2,034	(504)	7,809
Credit impairment (charges)/releases	(37)	8	(305)	(1,521)	(11)	(1,866)
Profit/(loss) before tax	949	367	4,629	513	(515)	5,943
Total assets (£bn)	71.4	41.9	1,082.0	34.3	15.9	1,245.5
Total liabilities (£bn)	104.3	80.4	968.1	25.4	5.0	1,183.2
Number of employees (full time equivalent)						22,300
Average number of employees (full time equivalent)						22,300
Average number of employees (headcount)						22,400

Note

1Other net expenses represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures, and profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	191

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

For the year ended 31 December 2024	Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate<br><br>Bank	Barclays<br><br>Private Bank<br><br>and  Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment<br><br>Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer<br><br>Bank	Head Office	Barclays<br><br>Bank Group
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Net interest income	1,266	796	1,413	2,687	583	6,745
Non-interest income	590	545	10,779	664	(286)	12,292
Total income	1,856	1,341	12,192	3,351	297	19,037
Of which inter-segmental income/(expense)	2,410	2,167	(3,815)	(8)	(754)	—
Operating costs	(1,008)	(953)	(7,889)	(1,637)	(758)	(12,245)
UK regulatory levies	(37)	(9)	(187)	—	(9)	(242)
Litigation and conduct	(1)	—	(55)	(13)	(117)	(186)
Total operating expenses	(1,046)	(962)	(8,131)	(1,650)	(884)	(12,673)
Other net expenses1	—	—	—	—	—	—
Profit/(loss) before impairment	810	379	4,061	1,701	(587)	6,364
Credit impairment (charges)/releases	(76)	(6)	(123)	(1,293)	(119)	(1,617)
Profit/(loss) before tax	734	373	3,938	408	(706)	4,747
Total assets (£bn)	61.3	34.1	1,061.8	34.9	26.4	1,218.5
Total liabilities (£bn)	94.7	75.0	955.6	24.5	9.5	1,159.3
Number of employees (full time equivalent)						23,000
Average number of employees (full time equivalent)						23,400
Average number of employees (headcount)						23,500		For the year ended 31 December 2023	Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate<br><br>Bank	Barclays<br><br>Private Bank<br><br>and  Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment<br><br>Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer<br><br>Bank	Head Office	Barclays<br><br>Bank Group
---	---	---	---	---	---	---
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Net interest income	1,241	792	1,705	2,616	299	6,653
Non-interest income	620	443	9,717	665	170	11,615
Total income	1,861	1,235	11,422	3,281	469	18,268
Of which inter-segmental income/(expense)	1,576	1,726	(2,650)	(6)	(646)	—
Operating costs	(977)	(830)	(7,847)	(1,669)	(947)	(12,270)
UK regulatory levies	(8)	(4)	(123)	—	(14)	(149)
Litigation and conduct	1	2	5	(6)	(46)	(44)
Total operating expenses	(984)	(832)	(7,965)	(1,675)	(1,007)	(12,463)
Other net expenses1	(3)	—	1	(1)	(1)	(4)
Profit/(loss) before impairment	874	403	3,458	1,605	(539)	5,801
Credit impairment (charges)/releases	27	(4)	(102)	(1,438)	(61)	(1,578)
Profit/(loss) before tax	901	399	3,356	167	(600)	4,223
Total assets (£bn)	61.6	32.1	1,027.6	33.4	30.5	1,185.2
Total liabilities (£bn)	86.8	61.0	948.9	21.2	6.8	1,124.7
Number of employees (full time equivalent)						23,900
Average number of employees (full time equivalent)						23,800
Average number of employees (headcount)						24,000

Note

1Other net expenses represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures, and profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries,

associates and joint ventures.

Inter-segmental income/(expense) refers to the internal charging of revenues between different business segments,

reflecting how resources such as funding, capital, or services are utilised across the Barclays Bank Group. Segments which

operate with a net customer deposit position contribute surplus deposits as a funding source for other Barclays Bank Group

segment activities.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	192

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

Income by geographic region1
	2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	£m	£m	£m
United Kingdom	7,471	6,075	6,095
Americas	9,652	8,864	8,200
Europe	2,265	2,749	2,513
Asia	1,453	1,267	1,373
Africa and Middle East	86	82	87
Total	20,927	19,037	18,268
Income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total income
	2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	£m	£m	£m
United Kingdom	7,471	6,075	6,095
United States	9,498	8,702	8,013

Note

1 The geographical analysis is based on the location of the office where the transactions are recorded.

3Net interest income

| Accounting for interest income and expenses<br><br>Interest income on loans and advances at amortised cost, financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive<br><br>income and interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost are calculated using the effective interest method<br><br>which allocates interest, and direct and incremental fees and costs, over the expected lives of the assets and liabilities.<br><br>The effective interest method requires the Barclays Bank Group to estimate future cash flows, in some cases based on its<br><br>experience of customers’ behaviour, considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument, as well as the expected<br><br>lives of the assets and liabilities.<br><br>The Barclays Bank Group incurs certain costs to originate credit card balances with the most significant being co-brand<br><br>partner fees. To the extent these costs are attributed to customers that continuously carry an outstanding balance<br><br>(revolvers) and incremental to the origination of credit card balances, they are capitalised and subsequently included<br><br>within the calculation of the effective interest rate. They are amortised to interest income over the period of expected<br><br>repayment of the originated balance. Costs attributed to customers that settle their outstanding balances each period<br><br>(transactors) are deferred on the balance sheet as a cost of obtaining a contract and amortised to fee and commission<br><br>expense over the life of the customer relationship (refer to Note 4). There are no other individual estimates involved in the<br><br>calculation of effective interest rates that are material to the results or financial position. | | --- || | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Cash and balances at central banks | 7,759 | 9,567 | 8,384 | | Debt securities at amortised cost | 1,953 | 1,737 | 1,819 | | Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and customers | 9,324 | 9,508 | 7,854 | | Fair value through other comprehensive income | 1,844 | 2,335 | 3,808 | | Cash collateral | 1,849 | 2,026 | 1,987 | | Other1 | 680 | 607 | 409 | | Interest and similar income | 23,409 | 25,780 | 24,261 | | Deposits at amortised cost from banks and customers | (8,723) | (10,513) | (8,741) | | Debt securities in issue | (2,551) | (2,847) | (3,030) | | Subordinated liabilities | (2,973) | (2,990) | (2,697) | | Cash collateral | (1,453) | (2,185) | (2,206) | | Other2 | (415) | (500) | (934) | | Interest and similar expense | (16,115) | (19,035) | (17,608) | | Net interest income | 7,294 | 6,745 | 6,653 |

Notes

1    Includes interest income from reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost.

2    Includes interest expense from repurchase agreement and other similar secured borrowing at amortised cost and lease expense.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	193

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

4Net fee and commission income

Accounting for net fee and commission income<br><br>The Barclays Bank Group recognises fee and commission income charged for services provided by the Barclays Bank<br><br>Group as and when performance obligations are satisfied, for example, on completion of the underlying transaction.<br><br>Incremental costs are reported within fee and commission expense if they are directly attributable to generating<br><br>identifiable fee and commission income. Where the contractual arrangements also result in the Barclays Bank Group<br><br>recognising financial instruments in scope of IFRS 9, such financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value in<br><br>accordance with IFRS 9 before applying the provisions of IFRS 15.

Fee and commission income is disaggregated below by fee types that reflect the nature of the services offered across the

Barclays Bank Group and operating segments, in accordance with IFRS 15. The table below includes a total for fees in scope

of IFRS 15. Refer to Note 2 for more detailed information about operating segments.

	2025
	Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate<br><br>Bank	Barclays<br><br>Private Bank<br><br>and Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment<br><br>Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer<br><br>Bank	Head Office	Barclays Bank<br><br>Group
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Fee type
Transactional	462	30	336	2,727	254	3,809
Advisory	—	344	710	—	—	1,054
Brokerage and execution	—	158	1,820	—	—	1,978
Underwriting and syndication	102	—	2,655	—	—	2,757
Other	11	3	64	—	31	109
Total revenue from contracts with customers	575	535	5,585	2,727	285	9,707
Other non-contract fee income	26	—	146	—	—	172
Fee and commission income	601	535	5,731	2,727	285	9,879
Fee and commission expense	(96)	(40)	(1,258)	(1,858)	(74)	(3,326)
Net fee and commission income	505	495	4,473	869	211	6,553
	2024
---	---	---	---	---	---	---
	Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate<br><br>Bank	Barclays<br><br>Private Bank<br><br>and Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment<br><br>Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer<br><br>Bank	Head Office	Barclays Bank<br><br>Group
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Fee type
Transactional	448	33	336	2,661	322	3,800
Advisory	—	319	739	—	—	1,058
Brokerage and execution	—	129	1,580	—	—	1,709
Underwriting and syndication	92	—	2,596	—	—	2,688
Other	11	3	51	—	29	94
Total revenue from contracts with customers	551	484	5,302	2,661	351	9,349
Other non-contract fee income	25	—	112	—	—	137
Fee and commission income	576	484	5,414	2,661	351	9,486
Fee and commission expense	(95)	(38)	(1,127)	(1,855)	(100)	(3,215)
Net fee and commission income	481	446	4,287	806	251	6,271
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	194
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

	2023
	Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate<br><br>Bank	Barclays<br><br>Private Bank<br><br>and Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment<br><br>Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer<br><br>Bank	Head Office	Barclays Bank<br><br>Group
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Fee type
Transactional	433	32	327	2,603	297	3,692
Advisory	—	251	652	—	—	903
Brokerage and execution	—	89	1,674	—	—	1,763
Underwriting and syndication	82	—	1,997	—	—	2,079
Other	12	3	57	—	60	132
Total revenue from contracts with customers	527	375	4,707	2,603	357	8,569
Other non-contract fee income	28	1	110	—	—	139
Fee and commission income	555	376	4,817	2,603	357	8,708
Fee and commission expense	(102)	(34)	(1,253)	(1,765)	(93)	(3,247)
Net fee and commission income	453	342	3,564	838	264	5,461

Fee types

Transactional

Transactional fees are service charges on deposit accounts, cash management services fees and transactional processing

fees. These include interchange and merchant fee income generated from credit and bank card usage. Transaction and

processing fees are recognised at the point in time the transaction occurs or service is performed. Interchange and merchant

fees are recognised upon settlement of the card transaction payment.

The Barclays Bank Group incurs certain card related costs including those related to cardholder reward programmes and

payments to co-brand partners. Cardholder reward programme costs related to customers that settle their outstanding

balance each period (transactors) are expensed when incurred and presented in fee and commission expense, while costs

related to customers that continuously carry an outstanding balance (revolvers) are included in the effective interest rate of

the receivable (refer to Note 3). Payments to partners for new cardholder account originations related to transactor

accounts are deferred as costs to obtain a contract under IFRS 15, while costs related to revolver accounts are included in

the effective interest rate of the receivable (refer to Note 3). Those costs deferred under IFRS 15 are capitalised and

amortised over the estimated life of the customer relationship. Payments to co-brand partners based on revenue sharing to

the extent the revenue share relates to 'revolvers' are included in the effective interest rate of the receivable and to the extent

revenue share relates to 'transactors' it is presented in fee and commission expense. Payments based on profitability are

presented in fee and commission expense.

Advisory

Advisory fees are generated from wealth management services and investment banking advisory services related to

mergers, acquisitions and financial restructurings. Wealth management advisory fees are earned over the period the services

are provided and are generally recognised quarterly when the market value of client assets is determined. Investment

banking advisory fees are recognised at the point in time when the services related to the transaction have been completed

under the terms of the engagement. Investment banking advisory costs are recognised as incurred in fee and commission

expense if direct and incremental to the advisory services or are otherwise recognised in operating expenses.

Brokerage and execution

Brokerage and execution fees are earned for executing client transactions with various exchanges and over-the-counter

markets and assisting clients in clearing transactions and facilitating foreign exchange transactions for spot/forward

contracts. Brokerage and execution fees are recognised at the point in time the associated service has been completed

which is generally the trade date of the transaction.

Underwriting and syndication

Underwriting and syndication fees are earned for the distribution of client equity or debt securities and the arrangement and

administration of a loan syndication. This includes commitment fees to provide loan financing. Underwriting fees are

generally recognised on trade date if there is no remaining contingency, such as the transaction being conditional on the

closing of an acquisition or another transaction. Underwriting costs are deferred and recognised in fee and commission

expense when the associated underwriting fees are recorded. Syndication fees are earned for arranging and administering a

loan syndication; however, the associated fee may be subject to variability until the loan has been syndicated to other

syndicate members or until other contingencies have been resolved and therefore the fee revenue is deferred until the

uncertainty is resolved.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	195

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

Included in underwriting and syndication fees are loan commitment fees, when the drawdown is not probable. Such

commitment fees are recognised over time through to the contractual maturity of the commitment.

Contract assets and contract liabilities

The Barclays Bank Group had no material contract assets or contract liabilities as at 31 December 2025 (2024: £nil; 2023:

£nil).

Impairment of fee receivables and contract assets

During 2025, there have been no material impairments recognised in relation to fees receivable and contract assets (2024:

£nil; 2023: £nil). Fees in relation to transactional business can be added to outstanding customer balances. These amounts

may be subsequently impaired as part of the overall loans and advances balance.

Remaining performance obligations

The Barclays Bank Group applies the practical expedient of IFRS 15 and does not disclose information about remaining

performance obligations that have original expected durations of one year or less or because the Barclays Bank Group has a

right to consideration that corresponds directly with the value of the service provided to the client or customer.

Costs incurred in obtaining or fulfilling a contract

The Barclays Bank Group expects that incremental costs of obtaining a contract such as success fee and commission fees

paid are recoverable and therefore capitalises such contract costs. Capitalised contract costs net of amortisation as at

31 December 2025 are £131m (2024: £103m; 2023: £203m).

Capitalised contract costs are amortised over the customer relationship period depending on the transfer of services to

which the asset pertains. In 2025, the amount of amortisation was £29m (2024: £58m; 2023: £52m) and there was no

impairment loss recognised in connection with the capitalised contract costs (2024: £nil; 2023: £nil).

5Net trading income

| Accounting for net trading income<br><br>Trading positions are held at fair value, and the resulting gains and losses are included in net trading income, together with<br><br>interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities. Incremental<br><br>costs are reported within net trading income if they are directly attributable to generating identifiable trading income.<br><br>Income arises from both the sale and purchase of trading positions, margins which are achieved through market making<br><br>and customer business and from changes in fair value caused by movements in interest and exchange rates, equity prices<br><br>and other market variables.<br><br>Gains or losses on non-trading financial instruments designated or mandatorily at fair value, with changes in fair value<br><br>recognised in the income statement, are included in net trading income where the business model is to manage assets and<br><br>liabilities on a fair value basis, which includes the use of derivatives. Gains and losses are also reported in net trading<br><br>income where an instrument is designated at fair value to eliminate an accounting mismatch. | | --- || | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Net gains on financial instruments held for trading | 5,160 | 4,201 | 4,310 | | Net gains on financial instruments mandatorily at fair value | 1,325 | 1,199 | 1,308 | | Net gains on financial instruments designated at fair value | 619 | 500 | 362 | | Net trading income | 7,104 | 5,900 | 5,980 | | Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F | 196 | | --- | --- |

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

6Net investment (expense)/income

| Accounting for net investment (expense)/income<br><br>Dividends are recognised when the right to receive the dividend has been established. Incremental costs are reported<br><br>within net investment income if they are directly attributable to generating identifiable investment income. Other<br><br>accounting policies relating to net investment income are set out in Note 12 and Note 14. | | --- || | 2025 | 2024 | 2023 | | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | £m | £m | £m | | Net gains from financial assets mandatorily at fair value | 161 | 219 | 133 | | Net (losses)/gains from disposal of financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income | (201) | 134 | 102 | | Net losses from disposal of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised<br><br>cost1 | (6) | (225) | (9) | | Dividend Income | — | 3 | — | | Net losses on other investments | (26) | (62) | (114) | | Net investment (expense)/income | (72) | 69 | 112 |

1    Included within the 2024 balance are losses of £220m on sale of the performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio.

7Infrastructure, administration and general expenses

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Infrastructure costs
Property and equipment	454	440	591
Depreciation and amortisation	354	353	438
Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets	8	2	44
Total infrastructure costs	816	795	1,073
Administration and general expenses
Consultancy, legal and professional fees	419	458	422
Marketing and advertising	355	407	391
Other administration and general expenses	5,418	5,029	4,793
Total administration and general expenses	6,192	5,894	5,606
Total infrastructure, administration and general expenses	7,008	6,689	6,679
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	197
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

8Credit impairment charges/(releases)

Accounting for the impairment of financial assets

Impairment

In accordance with IFRS 9, the Barclays Bank Group is required to recognise expected credit losses (ECLs) based on unbiased

forward-looking information for all financial assets at amortised cost, lease receivables, debt financial assets at fair value

through other comprehensive income, loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. Intercompany exposures in the

individual financial statements, including loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts, are also in scope of IFRS 9

for ECL purposes.

At the reporting date, an allowance (or provision for loan commitments and financial guarantees) is required for the 12

month (Stage 1) ECLs. If the credit risk has significantly increased since initial recognition (Stage 2), or if the financial

instrument is credit impaired (Stage 3), an allowance (or provision) should be recognised for the lifetime ECLs.

The measurement of ECL is calculated using three main components: (i) probability of default (PD) (ii) loss given default

(LGD) and (iii) the exposure at default (EAD).

The 12 month and lifetime ECLs are calculated by multiplying the respective PD, LGD and the EAD. The 12 month and

lifetime PDs represent the PD occurring over the next 12 months and the remaining maturity of the instrument respectively.

The EAD represents the expected balance at default, taking into account the repayment of principal and interest from the

balance sheet date to the default event together with any expected drawdowns of committed facilities. The LGD represents

expected losses on the EAD given the event of default, taking into account, among other attributes, the mitigating effect of

collateral value at the time it is expected to be realised and the time value of money.

Expected credit loss measurement is based on the ability of borrowers to make payments as they fall due. The Barclays Bank

Group also considers sector specific risks and whether additional adjustments are required in the measurement of ECL.

Credit risk may be impacted by climate considerations for certain sectors, such as oil and gas.

Determining a significant increase in credit risk since initial recognition:

The Barclays Bank Group assesses when a significant increase in credit risk has occurred based on quantitative and

qualitative assessments. The credit risk of an exposure is considered to have significantly increased when:

i)Quantitative test

The annualised lifetime PD has increased by more than an agreed threshold relative to the equivalent at origination.

PD deterioration thresholds are defined as percentage increases, and are set at an origination score band and segment level

to ensure the test appropriately captures significant increases in credit risk at all risk levels. Generally, thresholds are

inversely correlated to the origination PD, i.e. as the origination PD increases, the threshold value reduces.

The assessment of the point at which a PD increase is deemed ‘significant’ is based upon analysis of the portfolio’s risk

profile against a common set of principles and performance metrics (consistent across both retail and wholesale

businesses), incorporating expert credit judgement where appropriate. Application of quantitative PD floors does not

represent the use of the low credit risk exemption as exposures can separately move into stage 2 via the qualitative route

described below.

Wholesale assets apply a 100.0% increase in PD and 0.2% PD floor to determine a significant increase in credit risk.

Retail assets apply bespoke relative increase and absolute PD thresholds based on product type and origination PD.

Thresholds are subject to maximums defined by Barclays Bank Group policy and typically apply minimum relative thresholds

of 50%-100% and a maximum relative threshold of 400%

For existing/historical exposures where origination point scores or data are no longer available or do not represent a

comparable estimate of lifetime PD, a proxy origination score is defined, based upon:

▪back-population of the approved lifetime PD score either to origination date or, where this is not feasible, as far back as

possible (subject to a data start point no later than 1 January 2015); or

▪use of available historical account performance data and other customer information, to derive a comparable ‘proxy’

estimation of origination PD.

ii)Qualitative test

This is relevant for accounts that meet the portfolio’s ‘high risk’ criteria and are subject to closer credit monitoring.

High risk customers may not be in arrears but either through an event or an observed behaviour exhibit credit distress. The

definition and assessment of high risk includes as wide a range of information as reasonably available, such as industry and

Barclays Bank Group-wide customer level data, including but not limited to bureau scores and high consumer indebtedness

index, wherever possible or relevant.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	198

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

Whilst the high risk populations applied for IFRS 9 impairment purposes are aligned with risk management processes, they

are also regularly reviewed and validated to ensure that they capture any incremental segments where there is evidence of

credit deterioration.

iii)Backstop criteria

This is relevant for accounts that are more than 30 calendar days past due. The 30 days past due criteria is a backstop rather

than a primary driver of moving exposures into Stage 2.

The criteria for determining a significant increase in credit risk for assets with bullet repayments follows the same principle

as all other assets, i.e. quantitative, qualitative and backstop tests are all applied.

Exposures will move back to Stage 1 once they no longer meet the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk. This means

that, at a minimum all payments must be up-to-date, the PD deterioration test is no longer met, the account is no longer

classified as high risk, and the customer has evidenced an ability to maintain future payments.

Exposures are only removed from Stage 3 and re-assigned to Stage 2 once the original default trigger event no longer

applies. Exposures being removed from Stage 3 must no longer qualify as credit impaired, and:

a) the obligor will also have demonstrated consistently good payment behaviour over a 12-month period, by making all

consecutive contractual payments due and, for forborne exposures, the relevant EBA defined probationary period has also

been successfully completed; or

b) for non-forborne exposures the performance conditions are defined and approved within an appropriately sanctioned

restructure plan, including 12 months’ payment history have been met.

Management overlays and other exceptions to model outputs are applied only if consistent with the objective of identifying

significant increases in credit risk.

Forward-looking information

The measurement of ECL involves complexity and judgement, including estimation of PD, LGD, a range of unbiased future

economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives (where contractual life is not appropriate), and estimation of EAD and

assessing significant increases in credit risk.

Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial

instrument, discounted at the original effective interest rate (EIR). ECLs are the unbiased probability-weighted credit losses

determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and considering future economic conditions.

Refer to the Measurement uncertainty and sensitivity analysis section on page 105 for further details.

Definition of default, credit impaired assets, write-offs, and interest income recognition

The definition of default for the purpose of determining ECLs, and for internal credit risk management purposes, has been

aligned to the Regulatory Capital CRR Article 178 definition of default, to maintain a consistent approach with IFRS 9 and

associated regulatory guidance. The Regulatory Capital CRR Article 178 definition of default considers indicators that the

debtor is unlikely to pay, includes exposures in forbearance and is no later than when the exposure is more than 90 days

past due. When exposures are identified as credit impaired at the time when they are purchased or originated, interest

income is calculated on the carrying value net of the impairment allowance.

An asset is considered credit impaired when one or more events occur that have a detrimental impact on the estimated

future cash flows of the financial asset. This comprises assets defined as defaulted and other individually assessed exposures

where imminent default or actual loss is identified.

Uncollectible loans are written off against the related allowance for loan impairment on completion of the Barclays Bank

Group’s internal processes and when all reasonably expected recoverable amounts have been collected. Subsequent

recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to the income statement. The timing and extent of write-offs may

involve some element of subjective judgement. Nevertheless, a write-off will often be prompted by a specific event, such as

the inception of insolvency proceedings or other formal recovery action, which makes it possible to establish that some or

the entire advance is beyond realistic prospect of recovery.

Accounting for purchased financial guarantee contracts

The Barclays Bank Group may enter into a financial guarantee contract which requires the issuer of such contract to

reimburse the Barclays Bank Group for a loss it incurs because a specified debtor fails to make payment when due in

accordance with the terms of a debt instrument. For these separate financial guarantee contracts, the Barclays Bank Group

recognises a reimbursement asset aligned with the recognition of the underlying ECLs, if it is considered virtually certain that

a reimbursement would be received if the specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the terms of

the debt instrument.

Loan modifications and renegotiations that are not credit-impaired

When modification of a loan agreement occurs as a result of commercial restructuring activity rather than due to the credit

risk of the borrower, an assessment must be performed to determine whether the terms of the new agreement are

substantially different from the terms of the existing agreement. This assessment considers both the change in cash flows

arising from the modified terms as well as the change in overall instrument risk profile. In respect of payment holidays

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	199

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

granted to borrowers which are not due to forbearance, if the revised cash flows on a present value basis (based on the

original EIR) are not substantially different from the original cash flows, the loan is not considered to be substantially

modified.

Where terms are substantially different, the existing loan will be derecognised and a new loan will be recognised at fair value,

with any difference in valuation recognised immediately within the income statement, subject to observability criteria.

Where terms are not substantially different, the loan carrying value will be adjusted to reflect the present value of modified

cash flows discounted at the original EIR, with any resulting gain or loss recognised immediately within the income

statement as a modification gain or loss.

Expected life

Lifetime ECLs must be measured over the expected life. This is restricted to the maximum contractual life and takes into

account expected prepayment, extension, call and similar options. The exceptions are certain revolver financial instruments,

such as credit cards and bank overdrafts, that include both a drawn and an undrawn component where the entity’s

contractual ability to demand repayment and cancel the undrawn commitment does not limit the entity’s exposure to credit

losses to the contractual notice period. For revolving facilities, expected life is analytically derived to reflect the behavioural

life of the asset, i.e. the full period over which the business expects to be exposed to credit risk. Behavioural life is typically

based upon historical analysis of the average time to default, closure or withdrawal of facility. Where data is insufficient or

analysis inconclusive, an additional ‘maturity factor’ may be incorporated to reflect the full estimated life of the exposures,

based upon experienced judgement and/or peer analysis. Potential future modifications of contracts are not taken into

account when determining the expected life or EAD until they occur.

Discounting

ECLs are discounted at the EIR at initial recognition or an approximation thereof and consistent with income recognition. For

loan commitments the EIR is the rate that is expected to apply when the loan is drawn down and a financial asset is

recognised. Issued financial guarantee contracts are discounted at the risk-free rate. Lease receivables are discounted at the

rate implicit in the lease. For variable/floating rate financial assets, the spot rate at the reporting date is used and projections

of changes in the variable rate over the expected life are not made to estimate future interest cash flows or for discounting.

Modelling techniques

Currently, Internal Ratings-Based models are leveraged to calculate the point-in-time PD and LGD, which serve as key inputs

to the IFRS 9 models. Thereafter, these inputs are extrapolated by the IFRS 9 models to create macroeconomic sensitive

forecast of PDs, LGDs and in turn ECL.

Forbearance

A financial asset is subject to forbearance when it is modified due to the credit distress of the borrower. A modification made

to the terms of an asset due to forbearance will typically be assessed as a non-substantial modification that does not result

in derecognition of the original loan, except in circumstances where debt is exchanged for equity.

Both performing and non-performing forbearance assets are classified as Stage 3 except where it is established that the

concession granted has not resulted in diminished financial obligation and that no other regulatory definitions of default

criteria have been triggered, in which case the asset is classified as Stage 2. The minimum probationary period for non-

performing forbearance is 12 months and for performing forbearance, 24 months. Hence, a minimum of 36 months is

required for non-performing forbearance to move out of a forborne state.

No financial instrument in forbearance can transfer back to Stage 1 until all of the Stage 2 thresholds are no longer met and

can only move out of Stage 3 when no longer credit impaired.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include:

Judgements	Estimates
Identification and application of management adjustments in<br><br>response to circumstances outside the scope of the model.	Estimates include modelling assumptions such as estimating<br><br>forward-looking modelled parameters (PD, EAD  & LGD), and a range<br><br>of unbiased future economic scenarios and scenario weightings.

These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in material adjustment to the carrying amounts of

financial instruments in scope of IFRS 9 impairment within the next financial year.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	200

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

IFRS 9 impairment involves several important areas of judgement, including estimating forward looking modelled

parameters (PD, LGD and EAD), developing a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimating expected lives and

assessing significant increases in credit risk, based on the Barclays Bank Group’s experience of managing credit risk. The

determination of expected life is most material for Barclays Bank Group's credit card portfolios which is obtained via

behavioural life analysis to materially capture the risk of these facilities.

Within the retail and small businesses portfolios, which comprise large numbers of small homogenous assets with similar

risk characteristics where credit scoring techniques are generally used, the impairment allowance is calculated using forward

looking modelled parameters which are typically run at account level. There are many models in use, each tailored to a

product, line of business or customer category. Judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to

use when the models are developed or revised. Management adjustments to impairment models, which contain an element

of subjectivity, are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not fully incorporated into the

impairment models, or to reflect additional facts and circumstances at the period end. Management adjustments are

reviewed and incorporated into future model development where appropriate.

For individually significant assets in Stage 3, impairment allowances are calculated on an individual basis and all relevant

considerations that have a bearing on the expected future cash flows across a range of economic scenarios are taken into

account. These considerations can be particularly subjective and can include the business prospects for the customer, the

realisable value of collateral, the Barclays Bank Group’s position relative to other claimants, the reliability of customer

information and the likely cost and duration of the work-out process. The level of the impairment allowance is the difference

between the value of the discounted expected future cash flows (discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate),

and its carrying amount. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or as work-out

strategies evolve, resulting in frequent revisions to the impairment allowance as individual decisions are taken. Changes in

these estimates would result in a change in the allowances and have a direct impact on the impairment charge.

Temporary adjustments to calculated IFRS 9 impairment allowances may be applied in limited circumstances to account for

situations where known or expected risk factors or information have not been considered in the ECL assessment or

modelling process. For further information please see pages 103 to 104 in credit risk performance.

Information about the potential impact of the physical and transition risks of climate change on borrowers is considered,

taking into account reasonable and supportable information to make accounting judgements and estimates. Climate change

is inherently of a long-term nature, with significant levels of uncertainty, and consequently requires judgement in

determining the possible impact in the next financial year, if any.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	201

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

Credit impairment charges/(releases)

	2025			2024			2023
	Impairment<br><br>charges /<br><br>(releases)	Recoveries<br><br>and<br><br>reimburse-<br><br>ments1	Total2,3	Impairment<br><br>charges /<br><br>(releases)	Recoveries<br><br>and<br><br>reimburse-<br><br>ments1	Total2	Impairment<br><br>charges /<br><br>(releases)	Recoveries<br><br>and<br><br>reimburse-<br><br>ments1	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and advances at<br><br>amortised cost4	1,992	(131)	1,861	1,687	(42)	1,645	1,656	(41)	1,615
Off-balance sheet loan<br><br>commitments and<br><br>financial<br><br>guarantee contracts	(1)	—	(1)	(34)	—	(34)	(37)	—	(37)
Total	1,991	(131)	1,860	1,653	(42)	1,611	1,619	(41)	1,578
Cash collateral and<br><br>settlement balances	1	—	1	(3)	—	(3)	4	—	4
Financial instruments<br><br>at fair value through<br><br>other comprehensive<br><br>income	(3)	—	(3)	1	—	1	(2)	—	(2)
Reverse repurchase<br><br>agreements and other<br><br>similar secured lending<br><br>at amortised cost	5	—	5	8	—	8	—	—	—
Other financial assets<br><br>measured at amortised<br><br>cost	3	—	3	—	—	—	(2)	—	(2)
Credit impairment<br><br>charges /(releases)	1,997	(131)	1,866	1,659	(42)	1,617	1,619	(41)	1,578

Notes

1Recoveries and reimbursements include £80m (2024: £11m, 2023: £24m) for reimbursements where the Barclays Bank Group has entered into

financial guarantee contracts which provide credit protection over certain assets with third parties and cash recoveries of previously written off

amounts of £51m (2024: £31m, 2023: £17m).

2. Includes net impairment charge on co-branded card portfolio of £176m (2024:160m) within USCB classified as held for sale.

3  Includes net impairment charge of £101m related to the acquisition of GM portfolio.

4Includes Debt securities at amortised cost.

Write-offs that can be subjected to enforcement activity

The contractual amount outstanding on financial assets that were written off during the year and that can still be subjected

to enforcement activity is £602m (2024: £500m, 2023: £395m) including £63m pertaining to co-branded card portfolio

within USCB classified as held for sale in December 2024. This is lower than the write-offs presented in the movement in the

gross exposures and impairment allowance table due to assets sold during the year post write-offs and post write-off

recoveries.

Modification of financial assets

Financial assets of £2,001m (2024: £1,585m, 2023: £2,177m), with a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to

lifetime ECL, were subject to non-substantial modification during the year, with a resulting loss of £80m (2024: £75m, 2023:

£2m). The gross carrying amount at 31 December 2025 of financial assets subject to non-substantial modification for which

the loss allowance has changed to a 12-month ECL during the year amounts to £221m (2024: £101m, 2023: £149m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	202

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

9Tax

Accounting for income taxes

The Barclays Bank Group applies IAS 12 Income Taxes in accounting for taxes on income. Income tax payable on taxable

profits (current tax) is recognised as an expense in the periods in which the profits arise. Withholding taxes are also treated

as income taxes. Income tax recoverable on tax allowable losses is recognised as a current tax asset only to the extent that it

is regarded as recoverable by offsetting against taxable profits arising in the current or prior periods. Current tax is measured

using tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the

deductible temporary differences, and the carry forward of unused tax credits and unused tax losses can be utilised.

Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all taxable temporary differences except for the initial recognition of goodwill.

Deferred tax is not recognised where the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of an asset or liability in a

transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, affects neither the accounting profit nor

taxable profit or loss. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and legislation enacted or substantively enacted by the

balance sheet date which are expected to apply when the deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset when there is both a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net

basis.

The Barclays Bank Group has adopted the International Tax Reform - Pillar Two Model Rules amendments to IAS 12, which

were issued on 23 May 2023 and approved by the UK Endorsement Board on 19 July 2023, and has applied the exception set

out in paragraph 4A in respect of recognising and disclosing information about deferred tax assets and liabilities related to

Pillar Two income taxes.

The Barclays Bank Group considers an uncertain tax position to exist when it considers that ultimately, in the future, the

amount of profit subject to tax may be greater than the amount initially reflected in the Barclays Bank Group’s tax returns.

The Barclays Bank Group accounts for provisions in respect of uncertain tax positions in two different ways.

A current tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax authority of an

uncertain tax position will alter the amount of cash tax due to, or from, a tax authority in the future. From recognition, the

current tax provision is then measured at the amount the Barclays Bank Group ultimately expects to pay the tax authority to

resolve the position. The accrual of interest and penalty amounts in respect of uncertain income tax positions is recognised

as an expense within profit before tax.

Deferred tax provisions are adjustments made to the carrying value of deferred tax assets in respect of uncertain tax

positions. A deferred tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax

authority of an uncertain tax position will result in a reduction in the carrying value of the deferred tax asset. From

recognition of a provision, measurement of the underlying deferred tax asset is adjusted to take into account the expected

impact of resolving the uncertain tax position on the loss or temporary difference giving rise to the deferred tax asset.

The approach taken to measurement takes account of whether the uncertain tax position is a discrete position that will be

reviewed by the tax authority in isolation from any other position, or one of a number of issues which are expected to be

reviewed together concurrently and resolved simultaneously with a tax authority. The Barclays Bank Group’s measurement

of provisions is based upon its best estimate of the additional profit that will become subject to tax. For a discrete position,

consideration is given only to the merits of that position. Where a number of issues are expected to be reviewed and

resolved together, the Barclays Bank Group will take into account not only the merits of its position in respect of each

particular issue but also the overall level of provision relative to the aggregate of the uncertain tax positions across all the

issues that are expected to be resolved at the same time. In addition, in assessing provision levels, it is assumed that tax

authorities will review uncertain tax positions and that all facts will be fully and transparently disclosed.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include:

Judgements	Estimates
Recognition of deferred tax assets and determination of provisions<br><br>for uncertain tax positions.	Measurement of deferred tax balances and the level of provisioning<br><br>for uncertain tax positions.

The Barclays Bank Group does not consider there to be a significant risk of a material adjustment to the carrying amount of

current and deferred tax balances, including provisions for uncertain tax positions in the next financial year. The provisions

for uncertain tax positions cover a diverse range of issues and reflect advice from external counsel where relevant. It should

be noted that only a proportion of the total uncertain tax positions will be under audit at any point in time, and could

therefore be subject to challenge by a tax authority over the next year.

Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on business profit forecasts which included consideration for the current

view of climate impacts. Details on the recognition of deferred tax assets are provided in this note.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	203

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Current tax charge/(credit)
Current year	982	680	605
Adjustments in respect of prior years	(9)	42	(96)
	973	722	509
Deferred tax charge
Current year	219	239	43
Adjustments in respect of prior years	93	38	110
	312	277	153
Tax charge	1,285	999	662

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying

the standard UK corporation tax rate to the Barclays Bank Group’s profit before tax.

	2025	2025	2024	2024	2023	2023
	£m	%	£m	%	£m	%
Profit before tax from continuing operations	5,943		4,747		4,223
Tax charge based on the applicable UK corporation tax rate of 25% (2024:<br><br>25%, 2023: 23.5%)	1,486	25.0%	1,187	25.0%	992	23.5%
Impact of profits/losses earned in territories with different statutory rates to<br><br>the UK (weighted average tax rate is 23.5% (2024: 23%, 2023: 23.6%))	(88)	(1.5%)	(95)	(2.0%)	3	0.1%
Recurring items:
Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes	134	2.3%	95	2.0%	124	3.0%
Adjustments in respect of prior years	84	1.5%	80	1.7%	14	0.3%
Changes in recognition of deferred tax and effect of unrecognised tax losses	49	0.8%	69	1.5%	(58)	(1.4%)
Impact of UK bank levy being non-deductible	47	0.8%	47	1.0%	35	0.8%
Non-deductible expenses	35	0.6%	44	0.9%	47	1.1%
Non-taxable gains and income	(29)	(0.5%)	(74)	(1.6%)	(60)	(1.4%)
Other items including banking surcharge1	(110)	(2.0%)	(32)	(0.7%)	(74)	(1.8%)
Tax relief on payments made under AT1 instruments	(189)	(3.2%)	(189)	(4.0%)	(174)	(4.1%)
Tax relief on holdings of inflation-linked government bonds	(194)	(3.3%)	(157)	(3.3%)	(194)	(4.6%)
Non-recurring items:
Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress	47	0.8%	22	0.5%	7	0.2%
Non-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation	10	0.2%	2	0.0%	—	—
Non-deductible impairments and losses on divestments	3	0.1%	—	—	—	—
Total tax charge	1,285	21.6%	999	21.0%	662	15.7%

Note

1Banking surcharge includes the impact of the 3% UK banking surcharge rate on profits/losses and tax adjustments relating to UK banking

entities.

Factors influencing the effective tax rate

The effective tax rate of 21.6% is lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 25% primarily due to tax relief on holdings of

inflation-linked government bonds and tax relief on payments made under AT1 instruments. These factors, which have each

decreased the effective tax rate, are partially offset by non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes. The tax charge for

the year also includes £22m in respect of global minimum tax arising under the Pillar Two rules.

Factors that may influence the effective tax rate in future periods

The Barclays Bank Group’s future tax charge will be sensitive to the geographic mix of profits earned, the tax rates in force

and changes to the tax rules in the jurisdictions that the Barclays Bank Group operates in.

Tax law is, at times, complex, and it is the role of courts and tribunals to act as the final authority on the correct

interpretation of tax law. In October 2023, a First-tier Tax Tribunal hearing took place between Barclays Bank PLC and HM

Revenue & Customs (HMRC) in respect of the UK corporation tax treatment of an element of the finance costs associated

with reserve capital instruments issued as part of the capital raising announced by Barclays in October 2008, which have

since been redeemed. The judgment was handed down in March 2024 and was in HMRC’s favour. In January 2025, Barclays

was granted permission from the Upper Tribunal to appeal against the judgment and the Upper Tribunal will hear the case in

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	204

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

2026. A provision is carried that is expected to be sufficient to cover the tax cost (once tax attributes that are available to

partially offset a potential tax liability in respect of this issue are taken into account) in the event that the appeal is

unsuccessful and the existing judgment were to stand.

Tax in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income

Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of

comprehensive income.

Tax included directly in equity

Tax included directly in equity comprises a £189m credit (2024: £94m credit) relating to share-based payments and

deductible costs on issuing other equity instruments.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities

The deferred tax amounts on the balance sheet were as follows:

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
UK Tax Group	1,433	2,315
US Intermediate Holding Company Tax Group ("IHC Tax Group")	1,005	1,162
Barclays Bank PLC's US Branch Tax Group	255	270
Other (outside the UK and US tax groups)	243	386
Deferred tax asset	2,936	4,133
Deferred tax liability	(1)	(2)
Net deferred tax	2,935	4,131

UK Tax Group deferred tax assets and liabilities

The net deferred tax asset in the UK Tax Group of £1,433m (2024: £2,315m) includes a deferred tax asset of £846m (2024:

£1,066m) relating to tax losses with the balance relating to temporary differences. There is no time limit on utilisation of UK

tax losses and business profit forecasts indicate these losses will be fully recovered.

US deferred tax assets in the IHC and the US Branch Tax Groups

The deferred tax asset in the IHC Tax Group of £1,005m (2024: £1,162m) includes £12m (2024: £38m) relating to tax

losses, with the balance relating to temporary differences. The deferred tax asset in Barclays Bank PLC’s US Branch Tax

Group of £255m (2024: £270m) relates entirely to temporary differences.

In relation to the IHC Tax Group, these temporary differences include £307m (2024: £365m) arising from New York State

and City prior net operating loss conversion which can be carried forward and will expire in 2034. Business profit forecasts

indicate that these amounts will be utilised prior to expiry.

Other deferred tax assets (outside the UK and US tax groups)

The deferred tax asset of £243m (2024: £386m) in other entities within the Barclays Bank Group includes £54m (2024:

£111m) relating to tax losses. These deferred tax assets relate to a number of different territories and their recognition is

based on profit forecasts or local country law which indicate that it is probable that those deferred tax assets will be fully

recovered.

Of the deferred tax asset of £243m (2024: £386m), an amount of £12m (2024: £4m) relates to entities which have suffered

a loss in either the current or prior year and for which the utilisation of the deferred tax is dependent on future taxable

profits. This has been taken into account in reaching the above conclusion that these deferred tax assets will be fully

recovered in the future.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	205

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

The table below shows movements on deferred tax assets and liabilities during the year. The amounts are different from

those disclosed on the balance sheet and in the preceding table as they are presented before offsetting asset and liability

balances where there is a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

Barclays Bank Group
	Fixed asset<br><br>timing<br><br>differences	Fair value<br><br>through other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income	Cash<br><br>flow<br><br>hedges	Retirement<br><br>benefit<br><br>obligations	Loan<br><br>impairment<br><br>allowance	Own<br><br>credit	Share based<br><br>payments and<br><br>deferred<br><br>compensation	Other<br><br>temporary<br><br>differences	Tax<br><br>losses<br><br>carried<br><br>forward	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Assets	367	691	904	12	408	394	409	878	1,215	5,278
Liabilities	(109)	—	(3)	(897)	—	—	—	(138)	—	(1,147)
As at 1 January 2025	258	691	901	(885)	408	394	409	740	1,215	4,131
Income statement	42	—	—	14	(151)	—	40	25	(282)	(312)
Other comprehensive<br><br>income and reserves	—	(256)	(582)	(7)	—	(28)	114	1	—	(758)
Other movements	(14)		—	(2)	(32)	1	(16)	(42)	(21)	(126)
	286	435	319	(880)	225	367	547	724	912	2,935
Assets	380	435	319	14	225	367	547	772	912	3,971
Liabilities	(94)	—	—	(894)	—	—	—	(48)	—	(1,036)
As at 31 December<br><br>2025	286	435	319	(880)	225	367	547	724	912	2,935
Assets	275	510	1,058	16	506	85	327	903	1,423	5,103
Liabilities	(112)	—	—	(1,014)	—	—	—	(92)	—	(1,218)
As at 1 January 2024	163	510	1,058	(998)	506	85	327	811	1,423	3,885
Income statement	90	—	—	(3)	(79)	1	(6)	(72)	(208)	(277)
Other comprehensive<br><br>income and reserves	—	181	(157)	116	—	308	79	1	—	528
Other movements	5	—	—	—	(19)	—	9	—	—	(5)
	258	691	901	(885)	408	394	409	740	1,215	4,131
Assets	367	691	904	12	408	394	409	878	1,215	5,278
Liabilities	(109)	—	(3)	(897)	—	—	—	(138)	—	(1,147)
As at 31 December<br><br>2024	258	691	901	(885)	408	394	409	740	1,215	4,131

Other movements include the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates as well as deferred tax amounts relating to

acquisitions and disposals.

The amount of deferred tax asset expected to be recovered after more than 12 months for the Barclays Bank Group is

£3,590m (2024: £4,662m). The amount of deferred tax liability expected to be settled after more than 12 months for the

Barclays Bank Group is £1,023m (2024: £1,021m). These amounts are before offsetting asset and liability balances where

there is a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

Unrecognised deferred tax

Tax losses and temporary differences

The Barclays Bank Group has deferred tax assets not recognised in respect of gross deductible temporary differences of

£288m (2024: £373m), unused tax credits of £336m (2024: £359m), and gross tax losses of £21,016m (2024: £21,021m).

The tax losses include capital losses of £3,719m (2024: £3,629m). Of these tax losses, £13m (2024: £13m) expire within five

years, £2,216m (2024: £6m) expire within six to ten years, £9,747m (2024: £11,789m) expire within eleven to twenty years

and £9,040m (2024: £9,213m) can be carried forward indefinitely. Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect

of these items because it is not probable that future taxable profits and gains will be available against which they can be

utilised.

Barclays Bank Group investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates

Deferred tax is not recognised in respect of the value of Barclays Bank Group's investments in subsidiaries, branches and

associates where the Barclays Bank Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is

probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future. The aggregate amount of these temporary

differences for which deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised was £868m (2024: £873m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	206

Notes to the financial statements

Financial performance and returns

10Dividends on ordinary shares and preference shares

The 2025 financial statements include £2,570m (2024: £1,782m, 2023: £1,348m) of dividends paid on ordinary shares. This

comprises a 2024 interim dividend of £1,195m (2023; £852m, 2022: £700m) and an interim dividend in relation to 2025 of

£1,375m (2024: interim dividend of £930m, 2023: interim dividend of

£648

m).

This results in a total dividend for the year of £1.10 (2024: £0.76, 2023: £0.58) per ordinary share.

Dividends paid on preference shares amounted to £32m (2024: £41m, 2023; £40m). Dividends paid on the Euro preference

shares amounted to £145.38 per share (2024: £384.56, 2023: £333.36). Dividends paid on the US Dollar preference shares

amounted to £464.77 per share (2024: £493.20, 2023: £499.58).

The Directors have approved a full year dividend in respect of 2025 of £1,175m . The financial statements for the year ended

31 December 2025 do not reflect this dividend, which will be accounted for in shareholders’ equity as an appropriation of

retained profits in the year ending 31 December 2026.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	207

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

The notes included in this section focus on assets and liabilities the Barclays Bank Group holds and recognises at fair value.<br><br>Details regarding the Barclays Bank Group’s approach to managing market risk can be found on page 76.

11Trading portfolio

| Accounting for trading portfolio assets and liabilities<br><br>All assets and liabilities held for trading purposes are held at fair value with gains and losses in the changes in fair value<br><br>taken to the income statement in net trading income (Note 5). | | --- || | Barclays Bank Group | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | | | £m | £m | | Debt securities and other eligible bills | 94,040 | 77,805 | | Equity securities | 83,243 | 74,859 | | Traded loans | 12,249 | 13,470 | | Commodities | 211 | 110 | | Trading Portfolio Assets | 189,743 | 166,244 | | Debt securities and other eligible bills | (32,309) | (36,324) | | Equity securities | (24,520) | (19,858) | | Trading Portfolio Liabilities | (56,829) | (56,182) |

12Financial assets at fair value through the income statement

Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value<br><br>Financial assets, other than those held for trading, are classified in this category if they are so irrevocably designated at<br><br>inception and the use of the designation removes or significantly reduces an accounting mismatch.<br><br>Subsequent changes in fair value for these instruments are recognised in the income statement in net investment income,<br><br>except if reporting it in trading income reduces an accounting mismatch.<br><br>The details on how the fair value amounts are derived for financial assets at fair value are described in Note 16.
Accounting for financial assets mandatorily at fair value<br><br>Financial assets that are held for trading are recognised at fair value through profit or loss. In addition, financial assets are<br><br>held at fair value through profit or loss if they do not contain contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash<br><br>flows that are Solely Payments of Principal and Interest (SPPI), or if the financial asset is not held in a business model that is<br><br>either (i) a business model to collect the contractual cash flows or (ii) a business model that is achieved by both collecting<br><br>contractual cash flows and selling.			Barclays Bank Group
---	---	---
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Loans and advances	785	1,039
Debt securities	303	182
Other financial assets	—	—
Financial assets designated at fair value	1,088	1,221
Loans and advances	46,100	43,143
Debt securities	2,818	2,749
Equity securities	2,336	2,856
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending	132,600	141,791
Other financial assets	60	85
Financial assets mandatorily at fair value	183,914	190,624
Total	185,002	191,845
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	208
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Credit risk of financial assets designated at fair value and related credit derivatives

The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit

risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition for loans and advances. The table does not include

debt securities as they have minimal exposure to credit risk due to limited gross exposure.

	Barclays Bank Group
	Maximum exposure as at 31<br><br>December		Changes in fair value during<br><br>the year ended		Cumulative changes in fair<br><br>value from inception
	2025	2024	2025	2024	2025	2024
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and advances designated at fair value,<br><br>attributable to credit risk	785	1,039	2	(2)	(2)	(4)
Value mitigated by related credit derivatives	193	405	(2)	—	(2)	—

13Derivative financial instruments

Accounting for derivatives

Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices

defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward-rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these

instruments and primarily affect the Barclays Bank Group’s net interest income, net trading income and derivative assets and

liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet. Derivatives are used to hedge interest

rate, credit risk, inflation risk, exchange rate, commodity, equity exposures and exposures to certain indices such as house

price indices and retail price indices related to non-trading positions.

All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss, except for derivatives that are in a designated cash

flow or net investment hedge accounting relationship. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or

as liabilities when their fair value is negative.

Hedge accounting

The Barclays Bank Group applies the requirements of IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement for hedge

accounting purposes. The Barclays Bank Group applies hedge accounting to represent the economic effects of its interest

rate, currency and contractually linked inflation risk management strategies. Where derivatives are held for risk management

purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Barclays Bank

Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign

operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged.

Fair value hedge accounting

Changes in fair value of derivatives that qualify and are designated as fair value hedges are recorded in the income

statement, together with changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The

fair value changes adjust the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost. For hedged items

classified as fair value through other comprehensive income, fair value movements attributable to the hedged risk are

transferred from other comprehensive income to the income statement.

If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value

hedges of interest rate risk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the

period to maturity of the previously designated hedge relationship using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is

sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Cash flow hedge accounting

For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is

recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the

hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in

the income statement immediately.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any

cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately

recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss

that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Hedges of net investments

The Barclays Bank Group’s net investments in foreign operations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net

investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of net

investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging

instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised

immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	209

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Barclays Bank

Group’s investment in the operation.

Barclays Bank Group	2025			2024
	Notional<br><br>contract<br><br>amount	Fair value		Notional<br><br>contract<br><br>amount	Fair value
		Assets	Liabilities		Assets	Liabilities
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading	99,839,732	250,285	(240,158)	83,571,610	291,562	(278,636)
Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management	239,559	1,907	(599)	221,158	794	(695)
Derivative assets/(liabilities)	100,079,291	252,192	(240,757)	83,792,768	292,356	(279,331)
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	210
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

The fair values and notional amounts of derivatives held for trading are set out in the following table:

Derivatives held for trading and risk management	2025			2024
Barclays Bank Group	Notional<br><br>contract<br><br>amount	Fair value		Notional<br><br>contract<br><br>amount	Fair value
		Assets	Liabilities		Assets	Liabilities
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Derivatives held for trading
Foreign exchange derivatives
OTC derivatives	8,229,535	73,979	(71,525)	8,242,887	123,379	(116,485)
Derivatives cleared by central counterparty	276,189	251	(221)	240,612	228	(235)
Exchange traded derivatives	20,733	1	(1)	27,441	7	(7)
Foreign exchange derivatives	8,526,457	74,231	(71,747)	8,510,940	123,614	(116,727)
Interest rate derivatives
OTC derivatives	32,272,598	90,814	(77,199)	26,437,086	92,206	(79,936)
Derivatives cleared by central counterparty	42,100,741	1,409	(1,124)	36,249,392	1,443	(1,319)
Exchange traded derivatives	11,473,470	1,498	(1,457)	7,672,496	2,664	(2,698)
Interest rate derivatives	85,846,809	93,721	(79,780)	70,358,974	96,313	(83,953)
Credit derivatives
OTC derivatives	671,066	4,169	(4,666)	593,702	3,474	(4,307)
Derivatives cleared by central counterparty	1,065,702	3,682	(3,713)	943,413	3,424	(3,148)
Credit derivatives	1,736,768	7,851	(8,379)	1,537,115	6,898	(7,455)
Equity and stock index derivatives
OTC derivatives	739,153	22,180	(27,092)	598,024	21,964	(26,318)
Exchange traded derivatives	2,769,230	50,161	(51,063)	2,347,247	40,947	(42,309)
Equity and stock index derivatives	3,508,383	72,341	(78,155)	2,945,271	62,911	(68,627)
Commodity derivatives
OTC derivatives	4,681	15	(16)	7,084	17	(32)
Exchange traded derivatives	216,634	2,126	(2,081)	212,226	1,809	(1,842)
Commodity derivatives	221,315	2,141	(2,097)	219,310	1,826	(1,874)
Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading	99,839,732	250,285	(240,158)	83,571,610	291,562	(278,636)
Total OTC derivatives	41,917,033	191,157	(180,498)	35,878,783	241,040	(227,078)
Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty	43,442,632	5,342	(5,058)	37,433,417	5,095	(4,702)
Total exchange traded derivatives	14,480,067	53,786	(54,602)	10,259,410	45,427	(46,856)
Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading	99,839,732	250,285	(240,158)	83,571,610	291,562	(278,636)
Derivatives held for risk management
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges
Currency Swaps	26,048	1,677	(39)	26,564	611	(307)
Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty	101,099	—	—	86,759	—	—
Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges	127,147	1,677	(39)	113,323	611	(307)
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges
Interest rate swaps	4,900	75	(517)	7,234	147	(322)
Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty	103,193	—	—	96,588	—	—
Derivatives designated as fair value hedges	108,093	75	(517)	103,822	147	(322)
Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments
Forward foreign exchange	4,319	155	(43)	4,013	36	(66)
Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments	4,319	155	(43)	4,013	36	(66)
Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management	239,559	1,907	(599)	221,158	794	(695)
Total OTC derivatives	35,267	1,907	(599)	37,811	794	(695)
Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty	204,292	—	—	183,347	—	—
Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management	239,559	1,907	(599)	221,158	794	(695)
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	211
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Hedge accounting

Hedge accounting is applied predominantly for the following risks:

▪Interest rate risk – arises due to a mismatch between fixed interest rates and floating interest rates

▪Currency risk – arises due to assets or liabilities being denominated in different currencies than the functional currency of

the relevant entity. At a consolidated level, currency risk also arises when the functional currency of subsidiaries are

different from the parent

▪Contractually linked inflation risk – arises from financial instruments within contractually specified inflation risk. The

Barclays Bank Group does not hedge inflation risk that arises from other activities

In order to hedge these risks, the Barclays Bank Group uses the following hedging instruments:

▪Interest rate derivatives to swap interest rate exposure into either fixed or variable rates

▪Currency derivatives to swap foreign currency exposures into the entity’s functional currency, and net investment

exposure to local currency

▪Inflation derivatives to swap inflation exposure into either fixed or variable interest rates

In some cases, certain items which are economically hedged may be ineligible hedged items for the purposes of IAS 39, such

as core deposits and equity. In these instances, a proxy hedging solution can be utilised whereby portfolios of floating rate

assets are designated as eligible hedged items in cash flow hedges.

In some hedging relationships, the Barclays Bank Group designates risk components of hedged items as follows:

▪Benchmark interest rate risk as a component of interest rate risk, such as the Risk Free Rate (RFR) component

▪Inflation risk as a contractually specified component of a debt instrument

▪Exchange rate risk for foreign currency financial assets or financial liabilities

▪Components of cash flows of hedged items, for example certain interest payments for part of the life of an instrument

Using the benchmark interest rate risk results in other risks, such as credit risk and liquidity risk, being excluded from the

hedge accounting relationship.

In respect of many of the Barclays Bank Group’s hedge accounting relationships, the hedged item and hedging instrument

change frequently due to the dynamic nature of the risk management and hedge accounting strategy. The Barclays Bank

Group applies hedge accounting to dynamic scenarios, predominantly in relation to interest rate risk, with a combination of

hedged items in order for its financial statements to reflect as closely as possible the economic risk management

undertaken. In some cases, if the hedge accounting objective changes, the relevant hedge accounting relationship is de-

designated and is replaced with a different hedge accounting relationship.

Changes in the GBP value of net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation

reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital. The Barclays Bank Group mitigates this by matching the CET1 capital

movements to the revaluation of the foreign currency RWA exposures. Net investment hedges are designated where

necessary to reduce the exposure to movement in a particular exchange rate to within limits mandated by Risk. As far as

possible, existing external currency liabilities are designated as the hedging instruments.

The hedging instruments share the same risk exposures as the hedged items. Hedge effectiveness is determined with

reference to quantitative tests, predominantly regression testing, but to the extent hedging instruments are exposed to

different risks than the hedged items, this could result in hedge ineffectiveness or hedge accounting failures.

Sources of ineffectiveness include the following:

▪Mismatches between the contractual terms of the hedged item and hedging instrument, including basis differences

▪Changes in credit risk of the hedging instruments

▪If a hedging relationship becomes over-hedged, for example in hedges of net investments if the net asset value designated

at the start of the period falls below the amount of the hedging instrument

▪Cash flow hedges using external swaps with non-zero fair values

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	212

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Hedged items in fair value hedges
Barclays Bank Group		Accumulated fair value<br><br>adjustment included in carrying<br><br>amount
	Carrying<br><br>amount	Total	Of which:<br><br>Accumulated<br><br>fair value<br><br>adjustment on<br><br>items no longer<br><br>in a hedge<br><br>relationship	Change in fair<br><br>value used as a<br><br>basis to<br><br>determine<br><br>ineffectiveness	Hedge<br><br>ineffectiveness<br><br>recognised in<br><br>the income<br><br>statement1
Hedged item statement of financial position<br><br>classification and risk category	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
2025
Assets
Loans and advances at amortised cost
- Interest rate risk	698	(155)	1	4	(1)
- Inflation risk	280	188	79	(9)	—
Debt securities classified as amortised cost
- Interest rate risk	11,388	27	(1)	100	32
- Inflation risk	8,127	(1,332)	1	(9)	16
Financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income2
- Interest rate risk	27,807	(1,378)	(429)	(163)	127
- Inflation risk	1,324	(62)	(20)	(5)	(13)
Total Assets	49,624	(2,712)	(369)	(82)	161
Liabilities
Debt securities in issue
- Interest rate risk	(1,333)	1	(31)	5	1
Subordinated liabilities
- Interest rate risk	(38,611)	1,576	1,006	(514)	(22)
Deposits at amortised cost from banks and<br><br>customers
- Interest rate risk	(12,916)	(14)	(1)	(2)	3
Total Liabilities	(52,860)	1,563	974	(511)	(18)
Total Hedged Items	(3,236)	(1,149)	605	(593)	143
2024
Assets
Loans and advances at amortised cost
- Interest rate risk	711	(160)	(1)	(18)	4
- Inflation risk	318	219	102	(18)	7
Debt securities classified as amortised cost
- Interest rate risk	7,673	(44)	8	50	66
- Inflation risk	8,348	(1,342)	2	(598)	(29)
Financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income2
- Interest rate risk	29,514	(1,162)	(452)	(132)	176
- Inflation risk	2,979	(96)	(31)	(59)	(22)
Total Assets	49,543	(2,585)	(372)	(775)	202
Liabilities
Debt securities in issue
- Interest rate risk	(1,417)	8	(24)	(18)	2
Subordinated liabilities
- Interest rate risk	(37,531)	2,257	1,182	398	(8)
Deposits at amortised cost from banks and<br><br>customers
- Interest rate risk	(8,596)	(12)	(1)	(4)	(2)
Total Liabilities	(47,544)	2,253	1,157	376	(8)
Total Hedged Items	1,999	(332)	785	(399)	194

Notes

1Hedge ineffectiveness is recognised in net interest income.

2For items classified as fair value through other comprehensive income, the hedge accounting adjustment is not included in the carrying amount,

but rather adjusts other comprehensive income.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	213

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Amount, timing and uncertainty of future cash flows

The following table shows the fair value hedging instruments which are carried on the balance sheet:

Barclays Bank Group		Carrying value			Nominal<br><br>amount	Change in fair value<br><br>used as a basis to<br><br>determine<br><br>ineffectiveness
		Derivative<br><br>assets	Derivative<br><br>liabilities	Loan liabilities
Hedge type	Risk category	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Fair value	Interest rate risk	2	(3)	—	95,612	710
	Inflation risk	73	(514)	—	12,481	26
	Total	75	(517)	—	108,093	736
As at 31 December 2024
Fair value	Interest rate risk	26	(16)	—	89,602	(38)
	Inflation risk	121	(306)	—	14,220	631
	Total	147	(322)	—	103,822	593

The following table profiles the expected notional values of current hedging instruments for fair value hedging in future

years:

	2025	2026	2027	2028	2029	2030	2031 and<br><br>later
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Bank Group
Fair value hedges of:
Interest rate risk (outstanding notional amount)	95,612	76,744	65,798	61,019	53,609	40,763	32,092
Inflation risk (outstanding notional amount)	12,481	11,728	10,965	9,494	8,850	7,821	7,076

For Barclays Bank Group, there are 1023 (2024: 946) interest rate risk fair value hedges with an average fixed rate of 2.7%

(2024: 2.6%) across the relationships and 87 (2024: 105) inflation risk fair value hedges with an average rate of 0.3% (2024:

0.2%) across the relationships.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	214

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Hedged items in cash flow hedges and hedges of net investments in foreign operations
Barclays Bank Group	Change in<br><br>value of<br><br>hedged item<br><br>used as the<br><br>basis for<br><br>recognising<br><br>ineffectiveness	Balance in<br><br>cash flow<br><br>hedging<br><br>reserve for<br><br>continuing<br><br>hedges	Balance in<br><br>currency<br><br>translation<br><br>reserve for<br><br>continuing<br><br>hedges	Balances<br><br>remaining<br><br>in cash<br><br>flow<br><br>hedging<br><br>reserve for<br><br>which<br><br>hedge<br><br>accounting<br><br>is no<br><br>longer<br><br>applied	Balances<br><br>remaining<br><br>in currency<br><br>translation<br><br>reserve for<br><br>which<br><br>hedge<br><br>accounting<br><br>is no<br><br>longer<br><br>applied	Hedging gains<br><br>or losses<br><br>recognised in<br><br>other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income	Hedge<br><br>ineffectiveness<br><br>recognised in<br><br>the income<br><br>statement1
Description of hedge relationship<br><br>and hedged risk	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
2025
Assets
Cash flow hedge of:
Interest rate risk
Loans and advances at amortised<br><br>cost	(336)	(92)	—	918	—	(336)	6
Cash and balances at Central Banks	(553)	(149)	—	604	—	(553)	(19)
Foreign exchange risk
Loans and advances at amortised<br><br>cost	(1,637)	120	—	—	—	(1,637)	17
Inflation risk
Debt securities classified at<br><br>amortised cost	(113)	(143)	—	(21)	—	(113)	8
Liabilities
Cash flow hedge of:
Foreign exchange risk
Subordinated Liabilities	9	16	—	—	—	9	—
Total cash flow hedges	(2,630)	(248)	—	1,501	—	(2,630)	12
Hedge of net investment in foreign<br><br>operations
USD foreign operations	(484)	—	1,151	—	—	(484)	—
EUR foreign operations	146	—	100	—	—	146	—
Other foreign operations	(161)	—	(103)	—	60	(161)	—
Total foreign operations	(499)	—	1,148	—	60	(499)	—
2024
Assets
Cash flow hedge of:
Interest rate risk
Loans and advances at amortised<br><br>cost	438	182	—	1,552	—	438	(8)
Cash and balances at Central Banks	495	123	—	1,495	—	495	22
Foreign exchange risk
Loans and advances at amortised<br><br>cost	300	106	—	—	—	300	5
Inflation risk
Debt securities classified at<br><br>amortised cost	118	(73)	—	25	—	118	—
Liabilities
Cash flow hedge of:
Foreign exchange risk
Subordinated Liabilities	18	(9)	—	—	—	18	—
Total cash flow hedges	1,369	329	—	3,072	—	1,369	19
Hedge of net investment in foreign<br><br>operations
USD foreign operations	136	—	1,449	—	—	136	—
EUR foreign operations	(109)	—	(26)	—	—	(109)	—
Other foreign operations	(17)	—	34	—	96	(17)	—
Total foreign operations	10	—	1,457	—	96	10	—

Note

1Hedge ineffectiveness is recognised in net interest income.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	215

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

The following table shows the cash flow and net investment hedging instruments which are carried on the balance sheet:

Barclays Bank Group		Carrying value			Nominal<br><br>amount	Change in fair value<br><br>used as a basis to<br><br>determine<br><br>ineffectiveness
		Derivative<br><br>assets	Derivative<br><br>liabilities	Loan liabilities
Hedge type	Risk category	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Cash flow	Interest rate risk	—	—	—	94,727	876
	Foreign exchange risk	1,677	(39)	—	26,048	1,645
	Inflation risk	—	—	—	6,372	121
	Total	1,677	(39)	—	127,147	2,642
Net investment	Foreign exchange risk	155	(43)	(6,109)	10,428	499
As at 31 December 2024
Cash flow	Interest rate risk	—	—	—	80,382	(919)
	Foreign exchange risk	611	(307)	—	26,564	(313)
	Inflation risk	—	—	—	6,377	(118)
	Total	611	(307)	—	113,323	(1,350)
Net investment	Foreign exchange risk	36	(66)	(7,588)	11,601	(10)

For Barclays Bank Group there is 1 (2024: 2) foreign exchange risk cash flow hedge with an average foreign exchange rate of

JPY 162.56: GBP 1 (2024: JPY 149.87: GBP 1), 11 (2024: 11) with an average foreign exchange rate of USD 1.26: GBP 1

(2024: 1.27) and 12 (2024: 9) with an average foreign exchange rate of AUD 1.98: GBP 1 (2024: 1.94).

The effect on the income statement and other comprehensive income of recycling amounts in respect of cash flow hedges

and net investment hedges of foreign operations is set out in the following table:

Barclays Bank Group	2025		2024
	Amount recycled<br><br>from other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income due to<br><br>hedged item<br><br>affecting income<br><br>statement	Amount recycled<br><br>from other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income due to sale<br><br>of investment, or<br><br>cash flows no<br><br>longer expected to<br><br>occur	Amount recycled<br><br>from other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income due to<br><br>hedged item<br><br>affecting income<br><br>statement	Amount recycled<br><br>from other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income due to sale<br><br>of investment, or<br><br>cash flows no<br><br>longer expected to<br><br>occur
Description of hedge relationship and hedged risk	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cash flow hedge of interest rate risk
Recycled to net interest income	(1,162)	(1)	(1,697)	(2)
Cash flow hedge of foreign exchange risk
Recycled to net trading income	1,669	—	(251)	—
Hedge of net investment in foreign operations
Recycled to other income	—	(34)	—	(1)

A detailed reconciliation of the movements of the cash flow hedging reserve and the currency translation reserve is as

follows:

Barclays Bank Group	2025		2024
	Cash flow<br><br>hedging reserve	Currency<br><br>translation<br><br>reserve	Cash flow<br><br>hedging reserve	Currency<br><br>translation<br><br>reserve
	£m	£m	£m	£m
Balance on 1 January	(2,448)	3,690	(2,895)	3,783
Currency translation movements	24	(1,640)	20	(194)
Hedging (losses)/gains for the year	2,630	499	(1,369)	50
Amounts reclassified in relation to cash flows affecting profit or loss	(506)	34	1,950	1
Tax	(607)	(49)	(154)	50
Balance on 31 December	(907)	2,534	(2,448)	3,690
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	216
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

14Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

| Accounting for financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI)<br><br>Financial assets that are debt instruments held in a business model that is achieved by both collecting contractual cash<br><br>flows and selling and that contain contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash flows that are SPPI are<br><br>measured at FVOCI. They are subsequently re-measured at fair value and changes therein (except for those relating to<br><br>impairment, interest income and foreign currency exchange gains and losses) are recognised in other comprehensive<br><br>income until the assets are sold. Interest (calculated using the effective interest method) is recognised in the income<br><br>statement in net interest income (Note 3). Upon disposal, the cumulative gain or loss in other comprehensive income is<br><br>included in net investment income (Note 6).<br><br>In determining whether the business model is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial<br><br>assets, it is determined that both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets are integral to achieving the<br><br>objective of the business model. The Barclays Bank Group will consider past sales and expectations about future sales to<br><br>establish if the business model is achieved. | | --- || | Barclays Bank Group | | | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | 2024 | | | £m | £m | | Debt securities and other eligible bills | 40,451 | 47,727 | | Loans and advances | 2,367 | 3,283 | | Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income | 42,818 | 51,010 |

15Financial liabilities designated at fair value

| Accounting for liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss<br><br>The Barclays Bank Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value<br><br>reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the<br><br>Barclays Bank Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (Note<br><br>13). In accordance with IFRS 9, financial liabilities may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the<br><br>income statement within net trading income (Note 5) and net investment income (Note 6). Movements in own credit are<br><br>reported through other comprehensive income, unless the effects of changes in the liability's credit risk would create or<br><br>enlarge an accounting mismatch in profit and loss. In these scenarios, all gains and losses on that liability (including the<br><br>effects of changes in the credit risk of the liability) are presented in profit and loss. On derecognition of the financial liability<br><br>no amounts relating to own credit risk are recycled to the income statement. The details on how the fair value amounts are<br><br>arrived at for financial liabilities designated at fair value are described in Note 16. | | --- || | Barclays Bank Group | | | | | --- | --- | --- | --- | --- | | | 2025 | | 2024 | | | | Fair value | Contractual<br><br>amount due<br><br>on maturity | Fair value | Contractual<br><br>amount due<br><br>on maturity | | | £m | £m | £m | £m | | Debt securities | 85,086 | 99,105 | 76,833 | 92,479 | | Deposits | 48,997 | 51,262 | 46,383 | 48,201 | | Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing | 158,857 | 159,276 | 156,024 | 156,600 | | Subordinated debt | 587 | 967 | 537 | 957 | | Financial liabilities designated at fair value | 293,527 | 310,610 | 279,777 | 298,237 |

The cumulative own credit net loss recognised for Barclays Bank Group is £1,335m (2024: £1,434m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	217

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

16Fair value of financial instruments

Accounting for financial assets and liabilities – fair value

Financial instruments that are held for trading are recognised at fair value through profit or loss. In addition, financial assets

are held at fair value through profit or loss if they do not contain contractual terms that give rise on specified dates to cash

flows that are SPPI, or if the financial asset is not held in a business model that is either (i) a business model to collect the

contractual cash flows or (ii) a business model that is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling.

Subsequent changes in fair value for these instruments are recognised in the income statement in net investment income,

except if reporting it in trading income reduces an accounting mismatch.

Wherever possible, fair value is determined by reference to a quoted market price for that instrument. For many of the

Barclays Bank Group’s financial assets and liabilities, including derivatives, quoted prices are not available and valuation

models are used to estimate fair value. The models calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific

contract and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourced

market inputs including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and

currency rates.

For financial liabilities measured at fair value, the carrying amount also reflects the effect on fair value of changes in own

credit spreads derived from observable market data such as in primary issuance and redemption activity for structured

notes.

The Barclays Bank Group uses the portfolio exemption in IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement to measure the fair value of

groups of financial assets and liabilities. Financial instruments are measured using the price that would be received to sell a

net long position (i.e. an asset) for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position (i.e. a liability) for a particular

risk exposure in an orderly transaction between market participants at the balance sheet date under current market

conditions. Accordingly, Barclays Bank Group measures the fair value of the group of financial assets and liabilities

consistently with how market participants would price the net risk exposure at the measurement date.

On initial recognition, the transaction price often reflects the fair value of the asset or liability.  However, in some

circumstances, fair value may differ to the transaction price when there is information to the contrary. If the fair value of the

instrument is observable from current market transactions in the same instrument, or based on a valuation technique whose

inputs only include observable inputs, then the instrument is initially recognised at fair value and the difference to the

transaction price is recognised in profit or loss.

For valuations that have made use of unobservable inputs, the difference between the model valuation and the initial

transaction price (day one profit) is recognised in profit or loss either: on a straight-line basis over the term of the

transaction; or over the period until all inputs will become observable where appropriate; or released in full when previously

unobservable inputs become observable.

Various factors influence the availability of observable inputs, and these may vary from product to product and change over

time. Factors include the depth of activity in the relevant market, the type of product, whether the product is new and not

widely traded in the marketplace, the maturity of market modelling and the nature of the transaction (bespoke or generic).

To the extent that valuation is based on models or inputs that are not observable in the market, the determination of fair

value can be more subjective, dependent on the significance of the unobservable input to the overall valuation.

Unobservable inputs are determined based on the best information available, for example by reference to similar assets,

similar maturities, or other analytical techniques.

The sensitivity of valuations used in the financial statements to possible changes in significant unobservable inputs is shown

on page 226.

Valuation Control Framework

The Barclays Group has an established valuation control framework that oversees valuation methodologies, standards and

procedures.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include:

Judgements	Estimates
Classification of financial instruments with significant unobservable<br><br>inputs as Level 3.	Valuation of Level 3 assets and liabilities are typically determined by<br><br>referencing observable inputs, historical data, or employing other<br><br>analytical techniques.

These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of

financial assets and financial liabilities measured at fair value within the next financial year.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	218

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

The valuation of financial instruments often involves a significant degree of judgement and complexity, in particular where

valuation models make use of unobservable inputs (‘Level 3’ assets and liabilities). This note provides information on these

instruments, including the related unrealised gains and losses recognised in the period, a description of significant valuation

techniques and unobservable inputs, and a sensitivity analysis.

For assets and liabilities traded in active markets, it is determined that the market valuation includes a representation of the

prevailing view of climate-related risks. Within less active markets, for counterparties and instruments identified as being

more susceptible to climate change risk, an impact assessment was performed through increasing their probability of

default. The change in valuation of the assets and liabilities from this assessment was sufficiently immaterial to necessitate

any amendment to the reported 2025 year-end valuations.

Valuation

Assets and liabilities are classified according to a hierarchy that reflects the observability of significant market inputs. The

three levels of the fair value hierarchy are defined below with judgement applied in determining the boundary between Level

2 and 3 classifications.

Valuation techniques using quoted market prices – Level 1

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 1 if their value is observable in an active market. Such instruments are valued by

reference to unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets where the quoted price is readily

available, and the price represents actual and regularly occurring market transactions. An active market is one in which

transactions occur with sufficient volume and frequency to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis.

Valuation techniques using observable inputs – Level 2

Assets and liabilities classified as Level 2 have been valued using models whose inputs are observable either directly or

indirectly. A valuation input is considered observable if it can be directly observed from transactions in an active market, or if

there is compelling external evidence demonstrating an executable exit price. Valuations based on observable inputs include

assets and liabilities such as swaps and forwards which are valued using market standard pricing techniques, and options

that are commonly traded in markets where all the inputs to the market standard pricing models are observable. For certain

instruments that derive a fair value using unobservable inputs that are not considered significant, then the asset or liability

may be classified as Level 2.

Valuation techniques using significant unobservable inputs – Level 3

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 3 if their valuation incorporates significant inputs that are not based on

observable market data (unobservable inputs). Unobservable input levels are generally determined via reference to

observable inputs, historical observations or using other analytical techniques.

The following table shows assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by the fair value hierarchy and

balance sheet classification:

Assets and liabilities held at fair value
	2025				2024
	Valuation techniques used				Valuation techniques used
	Quoted<br><br>market<br><br>price	Observable<br><br>inputs	Significant<br><br>unobservable<br><br>inputs		Quoted<br><br>market<br><br>price	Observable<br><br>inputs	Significant<br><br>unobservable<br><br>inputs
	Level 1	Level 2	Level 3	Total	Level 1	Level 2	Level 3	Total
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Trading portfolio assets	110,773	68,623	10,347	189,743	77,581	78,548	10,115	166,244
Financial assets at fair value through the<br><br>income statement	5,015	173,801	6,186	185,002	3,463	182,391	5,991	191,845
Derivative financial assets	108	250,374	1,710	252,192	101	290,182	2,073	292,356
Financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income	31,640	8,110	3,068	42,818	19,021	28,315	3,674	51,010
Investment property	—	—	43	43	—	—	9	9
Total assets	147,536	500,908	21,354	669,798	100,166	579,436	21,862	701,464
Trading portfolio liabilities	(42,009)	(14,733)	(87)	(56,829)	(27,033)	(28,754)	(395)	(56,182)
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	(1,702)	(286,972)	(4,853)	(293,527)	(181)	(276,355)	(3,241)	(279,777)
Derivative financial liabilities	(93)	(237,599)	(3,065)	(240,757)	(86)	(276,064)	(3,181)	(279,331)
Total liabilities	(43,804)	(539,304)	(8,005)	(591,113)	(27,300)	(581,173)	(6,817)	(615,290)
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	219
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

The following table shows Barclays Bank Group’s Level 3 assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by

product type. Product type is broadly similar for Barclays Bank PLC.

As at 31 December<br><br>2025	Loans	Corporate<br><br>debt	Asset<br><br>backed<br><br>securities	Government<br><br>and<br><br>Government<br><br>sponsored<br><br>debt	Private<br><br>equity<br><br>invest-<br><br>ments	Issued<br><br>debt	Reverse<br><br>repurchase<br><br>and<br><br>repurchase<br><br>agreements	Interest<br><br>rate<br><br>derivatives	Equity<br><br>derivatives	Other<br><br>products1	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Trading portfolio<br><br>assets	5,667	1,849	874	1,513	—	—	—	—	—	444	10,347
Financial assets at fair<br><br>value through the<br><br>income statement	4,620	905	188	33	268	—	97	—	—	75	6,186
Derivative financial<br><br>assets	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	759	520	431	1,710
Financial assets at fair<br><br>value through other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income	2,235	25	756	52	—	—	—	—	—	—	3,068
Investment property	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	43	43
Total assets	12,522	2,779	1,818	1,598	268	—	97	759	520	993	21,354
Trading portfolio<br><br>liabilities	—	(36)	—	(34)	—	—	—	—	—	(17)	(87)
Financial liabilities<br><br>designated at fair<br><br>value	—	—	—	—	—	(3,760)	(887)	—	—	(206)	(4,853)
Derivative financial<br><br>liabilities	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	(612)	(1,602)	(851)	(3,065)
Total liabilities	—	(36)	—	(34)	—	(3,760)	(887)	(612)	(1,602)	(1,074)	(8,005)		As at 31 December<br><br>2024	Loans	Corporate<br><br>debt	Asset<br><br>backed<br><br>securities	Government<br><br>and<br><br>Government<br><br>sponsored<br><br>debt	Private<br><br>equity<br><br>investments	Issued<br><br>debt	Reverse<br><br>repurchase<br><br>and<br><br>repurchase<br><br>agreements	Interest<br><br>rate<br><br>derivatives	Equity<br><br>derivatives	Other<br><br>products1	Total
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Trading portfolio<br><br>assets	6,146	1,590	991	1,018	—	—	—	—	—	370	10,115
Financial assets at fair<br><br>value through the<br><br>income statement	3,991	913	139	35	219	—	539	—	—	155	5,991
Derivative financial<br><br>assets	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	1,193	477	403	2,073
Financial assets at fair<br><br>value through other<br><br>comprehensive<br><br>income	2,858	47	757	12	—	—	—	—	—	—	3,674
Investment property	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	9	9
Total assets	12,995	2,550	1,887	1,065	219	—	539	1,193	477	937	21,862
Trading portfolio<br><br>liabilities	—	(374)	(6)	—	—	—	—	—	—	(15)	(395)
Financial liabilities<br><br>designated at fair<br><br>value	—	—	—	—	—	(1,842)	(1,379)	—	—	(20)	(3,241)
Derivative financial<br><br>liabilities	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	(1,013)	(1,219)	(949)	(3,181)
Total liabilities	—	(374)	(6)	—	—	(1,842)	(1,379)	(1,013)	(1,219)	(984)	(6,817)

Note

1Other products include certificate of deposits, funds and fund-linked products, equity cash products, investment property, credit derivatives and

foreign exchange derivatives.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	220

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Valuation techniques

The valuation techniques and observability used are described below.

Loans

Description: A drawn lending facility issued to corporate clients and customers.

Also includes Prime Brokerage Margin lending, and other similar secured lending agreements. The agreements are primarily

short-term in nature.

Valuation: Loans are valued either using a price-based approach, or through models that discount expected future cash

flows based on interest rates and loan spreads.

Prime Brokerage Margin Lending transactions are generally valued by discounting the expected future cash flows, using

industry standard models that incorporate market interest rates and repurchase rates, based on the specific details of the

transaction.

Observability: Within this loan population, the price or loan spread may be generally unobservable.

For Margin Lending inputs are deemed observable up to liquid maturities, and are determined based on the specific features

of the transaction. Unobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying

extrapolation techniques, or inferred via another reasonable method.

Corporate debt

Description: Primarily corporate bonds.

Valuation: Corporate bonds are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or

other reliable pricing sources.

Observability: Prices for actively traded bonds are considered observable. Unobservable bond prices are generally

determined by reference to bond yields or credit default swap (CDS) spreads for actively traded instruments issued by or

referencing the same (or a similar) issuer.

Asset backed securities

Description: Securities that are linked to the cash flows of a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. The category

includes residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities, collateralised debt obligations

(CDOs), collateralised loan obligations (CLOs) and other asset backed securities.

Valuation: Where available, valuations are based on observable market prices sourced from broker quotes and inter-dealer

prices and external vendors who provide pricing. Otherwise, valuations are determined using industry standard discounted

cash flow analysis that calculates the fair value based on valuation inputs such as constant default rate, conditional

prepayment rate, loss given default and yield. These inputs are determined by reference to a number of sources including

proxying to observed transactions, market indices or market research, and by assessing underlying collateral performance.

Proxying to observed transactions, indices or research requires an assessment and comparison of the relevant securities’

underlying attributes including collateral, tranche, vintage, underlying asset composition (historical losses, borrower

characteristics and loan attributes such as loan to value ratio and geographic concentration) and credit ratings (original and

current).

Observability: Where an asset backed product does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined

using a discounted cash flow analysis, the instrument is considered unobservable.

Government and Government sponsored debt

Description: Government bonds, supra sovereign bonds and agency bonds.

Valuation: Liquid bonds that are actively traded through an exchange or clearing house are marked to the levels observed in

these markets. Other actively traded bonds are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-

dealer prices or other reliable pricing sources.

Observability: Observability assessment is performed with reference to bond market trading data. Bonds are assessed at

Level 1 if they are traded in active market with a quoted price in line with requirements of IFRS 13. Unobservable bonds

prices are generally determined by reference to bond yields for actively traded bonds from the same (or a similar) issuer.

Private equity investments

Description: Includes investments in equity holdings in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	221

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Valuation: Private equity investments are valued in accordance with the ‘International Private Equity and Venture Capital

Valuation Guidelines’ which require the use of a number of individual pricing benchmarks such as the prices of recent

transactions in the same or similar entities, discounted cash flow analysis and comparison with the earnings or revenue

multiples of listed companies. While the valuation of unquoted equity instruments is subjective by nature, the relevant

methodologies are commonly applied by other market participants and have been consistently applied over time.

Observability: Inputs are considered observable if there is active trading in a liquid market of products with significant

sensitivity to the inputs. Unobservable inputs include earnings or revenue estimates, multiples of comparative companies,

marketability discounts and discount rates.

Issued debt

Description: Debt notes issued by Barclays.

Valuation: Issued debt is valued using discounted cash flow techniques incorporating various inputs observed for each

instrument.

Observability: Barclays issued notes are generally observable. Structured notes are debt instruments containing embedded

derivatives. Where either an input to the embedded derivative or the debt instrument is deemed unobservable and

significant to the overall valuation of the note, the structured note is classified as Level 3.

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

Description: Includes securities purchased under resale agreements, securities sold under repurchase agreements, and other

similar secured lending agreements. The agreements are primarily short-term in nature.

Valuation: Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are generally valued by discounting the expected future cash

flows using industry standard models that incorporate market interest rates and repurchase rates, based on the specific

details of the transaction.

Observability: Inputs are deemed observable up to liquid maturities or for consensus pricing with low pricing-range and are

determined based on the specific features of the transaction. Unobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid

market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Interest rate derivatives

Description: Derivatives linked to interest rates or inflation indices. The category includes futures, interest rate and inflation

swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, inflation options and other exotic interest rate derivatives.

Valuation: Interest rate and inflation derivatives are generally valued using curves of forward rates constructed from market

data to project and discount the expected future cash flows of trades. Instruments with optionality are valued using

volatilities implied from market inputs and use industry standard or bespoke models depending on the product type.

Observability: In general, inputs are considered observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each

input and underlying. Unobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying

extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Equity derivatives

Description: Exchange traded or OTC derivatives linked to equity indices and single names. The category includes vanilla and

exotic equity products.

Valuation: Equity derivatives are valued using industry standard models. Valuation inputs include stock prices, dividends,

volatilities, interest rates, equity repurchase curves and, for multi-asset products, correlations.

Observability: In general, valuation inputs are observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each

input and underlying. Unobservable inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation

techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Foreign exchange derivatives

Description: Derivatives linked to the foreign exchange (FX) market. The category includes FX forward contracts, FX swaps

and FX options. The majority are traded as over the counter (OTC) derivatives.

Valuation: FX derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models depending on the product type. Valuation

inputs include FX rates, interest rates, FX volatilities, interest rate volatilities, FX interest rate correlations and others as

appropriate.

Observability: FX correlations, forwards and volatilities are generally observable up to liquid maturities which are determined

separately for each input and underlying.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	222

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Unobservable inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques, or inferred via

another reasonable method.

Credit derivatives

Description: Derivatives linked to the credit spread of a referenced entity, index or basket of referenced entities or a pool of

referenced assets (e.g. a securitised product). The category includes single name and index credit default swaps (CDS) and

total return swaps (TRS).

Valuation: Credit derivatives are valued on industry standard models using curves of credit spreads as the principal input.

Credit spreads are observed directly from broker data, third party vendors or priced to proxies.

Observability: Credit derivative contracts referencing entities that are actively traded are generally considered observable.

Other valuation inputs are considered observable if products with significant sensitivity to the inputs are actively traded in a

liquid market. Unobservable valuation inputs are generally determined with reference to recent benchmark transactions or

inferred from observable trades of the same issuer or similar entities.

Assets and liabilities transferred between levels

During the year ended 31 December 2025, there were £33.5bn assets and £(9.8)bn liabilities transferred from Level 2 to

Level 1 for the Barclays Bank Group (year ended 31 December 2024: there were no material transfers). Additionally, there

were £0.7bn assets and £(2.8)bn liabilities transferred from Level 2 to Level 3 (year ended 31 December 2024: there were no

material transfers). These transfers reflect enhancement to the Bank’s levelling policy, including the use of additional data in

the active market assessment of Level 1 government bonds and updated assessments of unobservable market parameters

for government bonds and issued debt, resulting in an increase in Level 3 balances.

Level 3 movement analysis

The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balances during the year. Transfers have been reflected as if

they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

Asset and liability transfers between Level 2 and Level 3 are primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market

activity related to an input or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as

Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant.

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities
	As at 1<br><br>January<br><br>2025					Total gains and<br><br>(losses) in the<br><br>period recognised<br><br>in the income<br><br>statement		Total gains<br><br>and<br><br>(losses) in<br><br>the period<br><br>recognised<br><br>in OCI	Transfers		As at 31<br><br>Dec 2025
		Purchases	Sales	Issues	Settlements	Trading<br><br>income2	Other<br><br>income		In	Out
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Trading portfolio assets	10,115	5,810	(4,157)	—	(1,554)	151	—	—	382	(400)	10,347
Financial assets at fair value<br><br>through the income statement	5,991	2,705	(1,156)	—	(1,232)	14	(22)	—	59	(173)	6,186
Financial assets at fair value<br><br>through other comprehensive<br><br>income	3,674	895	(591)	—	(1,030)	4	(2)	—	118	—	3,068
Investment property	9	34	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	43
Trading portfolio liabilities	(395)	(55)	25	—	352	2	—	—	(28)	12	(87)
Financial liabilities designated at<br><br>fair value	(3,241)	—	29	(503)	1,020	43	—	—	(2,954)	753	(4,853)
Net derivative financial<br><br>instruments1	(1,108)	(447)	221	—	—	(44)	1	—	3	19	(1,355)
Total	15,045	8,942	(5,629)	(503)	(2,444)	170	(23)	—	(2,420)	211	13,349
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	223
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities
	As at 1<br><br>January<br><br>2024					Total gains and<br><br>(losses) in the<br><br>period recognised<br><br>in the income<br><br>statement		Total gains<br><br>and<br><br>(losses) in<br><br>the period<br><br>recognised<br><br>in OCI	Transfers		As at 31 Dec<br><br>2024
		Purchases	Sales	Issues	Settlements	Trading<br><br>income2	Other<br><br>income		In	Out
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Trading portfolio assets	6,509	5,848	(1,817)	—	(865)	(9)	—	—	775	(326)	10,115
Financial assets at fair value<br><br>through the income statement	5,368	2,540	(1,524)	—	(582)	—	56	—	206	(73)	5,991
Financial assets at fair value<br><br>through other comprehensive<br><br>income	776	3,116	(43)	—	—	3	22	—	—	(200)	3,674
Investment property	2	9	(2)	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	9
Trading portfolio liabilities	(368)	(26)	20	—	—	(7)	—	—	(15)	1	(395)
Financial liabilities designated at<br><br>fair value	(1,212)	(409)	—	(1,147)	143	(74)	—	—	(892)	350	(3,241)
Net derivative financial<br><br>instruments1	(1,113)	(571)	(7)	—	(15)	(66)	—	—	163	501	(1,108)
Total	9,962	10,507	(3,373)	(1,147)	(1,319)	(153)	78	—	237	253	15,045

Notes

1The derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £1,710m (2024: £2,073m) and

derivative financial liabilities are £(3,065)m (2024: £(3,181)m).

2Trading income represents gains and losses on Level 3 financial instruments which in the majority are offset by losses and gains on financial

instruments disclosed in Level 2.

Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 assets and liabilities

The following tables disclose the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year arising on Level 3 assets and liabilities

held at year end.

Unrealised gains and (losses) recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at year end
	2025				2024
	Income statement		Other<br><br>compre-<br><br>hensive<br><br>income		Income statement		Other<br><br>compre-<br><br>hensive<br><br>income
	Trading<br><br>income1	Other<br><br>income		Total	Trading<br><br>income1	Other<br><br>income		Total
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Trading portfolio assets	36	—	—	36	(9)	—	—	(9)
Financial assets at fair value through the income<br><br>statement	13	(23)	—	(10)	—	55	—	55
Financial assets at fair value through other<br><br>comprehensive income	4	(1)	—	3	3	22	—	25
Investment property	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Trading portfolio liabilities	1	—	—	1	(7)	—	—	(7)
Financial liabilities designated at fair value	43	—	—	43	(77)	—	—	(77)
Net derivative financial instruments	(44)	1	—	(43)	(58)	—	—	(58)
Total	53	(23)	—	30	(148)	77	—	(71)

Note

1Trading income represents gains and losses on Level 3 financial instruments which in the majority are offset by losses and gains on financial

instruments disclosed in Level 2.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	224

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Significant unobservable inputs

The following table discloses the valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs for material products recognised

at fair value and classified as Level 3 along with the range of values used for those significant unobservable inputs:

	Valuation technique(s)1	Significant unobservable<br><br>inputs	2025		2024
			Range		Range
			Min	Max	Min	Max	Units2
Derivative financial<br><br>instruments3
Interest rate derivatives	Discounted cash flows	Inflation forwards	n/m4	n/m4	3	3	%
		Credit spread	8	2,070	14	1,972	bps
		Yield	—	5	—	12	%
	Option model	Interest rate volatility	29	152	19	175	bps vol
		FX - IR correlation	(36)	30	(36)	30	%
		IR - IR correlation	35	98	33	98	%
		IR - Inflation correlation	10	10	10	10	%
		Inflation - Inflation<br><br>correlation	5	5	5	5	%
Equity derivatives	Option model	Equity volatility	1	88	1	133	%
		Equity - equity correlation	15	100	40	100	%
	Discounted cash flow	Discount margin	(190)	350	(215)	351	bps
Non-derivative financial<br><br>instruments
Loans	Discounted cash flows	Loan spread	30	942	35	908	bps
		Credit spread	194	420	194	1,011	bps
		Discount margin	780	1,170	230	345	bps
		Yield	5	8	2	18	%
	Comparable pricing	Comparable price	—	186	—	240	points
Private Equity investments	EBITDA multiple	EBITDA multiple	6	17	—	—	Multiple
Asset backed securities	Comparable pricing	Comparable price	—	530	—	125	points
	Discounted cash flows	Discount margin	n/m4	n/m4	(137)	(25)	bps
	Option Model	Equity volatility	n/m4	n/m4	15	32	%
Corporate debt	Comparable pricing	Comparable price	—	239	—	2,322	points
Government and<br><br>Government sponsored<br><br>debt	Comparable pricing	Comparable price	—	231	—	123	points
Issued debt	Discounted cash flows	Credit spread	80	120	50	198	bps
	Option model	Equity volatility	1	95	1	111	%
		Interest rate volatility	37	178	19	211	bps vol
Reverse repurchase and<br><br>repurchase agreements	Discounted cash flows	Repo spread	100	148	14	186	bps

Notes

1A range has not been provided for Net Asset Value as there would be a wide range reflecting the diverse nature of the positions.

2The units used to disclose ranges for significant unobservable inputs are percentages, points and basis points. Points are a percentage of par; for

example, 100 points equals 100% of par. A basis point equals 1/100th of 1%; for example, 150 basis points equals 1.5%.

3Certain derivative instruments are classified as Level 3 due to a significant unobservable credit spread input into the calculation of the Credit

Valuation Adjustment for the instruments.

4      Non-material Level 3 balances for these unobservable inputs.

The following section describes the significant unobservable inputs identified in the table above, and the sensitivity of fair

value measurement of the instruments categorised as Level 3 assets or liabilities to increases in significant unobservable

inputs. Where sensitivities are described, the inverse relationship will also generally apply.

Where reliable interrelationships can be identified between significant unobservable inputs used in fair value measurement, a

description of those interrelationships is included below.

Forwards

A price or rate that is applicable to a financial transaction that will take place in the future.

In general, a significant increase in a forward in isolation will result in a fair value increase for the contracted receiver of the

underlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc.), but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	225

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Credit spread

Credit spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate.

Credit spreads reflect the additional yield that a market participant demands for taking on exposure to the credit risk of an

instrument and forms part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

In general, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for a cash asset.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease

depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Volatility

Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in return for a given derivative underlying. It is an estimate of how

much a particular underlying instrument input or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities are implied from

observed option prices. For unobservable options the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature

of the underlying risk, and the strike/maturity profile of a specific contract.

In general, a significant increase in volatility in isolation will result in a fair value increase for the holder of a simple option,

but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

There may be interrelationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs (e.g. when equity prices

fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise) but these are generally specific to individual markets and may vary over time.

Correlation

Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables. Correlation can be a significant input

into valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. Credit correlation generally refers to the

correlation between default processes for the separate names that make up the reference pool of a collateralised debt

obligation (CDO) structure.

A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease depending on the specific terms

of the instrument.

Discount Margin

Discount margin represents the additional yield over a benchmark rate that market participants require to compensate for

credit risk, liquidity risk, and other factors associated with the instrument. Commonly used in discounted cash flow

valuations

In general, a significant increase in discount margin in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for the instrument, as

higher required returns reduce present value. The sensitivity depends on the specific terms of the instrument.

Repo Spread

Repo spread refers to the difference between the repurchase agreement rate and a benchmark funding rate. It reflects

market conditions, counterparty credit risk, and liquidity premiums that influence the cost of financing through repos.

In general, a significant increase in repo spread in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for the instrument, as higher

financing costs reduce its attractiveness. The sensitivity is dependent on the specific contractual terms.

Comparable price

Comparable instrument prices are used in valuation by calculating an implied yield (or spread over a liquid benchmark) from

the price of a comparable observable instrument, then adjusting that yield (or spread) to account for relevant differences

such as maturity or credit quality. Alternatively, a price-to-price basis can be assumed between the comparable and

unobservable instruments in order to establish a value.

Loans include a portfolio of loans extended to clients within the Barclays Bank Group’s leveraged finance business.

Leveraged finance loans are originated where Barclays Bank Group provides financing commitments to clients to facilitate

strategic transactions such as leverage buyouts and acquisitions. The sensitivity of the portfolio to unobservable inputs is

judgmental reflecting their illiquid nature and the significance of unobservable price inputs to the valuation.

In general, a significant increase in comparable price in isolation will result in an increase in the price of the unobservable

instrument. For derivatives, a change in the comparable price in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease

depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Loan spread

Loan spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate.

Loan spreads typically reflect credit quality, the level of comparable assets such as gilts and other factors, and form part of

the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

In general, a significant increase in loan spreads in isolation will result in a fair value decrease for a loan.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	226

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Sensitivity Analysis

Sensitivity analysis is performed on products with significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) to generate a range of

reasonably possible alternative valuations. The sensitivity methodologies applied take account of the nature of the valuation

techniques used, as well as the availability and reliability of observable proxy and historical data and the impact of using

alternative models.

Sensitivities are calculated on a monthly basis. The calculation is based on range or spread data of a reliable reference source

or a scenario based on relevant market analysis alongside the impact of using alternative models. Sensitivities are calculated

without reflecting the impact of any diversification in the portfolio.

Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs (relates to Level 3 portfolios)
	2025				2024
	Favourable changes		Unfavourable changes		Favourable changes		Unfavourable changes
	Income<br><br>statement	Equity	Income<br><br>statement	Equity	Income<br><br>statement	Equity	Income<br><br>statement	Equity
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans	201	21	(297)	(37)	577	43	(742)	(43)
Corporate debt	88	—	(68)	—	87	—	(56)	—
Asset backed securities	51	6	(43)	(6)	57	4	(40)	(4)
Government and Government<br><br>sponsored debt	45	—	(41)	—	47	—	(56)	—
Private equity investments	37	—	(37)	—	28	—	(28)	—
Interest rate derivatives	109	—	(134)	—	98	—	(212)	—
Equity derivatives	336	—	(336)	—	199	—	(269)	—
Other products1	105	312	(104)	(89)	91	—	(104)	—
Total	972	339	(1,060)	(132)	1,184	47	(1,507)	(47)

Note

1Other products include issued debt, reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements, certificate of deposits, funds and fund-linked products,

equity cash products, credit derivatives and foreign exchange derivatives.

The effect of stressing unobservable inputs to a range of reasonably possible alternatives, alongside considering the impact

of using alternative models, would be to increase fair values by up to £1,311m (2024: £1,231m) or to decrease fair values by

up to £1,192m (2024: £1,554m) with substantially all the potential effect impacting profit and loss. Unfavourable changes

shown in the table above are partly provided for through the capital and prudential valuation adjustment framework.

Fair value adjustments

Key balance sheet valuation adjustments are quantified below:

	2025	2024
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m
Exit price adjustments derived from market bid-offer spreads	(618)	(529)
Uncollateralised derivative funding	62	19
Derivative credit valuation adjustments	(155)	(184)
Derivative debit valuation adjustments	119	108

Exit price adjustments derived from market bid-offer spreads

Barclays Bank Group uses mid-market pricing where it is a market maker and has the ability to transact at, or better than,

mid-price (which is the case for certain equity, bond and vanilla derivative markets). For other financial assets and liabilities,

bid-offer adjustments are recorded to reflect the exit level for the expected close out strategy. The methodology for

determining the bid-offer adjustment for a derivative portfolio involves calculating the net risk exposure by offsetting long

and short positions by strike and term in accordance with the risk management and hedging strategy.

Bid-offer levels are generally derived from market quotes such as broker data. Less liquid instruments may not have a

directly observable bid-offer level. In such instances, an exit price adjustment may be derived from an observable bid-offer

level for a comparable liquid instrument, or determined by calibrating to derivative prices, or by scenario or historical

analysis.

Exit price adjustments derived from market bid-offer spreads have increased by £89m.

Discounting approaches for derivative instruments

Collateralised

In line with market practice, the methodology for discounting collateralised derivatives takes into account the nature and

currency of the collateral that can be posted within the relevant credit support annex (CSA). The CSA aware discounting

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	227

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

approach recognises the ‘cheapest to deliver’ option that reflects the ability of the party posting collateral to change the

currency of the collateral.

Uncollateralised

A fair value adjustment of £62m is applied to account for the impact of incorporating the cost/benefit of funding into the

valuation of uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivative portfolios and collateralised derivatives where the terms of

the agreement do not allow the rehypothecation of collateral received. The derivative funding adjustment has moved by

£43m.

Derivative credit and debit valuation adjustments

Derivative credit valuation adjustments and derivative debit valuation adjustments are incorporated into derivative

valuations to reflect the impact on fair value of counterparty credit risk and Barclays Bank Group’s own credit quality

respectively. These adjustments are calculated for uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivatives across all asset

classes. Derivative credit valuation adjustments and derivative debit valuation adjustments are calculated using estimates of

exposure at default, probability of default and recovery rates, at a counterparty level. Counterparties include (but are not

limited to) corporates, Sovereigns and Sovereign agencies and Supranationals.

Exposure at default is generally estimated through the simulation of underlying risk factors through approximating with a

more vanilla structure, or by using current or scenario-based mark to market as an estimate of future exposure.

Probability of default and recovery rate information is generally sourced from the credit default swap (CDS) markets. Where

this information is not available, or considered unreliable, alternative approaches are taken based on mapping internal

counterparty ratings onto historical or market-based default and recovery information.

Derivative credit valuation adjustments decreased by £29m. Derivative debit valuation adjustments increased by £(11)m.

Correlation between counterparty credit and underlying derivative risk factors, termed ‘wrong-way,’ or ‘right-way’ risk, is not

systematically incorporated into the derivative credit valuation adjustments calculation but is adjusted where the underlying

exposure is directly related to the counterparty.

Barclays Bank Group continues to monitor market practices and activity to ensure the approach to uncollateralised

derivative valuation remains appropriate.

Unrecognised gains as a result of the use of valuation models using unobservable inputs

The amount that is yet to be recognised in income, relating to the difference between the transaction price (the fair value at

initial recognition) and the amount that would have arisen had valuation models using unobservable inputs been used on

initial recognition, is £258m (2024: £267m) for financial instruments measured at fair value. There are additions and FX

revaluation of £54m (2024: £177m) and amortisation and releases of £63m (2024: £104m) for these instruments. For

financial instruments carried at amortised cost, the amount that is yet to be recognised in income is £16m (2024: £17m).

There are additions of £nil (2024: £nil) and amortisation and releases of £1m (2024: £1m) for these instruments.

Third-party credit enhancements

Structured and brokered certificates of deposit issued by Barclays Bank Group are insured up to $250,000 per depositor by

the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) in the United States. The FDIC is funded by fees that Barclays Bank Group

and other banks pay for deposit insurance coverage. The carrying value of these issued certificates of deposit that are

designated under the IFRS 9 fair value option includes this third-party credit enhancement. The on-balance sheet value of

these brokered certificates of deposit amounted to £4,156m (2024: £4,844m).

Comparison of carrying amounts and fair values for assets and liabilities not held at fair value

The following table shows the fair value of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost on Barclays Bank

Group’s and Barclays Bank PLC's balance sheet disaggregated by the fair value hierarchy and balance sheet classification.

The fair value is an estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly

transaction between market participants at the measurement date. As a wide range of valuation techniques are available, it

may not be appropriate to directly compare this fair value information to independent market sources or other financial

institutions. Different valuation methodologies and assumptions can have a significant impact on fair values which are based

on unobservable inputs.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	228

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

Barclays Bank Group	2025					2024
	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value	Level 1	Level 2	Level 3	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value	Level 1	Level 2	Level 3
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Financial assets
Debt securities at amortised cost	55,153	54,165	31,675	19,043	3,447	50,227	49,400	18,307	29,509	1,584
Loans and advances at<br><br>amortised cost	150,786	152,780	7,365	67,077	78,338	144,827	146,369	6,791	67,601	71,977
Reverse repurchase agreements<br><br>and other similar secured<br><br>lending	17,662	17,662	—	17,662	—	3,393	3,393	—	3,393	—
Assets included in disposal<br><br>groups classified as held for sale	5,801	6,065	—	—	6,065	9,544	9,628	—	3,520	6,108
Financial liabilities
Deposits at amortised cost	(344,751)	(344,803)	(215,669)	(128,205)	(929)	(319,376)	(319,135)	(203,393)	(115,172)	(570)
Repurchase agreements and<br><br>other similar secured borrowing	(18,651)	(18,651)	—	(18,651)	—	(29,397)	(29,397)	—	(29,397)	—
Debt securities in issue	(57,229)	(57,170)	—	(56,343)	(827)	(35,803)	(35,745)	—	(34,612)	(1,133)
Subordinated liabilities	(45,239)	(47,511)	—	(46,850)	(661)	(41,875)	(43,030)	—	(42,189)	(841)
Liabilities included in disposal<br><br>groups classified as held for sale	—	—	—	—	—	(3,647)	(3,647)	—	(3,647)	—

Debt Securities at amortised cost

Debt securities at amortised cost are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices

or other reliable pricing sources. Observability assessment is performed with reference to bond market trading data. Bonds

are assessed at Level 1 if they are traded in active market with a quoted price in line with requirements of IFRS 13.  Where

market data for the underlying bond is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine

the appropriate fair value. The enhancements noted in levelling policy are applicable to the government bonds reported at

amortised cost.

Loans and advances at amortised cost

The fair value of loans and advances, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a

way that reflects the current market price or loan spreads of the borrowers. Where market data or credit information on the

underlying borrowers is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine the

appropriate discount rates.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

The fair value of reverse repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated

and fully collateralised.

Deposits at amortised cost

In many cases, the fair value disclosed approximates carrying value because the instruments are short-term in nature or

have interest rates that reprice frequently, such as customer accounts and other deposits and short-term debt securities.

The fair value for deposits with longer-term maturities, mainly time deposits, are estimated using discounted cash flows

applying either market rates or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities.

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

The fair value of repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated.

Debt securities in issue

Fair values of other debt securities in issue are based on quoted prices where available or, where the instruments are short

dated, carrying amount approximates fair value.

Subordinated liabilities

Fair values for dated and undated convertible and non-convertible loan capital are based on quoted market rates for the

issuer concerned or issuers with similar terms and conditions.

Assets & liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

The fair value for the purposes of this disclosure has been prepared in accordance with the products held for sale, and

valuation techniques used to determine the expected sales price of these assets and liabilities that will be achieved when the

disposal group is sold.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	229

Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

17Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

The Barclays Bank Group reports financial assets and financial liabilities on a net basis on the balance sheet only if there is a

legally enforceable right to set-off the recognised amounts and there is intention to settle on a net basis, or to realise the

asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on:

▪All financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet.

▪All derivative financial instruments and reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting arrangements or similar agreements, but do not

qualify for balance sheet netting.

Barclays Bank Group	Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements						Amounts not<br><br>subject to<br><br>enforceable<br><br>netting<br><br>arrangement<br><br>s3	Balance<br><br>sheet<br><br>total4
	Effects of offsetting on-balance sheet			Related amounts not offset
	Gross<br><br>amounts	Amounts<br><br>offset1	Net amounts<br><br>reported on<br><br>the balance<br><br>sheet	Financial<br><br>instruments	Financial<br><br>collateral2	Net<br><br>amount
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Derivative financial assets	290,878	(42,571)	248,307	(194,772)	(42,576)	10,959	3,885	252,192
Reverse repurchase agreements<br><br>and other similar secured<br><br>lending5	779,249	(629,905)	149,344	—	(148,995)	349	918	150,262
Total assets	1,070,127	(672,476)	397,651	(194,772)	(191,571)	11,308	4,803	402,454
Derivative financial liabilities	(278,710)	43,257	(235,453)	194,772	28,444	(12,237)	(5,304)	(240,757)
Repurchase agreements and<br><br>other similar secured borrowing5	(805,574)	629,905	(175,669)	—	175,669	—	(1,839)	(177,508)
Total liabilities	(1,084,284)	673,162	(411,122)	194,772	204,113	(12,237)	(7,143)	(418,265)
As at 31 December 2024
Derivative financial assets	333,711	(47,207)	286,504	(230,260)	(41,586)	14,658	5,852	292,356
Reverse repurchase agreements<br><br>and other similar secured<br><br>lending5	700,005	(556,219)	143,786	—	(143,347)	439	1,398	145,184
Total assets	1,033,716	(603,426)	430,290	(230,260)	(184,933)	15,097	7,250	437,540
Derivative financial liabilities	(318,990)	46,040	(272,950)	230,260	27,660	(15,030)	(6,381)	(279,331)
Repurchase agreements and<br><br>other similar secured borrowing5	(737,053)	556,219	(180,834)	—	180,834	—	(4,587)	(185,421)
Total liabilities	(1,056,043)	602,259	(453,784)	230,260	208,494	(15,030)	(10,968)	(464,752)

Notes

1.Amounts offset for derivative financial assets additionally includes cash collateral netted of £6,086m (2024: £5,126m). Amounts offset for

derivative financial liabilities additionally includes cash collateral netted of £5,400m (2024: £6,293m). Settlement assets and liabilities have been

offset amounting to £38,196m (2024: £25,133m).

2.Financial collateral of £42,576m (2024: £41,586m) was received in respect of derivative assets, including £29,930m (2024: £28,953m) of cash

collateral and £12,646m (2024: £12,633m) of non-cash collateral. Financial collateral of £28,444m (2024: £27,660m) was placed in respect of

derivative liabilities, including £23,267m (2024: £23,109m) of cash collateral and £5,177m (2024: £4,551m) of non-cash collateral. The collateral

amounts are limited to net balance sheet exposure so as to not include over-collateralisation.

3.This column includes contractual rights of set-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.

4.The balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and

‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.

5.Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending of £150,262m (2024: £145,184m) is split by fair value £132,600m (2024:

£141,791m) and amortised cost £17,662m (2024: £3,393m). Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of £177,508m (2024:

£185,421m) is split by fair value £158,857m (2024: £156,024m) and amortised cost £18,651m (2024: £29,397m).

These offsetting collateral arrangements and other credit risk mitigation strategies used by the Barclays Bank Group are

further explained in the Credit risk management section.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	230

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

18Property, plant and equipment

Accounting for property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, which includes direct and incremental acquisition costs less accumulated

depreciation and provisions for impairment, if required. Subsequent costs are capitalised if these result in enhancement of

the asset.

Depreciation is provided on the depreciable amount of items of property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis over

their estimated useful economic lives. Depreciation rates, methods and the residual values underlying the calculation of

depreciation of items of property, plant and equipment are kept under review to take account of any change in

circumstances including consideration on future Climate and Sustainability investments.

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC use the following annual rates in calculating depreciation:

Annual rates in calculating depreciation	Depreciation rate
Freehold land	Not depreciated
Freehold buildings	2%-3.3%
Leasehold property	Over the remaining life of the lease
Costs of adaptation of freehold and leasehold property	6%-10%
Equipment installed in freehold and leasehold property	6%-10%
Computers and similar equipment	17%-33%
Fixtures and fittings and other equipment	9%-20%

Costs of adaptation and installed equipment are depreciated over the shorter of the life of the lease or the depreciation rates

noted in the table above.

Investment property

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC initially recognises investment property at cost, and subsequently at fair

value at each balance sheet date, reflecting market conditions at the reporting date. Gains and losses on remeasurement are

included in the income statement.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	231

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

	Barclays Bank Group
	Investment<br><br>property	Property	Equipment	Right of use<br><br>assets1	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cost
As at 1 January 2025	9	1,624	938	1,043	3,614
Additions	33	59	84	99	275
Disposals2	—	(5)	(20)	(35)	(60)
Exchange and other movements3	1	(98)	(58)	21	(134)
As at 31 December 2025	43	1,580	944	1,128	3,695
Accumulated depreciation and impairment
As at 1 January 2025	—	(813)	(725)	(530)	(2,068)
Depreciation charge4	—	(43)	(72)	(47)	(162)
Impairment charge4	—	(2)		(6)	(8)
Disposals2	—	5	20	29	54
Exchange and other movements3	—	44	41	7	92
As at 31 December 2025	—	(809)	(736)	(547)	(2,092)
Net book value	43	771	208	581	1,603
Cost
As at 1 January 2024	2	1,540	942	803	3,287
Additions	9	70	58	12	149
Disposals2	(2)	(14)	(47)	(9)	(72)
Exchange and other movements	—	28	(15)	237	250
As at 31 December 2024	9	1,624	938	1,043	3,614
Accumulated depreciation and impairment
As at 1 January 2024	—	(778)	(690)	(557)	(2,025)
Depreciation charge4	—	(42)	(73)	(51)	(166)
Impairment charge4	—	—	—	0	0
Disposals2	—	14	40	9	63
Exchange and other movements	—	(7)	(2)	69	60
As at 31 December 2024	—	(813)	(725)	(530)	(2,068)
Net book value	9	811	213	513	1,546

Notes

1Right of use (ROU) asset balances relate to Property Leases accounted in accordance with IFRS 16. Refer to Note 19 for further details

2Disposals pertain to fully depreciated assets which are not in use

3      Exchange and other movements in Right of use (ROU) asset balances include modification related to a lease extension by ~91 years.

4    Depreciation and impairment charge is part of Infrastructure, administration and general expenses shown under Note 7

Property rentals of £7m (2024: £8m) have been included in other income within the Barclays Bank Group.

The fair value of investment property is determined by reference to current market prices for similar properties, adjusted as

necessary for condition and location, or by reference to recent transactions updated to reflect current economic conditions.

Discounted cash flow techniques may be employed to calculate fair value where there have been no recent transactions,

using current external market inputs such as market rents and interest rates. Valuations are carried out by management

with the support of appropriately qualified independent valuers.

19Leases

Accounting for leases

When the Barclays Bank Group or Barclays Bank PLC are the lessee, they are required to recognise both:

▪a lease liability, measured at the present value of remaining cash flows on the lease

▪a right of use (ROU) asset, measured at the amount of the initial measurement of the lease liability, plus any lease

payments made prior to commencement date, initial direct costs, and estimated costs of restoring the underlying asset to

the condition required by the lease, less any lease incentives received.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	232

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

Subsequently the lease liability will increase for the accrual of interest, resulting in a constant rate of return throughout the

life of the lease, and reduce when payments are made. The right of use asset will amortise to the income statement over the

life of the lease.

On the balance sheet, the ROU assets are included within property, plant and equipment and the lease liabilities are included

within other liabilities.

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC apply the recognition exemption in IFRS 16 for leases with a term not

exceeding 12 months. For these leases the lease payments are recognised as an expense on a straight line basis over the

lease term unless another systematic basis is more appropriate.

When the Barclays Bank Group or Barclays Bank PLC are the lessor, the lease must be classified as either a finance lease or

an operating lease. A finance lease is a lease which confers substantially all the risks and rewards of the leased assets on the

lessee. An operating lease is a lease where substantially all of the risks and rewards of the leased asset remain with the

lessor.

As lessors

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC do not have any material operating and finance leases as lessors.

As lessees

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC lease various offices, branches and other premises under non-cancellable

lease arrangements to meet their operational business requirements. In some instances, the Barclays Bank Group or Barclays

Bank PLC will sublease property to third parties when it is no longer needed to meet business requirements. Currently, the

Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC do not have any material subleasing arrangements.

ROU asset balances relate to property leases only. Refer to Note 18 for the carrying amount of ROU assets.

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC have not recognised any expenses related to short term leases during the

current and previous year.

Lease liabilities	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
As at 1 January	542	280
Interest expense	29	29
New leases	98	11
Disposals	(8)	—
Cash payments	(69)	(73)
Exchange and other movements1	30	295
As at 31 December (see Note 21)	622	542

Note

1Exchange and other movements in 2024 include modification related to a lease extended by ~91 years.

The table below sets out a maturity analysis of undiscounted lease liabilities, showing the lease payments after the reporting

date.

Undiscounted lease liabilities maturity analysis	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Not more than one year	70	70
One to two years	73	66
Two to three years	61	61
Three to four years	59	46
Four to five years	49	40
Five to ten years	198	130
Greater than ten years	3,315	3,550
Total undiscounted lease liabilities as at 31 December	3,825	3,963

In 2024, Barclays had a lease modification for property "New York, 745 7th Avenue" wherein there was an extension of lease

term by ~91 years.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	233

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

In addition to the cash flows identified above, the Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC are exposed to:

•Variable lease payments: This variability will typically arise from either inflation index instruments or market-based pricing

adjustments.

Currently, Barclays Bank Group has 37 (2024: 38) leases out of the total 97 (2024: 103) leases with variable payment

terms. Of the gross cash flows identified above, £3,746m (2024: £3,855m) is attributable to leases with some degree of

payment variability.

•Extension and termination options: The table above represents the Barclays Bank Group’s and the Barclays Bank PLC’s

best estimate of future cash outflows for leases, including assumptions regarding the exercising of contractual extension

and termination options. The above gross cash flows include adjustments of Nil (2024: £9m) and Nil (2024: £9m) in

respect of leases for which Barclays Bank Group and the Barclays Bank PLC is highly likely to exercise an early termination

option. The above gross cash flows include adjustments of £1,780m (2024: £1,859m) and £49m (2024: £14m) in respect

of leases for which Barclays Bank Group and the Barclays Bank PLC is highly likely to exercise a lease extension option.

The Barclays Bank Group and Barclays Bank PLC do not have any restrictions or covenants imposed by the lessor on its

property leases which restrict its businesses.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	234

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

20Goodwill and intangible assets

Accounting for goodwill and intangible assets

Goodwill

Goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries represents the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over the

fair value of the Barclays Bank Group’s share of the assets acquired and the liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed on the

date of the acquisition.

Goodwill is reviewed annually for impairment, or more frequently when there are indications that impairment may have

occurred. The test involves comparing the carrying value of the cash generating unit (CGU) including goodwill with the present

value of the pre-tax cash flows, discounted at a rate of interest that reflects the inherent risks, of the CGU to which the goodwill

relates, or the CGUs fair value if this is higher.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets are initially recognised when they are separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights, the cost can be

measured reliably and, in the case of intangible assets not acquired in a business combination, where it is probable that future

economic benefits attributable to the assets will flow from their use.

For internally generated intangible assets, only costs incurred during the development phase are capitalised. Expenditure in the

research phase is expensed when it is incurred.

Intangible assets are stated at cost (which is, in the case of assets acquired in a business combination, the acquisition date fair

value) less accumulated amortisation and provisions for impairment, if any, and are amortised over their useful lives in a

manner that reflects the pattern to which they contribute to future cash flows, generally using the amortisation periods set out

below:

Annual rates in calculating amortisation	Amortisation period
Goodwill	Not amortised
Internally generated software1	12 months to 6 years
Other software	12 months to 6 years
Customer lists	12 months to 25 years
Licences and other	12 months to 25 years

Note

1Exceptions to the above period relate to useful lives of certain core banking platforms that are assessed individually and, if appropriate, amortised

over longer periods ranging from 10 years to 15 years.

Intangible assets are reviewed for impairment when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. Intangible assets

not yet available for use are reviewed annually for impairment.

		Intangible assets
	Goodwill	Internally<br><br>generated<br><br>software	Other<br><br>software	Customer<br><br>lists	Licences<br><br>and other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Bank Group
Cost
As at 1 January 2025	607	1,339	65	1,162	197	3,370
Additions	—	398	—	—	—	398
Disposals1	—	(156)	(1)	—	(2)	(159)
Exchange and other movements2	(30)	(328)	(4)	(78)	(14)	(454)
As at 31 December 2025	577	1,253	60	1,084	181	3,155
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
As at 1 January 2025	(68)	(647)	(41)	(1,065)	(124)	(1,945)
Disposals1	—	156	1	—	2	159
Amortisation charge3	—	(155)	(8)	(20)	(9)	(192)
Impairment charge3	—	—	—	—	—	—
Exchange and other movements	—	44	1	72	9	126
As at 31 December 2025	(68)	(602)	(47)	(1,013)	(122)	(1,852)
Net book value	509	651	13	71	59	1,303

Notes

1    Disposals pertain to fully amortised assets which are not in use

2    Exchange and other movements in Internally generated software include transfer of IGS from BB Group to BX for £248m

3    Amortisation charge and impairment charge is part of Infrastructure, administration and general expenses shown in Note 7

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	235

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

	Goodwill	Internally<br><br>generated<br><br>software	Other<br><br>software	Customer<br><br>lists	Licences<br><br>and other	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Bank Group
Cost
As at 1 January 2024	335	1,266	73	1,477	128	3,279
Additions	263	366	1	—	66	696
Disposals1	—	(131)	(10)	—	—	(141)
Exchange and other movements	9	(162)	1	(315)	3	(464)
As at 31 December 2024	607	1,339	65	1,162	197	3,370
Accumulated amortisation and impairment
As at 1 January 2024	(68)	(623)	(42)	(1,345)	(117)	(2,195)
Disposals1	—	131	10	—	0	141
Amortisation charge2	—	(149)	(8)	(25)	(5)	(187)
Impairment charge2	—	(2)	—	—	—	(2)
Exchange and other movements	—	(4)	(1)	305	(2)	298
As at 31 December 2024	(68)	(647)	(41)	(1,065)	(124)	(1,945)
Net book value	539	692	24	97	73	1,425

Notes

1Disposals pertain to fully amortised assets which are not in use

2    Amortisation charge and impairment charge is part of Infrastructure, administration and general expenses shown in Note 7

Goodwill

Goodwill is allocated to business operations according to business segments as follows:

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management	95	95
Barclays US Consumer Bank	414	444
Total net book value of goodwill	509	539

2025 impairment review

The 2025 impairment review was performed during Q4 2025, with the approach and results of this analysis set out below.

Determining the carrying value of CGUs

The carrying value for each CGU is the sum of the tangible equity, goodwill and intangible asset balances associated with that

CGU.

The Barclays Bank Group manages the assets and liabilities of its CGUs with reference to the tangible equity of the respective

businesses. That tangible equity is derived from the level of risk weighted assets (RWAs) and capital required to be deployed in

the CGU and therefore reflects its relative risk, as well as the level of capital that management considers a market participant

would be required to hold and retain to support business growth.

Goodwill is initially allocated to CGUs or groups of CGUs that are expected to benefit from the synergies of the acquisition that

generated it. Goodwill is only reallocated if there is a change in its use or when reporting structures are altered in a way that

changes the composition of one or more cash-generating units to which goodwill has been allocated.

Cash flows

The five-year cash flows used in the calculation of value in use are based on the formally agreed medium-term plans approved

by the Board. These are prepared using macroeconomic assumptions which management considers reasonable and

supportable, and reflect business agreed initiatives for the forecast period.

Discount rates

IAS 36 requires that the discount rate used in a value in use calculation reflects the pre-tax rate an investor would require if they

were to choose an investment that would generate similar cash flows to those that the entity expects to generate from the

asset. In determining the discount rate, management identified the cost of equity associated with market participants that

closely resemble the Barclays Bank Group's CGUs. The cost of equity has been used as the discount rate in the impairment

assessment and applied to the post tax cash flows of the CGU. This post-tax method incorporates the impact of changing tax

rates on the cash flows and is expected to produce the same VIU result as a pre-tax method adjusted for varying tax rates.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	236

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

Using the resultant VIU the equivalent pre-tax discount rates have been calculated. The cost of equity rate used for all CGUs in

this year’s calculation has been increased to reflect volatility in markets, an increase in risk free rate and a higher market risk

premium rate. The range of equivalent pre-tax discount rates applicable across the CGUs range from 15.2% to 19.2% (2024:

14.5% to 18.5%).

Terminal growth rate

The terminal growth rate is used to estimate the effect of projecting cash flows to the end of an asset’s useful economic life. It

is management’s judgement that the cash flows associated with the CGUs will grow in line with the major economies in which

the Barclays Bank Group operates. The UK inflation rate is used as an approximation for the future growth rates. The terminal

growth rate used is 2.0% (2024: 2.0%).

Outcome of goodwill and intangibles review

Based on management’s plans and assumptions the value in use exceeds the carrying value of the CGUs and no goodwill

impairment has been indicated by the 2025 impairment review.

Cash generating unit	Tangible<br><br>equity	Goodwill	Intangibles	Carrying<br><br>value	Value in use	Value in use<br><br>exceeding<br><br>carrying value<br><br>2025	Value in use<br><br>exceeding<br><br>carrying value<br><br>2024
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management	945	95	—	1,040	4,943	3,903	2,704
Barclays US Consumer Bank	3,055	414	734	4,203	6,879	2,676	353
Total	4,000	509	734	5,243	11,822	6,579	3,057

Sensitivity of key judgements

The headroom is sensitive to possible adverse changes in the key assumptions that support the recoverable amount:

Cash flows: The medium-term plans used to determine the cash flows used in the VIU calculation rely on macroeconomic

forecasts, including interest rates, GDP and unemployment, and forecast levels of customers activity. Interest rate assumptions

impact planned cash flows from both customer income and structural hedge contributions and therefore cash flow

expectations are highly sensitive to movements in the yield curve. The cash flows also contain assumptions with regard to the

prudential and financial conduct regulatory environment which may be subject to change. A sensitivity analysis has been

provided to illustrate the impact of a 10% reduction in cash flows.

Discount rate: The discount rate should reflect the market risk-free rate adjusted for the inherent risks of the business it is

applied to. Management has identified discount rates for comparable businesses and consider these to be a reasonable

estimate of a suitable market rate for the profile of the business unit being tested. The risk that these discount rates may not be

appropriate is quantified below by showing the impact of a 100bps increase in the discount rate.

Terminal growth rate: The terminal growth rate is used to estimate the cash flows into perpetuity based on the expected

longevity of the CGU’s businesses. The terminal growth rate is sensitive to uncertainties in the macroeconomic environment.

The risk that using inflation data may not be appropriate for its determination is quantified below and shows the impact of a

100bps decrease in the terminal growth rate is shown.

Allocated capital rate: Tangible equity is allocated based on the level of risk weighted assets (RWAs) and capital required to be

deployed in the CGU which is dependent on the relative risk of businesses. The capital rate used in determining the level of

tangible equity allocated to the CGU and its capital cash flows could move over time as a result of a change to the prudential

regulatory environment or the risk profile of the business. The impact of a 50bps increase in capital rate is quantified below.

The sensitivity of the value in use to key judgements in the calculations for certain CGUs holding goodwill balances is set out

below:

					Reduction in headroom				Change required to reduce headroom<br><br>to zero
Cash generating unit	Carrying<br><br>value	Value<br><br>in<br><br>use	Value in<br><br>use<br><br>exceeding<br><br>carrying<br><br>value	Discount<br><br>rate	100bps<br><br>increase<br><br>in the<br><br>discount<br><br>rate	100bps<br><br>decrease<br><br>in<br><br>terminal<br><br>growth<br><br>rate	50bps<br><br>increase<br><br>to<br><br>allocated<br><br>capital<br><br>rate	10%<br><br>reduction<br><br>in<br><br>forecasted<br><br>cash flows	Discount<br><br>rate	Terminal<br><br>growth<br><br>rate	Allocated<br><br>capital<br><br>rate	Cash<br><br>flows
	£m	£m	£m	%	£m	£m	£m	£m	%	%	%	%
Barclays US<br><br>Consumer Bank	4,203	6,879	2,676	16.8	(561)	(361)	(229)	(881)	6.6	(13.1)	5.8	(30.4)
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	237
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Assets at amortised cost and other investments

Other intangible assets

Determining the estimated useful lives of intangible assets (such as those arising from contractual relationships) requires an

analysis of circumstances. The assessment of whether an asset is exhibiting indicators of impairment as well as the calculation

of impairment, which requires the estimate of future cash flows and fair values less costs to sell, also requires the preparation of

cash flow forecasts and fair values for assets that may not be regularly bought and sold.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	238

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

The notes included in this section focus on the Barclays Bank Group’s accruals, provisions and contingent liabilities.

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer

of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated. Contingent liabilities reflect

potential liabilities that are not recognised on the balance sheet.

21Other liabilities

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Accruals and deferred income	2,933	3,035
Other creditors	4,270	4,319
Items in the course of collection due to other banks	6	8
Lease liabilities (refer to Note 19)	622	542
Other liabilities	7,831	7,904

22Provisions

Accounting for provisions

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that

a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, which can be reliably estimated.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include:

Judgements	Estimates
Determination as to whether a present obligation exists.	Estimation uncertainty in the probability, timing, nature and quantum<br><br>of outflows.

These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of

provisions within the next financial year.

The financial reporting of provisions involves a significant degree of judgement and is complex. Identifying whether a

present obligation exists and estimating the probability, timing, nature and quantum of the outflows that may arise from

past events requires judgements to be made based on the specific facts and circumstances relating to individual events and

often requires specialist professional advice. When matters are at an early stage, accounting judgements and estimates can

be difficult because of the high degree of uncertainty involved. Management continues to monitor matters as they develop

to re-evaluate on an ongoing basis whether provisions should be recognised, however there can remain a wide range of

possible outcomes and uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal, competition and regulatory matters, and as a result it is

often not practicable to make meaningful estimates even when matters are at a more advanced stage.

The amount that is recognised as a provision can also be very sensitive to the assumptions made in calculating it. This gives

rise to a large range of potential outcomes which require judgement in determining an appropriate provision level. See Note

24 for more detail of legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	239

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

	Redundancy<br><br>and<br><br>restructuring	Customer<br><br>redress	Legal,<br><br>competition<br><br>and<br><br>regulatory<br><br>matters	Onerous<br><br>contracts	Sundry<br><br>provisions	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Bank Group
As at 1 January 2025	87	13	58	—	158	316
Additions	141	9	102	16	65	333
Amounts utilised	(109)	(4)	(77)	—	(28)	(218)
Unused amounts reversed	(53)	(3)	(3)	—	(5)	(64)
Exchange and other movements	(2)	1	(1)	—	3	1
As at 31 December 2025	64	16	79	16	193	368
Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees
As at 1 January 2025						420
Net change in expected credit loss provision and other<br><br>movements						(22)
As at 31 December 2025						398
Total provisions
As at 1 January 2025						736
As at 31 December 2025						766

Provisions expected to be recovered or settled within no more than 12 months after 31 December 2025 for Barclays Bank

Group are £693m (2024: £663m) and for Barclays Bank PLC were £415m (2024: £421m).

Redundancy and restructuring

These provisions comprise the estimated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs where an obligation exists. For

example, when the Barclays Bank Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid

expectations in those affected by the restructuring by announcing its main features or starting to implement the plan.

Customer redress

Customer redress provisions comprise the estimated cost of making redress payments to customers, clients and

counterparties for losses or damages associated with inappropriate judgement in the execution of the Barclays Bank Group’s

business activities.

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

The Barclays Bank Group is engaged in various legal proceedings, both in the UK and a number of other overseas

jurisdictions, including the US. For further information in relation to legal proceedings and discussion of the associated

uncertainties, please refer to Note 24.

Onerous contracts

Onerous contract provisions comprise an estimate of the unavoidable costs involved with fulfilling the terms and conditions

of contracts net of any expected benefits to be received.

Sundry provisions

This category includes provisions that do not fit into any of the other categories, such as fraud losses and dilapidation

provisions.

Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees

Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provisions are accounted under IFRS9. Impairment allowance

under IFRS 9 considers both the drawn and the undrawn counterparty exposure. For retail portfolios, the total impairment

allowance is allocated to the drawn exposure to the extent that the allowance does not exceed the exposure as ECL is not

reported separately. Any excess is reported on the liability side of the balance sheet as a provision. For wholesale portfolios

the impairment allowance on the undrawn exposure is reported on the liability side of the balance sheet as a provision.

Further analysis of the movement is disclosed within the 'Movement in gross exposures and impairment allowance including

provisions for loan commitments and financial guarantees' in the expected credit loss provision table on pages 95 to 102.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	240

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

23Contingent liabilities and commitments

Accounting for contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events and present

obligations where the transfer of economic resources is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are

not recognised on the balance sheet but are disclosed unless the likelihood of an outflow of economic resources is remote.

The following table summarises the nominal principal amount of contingent liabilities and commitments which are not

recorded on-balance sheet:

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security	16,890	16,814
Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements	9,743	9,751
Total contingent liabilities and financial guarantees	26,633	26,565
Of which: Financial guarantees and letters of credit carried at fair value	905	988
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions	1,103	1,433
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments	354,285	352,344
Total commitments1	355,388	353,777
Of which: Loan commitments carried at fair value	21,292	15,350

Note

1Includes exposures relating to financial assets classified as assets held for sale.

Expected credit losses held against contingent liabilities and commitments equal £398m (2024: £420m) for Barclays Bank

Group.

24Legal, competition and regulatory matters

The Barclays Bank Group faces legal, competition and regulatory challenges, many of which are beyond our control. The

extent of the impact of these matters cannot always be predicted but may materially impact our operations, financial results,

condition and prospects. Matters arising from a set of similar circumstances can give rise to either a contingent liability or a

provision, or both, depending on the relevant facts and circumstances.

The recognition of provisions in relation to such matters involves critical accounting estimates and judgements in

accordance with the relevant accounting policies applicable to Note 22, Provisions. We have not disclosed an estimate of the

potential financial impact or effect on the Barclays Bank Group of contingent liabilities where it is not currently practicable to

do so. Various matters detailed in this note seek damages of an unspecified amount. While certain matters specify the

damages claimed, such claimed amounts do not necessarily reflect the Barclays Bank Group’s potential financial exposure in

respect of those matters.

Proceedings relating to certain advisory services agreements

In 2023, Barclays Bank PLC received requests for arbitration from two Jersey special purpose vehicles connected to PCP

International Finance Limited asserting claims in relation to the October 2008 capital raising. This matter is now concluded,

and there are no other outstanding matters relating to the advisory services agreements.

Civil actions related to LIBOR and other benchmarks

Various individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Barclays

Bank Group and other banks in relation to the alleged manipulation of LIBOR and/or other benchmarks.

US civil actions related to LIBOR

Multiple civil actions have been filed in the US against the Barclays Bank Group and other banks alleging manipulation of

USD LIBOR, Sterling LIBOR and the LIBOR benchmark that was administered by the Intercontinental Exchange Inc. and

certain of its affiliates (ICE LIBOR).

With respect to USD LIBOR, one action alleging that Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and other financial

institutions individually and collectively violated provisions of the US Sherman Antitrust Act (Sherman Act), the US

Commodity Exchange Act, the US Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act (RICO), the US Securities Exchange

Act of 1934 and various state laws by manipulating USD LIBOR rates remains, seeking unspecified damages. In September

2025, the US federal district court in the Southern District of New York (SDNY) granted the defendants' motion for summary

judgment and dismissed the remaining USD LIBOR litigations, including the action against the Barclays Bank Group. The

plaintiffs are appealing the decision. A separate USD LIBOR action pending in the SDNY was previously settled. The

settlement is not material to the Barclays Bank Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	241

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

With respect to Sterling LIBOR, consolidated class actions filed in the SDNY against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other Sterling

LIBOR panel banks alleging, among other things, manipulation of the Sterling LIBOR rate in violation of the Sherman Act, US

Commodity Exchange Act and RICO, were dismissed in 2018. The US Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit (Second

Circuit) affirmed the dismissal in September 2025. This matter is concluded.

With respect to ICE LIBOR, in August 2020, a group of individual plaintiffs in the US District Court for the Northern District of

California on behalf of individual borrowers and consumers of loans and credit cards with variable interest rates linked to

USD ICE LIBOR brought an action against Barclays Bank PLC and other financial institutions alleging Sherman Act violations.

The defendants' motion to dismiss the case was granted in 2022. The US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit affirmed the

dismissal in December 2024. The plaintiffs' petition for US Supreme Court review was denied in June 2025, concluding the

matter.

Non-US benchmarks civil actions

The remaining UK claim, issued in 2017, against Barclays Bank PLC and other banks in connection with alleged manipulation

of LIBOR has now settled. The settlement is not material to the Barclays Bank Group's operating results, cash flows or

financial position. Proceedings are ongoing in Spain and Italy relating to alleged manipulation of LIBOR and EURIBOR. The

proceedings in Israel have concluded.

Foreign exchange civil actions

Legal proceedings have been brought or are threatened against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and Barclays Execution

Services Limited (BX) in connection with alleged manipulation of foreign exchange in the UK, the Netherlands, Israel, Brazil

and Australia. In Australia, the court has approved the settlement and the proceedings are concluded. In Israel, a settlement

in principle has been agreed subject to court approval. The settlements are not material to the Barclays Bank Group's

operating results, cash flows or financial position.

The above-mentioned proceedings include a class action filed against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BX, BCI and other

financial institutions in the UK Competition Appeal Tribunal (CAT) in 2019. The CAT refused to certify the claim in 2022 and

in 2023, the Court of Appeal overturned the CAT’s decision and found that the claim should be certified on an opt-out basis.

Barclays and the other financial institutions involved appealed this decision and, in December 2025, the UK Supreme Court

issued a judgment in their favour, establishing that this claim should be brought as an opt-in class action.

Metals-related civil actions

A US civil complaint alleging manipulation of the price of silver in violation of the US Commodity Exchange Act, the Sherman

Act and state antitrust and consumer protection laws was brought by a proposed class of plaintiffs against a number of

banks, including Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and BX. The complaint, which is filed in the SDNY, was dismissed against the

Barclays entities and certain other defendants in 2018, and against the remaining defendants in 2023. The plaintiffs have

appealed the dismissal of the complaint against all defendants.

Civil actions have also been filed in Canadian courts against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Canada Inc.

and BCI on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of gold and silver prices. The Barclays entities have

reached a settlement in principle, which will require court approval. The settlement is not material to the Barclays Bank

Group's operating results, cash flows or financial position.

US residential mortgage-related civil action

There remains one US Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS) related civil action arising from unresolved

repurchase requests submitted by Trustees for certain RMBS, alleging breaches of various loan-level representations and

warranties made by Barclays Bank PLC and/or a subsidiary acquired in 2007. Barclays’ motion to dismiss the action was

denied in 2023. The parties appealed the decision and in January 2025, the appellate court reversed the lower court’s

decision and dismissed the action. The plaintiff has requested review by the New York State Court of Appeals.

Government and agency securities civil actions

Treasury auction securities civil actions

Consolidated purported class action complaints filed in US federal court against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other financial

institutions under the Sherman Act and state common law allege that the defendants: (i) conspired to manipulate the US

Treasury securities market; and/or (ii) conspired to prevent the creation of certain platforms by boycotting or threatening to

boycott such trading platforms. The court dismissed the consolidated action in 2021 and the plaintiffs filed an amended

complaint. The defendants’ motion to dismiss the amended complaint was granted in 2022. The plaintiffs appealed this

decision, and in February 2024 the appellate court affirmed the dismissal. The plaintiffs did not seek US Supreme Court

review, thereby concluding the matter.

In addition, certain plaintiffs have filed a related, direct action against BCI and certain other financial institutions, alleging that

defendants conspired to fix and manipulate the US Treasury securities market in violation of the Sherman Act, the US

Commodity Exchange Act and state common law. This action remains stayed.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	242

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

Variable Rate Demand Obligations civil actions

Civil actions have been filed against Barclays Bank PLC and BCI and other financial institutions alleging the defendants

conspired or colluded to artificially inflate interest rates set for Variable Rate Demand Obligations (VRDOs). VRDOs are

municipal bonds with interest rates that reset on a periodic basis, most commonly weekly. An action in state court has been

filed by private plaintiffs on behalf of the state of California. A settlement in principle has been agreed in that action, subject

to court approval. This settlement is not material to the Barclays Bank Group's operating results, cash flows or financial

position. In addition, three purported class action complaints have been consolidated in the SDNY. In the consolidated SDNY

class action, certain of the plaintiffs’ claims were dismissed in 2020 and 2022 and the plaintiffs’ motion for class certification

was granted in 2023, which means the case may proceed as a class action. The defendants appealed and the decision was

affirmed by the Second Circuit in August 2025. The defendants have petitioned for US Supreme Court review.

Odd-lot corporate bonds antitrust class action

In 2020, BCI, together with other financial institutions, was named as a defendant in a purported class action in the US. The

complaint alleges a conspiracy to boycott developing electronic trading platforms for odd-lots and price fixing. The plaintiffs

demand unspecified money damages. The defendants’ motion to dismiss was granted in 2021, which the plaintiffs

appealed. In July 2024, the Second Circuit vacated the judgment and remanded the case to the SDNY, where the plaintiffs

filed a second amended complaint in September 2024. The defendants' motion to dismiss was granted in its entirety in

September 2025. The parties have stipulated to the discontinuance of the action, thereby concluding the matter.

Credit Default Swap civil action

A purported antitrust class action is pending in New Mexico federal court against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and various other

financial institutions. The plaintiffs, the New Mexico State Investment Council and certain New Mexico pension funds, allege

that the defendants conspired to manipulate the benchmark price used to value Credit Default Swap (CDS) contracts at

settlement (i.e. the CDS final auction price). The plaintiffs allege violations of US antitrust laws and the US Commodity

Exchange Act, and unjust enrichment under state law. The defendants’ motion to dismiss was denied in 2023. In January

2024, the SDNY ruled that settlement in an earlier CDS antitrust litigation bars these plaintiffs from asserting claims based

on conduct occurring before 30 June 2014. The plaintiffs appealed to the Second Circuit and the appeal was denied in May

2025. The case has returned to New Mexico federal court and the defendants have filed a motion for judgment on the

pleadings.

Interest rate swap and credit default swap US civil actions

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI, together with other financial institutions that act as market makers for interest rate

swaps (IRS), are named as defendants in several antitrust actions, including one purported class action and individual

actions brought by certain swap execution facilities, which are consolidated in the SDNY. The complaints allege the

defendants conspired to prevent the development of exchanges for IRS and demand unspecified money damages. The

parties have reached a settlement of the class action, which received final court approval and was paid in 2024. The

individual claims are proceeding separately in the SDNY.

BDC Finance L.L.C.

In 2008, BDC Finance L.L.C. (BDC) filed a complaint in the Supreme Court of the State of New York, demanding damages of

$298m, alleging that Barclays Bank PLC had breached a contract in connection with a portfolio of total return swaps

governed by an ISDA Master Agreement. Following a trial, the court ruled in 2018 that Barclays Bank PLC was not a

defaulting party, which was affirmed on appeal. Barclays Bank PLC filed a counterclaim against BDC for damages, legal fees,

expenses and interest. In November 2025, the court granted Barclays' pretrial motion to exclude certain evidence. BDC is

appealing. A trial on damages will be scheduled.

Civil actions in respect of the US Anti-Terrorism Act

Eight civil actions, on behalf of more than 4,000 plaintiffs, were filed in US federal courts in the US District Court in the

Eastern District of New York (EDNY) and SDNY against Barclays Bank PLC and a number of other banks. The complaints

generally allege that Barclays Bank PLC and those banks engaged in a conspiracy to facilitate US dollar-denominated

transactions for the Iranian government and various Iranian banks, which in turn funded acts of terrorism that injured or

killed the plaintiffs or the plaintiffs’ family members. The plaintiffs seek to recover damages for pain, suffering and mental

anguish under the US Anti-Terrorism Act, which allows for the trebling of any proven damages.

The court granted the defendants’ motions to dismiss three out of the six actions in the EDNY. The plaintiffs appealed in one

action and the dismissal was affirmed, and judgment was entered, in 2023. The plaintiffs’ motion to vacate the judgment

was denied in September 2025. The other two dismissed actions in the EDNY were consolidated into one action. The

plaintiffs in that action, and in one other action in the EDNY, filed amended complaints and the defendants' motion to

dismiss is fully briefed. The two other actions in the EDNY are currently stayed. Out of the two actions in the SDNY, the court

granted the defendants’ motion to dismiss the first action. That action is stayed, and the second SDNY action is stayed

pending any appeal on the dismissal of the first.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	243

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

Shareholder derivative action

In 2020, a purported Barclays shareholder filed a purported derivative action in New York state court against BCI and a

number of current and former members of the Board of Directors of Barclays PLC and senior executives or employees of the

Barclays Bank Group. The shareholder plaintiff filed the claim on behalf of nominal defendant Barclays PLC, alleging that the

individual defendants harmed the company through breaches of their duties, including under the Companies Act 2006. The

plaintiff sought damages on behalf of Barclays PLC for the losses that Barclays PLC allegedly suffered as a result of these

alleged breaches. An amended complaint was filed in 2021, which BCI and certain other defendants moved to dismiss. The

motion to dismiss was granted in 2022. The plaintiff appealed the decision, and the dismissal was unanimously affirmed in

2023 by the First Judicial Department in New York. The plaintiff appealed the First Judicial Department’s decision to the New

York Court of Appeals. The dismissal was affirmed by the New York Court of Appeals in May 2025, concluding the matter. In

November 2025, the same plaintiff filed a new complaint in New York state court against the same defendants. Barclays has

not yet been served.

Skilled person review in relation to historical timeshare loans and associated matters

Clydesdale Financial Services Limited (CFSL), a subsidiary of the Group which trades as Barclays Partner Finance and houses

Barclays’ point-of-sale finance business, was required by the FCA to undertake a skilled person review in 2020 following

concerns about historical affordability assessments for certain loans to customers in connection with timeshare purchases.

The skilled person review was concluded in 2021. CFSL complied fully with the skilled person review requirements, including

carrying out certain remediation measures. CFSL was not required to conduct a full back book review. Instead, CFSL

reviewed limited historical lending to ascertain whether its practices caused customer harm and has remediated any

examples of harm. This work was substantially completed during 2023, utilising provisions booked to account for any

remediations. This matter is now concluded.

Motor finance commission arrangements

From 2003 to late 2019, CFSL, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, provided motor finance to customers in the UK. In

2020, CFSL was transferred from Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays Principal Investments Ltd (BPIL), another subsidiary of

Barclays PLC. Barclays Bank PLC has provided an intragroup indemnity to BPIL in respect of historical litigation and conduct

matters relating to CFSL.

In January 2024, the FCA appointed a skilled person to undertake a review of the historical use of discretionary commission

arrangements and sales in the motor finance market across several firms. This review followed two final decisions by the UK

Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS) and a number of complaints and court claims, including some against CFSL.

On 7 October 2025, the FCA began consulting on an industry-wide compensation scheme for eligible motor finance

customers. Barclays has engaged with the FCA as part of its consultation process and the FCA has stated that, if it

introduces a redress scheme, it expects to publish a policy statement and final rules in February or March 2026, with

compensation to consumers beginning later in 2026. The FCA has indicated that it expects to lift the existing pause on the

handling of certain motor finance complaints on 31 May 2026, subject to the terms of the FCA redress scheme, if adopted.

Barclays considers it more likely than not that a redress scheme will be implemented by the FCA. As a result, Barclays has

recognised in CFSL a provision of £325m in respect of this matter as at 31 December 2025 (as at 31 December 2024:

£90m). Recognising that the proposed terms of the FCA redress scheme are subject to consultation, in calculating potential

redress costs and the amount of provision required, Barclays has applied a weighted average of multiple scenarios, each

incorporating differing evaluations of the FCA's current proposals. The current provision reflects the estimated number of

motor finance cases falling within the scope of the FCA redress scheme as proposed by the FCA consultation paper (which

covers regulated motor finance agreements between 6 April 2007 and 1 November 2024 where a commission was payable

by the lender to the broker), the anticipated level of customer redress reflecting the FCA's proposed methodology, the

estimated customer response rate with reference to Barclays' previous remediation exercises and the costs associated with

implementing the FCA's proposed approach to customer engagement.

The final terms of the FCA redress scheme remain uncertain pending publication of the FCA's policy statement and final

scheme rules. Accordingly, the legal and regulatory outcomes and the nature, extent and timing of any remediation action, if

required, remain uncertain. The ultimate financial impact on Barclays could differ from the recognised provision, which

represents Barclays' best estimate of the cost of redress based on the information currently available to Barclays.

Over-issuance of securities in the US

In 2022, executive management became aware that Barclays Bank PLC had issued securities materially in excess of the set

amount under its US shelf registration statements.

In 2022, a purported class action claim was filed in the US District Court in Manhattan seeking to hold Barclays PLC, Barclays

Bank PLC and former and current executives responsible for declines in the price of Barclays PLC’s American depositary

receipts, which the plaintiffs claim occurred as a result of alleged misstatements and omissions in its public disclosures. The

defendants’ motion to dismiss the case was granted in part and denied in part in February 2024. The parties reached a

settlement in respect of such lawsuit, which has received final court approval and has been paid, concluding the matter. The

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	244

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

financial impact of this settlement is not material to the Barclays Bank Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial

position.

In addition, holders of VXX ETNs have brought a purported class action in the SDNY against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank

PLC, and former and current executives and board members in the US alleging, among other things, that Barclays’ failure to

disclose that these ETNs were unregistered securities misled investors and that, as a result, Barclays is liable for the holders’

alleged losses following the suspension of further sales and issuances of the ETNs. The plaintiffs were granted leave to

amend and filed a new complaint in March 2024. Barclays' motion to dismiss was granted in March 2025. The plaintiffs'

motion for reconsideration was denied in June 2025. The plaintiffs are appealing the decision.

In March 2024, a purported class action was filed in the SDNY against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and former and

current executives. The plaintiff purports to bring claims on behalf of a class of short sellers, alleging that their short

positions suffered substantial losses when Barclays suspended new issuances and sales of VXX ETNs as a result of the over-

issuance of securities. Barclays' motion to dismiss was granted in March 2025. The plaintiff appealed the decision granting

Barclays' motion to dismiss and, in December 2025, the Second Circuit affirmed the dismissal.

HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) assessments concerning UK Value Added Tax

In 2018, HMRC issued notices that have the effect of either removing certain Barclays overseas subsidiaries that have

operations in the UK from Barclays’ UK VAT group or preventing them from joining it. Supplies between members of a UK

VAT group are generally free from VAT. The notices had both retrospective and prospective effect. Barclays appealed

HMRC’s decisions to the First-Tier Tribunal (Tax Chamber) in relation to both the retrospective VAT assessments and the

ongoing VAT payments made since 2018. £181m of VAT (inclusive of interest) was assessed retrospectively by HMRC

covering the periods 2014 to 2018, of which approximately £128m is expected to be attributed to Barclays Bank UK PLC and

£53m to Barclays Bank PLC. This retrospectively assessed VAT was paid in 2018 and an asset, adjusted to reflect expected

eventual recovery, is recognised. Since 2018 Barclays has paid, and recognised as an expense, VAT on intra-group supplies

from the relevant subsidiaries to the members of the VAT group. In respect of the ongoing VAT payments, the court upheld

HMRC’s denial of the VAT grouping in August 2024. Barclays has appealed this decision to the Upper Tribunal.

FCA investigations concerning financial crime systems and controls and compliance with the Money Laundering

Regulations

The FCA conducted civil enforcement investigations into Barclays Bank PLC’s and Barclays Bank UK PLC’s compliance with

the Money Laundering Regulations and the FCA's Principles of Business and Rules relating to anti-money laundering and

financial crime systems and controls. The FCA's investigation of Barclays Bank PLC focused primarily on the historical

oversight and management of a customer with heightened risk. In July 2025, Barclays Bank PLC agreed a settlement with the

FCA to resolve the investigation. At the same time, Barclays Bank UK PLC reached a settlement with the FCA in a separate

investigation concerning the onboarding of a client money account for an FCA-regulated firm. The FCA recognised Barclays'

cooperation in both matters, which are now concluded.

UK bank levy

In November 2024, HMRC updated its published guidance on the treatment of beneficiary accounts for the purposes of the

exclusion of protected deposits from the UK bank levy charge. HMRC’s interpretation of the UK bank levy legislation differs

from Barclays’ interpretation of the legislation, which has been applied in Barclays’ UK bank levy returns and which Barclays

continues to consider is correct. In December 2024, HMRC wrote to notify Barclays of its intention to challenge this

treatment. Whilst engagement with HMRC continued during 2025, discussions remain at a relatively early stage and

assessments have not yet been issued.

Potential indemnity claim relating to the sale of Barclays Consumer Bank Europe

In January 2025, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC completed the sale of certain assets and liabilities, specifically the Consumer

Bank Europe, its German consumer finance business, to BAWAG P.S.K., a wholly-owned subsidiary of BAWAG Group AG

(BAWAG). As part of the transaction, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC provided BAWAG with a capped indemnity in relation to

transfer taxes on certain assets. Discussions with the relevant taxation authority are ongoing and are at an early stage. No

formal assessment has been issued.

General

The Barclays Bank Group is engaged in various other legal, competition and regulatory matters in the UK, the US and a

number of other overseas jurisdictions. It is subject to legal proceedings brought by and against the Barclays Bank Group

which arise in the ordinary course of business from time to time, including (but not limited to) disputes in relation to

contracts, securities, guarantees, debt collection, consumer credit, fraud, trusts, client assets, competition, data

management and protection, intellectual property, money laundering, financial crime, employment, environmental and other

statutory and common law issues.

The Barclays Bank Group is also subject to enquiries and examinations, requests for information, audits, investigations and

legal and other proceedings by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with (but not limited to)

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	245

Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

consumer protection measures, measures to combat money laundering and financial crime, compliance with legislation and

regulation, wholesale trading activity and other areas of banking and business activities in which the Barclays Bank Group is

or has been engaged. The Barclays Bank Group is cooperating with the relevant authorities and keeping all relevant agencies

briefed as appropriate in relation to these matters and others described in this note on an ongoing basis.

At the present time, the Barclays Bank Group does not expect the ultimate resolution of any of these other matters to have a

material adverse effect on its financial position. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such matters and the

matters specifically described in this note, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters

(including formerly active matters or those matters arising after the date of this note) will not be material to Barclays Bank

PLC’s results, operations or cash flows for a particular period, depending on, among other things, the amount of the loss

resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of profit otherwise reported for the reporting period.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	246

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

The notes included in this section focus on the Barclays Bank Group’s loan capital and shareholders’ equity including issued

share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities (non-

controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Barclays Bank Group maintains sufficient

capital to meet our regulatory requirements refer to pages 77 to 78.

25Subordinated liabilities

Accounting for subordinated liabilities

Subordinated liabilities are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method under IFRS 9, unless they are

irrevocably designated at fair value through profit or loss at initial recognition because such designation eliminates or

significantly reduces an accounting mismatch. Refer to Note 15 for details about accounting for liabilities designated at fair

value through profit or loss.

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
At amortised cost
As at 1 January	41,875	35,903
Issuances	9,808	11,222
Redemptions	(5,665)	(5,067)
Other	(779)	(183)
As at 31 December	45,239	41,875		Designated at fair value (Note 15)	587	537
---	---	---
Total subordinated liabilities	45,826	42,412

Issuances of £9,808m comprise £9,139m intra-group loans from Barclays PLC, £669m EUR 4.616% Fixed Rate Resetting

Subordinated Callable Notes issued to Barclays PLC .

Redemptions of £5,665m comprise £5,438m intra-group loans from Barclays PLC, £115m SGD 3.750% Fixed Rate Resetting

Subordinated Callable Notes issued to Barclays PLC and £112m USD Floating Rate Notes issued externally by a Barclays

Bank PLC subsidiary.

Other movements predominantly comprise foreign exchange movements and fair value hedge adjustments.

Subordinated liabilities include accrued interest and comprise undated and dated subordinated liabilities as follows:

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Undated subordinated liabilities	127	134
Dated subordinated liabilities	45,699	42,278
Total subordinated liabilities	45,826	42,412

None of the Barclays Bank Group’s or Barclays Bank PLC's subordinated liabilities are secured.

Undated subordinated liabilities1		Barclays Bank Group
		2025	2024
	Initial call date	£m	£m
Barclays Bank PLC externally issued subordinated liabilities
Undated Notes
6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes	2027	35	35
Undated Loans
5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)	2028	37	40
5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)	2028	55	59
Total undated subordinated liabilities		127	134

Note

1  Instrument values are disclosed to the nearest million.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	247

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

Undated subordinated liabilities

Undated subordinated liabilities are issued by Barclays Bank PLC for the development and expansion of their businesses and

to strengthen their capital bases. The principal terms of the undated subordinated liabilities are described below:

Subordination

All undated subordinated liabilities rank behind the claims against the bank of depositors and other unsecured

unsubordinated creditors and holders of dated subordinated liabilities.

Interest

All undated subordinated liabilities bear a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date.

After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the 6.125% Undated Notes will bear interest at rates fixed

periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market rates. After the initial call date, in the event that they are not

redeemed, all other undated loans will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance based on market rates.

Payment of interest

Barclays Bank PLC is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its Undated Notes and Loans if, in the preceding six

months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC or, in certain cases, any class of

preference shares of Barclays Bank PLC. Interest not paid becomes payable in each case if such a dividend is subsequently

paid or in certain other circumstances. During the year, Barclays Bank PLC paid interest on each of its Undated Notes and

Loans.

No payment of principal or any interest may be made unless Barclays Bank PLC satisfies a specified solvency test.

Repayment

All undated subordinated liabilities are repayable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC in whole at the initial call date and on

any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, each issue of undated subordinated liabilities is repayable, at the

option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole for certain tax reasons, either at any time, or on an interest payment date. There are

no events of default except non-payment of principal or mandatory interest. Any repayments require the prior consent of

the PRA.

Other

All issues of undated subordinated liabilities are non-convertible.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	248

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

Dated subordinated liabilities1		Barclays Bank Group
		2025	2024
	Maturity date	£m	£m
Barclays Bank PLC externally issued subordinated liabilities
5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes	2026	279	279
5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan ( 15,000m)	2027	71	76
6.33% Subordinated Notes ( 50m)	2032	46	45
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes ( 68m)	2040	59	56
External issuances by other subsidiaries		492	623
Barclays Bank PLC notes issued intra-group to Barclays PLC
3.75% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (SGD 200m)	2030	—	117
5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes ( 1,367m)	2026	1,015	1,051
1.125% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes ( 1,000m)	2031	876	810
4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes ( 1,200m)	2028	883	920
8.407% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Loan ( 1,000m)	2032	1,022	1,008
5.088% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes ( 1,300m)	2030	920	941
4.973% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes ( 1,500m)	2036	1,367	1,320
7.437% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes ( 2,000m)	2033	1,514	1,573
4.616% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes ( 800m)	2037	719	—
5.262% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes ( 1,250m)	2034	1,162	1,130
7.119% Fixed-to-Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes ( 860m)	2034	632	655
3.811% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes ( 1,000m)	2042	558	586
5.25% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes ( 827m)	2045	382	408
4.95% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes ( 1,250m)	2047	510	556
Floating Rate Subordinated Notes ( 456m)	2047	345	370
Barclays Bank PLC intra-group loans from Barclays PLC
Various Fixed Rate Subordinated Loans		2,557	3,457
Various Subordinated Floating Rate Loans		—	334
Various Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Loans		27,121	24,401
Various Subordinated Floating Rate Callable Loans		2,663	1,025
Various Zero Coupon Callable Loans		506	537
Total dated subordinated liabilities		45,699	42,278

All values are in Japanese Yen.

Note

1  Instrument values are disclosed to the nearest million.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	249

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

Dated subordinated liabilities

Dated subordinated liabilities are issued by Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries for the development and expansion of

their businesses and to strengthen their respective capital bases. The principal terms of the dated subordinated liabilities are

described below:

Currency and maturity

In addition to the individual dated subordinated liabilities listed in the Barclays Bank Group table, the £32,847m (2024:

£29,754m) of intra-group loans is made up of various fixed, floating and zero coupon loans from Barclays PLC with notional

amounts denominated in USD 29,323m, EUR 9,180m, GBP 1,206m, JPY 159,700m, AUD 2,390m, NOK 220m, CAD 450m,

CNH 700m and CHF 260m, with maturities ranging from 2026 to 2055. Certain intra-group loans have a call date one year

prior to their maturity. Dated floating rate subordinated liabilities externally issued by Barclays Bank PLC subsidiaries £492m

(2024: £623m)  with maturities ranging from 2026 to 2032.

Subordination

All dated subordinated liabilities, both externally issued and issued intra-group to Barclays PLC, rank behind the claims

against Barclays Bank PLC of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the undated

subordinated liabilities and the holders of Barclays Bank PLC equity. The Barclays Bank PLC intra-group loans from Barclays

PLC rank pari passu amongst themselves but ahead of the Barclays Bank PLC notes issued intra-group to Barclays PLC and

the Barclays Bank PLC externally issued subordinated liabilities. The external dated subordinated liabilities issued by

subsidiaries are similarly subordinated as the external subordinated liabilities issued by Barclays Bank PLC.

Interest

Interest on floating rate notes and loans is set by reference to market rates at the time of issuance and fixed periodically in

advance, based on the related market rates.

Interest on fixed rate notes and loans is set by reference to market rates at the time of issuance and fixed until maturity.

Interest on fixed rate callable notes and loans is set by reference to market rates at the time of issuance and fixed until the

call date or maturity as applicable. After the call date (where relevant), in the event that the notes or loans are not redeemed,

the interest rate will be reset to either a fixed or floating rate until maturity based on market rates.

No interest is paid on zero coupon loans.

Repayment

Those subordinated liabilities with a call date are repayable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC on such call date in

accordance with the conditions governing the respective debt obligations, some in whole or in part, and some only in whole,

or otherwise on maturity. The remaining dated subordinated liabilities outstanding at 31 December 2025 are redeemable

only on maturity, subject, in particular cases, to provisions allowing an early redemption in the event of certain changes in

tax law or to certain changes in legislation or regulations.

Any repayments prior to maturity may require, in the case of Barclays Bank PLC, the prior consent of the PRA or BoE or, in

the case of the overseas issues, the consent of the local regulator for that jurisdiction and of the PRA in certain

circumstances.

There are no committed facilities in existence at the balance sheet date which permit the refinancing of debt beyond the

date of maturity.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	250

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

26Ordinary shares, preference shares and other equity

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid<br><br>and other equity instruments
	Barclays Bank Group			Barclays Bank Group
	Ordinary share capital	Preference share<br><br>capital	Total share capital	Other equity<br><br>instruments
	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 1 January 2025	2,342	6	2,348	9,604
AT1 securities issuance	—	—	—	2,770
AT1 securities redemption	—	—	—	(1,928)
As at 31 December 2025	2,342	4	2,346	10,446
As at 1 January 2024	2,342	6	2,348	10,765
AT1 securities issuance	—	—	—	970
AT1 securities redemption	—	—	—	(2,131)
As at 31 December 2024	2,342	6	2,348	9,604

Ordinary shares

The issued ordinary share capital of Barclays Bank PLC, as at 31 December 2025, comprised 2,342m (2024: 2,342m)

ordinary shares of £1 each.

Preference shares

The issued preference share capital of Barclays Bank PLC, as at 31 December 2025, comprised 58,133 US Dollar Preference

Shares of $100 each (2024: 58,133).

Ordinary share capital and preference share capital constitutes 100% (2024: 100%) of total share capital issued.

Euro Preference Shares

140,000 Euro non-cumulative callable preference shares of €100 each (the Euro Preference Shares) were issued on 15

March 2005 for a consideration of €1,383.3m (£966.7m), of which the nominal value was €14m and the balance was share

premium. The Euro Preference Shares entitled the holders thereof to receive Euro non-cumulative cash dividends out of

distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, annually at a fixed rate of 4.75% per annum on the amount of €10,000 per

preference share until 15 March 2020, and since 15 March 2020 quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 0.71% per

annum above the Euro interbank offered rate for three-month Euro deposits. The board of directors of Barclays Bank PLC

were able to resolve, in its absolute discretion, not to pay in full, or at all, the dividend on the Euro Preference Shares in

respect of a particular dividend period.

The Euro Preference Shares were redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on each

dividend payment date at €10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date

fixed for redemption.

On 16 of June 2025, Barclays Bank PLC redeemed and cancelled the outstanding 4.75% Euro non-cumulative callable

preference shares, the principal outstanding was EUR 319m.

US Dollar Preference Shares

100,000 US Dollar non-cumulative callable preference shares of $100 each (the US Dollar Preference Shares), represented

by 100,000 American Depositary Shares, Series 1, were issued on 8 June 2005 for a consideration of $995.4m (£548.1m), of

which the nominal value was $10m and the balance was share premium. The US Dollar Preference Shares entitle the holders

thereof to receive US Dollar non-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, semi-annually

at a fixed rate of 6.278% per annum on the amount of $10,000 per preference share until 15 December 2034, and thereafter

quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 1.55% per annum above the London interbank offered rate for three-month US

Dollar deposits. The board of directors of Barclays Bank PLC may resolve, for any reason and in its absolute discretion, not to

declare or pay in full or in part any dividends on the US Dollar Preference Shares in respect of a particular dividend period.

The US Dollar Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on 15

December 2034, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at $10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the

then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

No redemption or purchase of any US Dollar Preference Shares may be made by Barclays Bank PLC without the prior

consent of the PRA and any such redemption will be subject to the Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Barclays Bank

PLC.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	251

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

On a winding-up of Barclays Bank PLC or other return of capital (other than a redemption or purchase of shares of Barclays

Bank PLC, or a reduction of share capital), a holder of US Dollar Preference Shares will rank in the application of assets of

Barclays Bank PLC available to shareholders: (1) junior to the holder of any shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking in

priority to the US Dollar Preference Shares; (2) equally in all respects with holders of other preference shares and any other

shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking pari passu with the US Dollar Preference Shares; and (3) in priority to the

holders of ordinary shares and any other shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking junior to the US Dollar Preference

Shares.

Subject to such ranking, in such event, holders of the US Dollar Preference Shares will be entitled to receive out of assets of

Barclays Bank PLC available for distributions to shareholders, liquidating distributions in the amount of $10,000 per US

Dollar Preference Share, plus, in each case, an amount equal to the accrued dividend for the then current dividend period to

the date of the commencement of the winding-up or other such return of capital.

If a dividend is not paid in full on any preference shares on any dividend payment date, then a dividend restriction shall

apply. This dividend restriction will mean that neither Barclays Bank PLC nor Barclays PLC may (a) declare or pay a dividend

(other than payment by Barclays PLC of a final dividend declared by its shareholders prior to the relevant dividend payment

date, or a dividend paid by Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays PLC) on any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference

shares or other share capital or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire any of their respective share capital, other

than shares of Barclays Bank PLC held by Barclays PLC or a wholly owned subsidiary, until the earlier of: (1) the date on

which Barclays Bank PLC next declares and pays in full a preference share dividend; and (2) the date on or by which all the

preference shares are redeemed in full or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC.

Holders of the US Dollar Preference Shares are not entitled to receive notice of, or to attend, or vote at, any general meeting

of Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays Bank PLC is not permitted to create a class of shares ranking as regards participation in the

profits or assets of Barclays Bank PLC in priority to the preference shares, save with the sanction of a special resolution of a

separate general meeting of the holders of the US Dollar Preference Shares (requiring a majority of not less than three-

fourths of the holders of the US Dollar Preference Shares voting at the separate general meeting) or with the consent in

writing of the holders of three-fourths of the US Dollar Preference Shares.

Except as described above, the holders of the US Dollar Preference Shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of

Barclays Bank PLC.

Other equity instruments

Other equity instruments issued by Barclays Bank PLC of £15,153m (2024: £14,311m) include AT1 securities issued to

Barclays PLC and borrowings of $6bn from a wholly-owned, indirect subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. As a result, the other

equity instruments balance recorded by Barclays Bank Group is £10,446m (2024: £9,604m).

The borrowings of $6bn from a wholly-owned, indirect subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC have been recorded as equity since,

under their terms, interest payments are non cumulative and discretionary whilst repayment of principal is perpetually

deferrable by Barclays Bank PLC. Should Barclays Bank PLC make a discretionary dividend payment on its ordinary shares in

the six months preceding the date of an interest payment, it will be obliged to make that interest payment. In 2025, interest

paid on these borrowings was £386m (2024: £433m).

Barclays PLC uses funds from its own market issuance of AT1 securities to purchase AT1 securities from the Barclays Bank

Group. The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments

under prevailing capital rules applicable as at the relevant issue date.

In 2025, there were three issuances of AT1 instruments, in the form of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated

Contingent Convertible Securities, for £2,770m (2024: two issuances for £970m) which includes issuance costs of £28m

(2024: £10m). There were three redemptions in 2025 totalling £1,928m (2024: two redemptions totalling £2,131m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	252

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

AT1 equity instruments
		2025	2024
	Initial call date	£m	£m
AT1 equity instruments - Barclays Bank Group
7.125% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities	2025	—	299
6.375% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities	2025	—	495
6.125% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD1,500m)	2025	—	1,134
8.875% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities	2027	1,237	1,237
8.300% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD450m)	2027	263	263
4.375% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD1,500m)	2028	1,072	1,072
7.300% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD400m)	2028	247	247
9.250% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities	2028	866	866
8.000% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD2,000m)	2029	1,634	1,634
9.625% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD1,750m)	2029	1,386	1,386
5.400% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD600m)	2030	352	352
8.500% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities	2030	619	619
4.650% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (SGD500m)	2031	288	—
7.625% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (USD1,500m)	2035	1,174	—
6.125% Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (EUR1,500m)	2035	1,308	—
		10,446	9,604

The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below:

•AT1 securities rank behind the claims against Barclays Bank PLC i) of all creditors of Barclays Bank PLC; ii) such claims of

holders of any preference shares issued by Barclays Bank PLC; in the case of each of i) and ii) above, other than claims

which rank, or are expressed to rank, pari passu with, or junior to, the claims of holders of the AT1 securities of Barclays

Bank PLC; and iii) of holders of instruments which count towards Tier 2 capital of Barclays Bank PLC.

•AT1 securities are undated and are redeemable, at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole on either (i) the initial reset

date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial reset date or (ii) any day falling in a named period ending on the initial

reset date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial reset date. In addition, the AT1 securities are redeemable, at the

option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax or regulatory treatment of the securities

and, in certain cases, on a clean-up call. Any redemptions require the prior permission of the PRA.

•Interest on the AT1 securities is due and payable only at the sole discretion of Barclays Bank PLC, and Barclays Bank PLC

has sole and absolute discretion at all times and for any reason to cancel (in whole or in part) any interest payment that

would otherwise be payable on any interest payment date.

•The Additional Tier 1 securities shall convert into ordinary shares of Barclays Bank PLC, at a predetermined price, should

the fully loaded CET1 Ratio of Barclays Bank PLC at the solo-consolidated level or the sub-consolidated level fall below 7%.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	253

Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

27Reserves

Currency translation reserve

The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of net investments in

foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging.

Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve

The fair value through other comprehensive income reserve represents the changes in the fair value of financial instruments

accounted for at fair value through other comprehensive income investments since initial recognition.

Cash flow hedging reserve

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that

will be recycled to the income statement when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss.

Own credit reserve

The own credit reserve reflects the cumulative own credit gains and losses on financial liabilities at fair value. Amounts in the

own credit reserve are not recycled to profit or loss in future periods.

Other reserves

Other reserves includes a merger reserve relating to inter-Barclays Group entity transfers, and redeemed ordinary and

preference shares issued by the Barclays Bank Group.

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Currency translation reserve	2,534	3,690
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve	(1,014)	(1,681)
Cash flow hedging reserve	(907)	(2,448)
Own credit reserve	(990)	(1,059)
Other reserves	198	196
Total	(179)	(1,302)
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	254
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

The notes included in this section focus on the costs and commitments associated with employing our staff.

28Staff costs

Accounting for staff costs

Deferred cash and share awards are made to employees to incentivise performance over the period employees provide

services. To receive an award, an individual must have provided service over the vesting period and been employed on the

scheduled vesting date or be considered an eligible leaver. The expense for deferred cash and share awards is recognised

over the period employees’ services contribute to the awards. The Barclays Bank Group considers it appropriate to recognise

the expense over the vesting period including the financial year prior to the grant date.

The accounting policies for share-based payments and retirement benefits are included in Note 29 and Note 30 respectively.

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Performance costs	1,555	1,436	1,308
Salaries	2,667	2,766	2,921
Social security costs	414	381	374
Retirement benefits1	348	329	298
Other compensation costs	228	237	221
Total compensation costs2	5,212	5,149	5,122
Other resourcing costs
Outsourcing	203	198	206
Redundancy and restructuring	90	137	176
Temporary staff costs	17	16	22
Other	63	56	65
Total other resourcing costs	373	407	469
Total staff costs	5,585	5,556	5,591

Notes

1 Retirement benefits charge includes £172m (2024: £178m; 2023: £180m) with respect to defined contribution schemes and £176m (2024:

£151m; 2023: £118m) with respect to defined benefit schemes.

2  £328m (2024: £324m; 2023: £259m) of compensation cost was capitalised as internally generated software.

29Share-based payments

Accounting for share-based payments

Employee incentives include awards in the form of shares and share options, as well as offering employees the opportunity

to purchase shares on favourable terms. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options

granted is recognised in the income statement over the period that employees provide services. The overall cost of the

award is calculated using the number of shares and options expected to vest and the fair value of the shares or options at

the date of grant.

The number of shares and options expected to vest takes into account the likelihood that applicable performance and

service conditions included in the terms of the awards will be met. For other share-based payment schemes such as

Sharesave and Sharepurchase, there are non-vesting conditions which must be met. Failure to meet the non-vesting

condition is treated as a cancellation, resulting in an acceleration of recognition of the cost of the employee services.

The fair value of shares is the market price ruling on the grant date, in some cases adjusted to reflect restrictions on

transferability. The fair value of options granted is determined using the Black-Scholes model to estimate the numbers of

shares likely to vest. The model takes into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free

interest rate, the expected volatility of the share price over the life of the option and other relevant factors. Market conditions

that must be met in order for the award to vest are also reflected in the fair value of the award, as are any other non-vesting

conditions – such as continuing to make payments into a share-based savings scheme.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	255

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

The charge for the year arising from share-based payment schemes was as follows:

	Charge for the year
	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Share Value Plan and Deferred Share Value Plan	315	287	254
Others	177	133	144
Total equity settled	492	420	398
Cash settled	13	9	3
Total Share-based payments	505	429	401

The terms of the main current plans are as follows:

Share Value Plan (SVP)

SVP awards have been granted to participants in the form of a conditional right to receive Barclays PLC shares or provisional

allocations of Barclays PLC shares which vest or are considered for release over a period of three, four, five or seven years.

Participants do not pay to receive an award or to receive a release of shares. SVP awards are also made to eligible employees

for recruitment purposes. All awards are subject to potential forfeiture in certain leaver scenarios.

Deferred Share Value Plan (DSVP)

The terms of the DSVP are materially the same as the terms of the SVP as described above, save that Executive Directors are

not eligible to participate in the DSVP and the DSVP operates over market purchase shares only.

Other schemes

In addition to the SVP and DSVP, the Barclays PLC Group operates a number of other schemes settled in Barclays PLC Shares

including Sharesave (both UK and Ireland), Sharepurchase (both UK and Overseas), and Barclays PLC Group Long Term

Incentive Plan. A delivery of upfront shares to ‘Material Risk Takers’ can be made as a Share Incentive Award (Holding

Period) under the SVP. A free share award was delivered under the SVP to all eligible employees in 2025, with this award

being subject to a two-year holding period.

Share option and award plans

The weighted average fair value per award granted, weighted average share price at the date of exercise/release of shares

during the year, weighted average contractual remaining life, and number of options and awards outstanding (including

those exercisable) at the balance sheet date were as follows:

	2025				2024
	Weighted<br><br>average fair<br><br>value per<br><br>award<br><br>granted in<br><br>year	Weighted<br><br>average<br><br>share price<br><br>at exercise/<br><br>release<br><br>during year	Weighted<br><br>average<br><br>remaining<br><br>contractual<br><br>life	Number of<br><br>options/<br><br>awards<br><br>outstanding	Weighted<br><br>average fair<br><br>value per<br><br>award<br><br>granted in<br><br>year	Weighted<br><br>average<br><br>share price<br><br>at exercise/<br><br>release<br><br>during year	Weighted<br><br>average<br><br>remaining<br><br>contractual<br><br>life	Number of<br><br>options/<br><br>awards<br><br>outstanding
	£	£	in years	(000s)	£	£	in years	(000s)
SVP and DSVP1,2	2.87	3.09	1	381,279	1.52	1.74	1	441,713
Others1,3	1.49-3.57	3.03-4.01	0-2	35,395	0.81-2.1	1.72-2.13	0-2	43,901

SVP and DSVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of grant.

Consequently, the fair value of these awards is based on the market value at that date.

Sharesave has a contractual life of 3 years and 5 years, the expected volatility is 29.04% for 3 years and 26.48% for 5 years.

The risk free interest rates used for valuations are 3.47% and 3.56% for 3 years and 5 years respectively. The pure dividend

yield rates used for valuations are 1.99% and 2.14% for 3 years and 5 years respectively. The repo rates used for valuations

are (0.60)% and (0.69)% for 3 years and 5 years respectively. The inputs into the model such as risk free interest rate,

expected volatility, pure dividend yield rates and repo rates are derived from market data.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	256

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

Movements in options and awards

The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of

options was:

	SVP and DSVP1,2		Others1,3
	Number (000s)		Number (000s)		Weighted averageexercise price ()
	2025	2024	2025	2024	2025
Outstanding at beginning of year/acquisition date	441,713	435,820	43,901	51,363	1.17
Transfers within the year4	(1,095)	(2,528)	391	1,780
Granted in the year	129,006	202,420	53,384	84,383	3.01
Exercised/released in the year	(169,166)	(171,810)	(60,633)	(90,721)	0.99
Less: forfeited in the year	(19,179)	(22,189)	(1,461)	(2,611)	1.36
Less: expired in the year	—	—	(187)	(293)	1.18
Outstanding at end of year	381,279	441,713	35,395	43,901	1.52
Of which exercisable:	—	—	8,013	4,956	0.94

All values are in British Pounds.

Notes:

1  Options/award granted over Barclays PLC shares.

2  Weighted average exercise price is not applicable for SVP and DSVP awards as these are not share option schemes.

3 The number of awards within Others at the end of the year principally relates to Sharesave (number of awards exercisable at end of year was

4,323,541 (2024: 828,340)). The weighted average exercise price relates to Sharesave.

4  Awards of employees transferred between the Barclays Bank Group and the rest of the Barclays PLC Group.

Awards and options granted to employees and former employees of the Barclays Bank Group under the Barclays PLC Group

share plans may be satisfied using new issue shares, treasury shares and market purchase shares of Barclays PLC. Awards

granted to employees and former employees of the Barclays Bank Group under DSVP may only be satisfied using market

purchase shares of Barclays PLC.

There were no significant modifications to the share-based payments arrangements in 2025 and 2024.

As at 31 December 2025, the total liability arising from cash-settled employee share-based payments transactions was

£15m (2024: £10m).

30Retirement benefits

Accounting for retirement benefits

The Barclays Bank Group operates a number of pension schemes and post-employment benefit schemes.

Defined contribution – the Barclays Bank Group recognises contributions due in respect of the accounting period in the

income statement. Any contributions unpaid at the balance sheet date are included as a liability.

Defined benefit – the Barclays Bank Group recognises its obligations to members of each scheme at the period end, less the

fair value of the scheme assets after applying the asset ceiling test.

Each scheme’s obligations are calculated using the projected unit credit method. Scheme assets are stated at fair value as at

the period end.

Changes in pension scheme liabilities or assets (remeasurements) that do not arise from regular pension cost, net interest

on net defined benefit liabilities or assets, past service costs, settlements or contributions to the scheme are recognised in

other comprehensive income. Remeasurements comprise experience adjustments (differences between previous actuarial

assumptions and what has actually occurred), the effects of changes in actuarial assumptions, return on scheme assets

(excluding amounts included in the interest on the assets) and any changes in the effect of the asset ceiling restriction

(excluding amounts included in the interest on the restriction).

The cost of providing healthcare benefits to retired employees is accrued as a liability in the financial statements over the

period that the employees provide services to the Barclays Bank Group, using a methodology similar to that for defined

benefit pension schemes.

Pension schemes

UK Retirement Fund (UKRF)

The UKRF is the Barclays Bank Group’s main scheme, representing 96% (2024: 96%) of the Barclays Bank Group’s total

retirement benefit obligations.

Between 1 January 2025 and 30 June 2025, Barclays Bank PLC was the principal employer of the UKRF, with Barclays Bank

UK PLC and Barclays Execution Services Limited as the participating employers.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	257

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

From 1 July 2025 the UKRF was amended to become a sectionalised scheme to meet the requirements of the Financial

Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015, creating two separate sections - the Barclays

Bank Section and the Barclays UK Section. From 1 July 2025, Barclays Bank PLC participates in the Barclays Bank Section only

(as principal employer). As a result of sectionalisation, £750m of UKRF assets were allocated to the Barclays UK Section,

along with £697m of benefit obligation relating to Barclays Bank UK PLC active employees. This resulted in a settlement loss

of £53m impacting profit before tax for the Barclays Bank Group. The sectionalisation means that Barclays Bank PLC is

separated from any exposure to the Barclays UK Section of the UKRF.

The UKRF was closed to new entrants on 1 October 2012, and comprises a number of different benefit categories, the two

most significant of which are:

▪Afterwork, which comprises a contributory cash balance defined benefit element, and a voluntary defined contribution

element. The cash balance element is accrued each year and revalued until Normal Retirement Age in line with the

increase in Retail Price Index (RPI) (up to a maximum of 5% p.a.). The risks that the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to in

relation to Afterwork are limited although additional contributions are required if pre-retirement investment returns are

not sufficient to provide for the benefits.

▪The 1964 Pension Scheme. Most UK employees recruited before July 1997 built up benefits in this non-contributory

defined benefit scheme in respect of service up to 31 March 2010. Pensions were calculated by reference to service and

pensionable salary. From 1 April 2010, members became eligible to accrue future service benefits in either Afterwork or

the Pension Investment Plan, a historic defined contribution section which is now closed to future contributions. The risks

that the Barclays Bank Group is exposed to in relation to the 1964 Pension Scheme are typical of final salary pension

schemes, principally that investment returns fall short of expectations, that inflation exceeds expectations, and that

retirees live longer than expected.

Barclays Pension Savings Plan (BPSP)

The BPSP is a defined contribution scheme providing benefits for all new UK hires from 1 October 2012. BPSP is not subject

to the same investment return, inflation or life expectancy risks for the Barclays Bank Group that defined benefit schemes

are. Members’ benefits reflect contributions paid and the level of investment returns achieved.

Other

Apart from the UKRF and the BPSP, the Barclays Bank Group operates a number of smaller pension and long-term employee

benefits and post-retirement healthcare plans globally, the largest of which are the US defined benefit and defined

contribution schemes. Many of the schemes are funded, with assets backing the obligations held in separate legal vehicles

such as trusts. Others are operated on an unfunded basis. The benefits provided, the approach to funding, and the legal

basis of the schemes, reflect local environments.

Governance

The UKRF operates under trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of the members in accordance with the

terms of the Trust Deed and Rules and all relevant legislation. The Trustee is Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited, a

private limited company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The Trustee is the legal owner of the assets of

the UKRF which are held separately from the assets of the Barclays Bank Group.

The Trustee of the UKRF comprises six Management Directors selected by Barclays Bank PLC, of whom three are

independent Directors with no relationship with the Barclays Bank Group (and who are not members of the UKRF), plus

three Member Nominated Directors selected from eligible active, deferred or pensioner members of the UKRF, who apply for

the role.

The BPSP is a group personal pension arrangement which operates as a collection of personal pension plans. Each personal

pension plan is a direct contract between the employee and the BPSP provider (Legal & General Assurance Society Limited),

and is regulated by the FCA.

Similar principles of pension governance apply to the Barclays Bank Group’s other pension schemes, depending on local

legislation.

Amounts recognised

The following tables include amounts recognised in the income statement and an analysis of benefit obligations and scheme

assets for all Barclays Bank Group defined benefit schemes. The net position is reconciled to the assets and liabilities

recognised on the balance sheet. The tables include funded and unfunded post-retirement benefits. The income statement

charge with respect to defined contribution schemes is disclosed as part of footnotes to Note 28 Staff costs.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	258

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

Income statement charge/(credit)
	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Current service cost	122	150	119
Net finance income	(163)	(157)	(222)
Curtailments or Settlements1	53	—	—
Other movements	1	1	(1)
Total	13	(6)	(104)

Note

1  Settlement loss arising from allocation of a portion of the UKRF assets and liabilities to the Barclays UK Section of the UKRF on account of

sectionalisation effective from 1 July 2025, for which Barclays Bank UK PLC are now responsible for.

Barclays Bank PLC is the principal employer of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF (and the Whole of the UKRF until

H1'2025) and hence Scheme Assets and Defined Benefit Obligations relating to the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF are

recognised within the Barclays Bank Group. Where Barclays Bank PLC is the principal employer, participating employers

Barclays Bank UK PLC (until H1'2025) and Barclays Execution Services Limited bear their share of the service cost. Of the

£135m current service cost in the table below, £9m relates to Barclays Bank UK PLC and £4m relates to Barclays Execution

Services Limited. While the entire current service cost obligation is accounted for in the Barclays Bank Group, the income

statement charge is accounted for across all the participating employers.

From 1 July 2025, current service cost and obligation attributable to Barclays Bank UK PLC are not included within the results

of  Barclays Bank Group.

Balance sheet reconciliation
	2025		2024
	Barclays Bank<br><br>Group Total	Of which relates to<br><br>Barclays Bank<br><br>Section of the<br><br>UKRF	Barclays Bank<br><br>Group Total	Of which relates to<br><br>UKRF
	£m	£m	£m	£m
Benefit obligation at beginning of the year	(19,524)	(18,729)	(21,420)	(20,618)
Current service cost	(135)	(120)	(168)	(155)
Interest costs on scheme liabilities	(1,005)	(975)	(930)	(901)
Curtailments or settlements1	697	697	—	—
Remeasurement gain - financial	541	546	1,804	1,797
Remeasurement (loss)/gain - demographic	(59)	(47)	12	13
Remeasurement loss - experience	(197)	(203)	(55)	(54)
Employee contributions	(5)	—	(6)	—
Benefits paid	1,197	1,158	1,226	1,189
Exchange and other movements	15	(1)	13	—
Benefit obligation at end of the year	(18,475)	(17,674)	(19,524)	(18,729)
Fair value of scheme assets at beginning of the year	22,623	21,928	24,914	24,234
Interest income on scheme assets	1,168	1,143	1,087	1,062
Employer contribution	29	16	37	22
Settlements1	(750)	(750)	—	—
Remeasurement - return on scheme assets less than<br><br>discount rate	(299)	(310)	(2,192)	(2,184)
Employee contributions	5	—	6	—
Benefits paid	(1,189)	(1,158)	(1,221)	(1,189)
Exchange and other movements	(29)	(14)	(8)	(17)
Fair value of scheme assets at end of the year	21,558	20,855	22,623	21,928
Net surplus	3,083	3,181	3,099	3,199
Retirement benefit assets	3,240	3,181	3,263	3,199
Retirement benefit liabilities	(157)	—	(164)	—
Net retirement benefit assets	3,083	3,181	3,099	3,199

Note

1  Settlement loss arising from allocation of a portion of the UKRF assets and liabilities to the Barclays UK Section of the UKRF on account of

sectionalisation effective from 1 July 2025, for which Barclays Bank UK PLC are now responsible for.

Included within the Barclays Bank Group’s benefit obligation is £703m (2024: £695m) relating to overseas pensions and

£98m (2024: £99m) relating to other post-employment benefits.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	259

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

Barclays previously considered the potential implications for the UKRF of the ruling and appeal in Virgin Media v NTL

Pension Trustees II Ltd. This activity did not identify any relevant amendments to the UKRF (of the nature of that found to

have been void in the Virgin Media case) that were not subject to actuarial confirmation. Since this activity was completed

the Pension Schemes Bill 2025 (the Bill) has been published, which once in force will enable trustees to obtain retrospective

actuarial confirmation in certain circumstances. Progress of the Bill continues to be tracked by Barclays. The position

remains that no material additional benefit obligation is expected.

Breakdown of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF benefit obligation	2025	2024
	Barclays Bank<br><br>Section	UKRF Total
	£m	£m
Active members	981	1,699
Deferred members (Afterwork)	1,828	1,716
Deferred members (Non-Afterwork)	3,786	4,269
Pensioners and Dependents	11,079	11,045
Total Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF benefit obligation at end of the year	17,674	18,729

As at 31 December 2025, the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF’s scheme assets were in surplus versus IAS 19 obligations

by £3,181m (2024 whole UKRF: £3,199m).

The weighted average duration of the benefit payments reflected in the defined benefit obligation for the Barclays Bank

Section of the UKRF is 11 years (2024: 11 years). The Barclays Bank Section's expected benefits promised to date are

projected to be paid out for in excess of 50 years, although 35% of the benefits are expected to be paid in the next 10 years;

34% in years 11 to 20 and 20% in years 21 to 30. The remainder of the benefits are expected to be paid beyond 30 years.

Of the £1,158m (2024: £1,189m) benefits paid out, £145m (2024: £165m) related to transfers out.

Where a scheme’s assets exceed its obligation, an asset is recognised to the extent that it does not exceed the present value

of future contribution holidays or if the Group has an unconditional right to a refund of this asset at the end of the life of the

plan (the asset ceiling). In the case of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF the asset ceiling is not applied as, in certain

specified circumstances such as wind-up, the Barclays Bank Group expects to be able to recover any surplus or reduce

contributions. Similarly, a liability in respect of future minimum funding requirements is not recognised. The Trustee does

not have a substantive right to augment benefits, nor do they have the right to wind-up the plan except in the dissolution of

Barclays Bank PLC or termination of contributions by Barclays Bank PLC. The application of the asset ceiling to other plans

and recognition of additional liabilities in respect of future minimum funding requirements are considered on an individual

plan basis.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or estimation include:

Estimates
Valuation of defined benefit scheme obligations are dependent on a number of assumptions, the most critical being discount rates, price inflation,<br><br>and life expectancy.

These estimates are considered to have a significant risk of resulting in a material adjustment to the carrying amount of

defined benefit obligations within the next financial year.

Below is a summary of the main financial and demographic assumptions adopted for the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF.

Key financial assumptions	2025	2024
	Barclays Bank<br><br>Section	Total UKRF
	% p.a.	% p.a.
Discount rate	5.46	5.44
Inflation rate (RPI)	2.92	3.32

The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF discount rate assumption for 2025 was based on a standard WTW RATE Link model.

The RPI inflation assumption for 2025 was set by reference to the Bank of England’s implied inflation curve. The inflation

assumption incorporates a deduction of 20 basis points as an allowance for an inflation risk premium. The methodology

used to derive the discount rate and inflation assumptions is consistent with that used at the prior year end.

The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF post-retirement mortality assumptions are based on best estimates derived from an

analysis in 2022 of the UKRF’s own post-retirement mortality experience and taking account of recent evidence from

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	260

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

published mortality surveys. An allowance has been made for future mortality improvements based on the 2024 core

projection model published by the Continuous Mortality Investigation Bureau subject to a long-term trend of 1.10% per

annum in future improvements (2024: 1.25% per annum). The table below shows how the assumed life expectancy, for

members of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF (2024: whole UKRF), has changed since last year:

Assumed life expectancy1	2025	2024
Life expectancy at 60 for current pensioners (years)
– Males	26.6	26.5
– Females	29.3	29.4
Life expectancy at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40 (years)
– Males	28.0	28.0
– Females	30.6	30.8

Note:

1  The life expectancies disclosed are in respect of a population of the membership that represents c60% of the Defined Benefit Obligation of the

Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF (excluding the Afterwork section which has no post-retirement mortality risk) with the remaining members

having life expectancy at age 60 of between 26.4 years and 29.3 years.

Approximately, 70% of the longevity risk for current pensioners has been reinsured and the transactions will provide income

to the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF if pensions are paid out for longer than expected. The contracts form part of the

investment portfolio.

Sensitivity analysis on actuarial assumptions

The sensitivity analysis has been calculated by valuing the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF liabilities using the amended

assumptions shown in the table below and keeping the remaining assumptions the same as disclosed in the table above,

except in the case of the inflation sensitivity where other assumptions that depend on assumed inflation have also been

amended correspondingly. The difference between the recalculated liability figure and that stated in the balance sheet

reconciliation table above is the figure shown. The selection of these movements to illustrate the sensitivity of the defined

benefit obligation to key assumptions should not be interpreted as the Barclays Bank Group expressing any specific view of

the probability of such movements happening.

Change in key assumptions for the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF (2024: whole UKRF)
	2025	2024
	(Decrease)/Increase in<br><br>defined benefit<br><br>obligation	(Decrease)/Increase in<br><br>defined benefit<br><br>obligation
	£bn	£bn
Discount rate
0.5% p.a. increase	(0.9)	(1.0)
0.25% p.a. increase	(0.4)	(0.5)
0.25% p.a. decrease	0.5	0.5
0.5% p.a. decrease	1.0	1.1
Assumed RPI
0.5% p.a. increase	0.7	0.7
0.25% p.a. increase	0.3	0.3
0.25% p.a. decrease	(0.3)	(0.4)
0.5% p.a. decrease	(0.6)	(0.7)
Life expectancy at 60
One year increase	0.5	0.5
One year decrease	(0.5)	(0.5)

Assets

A long-term investment strategy has been set for both the Section of the UKRF, with its asset allocation comprising a

mixture of gilts, bonds, property and other appropriate assets. This strategy recognises that different asset classes are likely

to produce different long-term returns and some asset classes may be more volatile than others. The long-term investment

strategy ensures, among other aims, that investments are adequately diversified.

The value of the assets of the schemes and their percentage in relation to total scheme assets were as follows:

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	261

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

Analysis of scheme assets
	Barclays Bank Group Total				Of which relates to Barclays Bank Section of the<br><br>UKRF
	Quoted1	Unquoted1,2	Value	% of total<br><br>fair value<br><br>of<br><br>scheme<br><br>assets	Quoted1	Unquoted1,2	Value	% of total<br><br>fair value<br><br>of<br><br>scheme<br><br>assets
	£m	£m	£m	%	£m	£m	£m	%
As at 31 December 2025
Bonds - fixed government	1,926	4	1,930	9.0	1,721	4	1,725	8.3
Bonds - index-linked government	7,765	—	7,765	36.0	7,751	—	7,751	37.2
Bonds - corporate and other3	1,676	4,729	6,405	29.7	1,471	4,729	6,200	29.7
Equities	128	—	128	0.6	—	—	—	—
Private equities	—	1,859	1,859	8.6	—	1,859	1,859	8.9
Property	22	1,392	1,414	6.6	—	1,392	1,392	6.7
Infrastructure	—	414	414	1.9	—	413	413	2.0
Hedge funds	13	1,635	1,648	7.6	—	1,635	1,635	7.8
Derivatives	1	(1,478)	(1,477)	(6.9)	—	(1,478)	(1,478)	(7.1)
Longevity reinsurance contracts	—	(103)	(103)	(0.5)	—	(103)	(103)	(0.5)
Cash and liquid assets4	2,292	(830)	1,462	6.8	2,288	(830)	1,458	7.0
Mixed investment funds	—	—	—	—	—	—	—	—
Other	15	98	113	0.6	—	3	3	—
Fair value of scheme assets5	13,838	7,720	21,558	100.0	13,231	7,624	20,855	100.0
As at 31 December 2024
Bonds - fixed government	1,546	—	1,546	6.8	1,306	—	1,306	6.0
Bonds - index-linked government	8,234	—	8,234	36.4	8,214	—	8,214	37.5
Bonds - corporate and other	5,604	717	6,321	27.9	5,395	717	6,112	27.9
Equities	121	—	121	0.5	—	—	—	—
Private equities	—	2,134	2,134	9.4	—	2,134	2,134	9.7
Property	19	1,238	1,257	5.6	—	1,238	1,238	5.6
Infrastructure	—	1,388	1,388	6.1	—	1,388	1,388	6.3
Hedge funds	9	1,390	1,399	6.2	—	1,390	1,390	6.3
Derivatives	(7)	(1,799)	(1,806)	(8.0)	(7)	(1,799)	(1,806)	(8.2)
Longevity reinsurance contracts	—	(117)	(117)	(0.5)	—	(117)	(117)	(0.5)
Cash and liquid assets4	(454)	2,529	2,075	9.2	(464)	2,529	2,065	9.4
Mixed Investment funds	8	—	8	—	—	—	—	—
Other	7	56	63	0.4	—	4	4	—
Fair value of scheme assets5	15,087	7,536	22,623	100.0	14,444	7,484	21,928	100.0

Notes:

1.During the year ended 31 December 2025, there were c£3bn assets re-classified from unquoted to quoted under cash and liquid assets and

c£4bn assets reclassified from quoted to unquoted for Bonds - corporate and other (year ended 31 December 2024: there were no material re-

classifications). These re-classifications reflect enhancement to the Bank’s levelling policy, including the use of additional data in the active

market assessment of issued debt.

2.Valuation of unquoted assets is provided by the underlying managers or qualified independent valuers. The valuation for some of the unquoted

assets, in particular private equities, is based on valuations as at 30 September 2025 adjusted by cash flows, these being the latest available

valuations as at the point of publication. All valuations are determined in accordance with relevant industry guidance. Barclays Bank Group does

not believe these valuations will differ materially from the fair value, in the context of the overall Barclays Bank Section asset size.

3.During the year ended 31 December 2025, there were c£740m of infrastructure loan assets reclassified to Bonds - corporate and other (2024

classification : Infrastructure).

4.Cash and liquid assets for the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF consist of £186m (2024: £484m) of cash including receivables/payables,

£2,102m (2024: £2,529m) of pooled cash funds and £(830)m (2024: £(948)m) of repurchase agreements.

5.Included within the fair value of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF scheme assets was nil (2024: nil) relating to shares in Barclays PLC and nil

(2024: nil) relating to bonds issued by Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC. The UKRF also invests in pooled investment vehicles which may hold

shares or debt issued by Barclays PLC.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	262

Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

At 31 December 2025, 39% of the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF assets were invested in liability-driven investment

strategies; primarily UK gilts as well as interest rate and inflation swaps. These swaps are used to better match the assets to

its liabilities. The swaps are used to reduce the scheme’s inflation and duration risks against its liabilities.

The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF employs derivative instruments, where appropriate, to match assets more closely to

liabilities, or to achieve a desired exposure or return. The value of assets shown reflects the assets held by the Barclays Bank

Section, with any derivative holdings reflected on a fair value basis. The Trustee also uses repurchase agreements and

reverse repurchase agreements to achieve the liability hedging objective.

The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF has a comprehensive and robust liquidity framework in place. The aim of the liquidity

framework is to ensure that benefit payments and other liquidity outflows are paid in due course, sufficient liquidity and

collateral is maintained to achieve strategic allocation targets and that all liquidity outflows/collateral needs are covered

without forced sale or strategic asset allocation changes.

The Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF holds two longevity reinsurance contracts covering 70% of the current pensioner

liabilities. The contracts provide income to the Barclays Bank Section if pensions are paid out for longer than expected. At

31 December 2025, the combined value of the contracts was £(103)m (2024: £(117)m). The negative value reflects the

estimated impact of changes in the reinsurance market, demographic assumptions and risk premia since the contracts were

entered into.

For information on the UKRF Trustee’s approach to Responsible Investment and Climate Risk, in the context of managing the

UKRF, please refer to the UKRF Trustee website at https://epa.towerswatson.com/accounts/barclays/public/barclays-bank-

responsible-investment-policy/.

Funding valuation

The UKRF annual funding update as at 30 September 2024 showed a funding surplus of £1.75bn. The 30 September 2025

funding update is not available at the date of this report, as the triennial funding valuation for the Barclays Bank Section of

the UKRF is due to be completed in 2026 with an effective date of 30 September 2025.

The main differences between the funding and accounting assumptions are a different approach to setting the discount rate

and a more conservative life expectancy assumption for funding.

As part of the 2022 triennial funding valuation, the Trustee and Barclays Bank PLC agreed an annual adequacy test on a

basis more prudent than the IAS 19 or funding bases. Should the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF be sufficiently funded

on this basis, the regular employer contributions to the Barclays Bank Section to fund future Afterwork accrual will not be

required in the following calendar year. The test will be reviewed at the 2025 triennial valuation. The test was passed in

September, so no regular employer contributions are required for 2026.

Other support measure agreed

Collateral – Barclays Bank PLC has entered into an agreement with the Trustee of the UKRF to provide collateral to cover at

least 100% of any funding deficit with an overall cap of £8.4bn. The collateral pool is currently zero reflecting the surplus

funding position. The arrangement provides the Barclays Bank Section of the UKRF with dedicated access to the pool of

assets in the event of Barclays Bank PLC not paying any required deficit reduction contribution or in the event of Barclays

Bank PLC’s insolvency.

Contributions

There were nil (2024: nil) Section 75 contributions included within the Barclays Bank Group’s contributions paid.

The Barclays Bank Group’s expected contribution to the Barclays Bank Section in respect of defined benefits in 2026 is

£11m.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	263

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

The section presents information on the Barclays Bank Group’s investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates

and its interests in structured entities. Detail is also given on securitisation transactions the Barclays Bank Group has entered

into and arrangements that are held off-balance sheet.

31Principal subsidiaries

The significant judgements used in applying this policy are set out below.

Accounting for investment in subsidiaries

In the individual financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC, investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less impairment.

Investments in subsidiaries, the majority of which are engaged in banking related activities, are recorded on the balance

sheet at historical cost less any impairment. At 31 December 2025 the historical cost of investments in subsidiaries was

£22,996m (2024: £23,009m), and impairment allowances recognised against these investments totalled £2,338m (2024:

£2,262m). The decrease in the balance sheet value of £89m in the year was driven by an increase in impairment of £90m,

principally due to a £65m impairment in Barclays Investment Solutions Ltd. The Cost of Investment in subsidiaries increased

by £1m as a result of capital injections into subsidiaries being offset by the transfer of Barclays Capital Asia Limited to

Barclays International Holdings Limited. Further details can be found in Note 37.

At the end of each reporting period an impairment review is undertaken in respect of investments in the ordinary shares of

subsidiaries. Impairment is indicated where the investment exceeds the recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is

calculated as a value in use (VIU) which is derived from the present value of future cash flows expected to be received from

the investment. The VIU calculations use forecast profits based on financial budgets approved by management, covering a

five-year period as an approximation of future cash flows discounted using a discount rate appropriate to the subsidiary

being tested. A terminal growth rate is then applied to the cash flows thereafter, which is based upon expectations of future

inflation rates.

The 2025 review did not result in any impairment or reversal of impairment. The 2024 review resulted in the reversal of £1bn

of impairment for Barclays Bank Ireland PLC due to an improved performance expectation, the impairment had originally

been identified as part of the 2022 review.

Principal subsidiaries of the Barclays Bank Group are set out below. This includes those subsidiaries that are most significant

in the context of the Barclays Bank Group’s business, results or financial position. The principal subsidiaries are held directly

or indirectly via intermediate holding companies within the Barclays Bank Group. There were no significant changes in

ownership interests in these subsidiaries during the year, and the Barclays Bank Group did not lose control of any of these

subsidiaries. There has been no material percentage change in the Barclays Bank Group’s shareholding for its main

subsidiaries since 2024.

Company Name	Principal place of<br><br>business or<br><br>incorporation	Nature of business	Percentage of<br><br>voting rights held	Non-controlling<br><br>interests -<br><br>proportion of<br><br>ownership<br><br>interests	Non-controlling<br><br>interests -<br><br>proportion of<br><br>voting interests
			%	%	%
Barclays Bank Delaware	United States	Credit card issuer	100	—	—
Barclays Bank Ireland PLC	Ireland	Banking	100	—	—
Barclays Capital Inc.	United States	Securities dealing	100	—	—
Barclays Capital Securities Limited	United Kingdom	Securities dealing	100	—	—
Barclays Securities Japan Limited	Japan	Securities dealing	100	—	—
Barclays US LLC	United States	Holding company	100	—	—

The country of registration or incorporation is also the principal area of operation of each of the above subsidiaries.

Ownership interests are in some cases different to voting interests due to the existence of non-voting equity interests, such

as preference shares.

Significant judgements and assumptions used to determine the scope of the consolidation

Determining whether the Barclays Bank Group has control of an entity is generally straightforward based on ownership of

the majority of the voting capital. However, in certain instances, this determination will involve significant judgement,

particularly in the case of structured entities where voting rights are often not the determining factor in decisions over the

relevant activities. This judgement will involve assessing the purpose and design of the entity. It will also often be necessary

to consider whether the Barclays Bank Group, or another involved party with power over the relevant activities, is acting as a

principal in its own right or as an agent on behalf of others.

There is also often considerable judgement involved in the ongoing assessment of control over structured entities. In this

regard, where market conditions have deteriorated such that the other investors’ exposures to the structure’s variable

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	264

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

returns have been substantively eliminated, the Barclays Bank Group may conclude that the managers of the structured

entity are acting as its agent and therefore will consolidate the structured entity.

An interest in equity voting rights exceeding 50% would typically indicate that the Barclays Bank Group has control of an

entity. Until 25th October 2024 Palomino Limited was excluded from consolidation despite the Group holding 100% of the

voting rights as it was managed by an external counter-party and the Group was not exposed to its variable returns.

Following the termination of the management agreement, as from 26th October 2024 the entity is now fully consolidated.

Significant restrictions

As is typical for a group of its size and international scope, there are restrictions on the ability of the Barclays Bank Group to

obtain distributions of capital, access the assets or repay the liabilities of certain members of the Barclays Bank Group due to

the statutory, regulatory and contractual requirements of its subsidiaries and due to the protective rights of non-controlling

interests. These are considered below.

Regulatory requirements

The Barclays Bank Group’s principal subsidiary companies have assets and liabilities before intercompany eliminations of

£582bn (2024: £515bn) and £559bn (2024: £490bn) respectively. Certain classes of these assets and liabilities are subject to

prudential regulation and regulatory capital requirements in the countries in which the subsidiaries are regulated. These

prudential and regulatory capital requirements require entities to maintain minimum capital levels which cannot be returned

to the parent company, Barclays Bank PLC, on a going concern basis.

In order to meet capital requirements, subsidiaries may issue certain equity accounted and debt accounted financial

instruments such as Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and other forms of subordinated liabilities. Refer to Note 25 and

Note 26 for particulars of these instruments. These instruments may be subject to cancellation clauses or preference share

restrictions that would limit the ability of the entity to repatriate the capital on a timely basis.

Liquidity requirements

Regulated subsidiaries of the Barclays Bank Group are required to meet PRA or local regulatory requirements pertaining to

liquidity. These regulated subsidiaries include Barclays Capital Securities Limited (which is regulated for liquidity matters on

a combined basis with Barclays Bank PLC under a Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group (DoLSub) arrangement), Barclays Bank

Ireland PLC, Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Bank Delaware Inc. See page 134 for further details of liquidity requirements.

Statutory requirements

The Barclays Bank Group’s subsidiaries are subject to statutory requirements not to make distributions of capital and

unrealised profits and generally to maintain solvency. These requirements restrict the ability of subsidiaries to make

remittances of dividends to Barclays Bank PLC, the parent, except in the event of a legal capital reduction or liquidation. In

most cases the regulatory restrictions referred to above exceed the statutory restrictions.

Asset encumbrance

The Barclays Bank Group uses its financial assets to raise finance in the form of securitisations and through the liquidity

schemes of central banks, as well as to provide security to the UK Retirement Fund. Once encumbered, the assets are not

available for transfer around the Barclays Bank Group. The assets typically affected are disclosed in Note 35.

Other restrictions

The Barclays Bank Group is required to maintain cash balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these

amounted to £2,775m (2024: £2,317m).

32Structured entities

A structured entity is an entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the

entity. An example is when voting rights may relate to administrative tasks only, with the relevant activities of the entity

being directed by means of contractual arrangements. Structured entities are generally created to achieve a narrow and

well-defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

Depending on the Barclays Bank Group’s power over the activities of the entity and its exposure to and ability to influence its

own returns, it may consolidate the entity. In other cases, it may sponsor or have exposure to such an entity but not

consolidate it.

Consolidated structured entities

The Barclays Bank Group has contractual arrangements which may require it to provide financial support to the following

types of consolidated structured entities:

▪Securitisation vehicles: The Barclays Bank Group uses securitisation as a source of financing and a means of risk

transfer. Where entities are controlled by the Barclays Bank Group, they are consolidated. Refer to Note 34 for further

detail.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	265

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

▪Commercial paper (CP) conduits: These entities issue CP and use the proceeds to lend to clients as part of the Barclays

Bank Group's multi-seller conduit programme. The Barclays Bank Group has provided £21.0bn (2024: £23.9bn) in

contractual liquidity facilities to the CP conduits that the Barclays Bank Group consolidates. These amounts represent

the maximum the conduits can lend externally. The amounts of CP conduit lending (drawn and undrawn) to

unconsolidated structured entities can be seen in 'Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities' under multi-

seller conduit programme in the 'Nature of interest' table.

▪Tender Option Bond (TOB) trusts: During 2025, the Barclays Bank Group provided undrawn liquidity facilities of £4.0bn

(2024: £4.0bn) to consolidated TOB trusts. These trusts invest in fixed income instruments issued by state, local or

other municipalities in the United States, funded by long-term senior floating-rate notes and junior residual securities.

Unconsolidated structured entities

The term ‘unconsolidated structured entities’ refers to structured entities not controlled by the Barclays Bank Group, and are

established either by Barclays Bank Group or a third party. An interest in a structured entity is any form of contractual or

non-contractual involvement which creates variability in returns arising from the performance of the entity for the Barclays

Bank Group. Such interests include holdings of debt or equity securities, derivatives that transfer financial risks from the

entity to the Barclays Bank Group, lending, loan commitments, financial guarantees and investment management

agreements.

The Barclays Bank Group enters into transactions with unconsolidated structured entities in the normal course of business

to facilitate customer transactions, to provide risk management services and for specific investment opportunities. This is

predominantly within the Barclays Investment Bank business. Structured entities may take the form of funds, trusts,

securitisation vehicles, and private investment companies. The largest transactions for Barclays Bank Group include loans

and derivatives with hedge fund structures and special purpose entities, multi-seller conduit lending, holding notes issued by

securitisation vehicles and facilitating customer requirements through funds.

The nature and extent of the Barclays Bank Group’s interests in structured entities is summarised below:

Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities
	Secured<br><br>financing	Short-term<br><br>traded<br><br>interests	Traded<br><br>derivatives	Other<br><br>interests	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Assets
Trading portfolio assets	—	31,386	—	—	31,386
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	79,052	—	—	629	79,681
Derivative financial instruments	—	—	6,257	—	6,257
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	—	—	—	3,655	3,655
Loans and advances at amortised cost	—	—	—	46,705	46,705
Debt securities at amortised cost	—	—	—	14,069	14,069
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending	7,049	—	—	—	7,049
Other assets	—	—	—	—	—
Total assets	86,101	31,386	6,257	65,058	188,802
Liabilities
Derivative financial instruments	—	—	6,451	—	6,451
As at 31 December 2024
Assets
Trading portfolio assets	—	23,941	—	—	23,941
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	87,546	—	—	1,268	88,814
Derivative financial instruments	—	—	6,540	—	6,540
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	—	—	—	4,852	4,852
Loans and advances at amortised cost	—	—	—	46,554	46,554
Debt securities at amortised cost	—	—	—	15,438	15,438
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending	3,145	—	—	—	3,145
Other assets	—	—	—	—	—
Total assets	90,691	23,941	6,540	68,112	189,284
Liabilities
Derivative financial instruments	—	—	6,978	—	6,978

Secured financing arrangements, short-term traded interests and traded derivatives are typically managed under Market risk

management policies described in the Market risk management section which includes an indication of the change of risk

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	266

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

measures compared to last year. For this reason, the total assets of these entities are not considered meaningful for the

purposes of understanding the related risks and so have not been presented. Other interests include conduits and lending

where the interest is driven by normal customer demand. As at 31 December 2025, the Barclays Bank Group entered into

transactions with approximately 8,000 (2024: 5,000) structured entities.

Secured financing

The Barclays Bank Group routinely enters into reverse repurchase contracts, margin lending, stock borrowing and similar

arrangements on normal commercial terms where the counterparty to the arrangement is a structured entity. Due to the

nature of these arrangements, especially the transfer of collateral and ongoing margining, the Barclays Bank Group is able to

manage its variable exposure to the performance of the structured entity counterparty. The counterparties included in

secured financing mainly include hedge fund limited structures, investment companies and special purpose entities.

Short-term traded interests

As part of its market making activities, the Barclays Bank Group buys and sells interests in structured vehicles, which are

predominantly debt securities issued by asset securitisation vehicles. Such interests are typically held individually or as part

of a larger portfolio for no more than 90 days. In such cases, the Barclays Bank Group typically has no other involvement

with the structured entity other than the securities it holds as part of trading activities and its maximum exposure to loss is

restricted to the carrying value of the asset.

Traded derivatives

The Barclays Bank Group enters into a variety of derivative contracts with structured entities which reference market risk

variables such as interest rates, equities, foreign exchange rates and credit indices among other things. The main derivative

types that are considered interests in structured entities include equity options, index-based and entity specific credit default

swaps, and total return swaps. Interest rate swaps and foreign exchange derivatives that are not complex and which expose

the Barclays Bank Group to insignificant credit risk by being senior in the payment waterfall of a securitisation and

derivatives that are determined to introduce risk or variability to a structured entity are not considered to be an interest in an

entity and have been excluded from the disclosures.

A description of the types of derivatives and the risk management practices are detailed in Note 13. The risk of loss may be

mitigated through ongoing margining requirements as well as a right to cash flows from the structured entity which are

senior in the payment waterfall. Such margining requirements are consistent with market practice for many derivative

arrangements and in line with the Barclays Bank Group’s normal credit policies.

Derivative transactions require the counterparty to provide cash or other collateral under margining agreements to mitigate

counterparty credit risk. The Barclays Bank Group is mainly exposed to settlement risk on these derivatives which is

mitigated through daily margining. Total notional contract amounts were £641,837m (2024: £712,793m).

Except for credit default swaps where the maximum exposure to loss is the swap notional amount, it is not possible to

estimate the maximum exposure to loss in respect of derivative positions as the fair value of derivatives is subject to changes

in market rates of interest, exchange rates and credit indices which by their nature are uncertain. In addition, the Barclays

Bank Group’s losses would be subject to mitigating action under its traded market risk and credit risk policies that require

the counterparty to provide collateral in cash or other assets in most cases.

Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities

The Barclays Bank Group’s interests in structured entities not held for the purposes of short-term trading activities are set

out below, summarised by the nature of the interest and limited to significant categories, based on maximum exposure to

loss.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	267

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

Nature of interest
	Multi-seller<br><br>conduit<br><br>programme	Lending	Other	Total	Of which:<br><br>Barclays<br><br>Bank Group<br><br>owned, not<br><br>consolidated<br><br>entities1
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	—	—	629	629	—
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	—	2,367	1,288	3,655	—
Loans and advances at amortised cost	9,697	37,008	—	46,705	—
Debt securities at amortised cost	—	—	14,069	14,069	—
Other assets	—	—	—	—	—
Total on-balance sheet exposures	9,697	39,375	15,986	65,058	—
Total off-balance sheet notional amounts	11,326	24,866	—	36,192	—
Maximum exposure to loss	21,023	64,241	15,986	101,250	—
Total assets of the entity	32,527	193,873	65,897	292,297	—
As at 31 December 2024
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	—	—	1,268	1,268	—
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	—	3,206	1,646	4,852	—
Loans and advances at amortised cost	11,103	35,451	—	46,554	—
Debt securities at amortised cost	—	—	15,438	15,438	—
Other assets	—	—	—	—	—
Total on-balance sheet exposures	11,103	38,657	18,352	68,112	—
Total off-balance sheet notional amounts	11,530	25,733	—	37,263	—
Maximum exposure to loss	22,633	64,390	18,352	105,375	—
Total assets of the entity	41,431	199,000	52,369	292,800	—

Note

1    Comprises of Barclays Bank Group owned, not consolidated structured entities per IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements. Refer to Note 31

Principal subsidiaries for more details on consolidation.

Maximum exposure to loss

Unless specified otherwise below, the Barclays Bank Group’s maximum exposure to loss is the total of its on-balance sheet

positions and its off-balance sheet arrangements, being loan commitments and financial guarantees. Exposure to loss is

mitigated through collateral, financial guarantees, the availability of netting and credit protection held.

Multi-seller conduit programme

The Barclays Bank Group's multi-seller conduit programme engages in providing financing to various clients and holds

whole or partial interests in pools of receivables or similar obligations. These instruments are protected from loss through

over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduit entity. The Barclays Bank

Group’s off-balance sheet exposure included in the table above represents liquidity facilities that are provided to the conduit

for the benefit of the holders of the commercial paper issued by the conduit and will only be drawn where the conduit is

unable to access the commercial paper market. If these liquidity facilities are drawn, the Barclays Bank Group is protected

from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduit.

Lending

The portfolio includes lending provided by the Barclays Bank Group to unconsolidated structured entities in the normal

course of its lending business to earn income in the form of interest and lending fees and includes loans to structured

entities that are generally collateralised by property, equipment or other assets. All loans are subject to the Barclays Bank

Group’s credit sanctioning process. Collateral arrangements are specific to the circumstances of each loan with additional

guarantees and collateral sought from the sponsor of the structured entity for certain arrangements. During the year, the

Barclays Bank Group incurred immaterial impairment against such facilities.

Other

This includes fair value loans with structured entities where the market risk is materially hedged with corresponding

derivative contracts, interests in debt securities issued by securitisation vehicles and drawn and undrawn loan facilities to

these entities. In addition, 'Other' includes investment funds with interests restricted to management fees based on the

performance of the fund and trusts held on behalf of beneficiaries with interests restricted to unpaid fees.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	268

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities

The Barclays Bank Group is considered to sponsor another entity if; it had a key role in establishing that entity, it transferred

assets to the entity, the Barclays name appears in the name of the entity or it provides guarantees on the entity’s

performance. As at 31 December 2025, assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities were £1,060m

(2024: £890m).

33Investments in associates and joint ventures

There are no individually significant investments in joint ventures or associates held by Barclays Bank Group.

	2025			2024
	Associates	Joint ventures	Total	Associates	Joint ventures	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Equity accounted (Group)	14	—	14	14	—	14			2025			2024
---	---	---	---	---	---	---
	Associates	Joint ventures	Total	Associates	Joint ventures	Total
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Equity accounted (Parent)	12	—	12	12	—	12

Summarised financial information for the Barclays Bank Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out

below. The amounts shown are the Barclays Bank Group’s share of the net income of the investees for the year ended 31

December 2025, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates

not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.

	Associates			Joint ventures
	2025	2024	2023	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
(Loss)/Profit from continuing operations	—	—	(4)	—	—	—
Other comprehensive income	—	—	—	—	—	—
Total comprehensive (loss)/income from<br><br>continuing operations	—	—	(4)	—	—	—
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	269
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

34Securitisations

Accounting for securitisations

The Barclays Bank Group uses securitisations as a source of finance and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally

result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and

the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the

extent of the Barclays Bank Group’s continuing involvement in those assets or lead to derecognition of the assets and the

separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full

derecognition only occurs when the Barclays Bank Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the

financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the

cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards

of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk.

In the course of its normal banking activities, the Barclays Bank Group transfers financial assets, either where legal rights to

the cash flows from the asset are passed to the counterparty or beneficially, where the Barclays Bank Group retains the

rights to the cash flows but assumes a responsibility to transfer them to the counterparty. Depending on the nature of the

transaction, this may result in derecognition of the assets in their entirety, partial derecognition or no derecognition of the

assets subject to the transfer.

A summary of the main transactions, and the assets and liabilities and the financial risks arising from these transactions, is

set out below:

Transfers of financial assets that do not result in derecognition

Securitisations

The Barclays Bank Group was party to securitisation transactions involving its credit card balances, consumer and mortgage

loans.

In these transactions, the assets, interests in the assets, or beneficial interests in the cash flows arising from the assets, are

transferred to a special purpose entity, which then issues interest bearing debt securities to third party investors.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and

the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction. Partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of

the Barclays Bank Group’s continuing involvement in those assets can also occur or derecognition of the assets and the

separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer.

The following table shows the carrying amount of securitised assets that have not resulted in full derecognition, together

with the associated liabilities, for each category of asset on the balance sheet:

	2025				2024
	Assets		Liabilities		Assets		Liabilities
	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Bank Group
Loans and advances at amortised cost
Credit cards, unsecured loans and other retail<br><br>lending	5,879	5,935	(929)	(933)	6,575	7,158	(1,575)	(1,579)
Financial assets at FVTPL
Mortgage Loans	1,523	1,523	—	—	576	576	—	—
Assets included in disposal groups classified<br><br>as held for sale
Personal Loans	—	—	—	—	846	826	—	—
Total	7,402	7,458	(929)	(933)	7,997	8,560	(1,575)	(1,579)

Balances included within loans and advances at amortised cost represent securitisations where substantially all the risks and

rewards of the assets have been retained by the Barclays Bank Group and balances included within Financial assets at FVTPL

and Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale represent securitisations where the risks and rewards are

neither substantially transferred nor retained.

The relationship between the transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash

flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes, although

the contractual terms of their notes may be different to the maturity and interest of the transferred assets.

If the Barclays Bank Group transfers a financial asset but does not transfer or retain substantially all the risk and rewards of

the asset and retains control over it, the transferred assets are recognised to the extent of the Barclays Bank Group's

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	270

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

continuing involvement. Total Financial assets of £21,932m (2024: £11,951m) were originally transferred in this manner

and the carrying value of the assets representing continued involvement is included in the table above.

For transfers of assets in relation to repurchase agreements, see Note 35.

Continuing involvement in financial assets that have been derecognised

In some cases, the Barclays Bank Group may have transferred a financial asset in its entirety but may have continuing

involvement in it. This arises in asset securitisations where loans and asset backed securities were derecognised as a result

of the Barclays Bank Group’s involvement with asset backed securities, residential mortgage backed securities and

commercial mortgage backed securities. Continuing involvement largely arises from providing financing into these

structures in the form of retained notes, which do not bear first losses.

The table below shows the potential financial implications of such continuing involvement:

	Continuing involvement1			Gain from continuing involvement
	Carrying<br><br>amount	Fair value	Maximum<br><br>exposure to<br><br>loss2	For the year<br><br>ended	Cumulative to<br><br>31 December
Type of transfer	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
2025
Asset backed securities	67	67	141	3	5
Residential mortgage backed securities	2,454	2,454	2,454	99	331
Commercial mortgage backed securities	360	328	360	5	26
Total	2,881	2,849	2,955	107	362
2024
Asset backed securities	53	53	130	1	1
Residential mortgage backed securities	3,439	3,437	3,439	155	231
Commercial mortgage backed securities	377	334	377	3	21
Total	3,869	3,824	3,946	159	253

Notes

1  Assets which represent the Barclays Bank Group’s continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in Loans and advances at amortised

cost and Debt securities at FVTPL.

2  Maximum exposure to loss includes notional value of undrawn loan commitment, if any.

35Assets pledged, collateral received and assets transferred

Assets are pledged or transferred as collateral to secure liabilities under repurchase agreements, securitisations and stock

lending agreements or as security deposits relating to derivatives. Assets transferred are non-cash assets transferred to a

third party that do not qualify for derecognition from the Barclays Bank Group’s balance sheet, for example because the

Barclays Bank Group retains substantially all the exposure to those assets under an agreement to repurchase them in the

future for a fixed price.

Where non-cash assets are pledged or transferred as collateral for cash received, the asset continues to be recognised in full,

and a related liability is also recognised on the balance sheet. Where non-cash assets are pledged or transferred as collateral

in an exchange for non-cash assets, the transferred asset continues to be recognised in full, and there is no associated

liability as the non-cash collateral received is not recognised on the balance sheet. The Barclays Bank Group is unable to use,

sell or pledge the transferred assets for the duration of the transaction and remains exposed to interest rate risk and credit

risk on these pledged assets. Unless stated, the counterparty's recourse is not limited to the transferred assets.

Collateralised transactions, such as securities lending and borrowing, repurchase and derivative transactions are conducted

in accordance with standard terms which are customary in the market.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	271

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

The following table summarises the nature and carrying amount of the assets pledged as security:

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Cash collateral	75,695	72,415
Loans and advances at amortised cost	22,398	41,205
Trading portfolio assets	114,852	107,249
Financial assets at fair value through the income statement	5,653	5,729
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income	15,019	20,420
Assets pledged	233,617	247,018

The following table summarises the transferred financial assets and the associated liabilities. The transferred assets

represent the gross carrying value of the assets pledged and the associated liabilities represent the liability recorded on the

balance sheet.

	Barclays Bank Group
	Transferred assets	Associated liabilities
	£m	£m
At 31 December 2025
Derivatives	79,223	(79,223)
Repurchase agreements	51,922	(33,891)
Securities lending arrangements	96,638	—
Other	5,834	(5,583)
	233,617	(118,697)
At 31 December 2024
Derivatives	74,307	(74,307)
Repurchase agreements	60,564	(40,173)
Securities lending arrangements	104,450	—
Other	7,697	(7,271)
	247,018	(121,751)

For repurchase agreements the difference between transferred assets and associated liabilities is predominantly due to IFRS

netting. Included within Other are agreements where a counterparty's recourse is limited to the transferred assets. The

relationship between the gross transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash

flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes.

	Carrying value		Fair value
	Transferred<br><br>assets	Associated<br><br>liabilities	Transferred<br><br>assets	Associated<br><br>liabilities	Net position
	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Barclays Bank Group
2025
Recourse to transferred assets only	5,879	(929)	5,935	(933)	5,002
2024
Recourse to transferred assets only	6,575	(1,575)	7,158	(1,579)	5,579

The Barclays Bank Group has an additional £4,213m (2024: £3,770m) of loans and advances within its asset backed funding

programmes that can readily be used to raise additional secured funding and are available to support future issuances.

Collateral held as security for assets

Under certain transactions, including reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing transactions, the Barclays Bank

Group is allowed to resell or re-pledge the collateral held. Collateralised transactions, such as securities lending and

borrowing, repurchase and derivative transactions are conducted in accordance with standard terms which are customary

in the market.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	272

Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

The fair value at the balance sheet date of collateral accepted and re-pledged to others was as follows:

	Barclays Bank Group
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Fair value of securities accepted as collateral	1,511,839	1,317,237
Of which fair value of securities re-pledged/transferred to others	1,389,012	1,193,809
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	273
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

The notes included in this section focus on related party transactions, Auditors’ remuneration, Barclays Bank PLC (the Parent

company) disclosure and Directors’ remuneration disclosure. Related parties include any subsidiaries, associates, joint

ventures and Key Management Personnel.

36Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration

Related party transactions

Parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the other party or exercise significant influence over

the other party in making financial or operational decisions, or one other party controls both.

Parent company

The parent company, which is also the ultimate parent company, is Barclays PLC, which holds 100% of the issued ordinary

shares of Barclays Bank PLC.  The largest group in which the results of Barclays Bank PLC are consolidated is headed by

Barclays PLC, 1 Churchill Place London E14 5HP. The consolidated financial statements of Barclays PLC Group are available

to the public and may be obtained from Barclays Corporate Secretariat, 1 Churchill Place London E14 5HP.

Subsidiaries

Transactions between Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries also meet the definition of related party transactions. Where

these are eliminated on consolidation, they are not disclosed in the Barclays Bank Group’s financial statements. A list of the

Barclays Bank Group’s principal subsidiaries is shown in Note 31.

Fellow subsidiaries

Transactions between the Barclays Bank Group and other subsidiaries of the parent company also meet the definition of

related party transactions.

Other entities

The Barclays Bank Group provides banking services to Barclays Bank Group pension funds (principally the UK Retirement

Fund) and other entities, providing loans, overdrafts, interest and non-interest bearing deposits and current accounts to

these entities as well as other services. Barclays Bank Group companies also provide investment management and custodian

services to the Barclays Bank Group pension schemes. All of these transactions are conducted on the same terms as third

party transactions. Summarised financial information for the Barclays Bank Group’s investments in associates and joint

ventures is set out in Note 33.

Amounts included in the Barclays Bank Group’s financial statements, in aggregate, by category of related party entity are as

follows:

	Parent	Fellow<br><br>subsidiaries	Pension funds	Other related<br><br>parties
	£m	£m	£m	£m
For the year ended and as at 31 December 2025
Total income	(2,276)	75	4	42
Operating expenses	(105)	(4,794)	—	—
Total assets	1,136	8,497	—	—
Total liabilities	46,360	8,438	140	126
For the year ended and as at 31 December 2024
Total income	(1,994)	172	(1)	54
Operating expenses	(92)	(4,361)	—	—
Total assets	1,338	6,753	—	1,104
Total liabilities	44,678	8,588	176	64
For the year ended and as at 31 December 2023
Total income	(1,712)	164	1	52
Operating expenses	(89)	(4,157)	(1)	—

Total liabilities include derivatives transacted on behalf of the pensions funds of £89m (2024: £100m).

Key Management Personnel

Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and

controlling the activities of Barclays Bank PLC (directly or indirectly) and comprise the Directors and Officers of Barclays

Bank PLC, certain direct reports of the Chief Executive Officer and the heads of major business units and functions.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	274

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

The Barclays Bank Group provides banking services to Key Management Personnel and persons connected to them.

Transactions during the year and the balances outstanding were as follows:

Banking Services provided
	2025	2024
	£m	£m
Loans outstanding as at 31 December	12.9	10.8
Deposits outstanding as at 31 December	14.8	9.5

Total commitments outstanding

Total commitments outstanding refer to the total of any undrawn amounts on credit card and/or overdraft facilities

provided to Key Management Personnel. Total commitments outstanding as at 31 December 2025 were £0.1m (2024:

£0.1m).

All loans to Key Management Personnel (and persons connected to them) were made in the ordinary course of business;

were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for

comparable transactions with other persons; and did not involve more than a normal risk of collectability or present other

unfavourable features.

Remuneration of Key Management Personnel

Total remuneration awarded to Key Management Personnel below represents salaries, short term benefits and pensions

contributions received during the year and awards made as part of the latest remuneration decisions in relation to the year.

Costs recognised in the income statement reflect the accounting charge for the year included within operating expenses.

The difference between the values awarded and the recognised income statement charge principally relates to the

recognition of costs for deferred awards. Figures are provided for the period that individuals met the definition of Key

Management Personnel.

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Salaries and other short-term benefits	42.3	42.9	46.1
Pension costs	0.2	0.2	0.2
Other long-term benefits	10.8	10.8	10.8
Share-based payments	26.5	21.9	16.3
Employer social security charges on emoluments	7.9	7.2	8.2
Costs recognised for accounting purposes	87.7	83.0	81.6
Employer social security charges on emoluments	(7.9)	(7.2)	(8.2)
Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised	7.6	5.3	2.1
Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised	6.8	2.6	4.5
Total remuneration awarded	94.2	83.7	80.0

Disclosure required by the Companies Act 2006

The following information regarding the Barclays Bank PLC Board of Directors is presented in accordance with the

Companies Act 2006:

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Aggregate emoluments1	9.1	8.3	7.2
Amounts paid under LTIPs2	1.2	—	—
	10.3	8.3	7.2

Notes

1The aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 2025 year. In addition, deferred share awards for 2025 with a total value at grant of

£1.3m (2024: £1.8m, 2023: £1.5m) will be made to Directors which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions.

2The figure above for "Amounts paid under LTIPs" for 2025 relates to tranches of prior year LTIP awards that were released to Directors during the

year.

There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2024: £nil, 2023: £nil).

There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes.

As at 31 December 2025, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2024: nil, 2023: nil).

The aggregate amount of compensation payable to departing officers in respect of loss of office was £15,300 (2024: £7,398,

2023: £30,519).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	275

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Of the figures in the table above, the amounts attributable to the highest paid Director in respect of qualifying services are as

follows:

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Aggregate emoluments1	4.8	4.3	3.6
Amounts paid under LTIPs	1.2	—	—
	6.0	4.3	3.6

Note

1The aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 2025 year. In addition, a deferred share award for 2025 with a value at grant of £0.8m

(2024: £1.1m, 2023: £1m) will be made to the highest paid Director which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions.

There were no actual pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of the highest paid Director

(2024: £nil, 2023: £nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes (2024: £nil, 2023:

£nil).

Advances and credit to Directors and guarantees on behalf of Directors

In accordance with Section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, the total amount of advances and credits made available in

2025 to persons who served as Directors during the year was £nil (2024: £nil). The total value of guarantees entered into on

behalf of Directors during 2025 was £nil (2024: £nil).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	276

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

37Acquisition and Disposals of subsidiaries

During the year ending 31 December 2025, significant transactions included Barclays Capital Asia Limited (BCAL) being sold

by Barclays Bank PLC to its subsidiary Barclays International Holdings Limited for a consideration of £227m.  The sale of the

BCAL shares was at fair value resulting in a £5m gain on sale as well as a derecognition of the cost of investment in Barclays

Bank PLC.

There were no disposals of subsidiaries in 2024.

38Auditor’s remuneration

Auditor’s remuneration is included within consultancy, legal and professional fees in administration and general expenses

and comprises:

	2025	2024	2023
	£m	£m	£m
Audit of the Barclays Bank Group's annual accounts	22	23	22
Other services:
Audit of the Barclays Bank PLC subsidiaries1	19	19	18
Other audit related fees2	12	10	8
Other services	4	5	1
Total Auditor's remuneration	57	57	49

Notes

1Comprises the fees for the statutory audit of the subsidiaries both inside and outside UK and fees for the work performed by associates of KPMG

in respect of the consolidated financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC.

2Comprises services in relation to statutory and regulatory filings. These include audit services for the review of the interim financial information

under the Listing Rules of the UK listing authority.

Audit scope changes are finalised following the completion of the audit and recognised when agreed. The 2025 audit fee

includes £nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £1m) relating to the previous year’s audit.

Under SEC regulations, the remuneration of our auditors is required to be presented as follows: audit fees £45m (2024:

£43m, 2023: £41m), audit-related fees £9m (2024: £5m, 2023: £5m), tax fees £nil (2024: £nil, 2023: £nil), and all other fees

£3m (2024: £1m, 2023: £1m).

39Assets and liabilities included in disposal group classified as held for sale

Accounting for non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

The Barclays Bank Group applies IFRS 5 Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations. Non-current assets

(or disposal groups) are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered principally through a sale

transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate

sale in its present condition subject only to terms that are usual and customary, and the sale must be highly probable. Non-

current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell.

Assets and liabilities classified as held for sale are presented separately in the consolidated balance sheet.

Management judgement is required in determining whether the IFRS 5 held for sale classification criteria are met, in

particular whether the sale is highly probable and expected to qualify for recognition as a completed sale within 12 months

of classification. This assessment requires consideration of how committed management is to the sales plan, the likelihood

of obtaining regulatory or other external approvals which is often required for sales of banking operations and how

committed the buyer is to complete the sales transaction within the agreed timelines.

The perimeter of the disposal group has been accounted for in line with the requirements of IFRS 5 as at 31 December 2025.

A detailed analysis of the disposal group is presented below.

The 2025 disposal group includes a US Cards portfolio within USCB. Barclays has decided not to compete to become the

sole issuer for a co‑branded card portfolio leading to its transfer in H1 2026. The portfolio is expected to be sold at a

premium. The extension to the 1 year sale period is aligned to the signed contractual arrangements in place to allow the

transition of the portfolio in a controlled and effective manner. The 2024 disposal group includes the US Cards portfolio and

the German Consumer Finance Business within Head Office.

The fair value level of the financial instruments included in held for sale along with corresponding fair value hierarchy under

IFRS13 is disclosed on page 228.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	277

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Barclays Bank Group	2025	2024
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale	£m	£m
As at 31 December
Loans and advances to customers	5,801	9,544
Intangible assets	11	25
Property, plant and equipment	—	24
Other assets	120	261
Total assets classified as held for sale	5,932	9,854
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale
As at 31 December
Deposits from customers	—	3,647
Other liabilities	—	77
Provisions	—	2
Total liabilities classified as held for sale	—	3,726
Net assets classified as held for sale	5,932	6,128
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	278
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

40  Related Undertakings

The Barclays Bank PLC’s corporate structure consists of a number of<br><br>related undertakings, comprising subsidiary undertakings, joint<br><br>ventures, associated undertakings and significant holdings. A full list<br><br>of these related undertakings is set out below, together with the<br><br>country of incorporation, registered office (or principal place of<br><br>business) and the identity and percentage of each share class held<br><br>by Barclays Bank PLC. The information is provided as at 31<br><br>December 2025.<br><br>The entities are grouped by the countries in which they are<br><br>incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are<br><br>in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of<br><br>incorporation for example where the entity carries on business<br><br>through a branch in a territory outside of its country of<br><br>incorporation. Barclays PLC Country Snapshot provides details of<br><br>where Barclays Bank PLC carries on its business, where its profits are<br><br>subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in.	Notes
	A<br><br>B<br><br>C<br><br>D<br><br>E<br><br>F<br><br>G<br><br>H<br><br>I<br><br>J<br><br>K<br><br>L<br><br>M<br><br>N<br><br>O<br><br>P<br><br>Q<br><br>R<br><br>S<br><br>T<br><br>U<br><br>V<br><br>W<br><br>X<br><br>Y<br><br>Z<br><br>AA	Directly held by Barclays Bank PLC<br><br>Partnership Interest<br><br>Membership Interest<br><br>Preference Shares<br><br>A Preference Shares<br><br>B Preference Shares<br><br>Ordinary/Common Shares in addition to other shares<br><br>A Ordinary Shares<br><br>B Ordinary Shares<br><br>C Ordinary Shares<br><br>F Ordinary Shares<br><br>First Preference Shares, Second Preference Shares<br><br>Registered Address not in country of incorporation<br><br>USD Linked Ordinary Shares<br><br>Capital Contribution Shares<br><br>Redeemable Class B Shares<br><br>Non-Redeemable Ordinary Shares<br><br>Class A Shares<br><br>Class B Shares<br><br>Class C Shares<br><br>Class D Shares<br><br>Class E Shares<br><br>First Class Common Shares, Second Class Common Shares<br><br>Redeemable Class A Shares<br><br>Not Consolidated<br><br>LLC Share<br><br>B Shares
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	279
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings<br><br>below are wholly owned and included in the<br><br>consolidation and the share capital held by<br><br>the Group comprises ordinary and/or<br><br>common shares, which are held by<br><br>subsidiaries of the Group. Unless otherwise<br><br>stated, the Group holds 100% of the nominal<br><br>value of each share class.
United Kingdom
1 Churchill Place, London, E14<br><br>5HP
Aequor Investments Limited
Ardencroft Investments Limited	A
B D & B Investments Limited
B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited	A
Barclays Aldersgate Investments<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Asset Management<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Capital Asia Holdings<br><br>Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.2)<br><br>Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.3)<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Capital Nominees Limited	A
Barclays Capital Securities Client<br><br>Nominee Limited	A
Barclays Capital Securities Limited	A
Barclays CCP Funding LLP	B
Barclays Direct Investing Nominees<br><br>Limited
Barclays Directors Limited	A
Barclays Executive Schemes<br><br>Trustees Limited	A
Barclays Financial Planning<br><br>Nominee Company Limited
Barclays Gaia Holdings Limited
Barclays Group Holdings Limited	A
Barclays International Holdings<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Investment Management<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Investment Solutions<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Long Island Limited	A
Barclays Nominees (George Yard)<br><br>Limited	A, Y
Barclays OCIO Services Limited	A
Barclaycard Payments Limited
Barclays Pension Funds Trustees<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Private Bank
Barclays Services (Japan) Limited	A
Barclays Shea Limited	A
Barclays Term Funding Limited<br><br>Liability Partnership	B
Barclays Wealth Nominees Limited	A
Barclayshare Nominees Limited			Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
---	---
Barcosec Limited	A
Barsec Nominees Limited	A
BB Client Nominees Limited	A
Chapelcrest Investments Limited
Cornwall Home Loans Limited	A
Dorset Home Loans Limited	A
Durlacher Nominees Limited	A
Eagle Financial and Leasing<br><br>Services (UK) Limited	A
Finpart Nominees Limited	A
Foltus Investments Limited	A
Hawkins Funding Limited
Heraldglen Limited	G, L
Isle of Wight Home Loans Limited	A
J.V. Estates Limited	A
Kirsche Investments Limited	A
Long Island Assets Limited
Maloney Investments Limited
Menlo Investments Limited	A
Mercantile Credit Company Limited	A
Mercantile Leasing Company<br><br>(No.132) Limited	A
MK Opportunities LP	B
Naxos Investments Limited  (In<br><br>Liquidation 14 January 2026)	A
Northwharf Nominees Limited	A
Oak Pension Asset Management<br><br>Limited	Y
Real Estate Participation<br><br>Management Limited
Real Estate Participation Services<br><br>Limited
Relative Value Investments UK<br><br>Limited Liability Partnership	B
Relative Value Trading Limited
Roder Investments No. 1 Limited	A, G
Roder Investments No. 2 Limited	A, G
RVT CLO Investments LLP	B
Surety Trust Limited	A
Swan Lane Investments Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.1<br><br>Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.2<br><br>Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.3<br><br>Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.4<br><br>Limited	A
US Real Estate Holdings No.5<br><br>Limited	A
US Real Estate Holdings No.6<br><br>Limited	A
Water Street Investments Limited	Y
Wedd Jefferson (Nominees)<br><br>Limited	A
Westferry Investments Limited	A
Woolwich Qualifying Employee<br><br>Share Ownership Trustee Limited	A
Zeban Nominees Limited	A		Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
---	---
C/O Teneo Financial Advisory<br><br>Limited, 3rd Floor, The Colmore<br><br>Building, 20 Colmore Circus<br><br>Queensway, Birmingham, West<br><br>Midlands, B4 6AT
Barclays Nominees (Branches)<br><br>Limited (In Liquidation)	A
Leonis Investments LLP (In<br><br>Liquidation)	B
1-4 , Clyde Place Lane, Glasgow,<br><br>G5 8DP
R.C. Greig Nominees Limited
9, allée Scheffer, Luxembourg,<br><br>L-2520
Barclays Blossom Finance Limited<br><br>Partnership	B, M
Barclays Claudas Investments<br><br>Partnership	B, M
Barclays Pelleas Investments<br><br>Limited Partnership	B, M
Argentina
Marval, O'Farrell & Mairal, Av.<br><br>Leandro N. Alem 882, Buenos<br><br>Aires, C1001AAQ, Argentina<br><br>Alem 882, Buenos Aires,<br><br>C1001AAQ
Compañia Regional del Sur S.A. (In<br><br>Liquidation)	A
Brazil
Av. Brigadeiro Faria Lima,<br><br>No.4.440, 12th Floor, Bairro Itaim<br><br>Bibi, Sao Paulo, CEP, 04538-132,<br><br>Brazil
Barclays Brasil Assessoria<br><br>Financeira Ltda	A
Canada
Bay Wellington Tower, Brookfield<br><br>Place, 47th floor, 181 Bay Street,<br><br>Toronto, Ontario, M5J 2T3
Barclays Capital Canada Inc.
Barclays Corporation Limited	A
Cayman Islands
PO Box  309, Ugland House,<br><br>George Town, Grand Cayman,<br><br>KY1-1104
Alymere Investments Limited	E, F, G
Analytical Trade UK Limited	A
Barclays Capital (Cayman)<br><br>Limited	A
Barclays Securities Financing<br><br>Limited	E, F, G
Barclays US Holdings Limited	A, D, G
Braven Investments No.1 Limited
Capton Investments Limited
Claudas Investments Limited	A, G, P,<br><br>X
Claudas Investments Two<br><br>Limited
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	280
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
Gallen Investments Limited
Hornbeam Limited	Y
Mintaka Investments No. 4<br><br>Limited
Palomino Limited	A
Pelleas Investments Limited	A
Pippin Island Investments<br><br>Limited	A
Razzoli Investments Limited	A
RVH Limited	A, D, G
France
34-36 avenue de Friedland,<br><br>75008, Paris
Barclays ADF SA	A
Guernsey
P.O. Box 33, Dorey Court, Admiral<br><br>Park, St.  Peter Port, GY1 4AT
Barclays UKRF ICC Limited	Y
Barclays UKRF No.1 IC Limited	Y
Barclays UKRF No.2 IC Ltd	Y
Hong Kong
Level 41, Cheung Kong Center, 2<br><br>Queen's Road, Central, N/A, Hong<br><br>Kong
Barclays Capital Asia Limited	A
India
Nirlon Knowledge Park, Level 9,<br><br>Block B-6, Off Western Express<br><br>Highway, Goregaon (East),<br><br>Mumbai, 400063
Barclays Securities (India) Private<br><br>Limited
Barclays Wealth Trustees (India)<br><br>Private Limited
Barclays Investments & Loans<br><br>(India) Private Limited	G
Ireland
One Molesworth Street, Dublin 2,<br><br>D02 RF29
Barclays Bank Ireland Public<br><br>Limited Company	A
Barclays Europe Client Nominees<br><br>Designated Activity Company
Barclays Europe Firm Nominees<br><br>Designated Activity Company
Barclays Europe Nominees<br><br>Designated Activity Company
25-28 North Wall Quay,<br><br>Dublin1, D01 H104
Erimon Home Loans Ireland<br><br>Limited	A
70 Sir John Rogerson’s Quay,<br><br>Dublin 2,  D02 R296, Ireland
Barclays Finance Ireland Limited			Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
---	---
Isle of Man
Eagle Court, Circular Road,<br><br>Douglas, IM1 1AD, Isle of Man
Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited<br><br>(In Liquidation)	A
Barclays Private Clients<br><br>International Limited	A, H, I,<br><br>Y
c/o Zedra Trust Company (Isle of<br><br>Man) Limited, 2nd Floor, St<br><br>Georges Court, Upper Church<br><br>Street, Douglas, IM1 1EE
Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man)<br><br>Limited (In Liquidation)	A
Japan
10-1, Roppongi 6-chome, Minato-<br><br>ku, Tokyo, 106-6131, Japan
Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan<br><br>Limited
Barclays Securities Japan Limited	G, E
Jersey
28 Esplanade, St Helier, JE2 3QA,<br><br>Jersey
Barclays Services Jersey Limited<br><br>(In Liquidation)	A
13 Library Place, St Helier, JE4 8NE
Barclays Nominees (Jersey)<br><br>Limited	A
Barclaytrust Channel Islands<br><br>Limited	A
Estera Trust (Jersey) Limited,<br><br>13-14 Esplanade, St Helier, JE1<br><br>1EE, Jersey
MK Opportunities GP Ltd	A
3rd Floor, 44 Esplanade, St. Helier,<br><br>JE4 9WG, Jersey
Barclaycard Payment Holdings<br><br>Limited
Barclaycard Payments Midco<br><br>Limited
Luxembourg
9, allée Scheffer, Luxembourg,<br><br>L-2520, Luxembourg
Barclays Bedivere Investments<br><br>S.à r.l.	G
Barclays Cantal Investments<br><br>S.à r.l.	R, S
Barclays Capital Luxembourg<br><br>S.à r.l.
Barclays Treasury Luxembourg<br><br>S.à r.l.
Barclays Claudas Investments<br><br>S.à r.l.			Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
---	---
Barclays International<br><br>Luxembourg Dollar Holdings<br><br>S.à r.l.
Barclays Lamorak Investments<br><br>S.à r.l.	Q
Barclays Luxembourg<br><br>GBP Holdings S.à r.l.	Q
Barclays Luxembourg Global<br><br>Funding S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings<br><br>S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings<br><br>SSC	B
68-70 Boulevard de la Petrusse,<br><br>Luxembourg, L-2320,<br><br>Luxembourg
Adler Toy Holding S.à r.l.
10 rue du Château d’Eau,<br><br>Leudelange, Grand Duchy of<br><br>Luxembourg L-3364
BPM Management GP S.à r.l.	A
Mauritius
c/o Rogers Capital Corporate<br><br>Services Limited, Level 3, Rogers<br><br>Capital House, 5 President John<br><br>Kennedy Street, Port Louis, 11302,<br><br>Mauritius
Barclays Capital Mauritius<br><br>Limited (In Liquidation)	A
Barclays Capital Securities<br><br>Mauritius Limited	A
Fifth Floor, Ebene Esplanade, 24<br><br>Bank Street, Cybercity, Ebene,<br><br>72201, Mauritius
Barclays Mauritius Overseas<br><br>Holdings Limited	A
Mexico
Paseo de la Reforma 505, Torre<br><br>Mayor Floor 41, Colona<br><br>Cuauhtémoc, 06500, Mexico City,<br><br>Mexico
Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A.	I, K
Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa,<br><br>S.A. de C.V.	I, K
Grupo Financiero Barclays<br><br>Mexico, S.A. de C.V.	A, I, K
Monaco
31 Avenue de la Costa, Monte<br><br>Carlo, 98000, Monaco
Barclays Private Asset<br><br>Management (Monaco) S.A.M
Saudi Arabia
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	281
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
3rd Floor Al Dahna Center, 114<br><br>Al-Ahsa Street, PO Box 1454,<br><br>Riyadh, 11431, Saudi Arabia
Barclays Saudi Arabia (In<br><br>Liquidation)	A
Building 4.09- Unit 2- Level 9th,<br><br>King Abdullah Financial District<br><br>Riyadh, KSA, Kingdom Abdullah<br><br>Financial District, Riyadh, Saudi<br><br>Arabia
Barclays Regional  Headquarters<br><br>Company
Singapore
10 Marina Boulevard, #25-01<br><br>Marina Bay  Financial Centre,<br><br>Tower 2, 018983, Singapore
Barclays Merchant Bank<br><br>(Singapore) Ltd.
Spain
Calle Jose, Abascal 51, Madrid,<br><br>28003, Spain
Barclays Tenedora De Inmuebles<br><br>SL.	A
Switzerland
Chemin de Grange Canal 18-20,<br><br>PO Box 3941, Geneva, 1211,<br><br>Switzerland
Barclays Bank (Suisse) SA
BPB Holdings SA	A
Taiwan
19F-1, No. 7, Xinyi Road, Sec. 5,<br><br>Taipei, 11049, Taiwan (Province<br><br>of China)
Barclays Securities Taiwan<br><br>Limited	A
Turkey
13th floor, Kanyon Office Block,<br><br>Büyükdere Caddesi, Levent,<br><br>Istanbul, 34394, Turkey
Barclays Menkul Değerler<br><br>Anonim Şirketi
United States
745 Seventh Avenue, New York,<br><br>Ny 10019, United States
Alynore Investments Limited<br><br>Partnership	B
Corporation Service Company,<br><br>251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington,<br><br>Delaware, 19808, United States
Analytical Trade Holdings LLC
Barclays Asset Backed Depositor<br><br>LLC	C
Barclays Bank Delaware	D, G		Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
---	---
Barclays Capital Derivatives<br><br>Funding LLC	C
Barclays Capital Equities Trading<br><br>GP	B
Barclays Capital Holdings Inc.	E, F, G
Barclays Capital Real Estate<br><br>Finance Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate<br><br>Holdings Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc.
Barclays Commercial Mortgage<br><br>Securities LLC	C
Barclays Dryrock Funding LLC	C
Barclays Financial LLC	C
Barclays Group US Inc.	E, G
Barclays Lifestyles LLC	C
Barclays Nest LLC	C
Barclays Oversight Management<br><br>Inc.
Barclays Receivables LLC	C
Barclays Services Corporation
Barclays Services, LLC	C
Barclays STBT Inc.
Barclays US CCP Funding LLC	C
Barclays US LLC	C
Barclays US Investments Inc.
BCAP LLC	C
Gracechurch Services<br><br>Corporation
Lagalla Investments LLC
Marbury Holdings LLC
Preferred Liquidity, LLC	H
Procella Investments No.2 LLC	Z
Procella Investments No.3 LLC	Z
Relative Value Holdings, LLC
Surrey Funding Corporation
Sussex Purchasing Corporation
Sutton Funding LLC	C
US Secured Investments LLC	O
Verain Investments LLC	C
Wilmington Riverfront  LLC	C
100 Bank Street, Suite 630,<br><br>Burlington, Vermont 05401
Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc.
Corporation Service Company, 80<br><br>State Street, Albany, NY,<br><br>12207-2543
Barclays Equity Holdings Inc.
Corporation Service Company,<br><br>Goodwin Square, 225 Asylum<br><br>Street, 20th Floor, Hartford, CT<br><br>06103, United States
Barclays Capital Inc.			Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
---	---
Corporation Service Company,<br><br>2626, Glenwood Ave, Suite 550,<br><br>Raleigh, NC, 27608
Barclays US GPF Inc.
Equifirst Corporation (In<br><br>Liquidation, dissolved with State of<br><br>North Carolina)
Rodney Square North, 1100, North<br><br>Market Street, Wilmington,<br><br>Delaware, 19890, United States
Barclays Dryrock Issuance Trust
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	282
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Wholly owned subsidiaries	Note
Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings<br><br>below are included in the consolidation and<br><br>the share capital held by Barclays Bank PLC<br><br>comprises ordinary and/or common shares,<br><br>which are held by subsidiaries of Barclays<br><br>Bank PLC. The percentage of the nominal<br><br>value of each share class held by Barclays<br><br>Bank PLC is provided below.
---	---	---
Other Related Undertakings	%	Note
United Kingdom
1 Churchill Place, London, E14<br><br>5HP
Barclays Secured Funding<br><br>(LM) Limited	20.00	A
Barclays Secured Notes<br><br>Finance LLP	20.00	A
50 Lothian Road, Festival<br><br>Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9WJ
Equistone Founder Partner III<br><br>L.P.	20.00	A,B,<br><br>Y
Enigma, Wavendon Business<br><br>Park Milton Keynes,<br><br>MK178LX
Intelligent Processing<br><br>Solutions Limited	19.50	Y
Korea, Republic of
18th Floor, Daishin Finance<br><br>Center, 343, Samil-daero,<br><br>Jung-gu, Seoul, 04538,<br><br>South Korea
Woori BC Pegasus<br><br>Securitization Specialty Co.<br><br>Ltd	70.00	W
Luxembourg
9, allée Scheffer,<br><br>Luxembourg, L-2520,
Barclays Alzin Investments<br><br>S.à r.l.	100.00	R,S,<br><br>U
Barclays Bordang Investments<br><br>S.à r.l.	100.00	R, S
Netherlands
Winschoterdiep, 70,<br><br>Groningen, 9723AB,<br><br>Groningen,
Cube Solidus B.V.	68.83	AA
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	283
---	---

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

41  Barclays Bank PLC (the Parent company)

Income Statement
Barclays Bank PLC
	2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	£m	£m	£m
Interest and similar income	23,585	25,624	24,474
Interest and similar expense	(20,493)	(23,492)	(21,990)
Net interest income	3,092	2,132	2,484
Fee and commission income	3,280	3,220	3,006
Fee and commission expense	(886)	(923)	(1,149)
Net fee and commission income	2,394	2,297	1,857
Other income	6,398	6,233	4,908
Total income	11,884	10,662	9,249
Staff costs	(2,101)	(2,027)	(1,918)
Infrastructure costs	(87)	(67)	(246)
Administration and general expenses	(3,926)	(3,648)	(3,664)
UK regulatory levies	(228)	(242)	(149)
Litigation and conduct	(246)	(156)	(30)
Operating expenses	(6,588)	(6,140)	(6,007)
Impairment of investments in subsidiaries	(90)	811	(166)
Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures	6	48	(1)
Profit before impairment	5,212	5,381	3,075
Credit impairment charges	(330)	(216)	(98)
Profit before tax	4,882	5,165	2,977
Taxation	(392)	(200)	(111)
Profit after tax	4,490	4,965	2,866
Attributable to:
Equity holders of the parent	3,321	3,740	1,619
Other equity instrument holders	1,169	1,225	1,247
Total equity holders of the parent	4,490	4,965	2,866
Profit after tax	4,490	4,965	2,866

The Parent company financials on pages 182 to 185 form part of this note.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	284

Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

Barclays Bank PLC (the Parent company)

Statement of comprehensive income
	2025	2024	2023
For the year ended 31 December	£m	£m	£m
Profit after tax	4,490	4,965	2,866
Other comprehensive income/(loss) that may be recycled to profit or loss:
Currency translation reserve
Currency translation differencesa	(794)	148	(572)
Fair value through other comprehensive income reserve movement relating to debt<br><br>securities
Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value	687	(841)	1,140
Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit on disposal	202	(134)	(102)
Net (gains)/losses relating to (release of) impairment	(3)	1	(2)
Net gains/(losses) due to fair value hedging	25	331	(850)
Tax	(254)	180	(54)
Cash flow hedging reserve
Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value	2,633	(1,285)	2,443
Net (losses)/gains  transferred to net profit	(537)	1,807	1,006
Tax	(587)	(146)	(966)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) that may be recycled to profit or loss	1,372	61	2,043
Other comprehensive (loss)/income not recycled to profit or loss:
Retirement benefit remeasurements	(15)	(420)	(1,175)
Own credit	97	(1,084)	(975)
Tax	(33)	428	608
Other comprehensive (loss)/income not recycled to profit or loss	49	(1,076)	(1,542)
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year	1,421	(1,015)	501
Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year	5,911	3,950	3,367
Attributable to:
Equity holders of the parent	5,911	3,950	3,367
Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year	5,911	3,950	3,367

Dividends paid to the Parent company totalled £1,667m (2024: £1,803m, 2023: £529m).

Note

aThere was no CTR recycling events during 2025, 2024 & 2023.

.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	285

Additional unaudited information

Additional shareholder information

Articles of Association

Barclays Bank PLC (the “Company”) is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 1026167

(formerly called Barclays Bank International Limited, a company incorporated under the name The Colonial Bank by the Colonial Bank

Act 1925 and which changed its name on 15 September 1925 to Barclays Bank (Dominion, Colonial and Overseas) and further

changed its name on 22 September 1954 to Barclays Bank D.C.O. and on 1 October 1971 to Barclays Bank International Limited) was

incorporated under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1967 as a limited company on 4 October 1971 and changed its name on 1 January

1985 to Barclays Bank PLC. The objects of the Company are unrestricted.

The Articles of Association were adopted by Special Resolution at the Company's Annual General Meeting on 12 June 2024, in

substitution for and to the exclusion of Articles adopted on 8 June 2021.

The following is a summary and explanation of the current Articles of Association, which are available for inspection.

Directors

(i)The minimum number of Directors (excluding alternate Directors) is five. There is no maximum limit. There is no age limit for

Directors. A director shall not be required to hold any shares in the Company by way of qualification.

(ii)Excluding executive remuneration and any other entitlement to remuneration for extra services (including service on board

committees) under the Articles, a Director is entitled to a fee at a rate determined by the Board but the aggregate fees paid to all

Directors shall not exceed £3,000,000 per annum or such higher amount as may be approved by an ordinary resolution of the

Company. Each Director is entitled to reimbursement for all reasonable travelling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred by

him/her in or about the performance of his/her duties.

(iii)A Director may hold any other office of the Company on such terms as the Board shall determine.

(iv)No director shall be required to retire from office at any annual general meeting by rotational retirement.

(v)The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongst the Directors. Any Director so

appointed holds office until the next AGM, when he/she may offer himself/herself for reappointment.

(vi)The Board may appoint any Director to any executive position or employment in the Company on such terms as they determine.

(vii)The Company may by ordinary resolution remove a Director before the expiry of his/her period of office (without prejudice to a

claim for damages for breach of contract or otherwise) and may by ordinary resolution appoint another person who is willing to

act to be a Director in his/her place.

(viii)A Director may appoint either another Director or some other person approved by the Board to act as his/her alternate with

power to attend Board meetings and generally to exercise the functions of the appointing Director in his/her absence (other than

the power to appoint an alternate of his/her appointor).

(ix)The Board may authorise any matter in relation to which a Director has, or can have, a direct interest that conflicts, or possibly

may conflict with, the Company’s interests. Only Directors who have no interest in the matter being considered will be able to

authorise the relevant matter and they may impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if they think this is appropriate.

(x)A Director may hold positions with or be interested in other companies and, subject to legislation applicable to the Company and

the FCA’s requirements, may contract with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested.

(xi)A Director may not vote or count towards the quorum on any resolution concerning any proposal in which he/she (or any person

connected with him/her) has a material interest (other than by virtue of his/her interest in securities of the Company) or if he/

she has a duty which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company, unless the resolution relates to any proposal:

(a)to indemnify a Director or provide him/her with a guarantee or security in respect of money lent by him/her to, or any

obligation incurred by him/her or any other person for the benefit of (or at the request of), the Company (or any other

member of the group);

(b)to indemnify or give security or a guarantee to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company (or any other

member of the group) for which the Director has personally assumed responsibility, in whole or in part;

(c)to obtain insurance for the benefit of Directors;

(d)involving the acquisition by a Director of any securities of the Company (or any other member of the group) pursuant to an

offer to existing holders of securities or to the public;

(e)concerning any other company in which the Director is interested as an officer or creditor or shareholder but, broadly, only if

he/she (together with his/her connected persons) is directly or indirectly interested in less than 1% of either any class of the

issued equity share capital or of the voting rights of that company; and

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	286

Additional unaudited information

(f)concerning any other arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company (or any other member of the group) under

which the Director benefits or stands to benefit in a similar manner to the employees concerned and which does not give the

Director any advantage which the employees to whom the arrangement relates would not receive.

Classes of Shares

The Articles of Association describe the following classes of shares: Ordinary Shares, Euro, US Dollar and Sterling Preference Shares

(collectively, the “Preference Shares”) and Series 1 Sterling Preference Shares. A description of the outstanding classes of shares in the

Company as at 31 December 2024, being Ordinary Shares, Dollar Preference shares and Euro Preference Shares  is included in Note 26

to the Financial Statements (Ordinary shares, preference shares and other equity).

Dividends

Subject to the provisions of the Articles and applicable legislation, the Company in general meeting may declare dividends on the

Ordinary Shares by ordinary resolution, but any such dividend may not exceed the amount recommended by the Board. The Board may

also pay interim or final dividends if it appears they are justified by the Company’s financial position.

Each Preference Share confers the right to a preferential dividend (“Preference Dividend”) payable in such currency at such rates

(whether fixed or calculated by reference to or in accordance with a specified procedure or mechanism), on such dates and on such

other terms as may be determined by the Board prior to allotment thereof.

The Preference Shares rank in regard to payment of dividends in priority to the holders of Ordinary Shares and any other class of shares

in the Company ranking junior to the Preference Shares.

Dividends may be paid on the Preference Shares if, in the opinion of the Board, the Company has sufficient distributable profits, after

payment in full or the setting aside of a sum to provide for all dividends payable on (or in the case of shares carrying a cumulative right

to dividends, before) the relevant dividend payment date on any class of shares in the Company ranking pari passu with or in priority to

the relevant series of Preference Shares as regards participation in the profits of the Company.

If the Board considers that the distributable profits of the Company available for distribution are insufficient to cover the payment in full

of Preference Dividends, Preference Dividends shall be paid to the extent of the distributable profits on a pro rata basis.

Notwithstanding the above, the Board may, at its absolute discretion, determine that any Preference Dividend which would otherwise

be payable may either not be payable at all or only payable in part.

If any Preference Dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid, or is only paid in part, for the reasons described above, holders

of Preference Shares will not have a claim in respect of such non-payment.

If any dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid in full on the relevant dividend payment date, a dividend restriction shall

apply. The dividend restriction means that, subject to certain exceptions, neither the Company nor Barclays Bank may (a) pay a

dividend on, or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire, any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference shares or

other share capital ranking equal or junior to the relevant series of Preference Shares until the earlier of such time as the Company next

pays in full a dividend on the relevant series of Preference Shares or the date on which all of the relevant series of Preference Shares are

redeemed.

All unclaimed dividends payable in respect of any share may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Board for the benefit of the

Company until claimed. If a dividend is not claimed after 12 years of it becoming payable, it is forfeited and reverts to the Company.

However, The Company shall be indebted to the member or other person entitled to the shares for the net proceeds of any shares sold

by the Company for a period of six years following the date of such sale.

Subject to applicable legislation and the rights of the other shareholders, any share may be issued on terms that it is, at the option of

the Company or the holder of such share, redeemable. The Directors are authorised to determine the terms, conditions and manner of

redemption of any such shares under the Articles of Association.

Calls on capital

The Directors may make calls upon the members in respect of any monies unpaid on their shares. A person upon whom a call is made

remains liable even if the shares in respect of which the call is made have been transferred. Interest will be chargeable on any unpaid

amount called at a rate determined by the Board (of not more than 20% per annum).

If a member fails to pay any call in full (following notice from the Board that such failure will result in forfeiture of the relevant shares),

such shares (including any dividends declared but not paid) may be forfeited by a resolution of the Board, and will become the property

of the Company. Forfeiture shall not absolve a previous member for amounts payable by him/her (which may continue to accrue

interest).

The Company also has a lien over all partly paid shares of the Company for all monies payable or called on that share and over the

debts and liabilities of a member to the Company. If any monies which are the subject of the lien remain unpaid after a notice from the

Board demanding payment, the Company may sell such shares.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	287

Additional unaudited information

Annual and other general meetings

The Company is required to hold an AGM in addition to such other general meetings as the Directors think fit. The type of the meeting

will be specified in the notice calling it. Under the Companies Act 2006, the AGM must be held within six months of the accounting

reference date. A general meeting may be convened by the Board on requisition in accordance with the applicable legislation.

In the case of an AGM, a minimum of 21 clear days’ notice is required. The notice must be in writing and must specify the place, the

day and the hour of the meeting, and the general nature of the business to be transacted. A notice convening a meeting to pass a

special resolution shall specify the intention to propose the resolution as such. The accidental failure to give notice of a general meeting

or the non-receipt of such notice will not invalidate the proceedings at such meeting.

Subject as noted above, all Shareholders are entitled to attend and vote at general meetings. The Articles do, however, provide that

arrangements may be made for simultaneous attendance at a satellite meeting place or, if the meeting place is inadequate to

accommodate all members and proxies entitled to attend, another meeting place may be arranged to accommodate such persons

other than that specified in the notice of meeting, in which case Shareholders may be excluded from the principal place. The Articles

also allow for a hybrid meeting, whereby Shareholders may attend by electronic means or physically.

Holders of Preference Shares have no right to receive notice of, attend or vote at, any general meetings of the Company as a result of

holding Preference Shares.

Notices

Save where the articles expressly require otherwise, a document or information may be sent by the Company in hard copy form,

electronic form, by being made available on a website, or by another means agreed with the recipient, in accordance with the

provisions set out in the Companies Act 2006. Accordingly, a document or information may only be sent in electronic form to a person

who has agreed to receive it in that form or, in the case of a company, who has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable

legislation. A document or information may only be sent by being made available on a website if the recipient has agreed to receive it in

that form or has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable legislation, and has not revoked that agreement.

In respect of joint holdings, documents or information shall be sent to the joint holder whose name stands first in the register.

A member who (having no registered address within the UK) has not supplied an address in the UK at which documents or information

may be sent in hard copy form, or an address to which notices, documents or information may be sent or supplied by electronic

means, is not entitled to have documents or information sent to him/her.

The Company may choose to send notice in hard copy form alone to some or all members and/or choose not to send notice to a

particular member where it considers this necessary or appropriate to deal with legal, regulatory or practical problems in, or under the

laws of, any territory. In addition, the Company may cease to send notices to any member who has been sent documents on two

consecutive occasions over a period of at least 12 months and when each of those documents is returned undelivered or notification is

received that they have not been delivered.

Capitalisation of profits

The Company may, by ordinary resolution, upon the recommendation of the Board capitalise all or any part of an amount standing to

the credit of a reserve or fund to be set free for distribution provided that amounts from the share premium account, capital

redemption reserve or any profits not available for distribution should be applied only in paying up unissued shares to be allotted to

members credited as fully paid and no unrealised profits shall be applied in paying up debentures of the Company or any amount

unpaid on any share in the capital of the Company.

Indemnity

Subject to applicable legislation, every current and former Director or other officer of the Company (other than any person engaged by

the company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against any liability in relation to the Company, other than (broadly) any

liability to the Company or a member of the Group, or any criminal or regulatory fine.

Variation of Rights

The rights attached to any class of shares may be varied either with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal

value of the issued shares of that class, or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the

shares of that class. The rights of shares shall not (unless expressly provided by the rights attached to such shares) be deemed varied

by the creation of further shares ranking equally with them or subsequent to them.

Limitations on foreign shareholders

There are no restrictions imposed by the Articles of Association or (subject to the effect of any economic sanctions that may be in force

from time to time) by current English laws which relate only to non-residents of the UK and which limit the rights of such non-residents

to hold or (when entitled to do so) vote the ordinary shares.

Special rights

There are no persons holding securities that carry special rights with regard to the control of the company.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	288

Additional unaudited information

Taxation of UK holders

The following is a summary of certain UK tax issues which are likely to be material to the holding and disposal of Preference Shares of

Barclays Bank PLC or ADSs representing such Preference Shares (the "Shares").

It is based on the current laws of England and Wales, UK tax law and the practice of His Majesty’s Revenue and Customs ("HMRC"),

each of which may be subject to change, possibly with retrospective effect and in particular it does not contemplate any changes in law

announced, but not yet enacted, as part of the UK government's Autumn Budget on 26 November 2025 (the "Budget"). It is a general

guide for information purposes and should be treated with appropriate caution. It is not intended as tax advice and it does not purport

to describe all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a prospective purchaser, holder or disposer of Shares. In particular, save

where expressly stated to the contrary, this summary deals with shareholders who are resident and, in the case of individuals,

domiciled in (and only in) the UK for UK tax purposes, who hold their Shares as investments (other than under an individual savings

account) and who are the absolute beneficial owners of their Shares and any dividends paid on them.

The statements are not addressed to: (i) shareholders who own (or are deemed to own) 10% or more of the voting power of Barclays

Bank PLC; (ii) shareholders who hold Shares as part of hedging transactions; (iii) investors who have (or are deemed to have) acquired

their Shares by virtue of an office or employment; and (iv) shareholders who hold Shares in connection with a trade, profession or

vocation carried on in the UK (whether through a branch or agency or, in the case of a corporate shareholder, through a permanent

establishment, or otherwise). It does not discuss the tax treatment of classes of shareholder subject to special rules, such as dealers in

securities.

Persons who are in any doubt as to their tax position should consult their professional advisers. Persons who may be liable to taxation

in jurisdictions other than the UK in respect of their acquisition, holding or disposal of Shares are particularly advised to consult their

professional advisers as to whether they are so liable.

(i)Taxation of dividends

In accordance with UK law, Barclays Bank PLC pays dividends on the Shares without any deduction or withholding for or on account of

any taxes imposed by the UK government or any UK taxing authority.

The total dividends (including any dividends paid by Barclays Bank PLC) paid to a UK resident individual shareholder in a tax year (the

"Total Dividend Income") will generally form part of that shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes, and will be subject to

UK income tax at the rates discussed below.

For dividends paid on or after 6 April 2016, the rate of UK income tax applicable to the Total Dividend Income will depend on the

amount of the Total Dividend Income and the UK income tax band(s) that the Total Dividend Income falls within when included as part

of the shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes for that tax year.

For the tax year from 6 April 2025 to 5 April 2026 (inclusive), a nil rate of UK income tax applies to the first £500 of Total Dividend

Income received by an individual shareholder in that tax year (the "Nil Rate Amount"). For the 2024-2025 tax year, the Nil Rate Amount

was £500. For the 2023-2024 tax year, the Nil Rate Amount was £1,000. For the 2018-2019, 2019-2020, 2020-2021, 2021-2022 and

2022-2023 tax years, the Nil Rate Amount was £2,000.

Where the Total Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in a tax year exceeds the relevant Nil Rate Amount for that tax

year, the excess amount (the "Remaining Dividend Income") will, at the date hereof, be subject to UK income tax at the following

current rates for the tax year from 6 April 2025 to 5 April 2026:

(a)        at the rate of 8.75% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the basic tax band;

(b)        at the rate of 33.75% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the higher tax band; and

(c)        at the rate of 39.35% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the additional tax band.

The tax rates for the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the basic tax band and the higher tax band have been provisionally

increased by 2% for the tax year from 6 April 2026 to 5 April 2027 to 10.75% and 35.75% respectively pursuant to a series of

parliamentary resolutions that give provisional statutory effect to certain aspects of the UK government's Autumn Budget on 26

November 2025. It is expected these increases will be given permanent statutory effect following the enactment of the Finance (No. 2)

Bill 2024-26.

In determining the tax band the Remaining Dividend Income falls within for a tax year, the individual shareholder’s Total Dividend

Income for the tax year in question (including the portion comprising the Nil Rate Amount) will be treated as the top slice of the

shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes.

Subject to special rules for small companies, UK resident shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax will not generally be

subject to UK corporation tax on the dividends paid on the Shares, provided the dividend falls within an exempt class and certain

conditions are met.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	289

Additional unaudited information

(ii)Taxation of capital gains

The disposal of Shares may, depending on the shareholder’s circumstances, give rise to a liability to UK tax on chargeable capital gains.

Where Shares are sold, a liability to UK tax may result if the proceeds from that sale exceed the sum of the base cost of the Shares sold

and any other allowable deductions such as share dealing costs and, in certain circumstances, indexation relief (discussed further

below). For this purpose, current legislation permits the market valuation at 31 March 1982 to be substituted for the original cost of

shares purchased before that date, subject to certain exceptions for shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax. Shareholders

other than those within the charge to UK corporation tax should note that, following the Finance Act 2008, no indexation allowance

will be available. Following the Finance Act 2018, shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax may be eligible for indexation

allowance for the period of ownership of their Shares up to December 2017, but no indexation allowance will be available in respect of

the period of ownership starting on or after 1 January 2018.

Chargeable capital gains may also arise from the gifting of Shares to connected parties such as relatives (although not spouses or civil

partners) and family trusts.

The calculations required to compute chargeable capital gains may be complex. Shareholders are advised to consult their personal

financial adviser for further information regarding a possible tax liability in respect of their holdings of shares.

(iii)Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

Dealings in Shares will generally be subject to UK stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (although see the comments below as regards

ADSs in the section ‘Taxation of US holders – UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax’). Any document effecting the transfer on sale

of Shares will generally be liable to stamp duty at 0.5% of the consideration paid for that transfer (rounded up to the next £5). An

unconditional agreement to transfer Shares, or any interest therein, will generally be subject to stamp duty reserve tax at 0.5% of the

consideration given. Such liability to stamp duty reserve tax will be cancelled, or a right to a repayment (generally with interest) in

respect of the stamp duty reserve tax liability will arise, if the agreement is completed by a duly stamped transfer within six years of the

agreement having become unconditional. Both stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax are normally the liability of the transferee.

Paperless transfers of Shares within CREST are liable to stamp duty reserve tax rather than stamp duty.

Stamp duty reserve tax on transactions settled within the CREST system or reported through it for regulatory purposes will be collected

by CREST.

Special rules apply to certain categories of person, including intermediaries, market makers, brokers, dealers and persons connected

with depositary arrangements and clearance services.

(iv)Inheritance tax

An individual may be liable to inheritance tax on the transfer of Shares. Where an individual is so liable, inheritance tax may be charged

on the amount by which the value of his or her estate is reduced as a result of any transfer by way of gift or other gratuitous

transaction made by them or treated as made by them.

Taxation of US Holders

The following is a summary of certain US federal income tax considerations and certain UK tax considerations to the purchase,

ownership, and disposition of Preference Shares of Barclays Bank PLC or ADSs representing such Preference Shares (the "Shares") that

are likely to be relevant for US Holders (as defined below) who own the Shares as capital assets for tax purposes. This discussion is not

a comprehensive analysis of all the potential US or UK tax consequences that may be relevant to US Holders and does not discuss

particular tax consequences that may be applicable to US Holders who may be subject to special tax rules such as banks, brokers or

dealers in securities or currencies, traders in securities that elect to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for securities holdings,

financial institutions, tax-exempt organisations, regulated investment companies, life insurance companies, entities or arrangements

that are treated as partnerships for US federal income tax purposes (or partners therein), holders that own or are treated as owning

10% or more of the stock of Barclays Bank PLC measured either by voting power or value, holders that hold Shares as part of a straddle

or a hedging or conversion transaction, holders that purchase or sell Shares as part of a wash sale, holders whose functional currency

is not the US Dollar, or holders who are resident, or who are carrying on a trade, in the UK. The summary also does not address state or

local taxes or any aspect of US federal taxation other than US federal income taxation (such as the estate and gift tax, any alternative

minimum tax or the Medicare tax on net investment income). Investors are advised to consult their tax advisers regarding the tax

implications of their particular holdings, including the consequences under applicable state and local law, and in particular whether

they are eligible for the benefits of the Treaty (as defined below).

This discussion is based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the "IRC"), its legislative history, existing and proposed

regulations, published rulings and court decisions, and on the Double Taxation Convention between the UK and the US as entered into

force in March 2003 (the "Treaty"), and, in respect of UK tax, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention between the UK and the US as entered

into force on 11 November 1979 (the "Estate and Gift Tax Convention"), the current UK tax law and the practice of HMRC, all of which

are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis. This discussion is based in part upon the representations of the ADR Depositary

and the assumption that each obligation of the Deposit Agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its

terms.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	290

Additional unaudited information

A "US Holder" is a beneficial owner of Shares that is a citizen or resident of the United States or a US domestic corporation or that

otherwise is subject to US federal income taxation on a net income basis in respect of such Shares and that is fully eligible for benefits

under the Treaty.

In general, the holders of ADRs evidencing ADSs will be treated as owners of the underlying Preference Shares for the purposes of the

Treaty, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, and the IRC. Generally, exchanges of shares for ADRs and ADRs for shares will not be

subject to US federal income tax or to UK capital gains tax.

Taxation of dividends

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, the gross amount of any distribution of cash or property with respect to the Shares

(including any amount withheld in respect of UK taxes) that is paid out of Barclays Bank PLC’s current or accumulated earnings and

profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes) will be includible in a US Holder’s taxable income as ordinary dividend

income on the day such US Holder receives the dividend, in the case of Preference Shares, or the date the Depositary receives the

dividends, in the case of ADRs, and will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction allowed to corporations under the IRC.

Dividends paid by Barclays Bank PLC to an individual with respect to the Shares will generally be subject to taxation at a preferential

rate if the dividends are "qualified dividend income". Subject to certain exceptions for short-term positions, dividends paid on the

Shares will be treated as qualified dividend income if (i) the Shares are readily tradable on an established securities market in the United

States or Barclays Bank PLC is eligible for the benefits of a comprehensive tax treaty with the United States that the US Treasury

determines is satisfactory for purposes of this provision and that includes an exchange of information program, and (ii) Barclays Bank

PLC was not a PFIC (as defined below) in the year of the distribution or the immediately preceding taxable year. The US Treasury has

determined that the Treaty meets the requirements for reduced rates of taxation, and Barclays Bank PLC believes that it is eligible for

the benefits of the Treaty. Based on its audited financial statements and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays Bank PLC

believes that it was not treated as a PFIC for US federal income tax purposes with respect to its 2024 or 2025 taxable years. In addition,

based on its audited financial statements and current expectations regarding the value and nature of its assets, the sources and nature

of its income, and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays Bank PLC does not anticipate becoming a PFIC for its current taxable

year or in the foreseeable future.

Dividends paid by Barclays Bank PLC to a US Holder with respect to the Shares will not be subject to UK withholding tax. For foreign tax

credit purposes, dividends will generally be income from sources outside the US and will generally be "passive" income for purposes of

computing the foreign tax credit allowable to a US Holder.

The amount of the dividend distribution includable in income will be the US Dollar value of the distribution, determined at the spot

Pound Sterling/US Dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includable in income, regardless of whether the payment is in fact

converted into US Dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date

the dividend payment is includable in income to the date the payment is converted into US Dollars will be treated as ordinary income or

loss and, for foreign tax credit limitation purposes, from sources within the US, and will not be eligible for the special tax rates

applicable to qualified dividend income.

Distributions in excess of current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for US federal income tax purposes, will be

treated as a return of capital to the extent of the US Holder’s basis in the Shares and thereafter as capital gain. Because Barclays Bank

PLC does not currently maintain calculations of earnings and profits for US federal income tax purposes, US Holders should expect that

distributions with respect to the Shares will generally be treated as dividends.

Taxable sale or other disposition of Shares

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, upon a sale or other taxable disposition of the Shares, US Holders generally will not be

subject to UK tax, but will realise gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes in an amount equal to the difference between the US

Dollar value of the amount realised on the disposition and the US Holder’s adjusted tax basis in the Shares, as determined in US Dollars.

Such gain or loss will be capital gain or loss, and will generally be long‑term capital gain or loss if the Shares have been held for more

than one year. Long‑term capital gain of a noncorporate US Holder is generally taxed at preferential rates. The gain or loss will generally

be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes. The deductibility of capital losses is

subject to limitations.

Taxation of passive foreign investment companies (PFICs)

Based on its audited financial statements and relevant market and shareholder data, Barclays Bank PLC believes that it was not treated

as a PFIC for US federal income tax purposes with respect to its 2024 or 2025 taxable years.  In addition, based on its audited financial

statements and current expectations regarding the value and nature of its assets, the sources and nature of its income, and relevant

market and shareholder data, Barclays Bank PLC does not anticipate becoming a PFIC for its current taxable year or in the foreseeable

future. This conclusion is a factual determination that is made annually and thus may be subject to change. In general, Barclays Bank

PLC will be a PFIC with respect to a US Holder if, for any taxable year in which a US Holder holds the Shares, either (i) at least 75% of

the gross income of Barclays Bank PLC for the taxable year is passive income, or (ii) at least 50% of the value, generally determined on

the basis of a quarterly average, of Barclays Bank PLC’s assets is attributable to assets that produce or are held for the production of

passive income (including cash). With certain exceptions, a US Holder’s Shares will be treated as stock of a PFIC if Barclays Bank PLC

was a PFIC at any time during such holder’s holding period in its Shares.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	291

Additional unaudited information

If Barclays Bank PLC were to be treated as a PFIC with respect to a US Holder, unless such US Holder elected to be taxed annually on a

mark-to-market basis with respect to its Shares, gain and certain "excess distributions" would be treated as having been realised

ratably over a US Holder’s holding period for the Shares and generally would be taxed at the highest tax rate in effect for each such

year to which the gain was allocated, together with an interest charge in respect of the tax attributable to each such year.

UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

No obligation to pay UK stamp duty will arise on the transfer on sale of an ADS, provided that any instrument of transfer is not

executed in, and remains at all times outside, the UK. No UK stamp duty reserve tax is payable in respect of an agreement to transfer an

ADS. For the UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax implications of dealings in Preference Shares, see the section ‘Taxation of UK

holders – (iii) Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax‘ above.

UK estate and gift tax

Under the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, Shares held by an individual US holder who is US domiciled for the purposes of the Estate

and Gift Tax Convention and who is not for such purposes a UK national generally will not, provided any US federal estate or gift tax

chargeable has been paid, be subject to UK inheritance tax on the individual’s death or on a lifetime transfer of Shares, except in certain

cases where the Shares are comprised in a settlement (unless the settlor was US domiciled and not a UK national at the time of the

settlement), are part of the business property of a UK permanent establishment of an enterprise, or pertain to a UK fixed base of an

individual used for the performance of independent personal services. In cases where the Shares are subject to both UK inheritance tax

and US federal estate or gift tax, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention generally provides a credit against US federal tax liability for the

amount of any inheritance tax paid in the UK.

Foreign Financial Asset Reporting

Certain US Holders that own "specified foreign financial assets" with an aggregate value in excess of US$50,000 on the last day of the

taxable year or US$75,000 at any time during the taxable year are generally required to file an information statement along with their

tax returns, currently on Form 8938, with respect to such assets. "Specified foreign financial assets" include any financial accounts held

at a non-US financial institution, as well as securities issued by a non-US issuer that are not held in accounts maintained by financial

institutions. The understatement of income attributable to "specified foreign financial assets" in excess of US$5,000 extends the statute

of limitations with respect to the tax return to six years after the return was filed. US Holders who fail to report the required information

could be subject to substantial penalties. US Holders are encouraged to consult with their own tax advisors regarding the possible

application of these rules, including the application of the rules to their particular circumstances.

Backup Withholding and Information Reporting

Dividends paid on, and proceeds from the sale or other disposition of, the Shares to a US Holder generally may be subject to the

information reporting requirements of the IRC and may be subject to backup withholding unless the US Holder provides an accurate

taxpayer identification number and makes any other required certification or otherwise establishes an exemption. Backup withholding

is not an additional tax. The amount of any backup withholding from a payment to a US Holder will be allowed as a refund or credit

against the US Holder’s US federal income tax liability, provided the required information is furnished to the US Internal Revenue

Service ("IRS") in a timely manner.

A holder that is not a US Holder may be required to comply with certification and identification procedures in order to establish its

exemption from information reporting and backup withholding.

FATCA Risk Factor

In certain circumstances, payments on shares or ADSs may be subject to US withholding taxes on "passthru payments", starting on the

date that is two years after the date on which final regulations defining this concept are adopted in the United States. Under the

"Foreign Account Tax Compliance Act" (or "FATCA"), as well as intergovernmental agreements between the United States and other

countries and implementing laws in respect of the foregoing, certain US-source payments (including dividends and interest) and

certain payments made by, and financial accounts held with, entities that are classified as financial institutions under FATCA are

subject to a special information reporting and withholding tax regime. Regulations implementing withholding in respect of "passthru

payments" under FATCA have not yet been adopted or proposed. The United States has entered into an intergovernmental agreement

regarding the implementation of FATCA with the UK (the "UK IGA"). Under the UK IGA, as currently drafted, it is not expected that

Barclays Bank PLC will be required to withhold tax under FATCA on payments made with respect to the shares or ADSs. However,

significant aspects of when and how FATCA will apply remain unclear, and no assurance can be given that withholding under FATCA

will not become relevant with respect to payments made on or with respect to the shares or ADSs in the future. Holders should consult

their own tax advisers regarding the potential impact of FATCA.

The Barclays Group has registered with the Internal Revenue Service ("IRS") for FATCA. The Global Intermediary Identification Number

(GIIN) for Barclays Bank plc in the United Kingdom is E1QAZN.00001.ME.826 and it is a Reporting Model 1 FFI. The GIINs for other

parts of the Barclays Group or Barclays branches outside of the UK may be obtained from your usual Barclays contact on request. The

IRS list of registered Foreign Financial Institutions is publicly available on the IRS website.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	292

Additional unaudited information

Exchange controls and other limitations affecting security holders

Other than certain economic sanctions which may be in force from time to time, there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations

which would affect the transfer of capital or remittance of dividends, interest and other payments to holders of Barclays securities who

are not residents of the UK. There are also no restrictions under the Articles of Association of Barclays Bank PLC, or (subject to the

effect of any such economic sanctions) under current UK laws, which relate only to non-residents of the UK, and which limit the right

of such non-residents to hold Barclays securities or, when entitled to vote, to do so.

Documents on display

It is possible to read and copy documents that have been filed by Barclays Bank PLC with the US Securities and Exchange Commission

via commercial document retrieval services, and from the website maintained by the US Securities and Exchange Commission at

www.sec.gov.

Disclosure controls and procedures

The Chief Executive, C.S. Venkatakrishnan, and the Interim Chief Financial Officer, Anna Cross, conducted with Barclays Bank Group

Management an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Barclays Bank Group’s disclosure controls and

procedures of Barclays Bank PLC as at 31 December 2025, which are defined as those controls and procedures designed to ensure that

information required to be disclosed in reports filed or submitted under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed,

summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s rules and forms. As of the

date of the evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Interim Chief Financial Officer concluded that the design and operation of these

disclosure controls and procedures were effective.

Section 13(r) to the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Iran sanctions and related disclosure)

Section 13(r) of the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934 as amended (the “Exchange Act”) requires each SEC reporting issuer to

disclose in its annual and, if applicable, quarterly reports whether it or any of its affiliates have knowingly engaged in certain activities,

transactions or dealings relating to Iran or with the Government of Iran or certain designated natural persons or entities involved in

terrorism or the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction during the period covered by the report. The requirement includes

disclosure of activities not prohibited by U.S. or other law, even if conducted outside the U.S. by non-U.S. companies or affiliates in

compliance with local law. Pursuant to Section 13(r) of the Exchange Act, we note the following in relation to activity that occurred in

2025, the reporting period covered by this annual report. For completeness, we also include activity that we became aware of in 2025,

even if such activity occurred prior to the reporting period. Except as noted below, Barclays intends to continue the activities described.

Barclays does not allocate profits at the level of these activities, which in any event would not be significant, and we therefore report

only gross revenue where measurable. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 7,515.00 in relation to the activities disclosed

below.

Legacy Guarantees

Between 1992 and 2006, Barclays entered into several guarantees for the benefit of Iranian banks in connection with the supply of

goods and services by Barclays customers to Iranian buyers (the “Iranian guarantees”). These were counter guarantees issued to

Iranian banks to support guarantees issued by these banks to the Iranian buyers. The Iranian banks and a number of the Iranian buyers

were either subsequently designated as Specially Designated Nationals and Blocked Persons (“SDNs”) by the U.S. Department of the

Treasury’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (“OFAC”) or are owned by the Government of Iran. In addition, between 1993 and 2005,

Barclays entered into similar guarantees for the benefit of a Syrian bank that was subsequently designated pursuant to the Weapons of

Mass Destruction Proliferators Sanctions Regulations (“WMDPSR”) in August 2011 (the “WMDPSR guarantees”).

These guarantees were issued either on:

(i)an “extend or pay” basis, which means that, although the guarantee is of limited duration on its face, until there is full

performance under the contract to provide goods and services, the terms of the guarantee require Barclays to maintain the

guarantee or pay the beneficiary bank the full amount of the guarantee; or

(ii)the basis that Barclays’ obligations can be discharged only with the consent of the beneficiary counterparty.

Barclays is not able to exit its obligations under the above guarantees unilaterally, and thus it maintains a limited legacy portfolio of

these guarantees, which complied with applicable laws and regulations at the time they were entered into. Barclays intends to

terminate the guarantees where an agreement can be reached with the counterparty, in accordance with applicable laws and

regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to the Iranian guarantees and revenue of approximately GBP 7,405 in

relation to the WMDPSR guarantees prior to the lifting of sanctions against the Syrian bank.

Lease Payments

Barclays is party to a long-term lease, entered in 1979, with the National Iranian Oil Company (“NIOC”), pursuant to which Barclays

rents part of NIOC House in London. The lease is for 60 years, contains no early termination clause, and has 14 years remaining.

Barclays makes lease payments in GBP to the bank account of a solicitor that represents an entity owned by the Government of Iran.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	293

Additional unaudited information

The payments are made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this

activity.

Local Clearing Systems

Banks based in the United Arab Emirates (“UAE”), including certain Iranian banks designated pursuant to the Global Terrorism

Sanctions Regulations (“GTSR”) and/or Government of Iran-owned banks, participate in the various banking payment and settlement

systems used in the UAE (the “UAE Clearing Systems”). Barclays, by virtue of its banking activities in the UAE, participates in the UAE

Clearing Systems, in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. To mitigate the risk of engaging in transactions in which

participant Iranian SDN and/or Government of Iran-owned banks may be involved, Barclays has implemented restrictions relating to its

involvement in the UAE Clearing Systems. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity.

Other Activity

In 2025, Barclays processed payments to the embassy of the Government of Iran in the UK in relation to persons paying fees for

renewing or replacing passports, visa applications, and other administrative matters. The payments were processed in accordance with

applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity.

Barclays holds accounts for several UK-resident individuals employed by a UK-based SDN entity that is ultimately owned by the

Government of Iran. Payments are received in GBP from UK-based payment services companies and are credited to the customers’

accounts with Barclays. The payments are processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. No payments are received

directly from any entity owned by the Government of Iran or any SDN. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity.

In 2025, on behalf of certain customers in the UK, Barclays processed indirect payments from various UK-based offices of Iranian SDNs,

Government of Iran-owned entities, and SDNs designated pursuant to the GTSR (the “entities”). The payments were for general

business expenses, including rent, salary payments, tax payments, office maintenance, utility payments, and business travel expenses.

A UK accounting firm remitted the payments on behalf of the entities, and all the payments were processed in accordance with

applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 25 in 2025 in relation to this activity.

Barclays maintains a customer relationship with a UK-incorporated charity that works in the areas of blood cancer and stem cell

transplantation. In 2025, Barclays processed one payment, on behalf of our customer, where the ultimate beneficiary of the payment

was a medical organization affiliated with the Government of Iran. The payment was for the procurement of a blood sample from an

individual in Iran who is a potential donor. The payment was processed in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays

attributed revenue of approximately GBP 10 in 2025 in relation to this activity.

In 2025, the UK Government expanded their “Legal Services” General Licence to allow the payment of fees for legal services provided

to entities designated under the Iran (Sanctions) (Nuclear) (EU Exit) Regulations, and the Iran (Sanctions) (EU Exit) Regulations 2023.

Several Barclays customers relied upon this General Licence for the receipt of fees due in relation to legal services given to Government

of Iran-owned entities. All related payments being processed under this General Licence were done in accordance with applicable laws

and regulations, including with the General Licence itself. Barclays attributed GBP 45 revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity.

Barclays acted as a correspondent bank for a payment in 2025, which was remitted from a private Indian Commercial entity to a UK-

based patent and trademark agent. The payment was settling an invoice for services and fees provided by the UK agent to the Indian

Company in connection with applying for a trademark with the Iranian trademark office. The payment did not involve a customer of

Barclays, was not to or from any individual or entity owned by the Government of Iran or any SDN, and was processed in accordance

with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed GBP 15 of revenue in 2025 in relation to this payment.

Barclays maintains a customer relationship with His Majesty's Revenue & Customs, a UK Government agency, which receives funds

from financial institutions, some of which are entities designated pursuant to the GTSR, and/or ultimately owned by the Government

of Iran, in relation to the settlement of tax liabilities with the UK Government. The payments were processed in accordance with

applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed revenue of approximately GBP 15 in 2025 in relation to this activity.

Frozen Accounts

Barclays, and several Barclays customers, continue to hold funds belonging to various SDNs and Government of Iran-owned entities in

internal blocked and sundry accounts, some of which are interest bearing. These accounts are held in accordance with applicable laws

and regulations. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2025 in relation to this activity.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	294

Additional unaudited information

Insider trading policies

The Barclays Group has adopted insider trading policies and procedures governing the purchase, sale, and other dealings in securities

issued by members of the Barclays Group by directors, senior management and certain employees that are designed to promote

compliance with applicable insider trading laws, rules and regulations. These policies and procedures are included in the Barclays

Group Securities Dealing Code, which is filed as Exhibit 11.2 to this annual report on Form 20-F.

The Barclays Group monitors inside information as defined under the Market Abuse Regulation 2014/596 (as it forms part of domestic

law by virtue of the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as amended) (“MAR”) as part of its compliance with MAR and as part of

its disclosure controls and procedures, and imposes restrictions on trading in its own securities for its own account when it has

undisclosed inside information. The Barclays Group also generally refrains from trading in its own securities for its own account during

its regular closed periods.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	295

Additional unaudited information

Income statement commentary

Consolidated income statement commentary

The Barclays Bank Group’s profit before tax increased 25% to £5,943m mainly driven by strong growth in Global Markets

within IB.

The Barclays Bank Group maintains a diverse income profile across businesses and geographies. The appreciation of average

GBP against USD negatively impacted income and profits, and positively impacted credit impairment charges and total

operating expenses.

Refer to Note 2 Segmental Reporting for the Barclays Bank Group results by reporting segments.

2025 compared to 2024

•Total income increased 10% to £20,927m (FY24: £19,037m)

–IB income increased 9% to £13,330m (FY24: £12,192m), primarily driven by strong growth in Global

Markets across both FICC and Equities, reflecting continued support provided to clients, and was

additionally supported by higher income in the International Corporate Bank. This was partially offset by a

decrease in Banking fees and underwriting income primarily from a strong prior year comparator in Equity

Capital Markets, which included fees booked on a large UK rights issue in Q224. The overall increase

includes FX adversity

–USCB income increased 11% to £3,708m (FY24: £3,351m), driven by organic business growth, the

acquisition of the GM portfolio, increased purchase activity, and a c.£40m one-off benefit related to partner

rewards in Q425. NII increased 6% to £2,849m, including business growth and repricing initiatives. Net fee,

commission and other income increased 29% to £859m driven by purchases and fee growth

–UKCB income increased 14% to £2,125m (FY24: £1,856m). NII increased 21% to £1,532m, driven by higher

average deposit and lending balances, and higher structural hedge income. Net fee, commission, trading

and other income was stable at £593m

–PBWM income increased 6% to £1,418m (FY24: £1,341m), driven by growth in deposit, invested asset and

loan balances from net new inflows and market movements

–Head Office income increased 16% to £346m (FY24: £297m income), mainly driven by the non-recurrence

of the prior year loss on sale of the performing Italian retail mortgage portfolio, partially offset by the impact

of the disposal of the German consumer finance business in Q125 and a fair value write-down of a legacy

portfolio

•Total operating expenses increased 3% to £13,105m (FY24: £12,673m), primarily reflecting investment spend, business

growth and inflation, partially offset by efficiency savings and favourable FX movements. Litigation and conduct charges

of £284m were mainly related to a charge for motor finance redress in Q325

•Credit impairment charges were £1,866m (FY24: £1,617m), primarily driven by the impact from the acquisition of GM

portfolio, an IB single name charge and elevated US macroeconomic uncertainty. US cards 30 and 90 day arrears rates1

were 3.0% (Q424: 3.0%) and 1.6% (Q424: 1.6%) respectively. The USCB total coverage ratio decreased to 11.1%

(December 2024: 11.4%) due to the acquisition of the GM portfolio

•The effective tax rate (ETR) was 21.6% (FY24: 21%). The 2025 ETR includes tax relief on payments made under

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments and on holdings of inflation-linked government bonds.

Notes

1 Including a co-branded cards portfolio classified as assets held for sale

Please refer to "Income Statement commentary" in the "Additional information" section of the 2024 Annual Report on Form

20-F for a comparative discussion of 2024 financial results compared to 2023.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	296

Additional unaudited information

Balance sheet commentary

Consolidated balance sheet commentary

2025 compared to 2024

Total assets

Total assets increased by £26.9bn to £1,245.5bn.

Cash and balances at central banks increased £28.2bn to £208.5bn primarily driven by a higher liquidity pool, funded by increased

wholesale funding and deposit growth across businesses.

Loans and advances at amortised cost to banks and customers increased £6.0bn to £150.8bn reflecting the strategic focus to grow

customer lending in UKCB.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost increased £14.3bn to £17.7bn due to growth in

secured financing balances.

Trading portfolio assets increased £23.5bn to £189.7bn driven by increased trading activity to facilitate client demand in Global

Markets, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD.

Financial assets at fair value through the income statement decreased £6.8bn to £185.0bn as underlying growth in financing balances

were more than offset by increased netting opportunities and the strengthening of spot GBP against USD.

Derivative financial instrument assets decreased £40.2bn to £252.2bn primarily driven by a reduction in mark-to-market on FX

derivatives and strengthening of spot GBP against USD, partially offset by an increase in equity derivatives.

Total liabilities

Total liabilities increased £23.9bn to £1,183.2bn.

Deposits at amortised cost to banks and customers increased £25.4bn to £344.8bn driven by growth in deposits across International

Corporate Bank, treasury and UKCB, partially offset by the strengthening of spot GBP against USD.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value increased £13.8bn to £293.5bn driven by increase in client activity and growth in financing

balances partially offset by increased netting opportunities and the strengthening of spot GBP against USD.

Derivative financial instruments decreased £38.6bn to £240.8bn primarily driven by a reduction in mark-to-market on FX derivatives

and strengthening of spot GBP against USD, partially offset by an increase in equity derivatives.

Total shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity increased £3.1bn to £62.3bn.

Retained earnings increased £1.1bn to £49.7bn, mainly due to profits of £3.9bn, offset by dividends of £2.6bn and preference share

redemptions of £0.3bn.

Other equity instruments increased £0.8bn to £10.4bn. In 2025, there were three issuances of AT1 instruments, in the form of Fixed

Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, for £2.8bn, offset by three redemptions totalling £1.9bn. AT1

securities are perpetual subordinated contingent convertible securities structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under prevailing capital

rules applicable as at the relevant issue date.

Other reserves increased by £1.1bn over the year, resulting in a closing balance of a £0.2bn loss. This change was mainly due to a

£1.5bn gain in the cash flow hedging reserve driven by fair value gains on interest rate swaps from a decrease in GBP and USD forward

curves, and transferred losses from de-designated hedges. Further significant changes within other reserves included a £0.7bn gain in

the fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) reserve, which reduced the loss to £1.0bn. This gain was mainly due to a

decrease in the USD rates curve and a tightening of Euro asset swap spreads. These gains were partially offset by a £1.2bn loss in the

currency translation reserve, resulting in a closing accumulated gain of £2.5bn, reflecting movements in US interest rates.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	297

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Deposits

Average deposits at amortised cost, average interest rate paid - split by type and UK vs Non-UK

The following tables present average deposits at amortised cost and their associated interest expense by deposit type split into UK & Non-UK. For the year ended

31 December 2025 the region has been updated to reflect the location of the office in which the deposits are recorded. For the year ended 31 December 2024 and

2023 the region is based on the customer location.

Barclays Bank Group	Average deposits<br><br>at amortised cost	Interest expense	Average interest<br><br>rate
For the year ended 31 December 2025	£m	£m	%
UK
Non- interest bearing current and demand account	23,244		—
Interest bearing current and demand account	71,950	1,300	1.8
Savings and time deposits1	108,567	3,805	3.5
Total UK	203,761	5,105	2.5
Non-UK
---	---	---	---
Non- interest bearing current and demand account	9,942		—
Interest bearing current and demand account	32,112	860	2.7
Savings and time deposits1,2	88,635	2,758	3.1
Total Non-UK	130,689	3,618	2.8
Total Deposits at amortised cost	334,450	8,723	2.6
Barclays Bank Group	Average deposits<br><br>at amortised cost	Interest expense	Average interest<br><br>rate
---	---	---	---
For the year ended 31 December 2024	£m	£m	%
UK
Non- interest bearing current and demand account	24,753	—	—
Interest bearing current and demand account	63,925	1,123	1.8
Savings and time deposits1	69,626	3,147	4.5
Total UK	158,304	4,270	2.7
Non-UK
---	---	---	---
Non- interest bearing current and demand account	9,559	—	—
Interest bearing current and demand account	32,875	913	2.8
Savings and time deposits1,2	122,800	5,330	4.3
Total Non-UK	165,234	6,243	3.8
Total Deposits at amortised cost	323,538	10,513	3.2
Barclays Bank Group	Average deposits<br><br>at amortised cost	Interest expense	Average interest<br><br>rate
---	---	---	---
For the year ended 31 December 2023	£m	£m	%
UK
Non- interest bearing current account and demand account	34,895	—	—
Interest bearing current and demand account	39,428	437	1.1
Savings and time deposits1	82,358	3,447	4.2
Total UK	156,681	3,884	2.5
Non-UK
---	---	---	---
Non- interest bearing current and demand account	15,605	—	—
Interest bearing current and demand account	14,893	85	0.6
Savings and time deposits1	120,345	4,772	4.0
Total Non-UK	150,843	4,857	3.2
Total Deposits at amortised cost	307,524	8,741	2.8

Notes

1  For information on term deposits please refer to the Barclays Bank Annual Report contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities note.

2. Average deposits includes held for sale balances generating interest expense.

As at 31 December 2025, deposits at amortised cost in offices in the United Kingdom received from non-residents amounted to

£45,686m (2024: £42,280m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	298

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Uninsured other time deposits

Uninsured deposits are presented on an approximate basis based on Barclays Bank Group’s deposits less those eligible for the deposit

insurance schemes. The maturity for uninsured deposits is based on the residual maturity.

Barclays Bank Group	2025	2024
	£m	£m
3 months or less	85,996	82,001
3 to 6 months	30,639	25,521
6 to 12 months	18,057	12,019
12 months and over	3,075	4,171
Total	137,767	123,712

As at 31 December 2025, £278m (2024: £433m) of U.S. time deposits were in excess of the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation

insurance limit.

Of the total deposits at amortised cost, there are uninsured deposits of £269,615m (2024: £248,543m) which are not insured through

the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) or other similar deposits schemes.

Contractual obligations

Contractual obligations include debt securities and purchase obligations.

Contractual obligations
	Payments due by period
	Less than one<br><br>year	Between one<br><br>to three years	Between three<br><br>to five years	After five<br><br>years	Total
Barclays Bank Group	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Long-term debt1	51,838	14,970	11,783	41,244	119,835
Purchase obligations	214	244	60	6	524
Total	52,052	15,214	11,843	41,250	120,359
As at 31 December 2024
Long-term debt1	28,768	12,700	9,594	43,636	94,698
Purchase obligations	204	178	88	25	495
Total	28,972	12,878	9,682	43,661	95,193

Note

1. Long-term debt has been prepared to reflect cash flows on an undiscounted basis, which includes interest payments.

Net cash flows from derivatives used to hedge long-term debt amount to £(1.4)bn (2024: £(2.0)bn).

Further information on the contractual maturity of the Group’s assets, liabilities (including lease liabilities), and contingent liabilities and

commitments is provided in the Liquidity Risk section.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	299

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Contractual obligations
	Payments due by period
	Less than one<br><br>year	Between one<br><br>to three years	Between three<br><br>to five years	After five<br><br>years	Total
Barclays Bank PLC	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
As at 31 December 2025
Long-term debt1	33,840	13,019	11,425	36,534	94,818
Purchase obligations	29	26	—	—	55
Total	33,869	13,045	11,425	36,534	94,873
As at 31 December 2024
Long-term debt1	9,321	11,746	8,720	38,779	68,566
Purchase obligations	30	19	—	—	49
Total	9,351	11,765	8,720	38,779	68,615

Note

1  Long-term debt has been prepared to reflect cash flows on an undiscounted basis, which includes interest payments.

Net cash flows from derivatives used to hedge long-term debt amount to £(1.4)bn (2024: £(2.1)bn).

Further information on the contractual maturity of the Group’s assets, liabilities (including lease liabilities), and contingent liabilities and

commitments is provided in the Liquidity Risk section.

Securities

Investment securities include debt securities reported at amortised cost and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive

income.

Investment in debt securities principally include government securities held as part of the liquidity risk management within the

Treasury and Capital Risk framework. In addition, the Group holds as investments in corporate securities.

The weighted average yield for each maturity range is determined by dividing the annualized interest income for the year ended

December 31, 2025, by the book value of debt securities as of that date.

Maturities and yield of investment debt securities
Barclays Bank Group	Maturing within one<br><br>year		Maturing after one<br><br>but within five years		Maturing after five<br><br>but within ten years		Maturing after ten<br><br>years		Total
	Amount	Yield	Amount	Yield	Amount	Yield	Amount	Yield	Amount	Yield
As at 31 December 2025	£m	%	£m	%	£m	%	£m	%	£m	%
Debt securities at amortised cost	10,147	4.0%	28,427	3.6%	3,158	4.6%	13,421	3.6%	55,153	3.7%
Financial assets at fair value through<br><br>other comprehensive income	2,998	2.1%	14,460	3.0%	15,763	3.2%	7,230	2.9%	40,451	3.0%
Total book Value	13,145		42,887		18,921		20,651		95,604

The above table is only for debt securities held at the reporting date and does not include associated hedges.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	300

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Average balance sheet

Average balances are based upon monthly averages. UK and Non-UK is based on the location of the office where the transactions are

recorded

Assets		2025
Barclays Bank Group		Average<br><br>balance	Net interest1	Rate
		£m	£m	%
Cash and balances at central banks	UK	77,384	2,706	3.5
Cash and balances at central banks	Non-UK	125,164	5,053	4.0
Cash and balances at central banks	Total	202,548	7,759	3.8
Loans and advances at amortised cost	UK	74,352	3,273	4.4
Loans and advances at amortised cost	Non-UK	82,250	6,051	7.4
Loans and advances at amortised cost2,5,6	Total	156,602	9,324	6.0
Debt securities at amortised cost	UK	40,026	1,293	3.2
Debt securities at amortised cost	Non-UK	14,554	660	4.5
Debt securities at amortised cost	Total	54,580	1,953	3.6
Cash collateral	UK	48,374	1,527	3.2
Cash collateral	Non-UK	25,698	322	1.3
Cash collateral	Total	74,072	1,849	2.5
Reverse repurchase agreements	UK	5,234	170	3.2
Reverse repurchase agreements	Non-UK	993	7	0.7
Reverse repurchase agreements	Total	6,227	177	2.8
Fair value through other comprehensive income	UK	42,253	1,679	4.0
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Non-UK	5,389	165	3.1
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Total	47,642	1,844	3.9
Other3		—	503	—
Total interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income		541,671	23,409	4.3
Less: interest and similar expense			(16,115)
Net interest income			7,294
Other assets4		802,680
Total		1,344,351
Percentage of total average interest earning assets with interest recognise in<br><br>interest income for offices outside the UK		47%

Notes:

1  Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest.

2Loans and advances at amortised cost include all doubtful lending. Interest receivable on such lending has been included to the extent to which either cash

payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Barclays Bank Group.

3 Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity and interest income on pensions.

4 The interest on Trading portfolio assets, Derivative financial instruments  and Financial assets at fair value through the income statement are recognise

principally in net trading income and the average balances for these assets are included in Other assets.

5 Average loans and advances include held for sale balances generating interest income.

6 Material loan fees included in interest income for 2025 is £862m (2024: £863m, 2023: £861m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	301

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Assets		2024
Barclays Bank Group		Average<br><br>balance	Net interest1	Rate
		£m	£m	%
Cash and balances at central banks	UK	80,989	3,668	4.5
Cash and balances at central banks	Non-UK	120,834	5,899	4.9
Cash and balances at central banks	Total	201,823	9,567	4.7
Loans and advances at amortised cost	UK	67,749	2,892	4.3
Loans and advances at amortised cost	Non-UK	86,212	6,616	7.7
Loans and advances at amortised cost2,5,6	Total	153,961	9,508	6.2
Debt securities at amortised cost	UK	34,959	1,302	3.7
Debt securities at amortised cost	Non-UK	9,968	435	4.4
Debt securities at amortised cost	Total	44,927	1,737	3.9
Cash collateral	UK	47,807	1,403	2.9
Cash collateral	Non-UK	25,299	623	2.5
Cash collateral	Total	73,106	2,026	2.8
Reverse repurchase agreements	UK	1,655	47	2.8
Reverse repurchase agreements	Non-UK	772	28	3.6
Reverse repurchase agreements	Total	2,427	75	3.1
Fair value through other comprehensive income	UK	48,866	2,072	4.2
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Non-UK	4,817	263	5.5
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Total	53,683	2,335	4.3
Other3		—	532	—
Total interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income		529,927	25,780	4.9
Less: interest and similar expense			(19,035)
Net interest income			6,745
Other assets4		776,617
Total		1,306,544
Percentage of total average interest earning assets with interest<br><br>recognise in interest income for offices outside the UK		47%

Notes

1  Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024,( 2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest..

2Loans and advances at amortised cost include all doubtful lending. Interest receivable on such lending has been included to the extent to which either cash

payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Barclays Bank Group.

3 Other principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

4The interest on Trading portfolio assets, Derivative financial instruments  and Financial assets at fair value through the income statement are recognise

principally in net trading income and the average balances for these assets are included in Other assets.

5  Average loans and advances include held for sale balances generating interest income.

6  Material loan fees included in interest income for 2025 is £862m (2024: £863m, 2023: £861m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	302

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Assets		2023
Barclays Bank Group		Average<br><br>balance	Netinterest1
		£m	m
Cash and balances at central banks	UK	78,548	3,101
Cash and balances at central banks	Non-UK	133,302	5,279
Cash and balances at central banks	Total	211,850	8,380
Loans and advances at amortised cost	UK	68,109	2,622
Loans and advances at amortised cost	Non-UK	87,236	5,232
Loans and advances at amortised cost2,5	Total	155,345	7,854
Debt securities at amortised cost	UK	29,043	1,597
Debt securities at amortised cost	Non-UK	4,808	222
Debt securities at amortised cost	Total	33,851	1,819
Cash collateral	UK	51,205	1,295
Cash collateral	Non-UK	25,880	692
Cash collateral	Total	77,085	1,987
Reverse repurchase agreements	UK	700	22
Reverse repurchase agreements	Non-UK	1,247	55
Reverse repurchase agreements	Total	1,947	77
Fair value through other comprehensive income	UK	45,340	3,646
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Non-UK	3,458	162
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Total	48,798	3,808
Other3			283
Total interest earning assets with interest recognise in interest income		528,876	24,208
Less: interest and similar expense			(17,555)
Net interest income			6,653
Other assets4		765,497
Total		1,294,373
Percentage of total average interest earning assets with interest<br><br>recognise in interest income for offices outside the UK		48%

All values are in British Pounds.

Notes

1  Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest.

2Loans and advances at amortised cost include all doubtful lending. Interest receivable on such lending has been included to the extent to which either cash

payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Barclays Bank Group.

3 Other principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

4The interest on Trading portfolio assets, Derivative financial instruments  and Financial assets at fair value through the income statement are recognise

principally in net trading income and the average balances for these assets are included in Other assets.

5  Material loan fees included in interest income for 2025 is £862m (2024: £863m, 2023: £861m).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	303

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Liabilities
		2025
Barclays Bank Group		Average<br><br>balance	Net<br><br>interest1	Rate
		£m	£m	%
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	UK	180,517	5,105	2.8
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Non-UK	120,747	3,618	3.0
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Total	301,264	8,723	2.9
Cash collateral	UK	46,432	1,045	2.3
Cash collateral	Non-UK	26,071	408	1.6
Cash collateral	Total	72,503	1,453	2.0
Debt securities in issue	UK	11,082	622	5.6
Debt securities in issue	Non-UK	34,651	1,929	5.6
Debt securities in issue	Total	45,733	2,551	5.6
Subordinated liabilities	UK	43,736	2,931	6.7
Subordinated liabilities	Non-UK	594	42	7.1
Subordinated liabilities	Total	44,330	2,973	6.7
Repurchase agreements	UK	21,376	114	0.5
Repurchase agreements	Non-UK	3,460	221	6.4
Repurchase agreements	Total	24,836	335	1.3
Other2		—	80	—
Total interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest expense		488,666	16,115	3.3
Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity3		855,685
Total		1,344,351
Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise<br><br>in interest expense for offices outside the UK		38%

Notes

1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest.

2 Other principally includes includes lease interest.

3The interest on Trading portfolio liabilities, Derivative financial instruments  and Financial liabilities at fair value through the income statement are recognise

principally in net trading income and the average balances for these liabilities are included in Other liabilities.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	304

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Liabilities		2024
Barclays Bank Group		Average<br><br>balance	Net<br><br>interest1	Rate
		£m	£m	%
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	UK	174,867	5,636	3.2
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Non-UK	114,359	4,877	4.3
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost4	Total	289,226	10,513	3.6
Cash collateral	UK	45,229	1,419	3.1
Cash collateral	Non-UK	25,327	766	3.0
Cash collateral	Total	70,556	2,185	3.1
Debt securities in issue	UK	14,111	794	5.6
Debt securities in issue	Non-UK	30,457	2,053	6.7
Debt securities in issue	Total	44,568	2,847	6.4
Subordinated liabilities	UK	38,077	2,940	7.7
Subordinated liabilities	Non-UK	668	50	7.5
Subordinated liabilities	Total	38,745	2,990	7.7
Repurchase agreements	UK	30,279	295	1.0
Repurchase agreements	Non-UK	1,673	123	7.4
Repurchase agreements	Total	31,952	418	1.3
Other2		—	82	—
Total interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest<br><br>expense		475,047	19,035	4.0
Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity3		831,497
Total		1,306,544
Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities with interest<br><br>recognise in interest expense for offices outside the UK		36%

Notes

1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, (2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest.

2 Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

3The interest on Trading portfolio liabilities, Derivative financial instruments  and Financial liabilities at fair value through the income statement are recognise

principally in net trading income and the average balances for these liabilities are included in Other liabilities.

4 Average interest bearing deposits at amortised cost include held for sale balances generating interest expense.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	305

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Liabilities		2023
Barclays Bank Group		Average<br><br>balance	Net<br><br>interest1	Rate
		£m	£m	%
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	UK	162,350	5,000	3.1
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Non-UK	94,674	3,741	4.0
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Total	257,024	8,741	3.4
Cash collateral	UK	44,383	1,406	3.2
Cash collateral	Non-UK	25,678	800	3.1
Cash collateral	Total	70,061	2,206	3.1
Debt securities in issue	UK	21,856	1,032	4.7
Debt securities in issue	Non-UK	36,272	1,952	5.4
Debt securities in issue	Total	58,128	2,984	5.1
Subordinated liabilities	UK	36,568	2,653	7.3
Subordinated liabilities	Non-UK	607	44	7.2
Subordinated liabilities	Total	37,175	2,697	7.3
Repurchase agreements	UK	19,371	586	3.0
Repurchase agreements	Non-UK	1,899	73	3.8
Repurchase agreements	Total	21,270	659	3.1
Other2			268	—
Total interest bearing liabilities with interest recognise in interest<br><br>expense		443,658	17,555	4.0
Other liabilities and Shareholders' equity3		850,715
Total		1,294,373
Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities with<br><br>interest recognise in interest expense for offices outside the UK		36%

Notes

1 Negative interest paid on assets is immaterial for 2025 and 2024, ( 2023: £53m) which is presented within net interest.

2 Other principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

3The interest on Trading portfolio liabilities, Derivative financial instruments  and Financial liabilities at fair value through the income statement are recognise

principally in net trading income and the average balances for these liabilities are included in Other liabilities.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	306

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Changes in total interest – volume and rate analysis

The following tables allocate changes in interest between changes in volume and changes in interest rates for the last two years.

Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on

average interest earning assets and average interest bearing liabilities. Where variances have arisen from changes in both volumes and

interest rates, these have been allocated proportionately between the two.

Interest income
Barclays Bank Group			2025/2024<br><br>Change due to<br><br>increase/<br><br>(decrease) in:			2024/2023<br><br>Change due to<br><br>increase/<br><br>(decrease) in:
		Total<br><br>change	Volume	Rate	Total<br><br>change	Volume	Rate
		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Cash and balances at central banks	UK	(962)	(157)	(805)	567	98	469
Cash and balances at central banks	Non-UK	(846)	205	(1,051)	620	(527)	1,147
Cash and balances at central banks	Total	(1,808)	48	(1,856)	1,187	(429)	1,616
Loans and advances at amortised cost	UK	381	289	92	270	(14)	284
Loans and advances at amortised cost	Non-UK	(565)	(297)	(268)	1,384	(62)	1,446
Loans and advances at amortised cost	Total	(184)	(8)	(176)	1,654	(76)	1,730
Debt securities at amortised cost	UK	(9)	176	(185)	(295)	284	(579)
Debt securities at amortised cost	Non-UK	225	207	18	213	226	(13)
Debt securities at amortised cost	Total	216	383	(167)	(82)	510	(592)
Cash collateral	UK	124	17	107	108	(90)	198
Cash collateral	Non-UK	(301)	10	(311)	(69)	(16)	(53)
Cash collateral	Total	(177)	27	(204)	39	(106)	145
Reverse repurchase agreements	UK	123	116	7	25	27	(2)
Reverse repurchase agreements	Non-UK	(21)	6	(27)	(27)	(18)	(9)
Reverse repurchase agreements	Total	102	122	(20)	(2)	9	(11)
Fair value through other comprehensive income	UK	(393)	(268)	(125)	(1,574)	265	(1,839)
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Non-UK	(98)	28	(126)	101	72	29
Fair value through other comprehensive income	Total	(491)	(240)	(251)	(1,473)	337	(1,810)
Other interest and similar income		(29)	—	(29)	248	—	248
Total interest receivable		(2,371)	332	(2,703)	1,571	245	1,326		Interest expense
---	---	---	---	---	---	---	---
Barclays Bank Group			2025/2024<br><br>Change due to<br><br>increase/<br><br>(decrease) in:			2024/2023<br><br>Change due to<br><br>increase/<br><br>(decrease) in:
		Total<br><br>change	Volume	Rate	Total<br><br>change	Volume	Rate
		£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	UK	(531)	177	(708)	635	396	239
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Non-UK	(1,259)	259	(1,518)	1,136	823	313
Interest bearing deposits at amortised cost	Total	(1,790)	436	(2,226)	1,771	1,219	552
Cash collateral liabilities	UK	(374)	37	(411)	13	27	(14)
Cash collateral liabilities	Non-UK	(358)	22	(380)	(34)	(11)	(23)
Cash collateral liabilities	Total	(732)	59	(791)	(21)	16	(37)
Debt securities in issue	UK	(172)	(170)	(2)	(238)	(411)	173
Debt securities in issue	Non-UK	(124)	261	(385)	101	(344)	445
Debt securities in issue	Total	(296)	91	(387)	(137)	(755)	618
Subordinated liabilities	UK	(9)	406	(415)	287	112	175
Subordinated liabilities	Non-UK	(8)	(6)	(2)	6	4	2
Subordinated liabilities	Total	(17)	400	(417)	293	116	177
Repurchase agreements	UK	(181)	(72)	(109)	(291)	228	(519)
Repurchase agreements	Non-UK	98	116	(18)	50	(10)	60
Repurchase agreements	Total	(83)	44	(127)	(241)	218	(459)
Other interest expense		(2)	—	(2)	(186)	—	(186)
Total interest payable		(2,920)	1,030	(3,950)	1,479	814	665
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	307
---	---

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Credit risk additional disclosure

This section of the report contains supplementary information that is more detailed or contains longer histories than the data

presented in the Risk review section.

Potential Problem Loans

Potential problem loans are those loans for which serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with

repayment terms in the near future.

The loans and advances at amortised cost by product disclosure in the credit risk section includes gross exposure and associated

impairment allowance for assets classified as Stage 2, but not past due i.e. assets satisfying the criteria for a Significant Increase in

Credit Risk, but which are still complying with repayment terms.

A financial asset is subject to forbearance when it is modified due to the credit distress of the borrower. A modification made to the

terms of an asset due to forbearance will typically be assessed as a non-substantial modification that does not result in derecognition

of the original loan, except in circumstances where debt is exchanged for equity. Both performing and non-performing forbearance

assets are classified as Stage 3 except where it is established that the concession granted has not resulted in diminished financial

obligation and that no other regulatory definition of default criteria has been triggered, in which case the asset is classified as Stage 2.

The minimum probationary period for non-performing forbearance is 12 months and for performing forbearance, 24 months. Hence, a

minimum of 36 months is required for non-performing forbearance to move out of a forborne state.

In order to assess asset credit quality, 12-month PDs are used to map assets into strong, satisfactory, higher risk or credit impaired. A

credit risk profile by internal PD grade for gross loans and advances at amortised cost and allowance for ECL is shown in the credit risk

section, analysing each of these categories by stage.

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on graded watchlists comprising four categories,

graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default. Where a counterparty’s

financial health gives grounds for concern, it is immediately placed into the appropriate category. Once an account has been placed on

a watchlist, the exposure is monitored and, where appropriate, exposure reductions are effected.

Impairment

Loans and Advances at fair value are not subject to ECL under IFRS 9 and are excluded from the disclosure below.

Allocation of the Allowance for Credit Losses	Barclays Bank Group
Balance at end of period applicable to:	Amount
	2025	2024	2024
As at 31 December	£m	m
Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Banks	11	9	5.8%
Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Customers	3,606	3,411	92.0%
Financial Assets at Fair Value through Other Comprehensive Income	1	2	2.2%
Loans and Advances1	3618	3422	100%

All values are in British Pounds.

Net Charge offs during the period to average loans outstanding2
Barclays Bank Group	Amount
	2025	2024	2023
As at 31 December	£m	£m	£m
Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Banks
Net charge off	—	—	—
Average loans	9,291	8,819	9,978
Ratio %	—%	—%	—%
Loans and Advances at amortised cost to Customers
Net charge off	1,100	1,227	815
Average loans	147,311	145,142	145,367
Ratio %	0.7%	0.8%	0.6%
Financial Assets at Fair Value through Other Comprehensive Income
Net charge off	—	—	—
Average loans	2797	1784	346
Ratio	—%	—%	—%
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	308
---	---

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Consolidated Basis	Barclays Bank Group
Allowance for Credit losses to total loans outstanding	Amount
	2025	2024
As at 31 December	£m	£m
Allowance for credit losses	3,618	3,422
Total loans outstanding	156,770	151,530
Ratio	2.3%	2.3%

Notes

1      Total Loans outstanding excludes Debt Securities at amortised cost.

2      Average loans and advances include held for sale balances.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	309

Additional unaudited information

Additional financial disclosure

Maturity analysis of Gross loans and advances

Traded Loans are included in the 'on demand' column at their fair value.  Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of

contractual maturity since these items are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled before

contractual maturity at fair value.

Maturity analysis of Gross loans and advances
Barclays Bank Group	Less than<br><br>1 year	One to<br><br>Five Years	Five to<br><br>fifteen<br><br>years	Over<br><br>fifteen<br><br>years	Total
As at 31 December 2025	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and Advances at Amortised cost to banks	9,047	—	—	—	9,047
Loans and Advances at Amortised cost to Customers	43,018	76,160	20,217	5,961	145,356
Loans and Advances at Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income	72	815	1,480	—	2,367
Loans and Advances at Fair Value through Profit and Loss	40,155	4,480	1,391	859	46,885
Traded loans	12,249	—	—	—	12,249
Total Gross  loans and advances	104,541	81,455	23,088	6,820	215,904
	Less than<br><br>1 year	One to<br><br>Five Years	Five to<br><br>fifteen<br><br>years	Over<br><br>fifteen<br><br>years	Total
As at 31 December 2024	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and Advances at Amortised cost to banks	8,789	—	—	—	8,789
Loans and Advances at Amortised cost to customers	43,306	69,551	20,785	5,817	139,459
Loans and Advances at Fair Value Through Other Comprehensive Income	74	1,786	1,423	—	3,283
Loans and Advances at Fair Value through Profit and Loss	38,921	3,580	886	795	44,182
Traded loans	13,470	—	—	—	13,470
Total Gross loans and advances	104,560	74,917	23,094	6,612	209,183		Interest rate sensitivity of gross loans and advances.  Maturity > 1 year
---	---	---	---	---	---	---
		2025			2024
Barclays Bank Group	Fixed rate	Variable rate	Total	Fixed rate	Variable rate	Total
As at 31 December	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m	£m
Loans and Advances at Amortised cost<br><br>to banks	—	—	—	—	—	—
Loans and Advances at Amortised cost<br><br>to customers	11,326	91,013	102,339	10,774	85,379	96,153
Loans and Advances at Fair Value<br><br>Through Other Comprehensive Income	—	2,295	2,295	—	3,209	3,209
Loans and Advances at Fair Value<br><br>through Profit and Loss	2,335	4,395	6,730	1,751	3,510	5,261
Gross loans and advances	13,661	97,703	111,364	12,525	92,098	104,623
Notional principal amounts of credit derivatives	Barclays Bank Group
---	---	---
	2025	2024
As at 31 December	£m	£m
Credit derivatives held or issued for trading purposes1	1,736,768	1,537,115

Note

1Includes credit derivatives held as economic hedges which are not designated as hedges for accounting purposes.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	310

Additional unaudited information

Performance review

Performance Review

Overview

Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC or the Company) is a wholly-owned subsidiary of Barclays PLC. The consolidation of Barclays

Bank PLC and its subsidiaries is referred to as the Barclays Bank Group. The term Barclays refers to either Barclays PLC

(BPLC) or, depending on the context, the Barclays Group. The term Barclays Group refers to BPLC together with its

subsidiaries.

Barclays Bank PLC is the non ring-fenced bank within the Barclays Group. The Barclays Bank Group contains the Barclays UK

Corporate Bank (UKCB), Barclays Private Bank and Wealth Management (PBWM), Barclays Investment Bank (IB) and

Barclays US Consumer Bank (USCB) businesses. Barclays Bank PLC offers customers and clients a range of products and

services spanning consumer and wholesale banking and is supported by the Barclays Group-wide service company, Barclays

Execution Services Limited (BX), which provides technology, operations and functional services to businesses across the

Barclays Group.

Barclays Bank PLC is focused on delivering for customers and clients around the world. Our diversified business portfolio

provides balance, resilience and exciting opportunities. Barclays Bank PLC has strong global market positions and continues

to invest in people and technology with the aim of delivering sustainable returns.

Our structure

Through our four divisions, UKCB, PBWM, IB and USCB in addition to Head Office, we are organised and operate in a simpler

way, delivering greater accountability and transparency, supporting synergies and reflecting the way we serve our

customers and clients.

Barclays Bank PLC
Barclays UK<br><br>Corporate Bank	Barclays Private<br><br>Bank and Wealth<br><br>Management	Barclays<br><br>Investment Bank	Barclays US<br><br>Consumer Bank

UK Corporate Bank

The UK Corporate Bank offers a range of Corporate Lending and Transaction Banking services to clients with an annual

revenue of more than £6.5m through to FTSE350 companies.

•Corporate Lending: Offers a range of term, revolving, and overdraft facilities to medium and large sized corporates

across the UK, with financing solutions tailored to specific industries and sectors

•Transaction Banking: Provides cash management, trade and working capital solutions, risk management solutions

and payment services internationally

Private Bank and Wealth Management

Private Bank and Wealth Management comprises PBWM UK - serving clients across the full wealth continuum in the UK and

Crown Dependencies - and PBWM International, serving high- and ultra-high-net-worth clients in selected international

markets.

•UK Digital Investing is for UK self directed investors, with investment starting from just £1

•UK Affluent is for UK clients with £250k to £3m of investible assets1

•Private Banking UK is a full-service proposition for clients with investible assets of £3m+

•Private Banking International is a full-service proposition for clients with investible assets of £5m+ internationally2

with a focus on clients in the Europe, Middle East and Asia wealth corridors

Note

1The lower end threshold is under review

2For India, the Private Bank proposition is available for clients with wealth of £3m+.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	311

Additional unaudited information

Performance review

Investment Bank

The Investment Bank provides corporate clients, money managers, financial institutions, governments and supranational

organisations with advisory, finance and risk management services.

•Global Markets provides institutional investors, sovereigns and corporates with a full range of execution services,

ideas and risk management solutions across asset classes (Equities, Credit, Rates, FX and Securitised Products).

The Research team provides institutional investors with data-driven analysis, actionable insights and access to our

analysts across global sectors, markets and economies

•Investment Banking works with companies, governments and financial institutions worldwide to provide expert

advice, innovative solutions and access to capital. It includes International Corporate Banking, which provides

financial institutions and large corporate clients with wholesale lending and treasury solutions - supported by deep

industry knowledge and local, on-the-ground specialists

US Consumer Bank

The US Consumer Bank is a leading co-branded credit card issuer and financial services partner in the United States.

•Barclays US Consumer Bank has more than 25 million customers and partnerships with 20 of America’s leading

brands across the airline, travel, retail and affinity sectors.

•We provide co-branded, small business and private label credit cards, personal loans, online savings accounts and

certificates of deposits.

Head Office

Head Office provides centralised services across the Barclays Bank Group.

The world in which we operate

Barclays Bank PLC is driven by a common Purpose: working together for a better financial future. To do so, we must be

strong as an institution, prepared for the future, and able to navigate different market conditions and evolving trends.

We regularly review our operating environment and adapt to emerging trends. We've identified three areas relevant to our

industry that we need to be aware of in the execution of our strategy, and continue to make good progress in addressing

them:

•The impact of technology on banking products and services

•The role of capital markets as the principal driver of global growth

•The transition towards a low-carbon economy

In the development of our strategy and the evolution of our operating model, we regularly review and reflect on the

changing environment in which we operate. Our plan is designed to remain resilient amid ongoing volatility and uncertainty,

while meeting the needs of our wider stakeholders - including customers, clients, regulators, and shareholders.

We actively navigate risk and uncertainty, and are vigilant to deliver for our stakeholders as the environment evolves.

Focus areas

UKCB

a.Driving productivity and seamless digital delivery, simplifying and improving client experience

b.Growing broad-based income through deeper client relationships with products and solutions which address their

needs

c.Growing share of lending and attracting new clients

PBWM

a.Leveraging our simplified business structure - aligned to market opportunity in the UK and internationally - and

reinvesting cost efficiencies to strengthen the business and support growth

b.Supporting Private Bank clients with their lifestyle, liquidity and legacy, and helping retail investors gain access to

transparent, fairly priced investment solutions

c.Continuing to grow assets under management to increase the relative contribution of non-interest income, to

deliver high-quality recurring revenue

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	312

Additional unaudited information

Performance review

IB

a.Driving higher RWA productivity across all Investment Bank businesses

b.Deepening client relationships while maintaining prudent risk management

c.In Global Markets, sustaining momentum in our businesses with Top 5 market share1, growing our focus

businesses and continuing to scale more stable financing income

d.In Investment Banking, building share and product penetration across Advisory, Capital Markets and Treasury

Coverage, and delivering an expanded reach for our International Corporate Bank

USCB

a.Scaling and diversifying by growing existing partnerships and winning new partners

b.Investing in digitisation and AI to deliver enhanced customer experiences and operational efficiencies

c.Improving net interest margin by optimising pricing and credit mix, while reducing funding costs

d.Selective risk transfer to optimise use of balance sheet

Year in review

UKCB

Barclays UK Corporate Bank serves over 13,000 businesses across the UK, playing an important role in joining together the

different aspects of the organisation to deliver for clients. In 2025, the UK Corporate Bank delivered robust income growth of

14% underpinned by a strong deposit franchise and growing debt balances. Profit before tax was £949m and we maintained

a disciplined cost-to-income ratio, ensuring operational efficiency.

Throughout the year, we responded proactively to a competitive market and shifting base rates. By adapting to evolving

client needs and maintaining our focus on providing lending to help our clients to invest, we positively repositioned

ourselves among peers and grew lending market share by 1%2.

In 2025, we attracted over c.580 new to bank clients who drove c.50% of the increase in lending compared to 2024. This

focus enabled us to achieve total loan growth of £4.6bn for the year. Despite our growth in lending, our loan loss rate

remains well within our stated risk appetite and guidance.

Our willingness to lend plays a crucial role in giving UK businesses the confidence to invest in their workforce and

technology helping in turn to unlock economic growth.

We have made strides in enhancing client experience by advancing our digital capabilities and streamlining processes.

Clients now have more opportunities to self-serve through digital channels, including our 'Client Chat' capability, which

resolves a significant number of queries at first contact. In 2025, c.50% of client interactions were self-served, compared to

c.40% in 2024. We have also reduced client onboarding times by around 50% since the start of 2024 and, in response to

client feedback, we have improved the speed, ease, and flexibility of our borrowing solutions, with further enhancements

planned for 2026.

To strengthen client relationships and support diversified income streams, we've invested significantly in modernising our

technology.

Our focus on deepening relationships and our efforts to improve experience have been reflected in improved client

satisfaction scores. Measured as an independent benchmarking score by Savanta, our overall client satisfaction score has

increased. Satisfaction scores relating to our client-facing colleagues are also strong, placing us second among our peers3.

In April 2025, we announced a long-term strategic partnership with Brookfield to grow and transform our payment

acceptance business, which provides critical infrastructure to the UK economy, processing billions of pounds of payments

annually for small businesses and corporate clients.

Our extensive client relationships and experience of UK payments will benefit from Brookfield's global private equity

expertise in payments, technology, operational transformation and corporate carve-outs, to ensure that the payment

acceptance business is strategically positioned for long-term growth. The partnership will drive business growth by

broadening the range of services offered and enhancing the experience for both existing and prospective clients.

Note

1 Top 5 market share as defined in the 20 February 2024 Investor Update: 1H23 and FY19 Coalition Greenwich Global Competitor Analytics. Industry

wallet is defined as the total revenue of the following banks: BofA, Barclays, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Suisse, Deutsche Bank, Goldman Sachs,

J.P. Morgan, Morgan Stanley and UBS. Analysis is based on Barclays’ internal business structure and internal revenues. Market share for purpose of

this analysis is calculated as Barclays’ internal revenues divided by the aggregate revenue of the banks identified above within the given product

set.

2 Bank of England December 2025 market data.

3 SavantaMarket Vue Survey Q4 2025

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	313

Additional unaudited information

Performance review

PBWM

PBWM's vision is to be the investment partner for our clients, their families and the next generation. In 2025, financial

markets witnessed trade and geopolitical volatility, and strong tailwinds driven by artificial intelligence (AI) - investors looked

to take advantage of volatility spikes while diversifying risk. For PBWM, this led to strong transactional activity supported by

increased trading on our digital investing offering, continued inflows into multi-asset portfolios, and alternative strategies

such as private markets and hedge funds.

Our ability to support clients in such environments sustained our strong business performance. Assets Under Management

(AUM) grew by £5.2bn and PBWM overall achieved a profit before tax of £367m.

At the start of 2025, PBWM simplified its business model to operate through two core areas: PBWM UK and PBWM

International. Throughout the year, there were a series of strategic hires to strengthen the business.

In our UK Digital Investing business, we further enhanced client journeys and investment capabilities on our Smart Investor

platform1. In UK Affluent, we launched a pilot of a new digitally enabled mass affluent proposition - focused initially on

Barclays UK Premier clients with £250k-£1m in assets to invest. Our ambition is to provide a fair-priced, transparently

constructed advice service addressing the needs of this segment.

In our UK Private Bank, we expanded our Private Markets proposition with the launch of a new multi-vintage private equity

fund and made it easier for clients to use our securities backed lending capability. In addition, we continued to grow our

assets under management in our flagship funds and discretionary managed portfolios, and maintained their strong

underlying long-term investment performance.

Internationally, we have been focused on building our presence in the Middle East and Asia. In order to further support our

international capabilities, we continue to progress the development of our new Singapore booking centre, which we intend

to launch during 2026.

Underpinning all of our strategic ambitions is a continued focus on improving our risk and control resilience, including by

increasing our automation levels.

IB

Barclays has a top tier Investment Bank supporting corporate and institutional clients around the world. In 2025, we

maintained our rank of sixth across the Investment Bank in both Global Markets2 and Investment Banking3. We are a leading

non-US-domiciled bank that can consistently compete with its US peers in each of the major capital markets of the US,

Europe and Asia. Through our global expertise, scale and reach, we support global clients and help them achieve their

commercial goals.

The Investment Bank delivered a profit before tax of £4,629m and remained disciplined on costs with consistent operational

progress, following seven quarters of positive jaws.

RWAs remained stable for the fourth consecutive year. We grew income and improved return on RWAs by focusing on more

stable income streams and on disciplined client management, capital deployment, and technology enhancements to

improve client experience, such as BARXBot, a client-facing GenAI chatbot that automates how colleagues in Global Markets

handle Requests for Quotes (RFQs) for clients.

The Investment Bank helped clients navigate a complex, evolving landscape throughout 2025 - one shaped by policy

change, geopolitical events and economic conditions - by delivering strategic solutions through our diversified portfolio of

products and services.

In Global Markets, we remain focused on executing our key product priorities while delivering our full suite of products and

services to our clients. We have made strong progress with improved performance in the three focus businesses in Markets,

while sustaining momentum in financing.

Our Research team is central to our Investment Bank franchise and continues to rank highly among our institutional client

base.

In Investment Banking, we delivered revenue growth of 3% year on year. We also made good progress in key focus areas,

continuing to optimise our loan book which helped to drive improved return on RWAs. This year, we maintained our

traditional strength in DCM and saw an increase in both ECM fee share and advisory fee share with financial sponsors4.

International Corporate Bank (ICB) was up 10% YoY, reflecting the continued rollout of the Treasury Coverage model -

which has doubled the number of focus client with this model since 2024. This has also helped to drive year on year growth

in US deposits5.

Note:

1 Smart Investor will be known as Barclays Direct Investing

2 Based on external reported revenues. Peer banks include BoA, BNP, CITI, DB, GS, JPM, MS and UBS

3 Dealogic for the period 1 January 2025 to 31 December 2025 (as at 6 January 2026)

4 Dealogic Banking Fee share as at 31 December 2025

5 Reflects month end deposits

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	314

Additional unaudited information

Performance review

USCB

The US is the world’s largest credit card market, and growing. With a c.3% share1 of the total market and partnerships with

20 major brands, we continue to see significant opportunities for growth. In 2025, we delivered profit before tax of £513m,

up from £408m in 2024 and £167m in 2023.

We remain focused on building lasting partnerships with top US brands. In 2025, we launched a new co-branded card

programme with iconic automaker General Motors (GM) and acquired $1.6bn in receivables, further diversifying our mix of

card partners. We also extended our current partnership agreements with Wyndham Hotels & Resorts, Upromise and our

cruise line partners: Carnival, Princess and Holland America.

We added three million new customers organically in 2025. Our average payment rate of 31% in the fourth quarter is higher

than pre-pandemic levels, further demonstrating the resilience and quality of our book.

We grew our retail deposit balances by 20% year on year and increased the percentage of core deposit funding for USCB

from 64% to 69%. This was driven by demand for the tiered savings product and a new suite of exclusive digital banking

products offered through our co-branded banking partnership with AARP.

In 2025, we announced that we had entered into an agreement to acquire Best Egg2, a leading US digital direct-to-consumer

originator of personal loans.

In 2025, we improved digital onboarding, increased self-service options and developed flexible payment features for our

customers. We also expanded our Rewards Hub, an intuitive, one-stop digital shop for cardmembers to more easily manage

their benefits. Over the past year, unique visitors to the Rewards Hub increased by 15%, demonstrating stronger brand

loyalty and digital connection.

Since 2023, our investments in digitisation have led to an increase in customers using e-statements, and resulted in higher

digital engagement with 96.2% of customers who interact with us doing so through digital channels3. The percentage of

customers using the Barclays mobile app also increased 5.5 percentage points year on year4. Leveraging digital platforms to

drive greater efficiency has helped reduce full year 2025 USCB cost to income ratio.

Head Office

From 2003 to late 2019, Clydesdale Financial Services Limited (CFSL), a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, provided

motor finance to customers in the UK. In 2020, CFSL was transferred from Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays Principal

Investments Ltd (BPIL), another subsidiary of Barclays PLC. Barclays Bank PLC has provided an intragroup indemnity to BPIL

in respect of historic litigation and conduct matters relating to CFSL.

Following the publication of the UK Financial Conduct Authority’s (FCA) consultation paper CP25/27 on a proposed Motor

Finance redress scheme on 7 October 2025, Barclays has recognised in CFSL a provision of £325m in respect of this matter

as at 31 December 2025 (as at 31 December 2024: £90m). Barclays has engaged with the FCA as part of its consultation

process and the FCA’s Policy Statement and final redress scheme rules are currently expected to be published in February or

March 2026.  The ultimate financial impact on Barclays could differ from the recognised provision, which represents

Barclays’ best estimate of the cost of redress based on the information currently available to Barclays.

In Q125, Barclays Bank Ireland PLC announced the completion of the sale of its German consumer finance business to

BAWAG P.S.K., a wholly owned subsidiary of BAWAG Group AG.

Note

1  Source: newyorkfed.org/microeconomics/hhdc

2  The acquisition is expected to close in Q2 2026, subject to regulatory approvals and other closing conditions.

3  Measured at exit at end December 2025. Includes primary consumer card customers. Monthly interactions exclude Interactive Voice Response

(IVR).

4  Reflects rate movement from December 2024 to December 2025 for mobile app users divided by open customers.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	315

Additional unaudited information

Performance review

Looking ahead

UKCB

We will continue to deepen client relationships, accelerate digital transformation and improve operational efficiency. We are

focused on enhancing our product mix, strengthening income quality and driving technology-led improvements in client

experience.

Efforts will be shaped by the evolving market environment, with an emphasis on adapting to client needs, regulatory

changes and competitive pressures. We will continue to simplify processes, invest in talent, and leverage data-driven insights

to support growth and resilience.

PBWM

Within UK Digital Investing, we're committed to delivering an integrated digital SIPP (self-invested personal pension).

Following the completion of our pilot, we're launching our new UK Mass Affluent proposition, starting with Barclays UK

Premier clients. We will also focus on supporting retail investing through the launch of Targeted Support following FCA's

Advice Guidance Boundary Review.

Within the Private Bank we will continue to enhance our client experience, focusing on our digital capabilities as well as

further expanding our credit proposition. We're investing in productivity and generative AI (GenAI) capabilities that support

our front-line colleagues so they can spend more time with clients. We plan to expand our international business with

further investments in the Middle East and Asia markets, including the launch of our new Singapore booking centre.

IB

Our goal is to strengthen our position as a leading global investment bank by leveraging our advisory expertise, deep sector

knowledge, and differentiated client offering.

The Investment Banking business is focused on building share in Advisory and Capital Markets through productivity

improvement, Treasury Coverage evolution and the continued investment and growth of our International Corporate Bank.

Global Markets continues its focus on strengthening its core capabilities while maintaining a strong baseline of stable

revenues in the form of financing.

We aim to be prudent managers of the firm's capital, and to drive consistent returns through client discipline, focused

execution, capital nimbleness and operational efficiency. We're also streamlining operations, reducing legacy systems, and

leveraging AI to scale and innovate.

We continue to work collaboratively across the Investment Bank towards a core set of cross-business priorities to create

outcomes that generate growth. We work as one division to deliver for our clients holistically, reviewing overall relationship

economics and cross-sell opportunities that will help shift from optimising to more profitably deploying capital.

We aim to achieve this through low single-digit compound annual income growth combined with disciplined cost

management, driving operating leverage.

USCB

We remain committed to executing our strategy and improving returns. We will scale the cards business through organic

growth and new partnership acquisitions as appropriate and accelerate USCB's diversification through the Best Egg

acquisition.

We are embracing the latest technologies, such as GenAI and agile scalable platforms, to drive greater efficiency and deliver

better experiences for our customers.

We continue to enhance our digital capabilities and provide seamless, intuitive experiences across all channels. We will

maintain our focus on customer feedback, continually optimise our processes, and invest in tools to reduce friction and drive

loyalty and sustainable growth.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	316

Glossary of terms

‘Advanced Internal Ratings Based (A-IRB)’ See ‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’.

‘Acceptances and endorsements’ An acceptance is an undertaking by a bank to pay a bill of exchange drawn on a customer, for which

reimbursement by the customer is normally immediate. Endorsements are to change the payee of a bill of exchange but with no

change to the bank’s liability.

‘Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital’ A type of capital as defined in the CRR largely comprising eligible non-common equity capital securities

and any related share premium.

‘Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities’ Non-common equity securities that are eligible as AT1 capital.

‘Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA)’ An approach used to quantify required capital for operational risk. Under the AMA, banks

are allowed to develop their own empirical model to quantify required capital for operational risk. Banks can only use this approach

subject to approval from their applicable local regulators.

‘Agency Bonds’ Bonds issued by state and / or government agencies or government-sponsored entities.

‘Agency Mortgage-Backed Securities’ Mortgage-Backed Securities issued by government-sponsored entities.

‘All price risk (APR)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default, for the correlation trading

portfolio.

‘American Depositary Receipts (ADR) or American Depositary Shares (ADS)’ A negotiable certificate that represents the ownership of

depositary shares in a non-US company (e.g. Barclays) trading on US financial markets.

‘Americas’ Geographic segment comprising the US, Canada and countries where Barclays operates within Latin America.

‘Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)’ A measure of the potential change in Net Interest Income (NII) due to an interest rate movement over

a one-year period.

‘Annualised cumulative weighted average lifetime PD’ The Probability of Default (PD) over the remaining life of the asset, expressed as

an annual rate, reflecting a range of possible economic scenarios.

‘Application scorecards’ Algorithm based decision-making tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on

available customer data at the point of application for a product.

‘Arrears’ Customers are said to be in arrears when they are behind in fulfilling their obligations with the result that an outstanding loan

is unpaid or overdue. Such customers are also said to be in a state of delinquency. When a customer is in arrears, their entire

outstanding balance is said to be delinquent, meaning that delinquent balances are the total outstanding loans on which payments are

overdue.

‘Asia’ Geographic segment comprising countries where Barclays operates within Asia and the Middle East.

‘Asset Backed Commercial Paper (ABCP)’ Typically short-term notes secured on specified assets issued by consolidated special

purpose entities for funding purposes.

‘Asset Backed Securities (ABS)’ Securities that represent an interest in an underlying pool of referenced assets. The referenced pool can

comprise any assets which attract a set of associated cash flows but are commonly pools of residential or commercial mortgages and,

in the case of a Collateralised Debt Obligation (CDO), the referenced pool may be ABS or other classes of assets.

‘Asset swap spreads’ The difference between the yield of the bond and the fixed rate leg of the corresponding interest rate swap.

Primarily used to measure the credit risk associated with a bond.

‘Assets Under Management (AUM)’ Total market value of client investment balances managed within investment mandates where

Barclays provides discretionary portfolio management or advisory services.  Total Assets Under Management excludes uninvested cash

held under an investment mandate.

‘Attributable profit' Profit after tax that is attributable to ordinary equity holders of Barclays adjusted for the after tax amounts of capital

securities classified as equity.

‘Average allocated tangible equity’ (for businesses) Calculated as the average of the previous month’s period end allocated tangible

equity and the current month’s period end allocated tangible equity. The average allocated tangible equity for the period is the average

of the monthly averages within that period.

‘Average tangible shareholders’ equity’ (for Barclays Group) Calculated as the average of the previous month’s period end tangible

shareholders’ equity and the current month’s period end tangible shareholders’ equity. The average tangible shareholders’ equity for

the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	317

‘Average UK leverage ratio’ As per the PRA rulebook, calculated as the average capital measure based on the last day of each month in

the quarter divided by the average exposure measure for the quarter, where the average exposure is based on each day in the quarter.

‘Back testing’ Includes a number of techniques that assess the continued statistical validity of a model by simulating how the model

would have predicted recent experience.

‘Bank of England (BoE)’ The central bank of the United Kingdom with devolved responsibility for managing monetary policy and to

oversee regulation of the UK’s financial sector. Through the Prudential Regulation Committee, the BoE exercises control over the PRA.

‘Bank of England levy scheme’ or ‘BoE levy scheme’ A levy scheme which commenced on 1 March 2024 replacing the Cash Ratio

Deposit scheme as a means of funding the BoE's monetary policy and financial stability operations.

‘Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD)’ The Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (Directive 2014/59/EU) established a

framework for the recovery and resolution of EU credit institutions and investment firms.

‘Barclays Africa’ or ‘Absa’ or ‘Absa Group Limited’ Absa Group Limited (formerly Barclays Africa Group Limited), which was previously

a subsidiary of the Barclays Group. As a consequence of its disposals of shares in April 2022 and September 2022, the Barclays Group

has now exited its shareholding in Absa Group Limited.

‘Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ In the context of the credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating

marked to market LTVs derived by calculating individual LTVs at account level and weighting it by the balances to arrive at the average

position. Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio is calculated using the following formula: LTV = ((loan 1 balance x Marked to

market (MTM) LTV% for loan 1) + (loan 2 balance x Marked to market (MTM) LTV% for loan 2) + ...) / total outstanding balances in

portfolio.

‘Barclaycard Consumer UK’ The UK Barclaycard business.

‘Barclays’ or ’Barclays Group’ or ‘Group’ Barclays PLC, together with its subsidiaries.

‘Barclays Bank Group’ Barclays Bank PLC, together with its subsidiaries.

‘Barclays Bank Ireland PLC’ Barclays Bank Ireland PLC, also known as Barclays Europe and BBI.

‘Barclays Bank UK Group’ Barclays Bank UK PLC, together with its subsidiaries.

‘Barclays Operating Businesses’ The core Barclays businesses operated by Barclays UK (which consists of the UK Personal Banking; UK

Business Banking and the Barclaycard Consumer UK businesses) and Barclays International (which consists of the Corporate and

Investment Bank and Consumer, Cards and Payments businesses).

‘Barclays Execution Services’ or ‘BX’ or ‘Group Service Company’ Barclays Execution Services Limited, the Group-wide service company

providing technology, operations and functional services to businesses across the Group.

‘Barclays International’ The segment of Barclays with the majority of businesses held by Barclays Bank PLC.  The division consists of the

Corporate and Investment Bank and Consumer, Cards and Payments businesses.

‘Barclays UK’ The segment of Barclays with the majority of businesses held by Barclays Bank UK PLC.  The division includes the UK

Personal Banking; UK Business Banking and the Barclaycard Consumer UK businesses.

‘Basel 3’ or ‘Basel III’ The third of the Basel Accords, setting minimum requirements and standards that apply to internationally active

banks.  Basel 3 is a set of measures developed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision aiming to strengthen the regulation,

supervision and risk management of banks.

‘Basel 3.1' This refers to the revision of BCBS standards to complete the BCBS' post global financial crisis reforms. Basel 3.1 introduces

changes to how to calculate capital requirements for all risk types, for both standardised and internal model approaches.

‘Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS)’ or ‘The Basel Committee’ A forum for regular cooperation on banking supervisory

matters which develops global supervisory standards for the banking industry.  Its 45 members are officials from central banks or

prudential supervisors from 28 jurisdictions.

‘Basic Indicator Approach (BIA)’ An approach used to quantify required capital for operational risk. Under the BIA, banks are required to

hold regulatory capital for operational risk equal to 15% of the annual average, calculated over a rolling three-year period, of the

relevant income indicator for the bank as whole.

‘Basis point(s)’ or ‘bp(s)’ One hundredth of a per cent (0.01%); 100 basis points is 1%. The measure is used for quoting movements in

interest rates, yields on securities and for other purposes.

‘Basis risk’ Index/tenor risk that arises when floating rate products are linked to different interest rate indices, which are imperfectly

correlated, especially under stressed market conditions.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	318

‘Behavioural scorecards’ Algorithm-based decision tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on existing

customer data derived from account usage.

‘Book quality’ In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half

yearly results), changes in RWAs caused by factors such as underlying customer behaviour or demographics leading to changes in risk

profile.

‘Book size’ In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half yearly

results), changes in RWAs driven by business activity, including net originations or repayments.

‘Bounce Back Loan Scheme (BBLS)’ A UK Government (British Business Bank) backed loan scheme which allowed SMEs to borrow

between £2,000 and £50,000. The UK Government guarantees 100% of the loan and pays the first 12 months of interest on behalf of

the borrowers, subject to terms and conditions. The scheme closed on 31 March 2021.

‘Business Banking’ Serves business clients, from high growth start-ups to small and medium-sized businesses, with specialist advice for

their business banking needs.

‘Business Growth Fund (BGF)’ An independent company established by the UK’s largest banks, including Barclays, to help young, fast-

growing businesses by providing long-term growth capital. Barclays holds an associate interest in BGF.

‘Business scenario stresses’ Multi-asset scenario analysis of extreme, but plausible, events that may impact the market risk exposures

of the Investment Bank.

‘Buy to let mortgage’ A mortgage whereby the intention of the customer is to let the property at origination.

‘Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB)’ A capital buffer of 2.5% of a bank’s total exposures that needs to be met with an additional amount

of Common Equity Tier 1 capital above the 4.5% minimum requirement for Common Equity Tier 1 set out in CRR. Its objective is to

conserve a bank’s capital by ensuring that banks build up surplus capital outside periods of stress which can be drawn down if losses

are incurred.

‘Capital ratios’ Key financial ratios measuring the bank's capital adequacy or financial strength expressed as a percentage of RWAs.

‘Capital Requirements Directive (CRD)’ Directive 2013/36/EU, a component of the CRD IV package which accompanies the Capital

Requirements Regulation and sets out macroprudential standards including the Countercyclical Capital Buffer and capital buffers for

systemically important institutions. Directive (EU) 2019/878, published as part of the EU Risk Reduction Measure package, amends the

CRD. These amendments entered into force from 27 June 2019, with EU member states required to adopt the measures within

Directive (EU) 2019/878 by 28 December 2020.  CRD forms part of UK law by virtue of the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as

amended.

‘Capital Requirements Directive VI (CRD VI)’ The Sixth Capital Requirements Directive, being an EU amending Directive accompanied

by an amending Regulation (CRR III) which together prescribe EU capital adequacy and liquidity requirements, and which implement

Basel 3.1 in the European Union.

‘Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR)’ Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, as amended by Regulation (EU) 2019/876 (CRR II), a

component of the CRD IV package which accompanies the Capital Requirements Directive and sets out detailed rules for capital

eligibility, the calculation of RWAs, the measurement of leverage, the management of large exposures and minimum standards for

liquidity.  CRR, as amended by CRR II, forms part of UK law by virtue of the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as amended.

‘Capital Requirements Regulation II (CRR II)’ Regulation (EU) 2019/876, amending Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 (CRR). This is a

component of the EU Risk Reduction Measure package. The requirements set out in CRR II were introduced between 27 June 2019 and

28 June 2023. Following a consultation process in 2021, the PRA finalised their implementation of the CRR II package through Policy

Statement 22/21. The finalised requirements were implemented in the UK through the PRA Rulebook with effect from 1 January 2022.

‘Capital Requirements Regulation III (CRR III)’ Regulation (EU) 2024/1623, introducing further amendments to EU CRR as regards to

requirements for credit risk, credit valuation adjustment risk, operational risk, market risk and the output floor.

‘Capital requirements on the underlying exposures (KIRB)’ An approach available to banks when calculating RWAs for securitisation

exposures. This is based upon the RWA amounts that would be calculated under the IRB approach for the underlying pool of

securitised exposures in the programme, had such exposures not been securitised.

‘Capital resources’ Common Equity Tier 1, Additional Tier 1 capital and Tier 2 capital that are eligible to satisfy capital requirements

under CRD. Referred to as ‘own funds’ within EU and UK regulatory texts.

‘Capital risk’ The risk that the Barclays Group has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities

and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as

defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the Barclays Group’s pension plans.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	319

‘CBE’ Consumer Bank Europe which was previously the German consumer finance business for Barclays Bank Ireland PLC. On 3

February 2025, Barclays PLC announced that Barclays Bank Ireland PLC had completed the sale of the CBE business to BAWAG P.S.K, a

wholly owned subsidiary of BAWAG Group AG.

‘Central Bank of Ireland (CBI)’ The Central Bank of Ireland is responsible for maintaining monetary stability, promoting financial

stability, and regulating financial institutions to safeguard the integrity of the financial system in Ireland. The CBI is the Irish national

competent authority for the purposes of the SSM and EMIR.

‘Central Counterparty’ or ‘Central Clearing Counterparties (CCPs)’ A clearing house mediating between the buyer and the seller in a

financial transaction, such as a derivative contract or repurchase agreement (Repo). Where a Central Counterparty is used, a single bi-

lateral contract between the buyer and seller is replaced with two contracts, one between the buyer and the CCP and one between the

CCP and the seller. The use of CCPs allows for greater oversight and improved credit risk mitigation in over-the-counter (OTC) markets.

‘Charge-off’ In the retail segment this refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the

recovery of the full balance. This is normally when six payments are in arrears.

‘Client Assets’ Assets managed or administered by the Barclays Group on behalf of its clients including assets under management

(AUM), custody assets, assets under administration and client deposits.

‘Client assets and liabilities’ Deposits, lending and invested assets.

‘Climate risk’ The impact on Financial and Operational Risks arising from climate change through physical risks, risks associated with

transitioning to a lower carbon economy and connected risks arising as a result of second order impacts of these two drivers on

portfolios.

–Physical risks: Physical risks resulting from a changing climate can be event driven (acute risks), including increased severity

of extreme weather events such as cyclones, hurricanes and floods. Longer term shifts in climate patterns (chronic risks) arise

from sustained higher temperatures that may cause rises in sea levels, rising mean temperatures and more severe weather

events. These changes are likely to lead to risks for sovereigns, business models and supply chains.

–Transition risks:  The transition to a lower carbon economy will involve significant rapid policy, regulatory and legal changes,

as evolving technology and markets adapt to a changing climate and associated impacts. These changes will lead to risks for

sovereigns, business models and supply chains.

–Connected risks:  The second-order risks arising from physical or transition risk impacts. Connected risk is diverse, impacting

customer and wholesale portfolios.

‘CLOs and Other insured assets’ Highly-rated CLO positions wrapped by monolines, non-CLOs wrapped by monolines and other assets

wrapped with Credit Support Annex (CSA) protection.

‘Collateralised Debt Obligation (CDO)’ A security issued by a third party which references Asset Backed Securities and/or certain other

related assets purchased by the issuer. CDOs may feature exposure to sub-prime mortgage assets through the underlying assets.

‘Collateralised Loan Obligation (CLO)’ A security backed by repayments from a pool of commercial loans.

‘Collateralised Mortgage Obligation (CMO)’ A security backed by mortgages. A special purpose entity receives income from the

mortgages and passes them on to investors in the security.

‘Combined Buffer Requirement (CBR)’ In the context of the CRD capital obligations, the total Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to

meet the combined requirements of the Capital Conservation Buffer, the GSII Buffer, the counter-cyclical buffer, and the O-SII buffer if

applicable to a firm.

‘Commercial paper (CP)’ Typically short-term notes issued by entities, including banks, for funding purposes.

‘Commercial real estate (CRE)’ Commercial real estate includes office buildings, medical centres, hotels, retail stores, shopping centres,

farm land, multifamily housing buildings, warehouses, garages, industrial properties and other similar properties. Commercial real

estate loans are loans backed by a package of commercial real estate. Note: for the purposes of the Credit Risk section, the UK CRE

portfolio includes property investment, development, trading and housebuilders but excludes social housing contractors.

‘Commissions and other incentives’ Includes commission-based arrangements, guaranteed incentives and Long Term Incentive Plan

awards.

‘Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission Framework (COSO)’ A joint initiative of five private sector

organisations dedicated to the development of frameworks and providing guidance on enterprise risk management, internal control

and fraud deterrence.

‘Commodity derivatives’ Exchange traded and over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives based on an underlying commodity (e.g. metals,

precious metals, oil and oil related products, power and natural gas).

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	320

‘Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC)’ Certain participants in US swap markets are required to register with the CFTC as

‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’ and/or with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) as ‘security-based swap

dealers’ or ‘major security-based swap participants’. Such registrants are subject to CFTC and/or SEC regulation and oversight.

Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC are registered with the CFTC as swap dealers and are subject to CFTC oversight.

‘Commodity risk’ Measures the impact of changes in commodity prices and volatilities, including the basis between related

commodities (e.g. Brent vs. WTI crude prices).

‘Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital’ The highest quality form of regulatory capital under CRR that comprises common shares issued

and related share premium, retained earnings and other reserves, less specified regulatory adjustments.

‘Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio’ A measure of Common Equity Tier 1 capital expressed as a percentage of RWAs.

‘Compensation: income ratio’ The ratio of compensation expense over total income. Compensation represents total staff costs less

non-compensation items consisting of outsourcing, staff training, redundancy costs and retirement costs.

‘Compliance Risk’ The risk of poor outcomes for, or harm to, customers, clients and markets, arising from the delivery of the firm’s

products and services (also known as 'Conduct Risk') and the risk to Barclays, its clients, customers or markets from a failure to comply

with the laws, rules and regulations applicable to the firm (also known as Laws, Rules and Regulations Risk 'LRR Risk’).

‘Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR)’ An annual exercise, required by and evaluated by the Federal Reserve, through

which the largest bank holding companies operating in the US assess whether they have sufficient capital to continue operations

through periods of economic and financial stress and have robust capital-planning processes that account for their unique risks.

‘Comprehensive Risk Capital Charge (CRCC)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default, for the

correlation trading portfolio.

‘Comprehensive Risk Measure (CRM)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default, for the

correlation trading portfolio. Also referred to as All Price Risk (APR) and Comprehensive Risk Capital Charge (CRCC).

‘Constant Currency Basis’ Excluding the impact of foreign currency conversion to GBP when comparing financial results in two

different financial periods.

‘Consumer, Cards and Payments (CC&P)’ Comprises the International Cards and Consumer Bank (including Barclays US Consumer

Bank and Barclaycard Germany), Payments (including merchant acquiring and commercial payments) and Private Bank businesses.

‘Coronavirus Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CBILS)’ A loan scheme by the British Business Bank (BBB) to support UK based small

and medium-sized businesses (turnover of up to £45 million) adversely impacted by COVID-19. The CBILS scheme provided loans of

up to £5 million which are backed by an 80% UK Government (BBB) guarantee. The UK Government will pay interest and fees for the

first 12 months on behalf of the borrowers, subject to terms and conditions. This scheme ended on 31 March 2021.

‘Coronavirus Large Business Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS)’ A loan scheme by the British Business Bank (BBB) to support UK

based medium-sized businesses (turnover above £45 million, but with no access to Covid Corporate Finance Facility (CCFF)) adversely

impacted by COVID-19. The CLBILS scheme provided loans of up to £200 million which are backed by an 80% UK Government (BBB)

guarantee.  This scheme ended on 31 March 2021.

‘Corporate and Investment Bank (CIB)’ The Investment Banking, Corporate Banking and Global Markets businesses which form part of

Barclays International.

‘Correlation risk’ Refers to the change in marked to market value of a security when the correlation between the underlying assets

changes over time.

‘Cost of Equity’ The rate of return targeted by the equity holders of a company.

‘Cost: income jaws’ Relationship of the percentage change movement in operating expenses relative to total income.

‘Cost: income ratio’ Total operating expenses divided by total income.

‘Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB)’ An additional buffer introduced as part of the CRD IV package that requires banks to have an

additional cushion of CET 1 capital with which to absorb potential losses, enhancing their resilience and contributing to a stable

financial system.

‘Countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB)’ A macroprudential buffer that has applied to specific PRA regulated institutions since

2018 and is calculated at 35% of any risk weighted countercyclical capital buffer set by the Financial Policy Committee (FPC).  The

CCLB applies in addition to the minimum of 3.25% and any G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer that applies.

‘Counterparty credit risk (CCR)’ The risk that a counterparty to a transaction could default before the final settlement of a transaction’s

cash flows. In the context of RWAs, a component of RWAs that represents the risk of loss from derivatives, repurchase agreements and

similar transactions as a result of the default of the counterparty.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	321

‘Coverage ratio’ This represents the percentage of impairment allowance reserve against the gross exposure.

‘Covered bonds’ Debt securities backed by a portfolio of mortgages that are segregated from the issuer’s other assets solely for the

benefit of the holders of the covered bonds.

‘Covid Corporate Financing Facility (CCFF)’  Bank of England (BOE) scheme to support liquidity among larger investment grade firms

which make a material UK contribution, helping to bridge COVID-19 disruption to their cash flows.  The Bank of England provided

liquidity by purchasing short-term debt in the form of commercial paper from corporates. Barclays acted as dealer. This scheme closed

for new purchases of commercial paper with effect from 23 March 2021.

‘CRD IV’ The Fourth Capital Requirements Directive, comprising an EU Directive and an accompanying Regulation (CRR) that together

prescribe EU capital adequacy and liquidity requirements, and which implements Basel 3 in the European Union.

‘CRD V’ The Fifth Capital Requirements Directive, comprising an EU amending Directive and an accompanying amending Regulation

(CRR II) that together prescribe EU capital adequacy and liquidity requirements, and which implements enhanced Basel 3 proposals in

the European Union.

‘Credit conversion factor (CCF)’ A factor used to estimate the risk from off-balance sheet commitments for the purpose of calculating

the total Exposure at Default (EAD) used to calculate RWAs.

‘Credit default swaps (CDS)’ A contract under which the protection seller receives premiums or interest-related payments in return for

contracting to make payments to the protection buyer in the event of a defined credit event. Credit events normally include

bankruptcy, payment default on a reference asset or assets, or downgrades by a rating agency.

‘Credit derivatives (CDs)’ An arrangement whereby the credit risk of an asset (the reference asset) is transferred from the buyer to the

seller of the protection.

‘Credit impairment charges’ Impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and impairment charges on fair value

through other comprehensive income assets and reverse repurchase agreements.

‘Credit market exposures’ Assets and other instruments relating to commercial real estate and leveraged finance businesses that have

been significantly impacted by the deterioration in the global credit markets. The exposures include positions subject to fair value

movements in the Income Statement, positions that are classified as loans and advances, and available for sale and other assets.

‘Credit quality step’ An indicator of credit risk. In the context of the Standardised Approach to calculating credit risk RWAs, a “credit

quality assessment scale” maps the credit assessments of a recognised credit rating agency or export credit agency to certain “credit

quality steps” that determine the risk weight to be applied to an exposure.

‘Credit rating’ An evaluation of the creditworthiness of an entity seeking to enter into a credit agreement.

‘Credit risk’ The risk of loss to Barclays from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour

their obligations to Barclays, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables. In the

context of RWAs, it is the component of RWAs that represents the risk of loss in loans and advances and similar transactions resulting

from the default of the counterparty.

‘Credit risk mitigation’ A range of techniques and strategies used to actively mitigate credit risks to which the bank is exposed. These

can be broadly divided into three types: collateral, netting and set-off, and risk transfer.

‘Credit spread’ The premium over the benchmark or risk-free rate required by the market to accept a lower credit quality.

‘Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)’ The difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which

takes into account the counterparty’s risk of default. The CVA therefore represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a

market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the counterparty due to any failure to perform contractual agreements.

‘Customer assets’ Represents loans and advances to customers. Average balances are calculated as the sum of all daily balances for the

year to date divided by number of days in the year to date.

‘Customer deposits’ In the context of the Liquidity Risk section, money deposited by all individuals and companies that are not credit

institutions. Such funds are recorded as liabilities in the Barclays Group’s balance sheet under “deposits at amortised cost”. (Customers

liabilities).

‘Customer liabilities’ See ‘Customer deposits’.

‘Daily Value at Risk (DVaR)’ An estimate of the potential loss which might arise from market movements under normal market

conditions if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day, measured to a specified confidence level.

‘DBRS’ DBRS Morningstar, a credit rating agency.

‘Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA)’ The opposite of Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the risk-free value

of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the Barclays Group’s risk of default. The DVA, therefore,

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	322

represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the

Barclays Group due to any failure to perform contractual obligations. The DVA decreases the value of a liability to take into account a

reduction in the remaining balance that would be settled should the Barclays Group default or not perform any contractual obligations.

‘Debt buybacks’ Purchases of the Barclays Group’s issued debt securities, including equity accounted instruments, leading to their de-

recognition from the balance sheet.

‘Debt securities in issue’ Transferable securities evidencing indebtedness of the Barclays Group. These are liabilities of the Barclays

Group and include certificates of deposit and commercial paper.

‘Default grades’ The Barclays Group classifies ranges of default probabilities into a set of 21 intervals called default grades, in order to

distinguish differences in the PD risk.

‘Default fund contributions’ The contribution made by members of a Central Counterparty (CCP).  All members are required to

contribute to this fund in advance of using a CCP. The default fund can be used by the CCP to cover losses incurred by the CCP where

losses are greater than the margins provided by a defaulting member.

‘Delinquency’ See ‘Arrears’.

‘Deposit Guarantee Scheme (DGS)’ The EU Directive on Deposit Insurance (Directive 2014/49/EU) was transposed into Irish law

through the European Union (Deposit Guarantee Schemes) Regulations 2015 which came into effect on 20 November 2015. The CBI

as the ‘designated authority’ is required to calculate risk based deposit insurance contributions in accordance with the EBA’s guidelines

“on methods for calculating contributions to deposit guarantee schemes.” The DGS is administered by the CBI and is funded by the

credit institutions covered by the scheme.

‘Derivatives netting’ Adjustments applied across asset and liability marked to market derivative positions pursuant to legally

enforceable bilateral netting agreements and eligible cash collateral received in derivative transactions that meet the requirements of

BCBS 270 (Basel III leverage ratio framework and disclosure requirements).

‘Diversification effect’ Reflects the fact that the risk of a diversified portfolio is smaller than the sum of the risks of its constituent parts.

It is measured as the sum of the individual asset class Daily Value at Risk (DVaR) estimates less the total DVaR.

‘Diversity, Equity and Inclusion (DEI) strategy’ The Barclays Group’s global Diversity, Equity and Inclusion (DEI) strategy sets objectives,

initiatives and plans across six areas of focus: Gender, LGBT+, Disability, Multicultural, Multigenerational and Socio-economic inclusion,

in support of that ambition.

‘Dodd-Frank Act (DFA)’ The US Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010, as amended.

‘Domestic Liquidity Sub-Group Arrangement (DoLSub)’ An intra-group capital and liquidity support agreement that secures certain

regulatory permissions authorised by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA).

‘Digital Operational Resilience Act (DORA)’ the European Union’s Digital Operational Resilience Act (Regulation (EU) 2022/2554) has

applied from 17 January 2025. This EU regulation introduces comprehensive and sector specific regulation on Information

Communication Technologies (ICT) risk management, ICT incident management and reporting, information sharing, digital operational

resilience testing and provides for oversight by the European Supervisory Authorities of critical third-party providers servicing the EU

financial services sector.

‘Economic Value of Equity (EVE)’ A measure of the potential change in value of expected future cash flows due to an adverse interest

rate movement, based on existing balance sheet run-off profile.

'Effective Expected Positive Exposure (EEPE)' The weighted average over time of effective expected exposure. The weights are the

proportion that an individual exposure represents of the entire exposure horizon time interval.

‘Effective interest rate (EIR)’ As defined in IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, effective interest rate is the rate that exactly discounts

estimated future cash payments or receipts through the expected life of the financial asset or financial liability to the gross carrying

amount of a financial asset or to the amortised cost of a financial liability.

‘Eligible liabilities’ Liabilities and capital instruments that are eligible to meet MREL that do not already qualify as own funds.

‘Encumbrance’ The use of assets to secure liabilities, such as by way of a lien or charge.

‘Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)’ The Barclays Group’s risk management responsibilities are laid out in the Enterprise

Risk Management Framework, which describes how Barclays identifies and manages risk. The framework identifies the principal risks

faced by the Barclays Group, sets out risk appetite requirements, sets out roles and responsibilities for risk management, and sets out

risk committee structure.

‘Equities’ Trading businesses encompassing Cash Equities, Equity Derivatives & Equity Financing, part of CIB.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	323

‘Equity and stock index derivatives’ Derivatives whose value is derived from equity securities. This category includes equity and stock

index swaps and options (including warrants, which are equity options listed on an exchange). The Barclays Group also enters into

fund-linked derivatives, being swaps and options whose underlyings include mutual funds, hedge funds, indices and multi-asset

portfolios. An equity swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange periodic payments, based upon a notional principal

amount, with one side paying fixed or floating interest and the other side paying based on the actual return of the stock or stock index.

An equity option provides the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a specified stock, basket of stocks

or stock index at a specified price or level on or before a specified date.

‘Equity risk’ In the context of trading book capital requirements, the risk of change in market value of an equity investment.

‘Equity structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge in place to reduce earnings volatility of the overnight / short-term equity investment

and to smooth the income over a medium/long term.

‘EU Risk Reduction Measure package’ A collection of amending Regulations and Directives that update core EU regulatory texts and

which came into force on 27 June 2019.

‘Euro Interbank Offered Rate (EURIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the European

interbank market.

‘Europe’ Geographic segment comprising countries in which Barclays operates within the EU (excluding the UK), Northern Continental

and Eastern Europe.

‘European Banking Authority (EBA)’ The EBA is an independent EU Authority which works to ensure effective and consistent prudential

regulation and supervision across the European banking sector. Its overall objectives are to maintain financial stability in the EU and to

safeguard the integrity, stability, efficiency and orderly functioning of the banking sector.

‘European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA)’ An independent European Supervisory Authority with the remit of enhancing the

protection of investors and reinforcing stable and well-functioning financial markets in the European Union.

‘Eurozone’ Represents the 20 European Union countries that have adopted the Euro as their common currency. The 20 countries are

Austria, Belgium, Croatia, Cyprus, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta,

Netherlands, Portugal, Slovakia, Slovenia and Spain.

‘Expected Credit Losses (ECL)’ A present value measure of the credit losses expected to result from default events that may occur

during a specified period of time. ECLs must reflect the present value of cash shortfalls, and the unbiased and probability weighted

assessment of a range of outcomes.

‘Expected Losses’ A regulatory measure of anticipated losses for exposures captured under an Internal Ratings Based credit risk

approach for capital adequacy calculations.  It is measured as the Barclays Group’s modelled view of anticipated losses based on

Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default (LGD) and Exposure at Default (EAD), with a one-year time horizon.

’Expert lender models’ Models of risk measures that are used for parts of the portfolio where the risk drivers are specific to a particular

counterparty, but where there is insufficient data to support the construction of a statistical model. These models utilise the knowledge

of credit experts that have in depth experience of the specific customer type being modelled.

‘Exposure’ Generally refers to positions or actions taken by a bank, or consequences thereof, that may put a certain amount of a bank’s

resources at risk.

‘Exposure at Default (EAD)’ The estimation of the extent to which the Barclays Group may be exposed to a customer or counterparty in

the event of, and at the time of, that customer’s or counterparty’s default. At default, the customer may not have drawn the loan fully

or may already have repaid some of the principal, so that exposure may be less than the approved loan limit.

‘External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAI)’ Institutions whose credit assessments may be used by credit institutions for the

determination of risk weight exposures according to CRR.

‘External ratings based approach / internal assessment approach (SEC-ERBA / IAA)’ This is a method to calculate risk-weighted

exposure amounts for securitisation positions. Under the SEC-ERBA approach, regulatory capital is assigned to securitisation tranches

on the basis of their external credit rating. The SEC-ERBA approach can also be used for unrated ABCP exposures where the institution

has the regulatory permission to use the Internal Assessment Approach (IAA) to assign a credit rating to the unrated ABCP exposure.

‘Exchange-traded notes (ETNs)’ Unsecured debt securities that track an underlying index of securities and trade on a stock exchange.

‘FVOCI’ Fair value through other comprehensive income.

‘Federal Housing Finance Agency (FHFA)’ An independent federal agency in the United States that oversees the secondary mortgage

market and regulates Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, as well as 11 Federal Home Loan banks. The FHFA also sets the Housing Price

Index (HPI) in the United States.

‘Federal Reserve Board (FRB)’ The Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System, commonly known as the Federal Reserve Board,

is responsible for – amongst other things – setting monetary policy in the US.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	324

‘FICC’ Represents Macro (including rates and currency), Credit and Securitised products, part of CIB.

‘Financial Policy Committee (FPC)’ The Bank of England’s Financial Policy Committee identifies, monitors and takes action to remove or

reduce systemic risks with a view to protecting and enhancing the resilience of the UK financial system. The FPC also has a secondary

objective to support the economic policy of the UK Government.

‘Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)’ The statutory body responsible for conduct of business regulation and supervision of UK

authorised firms. The FCA also has responsibility for the prudential regulation of firms that do not fall within the PRA’s scope.

‘Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)’ The UK’s fund for compensation of customers of authorised financial services firms

that are unable to pay claims.

‘Financial collateral comprehensive method (FCCM)’ A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which applies volatility

adjustments to the market value of exposure and collateral when calculating RWA values.

‘Financial Stability Board (FSB)’ An international body that monitors and makes recommendations about the global financial system.  It

promotes international financial stability by coordinating national financial authorities and international standard-setting bodies as they

work toward developing strong regulatory, supervisory and other financial sector policies. It fosters a level playing field by encouraging

coherent implementation of these policies across sectors and jurisdictions.

‘Fitch’ A credit rating agency, including Fitch Ratings Inc. and its affiliated entities.

‘Forbearance Programmes’ Forbearance programmes assist customers in financial difficulty through agreements to accept less than

contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and

conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, Barclays or a third party and include approved debt

counselling plans, minimum due reductions, interest rate concessions and switches from capital and interest repayments to interest-

only payments.

‘Foreclosures in Progress’ The process by which a bank initiates legal action against a customer with the intention of terminating a loan

agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property used as collateral for the loan subject to applicable law and recover amounts

it is owed.

‘Foreign exchange derivatives’ The Barclays Group’s principal exchange rate-related contracts are forward foreign exchange contracts,

currency swaps and currency options. Forward foreign exchange contracts are agreements to buy or sell a specified quantity of foreign

currency, usually on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps generally involve the exchange, or notional exchange, of

equivalent amounts of two currencies and a commitment to exchange interest periodically until the principal amounts are re-

exchanged on a future date. Currency options provide the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a fixed

amount of a currency at a specified exchange rate on or before a future date. As compensation for assuming the option risk, the option

writer generally receives a premium at the start of the option period.

‘Foreign exchange risk’ In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.

'Foundation Internal Ratings Based (F-IRB)’ See ‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’.

'FTSE 350’ The Financial Times Stock Exchange index comprising the 350 largest companies by capitalisation listed on the London

Stock Exchange.

‘Full time equivalent (FTE)’ Full time equivalent units are the on-job hours paid for employee services divided by the number of

ordinary-time hours normally paid for a full-time staff member when on the job (or contract employees where applicable).

‘Fully loaded’ When a measure is presented or described as being on a fully loaded basis, it is calculated without applying the

transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of CRR.

‘Funded credit protection’ A technique of credit risk mitigation where the reduction of the credit risk on the exposure of an institution

derives from the right of that institution, in the event of the default of the counterparty or on the occurrence of other specified credit

events relating to the counterparty, to liquidate, or to obtain transfer or appropriation of, or to retain certain assets or amounts, or to

reduce the amount of the exposure to, or to replace it with the amount of the difference between the amount of the exposure and the

amount of a claim on the institution.

‘FVTPL’ Fair value through profit or loss.

‘Gains on acquisitions’ The amount by which an acquirer’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and

contingent liabilities, recognised in a business combination, exceeds the cost of the combination.

‘General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR)’ GDPR (Regulation (EU) 2016/679) is a regulation intended to strengthen and unify data

protection for all individuals within the European Union.  GDPR forms part of UK law pursuant to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act

2018, as amended.

‘General market risk’ The risk of a price change in a financial instrument due to a change in the level of interest rates or owing to a

broad equity market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	325

‘Global Markets’ Offers clients a full range of liquidity, risk management and financing solutions, ideas and content tailored to their

investment and risk management needs, including execution capabilities across the spectrum of financial products.

‘Global Systemically Important Banks (G-SIBs or G-SIIs)’ Global financial institutions whose size, complexity and systemic

interconnectedness, mean that their distress or failure would cause significant disruption to the wider financial system and economic

activity. The Financial Stability Board and the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision publish a list of global systemically important

banks.

‘G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer (G-SII ALRB)’ A macroprudential buffer that applies to G-SIBs and other major domestic UK banks

and building societies, including banks that are subject to ring-fencing requirements. The G-SII ALRB will be calibrated as 35% (on a

phased basis) of the combined buffers that apply to the bank.

‘G-SII Buffer’ Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held under CRD to ensure that G-SIBs build up surplus capital to compensate

for the systemic risk that such institutions represent to the financial system.

’Grandfathering’ In the context of capital resources, the phasing in of the application of instrument eligibility rules which allows CRR

and CRR II non-compliant capital instruments to be included in regulatory capital subject to certain thresholds which decrease over the

transitional period.

‘Gross charge-off rates’ Represents the balances charged-off to recoveries in the reporting period, expressed as a percentage of

average outstanding balances excluding balances in recoveries. Charge-off to recoveries generally occurs when the collections focus

switches from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the entire outstanding balance, and represents a fundamental change in the

relationship between the bank and the customer. This is a measure of the proportion of customers that have gone into default during

the period.

‘Gross Domestic Product (GDP)’ Measures the total value of goods and services produced in a country within a specific time period.

‘Gross write-off rates’ Expressed as a percentage and represent balances written off in the reporting period divided by gross loans and

advances held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date.

‘Gross new lending’ New lending advanced to customers during the period.

‘Guarantee’ Unless otherwise described, an undertaking by a third party to pay a creditor should a debtor fail to do so. It is a form of

credit substitution.

‘Head Office’ Comprises head office central support, central treasury operations, Barclays Execution Services assets and legacy

businesses. Following the resegmentation announced at the FY23 Investor Update on 20 February 2024, Head Office also includes the

German consumer finance business (sold early Q1 2025), and the Payment acceptance business (rebranded merchant acquiring

business), for which a partnership with Brookfield Asset Management Ltd has been announced in April 2025.

‘High-Net-Worth’ Businesses within Barclays UK and Barclays International that provide banking and other services to high-net worth

customers.

‘High-quality liquid assets (HQLA)’ HQLA comprise eligible and unencumbered cash or assets that can be converted into cash at little

or no loss of value in private markets, to meet liquidity needs arising from a liquidity stress scenario or event. Please refer to ‘Level 1

assets’ and ‘Level 2 assets’.

‘High Risk’ In retail banking, ‘High Risk’ is defined as the subset of up-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed

behaviour, exhibit potential financial difficulty. Where appropriate, these customers are proactively contacted to assess whether

assistance is required.

‘Home loan’ A loan to purchase a residential property. The property is then used as collateral to guarantee repayment of the loan. The

borrower gives the lender a lien against the property and the lender can foreclose on the property if the borrower does not repay the

loan per the agreed terms. Also known as a residential mortgage.

‘IHC’ or ‘US IHC’ Barclays US LLC, the intermediate holding company established by Barclays in July 2016, which holds most of Barclays’

subsidiaries and assets in the US.

'Internal Model Approach (IMA)’ In the context of RWAs, a method for calculating RWAs where the exposure amount has been derived

via the use of a PRA approved internal market risk model.

'Internal Model Method (IMM)’ In the context of RWAs, a method for calculating RWAs where the exposure amount has been derived

via the use of a PRA approved internal counterparty credit risk model.

‘Identified Impairment (II)’ Specific impairment allowances for financial assets, estimated individually.

‘IFRS’ International Financial Reporting Standards.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	326

‘IFRS 9 transitional arrangements’ Following the application of IFRS 9 as of 1 January 2018, transitional arrangements under which

Article 473a of CRR permits institutions to phase-in the impact on capital and leverage ratios of the impairment requirements under

the new accounting standard.

‘Impairment Allowances’ A provision held on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for expected losses in

the lending book. An impairment allowance may either be identified or unidentified, and individual or collective.

‘Income’ Total income, unless otherwise specified.

‘Incremental Risk Charge (IRC)’ An estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and defaults for traded debt

instruments beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR for the non-correlation trading portfolio.

‘Independent Validation Unit (IVU)’ The function within Barclays responsible for independent review, challenge and approval of all

models.

‘Individual liquidity guidance (ILG)’ Guidance given to a bank about the amount, quality and funding profile of liquidity resources that

the PRA has asked the bank to maintain.

‘Inflation risk’ In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives.

‘Insurance Risk’ The risk of the Barclays Group’s aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of

insurance contracts being inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies.

‘Interchange’ Income paid to a credit card issuer for the clearing and settlement of a sale or cash advance transaction.

‘Interest-only home loans’ Under the terms of these loans, the customer makes payments of interest only for the entire term of the

mortgage, although customers may make early repayments of the principal within the terms of their agreement. The customer is

responsible for repaying the entire outstanding principal on maturity, which may require the sale of the mortgaged property.

‘Interest rate derivatives’ Derivatives linked to interest rates. This category includes interest rate swaps, collars, floors options and

swaptions. An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed rate and floating rate interest by means of

periodic payments based upon a notional principal amount and the interest rates defined in the contract. Certain agreements combine

interest rate and foreign currency swap transactions, which may or may not include the exchange of principal amounts. A basis swap is

a form of interest rate swap, in which both parties exchange interest payments based on floating rates, where the floating rates are

based upon different underlying reference indices. In a forward rate agreement, two parties agree a future settlement of the difference

between an agreed rate and a future interest rate, applied to a notional principal amount. The settlement, which generally occurs at the

start of the contract period, is the discounted present value of the payment that would otherwise be made at the end of that period.

‘Interest rate risk’ The risk of interest rate volatility adversely impacting the Barclays Group’s Net Interest Margin. In the context of the

calculation of market risk DVaR, measures the impact of changes in interest (swap) rates and volatilities on cash instruments and

derivatives.

‘Interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB)’ The risk that the Barclays Group is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a

mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities.

‘Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)’ One of three types of calculation that a bank with permission to use the Internal Ratings Based

(IRB) approach may apply to securitisation exposures. It consists of mapping a bank's internal rating methodology for credit exposures

to those of an External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) to determine the appropriate risk weight based on the ratings based

approach. Its applicability is limited to ABCP programmes related to liquidity facilities and credit enhancement.

‘Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)’ It describes how the Group identifies, manages and qualifies the risks to

which it is exposed, in pursuit of its business strategy. It assesses whether the quality and quantity of capital is available to absorb

capital losses for the risks the firm undertakes. The capital adequacy is assessed on a point of time basis and on a forward looking basis

taking into account baseline and stressed economic capital conditions.

‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’ An approach under the CRR framework that relies on the bank’s internal models to derive the risk

weights. The IRB approach is divided into two alternative applications, Advanced and Foundation:

–Advanced Internal Ratings Based (A-IRB): the bank uses its own estimates of Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default

(LGD) and credit conversion factor to model a given risk exposure.

–Foundation Internal Ratings Based (F-IRB): the bank applies its own PD as for A-IRB, but it uses standard parameters for the

LGD and the credit conversion factor. The Foundation IRB approach is specifically designed for wholesale credit exposures.

Hence retail, equity, securitisation positions and non-credit obligations asset exposures are treated under standardised or A-

IRB.

‘Internal Ratings Based approach (SEC-IRBA)’ This is a method to calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts for securitisation

positions. Under this method, an institution must be able to model regulatory capital requirements for underlying exposures in the

securitisation as if these had not been securitised (‘KIRB’), subject to certain other inputs and criteria.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	327

‘IPO’ Initial Public Offering.

‘IRB Roadmap’ Contains several EBA technical standards and sets of guidelines developed with the intent to reduce unwarranted

variability across firms in IRB Risk-Weighted Assets for Credit Risk. PRA required UK firms to implement these changes from 1 January

2022.

‘Investment Bank’ The Barclays Group’s investment bank which consists of origination led and returns focused Global Markets and

Investment Banking businesses, which forms part of the Corporate and Investment Bank segment of Barclays International.

‘Investment Banking Fees’ In the context of Investment Bank analysis of Total Income, fees generated from origination activity

businesses – including financial advisory, debt and equity underwriting.

‘Investment grade’ A debt security, treasury bill or similar instrument with a credit rating of AAA to BBB as measured by external credit

rating agencies.

‘ISDA Master Agreement’ The most commonly used master contract for OTC derivative transactions internationally. It is part of a

framework of documents, designed to enable OTC derivatives to be documented fully and flexibly. The framework consists of a master

agreement, a schedule, confirmations, definitions booklets, and a credit support annex. The ISDA Master Agreement is published by

the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA).

‘Key Risk Scenarios (KRS)’ Key Risk Scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each key risk in each business

and function, including an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios.

The Key Risk Scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) calculation of regulatory and

economic capital requirements.

‘Large exposure’ A large exposure is defined as the total exposure of a bank to a counterparty or group of connected clients, whether in

the banking book or trading book or both, which in aggregate equals or exceeds 10% of the bank's eligible capital.

‘Legal risk’ The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet applicable laws, rules and

regulations or contractual requirements or to assert or defend its intellectual property rights.

‘Lending’ In the context of Investment Bank analysis of Total Income, lending income includes Net Interest Income (NII), gains or losses

on loan sale activity, and risk management activity relating to the loan portfolio.

‘Letters of credit’ A letter typically used for the purposes of international trade guaranteeing that a debtor’s payment to a creditor will

be made on time and in full. In the event that the debtor is unable to make payment, the bank will be required to cover the full or

remaining amount of the purchase.

‘Level 1 assets’ High-quality liquid assets (HQLA) under the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), including cash, central

bank reserves and higher quality government securities.

‘Level 2 assets’ High-quality liquid assets (HQLA) under the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), comprising Level 2A

assets, including, e.g. lower quality government securities, Covered Bonds and corporate debt securities, and Level 2B assets, including,

e.g. lower rated corporate bonds, Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities and equities that meet certain conditions.

‘Lifetime expected credit losses’ An assessment of expected losses associated with default events that may occur during the life of an

exposure, reflecting the present value of cash shortfalls over the remaining expected life of the asset.

‘Lifetime Probability’ The likelihood of accounts entering default during the expected remaining life of the asset.

‘Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)’ The ratio of the stock of high-quality liquid assets (HQLA) to expected net cash outflows over the next

30 days. HQLA should be unencumbered, liquid in markets during a time of stress and, ideally, be central bank eligible. These include

cash and claims on central governments and central banks.

‘Liquidity Pool’ The Barclays Group liquidity pool comprises cash at central banks and highly liquid collateral specifically held by the

Barclays Group as a contingency to enable the bank to meet cash outflows in the event of stressed market conditions.

‘Liquidity Risk’ The risk that the Barclays Group is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations, or that it does not have the

appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets.

‘Liquidity risk appetite (LRA)’ The level of liquidity risk that the Barclays Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and

in meeting its regulatory obligations.

‘Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework)’ The Liquidity Risk Management Framework incorporates liquidity

policies, systems and controls that the Barclays Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within tolerances approved by the

Board and regulatory agencies.

‘Litigation and conduct charges’ or ‘Litigation and conduct’ Litigation and conduct charges include regulatory fines, litigation

settlements and conduct-related customer redress.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	328

‘Loan loss rate (LLR)’ Quoted in basis points and represents total impairment charges divided by gross loans and advances held at

amortised cost at the balance sheet date.

‘Loan to deposit ratio’ or ‘Loan: deposit ratio’ Loans and advances at amortised costs divided by deposits at amortised cost.

‘Loan to value (LTV) ratio’ Expresses the amount borrowed against an asset (i.e. a mortgage) as a percentage of the appraised value of

the asset. The ratios are used in determining the appropriate level of risk for the loan and are generally reported as an average for new

mortgages or an entire portfolio. Also see ‘Marked to market (MTM) LTV ratio’.

‘London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the London

interbank market, currently phased out.

‘Loss Given Default (LGD)’ The percentage of Exposure at Default (EAD) that will not be recovered following default. LGD comprises

the actual loss (the part that is not expected to be recovered), together with the economic costs associated with the recovery process.

‘Management VaR’ A measure of the potential loss of value arising from unfavourable market movements at a specific confidence

level, if current positions were to be held unchanged for a predefined period. Corporate and Investment Bank uses Management VaR

with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at a 95% confidence level, with a one day holding period.

‘Mandatory break clause’ In the context of counterparty credit risk, a contract clause that means a trade will be ended on a particular

date.

‘Marked to market approach’ A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which uses the current marked to market value

of derivative positions as well as a potential future exposure add-on to calculate an exposure to which a risk weight can be applied.

This is also known as the Current Exposure Method.

‘Marked to market (MTM) LTV ratio’ The loan amount as a percentage of the current value of the asset used to secure the loan. Also

see ‘Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ and ‘Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’.

‘Market risk’ The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the Barclays Group’s assets and liabilities from

fluctuations in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit

spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations.

‘Master netting agreement’ An agreement that provides for a single net settlement of all financial instruments and collateral covered by

the agreement in the event of the counterparty’s default, bankruptcy or insolvency, resulting in a reduced exposure.

‘Master trust securitisation programme’ A securitisation structure where a trust is set up for the purpose of acquiring a pool of

receivables. The trust issues multiple series of securities backed by these receivables.

‘Material Risk Takers (MRTs)’ Categories of staff whose professional activities have or are deemed to have a material impact on

Barclays’ risk profile, as determined in accordance with the European Banking Authority regulatory technical standard on the

identification of such staff.

‘Maximum Distributable Amount (MDA)’ The MDA is a factor representing the available distributable profit of an institution whilst

remaining in excess of its Combined Buffer Requirement (CBR). CRD IV places restrictions on a bank’s dividend, AT1 securities coupon

and variable compensation decisions depending on its proximity to meeting the buffer.

‘Medium-Term Notes (MTNs)’ Corporate notes (or debt securities) continuously offered by a company to investors through a broker

dealer. MTN tenors from under 1 year to 30 years. They can be issued with a fixed or floating interest rate or with a more complex

calculation of the interest rate; with a fixed maturity date (non-callable) or with embedded call or put options or early repayment

triggers. MTNs are most generally issued as senior, unsecured debt.

‘Methodology and policy’ In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly

or half yearly results), the effect on RWAs of methodology changes driven by regulatory policy changes.

‘MiFID II’ Refers to either the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive 2014/65/EC and the Markets in Financial Instruments

Regulation 600/2014 (as amended), which together are European Union laws that provide harmonised regulation for investment

services across the member states of the European Economic Area, or these rules and regulations as they form part of UK law pursuant

to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (as amended), as applicable.

‘Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)’ A European Union-wide requirement under the Bank Recovery and

Resolution Directive for all European banks and investment banks to hold a minimum level of equity and/or loss absorbing eligible

liabilities to ensure the operation of the bail-in tool to absorb losses and recapitalise an institution in resolution or these rules and

regulations as they form part of UK law pursuant to the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018 (as amended), as applicable. An

institution’s MREL requirement is set by its resolution authority. Amendments in the EU Risk Reduction Measure package are designed

to align MREL and TLAC for EU G-SIBs.

‘Model risk’ The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused

model outputs and reports.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	329

‘Model updates’ In the context of the Capital Risk section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report (or equivalent section in quarterly or half

yearly results), changes in RWAs caused by model implementation, changes in model scope or any changes required to address model

malfunctions.

‘Model validation’ Process through which models are independently challenged, tested and verified to prove that they have been built,

implemented and used correctly, and that they continue to be fit-for-purpose.

‘Modelled VaR’ In the context of RWAs, market risk calculated using Value at Risk models laid down by the CRR and supervised by the

PRA.

‘Money market funds’ Investment funds typically invested in short-term debt securities such as CP.

‘Monoline derivatives’ Derivatives with a monoline insurer such as credit default swaps referencing the underlying exposures held.

‘Moody’s’ A credit rating agency, including Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. and its affiliated entities.

‘Mortgage Servicing Rights (MSR)’ A contractual agreement in which the right to service an existing mortgage is sold by the original

lender to another party that specialises in the various functions involved with servicing mortgages.

‘Multilateral development banks’ Financial institutions created for the purposes of development, where membership transcends

national boundaries.

‘National discretion’ Discretions in CRD given to EU member states to allow the local regulator additional powers in the application of

certain CRD rules in its jurisdiction.

‘Net asset value per share’ Calculated by dividing shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity

instruments, by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Net Interest Income (NII)’ The difference between interest income on assets and interest expense on liabilities.

‘Net Interest Margin (NIM)’ Annualised Net Interest Income (NII) divided by the sum of average customer assets.

‘Net investment income’ Changes in the fair value of financial instruments designated at fair value, dividend income and the net result

on disposal of available for sale assets.

‘Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) The ratio of available stable funding to required stable funding over a one-year time horizon,

assuming a stressed scenario. The ratio is required to be over 100%. Available stable funding would include items such as equity

capital, preferred stock with a maturity of over one year, or liabilities with a maturity of over one year. The required amount of stable

funding is calculated as the sum of the value of the assets held and funded by the institution, multiplied by a specific required stable

funding factor assigned to each particular asset type, added to the amount of potential liquidity exposure multiplied by its associated

required stable funding factor.

‘Net trading income’ Gains and losses arising from trading positions which are held at fair value, in respect of both market-making and

customer business, together with interest, dividends and funding costs relating to trading activities.

‘Net write-off rate’ Expressed as a percentage and represents balances written off in the reporting period less any post write-off

recoveries divided by gross loans and advances held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date.

‘Net written credit protection’ In the context of leverage exposure, the net notional value of credit derivatives protection sold and credit

derivatives protection bought.

‘New bookings’ The total of the original balance on accounts opened in the reporting period, including any applicable fees and charges

included in the loan amount.

‘Non-asset backed debt instruments’ Debt instruments not backed by collateral, including government bonds, US agency bonds,

corporate bonds, commercial paper, certificates of deposit, convertible bonds, corporate bonds and issued notes.

‘Non-Model Method (NMM)’ In the context of RWAs, a method for calculating RWAs where the exposure amount has been derived

through the use of CRR norms, as opposed to an internal model.

‘Non-Traded Market Risk’ The risk that the current or future exposure in the banking book (i.e. non-traded book) will impact the bank's

capital and/or earnings due to adverse movements in Interest or foreign exchange rates.

‘Non-Traded VaR’ Reflects the volatility in the value of the fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) investments in the

liquidity pool which flow directly through capital via the FVOCI reserve. The underlying methodology to calculate non-traded VaR is

similar to Traded Management VaR, but the two measures are not directly comparable. The Non-Traded VaR represents the volatility

to capital driven by the FVOCI exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book

treatment.

‘Notch’ A single unit of measurement in a credit rating scale.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	330

‘Notional amount’ The nominal or face amount of a financial instrument, such as a loan or a derivative, that is used to calculate

payments made on that instrument.

‘Open Banking’ The Payment Services Directive (PSD2) and the Open API standards and data sharing remedy imposed by the UK

Competition and Markets Authority following its Retail Banking Market Investigation Order.

‘Operating leverage’ Operating expenses compared to total income less credit impairment charges and other provisions.

‘Operational risk’ The risk of loss to the Barclays Group from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to

external events (e.g. fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

‘Operational Riskdata eXchange Association (ORX)’ The Operational Riskdata eXchange Association (ORX) is a not-for-profit industry

association dedicated to advancing the measurement and management of operational risk in the global financial services industry.

Barclays is a member of ORX.

‘Origination led’ Focus on high-margin, low-capital fee-based activities and related hedging opportunities.

‘O-SII Buffer’ Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held under CRD to ensure that Other Systemically Important Institutions (O-

SIIs) build up surplus capital to compensate for the systemic risk that such institutions represent to the financial system. As part of the

implementation of CRD V requirements in the UK, the Other Systemically Important Institutions (O-SII) Buffer replaced the CRD IV

Systemic Risk Buffer.

‘Other systemically important institutions (O-SII)’ Other systemically important institutions are institutions that are deemed to create

risk to financial stability due to their systemic importance.

‘Over-issuance of Securities’ Over-issuance of securities under Barclays Bank PLC’s US shelf registration statements on Form F-3 filed

with the US Securities and Exchange Commission in 2018 and 2019.

‘Over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives’ Derivative contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties. They

offer flexibility because, unlike standardised exchange-traded products, they can be tailored to fit specific needs.

‘Overall capital requirement’ The overall capital requirement is the sum of capital required to meet the total of a Pillar 1 requirement, a

Pillar 2A requirement, a Global Systemically Important Institution (G-SII) buffer, a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) and a

Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB).

‘Own credit’ The effect of changes in the Barclays Group’s own credit standing on the fair value of financial liabilities.

‘Owner occupied mortgage’ A mortgage where the intention of the customer was to occupy the property at origination.

‘Own funds’ The sum of Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital.

‘Own funds and eligible liabilities ratio’ A risk-based ratio representing the own funds and eligible liabilities of the institution expressed

as a percentage of total RWAs.

‘Past due items’ Refers to loans where the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract.

‘Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress’ Provision for the settlement of PPI mis-selling claims and related claims management

costs.

‘Pension Risk’ The risk of the Barclays Group’s earnings and capital being adversely impacted by the Barclays Group’s defined benefit

obligations increasing or the value of the assets backing these defined benefit obligations decreasing due to changes in both the level

and volatility of prices.

‘Performance costs' The accounting charge recognised in the period for performance awards. For deferred incentives and long-term

incentives, the accounting charge is spread over the relevant periods in which the employee delivers service.

‘Personal Banking’ The business within the UK that offers retail solutions to help customers with their day-to-day banking needs.

‘Period end allocated tangible equity’ Allocated tangible equity is calculated as 13.5% (2022: 13.5%) of RWAs for each business,

adjusted for capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting assumptions the Barclays Group uses for capital

planning purposes. Head Office allocated tangible equity represents the difference between the Barclays Group’s tangible shareholders’

equity and the amounts allocated to businesses.

‘Period end tangible shareholder’s equity’ Shareholders' equity attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent, adjusted for the

deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Pillar 1 requirements’ The  minimum regulatory capital requirements to meet the sum of credit (including counterparty credit), market

risk and operational risk.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	331

‘Pillar 2A requirements’ The additional regulatory capital requirement to meet risks not captured under Pillar 1 requirements. These

requirements are the outcome of the bank’s Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and the complementary

supervisory review and evaluation carried out by the PRA.

‘Pillar Two’ The UK implemented Pillar Two legislation in the Finance (No.2) Act 2023 to introduce the OECD’s global minimum tax

rules for accounting periods beginning on or after 31 December 2023. The EU Minimum Tax Directive (Pillar Two) (Council Directive

(EU) 2022/2523) entered into force on 23 December 2022 and requires all member states to apply a Qualifying Domestic Minimum

Top-up Tax (QDMTT) to in scope multi-national groups within the EU.

‘Post-Model Adjustment (PMA)’ In the context of Basel models, a PMA is a short-term increase in regulatory capital applied at portfolio

level to account for model input data deficiencies, inadequate model performance or changes to regulatory definitions (e.g. definition

of default) to ensure the model output is accurate, complete and appropriate.

‘Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives’ A regulatory calculation in respect of the Barclays Group’s potential future credit

exposure on both exchange traded and OTC derivatives, calculated by assigning a standardised percentage (based on the underlying

risk category and residual trade maturity) to the gross notional value of each contract.

‘PRA waivers’ PRA approvals that specifically give permission to the bank to either modify or waive existing rules. Waivers are specific

to an organisation and require applications being submitted to and approved by the PRA.

‘Primary securitisations’ The issuance of securities (bonds and commercial papers) for fund-raising.

‘Primary Stress Tests’ In the context of Traded Market Risk and Stress Testing, primary stress tests provide an estimate of potentially

significant future losses that might arise from extreme market moves or scenarios. Primary Stress Tests apply stress moves to key

liquidity risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes.

‘Prime Services’ Involves financing of fixed income and equity positions using Repo and stock lending facilities. The Prime Services

business also provides brokerage facilitation services for hedge fund clients offering execution and clearance facilities for a variety of

asset classes.

‘Principal’ In the context of debt liability, the total amount borrowed, or the part of the amount borrowed which remains unpaid

(excluding interest).

‘Private equity investments’ Investments in equity securities in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange. Investment in

private equity often involves the investment of capital in private companies or the acquisition of a public company that results in the

delisting of public equity. Capital for private equity investment is raised by retail or institutional investors and used to fund investment

strategies such as leveraged buyouts, venture capital, growth capital, distressed investments and mezzanine capital.

‘Principal Risks’ The principal risks affecting the Barclays Group, as described in the Risk Review section of the Barclays PLC Annual

Report.

‘Pro-cyclicality’ Movements in financial variables (including capital requirements) following natural fluctuations in the economic cycle,

where the subsequent impact on lending or other market behaviours acts as an amplification of the economic cycle by the financial

sector.

‘Probability of Default (PD)’ The likelihood that a loan will not be repaid and will fall into default. PD may be calculated for each client

who has a loan (normally applicable to wholesale customers/clients) or for a portfolio of clients with similar attributes (normally

applicable to retail customers). To calculate PD, Barclays assesses the credit quality of borrowers and other counterparties and assigns

them an internal risk rating. Multiple rating methodologies may be used to inform the rating decision on individual large credits, such

as internal and external models, rating agency ratings, and for wholesale assets, market information such as credit spreads. For smaller

credits, a single source may suffice such as the result from an internal rating model.

‘Product structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge put in place to reduce earnings volatility on product balances with instant access

(such as non-interest bearing current accounts and managed rate deposits) and to smoothen the income over a medium/long term.

‘Profit before impairment’ Calculated by excluding credit impairment charges or releases from profit before tax.

‘Properties in Possession held as ‘Loans and Advances to Customers’’ Properties in the UK and Italy where the customer continues to

retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the

asset or the court has ordered the auction of the property.

‘Properties in Possession held as ‘Other Real Estate Owned’’ Properties in South Africa where the bank has taken legal ownership of the

title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as ‘Other Real Estate Owned’ within other assets on the bank’s balance

sheet.

‘Proprietary trading’ When a bank, brokerage or other financial institution trades on its own account, at its own risk, rather than on

behalf of customers, so as to make a profit for itself.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	332

‘Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA)’ The statutory body responsible for the prudential supervision of banks, building societies,

insurers and a small number of significant investment banks in the UK. The PRA is a subsidiary of the Bank of England.

‘Prudential Valuation Adjustment (PVA)’ A calculation which adjusts the accounting values of positions held on the balance sheet at

fair value to comply with regulatory valuation standards, which place greater emphasis on the inherent uncertainty around the value at

which a trading book position could be exited.

‘Public benchmark’ Unsecured medium-term notes issued in public syndicated transactions.

‘Qualifying central bank claims’ An amount calculated in line with the PRA policy statement allowing banks to exclude claims on the

central bank from the calculation of the leverage exposure measure, as long as these amounts are matched by liabilities denominated

in the same currency and of identical or longer maturity. Prior to 1 January 2022, banks were only permitted to exclude claims on the

central bank which were matched by deposits (rather than liabilities).

‘Qualifying Revolving Retail Exposure (QRRE)’ In the context of the IRB approach to credit risk RWA calculations, an exposure meeting

the criteria set out in CRR Article 154.4. It includes most types of credit card exposure.

‘Rates’ In the context of Investment Bank income analysis, trading revenue relating to government bonds and interest rate derivatives.

‘Re-aging’ The returning of a delinquent account to up-to-date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees).

‘Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduits (REMICs)’ An entity that holds a fixed pool of mortgages and that is separated into multiple

classes of interests for issuance to investors.

‘Recovery book’ Represents the total amount of exposure which has been transferred to recovery units who set and implement

strategies to recover the Group’s exposure.

‘Recovery book Impairment Coverage Ratio’ Impairment allowance held against recoveries balances expressed as a percentage of

balance in recoveries.

‘Recovery book proportion of outstanding balances’ Represents the amount of recoveries (gross month-end customer balances of all

accounts that have charged-off) as at the period end compared to total outstanding balances. The size of the recovery book would

ultimately have an impact on the overall impairment requirement on the portfolio. Balances in recovery will decrease if assets are

written-off, amounts are collected, or assets are sold to a third party (i.e. debt sale).

‘Regulatory capital’ The amount of capital that a bank holds to satisfy regulatory requirements.

‘Renegotiated loans’ Loans are generally renegotiated either as part of an ongoing customer relationship or in response to an adverse

change in the circumstances of the borrower. In the latter case, renegotiation can result in an extension of the due date of payment or

repayment plans under which the Barclays Group offers a concessionary rate of interest to genuinely distressed borrowers. This will

result in the asset continuing to be overdue, and individually impaired if the renegotiated payments of interest and principal will not

recover the original carrying amount of the asset. In other cases, renegotiation will lead to a new agreement, which is treated as a new

loan.

‘Repurchase agreement (Repo)’ or ‘Reverse repurchase agreement (Reverse repo)’ Arrangements that allow counterparties to use

financial securities as collateral for an interest bearing cash loan. The borrower agrees to sell a security to the lender subject to a

commitment to repurchase the asset at a specified price on a given date. For the party selling the security (and agreeing to repurchase

it in the future), it is a Repurchase agreement or Repo; for the counterparty to the transaction (buying the security and agreeing to sell

in the future), it is a Reverse repurchase agreement or Reverse repo.

‘Reputation risk’ The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the Barclays Group’s integrity and

competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

‘Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)’ Hybrid issued capital securities which may be debt or equity accounted, depending on their terms.

‘Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS)’ Securities that represent interests in a group of residential mortgages. Investors in

these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and/or principal).

‘Residual maturity’ The remaining contractual term of a credit obligation associated with a credit exposure.

‘Restructured loans’ Comprises loans where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has

been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows

discounted at the original effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised.

‘Retail Loans’ Loans to individuals or small and medium sized enterprises rather than to financial institutions and larger businesses. It

includes both secured and unsecured loans such as mortgages and credit card balances, as well as loans to certain smaller business

customers, typically with exposures up to £3m or with a turnover of up to £5m.

‘Return on average Risk Weighted Assets (RWA)’ Statutory profit after tax as a proportion of average RWAs.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	333

‘Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity (RoTE)’ (for Barclays Group) Annualised Group attributable profit, as a proportion of

average shareholders’ tangible equity.

‘Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity (RoTE)’ (for businesses) Annualised business attributable profit, as a proportion of

that business's average allocated tangible equity.

‘Risk appetite’ The level of risk that Barclays is prepared to accept whilst pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible

outcomes as business plans are implemented.

‘Risk weighted assets (RWAs) / Risk weighted exposure amounts (RWEAs)’ A measure of a bank’s assets adjusted for their associated

risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel rules as implemented by CRR and local regulators.

‘Risks not in VaR (RNIVS)’ Refers to all the key market risks which are not captured or not well captured within the VaR model

framework.

‘RWA Flow / movements in RWAs’

Book size/Asset size

Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA)

This represents RWA movements driven by changes in the size and composition of underlying positions, measured using EAD

values for existing portfolios over the period. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

▪new business and maturing loans

▪changes in product mix and exposure growth for existing portfolios

▪book size reductions owing to risk mitigation and write-offs.

Market risk

This represents RWA movements owing to the changes in risk level i.e. trading positions and volumes driven by business

activity.

Book quality/Asset quality

Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA)

This represents RWA movements driven by changes in the underlying credit quality and recoverability of portfolios and

reflected through model calibrations or realignments where applicable. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

▪PD migration and LGD changes driven by economic conditions

▪ratings migration for standardised exposures

Market risk

This is the movement in RWAs owing to changing risk levels in the trading book caused by fluctuations in market conditions.

Model updates

Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA)

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external model updates. This includes, but is not exclusive to:

▪updates to existing model inputs driven by both internal and external review

▪model enhancements to improve models performance

Market risk

This is the movement in RWAs reflecting change in model scope, changes to market data levels, volatilities, correlations,

liquidity and ratings used as input for the internal modelled RWA calculations.

Methodology and policy

Credit risk and counterparty risk (including CVA)

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external methodology, policy and regulatory changes. This

includes, but is not exclusive to:

▪updates to RWA calculation methodology, communicated by the regulator

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	334

▪the implementation of credit risk mitigation to a wider scope of portfolios

Market risk

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of both internal and external methodology, policy and regulatory changes for

market risk.

Acquisitions and disposals

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of the disposal or acquisition of business operations impacting the size of banking

and trading portfolios.

Foreign exchange movements

This is the movement in RWAs as a result of changes in the exchange rate between the functional currency of the Barclays

business area or portfolio and our presentational currency for consolidated reporting. It should be noted that foreign

exchange movements shown in RWA flow or movements in RWAs tables do not include the impact of foreign exchange for

the counterparty credit risk or market risk RWAs.

Other

This is the movement in RWAs driven by items that cannot be reasonably assigned to the other driver categories. In relation to

market risk RWAs, this includes changes in measurement that are not driven by methodology, policy or model updates.

‘Sarbanes-Oxley requirements’ The Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 (SOX), which was introduced by the US Government to safeguard

against corporate governance scandals.

‘Second Lien’ Debt that is issued against the same collateral as higher lien debt but that is subordinate to such higher lien debt. In the

case of default, compensation for this debt will only be received after the first lien has been repaid and thus represents a riskier

investment than the first lien.

‘Secondary Stress Tests’ Secondary stress tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from illiquid market risks that cannot be

hedged or reduced within the time period covered in Primary Stress Tests.

‘Secured Overnight Financing Rate (SOFR)’ A broad measure of the cost of borrowing cash overnight collateralised by US Treasury

securities in the repurchase agreement (Repo) market.

‘Securities Financing Transactions (SFT)’ In the context of RWAs, any of the following transactions: a repurchase transaction, a

securities or commodities lending or borrowing transaction, or a margin lending transaction whereby cash collateral is received or paid

in respect of the transfer of a related asset.

‘Securities Financing Transactions adjustments’ In the context of a bank's leverage ratio, a regulatory add-on calculated as exposure

less collateral, taking into account master netting agreements.

‘Securities lending arrangements’ Arrangements whereby securities are legally transferred to a third party subject to an agreement to

return them at a future date. The counterparty generally provides collateral against non-performance in the form of cash or other

assets.

‘Securitisation’ Typically, a process by which debt instruments, such as mortgage loans or credit card balances, are aggregated into a

pool, which is used to back new securities. A company sells these pools of assets to a special purpose vehicle (SPV) which then issues

securities backed by the assets. This allows the credit quality of the assets to be separated from the credit rating of the original

borrower.

‘Set-off clauses’ In the context of Counterparty credit risk, contract clauses that allow Barclays to set off amounts owed to us by a

counterparty against amounts owed by us to the counterparty.

‘Settlement balances’ Receivables or payables recorded between the date (the trade date) a financial instrument (such as a bond) is

sold, purchased or otherwise closed out, and the date the asset is delivered by or to the entity (the settlement date) and cash is

received or paid.

‘Settlement Netting’ Netting approach used in the calculation of the leverage exposure measure whereby firms may calculate their

exposure value of regular way purchases and sales awaiting settlement in accordance with Article 429g of CRR, as amended by CRR II.

‘Settlement risk’ The risk that settlement in a transfer system will not take place as expected, usually owing to a party defaulting on one

or more settlement obligations.

‘Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR)’ Barclays assesses when a significant increase in credit risk has occurred based on

quantitative and qualitative assessments.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	335

‘Slotting’ Slotting is internal Barclays terminology for what is known as “Specialised Lending” in the IRB approach as described in CRR

Article 147.8. A standard set of rules is required to be used in credit risk RWA calculations, based upon an assessment of factors such

as the financial strength of the counterparty. The requirements for the application of the Specialised Lending approach are detailed in

CRR Article 153.5.

‘Small and Medium-Sized Enterprises (SME)’ An enterprise which employs fewer than 250 persons and which has an annual turnover

which does not exceed EUR 50 million, and / or an annual balance sheet total not exceeding EUR 43 million. Within the SME category, a

small enterprise is defined as an enterprise which employs fewer than 50 persons and whose annual turnover and/or annual balance

sheet total does not exceed EUR 10 million.  This is defined in accordance with Commission Recommendation 2003/361/EC of 6 May

2003 concerning the definition of micro, small and medium sized enterprises.

‘Software intangibles benefit’ A benefit introduced as part of the EU response package to the COVID-19 pandemic and subsequently

reversed as part of the UK implementation of CRR II from 1 January 2022. Since 1 January 2022, software assets are fully deducted from

CET 1 capital.

‘Sovereign exposure(s)’ Exposures to central governments, including holdings in government bonds and local government bonds.

‘Special purpose entity’ A subsidiary created by a parent company to isolate financial risk. Its legal status as a separate company makes

its obligations secure even if the parent company goes bankrupt.

‘Specific market risk’ A risk that is due to the individual nature of an asset and can potentially be diversified or the risk of a price change

in an investment due to factors related to the issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying investment.

‘Spread risk’ Measures the impact of changes to the swap spread, i.e. the difference between swap rates and government bond yields.

‘Stage 1’ This represents financial instruments where the credit risk of the financial instrument has not increased significantly since

initial recognition. Stage 1 financial instruments are required to recognise a 12 month expected credit loss allowance.

‘Stage 2’ This represents financial instruments where the credit risk of the financial instrument has increased significantly since initial

recognition. Stage 2 financial instruments are required to recognise a lifetime expected credit loss allowance.

‘Stage 3’ This represents financial instruments where the financial instrument is considered impaired. Stage 3 financial instruments are

required to recognise a lifetime expected credit loss allowance.

‘Standard & Poor’s’ A credit rating agency, including S&P Global Inc. and its affiliated entities.

'Standardised Approach for Counterparty Credit Risk (SA-CCR)' The approach for the calculation of Exposure at Default for derivative

and long-settlement transactions introduced in the UK under CRR II from 1 January 2022.  This is a more risk sensitive approach that

replaces the Current Exposure Method (CEM) and Standardised Method (SM) applicable under CRR.

‘Standardised Approach (SEC-SA)’ This is a method to calculate risk-weighted exposure amounts for securitisation positions. Under

this method, an institution must be able to calculate regulatory capital requirements per standardised approach for underlying

exposures in the securitisation as if these had not been securitised (‘KSA’), subject to certain other inputs and criteria.

‘Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments’ Agreements to lend to a customer in the future, subject to certain conditions.

Such commitments are either made for a fixed period, or have no specific maturity but are cancellable by the lender subject to notice

requirements.

‘Statutory’ Line items of income, expense, profit or loss, assets, liabilities or equity stated in accordance with the requirements of the UK

Companies Act 2006 and the requirements of IFRS.

‘Statutory return on average shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders as a proportion of

average shareholders’ equity.

‘STD’ / ‘Standardised Approach’ A method of calculating RWAs that relies on a mandatory framework set by the regulator to derive risk

weights based on counterparty type and a credit rating provided by an External Credit Assessment Institute.

‘Sterling Over Night Index Average (SONIA)’ A risk free interest rate that reflects bank and building societies’ wholesale overnight

funding rates in the sterling unsecured market administrated and calculated by the Bank of England.

‘Stress Testing’ A process which involves identifying possible future adverse events or changes in economic conditions that could have

unfavourable effects on the Barclays Group (either financial or non-financial), assessing the Barclays Group’s ability to withstand such

changes, and identifying management actions to mitigate the impact.

‘Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)’ An estimate of the potential loss arising from a 12-month period of significant financial stress calibrated

to 99% confidence level over a 10-day holding period.

‘Structural cost actions (SCA)’ Cost actions taken to improve future financial performance.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	336

‘Structural FX’ Foreign currency positions taken to hedge against the adverse effect of exchange rates on capital ratios.  Under Article

352(2) of the CRR the PRA may permit banks to exclude such Structural FX positions from the calculation of its market risk RWAs. On

15 December 2021 the PRA issued Barclays this permission, taking effect from 31 December 2021.  Any long FX positions that are in

excess of what is required to hedge the adverse effects of exchange rates on the bank’s capital ratio are not in scope of this exemption

and will therefore be captured under the standardised market risk approach.

‘Structural hedge’ or ‘hedging’ An interest rate hedge in place to reduce earnings volatility and to smooth the income over a medium/

long term on positions that exist within the balance sheet and do not re-price in line with market rates. See also ‘Equity structural

hedge’ and ‘Product structural hedge’.

‘Structural model of default’ A model based on the assumption that an obligor will default when its assets are insufficient to cover its

liabilities.

‘Structured credit’ Includes the legacy structured credit portfolio primarily comprising derivative exposures and financing exposures to

structured credit vehicles.

‘Structured entity’ An entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities are

generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

‘Structured finance or structured notes’ A structured note is an investment tool that pays a return linked to the value or level of a

specified asset or index and sometimes offers capital protection if the value declines. Structured notes can be linked to equities, interest

rates, funds, commodities and foreign currency.

‘Sub-prime’ Sub-prime is defined as loans to borrowers typically having weakened credit histories that include payment delinquencies

and potentially more severe problems such as court judgments and bankruptcies. They may also display reduced repayment capacity

as measured by credit scores, high debt-to-income ratios, or other criteria indicating heightened risk of default.

‘Subordinated liabilities’ Liabilities which, in the event of insolvency or liquidation of the issuer, are subordinated to the claims of

depositors and other creditors of the issuer.

‘Supranational bonds’ Bonds issued by an international organisation, where membership transcends national boundaries (e.g. the

European Union or World Trade Organisation).

‘Synthetic Securitisation Transactions’ Securitisation transactions effected through the use of derivatives.

‘Tangible Net Asset Value (TNAV)’ Shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible

assets and goodwill.

‘Tangible Net Asset Value per share’ Calculated by dividing shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity

instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Tangible shareholders’ equity’ Shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the

deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Term premium’ Additional interest required by investors to hold assets with a longer period to maturity.

‘The Fundamental Review of the Trading Book (FRTB)’ A comprehensive suite of capital rules developed by the Basel Committee on

Banking Supervision as part of Basel III and applicable to banks’ wholesale trading activities.

‘The Standardised Approach (TSA)’ An approach used to quantify required capital for operational risk. Under TSA, banks are required

to hold regulatory capital for operational risk equal to the annual average, calculated over a rolling three-year period, of the relevant

income indicator (across all business lines), multiplied by a supervisory defined percentage factor by business lines.

‘The three lines of defence’ The three lines of defence operating model enables Barclays to separate risk management activities

between those client facing areas of the Barclays Group and associated support functions responsible for identifying risk, operating

within applicable limits and escalating risk events (first line); colleagues in Risk and Compliance who establish the limits, rules and

constraints under which the first line operates and monitor their performance against those limits and constraints (second line); and,

colleagues in Internal Audit who provide assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk

management and control over risks (third line). The Legal function does not sit in any of the three lines, but supports them all. The

Legal function is, however, subject to oversight from Risk and Compliance with respect to its own Operational and Compliance Risks,

as well as with respect to the Legal Risk to which Barclays is exposed.

‘Third country’ As defined in CRR, a country or territory outside the United Kingdom.

‘Third Party Service Providers (TPSP)’ Third Party Service Provider means any entity that has entered an arrangement with Barclays in

order to provide business functions, activities, goods and/or services to Barclays.

‘Through-the-cycle’ A long-run average through a full economic cycle.

‘Tier 1 capital’ The sum of the Common Equity Tier 1 capital and Additional Tier 1 capital.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	337

‘Tier 1 capital ratio’ The ratio which expresses Tier 1 capital as a percentage of RWAs under CRR.

‘Tier 2 (T2) capital’ A type of capital as defined in the CRR principally composed of capital instruments, subordinated loans and share

premium accounts where qualifying conditions have been met.

‘Tier 2 (T2) securities’ Securities that are treated as Tier 2 (T2) capital for the purposes of CRR.

‘Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against forbearance balances expressed as a

percentage of balance in forbearance.

‘Total capital ratio’ Total regulatory capital as a percentage of RWAs.

‘Total Loss Absorbing Capacity (TLAC)’ A standard published by the FSB which is applicable to G-SIBs and requires a G-SIB to hold a

prescriptive minimum level of instruments and liabilities that should be readily available for bail-in within resolution to absorb losses

and recapitalise the institution. See also ‘Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)’.

‘Total outstanding balance’ In retail banking, total outstanding balance is defined as the gross month-end customer balances on all

accounts, including accounts charged off to recoveries.

‘Total return swap’ An instrument whereby the seller of protection receives the full return of the asset, including both the income and

change in the capital value of the asset. The buyer of the protection in return receives a predetermined amount.

‘Traded Market Risk’ The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions.

‘Trading book’ All positions in financial instruments and commodities held by an institution either with trading intent, or in order to

hedge positions held with trading intent.

‘Traditional Securitisation Transactions’ Securitisation transactions in which an underlying pool of assets generates cash flows to

service payments to investors.

‘Transitional’ When a measure is presented or described as being on a transitional basis, it is calculated in accordance with the

transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of CRR.

‘Treasury and Capital Risk’ This comprises of Liquidity Risk, Capital Risk and Interest Rate Risk in the banking book.

‘Twelve month expected credit losses’ The portion of the lifetime ECL arising if default occurs within 12 months of the reporting date

(or shorter period if the expected life is less than 12 months), weighted by the probability of said default occurring.

‘Twelve month PD’ The likelihood of accounts entering default within 12 months of the reporting date.

‘Unencumbered’ Assets not used to secure liabilities or not otherwise pledged.

‘United Kingdom (UK)’ Geographic segment where Barclays operates comprising the UK. Also see ‘Europe’.

‘UK Bank Levy’ A levy that applies to UK banks, building societies and the UK operations of foreign banks. The levy is payable based on a

portion of the UK chargeable equity and liabilities of the bank on its balance sheet date.

‘UK leverage exposure’ Calculated as per the PRA rulebook, where the exposure calculation also includes the FPC’s recommendation to

allow banks to exclude claims on the central bank from the calculation of the leverage exposure measure, as long as these are matched

by liabilities denominated in the same currency and of identical or longer maturity. Prior to 1 January 2022, banks were only permitted

to exclude claims on the central bank which were matched by deposits (rather than liabilities).

‘UK leverage ratio’ As per the PRA rulebook, means a bank’s Tier 1 capital divided by its total exposure measure, with this ratio

expressed as a percentage. From 1 January 2022, UK banks are subject to a single UK leverage ratio requirement.

‘UK regulatory levies’ Comprises the BoE levy scheme and the UK bank levy.

‘Unfunded credit protection’ A technique of credit risk mitigation where the reduction of the credit risk on the exposure of an

institution derives from the obligation of a third party to pay an amount in the event of the default of the borrower or the occurrence of

other specified credit events.

‘US Partner Portfolio’ Barclays co-branded credit card programmes with companies across various sectors including but not limited to

travel, entertainment and retail.

‘US Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities’ Securities that represent interests in a group of US residential mortgages.

‘Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ In the context of credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating

marked to market LTVs derived by comparing total outstanding balance and the value of total collateral we hold against these

balances. Valuation weighted Loan to Value ratio is calculated using the following formula: LTV = total outstandings in portfolio/total

property values of total outstandings in portfolio.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	338

‘Value at Risk (VaR)’ A measure of the potential loss of value arising from unfavourable market movements at a specific confidence

level and within a specific timeframe.

‘Weighted off balance sheet commitments’ Regulatory add-ons to the leverage exposure measure based on credit conversion factors

used in the Standardised Approach to credit risk.

‘Wholesale loans’ or ‘wholesale lending’ Lending to larger businesses, financial institutions and sovereign entities.

‘WM&I’ The Wealth Management & Investments business, which was transferred from Barclays UK to CC&P on 1 May 2023.

‘Working Group on Sterling Risk-Free Reference Rates (RFRWG)’ A group mandated with catalysing a broad-based transition to using

‘Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA)’ as the primary sterling interest rate benchmark in bond, loan and derivatives markets.

‘Write-off (gross)’ The point where it is determined that an asset is irrecoverable, or it is no longer considered economically viable to try

to recover the asset or it is deemed immaterial or full and final settlement is reached and the shortfall written off. In the event of write-

off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment allowance held against the asset is released. Net

write-offs represent gross write-offs less post write-off recoveries.

‘Wrong-way risk’ Arises in a trading exposure when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty,

which in an event of default would lead to a significant mark to market loss. When assessing the credit exposure of a wrong-way trade,

analysts take into account the correlation between the counterparty and the underlying asset as part of the sanctioning process.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	339

EXHIBIT INDEX

Exhibit	Description
1.1	Articles of Association of Barclays Bank PLC (incorporated by reference to the Form 6-K (Film No. 241039728) filed with the SEC on June 13,<br><br>2024)
2.1	Long Term Debt Instruments: Barclays Bank PLC is not party to any single instrument relating to long-term debt pursuant to which a total<br><br>amount of securities exceeding 10% of its total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorised to be issued. Barclays Bank PLC hereby agrees to<br><br>furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”), upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of<br><br>holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt of any of its subsidiaries for which consolidated or unconsolidated<br><br>financial statements are required to be filed with the Commission.
2.2	Description of the Registrant’s Securities Registered Pursuant to Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
4.1	Barclays Bank PLC Directors Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays Bank PLC Registration Statement on Form<br><br>S-8 (File no. 333-149301) filed on February 19, 2008)
4.2	Barclays Bank PLC Senior Management Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays Bank PLC Registration<br><br>Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-149302) filed on February 19, 2008).
4.3	Barclays Bank PLC 1999 Barclays Bank PLC Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays Bank PLC Registration<br><br>Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-112796) filed on February 13, 2004).
4.4	Barclays Bank PLC U.S. Senior Management Deferred Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays Bank PLC Registration<br><br>Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-112797) filed on February 13, 2004).
11.2	Barclays Group Securities Dealing Code
12.1	Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240. 13(a)-14(a)
13.1	Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240. 13(a) and 18 U.S.C 1350(a) and 1350(b)
15.1	Consent of KPMG LLP for incorporation by reference of reports in certain securities registration statements of Barclays Bank PLC.
97.1	Compensation Recovery Policy (incorporated by reference to the 2023 Form 20-F, as amended, filed with the SEC on February 21, 2024)
99.1	A table setting forth the issued share capital of Barclays Bank Group’s total shareholders’ equity, indebtedness and contingent liabilities as at 31<br><br>December 2025.
101.INS	XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH	XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema
101.CAL	XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Calculation Linkbase
101.DEF	XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Definition Linkbase
101.LAB	XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Label Linkbase
101.PRE	XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Presentation Linkbase
Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F	340
---	---

Signatures

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised

the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

Date February 10, 2026	Barclays Bank PLC<br><br>(Registrant)
	By	/s/ Anna Cross
		Anna Cross, Interim Chief Financial Officer

Document

DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES

REGISTERED UNDER SECTION 12 OF THE EXCHANGE ACT

As of December 31, 2025, Barclays Bank PLC (“Barclays,” the “Company,” “we,” “us,” and “our”) had the following classes of securities registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (the “Act”): Exchange-Traded Notes.

Description of Exchange-Traded Notes

The following description of our Exchange-Traded Notes (the “ETNs”) is a summary and does not purport to be complete. It is subject to and qualified in its entirety by reference to the indenture, dated September 16, 2004, entered into between us and The Bank of New York Mellon, New York Branch, as “Trustee” as amended by a supplemental indenture dated February 22, 2018 (the “Indenture”), which is incorporated by reference as an exhibit to the Annual Report on Form 20-F of which this Exhibit 2.2 is a part. We encourage you to read the Indenture for additional information.

The ETNs are part of a series of debt securities entitled “Global Medium-Term Notes, Series A” (the “medium-term notes”) that we may issue under the Indenture from time to time. The ETNs constitute our unsecured and unsubordinated obligations ranking pari passu, without any preference among themselves, with all our other outstanding unsecured and unsubordinated obligations, present and future, except those obligations as are preferred by operation of law.

The ETNs are not deposit liabilities of Barclays Bank PLC and are not covered by the U.K. Financial Services Compensation Scheme or insured by the FDIC or any other governmental agency or deposit insurance agency of the United States, the United Kingdom or any other jurisdiction.

The Indenture does not limit the amount of debt securities that we may issue. We may, without holders’ consent, create and issue additional securities having the same terms and conditions as a series of ETNs. If there is substantial demand a series of ETNs, we may issue additional ETNs in that series frequently. We may consolidate the additional securities to form a single class with the outstanding ETNs of any series. However, we are under no obligation to create or sell additional ETNs at any time, and if we do create or sell additional ETNs, we may limit such sales and stop selling additional ETNs at any time. We also reserve the right to cease or suspend sales of ETNs from inventory held by our affiliate Barclays Capital Inc. at any time. If we limit, restrict or stop sales of ETNs, or if we subsequently resume sales of ETNs, the liquidity and trading price of the relevant ETNs in the secondary market could be materially and adversely affected.

For the purpose of determining whether the holders of our medium-term notes, of which the ETNs are a part, are entitled to take any action under the Indenture, we will treat the principal amount of the ETNs outstanding as their principal amount. Although the terms of the ETNs may differ from those of the other medium-term notes, holders of specified percentages in principal amount of all medium-term notes, together in some cases with other series of our debt securities, will be able to take action affecting all the medium-term notes, including the ETNs. This action may involve changing some of the terms that apply to the medium-term notes, accelerating the maturity of the medium-term notes after a default or waiving some of our obligations under the Indenture. We discuss these matters under “General Terms of the ETNs—Modification and Waiver” and “—Events of Default; Limitations on Suits” below.

Unless otherwise specified, references to “holders” in this section mean those who own the ETNs registered in their own names, on the books that we or the Trustee, or any successor Trustee, as applicable, maintain for this purpose, and not those who own beneficial interests in the ETNs registered in street name or in the ETNs issued in book-entry form through DTC or another depositary.

Description of iPath® Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM Exchange-Traded Notes

Terms defined within this “Description of iPath® Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM Exchange-Traded Notes” section are defined only with respect to this section.

General

The return on iPath® Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM Exchange-Traded Notes (“ETNs”) is linked to the performance of the Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM (the “Index” or the “BCOM

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Index”). The Index is designed to be a benchmark for commodities as an asset. The Index is composed of futures contracts on physical commodities (the “index components”) and is intended to reflect the returns that are potentially available through an unleveraged investment in the futures contract or contracts on the physical commodities comprising the Index plus the rate of interest that could be earned on cash collateral invested in specified Treasury Bills. The Index is the exclusive property of UBS Securities LLC (collectively with its affiliates, “UBS”) and its licensor. On July 1, 2014, UBS entered into a commodity index license agreement with Bloomberg Finance L.P., whereby UBS has engaged Bloomberg’s services for calculation, publication, administration and marketing of the Bloomberg Commodity IndexesSM. The Index is now calculated, administered and published by Bloomberg Index Services Limited (“BISL” or the “Index Sponsor” and, collectively with its affiliates, “Bloomberg”). The ETNs are traded on the NYSE Arca stock exchange under the ticker symbol “DJP.”

Inception, Issuance, and Maturity

The ETNs were first sold on June 6, 2006, were first issued on June 9, 2006, and are due on June 12, 2036.

We refer to June 6, 2006 as the “inception date,” June 9, 2006 as the “issue date” and June 12, 2036 as the “maturity date.”

If the maturity date the ETNs is not a business day, the maturity date will be the next following business day. If the fifth business day before this day does not qualify as a valuation date, then the maturity date will be the fifth business day following the final valuation date. The calculation agent may postpone the final valuation date—and therefore the maturity date—if a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on a day that would otherwise be the final valuation date.

In the event that payment at maturity is deferred beyond the stated maturity date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Coupon

We will not pay holders interest during the term of the ETNs.

Denomination

The ETNs are in denominations of $50.

Payment at Maturity

If holders hold their ETNs to maturity, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars at maturity that is linked to percentage change in the value of the Index between the inception date and the final valuation date. The cash payment in U.S. dollars at maturity for the ETNs will be an amount equal to (1) the principal amount of the ETNs times (2) the index factor on the final valuation date minus (3) the investor fee on the final valuation date.

The index factor for the ETNs on the final valuation date will be equal to the final index level divided by the initial index level. The initial index level is the closing value of the Index on the inception date and the final index level is the closing value of the Index on the final valuation date.

Investor Fee

The investor fee for the ETNs on the final valuation date is equal to (1) (a) 0.75% per year (for the period from the inception date to and including April 30, 2015) and (b) 0.70% per year (for the period beginning the day after April 30, 2015 until the redemption date or the maturity date) times (2) the principal amount of the ETNs times (3) the index factor, calculated on a daily basis in the following manner: The accrued investor fee on the inception date of the ETNs was equal to zero. On each subsequent calendar day until and including April 30, 2015, the accrued investor fee increased by an amount equal to (1) 0.75% per year times (2) the principal amount of the ETNs times (3) the index factor on that day (or, if such day is not a trading day, the index factor on the immediately preceding trading day) divided by (4) 365. For the period beginning on, but not including April 30, 2015 and ending on, and including the redemption date, or the maturity date, the accrued investor fee increases by an amount equal to (1) 0.70% per year times (2)

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

the principal amount of the ETNs times (3) the index factor on that day (or, if such day is not a trading day, the index factor on the immediately preceding trading day) divided by (4) 365.

The investor fee reduces the daily return of the ETNs. Because the investor fee reduces the amount of return to holders at maturity or upon early redemption, the value of the Index must increase significantly in order for holders to receive at least the principal amount of their investment at maturity or upon early redemption. If the value of the Index decreases or does not increase sufficiently, holders will receive less than the principal amount of their investment at maturity or upon early redemption.

Payment Upon Holder Redemption

Prior to maturity, holders may, subject to certain restrictions, redeem their ETNs on any holder redemption date during the term of the ETNs, provided that they present at least 30,000 ETNs for redemption, or their broker or other financial intermediary (such as a bank or other financial institution not required to register as a broker-dealer to engage in securities transactions) bundles their ETNs for redemption with those of other investors to reach this minimum. If holders choose to redeem their ETNs on a particular holder redemption date, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars on such date in an amount equal to the daily redemption value, which is (1) the principal amount of the ETNs times (2) the index factor on the applicable valuation date minus (3) the investor fee on the applicable valuation date. Holders must redeem at least 30,000 ETNs at one time in order to exercise their right to redeem their ETNs on any holder redemption date. We may from time to time in our sole discretion reduce, in part or in whole, the minimum redemption amount of 30,000 ETNs. Any such reduction will be applied on a consistent basis for all holders of the ETNs at the time the reduction becomes effective.

The index factor for a series of ETNs on the relevant valuation date is the closing value of the Index underlying such ETNs on that day divided by the initial index level. The initial index level is the closing value of the Index underlying the ETNs on the relevant inception date.

The investor fee is calculated as described in “—Investor Fee.”

In the event that payment upon holder redemption is deferred beyond the original holder redemption date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, we currently have reduced the minimum redemption amount to 5,000 ETNs. Our reduction of the minimum redemption amount will be available to any and all holders of the ETNs on such early redemption dates and will remain in effect until the waiver is removed by us at our sole discretion. We intend to provide to holders of the ETNs at least ten calendar days’ notice prior to removing any waiver for the reduction of the minimum redemption amount for the ETNs. We may, at any time and in our sole discretion, make further modifications to the minimum redemption amount, including, among others, to reinstate the minimum redemption amount of 30,000 ETNs for all redemption dates after such further modification. Any such modification will be applied on a consistent basis for all holders of the ETNs at the time such modification becomes effective.

Payment Upon Issuer Redemption

Prior to maturity, we may, at our sole discretion, choose to redeem the ETNs (in whole but not in part) on any issuer redemption date during the term of the ETNs. If we elect to redeem the ETNs, we will deliver written notice of such election to redeem to the holders of the ETNs not less than 10 calendar days prior to the issuer redemption date specified by us in such notice. In this scenario, the ETNs will be redeemed on the date specified by us in such notice. In this scenario, the ETNs will be redeemed on the date specified by us in the issuer redemption notice, but in no event prior to the tenth calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice. If we exercise our right to redeem the ETNs, holders will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars on that date in an amount equal to (1) the principal amount of the ETNs times (2) the index factor on the applicable valuation date minus (3) the investor fee on the applicable valuation date.

The index factor for the ETNs on the relevant valuation date is the closing value of the Index on that day divided by the initial index level. The initial index level is the closing value of the Index on the relevant inception date.

The investor fee is calculated as described in “—Investor Fee.”

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

In the event that payment upon issuer redemption is deferred beyond the original issuer redemption date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Valuation Date

A valuation date is each business day from June 15, 2006 to June 5, 2036, inclusive (subject to the occurrence of a market disruption event), or, if such date is not a trading day, the next succeeding trading day, not to exceed five trading days. We refer to Thursday, June 5, 2036, as the “final valuation date.”

Redemption Date

A holder redemption date is the third business day following each valuation date (other than the final valuation date), where the final redemption date will be the third business day following the valuation date that is immediately prior to the final valuation date.

An issuer redemption date is the date specified by us in the issuer redemption notice, which will in no event be prior to the tenth calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice.

Early Redemption Procedures

Holder Redemption Procedures

Holders may, subject to the minimum redemption amount described above, elect to redeem their ETNs on any holder redemption date. To redeem their ETNs, holders must instruct their broker or other person with whom they hold their ETNs to deliver a notice of redemption to us via facsimile or email by no later than 4:00 p.m., New York City time, on the business day prior to the applicable valuation date.

Issuer Redemption Procedures

We have the right to redeem or “call” the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion without holders’ consent on any issuer redemption date until and including maturity. If we elect to redeem the ETNs, we will deliver written notice of such election to redeem to DTC and the Trustee not less than ten calendar days prior to the issuer redemption date specified by us in such notice. In this scenario, the final valuation date will be deemed to be the date specified by us in the notice (subject to postponement in the event of a market disruption event), and the ETNs will be redeemed on the issuer redemption date specified by us in such notice, but in no event prior to the tenth calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice.

Market Disruption Events

As set forth under “—Payment at Maturity,” “—Payment Upon Holder Redemption” and “—Payment Upon Issuer Redemption” above, the calculation agent will determine the value of the Index on each valuation date, including the final valuation date. As described above, a valuation date may be postponed and thus the determination of the value of the Index may be postponed if the calculation agent determines that, on a valuation date, a market disruption event has occurred or is continuing in respect of any index component. If such a postponement occurs, the index components unaffected by the market disruption event shall be determined on the scheduled valuation date and the value of the affected index component shall be determined using the closing value of the affected index component on the first trading day after that day on which no market disruption event occurs or is continuing. In no event, however, will a valuation date be postponed by more than five trading days.

If a valuation date is postponed until the fifth trading day following the scheduled valuation date but a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on such day, that day will nevertheless be the valuation date and the calculation agent will make a good faith estimate in its sole discretion of the value of the Index for such day.

Any of the following will be a “market disruption event”:

•a material limitation, suspension or disruption in the trading of any index component which results in a failure by the trading facility on which the relevant contract is traded to report a daily contract reference price (the price of the relevant contract that is used as a reference or benchmark by market participants);

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

•the daily contract reference price for any index component is a “limit price,” which means that the daily contract reference price for such contract has increased or decreased from the previous day’s daily contract reference price by the maximum amount permitted under the applicable rules or procedures of the relevant trading facility;

•failure by the Index Sponsor to publish the closing value of the Index or of the applicable trading facility or other price source to announce or publish the daily contract reference price for one or more index components; or

•any other event, if the calculation agent determines in its sole discretion that the event materially interferes with our ability or the ability of any of our affiliates to unwind all or a material portion of a hedge with respect to the ETNs that we or our affiliates have effected or may effect.

The following events will not be market disruption events:

•a limitation on the hours or numbers of days of trading on a trading facility on which any index component is traded, but only if the limitation results from an announced change in the regular business hours of the relevant market; or

•a decision by a trading facility to permanently discontinue trading in any index component.

Default Amount on Acceleration

If an Event of Default (as defined below) occurs and the maturity of the ETNs is accelerated, we will pay the default amount in respect of the principal of the ETNs at maturity. We describe the default amount below under “General Terms of the ETNs—Default Amount.”

Discontinuance or Modification of the Index

If the Index Sponsor discontinues publication of the Index and the Index Sponsor or any other person or entity publishes an index that the calculation agent determines is comparable to the discontinued Index and approves as a successor index, then the calculation agent will determine the value of the Index on the applicable valuation date and the amount payable at maturity or upon redemption by reference to such successor index.

If the calculation agent determines that the publication of the Index is discontinued and that there is no successor index, or that the closing level of the Index is not available because of a market disruption event or for any other reason, on the date on which the value of the Index is required to be determined, or if for any other reason the Index is not available to us or the calculation agent on the relevant date, the calculation agent will determine the amount payable by a computation methodology that the calculation agent determines will as closely as reasonably possible replicate the Index.

If the calculation agent determines that the Index, the index components of the Index or the method of calculating the Index has been changed at any time in any respect—including any addition, deletion or substitution and any reweighting or rebalancing of index components, and whether the change is made by the Index Sponsor under its existing policies or following a modification of those policies, is due to the publication of a successor index, is due to events affecting one or more of the index components, or is due to any other reason—then the calculation agent will be permitted (but not required) to make such adjustments to the Index or method of calculating the Index as it believes are appropriate to ensure that the value of the Index used to determine the amount payable on the maturity date or upon redemption is equitable.

All determinations and adjustments to be made by the calculation agent with respect to the value of the Index and the amount payable at maturity or upon redemption or otherwise relating to the value of the Index may be made in the calculation agent’s sole discretion.

Split or Reverse Split of the ETNs

On any business day we may elect to initiate a split of the ETNs or a reverse split of the ETNs. Such date shall be deemed to be the “Announcement Date,” and we will issue a notice to holders of the ETNs and a press release announcing the split or reverse split, specifying the effective date of the split or reverse split and the split or reverse split ratio.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

If the ETNs undergo a split, we will adjust the terms of the ETNs accordingly. The record date for the split will be the 9th business day after the Announcement Date. Any adjustment of the principal amount of the ETNs will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The split will become effective at the opening of trading of the ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split of the ETNs, we reserve the right to address odd numbers of ETNs (commonly referred to as “partials”) in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. The record date for the reverse split will be on the 9th business day after the Announcement Date. Any adjustment of principal amount of the ETNs will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The reverse split will become effective at the opening of trading of the ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split of the ETNs, holders who own a number of ETNs on the record date which is not evenly divisible by the split ratio will receive the same treatment as all other holders of the ETNs for the maximum number of ETNs they hold which is evenly divisible by the split ratio, and we will have the right to compensate holders for their remaining or “partial” ETNs in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. Our current intention is to provide holders with a cash payment for their partials on the 17th business day following the Announcement Date in an amount equal to the appropriate percentage of the principal amount of the reverse split-adjusted ETNs on the 14th business day following the Announcement Date times the index factor on the applicable business day minus the investor fee on the applicable business day.

In the event of a reverse split, the redemption amount will be adjusted accordingly by the Issuer, in its sole discretion and in a commercially reasonable manner, to take into account the reverse split.

Business Day

When we refer to a business day with respect to the ETNs, we mean a Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday or Friday that is not a day on which banking institutions in London or New York City generally are authorized or obligated by law, regulation or executive order to close.

Description of iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Short-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes and iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes

Terms defined within this “Description of iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Short-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes and iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes” section are defined only with respect to this section.

General

The return of iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Short-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes (“VXX ETN”) is linked to the performance of the S&P 500® VIX Short-Term Futures Index TR and the return of the iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes (“VXZ ETN,” together with the VXX ETN, the “ETNs”) is linked to the performance of the S&P 500® VIX Mid-Term Futures Index TR (each, an “Index” and collectively, the “Indices”). The Indices are designed to provide investors with exposure to one or more maturities of futures contracts (the “index components”) on the CBOE Volatility Index ® (the “VIX Index” or “VIX”). The Indices were created by S&P Dow Jones Indices LLC (“S&P Dow Jones Indices” or the “index sponsor”). The index sponsor calculates the level of the relevant Index daily when the Chicago Board Options Exchange, Incorporated (the “CBOE”) is open (excluding holidays and weekends) and publishes it as soon as practicable thereafter. The ETNs are traded on the CBOE BZX Exchange under the ticker symbols “VXX” and “VXZ,” respectively.

Inception, Issuance and Maturity

Each series of ETNs was first sold on January 17, 2018 (the “inception date”). Each series of ETNs were first issued on January 19, 2018 (the “issue date”) and each will be due on January 23, 2048 (the “maturity date”).

If the maturity date for a series of ETNs is not a business day, the maturity date will be the next following business day. If the final valuation date is postponed, the maturity date will be the fifth business day following the final valuation date, as postponed. The calculation agent may postpone the final valuation

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

date—and therefore the maturity date—of the ETNs if a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on a day that would otherwise be the final valuation date or if the level of the Index is not available or cannot be calculated. In the event that payment at maturity is deferred beyond the stated maturity date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Coupon

We will not pay holders interest during the term of the ETNs.

Denomination

The VXX ETNs were initially issued in denominations of $27.193879. Following a series of reverse splits, the VXX ETNs are currently issued in denominations of $1,740.408256.

The VXZ ETNs are issued in denominations of $67.421088.

We reserve the right to initiate a further split or reverse split of the ETNs in our sole discretion.

Payment at Maturity

If holders hold their ETNs to maturity, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars per ETN equal to the applicable closing indicative value on the final valuation date.

The “closing indicative value” for the iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETNs on the initial valuation date was equal to $27.193879, and the closing indicative value for the iPath® Series B S&P 500® VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM ETNs on the initial valuation date was equal to $16.855272. On each subsequent calendar day until maturity or early redemption of the relevant series of ETNs, the closing indicative value for each series of ETNs will equal (1) the closing indicative value for that series on the immediately preceding calendar day times (2) the daily index factor for that series on such calendar day (or, if such day is not an index business day, one) minus (3) the investor fee on such calendar day.

Barclays Bank PLC implemented a 1 for 4 reverse split of the VXX ETNs, effective at the open of trading on April 23, 2021. For the purpose of calculating the closing indicative value and the investor fee of the VXX ETNs on April 23, 2021, the effective date of the reverse split, the closing indicative value for that series on the immediately preceding calendar day in the above formula was adjusted to $41.6403, which is equal to the closing indicative value of $10.4101 on April 22, 2021 multiplied by 4. Barclays Bank PLC implemented a second 1 for 4 reverse split of the VXX ETNs, effective at the open of trading on March 7, 2023. For the purpose of calculating the closing indicative value and the investor fee of the VXX ETNs on March 7, 2023, the effective date of the reverse split, the closing indicative value for that series on the immediately preceding calendar day in the above formula was adjusted to $42.8632, which is equal to the closing indicative value of $10.7158 on March 6, 2023 multiplied by 4. Barclays Bank PLC implemented a third 1 for 4 reverse split of the VXX ETNs, effective at the open of trading on July 24, 2024. For the purpose of calculating the closing indicative value and the investor fee of the VXX ETNs on July 24, 2024, the effective date of the reverse split, the closing indicative value for that series on the immediately preceding calendar day in the above formula was adjusted to $43.3772, which is equal to the closing indicative value of $10.8443 on July 23, 2024 multiplied by 4.

Barclays Bank PLC implemented a 1 for 4 reverse split of the VXZ ETNs, effective at the open of trading on July 24, 2024. For the purpose of calculating the closing indicative value and the investor fee of the VXZ ETNs on July 24, 2024, the effective date of the reverse split, the closing indicative value for that series on the immediately preceding calendar day in the above formula was adjusted to $49.7308, which is equal to the closing indicative value of $12.4327 on July 23, 2024 multiplied by 4.

If the ETNs undergo a further split or reverse split, the closing indicative value will similarly be adjusted accordingly.

An “index business day” is a day on which the Index is calculated and published by the index sponsor.

The “daily index factor” for a series of ETNs on any index business day will equal (1) the closing level of the Index for that series on such index business day divided by (2) the closing level of the Index for that series on the immediately preceding index business day. In calculating the daily index factor for the VXX ETNs for August 19, 2024, the closing level of the Index to which those ETNs are linked for August 16,

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

2024 was adjusted to offset the effect of a rebasing of that Index implemented by the sponsor of that Index on August 19, 2024.

The “investor fee” for each series of ETNs on the initial valuation date was equal to zero. On each subsequent calendar day until maturity or early redemption, the investor fee for each series of ETNs will be equal to (1) 0.89% times (2) the closing indicative value for that series on the immediately preceding calendar day times (3) the daily index factor for that series on that day (or, if such day is not an index business day, one) divided by (4) 365. Because the investor fee is calculated and subtracted from the closing indicative value on a daily basis, the net effect of the investor fee accumulates over time and is subtracted at the rate of 0.89% per year, which we refer to as the “investor fee rate.” The investor fee reduces the daily return of each series of ETNs. Because the net effect of the investor fee is a fixed percentage of the value of each ETN, the aggregate effect of the investor fee will increase or decrease in a manner directly proportional to the value of each ETN and the amount of ETNs that are held, as applicable.

A “business day” means a Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday or Friday that is not a day on which banking institutions in New York City generally are authorized or obligated by law, regulation, or executive order to close.

A “trading day” for a series of ETNs is a day on which (1) it is a business day in New York City, (2) trading is generally conducted on the CBOE BZX Exchange and (3) trading is generally conducted on the CBOE, in each case as determined by the calculation agent in its sole discretion.

A “valuation date” means each trading day from January 17, 2018 to January 17, 2048, inclusive, subject to postponement due to the occurrence of a market disruption event, such postponement not to exceed five trading days. We refer to January 17, 2018 as the “initial valuation date” and January 17, 2048 as the “final valuation date” for the ETNs.

Payment Upon Holder Redemption and Issuer Redemption

Up to the valuation date immediately preceding the final valuation date, and subject to certain restrictions, holders may elect to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date during the term of the ETNs, provided that they present at least 25,000 ETNs of the same series for redemption, or their broker or other financial intermediary (such as a bank or other financial institution not required to register as a broker-dealer to engage in securities transactions) bundles their ETNs for redemption with those of other investors to reach this minimum. We may from time to time, in our sole discretion, reduce this minimum redemption amount on a consistent basis for all holders of ETNs. If holders choose to redeem their ETNs, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars for each ETN on the applicable redemption date equal to the closing indicative value applicable to such ETN on the applicable valuation date minus the redemption charge.

The “redemption charge” is a one-time charge imposed upon holder redemption and is equal to 0.05% times the closing indicative value on the applicable valuation date. The redemption charge is intended to allow us to recoup the brokerage and other transaction costs that we will incur in connection with redeeming the ETNs. The proceeds we receive from the redemption charge may be more or less than such costs.

We may redeem the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion on any business day on or after the inception date until and including maturity. If we redeem the ETNs, holders will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars per ETN in an amount equal to the closing indicative value applicable to such ETN on the applicable valuation date.

A “redemption date” is:

•in the case of a holder redemption, the second business day following the applicable valuation date (which must be earlier than the final valuation date) specified in their notice of redemption. Accordingly, the final redemption date will be the second business day following the valuation date that is immediately prior to the final valuation date; and

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

•in the case of an issuer redemption, the fifth business day following the valuation date that we specify in an issuer redemption notice, which will in no event be prior to the tenth calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice.

In the event that payment upon early redemption is deferred beyond the original redemption date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Early Redemption Procedures

Holder Redemption Procedures

Holders may, subject to the minimum redemption amount described above, elect to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date. To redeem their ETNs, holders must instruct their broker or other person through whom holders hold their ETNs to deliver a notice of holder redemption to us via facsimile or email by no later than 4:00 p.m., New York City time, on the business day prior to the applicable valuation date specified in their notice of redemption.

If holders elect to redeem their ETNs on a redemption date that is later in time than the redemption date resulting from our election to exercise our issuer redemption right, their election to redeem their ETNs will be deemed to be ineffective, and their ETNs will instead be redeemed on the redemption date pursuant to such issuer redemption.

Issuer Redemption Procedures

We have the right to redeem or “call” the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion without holders’ consent on any business day on or after inception date until and including maturity. If we elect to redeem the ETNs, we will deliver written notice of such election to redeem to the holders of such ETNs not less than ten calendar days prior to the redemption date on which we intend to redeem the ETNs. In this scenario, the final valuation date will be the date specified by us as such in such notice (subject to postponement in the event of a market disruption event), and the ETNs will be redeemed on the fifth business day following such valuation date, but in no event prior to the tenth calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice.

Market Disruption Event

If an Index is not published on an index business day, or if a market disruption event or a force majeure event (each as defined below) has occurred or is occurring, and such event affects any Index, any futures contract underlying any Index and/or the ability to hedge any Index, the calculation agent may (but is not required to) make determinations and/or adjustments to the affected Index or method of calculating the affected Index. The determination of the value of an ETN on a valuation date, including the final valuation date, may be postponed if the calculation agent determines that a market disruption or force majeure event has occurred or is continuing on such valuation date. In no event, however, will a valuation date for any series of ETNs be postponed by more than five trading days. If a valuation date is postponed until the fifth trading day following the scheduled valuation date but a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on such day, that day will nevertheless be the valuation date and the calculation agent will make a good faith estimate in its sole discretion of the value of the relevant Index for such day. All determinations and adjustments to be made by the calculation agent may be made in the calculation agent’s sole discretion.

The occurrence or existence of any of the following, as determined by the calculation agent in its sole discretion, will constitute a “market disruption event”:

•the index sponsor does not publish the level of an Index on any index business day;

•a suspension, absence or material limitation of trading of equity securities then constituting 20% or more of the level of the S&P 500® Index on the relevant exchanges (as defined below) for such securities for more than one hour of trading during, or during the one hour period preceding the close of, the principal trading session on such relevant exchange;

•a breakdown or failure in the price and trade reporting systems of any relevant exchange for the S&P 500® Index as a result of which the reported trading prices for equity securities then

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

constituting 20% or more of the level of the S&P 500® Index are materially inaccurate (i) during the one hour preceding the close of the principal trading session on such relevant exchange or (ii) during any one hour period of trading on such relevant exchange;

•a suspension, absence or material limitation of trading on any relevant exchange for the futures contracts on the VIX Index (or any relevant successor index) for more than one hour of trading during, or during the one hour period preceding the close of, the principal trading session on such relevant exchange;

•a breakdown or failure in the price and trade reporting systems of the relevant exchange for the futures contracts on the VIX Index (or the relevant successor index) as a result of which the reported trading prices for options on the S&P 500® Index (“SPX Options”) or futures contracts on the VIX Index (or futures contracts on the relevant successor index) during the one hour period preceding, and including, the scheduled time at which the value of SPX Options is calculated for purposes of the VIX Index (or the relevant successor index) are materially inaccurate;

•a decision to permanently discontinue trading in SPX Options or futures contracts on the VIX Index (or futures contracts on the relevant successor index);

•on any index business day, the occurrence or existence of a lack of, or a material decline in, the liquidity in the market for trading in any futures contract underlying an Index;

•any event or any condition (including without limitation any event or condition that occurs as a result of the enactment, promulgation, execution, ratification, interpretation or application of, or any change in or amendment to, any law, rule or regulation by an applicable governmental authority) that results in an illiquid market for trading in any futures contract underlying an Index; and

•the declaration or continuance of a general moratorium in respect of banking activities in any relevant city.

A force majeure event includes any event or circumstance (including, without limitation, a systems failure, natural or man-made disaster, act of God, armed conflict, act of terrorism, riot or labor disruption or any similar intervening circumstance) that the calculation agent determines to be beyond the calculation agent’s reasonable control and to materially affect any Index, any futures contract underlying any Index, or the calculation of the VIX Index.

For purposes of determining whether a market disruption event has occurred:

•a limitation on the hours or number of days of trading will not constitute a market disruption event if it results from an announced change in the regular business hours of the relevant exchange for the S&P 500® Index or the VIX Index (or the relevant successor index);

•limitations pursuant to the rules of any relevant exchange similar to NYSE Rule 80B (or any applicable rule or regulation enacted or promulgated by any other self-regulatory organization or any government agency of scope similar to NYSE Rule 80B as determined by the index sponsor) on trading during significant market fluctuations will constitute a suspension, absence or material limitation of trading;

•a suspension of trading in an SPX Option or a futures contract on the VIX Index (or futures contract on the relevant successor index) by the relevant exchange for the VIX Index (or the relevant successor index) by reason of:

•a price change exceeding limits set by such relevant exchange,

•an imbalance of orders relating to such options, or

•a disparity in bid and ask quotes relating to such options will, in each such case, constitute a suspension, absence or material limitation of trading on such relevant exchange; and

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

•a “suspension, absence or material limitation of trading” on any relevant exchange will not include any time when such relevant exchange is itself closed for trading under ordinary circumstances.

“Relevant exchange” means, with respect to the S&P 500® Index, the primary exchange or market of trading for any equity security (or any combination thereof) then included in the S&P 500® Index or, with respect to the VIX Index or any relevant successor index, the primary exchange or market for SPX Options or futures contracts on the VIX Index (or futures contracts on the relevant successor index).

Default Amount on Acceleration

If an Event of Default (as defined below) occurs and the maturity of the ETNs is accelerated, the amount declared due and payable upon any acceleration of the ETNs will be determined by the calculation agent and will equal, for each ETN, the closing indicative value on the date of acceleration.

Discontinuance or Modification of an Index

If the index sponsor discontinues publication of an Index and they or any other person or entity publishes an index that the calculation agent determines is comparable to the discontinued Index and approves as a successor index, then the calculation agent will determine the level of the relevant Index on the applicable valuation date and the amount payable at maturity or upon early redemption by reference to such successor index.

If the calculation agent determines that the publication of an Index is discontinued and that there is no successor index, or that the closing level of an Index is not available because of a market disruption event or for any other reason, on the date on which the level of that Index is required to be determined, or if for any other reason an Index is not available to us or the calculation agent on the relevant date, the calculation agent will determine the amount payable by a computation methodology that the calculation agent determines will as closely as reasonably possible replicate the relevant Index.

If the calculation agent determines that an Index, the index components of an Index or the method of calculating an Index has been changed at any time in any respect—including any addition, deletion or substitution and any reweighting or rebalancing of index components, and whether the change is made by the index sponsor under its existing policies or following a modification of those policies, is due to the publication of a successor index, is due to events affecting one or more of the index components, or is due to any other reason—then the calculation agent will be permitted (but not required) to make such adjustments to that Index or method of calculating that Index as it believes are appropriate to ensure that the level of the Index used to determine the amount payable on the maturity date or upon redemption is equitable.

All determinations and adjustments to be made by the calculation agent with respect to the level of an Index and the amount payable at maturity or upon early redemption or otherwise relating to the value of an Index may be made in the calculation agent’s sole discretion.

Split or Reverse Split of the ETNs

On any business day we may elect to initiate a split of the ETNs or a reverse split of the ETNs. Such date shall be deemed to be the “announcement date,” and we will issue a notice to holders of the relevant ETNs and a press release announcing the split or reverse split, specifying the effective date of the split or reverse split and the split or reverse split ratio.

If a series of ETNs undergoes a split, we will adjust the terms of such series of ETNs accordingly. The record date for the split will be the 9th business day after the announcement date. Any adjustment of the closing indicative value of such series of ETNs will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The split will become effective at the opening of trading of such series of ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split of a series of ETNs, we reserve the right to address odd numbers of ETNs of such series (commonly referred to as “partials”) in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. The record date for the reverse split will be on the 9th business day after the announcement date. Any adjustment of the closing indicative value of such series of ETNs will be

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

rounded to 8 decimal places. The reverse split will become effective at the opening of trading of such series of ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split of a series of ETNs, holders who own a number of ETNs of such series on the record date which is not evenly divisible by the split ratio will receive the same treatment as all other holders of such series of ETNs for the maximum number of ETNs of such series they hold which is evenly divisible by the split ratio, and we will have the right to compensate holders for their remaining or “partial” ETNs in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. Our current intention is to provide holders with a cash payment for their partials on the 17th business day following the announcement date in an amount equal to the appropriate percentage of the closing indicative value of the reverse split-adjusted ETNs on the 14th business day following the announcement date.

In the event of a reverse split, the redemption amount will be adjusted accordingly by the Issuer, in its sole discretion and in a commercially reasonable manner, to take into account the reverse split.

On April 9, 2021, Barclays Bank PLC announced a reverse split of the VXX ETNs in accordance with the procedures described above. The record date for the reverse split was April 22, 2021 and the reverse split became effective on April 23, 2021. The amount of cash payment due on any partials following the reverse split was determined based on the closing indicative value of the VXX ETNs on April 29, 2021 and such cash payment was made on May 4, 2021. On February 21, 2023, Barclays Bank PLC announced a second reverse split of the VXX ETNs in accordance with the procedures described above. The record date for the reverse split was March 6, 2023 and the reverse split became effective on March 7, 2023. The amount of cash payment due on any partials following the reverse split was determined based on the closing indicative value of the VXX ETNs on March 13, 2023 and such cash payment was made on March 16, 2023. On July 10, 2024, Barclays Bank PLC announced a third reverse split of the VXX ETNs and a first reverse split of the VXZ ETNs in accordance with the procedures described above. The record date for the reverse split for each series was July 23, 2024 and the reverse split for each series became effective on July 24, 2024. The amount of cash payment due on any partials following the reverse split was determined based on the closing indicative value of each series on July 30, 2024 and such cash payment was made on August 2, 2024.

Description of iPath® Select MLP Exchange-Traded Notes

Terms defined within this “Description of iPath® Select MLP Exchange-Traded Notes” section are defined only with respect to this section.

General

The return of the iPath® Select MLP Exchange-Traded Notes (the “ETNs”) is linked to the performance of the CIBC Atlas Select MLP Index (the “Index”). The Index is designed to provide exposure to a basket of midstream U.S. and Canadian master limited partnerships, limited liability companies and corporations (collectively, the “Index Constituents”) that trade on major U.S. exchanges, are classified in the GICS® Energy Sector or GICS® Gas Utilities Industry according to the Global Industry Classification Standard® (“GICS”) and meet certain eligibility criteria. The Index Constituents are selected for inclusion in the Index using the CIBC Select Master Limited Partnership Strategy (the “Strategy”) developed by CIBC Private Wealth Advisers, Inc. (the “Index Selection Agent”). The Strategy dynamically selects a basket of up to 100 Index Constituents based on certain eligibility criteria including their long-term credit rating, the portion of their cash flow driven by mid-stream operations and their size as measured by free-float market capitalization and average daily trading volume. The Index Selection Agent provides the Index Constituents selected by the Strategy to Barclays Bank PLC, which is the owner of the intellectual property and licensing rights relating to the Index. The Index is administered and published by Barclays Index Administration (the “Index Sponsor”), a distinct function within the Investment Bank of Barclays Bank PLC. Prior to June 25, 2018, the Index was called the Atlantic Trust Select MLP Index. The Index Sponsor has appointed a third-party index calculation agent (the “Index Calculation Agent”), currently Bloomberg Index Services Limited (formerly known as Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions Limited), to calculate and maintain the Index. While the Index Sponsor is responsible for the operation of the Index, among other things, certain aspects have thus been outsourced to the Index Calculation Agent. The ETNs are traded on the CBOE BZX Exchange (“CBOE BZX”) under the ticker symbol “ATMP.”

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Inception, Issuance and Maturity

The ETNs were first sold on March 12, 2013 (the “inception date”). The ETNs were first issued on March 15, 2013 (the “issue date”) and will be due on March 18, 2043 (the “maturity date”).

Coupon

If holders or we have not previously redeemed the ETNs, for each ETN that held on the applicable coupon record date, holders will receive an interest payment in cash per ETN on each coupon payment date in U.S. dollars equal to the coupon amount, if any, on the applicable coupon valuation date.

The “coupon amount” on any coupon valuation date will equal the greater of (i) zero and (ii)(1) the accrued dividend on such coupon valuation date minus (2) the accrued investor fee on such coupon valuation date.

Denomination

The ETNs are in denominations of $25.00. We reserve the right to initiate a split or reverse split of the ETNs in our sole discretion.

Payment at Maturity

If holders hold their ETNs to maturity, they will receive a cash payment per ETN at maturity in U.S. dollars equal to the closing indicative value on the applicable final valuation date.

The “closing indicative value” for each ETN on any given calendar day until the final valuation date or applicable valuation date (in the case of early redemption) will equal (1) the ETN current value on such calendar day plus (2) the accrued dividend on such calendar day minus (3) the accrued investor fee on such calendar day. If the ETNs undergo a split or reverse split, the closing indicative value will be adjusted accordingly.

The “ETN current value” for each ETN on any given calendar day will be calculated as follows: The ETN current value on the initial valuation date was $25.00. On any subsequent calendar day until maturity or early redemption, the ETN current value will equal (1) the closing VWAP level on that day (or on the immediately preceding index business day, if such calendar day is not an index business day) divided by (2) the VWAP factor.

The “initial VWAP level” is 122.48, which is equal to the VWAP level at the close of trading on the initial valuation date, as determined by the VWAP calculation agent.

The “closing VWAP level” is equal to (i) the VWAP level as of the close of trading on any index business day, for purposes of holder redemption, or (ii) the arithmetic mean of the VWAP levels as of the close of trading on each index business day during the final measurement period or the issuer redemption measurement period, for purposes of the payment at maturity or upon issuer redemption, respectively, in each case as determined by the VWAP calculation agent.

“VWAP level” means, on any index business day, as calculated by the VWAP calculation agent, the sum of the products of (i) the VWAP of each Index Constituent as of such date and (ii) the number of units of that Index Constituent as of such date published by the Index Sponsor. The VWAP level is reported on Bloomberg page “BXVWATMP <Index>.”

“VWAP” means, with respect to each Index Constituent, on any index business day, the consolidated volume-weighted average price of one unit of such Index Constituent as determined by the VWAP calculation agent based on all trades in such Index Constituent reported in the consolidated tape system during the regular trading session.

The “VWAP factor” is 4.89920, which is equal to (1) the initial VWAP level divided by (2) the principal amount per ETN. If the ETNs undergo a split or reverse split, the VWAP factor will be adjusted accordingly.

The “accrued dividend” for each ETN on any calendar day will be calculated as follows: The accrued dividend on the initial valuation date was zero. The accrued dividend on any subsequent calendar day will equal (1) the accrued dividend as of the immediately preceding calendar day plus (2) the dollar dividend

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

value on such calendar day minus (3) the coupon adjustment dividend amount on such calendar day. If the ETNs undergo a split or reverse split, the accrued dividend will be adjusted accordingly.

The “dollar dividend value” on any calendar day will equal (1) the index dividend on such calendar day divided by (2) the VWAP factor.

The “index dividend” on any calendar day represents the aggregate cash value of distributions, net of applicable dividend withholding tax, that a hypothetical person holding Index Constituents in proportion to the weights of the Index Constituents would have been entitled to receive with respect to any Index Constituent for those cash distributions whose “ex-dividend date” occurs on such calendar day. The index dividend on any calendar day will equal the sum of the products of (i) the cash value of distributions, net of applicable dividend withholding tax, that a hypothetical holder of one share or unit of each Index Constituent on such calendar day would have been entitled to receive in respect of that Index Constituent for those cash distributions whose “ex-dividend date” occurs on such calendar day and (ii) the number of units of that Index Constituent included in the Index as of such date. A dividend withholding tax is a tax applied to dividends or distributions that would be received by a holder of an Index Constituent. The applicable rate of the dividend withholding tax for purposes of calculating the index dividend at any given time is determined by the Index Sponsor in its discretion, based on the rate generally applicable in respect of an Index Constituent given its jurisdiction of organization. As of the date hereof, the applicable dividend withholding tax would reduce the cash value of distributions in respect of any Index Constituent organized under the laws of Canada or any province or territory of Canada by 15% for purposes of calculating the index dividend.

On any calendar day that is not a coupon ex-date, the “coupon adjustment dividend amount” will equal zero. On any calendar day that is a coupon ex-date, the coupon adjustment dividend amount will equal the accrued dividend on the coupon valuation date immediately preceding such coupon ex-date. The effect of the coupon adjustment dividend amount as of each coupon ex-date is to reduce the accrued dividend (and, therefore, the closing indicative value) by the amount of the index dividends reflected in any coupon amount that holders will be entitled to receive on the immediately following coupon payment date.

The “accrued investor fee” for each ETN on any calendar day will be calculated as follows: The accrued investor fee on the initial valuation date was zero. The accrued dividend on any calendar day will equal (1) the accrued investor fee as of the immediately preceding calendar day plus (2) the daily fee value on such calendar day minus (3) the coupon adjustment fee amount on such calendar day. If the ETNs undergo a split or reverse split, the accrued investor fee will be adjusted accordingly. The accrued investor fee reduces the daily return of the ETNs.

The “daily fee value” on any calendar day is equal to the product of (1) the closing VWAP level on such calendar day divided by the VWAP factor and (2) 0.95% divided by 365. Because the daily fee value is calculated and subtracted from the closing indicative value on a daily basis, the net effect of the fee accumulates over time and is subtracted at the rate of approximately 0.95% per year.

On any calendar day that is not a coupon ex-date, the “coupon adjustment fee amount” will equal zero. On any calendar day that is a coupon ex-date, the coupon adjustment fee amount will equal (i) the coupon adjustment dividend amount on such coupon ex-date, if the coupon amount in respect of such coupon-ex date is zero or (ii) the accrued investor fee on the coupon valuation date immediately preceding such coupon ex-date, if the coupon amount in respect of such coupon-ex date is greater than zero. The effect of the coupon adjustment fee amount as of each coupon ex-date is to reduce the accrued investor fee by the portion of the accrued investor fee that was offset against accrued dividends in calculating any coupon amount that holders will be entitled to receive on the immediately following coupon payment date. If the coupon amount in respect of any coupon valuation date is zero, which means that the accrued investor fee as of that coupon valuation date is equal to or greater than the accrued dividend as of that coupon valuation date, the accrued investor fee will be reduced by the accrued dividend and the remaining accrued investor fee will effectively be carried forward to be offset against subsequent accrued dividends.

The “redemption charge” is a one-time charge imposed upon holder redemption and is equal to 0.125% times the closing indicative value on the applicable valuation date. The redemption charge is intended to allow us to recoup the brokerage and other transaction costs that we will incur in connection with

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

redeeming the ETNs. The proceeds we receive from the redemption charge may be more or less than such costs.

An “index business day” means any day which is a New York Stock Exchange business day.

Valuation Date and Dates Relating to Coupon Payments

A “valuation date” is each business day from March 12, 2013 to March 5, 2043 inclusive (or, if such date is not a trading day, the next succeeding trading day), unless the calculation agent determines that a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on that day in respect of the Index. In that event, the valuation date will be the first following trading day on which the calculation agent determines that a market disruption event does not occur and is not continuing. In no event, however, will any valuation date be postponed by more than five business days. We refer to March 12, 2013 as the “initial valuation date” and March 5, 2043 as the “final valuation date.”

A “trading day” is a day on which (1) it is a business day in New York City and (2) trading is generally conducted on the CBOE BZX, in each case as determined by the calculation agent in its sole discretion.

A “coupon valuation date” means the 15th of February, May, August and November of each calendar year during the term of the ETNs or if such date is not an index business day, then the first index business day following such date (subject to the occurrence of a market disruption event). The first coupon valuation date was on May 15, 2013.

A “coupon ex-date” means, effective on May 28, 2024, the ninth index business day following each coupon valuation date (subject to the occurrence of a market disruption event). The coupon ex-date was previously changed on August 31, 2017 from the seventh index business day to the eighth index business day following each coupon valuation date. The first coupon ex-date was on May 24, 2013.

A “coupon record date” means the ninth index business day following each coupon valuation date (subject to the occurrence of a market disruption event). The first coupon record date was on May 29, 2013.

A “coupon payment date” means the 15th index business day following each coupon valuation date (subject to the occurrence of a market disruption event). The first coupon payment date was on June 6, 2013.

Maturity Date

If the maturity date is not a business day, the maturity date will be the next following business day. If the last day of the final measurement period does not qualify as a business day, then the maturity date will be the fifth business day following the last day of the final measurement period. The calculation agent may postpone the final valuation date—and therefore the maturity date—if a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on a day that would otherwise be the final valuation date.

In the event that payment at maturity is deferred beyond the stated maturity date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

A “business day” means a Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday or Friday that is not a day on which banking institutions in New York City or London, as applicable, generally are authorized or obligated by law, regulation, or executive order to close.

Payment Upon Holder Redemption and Issuer Redemption

Up to the valuation date immediately preceding the final valuation date and subject to certain restrictions, holders may elect to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date during the term of the ETNs, provided that they present at least 50,000 of the ETNs for redemption or their broker or other financial intermediary (such as a bank or other financial institution not required to register as a broker-dealer to engage in securities transactions) bundles their ETNs for redemption with those of other investors to reach this minimum. If holders choose to redeem their ETNs, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars for each ETN on the applicable redemption date equal to the closing indicative value on the applicable valuation date minus the redemption charge.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Prior to maturity, we may redeem the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion on any trading day on or after the inception date until and including maturity. If we redeem the ETNs, holders will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars per ETN in an amount equal to the closing indicative value on the applicable valuation date (which will reflect the applicable closing VWAP level calculated by reference to the arithmetic mean of the VWAP levels as of the close of trading on each of the five index business days from and including such valuation date).

A “redemption date” is:

•in the case of holder redemption, effective as of August 31, 2017, the second business day following any valuation date (other than the final valuation date). The final redemption date of the ETNs will be the second business day following the valuation date that is immediately prior to the final valuation date; and

•in the case of issuer redemption, the fifth business day after the last day of the issuer redemption measurement period, which will in no event be prior to the 20th calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice.

In the event that payment upon redemption is deferred beyond the original redemption date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Early Redemption Procedures

Holder Redemption Procedures

Holders may, subject to the minimum redemption amount described above, elect to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date. To redeem their ETNs, holders must instruct their broker or other person through whom holders hold their ETNs to deliver a notice of redemption, to us via facsimile or email by no later than 4:00 p.m., New York City time, on the business day prior to the applicable valuation date.

Issuer Redemption Procedures

We have the right to redeem or “call” the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion without holders’ consent on any trading day on or after inception date until and including maturity. If we elect to redeem the ETNs, we will deliver written notice of such election to redeem to the holders of such ETNs not less than 20 calendar days prior to the redemption date specified by us in such notice. In this scenario, the final valuation date will be deemed to be the date specified by us in the notice (subject to postponement in the event of a market disruption event), and the ETNs will be redeemed on the fifth business day after the last day of the issuer redemption measurement period, but in no event prior to the 20th calendar day following the date on which we deliver such notice.

Default Amount on Acceleration

If an Event of Default (as defined below) occurs and the maturity of the ETNs is accelerated, we will pay the default amount in respect of the principal of the ETNs at maturity. We describe the default amount below under “General Terms of the ETNs—Default Amount.”

Discontinuance or Modification of the Index

If the index sponsor discontinues publication of the Index, and Barclays Bank PLC or any other person or entity publishes an index that the calculation agent determines is comparable to the Index and the calculation agent approves such index as a successor index, then the calculation agent will determine the value of the Index on the applicable valuation date and the amount payable at maturity or upon early redemption by reference to such successor index.

If the calculation agent determines that the publication of the Index is discontinued and there is no successor index, or that the closing value of the Index is not available for any reason, on the date on which the value of the Index is required to be determined, the calculation agent will determine the amount payable by a computation methodology that the calculation agent determines will as closely as reasonably possible replicate the Index.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

If the calculation agent determines that the Index or the method of calculating the Index has been changed at any time in any respect, including whether the change is made by the index sponsor under its existing policies or following a modification of those policies, is due to the publication of a successor index, or is due to any other reason, then the calculation agent will be permitted (but not required) to make such adjustments to the Index or method of calculating the Index as it believes are appropriate to ensure that the value of the Index used to determine the amount payable on the maturity date or upon redemption is equitable.

All determinations and adjustments to be made by the calculation agent may be made in the calculation agent’s sole discretion.

Postponement of Valuation Dates

Valuation dates with respect to the ETNs may be postponed and thus the determination of the Index level may be postponed if the calculation agent determines that, on the respective date, a market disruption event has occurred or is continuing in respect of the Index. Any of the following will be a “market disruption event” with respect to the Index:

•a suspension, absence or material limitation of trading in the index constituents constituting 20% or more, by weight, of the Index in their respective primary markets, in each case for more than two hours of trading or during the one-half hour period preceding the close of the regular trading session in such market or, if the relevant valuation time is not the close of the regular trading session in such market, the relevant valuation time;

•a suspension, absence or material limitation of trading in futures or options contracts relating to the Index on their respective markets or in futures or options contracts relating to any index constituents constituting 20% or more, by weight, of the Index in their respective primary markets for those contracts, in each case for more than two hours of trading or during the one-half hour period preceding the close of the regular trading session in such market or, if the relevant valuation time is not the close of the regular trading session in such market, the relevant valuation time;

•any event that materially disrupts or impairs, as determined by the calculation agent, the ability of market participants to (1) effect transactions in, or obtain market values for, index constituents constituting 20% or more, by weight, of the Index in their respective primary markets, or (2) effect transactions in, or obtain market values for, futures or options contracts relating to the Index on their respective markets or in futures or options contracts relating to any index constituents constituting 20% or more, by weight, of the Index in their respective primary markets for those contracts, in each case for more than two hours of trading or during the one-half hour period preceding the close of the regular trading session in such market or, if the relevant valuation time is not the close of the regular trading session in such market, the relevant valuation time;

•the closure on any day of the primary market for futures or options contracts relating to the Index or index constituents constituting 20% or more, by weight, of the index on a scheduled trading day prior to the scheduled weekday closing time of that market (without regard to after hours or any other trading outside of the regular trading session hours) unless such earlier closing time is announced by the primary market at least one hour prior to the earlier of (1) the actual closing time for the regular trading session on such primary market on such scheduled trading day for such primary market and (2) the submission deadline for orders to be entered into the relevant exchange system for execution at the close of trading on such scheduled trading day for such primary market; or

•any scheduled trading day on which (1) the primary markets for index constituents constituting 20% or more, by weight, of the Index or (2) the exchanges or quotation systems, if any, on which futures or options contracts on the Index are traded, fail to open for trading during its regular trading session.

For purposes of the ETNs, “scheduled trading day” as used therein shall mean trading day as defined above under “Payment at Maturity.”

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

The following events will not be market disruption events:

•a limitation on the hours or number of days of trading on which any index constituent is traded, but only if the limitation results from an announced change in the regular business hours of the relevant market; or

•a decision to permanently discontinue trading in futures or options contracts relating to the Index.

For this purpose, an “absence of trading” on an exchange or market will not include any time when the relevant exchange or market is itself closed for trading under ordinary circumstances.

In contrast, a suspension or limitation of trading in futures or options contracts related to the Index or any index constituent, if available, in the primary market for those contracts, by reason of any of:

•a price change exceeding limits set by that market,

•an imbalance of orders relating to the index constituent or those contracts, as applicable, or

•a disparity in bid and ask quotes relating to the index constituent or those contracts, as applicable,

will constitute a suspension or material limitation of trading in such index component in its primary market or in futures or options contracts related to the Index or that index constituent in the primary market for those contracts.

For the purpose of determining whether a market disruption event with respect to the Index exists at any time, if trading in an index constituent is materially suspended or limited at that time, then the relevant percentage contribution of that index constituent to the level of the Index shall be based on a comparison of (x) the portion of the level of the Index attributable to that index constituent relative to (y) the overall level of the Index, in each case immediately before that suspension or limitation.

If the calculation agent determines that a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on any valuation date, the valuation date will be the first following trading day on which the calculation agent determines that a market disruption event does not occur and is not continuing. In no event, however, will the valuation date be postponed by more than five trading days. If the calculation agent determines that a market disruption event occurs or is continuing on the fifth trading day, the calculation agent will make an estimate of the closing level for the Index that would have prevailed on that fifth trading day in the absence of the market disruption event.

Split or Reverse Split of the ETNs

On any business day we may elect to initiate a split of the ETNs or a reverse split of the ETNs. Such date shall be deemed to be the “announcement date,” and we will issue a notice to holders of the relevant ETNs and a press release announcing the split or reverse split, specifying the effective date of the split or reverse split and the split or reverse split ratio.

If the ETNs undergo a split, we will adjust the terms of the ETNs accordingly. The record date for the split will be the ninth business day after the announcement date. Any adjustment of the closing indicative value, VWAP factor, accrued dividend, and accrued investor fee will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The split will become effective at the opening of trading of the ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split, we reserve the right to address odd numbers of ETNs (commonly referred to as “partials”) in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. The record date for the reverse split will be on the ninth business day after the announcement date. Any adjustment of the closing indicative value, VWAP factor, accrued dividend, and accrued investor fee will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The reverse split will become effective at the opening of trading of the ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split, holders who own a number of ETNs on the record date which is not evenly divisible by the split ratio will receive the same treatment as all other holders for the maximum number of ETNs they hold which is evenly divisible by the split ratio, and we will have the right to compensate

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

holders for their remaining or “partial” ETNs in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. Our current intention is to provide holders with a cash payment for their partials on the 17th business day following the announcement date in an amount equal to the appropriate percentage of the closing indicative value of the reverse split-adjusted ETNs on the 14th business day following the announcement date.

In the event of a reverse split, the redemption amount will be adjusted accordingly by the Issuer, in its sole discretion and in a commercially reasonable manner, to take into account the reverse split.

Description of iPath® Series B Carbon Exchange-Traded Notes

Terms defined within this “Description of iPath® Series B Carbon Exchange-Traded Notes” section are defined only with respect to this section.

General

The return of the iPath® Series B Carbon Exchange-Traded Notes (the “ETNs”) is linked to the performance of the Barclays Global Carbon II TR USD Index (the “Index”). The objective of the Index is to provide exposure to the price of carbon as measured by the return of futures contracts on carbon emissions credits from one of the world’s major emissions-related mechanisms (the “mechanisms” and each a “mechanism”). The mechanisms currently included in the Index are the European Union Emission Trading Scheme (“EU ETS”). The Index is composed of allocations in futures contracts on a carbon emissions credit from the EU ETS (each such contract, an “Index Component”). The Index Components currently included in the Index are futures contracts that trade on the ICE. The Index is maintained and calculated by Barclays Bank PLC (in such capacity, the “index sponsor”). The closing level of the Index will be calculated on each index business day and is reported by Bloomberg L.P. or a successor via the facilities of the Consolidated Tape Association under the ticker symbol “BXIIGC2T.” The ETNs are traded on the NYSE Arca exchange under the ticker symbol “GRN.”

Inception, Issuance and Maturity

The ETNs were first sold on September 9, 2019 (the “inception date”). The ETNs were first issued on September 11, 2019 (the “issue date”) and will be due on September 8, 2049 (the “maturity date”).

If the maturity date is not a business day, the maturity date will be the next following business day. If the calculation agent postpones the final valuation date upon the occurrence or continuance of a market disruption event, then the maturity date will be the fifth business day following the final valuation date, as postponed.

In the event that payment at maturity is deferred beyond the stated maturity date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Coupon

We will not pay holders interest during the term of the ETNs.

Denomination

The ETNs were initially issued in denominations of $50. Following a split, the ETNs are currently issued in denominations of $10. We reserve the right to initiate a split or reverse split of the ETNs in our sole discretion.

Payment at Maturity

If holders hold their ETNs to maturity, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars per ETN equal to the closing indicative value on the final valuation date.

The “closing indicative value” for each ETN on the initial valuation date was equal to $50. On each subsequent calendar day until maturity or early redemption, the closing indicative value for each ETN will equal (1) the closing indicative value on the immediately preceding calendar day times (2) the daily index factor on such calendar day (or, if such day is not an index business day, one) minus (3) the investor fee

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

on such calendar day. If the ETNs undergo a split or reverse split, the closing indicative value will be adjusted accordingly.

Barclays Bank PLC implemented a 5 for 1 split of the ETNs, effective at the open of trading on June 4, 2021. For the purpose of calculating the closing indicative value on June 4, 2021, the effective date of the split, the “closing indicative value on the immediately preceding calendar day” in the above formula was adjusted to $19.8380, which is equal to the closing indicative value of $99.1899 on June 3, 2021 divided by 5.

The “daily index factor” for each ETN on any index business day will equal (1) the closing level of the Index on such index business day divided by (2) the closing level of the Index on the immediately preceding index business day.

The “investor fee” for each ETN on the initial valuation date was equal to zero. On each subsequent calendar day until maturity or early redemption, the investor fee for each ETN will be equal to (1) 0.75% times (2) the closing indicative value on the immediately preceding calendar day times (3) the daily index factor on that day (or, if such day is not an index business day, one) divided by (4) 365. Because the investor fee is calculated and subtracted from the closing indicative value on a daily basis, the net effect of the investor fee accumulates over time and is subtracted at the rate of approximately 0.75% per year. Because the net effect of the investor fee is a fixed percentage of the value of each ETN, the aggregate effect of the investor fee will increase or decrease in a manner directly proportional to the value of each ETN and the amount of ETNs that are held, as applicable.

A “business day” means a Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday or Friday that is not a day on which banking institutions in New York City generally are authorized or obligated by law, regulation, or executive order to close.

A “trading day” with respect to the ETNs is a day that is an index business day and a business day and a day on which trading is generally conducted on NYSE Arca, in each case as determined by the calculation agent in its sole discretion.

A “valuation date” means each trading day from September 9, 2019 to September 2, 2049, inclusive, subject to postponement due to the occurrence of a market disruption event, such postponement not to exceed five scheduled trading days.

An “index business day” is a day on which the Index is calculated and published by the index sponsor.

The “initial valuation date” for the ETNs is September 9, 2019.

The “final valuation date” for the ETNs is September 2, 2049.

Payment Upon Holder Redemption and Upon Issuer Redemption

If we have not delivered notice of our intention to exercise our right to redeem the ETNs, up to the valuation date immediately preceding the final valuation date, and subject to certain restrictions, holders may elect to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date during the term of the ETNs. If holders redeem their ETNs, they will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars per ETN on such date in an amount equal to the closing indicative value. Holders must redeem at least 5,000 ETNs at one time in order to exercise their right to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date. We may from time to time, in our sole discretion, reduce this minimum redemption amount on a consistent basis for all holders of ETNs.

Prior to maturity we may redeem the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion on any business day from and including the issue date to and including the maturity date. To exercise our right to redeem, we must deliver notice to the holders of the ETNs not less than ten calendar days prior to the redemption date on which we intend to redeem the ETNs. If we redeem the ETNs, holders will receive a cash payment in U.S. dollars per ETN on the corresponding redemption date in an amount equal to the closing indicative value on the valuation date specified in such notice.

A “redemption date” is:

•In the case of holder redemption, the redemption date is the second business day following the applicable valuation date (which must be earlier than the final valuation date) specified in the

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

relevant notice of holder redemption. Accordingly, the final redemption date will be the second business day following the valuation date that is immediately prior to the final valuation date.

•In the case of issuer redemption, the redemption date is the fifth business day following the valuation date specified by us in the issuer redemption notice, which will in no event be later than the maturity date.

In the event that payment upon early redemption is deferred beyond the original redemption date, penalty interest will not accrue or be payable with respect to that deferred payment.

Early Redemption Procedures

Holder Redemption Procedures

If we have not delivered notice of our intention to exercise our right to redeem the ETNs, holders may, subject to the minimum redemption amount described above, elect to redeem their ETNs on any redemption date. To redeem their ETNs, holders must instruct their broker or other person through whom holders hold their ETNs to deliver a notice of holder redemption to us via facsimile or email by no later than 4:00 p.m., New York City time, on the business day prior to the applicable valuation date.

If holders elect to redeem their ETNs on a redemption date that is later in time than the redemption date resulting from our subsequent election to exercise our issuer redemption right, their election to redeem their ETNs will be deemed to be ineffective, and their ETNs will instead be redeemed on the redemption date pursuant to such issuer redemption.

Issuer Redemption Procedures

We have the right to redeem or “call” the ETNs (in whole but not in part) at our sole discretion without holders’ consent on any business day on or from and including the issue date to and including the maturity date. If we elect to redeem the ETNs, we will deliver written notice of such election to redeem to the holders of such ETNs not less than ten calendar days prior to the redemption date on which we intend to redeem the ETNs. In this scenario, the final valuation date will be the date specified by us as such in such notice (subject to postponement in the event of a market disruption event), and the ETNs will be redeemed on the fifth business day following such valuation date, but in no event later than the maturity date.

Market Disruption Events

Any commodity or commodity futures contract constituting part of the Index is referred to as an “Index Component” for purposes of this section.

Any of the following will be a “market disruption event” with respect to the Index and any affected Index Component, in each case as determined by the calculation agent in its sole discretion:

•a material limitation, suspension or disruption of trading in any Index Component included directly or indirectly in the Index;

•the settlement price for any Index Component included directly or indirectly in the Index is a “limit price,” which means that the settlement price for that contract has increased or decreased from the previous day’s settlement price by the maximum amount permitted under the applicable rules or procedures of the relevant trading facility; or

•failure by the index sponsor to announce or publish the closing level of the Index or of the applicable trading facility or other price source to announce or publish the settlement price or closing level for one or more Index Components.

The following event will not be a market disruption event:

•a decision by a trading facility to permanently discontinue trading in any Index Component.

If the calculation agent determines that any valuation date (including the final valuation date) is not a scheduled trading day for any Index Component or on any valuation date (including the final valuation

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

date) a market disruption event occurs or is continuing with respect to any Index Component, the calculation agent may in its sole discretion postpone that valuation date to the earlier of (i) the fifth scheduled trading day after the originally scheduled valuation date and (ii) the earliest date that the level, value or price of each Index Component that is affected by a market disruption event or by the non-scheduled-trading day can be determined. If such a postponement occurs, the level, value or price of the Index Components unaffected by the market disruption event or non-scheduled-trading day will be determined on the originally scheduled valuation date and the level, value or price of any affected Index Component will be determined using the settlement level, value or price of that affected Index Component on the first scheduled trading day following the originally scheduled valuation date on which no market disruption event occurs or is continuing for that affected Index Component. In no event, however, will a valuation date be postponed by more than five scheduled trading days. If the calculation agent determines that a market disruption event occurs or is continuing with respect to any Index Component on the fifth scheduled trading day after the originally scheduled valuation date, the calculation agent will determine the level, value or price for the affected Index Component in good faith and in a commercially reasonable manner.

Default Amount on Acceleration

If an Event of Default (as defined below) occurs and the maturity of the ETNs is accelerated, the amount declared due and payable upon any acceleration of the ETNs will be determined by the calculation agent and will equal, for each ETN, the closing indicative value on the date of acceleration.

Discontinuance or Modification of the Index

If the index sponsor discontinues publication of or otherwise fails to publish the Index and the index sponsor or another entity publishes a successor or substitute index that the calculation agent determines to be comparable to the discontinued Index (the Index being referred to herein as a “successor index”), then the level of the Index will be determined by reference to the index level of that successor index on any subsequent date as of which the Index level is to be determined. If a successor index is selected by the calculation agent, the successor index will be used as a substitute for the Index for all purposes, and the calculation agent may in its sole discretion adjust any variable, including but not limited to, if applicable, any level (including but not limited to the intraday index level, closing index level, any level derived from the intraday index level or closing index level or any other relevant level on any valuation date) or any combination thereof or any other variable. The calculation agent will make any such adjustment with a view to offsetting, to the extent practical, any difference in the relative levels of the original Index and the successor index at the time the original Index is replaced by the successor index.

If (1) the Index is discontinued or (2) the index sponsor fails to publish the Index, in either case, prior to (and that discontinuance is continuing on) a valuation date and the calculation agent determines that no successor index is available at that time, then the calculation agent will determine the value to be used for the level of the Index. The value to be used for the index level will be computed by the calculation agent in the same general manner previously used by the index sponsor and will reflect the performance of the Index through the trading day on which the Index was last in effect preceding the date of discontinuance.

If at any time, there is:

•a material change in the formula for or the method of calculating the level of the Index or any successor index;

•a material change in the content, composition or constitution of the Index or any successor index; or

•a change or modification to the Index or any successor index such that the Index or successor index does not, in the opinion of the calculation agent, fairly represent the value of the Index or successor index had those changes or modifications not been made,

then, for purposes of calculating the closing level or intraday level of the Index or that successor index, any payments on the ETNs or making any other determinations as of or after that time, the calculation agent may in its sole discretion make such calculations and adjustments as the calculation agent determines may be necessary in order to arrive at a closing level or intraday level for the Index or that

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

successor index comparable to the Index or that successor index, as the case may be, as if those changes or modifications had not been made, and calculate any payments on the ETNs with reference to the Index or that successor index, as adjusted.

The calculation agent will make all determinations with respect to adjustments, including any determination as to whether an event that may require an adjustment has occurred, as to the nature of the adjustment and how it will be made.

Split or Reverse Split of the ETNs

On any business day we may elect to initiate a split of the ETNs or a reverse split of the ETNs. Such date shall be deemed to be the “announcement date,” and we will issue a notice to holders of the relevant ETNs and a press release announcing the split or reverse split, specifying the effective date of the split or reverse split and the split or reverse split ratio.

If the ETNs undergo a split, we will adjust the terms of the ETNs accordingly. The record date for the split will be the 9th business day after the announcement date. Any adjustment of the closing indicative value will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The split will become effective at the opening of trading of the ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split, we reserve the right to address odd numbers of ETNs (commonly referred to as “partials”) in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. The record date for the reverse split will be on the 9th business day after the announcement date. Any adjustment of the closing indicative value will be rounded to 8 decimal places. The reverse split will become effective at the opening of trading of the ETNs on the business day immediately following the record date.

In the case of a reverse split, holders who own a number of ETNs on the record date which is not evenly divisible by the split ratio will receive the same treatment as all other holders for the maximum number of ETNs they hold which is evenly divisible by the split ratio, and we will have the right to compensate holders for their remaining or “partial” ETNs in a commercially reasonable manner determined by us in our sole discretion. Our current intention is to provide holders with a cash payment for their partials on the 17th business day following the announcement date in an amount equal to the appropriate percentage of the closing indicative value of the reverse split-adjusted ETNs on the 14th business day following the announcement date.

In the event of a reverse split, the redemption amount will be adjusted accordingly by the Issuer, in its sole discretion and in a commercially reasonable manner, to take into account the reverse split.

On May 19, 2021, Barclays Bank PLC announced a split of the ETNs in accordance with the procedures described above, which became effective at the open of trading on June 4, 2021.

General Terms of the ETNs

Our ETNs are the “debt securities” issued under the Indenture. Other than “Agreement with Respect to the Exercise of U.K. Bail-in Power,” which applies to only a subset of our ETNs specified in that section, and “Default Amount,” which applies to a series of ETNs only if so specified in the relevant description above, the general terms of the debt securities described in this section apply to all of our ETNs.

Agreement with Respect to the Exercise of U.K. Bail-in Power

References to “debt securities” in this section mean each of the following ETNs:

iPath® Series B S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes (VXX)

iPath® Series B S&P 500 VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM Exchange-Traded Notes (VXZ)

iPath® Series B Carbon Exchange-Traded Notes (GRN)

Notwithstanding any other agreements, arrangements or understandings between Barclays Bank PLC and any holder or beneficial owner of the debt securities, by acquiring the debt securities, each holder and beneficial owner of the debt securities acknowledges, accepts, agrees to be bound by, and consents to the exercise of, any U.K. Bail-in Power (as defined below) by the relevant U.K. resolution authority (as

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

defined below) that may result in (i) the reduction or cancellation of all, or a portion, of the principal amount of, interest on, or any other amounts payable on, the debt securities; (ii) the conversion of all, or a portion, of the principal amount of, interest on, or any other amounts payable on, the debt securities into shares or other securities or other obligations of Barclays Bank PLC or another person (and the issue to, or conferral on, the holder or beneficial owner of the debt securities such shares, securities or obligations); and/or (iii) the amendment or alteration of the maturity of the debt securities, or amendment of the amount of interest or any other amounts due on the debt securities, or the dates on which interest or any other amounts become payable, including by suspending payment for a temporary period; which U.K. Bail-in Power may be exercised by means of a variation of the terms of the debt securities solely to give effect to the exercise by the relevant U.K. resolution authority of such U.K. Bail-in Power. Each holder and beneficial owner of the debt securities further acknowledges and agrees that the rights of the holders or beneficial owners of the debt securities are subject to, and will be varied, if necessary, solely to give effect to, the exercise of any U.K. Bail-in Power by the relevant U.K. resolution authority. For the avoidance of doubt, this consent and acknowledgment is not a waiver of any rights holders or beneficial owners of the debt securities may have at law if and to the extent that any U.K. Bail-in Power is exercised by the relevant U.K. resolution authority in breach of laws applicable in England.

For these purposes, a “U.K. Bail-in Power” is any write-down, conversion, transfer, modification and/or suspension power existing from time to time under any laws, regulations, rules or requirements relating to the resolution of banks, banking group companies, credit institutions and/or investment firms incorporated in the United Kingdom in effect and applicable in the United Kingdom to Barclays Bank PLC or other members of the Group (as defined below), including but not limited to any such laws, regulations, rules or requirements that are implemented, adopted or enacted within the context of any applicable European Union directive or regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council establishing a framework for the recovery and resolution of credit institutions and investment firms and/or within the context of a U.K. resolution regime under the U.K. Banking Act 2009, as the same has been or may be amended from time to time (whether pursuant to the U.K. Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the “Banking Reform Act 2013”), secondary legislation or otherwise, the “Banking Act”), pursuant to which obligations of a bank, banking group company, credit institution or investment firm or any of its affiliates can be reduced, cancelled, amended, transferred and/or converted into shares or other securities or obligations of the obligor or any other person (and a reference to the “relevant U.K. resolution authority” is to any authority with the ability to exercise a U.K. Bail-in Power and the “Group” refers to Barclays PLC (or any successor entity) and its consolidated subsidiaries).

No repayment of the principal amount of the debt securities or payment of interest or any other amounts payable on the debt securities shall become due and payable after the exercise of any U.K. Bail-in Power by the relevant U.K. resolution authority unless such repayment or payment would be permitted to be made by Barclays Bank PLC under the laws and regulations of the United Kingdom and the European Union applicable to Barclays Bank PLC.

Under the terms of the debt securities, the exercise of the U.K. Bail-in Power by the relevant U.K. resolution authority with respect to the debt securities will not be a default or an Event of Default.

If any debt securities provide for the delivery of property, any reference to payment by Barclays Bank PLC under the debt securities will be deemed to include that delivery of property.

For the avoidance of doubt, references to “holder” in this “Agreement with Respect to the Exercise of U.K. Bail-in Power” section include beneficial owners of the debt securities.

Holders of debt securities that acquire such debt securities in the secondary market shall be deemed to acknowledge, agree to be bound by and consent to the same provisions described herein to the same extent as the holders of such debt securities that acquire the debt securities upon their initial issuance, including, without limitation, with respect to the acknowledgment and agreement to be bound by and consent to the terms of the debt securities, including in relation to the U.K. Bail-in Power.

Default Amount

The default amount for a series of ETNs on any day will be an amount, determined by the calculation agent in its sole discretion, equal to the cost of having a qualified financial institution, of the kind and selected as described below, expressly assume all our payment and other obligations with respect to that

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

series of ETNs as of that day and as if no default or acceleration had occurred, or to undertake other obligations providing substantially equivalent economic value to holders with respect to such ETNs. That cost will equal:

•the lowest amount that a qualified financial institution would charge to effect this assumption or undertaking, plus

•the reasonable expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, incurred by the holders of such ETNs in preparing any documentation necessary for this assumption or undertaking.

During the default quotation period for a series of ETNs, which we describe below, the holders of such ETNs and/or we may request a qualified financial institution to provide a quotation of the amount it would charge to effect this assumption or undertaking. If either party obtains a quotation, it must notify the other party in writing of the quotation. The amount referred to in the first bullet point above will equal the lowest—or, if there is only one, the only—quotation obtained, and as to which notice is so given, during the default quotation period. With respect to any quotation, however, the party not obtaining the quotation may object, on reasonable and significant grounds, to the assumption or undertaking by the qualified financial institution providing the quotation and notify the other party in writing of those grounds within two business days after the last day of the default quotation period, in which case that quotation will be disregarded in determining the default amount.

Default Quotation Period

The default quotation period is the period beginning on the day the default amount first becomes due and ending on the third business day after that day, unless

•no quotation of the kind referred to above is obtained, or

•every quotation of that kind obtained is objected to within five business days after the due date as described above.

If either of these two events occurs, the default quotation period will continue until the third business day after the first business day on which prompt notice of a quotation is given as described above. If that quotation is objected to as described above within five business days after that first business day, however, the default quotation period will continue as described in the prior sentence and this sentence.

In any event, if the default quotation period and the subsequent two business day objection period have not ended before the final valuation date, then the default amount will equal the principal amount of the series of ETNs.

Qualified Financial Institutions

For the purpose of determining the default amount at any time, a qualified financial institution must be a financial institution organized under the laws of any jurisdiction in the United States of America or Europe, which at that time has outstanding debt obligations with a stated maturity of one year or less from the date of issue and rated either:

•A-1 or higher by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services or any successor, or any other comparable rating then used by that rating agency, or

•P-1 or higher by Moody’s Investors Service or any successor, or any other comparable rating then used by that rating agency.

Modification and Waiver

We and the Trustee may make certain modifications and amendments to the Indenture applicable to each series of debt securities without the consent of the holders of the debt securities. We may make other modifications and amendments with the consent of the holder(s) of not less than a majority of the debt securities of the series outstanding under the Indenture that are affected by the modification or amendment. However, we may not make any modification or amendment without the consent of the holder of each affected debt security that would:

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

•change the terms of any debt security to change the stated maturity date of its principal amount;

•change the principal amount of, or any premium or rate of interest, with respect to any debt securities;

•reduce the amount of principal on a discount security that would be due and payable upon an acceleration of the maturity date of any series of debt securities;

•change our obligation, or any successor’s, to pay additional amounts, if any;

•change the places at which payments are payable or the currency of payment;

•impair the right to sue for the enforcement of any payment due and payable, to the extent that such right exists;

•reduce the percentage in aggregate principal amount of outstanding debt securities of the series necessary to modify or amend the Indenture or to waive compliance with certain provisions of the Indenture and any past Event of Default;

•change our obligation to maintain an office or agency in the place and for the purposes specified in the Indenture;

•modify the terms and conditions of our obligations in respect of the due and punctual payment of the amounts due and payable on the debt securities in a manner adverse to the holders; or

•modify the foregoing requirements or the provisions of the Indenture relating to the waiver of any past Event of Default or covenants, except as otherwise specified.

Events of Default; Limitations on Suits

Events of Default

Unless provided otherwise, a “Event of Default” with respect to any series of debt securities shall result if:

•we do not pay any principal or interest on any debt securities of that series within 14 days from the due date for payment and the principal or interest has not been duly paid within a further 14 days following written notice from the Trustee or from holders of 25% in principal amount of the debt securities of that series to us requiring the payment to be made. It shall not, however, be an Event of Default if during the 14 days after the notice such sums (“Withheld Amounts”) were not paid in order to comply with a law, regulation or order of any court of competent jurisdiction. Where there is doubt as to the validity or applicability of any such law, regulation or order, it shall not be an Event of Default if we act on the advice given to us during the 14-day period by independent legal advisers approved by the Trustee; or

•we breach any covenant or warranty of the Indenture (other than as stated above with respect to payments when due) and that breach has not been remedied within 21 days of receipt of a written notice from the Trustee certifying that in its opinion the breach is materially prejudicial to the interests of the holders of the debt securities of that series and requiring the breach to be remedied or from holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the debt securities of that series requiring the breach to be remedied; or

•either (i) an English court of competent jurisdiction issues an order which is not successfully appealed within 30 days, or (ii) an effective shareholders’ resolution is validly adopted, for our winding-up (other than under or in connection with a scheme of reconstruction, merger or amalgamation not involving bankruptcy or insolvency).

If an Event of Default (as defined below) occurs and is continuing, the Trustee or the holders of at least 25% in outstanding principal amount of the debt securities of that series may at their discretion declare the debt securities of that series to be due and repayable immediately (and the debt securities of that series shall thereby become due and repayable) at their outstanding principal amount (or at such other repayment amount) together with accrued interest, if any. The Trustee may at its discretion and without further notice institute such proceedings as it may think suitable against us to enforce payment. Subject to

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

the provisions of the Indenture for the indemnification of the Trustee, the holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the outstanding debt securities of any series shall have the right to direct the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding in the name of and on the behalf of the Trustee for any remedy available to the Trustee or exercising any trust or power conferred on the Trustee with respect to the series. However, this direction must not be in conflict with any rule of law or the Indenture, and must not be unjustly prejudicial to the holder(s) of any debt securities of that series not taking part in the direction, as determined by the Trustee. The Trustee may also take any other action, consistent with the direction, that it deems proper.

If lawful, Withheld Amounts or a sum equal to Withheld Amounts shall be placed promptly on interest bearing deposit as described in the Indenture. We will give notice if at any time it is lawful to pay any Withheld Amount to holders of debt securities or holders of coupons or if such payment is possible as soon as any doubt as to the validity or applicability of the law, regulation or order is resolved. The notice will give the date on which the Withheld Amounts and the interest accrued on it will be paid. This date will be the earliest day after the day on which it is decided Withheld Amounts can be paid on which the interest bearing deposit falls due for repayment or may be repaid without penalty. On such date, we shall be bound to pay the Withheld Amounts together with interest accrued on it. For the purposes of this subsection, this date will be the due date for those sums. Our obligations under this paragraph are in lieu of any other remedy against us in respect of Withheld Amounts. Payment will be subject to applicable laws, regulations or court orders. Interest accrued on any Withheld Amounts will be paid net of any taxes required by applicable law to be withheld or deducted and we shall not be obliged to pay any additional amount in respect of any such withholding or deduction.

The holders of a majority of the aggregate principal amount of the outstanding debt securities of any affected series may waive any past Event of Default with respect to the series, except any default in respect of either:

•the payment of principal of, or any premium or interest, on any debt securities; or

•a covenant or provision of the Indenture which cannot be modified or amended without the consent of each holder of debt securities of the series.

Subject to exceptions, the Trustee may, without the consent of the holders, waive or authorize an Event of Default if, in the opinion of the Trustee, such waiver or authorization would not be materially prejudicial to the interests of the holders.

The Trustee will, within 90 days of a default with respect to the debt securities of any series, give to each affected holder of the debt securities of the affected series notice of any default it knows about, unless the default has been cured or waived. However, except in the case of a default in the payment of the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest, if any, on the debt securities, the Trustee will be entitled to withhold notice if a trust committee of responsible officers of the Trustee determine in good faith that withholding of notice is in the interest of the holders.

We are required to furnish to the Trustee annually a statement as to our compliance with all conditions and covenants under the Indenture.

Limitations on Suits

Before a holder may bypass the Trustee and bring its own lawsuit or other formal legal action or take other steps to enforce its rights or protect its interests relating to the debt securities, the following must occur:

•The holder must give the Trustee written notice that an Event of Default has occurred and remains uncured.

•The holders of 25% in principal amount of all outstanding debt securities of the relevant series must make a written request that the Trustee take action because of the default, and the holder must offer reasonable indemnity to the Trustee against the cost and other liabilities of taking that action.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

•The Trustee must not have taken action for 60 days after receipt of the above notice and offer of indemnity, and the Trustee must not have received an inconsistent direction from the majority in principal amount of all outstanding debt securities of the relevant series during that period.

•In the case of our winding-up in England, such legal action or proceeding is in the name and on behalf of the Trustee to the same extent, but no further, as the Trustee would have been entitled to do.

Notwithstanding any contrary provisions, nothing shall impair the right of a holder, absent the holder’s consent, to sue for any payments due but unpaid with respect to the debt securities.

Street name and other indirect holders should consult their banks or brokers for information on how to give notice or direction to or make a request of the Trustee and how to waive any past Event of Default.

Consolidation, Merger and Sale of Assets; Assumption

We may, without the consent of the holders of any of the debt securities, consolidate or amalgamate with, merge into or transfer or lease our assets substantially as an entirety to, any of the persons specified in the Indenture. However, any successor corporation formed by any consolidation, amalgamation or merger, or any transferee or lessee of our assets, must be a bank organized under the laws of the United Kingdom that assumes our obligations on the debt securities and the Indenture, and a number of other conditions must be met.

Subject to applicable law and regulation (including, if and to the extent required by the Capital Regulations at such time, the prior consent of the PRA), any of our wholly owned subsidiaries may assume our obligations under the debt securities of any series without the consent of any holder (the “Substituted Issuer”). We, however, must irrevocably guarantee the obligations of the Substituted Issuer under the debt securities of that series. If we do, all of our direct obligations under the debt securities of the series and the Indenture shall immediately be discharged.

“Capital Regulations” means, at any time, the laws, regulations, requirements, standards, guidelines and policies relating to capital adequacy for credit institutions of either (i) the PRA and/or (ii) any other national or European authority, in each case then in effect in the United Kingdom (or in such other jurisdiction in which the Issuer may be organized or domiciled) and applicable to the Group including, as at the date hereof, CRD IV and related technical standards.

“CRD IV” consists of Directive 2013/36/EU on access to the activity of credit institutions and the prudential supervision of credit institutions and investment firms, as the same may be amended or replaced from time to time and the CRD IV Regulation.

“CRD IV Regulation” means Regulation (EU) No. 575/2013 on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms of the European Parliament and of the Council of June 26, 2013, as the same may be amended or replaced from time to time.

“PRA” means the Prudential Regulation Authority of the United Kingdom or such other governmental authority in the United Kingdom (or if Barclays Bank PLC becomes domiciled in a jurisdiction other than the United Kingdom, such other jurisdiction) having primary responsibility for the prudential supervision of Barclays Bank PLC.

Governing Law

Unless specified otherwise, the debt securities and Indenture will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of New York.

Manner of Payment and Delivery

Any payment on or delivery of a series of ETNs at maturity will be made to accounts designated by holders and approved by us, or at the office of the Trustee in New York City, but only when the ETNs are surrendered to the Trustee at that office. We also may make any payment or delivery in accordance with the applicable procedures of DTC.

The Trustee, Paying Agent and Calculation Agent

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

The Trustee. The Bank of New York Mellon will be the Trustee under the Indenture.

Payment and Paying Agents. We will pay interest to direct holders listed in the Trustee’s records at the close of business on a particular day in advance of each due date for interest, even if the direct holder no longer owns the security on the interest due date. That particular day, usually about one business day in advance of the interest due date, is called the regular record date.

We will pay interest, principal and any other money due on the debt securities at the corporate trust office of the Trustee in New York City. Holders of debt securities must make arrangements to have their payments picked up at or wired from that office. We may also choose to pay interest by mailing checks.

Street name and other indirect holders should consult their banks or brokers for information on how they will receive payments.

We may also arrange for additional payment offices, and may cancel or change these offices, including our use of the Trustee’s corporate trust office. These offices are called paying agents. We may also choose to act as our own paying agent. We must notify the Trustee of changes in the paying agents for any particular series of debt securities.

Calculation Agent. Currently, Barclays Bank PLC serves as the calculation agent for the ETNs. We may change the calculation agent after the original issue date of the ETNs without notice. The calculation agent will, in its sole discretion, make all determinations regarding the value of the ETNs.

Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

Our ETNs should be treated for U.S. federal income tax purposes as prepaid forward contracts that are not debt instruments. Under this treatment, no original issue discount (“OID”) will be accrued on our ETNs. However, the Internal Revenue Service might assert that any of our ETNs should be treated as debt instruments subject to the special tax rules governing contingent payment debt instruments. In that event, U.S. holders of the ETNs would be required to accrue OID over the term of the ETNs based upon the yield at which we would issue a non-contingent fixed-rate debt instrument with other terms and conditions similar to the applicable ETNs.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Document

Barclays Group Securities Dealing Code

Approved by the Board of Barclays PLC

with effect on and from 11 December 2025

Barclays Group Securities Dealing Code

Introduction

The purpose of this Code is to ensure that Group PDMRs and other individuals identified by Barclays do not abuse, and do not place themselves under suspicion of abusing, Inside Information and comply with their obligations under the Market Abuse Regulation.

Part A of this Code contains the Dealing clearance procedures which must be observed by Group Employee Insiders. This means that there will be certain times when such persons cannot Deal in Barclays Securities.

Part B sets out certain additional obligations which only apply to Group PDMRs.

Failure by any person who is subject to this Code to observe and comply with its requirements may result in disciplinary action. Depending on the circumstances, such non-compliance may also constitute a civil and/or criminal offence. Schedule 1 sets out the meaning of capitalised words used in this Code.

The Addendum to this Code applies to Listed Subsidiary PDMRs only and extends the application of Part A and Part B of this Code to Listed Subsidiary PDMRs on the terms set out in the Addendum.

1.    Clearance to Deal

When do I need clearance to Deal?

1.1    You must not Deal for yourself or for anyone else, directly or indirectly, in Barclays Securities without obtaining clearance from Barclays (as specified in paragraph 1.6) in advance.

1.2    You must not enter into, amend or cancel a Trading Plan or an Investment Programme under which Barclays Securities may be purchased or sold unless clearance has been given to do so.

1.3    You must receive clearance to Deal before electing to participate in, amending, or ceasing to participate in, any scrip dividend or dividend re-investment plan.

1.4    If you act as the trustee of a trust, you should speak to the Group Company Secretary about your obligations in respect of any Dealing in Barclays Securities carried out by the trustee(s) of that trust.

1.5    You should seek further guidance from the Group Company Secretary before transacting in:

(A)    units or shares in a collective investment undertaking (e.g. a UCITS or an Alternative Investment Fund) which holds, or might hold, Barclays Securities; or

(B)    financial instruments which provide exposure to a portfolio of assets which has, or may have, an exposure to Barclays Securities.

This is the case even if you do not intend to transact in Barclays Securities by making the relevant investment.

How do I seek clearance to deal?

1.6    Applications for clearance to Deal must be made in writing and submitted to the Group Company Secretary where application is being made by a non-executive Director or to BCS through the Barclays Employee Insiders portal where application is being made by employees.

1.7    You must not submit an application for clearance to Deal if you are in possession of Inside Information. If you become aware that you are or may be in possession of Inside Information after you submit an application, you must inform the Group Company Secretary or BCS, as applicable, as soon as possible and you must refrain from Dealing (even if you have been given clearance).

1.8    You will receive a written response to your application from the Group Company Secretary or through the Barclays Employee Insiders portal normally within 48 hours of the request being made. Barclays will not normally give you reasons if you are refused permission to Deal. You must keep any refusal confidential and not discuss it with any other person.

1.9    If you are given clearance, you must use best endeavours to Deal as soon as possible after receiving clearance and in any event within two business days of receiving clearance. The Group Company Secretary or BCS (through the Barclays Employee Insiders portal) must be notified as soon as possible and by no later than two business days of any such approved Dealing occurring.

1.10    Clearance to Deal may be given subject to conditions. Where this is the case, you must observe those conditions when Dealing.

1.11    You will not ordinarily be given clearance to Deal on considerations of a short-term nature. A sale of Barclays Securities which were acquired less than a year previously will normally be considered to be a Dealing of a short term nature. Considerations of a short-term nature shall not include Barclays Securities which were acquired by you as a result of the vesting of a Barclays Securities award/exercise of an option granted under a Barclays Share Plan.

1.12    Different clearance procedures will apply where Dealing is being carried out by Barclays in relation to Barclays Share Plans. You will be notified separately of any arrangements for clearance if this applies to you.

What other requirements do I need to consider?

1.13    In addition to this Code, Barclays operates a Personal Investments Policy and a Personal Investments Standard. These will apply alongside this Code and they must therefore also be considered by you when contemplating any Dealing in Barclays Securities.

What happens when I am no longer employed by Barclays?

1.14    The provisions of this Code do not apply following termination of a contract of employment of a Barclays employee to whom this Code applies. Such employees, as far as required, will be made aware of any on-going Dealing obligations they have in any exit documentation, such as a settlement agreement.

2.    Circumstances for refusal

You will not ordinarily be given clearance to Deal in Barclays Securities during any period when there exists any matter which constitutes Inside Information or during a Closed Period.

3.    Further guidance

If you are uncertain as to whether or not a particular transaction requires clearance, you must obtain guidance from the Group Company Secretary before carrying out that transaction.

4.    Notification of transactions

4.1    You must notify Barclays (through the Group Company Secretary, for non-executive Directors, or through BCS in all other cases) and the FCA in writing of every Notifiable Transaction in Barclays Securities conducted for your account as follows:

(A)    Notifications to the FCA must be made within three working days of the transaction date. Barclays will notify the FCA on your behalf unless you specifically request to the contrary, whereupon it will be your personal responsibility to make the required notifications to the FCA.

(B)    In order to make the notification on your behalf within the time limit specified in (A) above, notifications to Barclays must be received by the Group Company Secretary or BCS, as applicable, in writing on the prescribed form (available from BCS) as soon as practicable and in any event within one working day of the transaction date. You should ensure that your investment managers (whether discretionary or not) notify you of any Notifiable Transactions conducted on your behalf promptly so as to allow you to notify Barclays within this time frame.

(C)    If you have specifically requested to make your own notifications to the FCA, rather than Barclays doing so on your behalf, please send any such notification (once made to the FCA) to the Group Company Secretary or BCS, as applicable, so that Barclays can comply with its own announcement obligations.

4.2    If you are uncertain as to whether or not a particular transaction is a Notifiable Transaction, you must obtain guidance from the Group Company Secretary.

4.3    Barclays is required to announce every Notifiable Transaction via the London Stock Exchange’s Regulatory News Service within two working days of being notified of the relevant transaction.

5.    Persons Closely Associated with Group PDMRs (‘PCA’) and investment managers

5.1    You must provide BCS with a list of your PCAs and notify BCS of any changes that need to be made to that list.

5.2    You should instruct your PCAs (whether directly or through an investment manager) and your investment managers (whether or not discretionary) not to Deal in Barclays Securities during Closed Periods and not to Deal on considerations of a short-term nature. A sale of Barclays Securities which were acquired less than a year previously will normally be considered to be a Dealing of a short-term nature. Considerations of a short-term nature shall not include Barclays Securities (a) transferred to your PCA by you and which have already been held by you for a minimum of a year; or (b) were acquired by you as a result of the vesting of a Barclays Securities award/exercise of an option granted under a Barclays Share Plan.

5.3    Your PCAs are also required to notify Barclays (through BCS) and the FCA in writing, within the time frames given in paragraph 4, of every Notifiable Transaction conducted for their account. You should inform your PCAs in writing of this requirement and keep a copy. The Group Company Secretary will provide you with a letter that you can use to do this. Barclays will notify the FCA on behalf of your PCA unless you specifically request to the contrary, whereupon it will be your PCA’s personal responsibility to make the required notifications to the FCA and notify Barclays as described in paragraph 4.1(C) above.

Schedule 1

Defined terms

‘Addendum’ means the Addendum to the Code.

'Barclays' or 'Barclays Group' means Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries.

'Barclays Insider' means any individual (not being a Group PDMR) who has been told by BCS that the clearance procedures in Part A of this Code apply to him or her.

'Barclays Securities' means any Barclays publicly traded or quoted shares or debt instruments, and any derivatives or other financial instruments linked to any of them, including phantom options and/or awards. This would include shares, depositary receipts, options/awards and bonds.

'Barclays Share Plans' means Barclays Group Share Value Plan, Barclays Long Term Incentive Plan, Sharepurchase, Sharesave and any other employee share plan or share-based remuneration introduced or operated by Barclays from time to time.

'BCS' means Barclays Corporate Secretariat.

'Closed Period' means any of the following:

(A)    the longer of (1) the period each year from and including 1 January up to the publication of the Barclays PLC annual results; and (2) the 30 calendar day period before such publication of the Barclays PLC annual results;

(B)    the longer of (1) the period each year from and including 1 April up to the release of the Barclays PLC Q1 results; and (2) the 30 calendar day period before such release;

(C)    the longer of (1) the period each year from and including 1 July up to the release of the Barclays PLC half-yearly financial report; and (2) the 30 calendar day period before such release; and

(D)    the longer of (1) the period each year from and including 1 October up to the release of the Barclays PLC Q3 results; and (2) the 30 calendar day period before such release.

'Code' means the Barclays Group Securities Dealing Code, which regulates Dealings in Barclays Securities by Group Employee Insiders.

'Dealing' (together with corresponding terms such as 'Deal' and 'Deals') means any type of transaction in Barclays Securities, including purchases, sales, the grant or exercise of options or vesting of awards, the receipt of Barclays Securities under Barclays Share Plans, using Barclays Securities as security for a loan or other obligation and entering into, amending or terminating any agreement in relation to Barclays Securities (e.g. a Trading Plan or scrip dividend or dividend re-investment plan).

‘EU MAR’ means the EU Market Abuse Regulation (Regulation (EU) No. 596/2014).

'FCA' means the UK Financial Conduct Authority or any successor organisation from time to time.

'Group Employee Insider' means:

(A)    a Group PDMR; or

(B)    a Barclays Insider.

'Group PDMR' means either:

(A)    a director of Barclays PLC; or

(B)    a member of the Barclays Group Executive Committee.

'Inside Information' means information of a precise nature, which has not been made public, relating, directly or indirectly, to Barclays or Barclays Securities, and which, if it were made public, would be likely to have a non-trivial effect on the price of Barclays Securities and which an investor would be likely to use as part of the basis of his or her investment decision.

'Investment Programme' means a share acquisition scheme relating only to the Barclays shares under which: (A) shares are purchased by an individual who is subject to this Code pursuant to a regular standing order or direct debit or by regular deduction from the person's salary or director's fees; or (B) shares are acquired by that individual by way of a standing election to re-invest dividends or other distributions received; or (C) shares are acquired as part payment of that individual’s remuneration or director's fees.

‘Listed Subsidiary PDMR’ has the meaning given in the Addendum.

'Market Abuse Regulation' means UK MAR and/or EU MAR (as the case may be).

'Notifiable Transaction' means any transaction relating to Barclays Securities conducted for the account of a PDMR or PCA, whether the transaction was conducted by the PDMR or PCA or on his or her behalf by a third party and regardless of whether or not the PDMR or PCA had control over the transaction. This captures every transaction or event which changes a PDMR's or PCA's holding of Barclays Securities, even if the transaction does not require clearance under this Code. It also includes gifts of Barclays Securities, the grant of options or Barclays Securities awards, the exercise of options or vesting of Barclays Securities awards and transactions carried out by investment managers or other third parties on behalf of a PDMR, including where discretion is exercised by such investment managers or third parties and including under Trading Plans or Investment Programmes1.

'PCA' means a person closely associated with a PDMR, being:

(A)    the spouse or civil partner of a PDMR; or

(B)    a PDMR's child or stepchild under the age of 18 years who is unmarried and does not have a civil partner; or

(C)    a relative who has shared the same household as the PDMR for at least one year on the date of the relevant Dealing; or

(D)    a legal person, trust or partnership, the managerial responsibilities of which are discharged by a PDMR (or by a PCA referred to in paragraphs (A), (B), or (C) of this definition), which is directly or indirectly controlled by such a person, which is set up for the benefit of such a person or which has economic interests which are substantially equivalent to those of such a person.

‘PDMR’ means a Group PDMR or, for the purposes of the Addendum, a Listed Subsidiary PDMR.

'Sharepurchase' means Barclays Group Share Incentive Plan, any other plan designed to meet the requirements of Schedule 2 to the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 introduced or operated by Barclays from time to time or any global equivalent, including Barclays Global Sharepurchase Plan.

'Sharesave' means Barclays Group SAYE Share Option Scheme, any other plan designed to meet the requirements of Schedule 3 to the Income Tax (Earnings and Pensions) Act 2003 introduced or operated by Barclays from time to time or any global equivalent, including Barclays Group Irish SAYE Share Option Scheme.

'Trading Plan' means a written plan entered into by an individual who is subject to this Code and an independent third party that sets out a strategy for the acquisition and/or disposal of Barclays Securities by that individual, and:

(A)    specifies the amount of Barclays Securities to be dealt in and the price at which and the date on which the Barclays Securities are to be dealt in; or

(B)    gives discretion to that independent third party to make trading decisions about the amount of Barclays Securities to be dealt in and the price at which and the date on which the Barclays Securities are to be dealt in; or

1 Note: Barclays requires all transactions relating to Barclays Securities conducted for the account of a PDMR or PCA to be notified in accordance with Part B and does not apply the de minimis thresholds set out in UK MAR and EU MAR (EUR 5,000 and EUR 20,000 respectively, unless amended by the FCA or equivalent EU regulator in accordance with the discretion given to regulators under UK MAR and EU MAR).

(C)    includes a method for determining the amount of Barclays Securities to be dealt in and the price at which and the date on which the Barclays Securities are to be dealt in.

‘UK MAR’ means the EU Market Abuse Regulation (Regulation (EU) No. 596/2014) as it forms part of domestic law by virtue of the European Union (Withdrawal) Act 2018, as amended.

'Working Day' means a day other than (i) Saturday or Sunday; (ii) Christmas Day or Good Friday; or (iii) a day which is a bank holiday in England and Wales under the Banking and Financial Dealings Act 1971.

ADDENDUM – LISTED SUBSIDIARY PDMRS

This Addendum applies to Listed Subsidiary PDMRs and has been prepared to regulate Dealings in Listed Subsidiary Securities (on account of the fact that each Listed Subsidiary has issued listed debt securities which are within the scope of the Market Abuse Regulation).

1.The following additional definitions apply in this Addendum:

‘Listed Subsidiary’ means each of Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Bank UK PLC and Barclays Bank Ireland PLC (and any other subsidiary of Barclays PLC which has issued securities which are within the scope of the Market Abuse Regulation).

‘Listed Subsidiary PDMR’ means, in relation to a Listed Subsidiary:

(a)a director;

(b)the Chief Executive Officer; or

(c)the Chief Finance Officer,

of that Listed Subsidiary.

‘Listed Subsidiary Securities’ means, in relation to a Listed Subsidiary, any publicly traded or quoted shares or debt instruments of that Listed Subsidiary, and any derivatives or other financial instruments linked to any of them, including phantom options and/or awards. This would include shares, depositary receipts, options/awards and bonds.

‘Relevant Listed Subsidiary Securities’ means, in relation to a Listed Subsidiary PDMR, the Listed Subsidiary Securities of the Listed Subsidiary in respect of which he or she acts as a Listed Subsidiary PDMR.

2.Save as otherwise provided in (a) or (b) below, all provisions of the Code shall apply to Listed Company Subsidiary PDMRs as if references to Group PDMRs were references to Listed Subsidiary PDMRs and references to Barclays Securities were references to Relevant Listed Subsidiary Securities.

(a)You must not Deal for yourself or for anyone else, directly or indirectly, in Relevant Listed Subsidiary Securities without obtaining clearance from Barclays in advance as set out in Part A of the Code. You should seek that clearance from the Company Secretary of the relevant Listed Subsidiary.

(b)You must follow the notification procedures set out in Part B of the Code in relation to Notifiable Transactions conducted for your account in relation to Relevant Listed Securities. Depending on which listed securities the relevant Listed Subsidiary has outstanding at the time, an EU regulator may need to be notified instead of, or in addition to, the FCA. Barclays will make the relevant regulatory notification(s) on your behalf unless you or your PCA specifically request to the contrary, whereupon it will be your (or their) personal responsibility to make the required notifications2.

2 The position as at the date of adoption of this Addendum, as set out in Article 19(2) of UK MAR and Article 19(2) of EU MAR, is that (i) a Notifiable Transaction in BBPLC debt securities would need to be notified to both the FCA, and the Central Bank of Ireland (CBI), as BBPLC has both UK and EU listed debt securities outstanding; (ii) a Notifiable Transaction in BBUKPLC debt securities would need to be notified to the FCA, as BBUKPLC has UK listed debt securities outstanding; and (iii) a Notifiable Transaction in BBIPLC debt securities would need to be notified to the CBI, as BBIPLC has EU listed debt securities outstanding. This analysis should be re-confirmed at the time of any Notifiable Transaction and legal advice sought as to the specific notification requirements. Further, legal advice should be sought as to how such Notifiable Transaction must be announced to the market. As at the date of adoption of this Addendum, regulated information in the UK must be announced via RNS as a regulatory information service (RIS) and filed with the FCA as the officially appointed mechanism (OAM). In Ireland, regulated information must be filed with the CBI, whilst also being filed with Euronext Dublin as the OAM and RIS.

Document

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS FILED PURSUANT TO 17 CFR 240. 13(A) - 14(A)

I, C.S. Venkatakrishnan, certify that:

1.I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Barclays Bank PLC;

2.Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3.Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4.The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

(a)Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b)Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

(c)Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(d)Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5.The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

(a)All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b)Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: February 10, 2026

/s/ C.S. Venkatakrishnan

C.S. Venkatakrishnan

Title: Chief Executive Officer

Barclays Bank PLC

I, Anna Cross, certify that:

1.I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of Barclays Bank PLC;

2.Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3.Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4.The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

(a)Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

(b)Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

(c)Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

(d)Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

5.The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

(a)All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

(b)Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: February 10, 2026

/s/ Anna Cross

Anna Cross

Title: Interim Chief Financial Officer

Barclays Bank PLC

2

Document

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATIONS FILED PURSUANT TO 17 CFR 240. 13(A) AND 18 U.S.C

SECTION 906 CERTIFICATION

Pursuant to section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (subsections (a) and (b) of section 1350, chapter 63 of title 18, United States Code), each undersigned officer of Barclays Bank PLC, a public limited company incorporated under the laws of England and Wales (“Barclays”), hereby certifies, to such officer’s knowledge, that:

The Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended December 31, 2025 (the “Report”) of Barclays fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of Barclays.

Date: February 10, 2026

/s/ C.S. Venkatakrishnan
C.S. Venkatakrishnan
Title: Chief Executive Officer
Barclays Bank PLC

Date: February 10, 2026

/s/ Anna Cross
Anna Cross
Title: Interim Chief Financial Officer
Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Document

Exhibit 15.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statement (File Number: 333-287303) on Form F-3 and in the registration statements (File Numbers: 333-149302, 333-149301, 333-112797 and 333-112796) on Form S-8 of Barclays Bank PLC of our report dated February 9, 2026, with respect to the consolidated financial statements of Barclays Bank PLC, included in the annual report on Form 20-F of Barclays Bank PLC, for the year ended December 31, 2025.

/s/ KPMG LLP

KPMG LLP

London, United Kingdom

February 10, 2026

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F

Document

Capitalisation and Indebtedness

Exhibit 99.1

The following table sets out the Barclays Bank Group’s capitalisation, indebtedness and contingent liabilities on a consolidated basis, in accordance with IFRS, as at 31 December 2025.

	2025
As at 31 December	(000)
Share Capital of Barclays Bank PLC
Ordinary shares - issued and fully paid shared of £1 each	2,342,559
Preference shares - issued and fully paid shares of U.S.$100 each	58
	£m
Group equity
Called up share capital and share premium	2,346
Other equity instruments	10,446
Other reserves	(179)
Retained earnings	49,700
Total equity	62,313
Group indebtedness
Subordinated liabilities	45,239
Subordinated liabilities designated at fair value	587
Debt securities in issue at amortised cost	57,229
Debt securities in issue designated at fair value	85,086
Total indebtedness	188,141
Total capitalisation and indebtedness	250,454
Group contingent liabilities and commitments
Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security	16,890
Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements	9,743
Total contingent liabilities	26,633
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions	1,103
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments	354,285
Total commitments	355,388

As at 31 December 2025, £17.2bn of our indebtedness was secured.

Barclays Bank PLC 2025 Annual Report on Form 20-F